Ed 03 20211230 180706

STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
t3t
77.1) ENGINEERS SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
fell5reg
(7
Oge.il INDIA LIMITED HYDROGEN SERVICE VALVES 6-44-0052-A4 Rev.7

IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 2 of 2
3.5 Carbon steel shall be normalised and alloy steels shall be normalised & tempered.
3.6 Dye Penetrant test of welds shall be in accordance with ASTM B165 Procedure B-2.
Interpretation as per Appendix-8 of ASME-VIII Div. 1.
3.7 The tensile stress for AS shall be less than 100,000 psi.
3.8 Charpy V-notch impact testing is to be done for valve material (average 20 ft-lb for set of
3 [minimum value 15 ft-lb] at 30°F).
3.9 For radiography and acceptance criteria for valve castings, refer Cl. 4.2.
4.0 SS VALVES
4.1 Valve casting shall be in solution heat treated and pickled condition.
4.2 Critical body and bonnet casing section typically defined by ASME B 16.34 shall be
radiographed and shall meet ASTM E446 (upto 2" thick) Category A, B & CA Level 2,
Category CB, OC & CD Level 3, Category D, B & F Level 0. For wall thickness 2" to
4.5" comparable plates of ASTM E186 shall be used. ASTM E94 and ASTM E142 shall
be used for recommended practice & controlling quality of radiography as guide. The
entire surface of all castings shall be dye-penetrant inspected after pickling.
4.3 Welds shall be 100% radiographed and evaluated in accordance with paragraph 344.5 of
ASME B31.3 with a minimum casting quality factor of 0.95. Dye Penetration test shall
be as per ASTM E165 Procedure B-2, Interpretation as per Appendix-8 of ASME-VIII
Div.l.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — An rights reserved
Page 1201 of 1823

TECHNICAL NOTES FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
0 Zit'? ENGINEERS FLANGES, SPECTACLE BLINDS
Iftr Meg
1.112?)eiVasTU )
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India UnOmtak,o9) AND DRIP RINGS
6-44-0053 Rev. 7
Page 1 of 8
V171, 44-acno co(%- la

r5,1-1 rk4 * kekl dChlfIChel rdLLIFUNT
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR FLANGES,

SPECTACLE BLINDS AND DRIP RINGS
REVISED & ISSUED AS STD V1:1

:K...-' SH
7 16 01 20
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STD SH AK RN SC
6 25 09 14 UK
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STD SH AK RN SC
5 31 12 13 UK
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STD RN SC DM VC
4 04 07 08 SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STD RN BRB NS MI
3 01 11 00 SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
Rev. Prepared Checked
Date Purpose Convenor Chairman
No by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 1202 of 1823

ei ENGINEERS
eg INDIA LIMITED FLANGES, SPECTACLE BLINDS 6-44-0053 Rev. 7
511g-aolver
r Eif5i-
evinpr
tR1010,
411 Gort of Ind UndeftakM1 AND DRIP RINGS Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
AARH Arithmetic Average Roughness Height

ANSI American National Standards Institute
API American Petroleum Institute
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing & Materials
AWWA American Water Works Association
BHN Brinell Hardness Number
HIC Hydrogen Induced Cracking
IBR Indian Boiler Regulations
IGC Inter Granular Corrosion
IS Indian Standard
MR Material Requisition
MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society
NACE MR National Association of Corrosion Engineers : Material Requirement
PMI Positive Material Identification
Piping Standards Committee
Convenor : Mr. M. Ismaeel
Members : Mr. Mr. Amrendra Kumar

Mr. G. Balaji
Mr. Udayan Chakravarty
Mr. K.J. Harinarayanan (S&ME)
Mr. S. Ghoshal (Process-2)
Mr. S.C. Maity (Structural)
Mr. G.K. Iyer (Projects)
Mr. P.K. Rai (Construction)
Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0
Page 1203 of 1823

ENGINEERS
Ogerff Oft INDIA LIMITED FLANGES, SPECTACLE BLINDS 6-44-0053 Rev. 7
Govt of Ma Undertak.n9)
(A
AND DRIP RINGS Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 IBR REQUIREMENTS 6
3.0 ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS 6
4.0 MARKING AND DESPATCH 7
5.0 REFERENCES 7
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL —All rights reserved
Page 1204 of 1823

401 elei ENGINEERS
51gar eu
E1151-
INDIA LIMITED FLANGES, SPECTACLE BLINDS 6-44-0053 Rev. 7
,m7Ter
ereas??4,13,42F71) IA Govt of InOta Undonak,o91 AND DRIP RINGS Page 4 of 8
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 All items, their dimensions, tolerances, chemical composition, physical properties, heat
treatment and testing etc. shall conform to the latest codes and standards specified in the
requisition. Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations shall be
permitted. Post Order Concession/Deviation as mentioned in Cl. 5.17 of Specification for
Quality Management System Requirements from Bidders (6-78-0001) is not applicable.
1.2 Testing
1.2.1 Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the relevant material
specifications. Test reports shall also be furnished for any supplementary tests as specified in
the requisition & Clauses 1.11, 1.12 & 1.15.
1.2.2 Material test certificates (physical property, chemical composition & heat treatment report)
shall also be furnished for the flanges supplied.
1.2.3 Positive Material Identification (PMI) shall be performed as per the scope and procedures as
defined in the 'Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at Supplier's Works'
(No. 6-81-0001).
1.2.4 Refer to specification no. 6-81-0006 for Inspection and Test plans for flanges, spectacle blinds
& drip rings.
1.3 Ends of weld neck flanges shall be beveled to suit the schedule / thickness of matching pipe,
as specified in the requisition.
1.4 Bevel end details for welding neck flanges shall be as per ASME B16.25. Contour of bevel
end shall be as follows:
Material Wall Thickness Weld Contour
Carbon Steel (Except Upto 22 mm Figure 2 Type A

Low Temp. Carbon Steel)
> 22 mm Figure 3 Type A
Alloy Steel, Upto 10 mm Figure 4

Stainless Steel &
Low Temp. Carbon Steel
> 10 mm & Upto 25 mm Figure 5 Type A
1.5 Bore of socket weld flanges & reducing blind flanges shall suit the outside diameter and
schedule / thickness of matching pipe.
1.6 Bore of slip on flanges shall suit the outside diameter of matching pipe.
1.7 Flange face finish shall be normally specified in the requisition as serrated finish, 125 AARH
etc. The interpretation for range of face finish shall be as follows:
Stock Finish . 1000 µ in AARH max.
Serrated Finish/125 AARH Serrations with 125 to 250µin AARH
63 AARH 32 TO 63 µ in AARH
Page 1205 of 1823

ENGINEERS
$1g-ar fEtiai
eg INDIA LIMITED FLANGES, SPECTACLE BLINDS 6-44-0053 Rev. 7
Mk', r 3%.) IA Govt of India Undertaiong)
1.8 Galvanized flanges shall be coated with zinc by hot dip process conforming to IS 4736 /
ASTM A153.
1.9 Ends of screwed flanges unless otherwise specified shall have taper threads as per
ASME/ANSI B1.20.1.
1.10 For ring joint flanges, blinds and spacers the hardness shall be as follows:
Flange Material Min. Hardness of Groove (BHN)

Carbon Steel 140
1% Cr to 5%, 9% Cr 150
Type 304, 316, 321, 347 160
Type 304L, 316L 150
1.11 For ring joint flanges, blinds and spacers, the hardness shall be recorded in the test report.
1.12 NACE/HIC Requirements
1.12.1 Flanges, blinds, drip rings under "NACE" category and those designated as "HIC1" shall meet
the requirements given in NACE MR-0103 unless otherwise specified.
1.12.2 Flanges, blinds, drip rings made from plates and designated as "HIC1" shall meet the HIC
requirements of EIL Specification 6-79-0013 unless otherwise specified.
1.13 All austenitic stainless steel flanges shall be supplied in solution annealed condition.
1.14 I.G.C. Test for Stainless Steels:
1.14.1 For all austenitic stainless steel flanges, blinds, drip rings & Fig.8 flanges intergranular
corrosion test shall have to be conducted as per following:
ASTM A262 Practice `B' with acceptance criteria of "60 mils/year (max.)".
OR
ASTM A262 Practice E : The bent specimen shall be examined under 20X magnification. The
acceptance criteria is that there will be no crack or fissure in the bent specimen. The bent
specimen shall also be subjected to metallographic examination at 250X magnification to
ensure no crack or fissure. The photograph of the bent specimen along with comments shall be
submitted for review.
1.14.2 When specifically asked for in requisition for high temperature application of some grades of
austenitic stainless steel (like SS309, 310, 316, 316H etc.) ASTM A262 Practice 'C' with
acceptance criteria of "15 mils/year" shall have to be conducted.
1.14.3 For the IGC test as described in 1.14.1 & 1.14.2 two sets of samples shall be drawn from each
solution treatment lot; one set corresponding to highest carbon content and the other
corresponding to the highest rating / thickness.
1.15 All types of 321 or 347 stainless steel flanges shall be in a stabilized heat treated condition.
Stabilizing heat treatment shall be carried out subsequent to the normal solution annealing.
Soaking temperature and holding time for stabilizing heat treatment shall be 900 C and 4
hours respectively.
Page 1206 of 1823

ENGINEERS
IgZ11006 INDIA LIMITED FLANGES, SPECTACLE BLINDS 6-44-0053 Rev. 7
eVer3re0030.4) (A G0A of Ind Undetaking)
1.16 For dual grades of SS where specified, chemical composition and mechanical properties of
both grades specified shall be ensured.
1.17 AWWA C207 flanges shall be ring type.
1.18 Dimensions for handle projection for Spacers & Blinds shall be as specified in EIL Std. 7-44-
0166.
1.19 Where ever two sizes have been specified in the MR for flanges, it shall be considered a
reducing flange.
1.20 All 1Cr-1/4Mo and 11/4Cr-V2Mo flanges shall be normalised and tempered.
1.21 Ring Joint Fig-8 Flanges, Spacers & Blinds shall be female type only.
1.22 The handle for spacers & blinds for classes 900# & above shall be designed by the vendor.
The handle may be integral or attached to the line blank / spacer by welding. In case of
attachment by welding heat treatment & welding shall be in accordance with B31.3.
1.23 For Hydrogen service following special requirements shall also be met:
a. All carbon steel flanges having wall thickness 9.53 mm and above shall be normalised.
The normalising heat treatment shall be a separate heat treatment operation and not a part
of the hot forming operation.
b. All alloy steel (Cr-Mo) flanges shall be normalised and tempered. The normalising and
tempering shall be a separate heat treatment operation and not a part of the hot forming
operation.
c. For all carbon steels and alloy steels with wall thickness over 20mm, Charpy-V Notch
impact testing shall be carried out in accordance with paragraph UG-84 of ASME Section
VIII, Div-1 per heat of material and per heat treating batch. Impact test specimen shall be
in accordance with ASTM A370. Impact energies at 0 C shall average greater than 27J (20
ft-lb) per set of 3 specimens, with a minimum of 20J (15ft-lb).
2.0 IBR REQUIREMENTS
2.1 IBR Documentation
2.1.1 Flanges coming under the purview of IBR (Indian Boiler Regulations) shall be accompanied
with IBR Certificate original in Form III G duly approved and countersigned by IBR
authority/ local authority empowered by Central Boiler Board of India. Photocopy of original
certificate duly attested by the local boiler inspector where the supplier is located is the
minimum requirement for acceptance.
2.2 For carbon steel pipes under IBR the chemical composition shall conform to the following:
Carbon (max) 0.25%
Others (S, P, Mn) As prescribed in IBR.
The chemical composition as indicated in this clause is not applicable for pipes other than IBR
services.
Page 1207 of 1823

101 --1 ENGINEERS
$1?-ar fet5reg INDIA LIMITED FLANGES, SPECTACLE BLINDS 6-44-0053 Rev. 7
IOWTr riroxeflf1JOOM IA Govt of India UndertaloN1 AND DRIP RINGS Page 7 of 8
3.0 ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS
3.1 Blind Flanges and Spacers & Blinds if specified as plate materials are acceptable in forging
materials also in the corresponding material grades.
3.2 Flanges/Spectacle Blinds/Drip rings of Grades SS317 of corresponding material are

acceptable in place of Grades SS316 or SS316(2.5Mo min.).
3.3 Flanges/Spectacle Blinds/Drip rings of Grades SS317L of corresponding material are

acceptable in place of Grades SS316L or SS316L(2.5Mo min.).
4.0 MARKING AND DESPATCH
4.1 All items shall be legibly and conspicuously stamped in accordance with the requirements of
applicable ASME, API and MSS Standards. In addition, EIL item code, purchase order
number & special conditions like "IBR", "CRYO", "NACE" "H2" etc. shall also be stamped.
4.2 All items coming under the purview of "IBR", "CRYO" , "NACE" & "H2"(hydrogen) shall
be painted with one stripe of colour red, light purple brown, canary yellow & white
respectively for easy identification. Width of stripe shall be 25mm and it shall be painted
longitudinally across the complete thickness of flange other than hub.
4.3 Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metal salts such as zinc, lead
or copper which cause corrosive attack on heating.
4.4 All items shall be dry, clean and free from moisture, dirt and loose foreign materials of any
kind.
4.5 All items shall be protected from rust, corrosion and mechanical damage during
transportation, shipment and storage.
4.6 Rust preventive on machined surfaces to be welded shall be easily removable with a
petroleum solvent and the same shall not be harmful to welding.
4.7 Each end of flange shall be protected with the following materials:
Flange face Wood, metal or plastic cover

Bevelled end Wood, metal or plastic cover
Threaded end Plastic plug
Socket welding end Plastic cover or plug
4.8 Each size of flanges, blinds, etc. shall be supplied in separate packagings marked with the
purchase order number, item code number, material specification, size and rating.
5.0 REFERENCES
6-81-0001 Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at Supplier's

Works.
6-81-0006 Inspection & test plan for flanges, spectacle blinds & drip rings
6-79-0013 Material requirements for carbon steel components used in sour

service for petroleum refinery environments
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL—All rights reserved
Page 1208 of 1823

lot ra ENGINEERS
0?ell iiirRegVir INDIA LIMITED FLANGES, SPECTACLE BLINDS 6-44-0053 Rev. 7
1011001012000 MAMBA/
undettakmg)
IA Gout 01 MUM
7-44-0162 Standard for Spacers & Blinds 26" (150CL, 300CL & 600CL FF)
7-44-0164 Standard for Spacers & Blinds 26" (For AWWA Flanges)
7-44-0166 Dimensions for Handle projection for Spacers & Blinds Y2"-24"
Page 1209 of 1823

TECHNICAL NOTES FOR BUTT STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
WELDED, SOCKET WELDED 6-44-0054 Rev. 7
INDIA LIMITED
ligar atg ENGINEERS
laivOrerrasrennJWA) (A Govt of Indo Undeftak.9) AND SCREWED FITTINGS Page 1 of 9
fc5ftril * ro d al iii chi re.u4 ru NT
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR BUTT

WELDED, SOCKET WELDED AND
SCREWED FITTINGS
7 20 01 20 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPECN Pt'AjV \M.)

VY
I SH MI RT
6 25 09.14 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPECN SH AK RN ATD SC
5 31 12 13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPECN UK SH AK RN SC
4 04 07 08 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPECN

RN SC DM VC
3 15/03/00 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPECN RN BRB NS AS
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 1210 of 1823

TECH. NOTES FOR BUTT STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
0eJ f ENGINEERS
Ogar2154- au
(MIE.,292M12 4,13q0.1)
INDIA LIMITED
A Govt of 'mita Undatak.g)
WELDED, SOCKET WELDED
AND SCREWED FITTINGS
6-44-0054 Rev. 7
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
AARH Arithmetic AVerage Roughness Height

CS Carbon Steel
DP Dye Penetrant
HAZ Heat Affected Zone
IGC Inter Granular Corrosion
IS Indian Standard
LT Low Temperature
MP Magnetic Particle
MSS Manufacturer's Standardisation Society
NACE MR National Association of Corrosion Engineers : Material Requirement
NB Nominal Bore
PO Purchase Order
PR Purchase Requisition
SMYS Specified Minimum Yield Strength
SS Stainless Steel

Mr. G. Balaji
Page 1211 of 1823

..1 ENGINEERS
Ogar1.11.2i,
El151- eg INDIA umiTED WELDED, SOCKET WELDED 6-44-0054 Rev. 7
MEW 0,13,111.1)
'A G" of Ind4 Und"") AND SCREWED FITTINGS Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 IBR REQUIREMENTS 8
4.0 MARKING AND DESPATCH 9
5.0 REFERENCES 9
Page 1212 of 1823

afReit.-7 0
= ENGINEERS
IgafEiWeS INDIA LIMITED WELDED, SOCKET WELDED 6-44-0054 Rev. 7
aivei (A Govt of India (Jndertakong)
AND SCREWED FITTINGS Page 4 of 9
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Chemical composition, physical properties, tests, dimensions and tolerances, heat treatment and
marking shall conform to the applicable latest codes / standards / specifications as specified in
the material requisition (MR). Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR stipulations and no
deviations shall be permitted. Post Order Concession/Deviation as mentioned in Cl. 5.17 of
Specification for Quality Management System Requirements from Bidders (6-78-0001) is not
applicable.
1.2 Testing
1.2.1 Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the material specifications. Test
reports shall also be furnished for any supplementary tests as specified in the MR & Clauses
1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 1.10 & 1.11. Material test certificates (physical properties, chemical composition
& heat treatment report) shall also be furnished for fittings supplied.
1.2.2 Positive Material Identification (PMI) shall be performed as per scope and procedures defined
in the Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at Supplier's Works (6-81-0001).
1.2.3 Refer to specification no.6-81-0005 for Inspection and Test plan for forged, seamless and
welded fittings.
1.3 All fittings shall be seamless in construction unless otherwise specified. If fittings are specified
as welded, the same shall conform to clause 1.7.
1.4 Outside diameters and wall thickness (unless otherwise mentioned) of butt welded fittings shall
be in accordance with ASME B36.10 and ASME B36.19 as applicable.
1.5 For reducing butt weld fittings having different wall thicknesses at each end, the greater wall
thickness of the fitting shall be employed and inside bore at each end shall be matched with the
specified inside diameter.
1.6 Beveled ends for all fittings shall conform to ASME B16.25. Contour of bevel shall be as
follows:

Low Temp. Carbon Steel)

Stainless Steel &
Low Temp. Carbon Steel > 10 mm & Upto 25 mm Figure 5 Type A
1.7 Welded Fittings
1.7.1 All welded fittings shall be double welded. Inside weld projection shall not exceed 1.6 mm.
Welds shall be ground smooth at least 25 mm from the ends.
1.7.2 For fittings made out of welded pipe, the welded pipe shall be double welded type & shall be
manufactured with the addition of filler metal.
Page 1213 of 1823

1A
1.„, ENGINEERS
ia5leUW INDIA LIMITED WELDED, SOCKET WELDED 6-44-0054 Rev. 7
eVasrgerragarki) IA Goof of India Undertaking)
AND SCREWED FITTINGS Page 5 of 9
1.7.3 Welded tees/Lateral Tees shall not be of fabricated (stub-in/stub-on) type unless otherwise I
specified in the MR.
1.7.4 All welded fittings shall be normalized & 100% radiographed by X-ray on all welds made by
fitting manufacturers & also on the parent materials.
1.7.5 Welded pipes employed for manufacture of fittings shall be made by automatic welding only.
1.7.6 Specified heat treatment for carbon steel & alloy steel fittings shall be carried out again after
weld repairs.
1.7.7 Irrespective of the material code requirement, all welded fittings indicated in the MR as
"Cryo"& "LT" shall meet impact test requirements of ASME B31.3. The impact test
temperature shall be -196°C & -45°C for stainless steel & carbon steel respectively unless
specifically mentioned otherwise in the MR.
1.8 Stainless Steel Fittings
1.8.1 All stainless steel fittings shall be supplied in solution heat treated condition.
1.8.2 Solution annealing for stainless steel fittings shall be carried out again after weld repairs.
1.8.3 For all stainless steel fittings Inter Granular Corrosion (IGC) test shall have to be conducted as
per the following:
ASTM A 262 Practice "B" with acceptance criteria of "60 mils/year (max.)".
Or
ASTM A262 Practice E : The bent specimen shall be examined under 20X magnification. The
acceptance criteria is that there will be no crack or fissure in the bent specimen. The bent
specimen shall also be subjected to metallographic examination at 250X magnification to ensure
no crack or fissure.
1.8.4 When specifically asked for in MR for high temperature application of some grades of austenitic
stainless steel (eg. SS309, 310,316,316H etc.) ASTM A 262 Practice "C" with acceptance
criteria of "15 mils/year" shall have to be conducted.
1.8.5 For the IGC test as described in Clauses 1.8.3 & 1.8.4, two sets of samples shall be
drawn from each solution treatment lot, one set corresponding to the highest carbon content and
other set to the highest fitting thickness. When testing is conducted as per ASTM A 262 Practice
"E", the photograph of the bent specimen along with comments shall be submitted for review.
1.8.6 For dual grades of SS where specified, chemical composition and mechanical properties of both
grades specified shall be ensured.
1.9.1 Fittings under "NACE" category or those designated as "HIC1" shall meet the requirements of
NACE MR-0103 unless otherwise specified.
1.9.2 Fittings made from plates and designated as "HIC1" shall meet the HIC requirements of EIL
specification 6-79-0013 unless otherwise specified.
1.10 Thickness/schedule lower or higher than specified for the finished product shall not be accepted. I
Page 1214 of 1823

ENGINEERS
51g-a,,.. WELDED, SOCKET WELDED
...,,,r fett5Itg, INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India UnderMong)
AND SCREWED FITTINGS
6-44-0054 Rev. 7
Page 6 of 9
The gasket contact surfaces of stub ends shall be flat with face finish specified in the requisition.
Interpretation on the specified face finish is as follows:
125 AARH Serrations with 125 to 250 [t in AARH
1.12 Seamless stub ends shall not have any welds on the body. Stub ends shall be long pattern type.
1.13 Galvanized fittings shall be coated with zinc by hot dip process conforming to IS 4736 / ASTM
A153.
1.14 Threaded ends shall have NPT taper threads in accordance with ASME/ANSI B1.20.1 up to
1.5" NB & IS 554 from 2" to 6" NB.
1.15 Unless and otherwise specified in the MR, all socket welded and screwed fittings shall be in
accordance with ASME B16.11 to the extent covered in the specification except for unions
which shall be in accordance with MSS-SP-83.
1.16 Special fittings like weldolet, sockolet, sweepolet, latrolet, elbolet etc., the dimensions of which
are not covered in ASME, MSS-SP & EIL Standards, shall be as per manufacturer's std.
Contours of these fittings shall meet the requirements of ASME B31.3. Manufacturer shall
submit drawings / catalogues of these items for records after acceptance of offer.
1.17 Length of all long half couplings shall be 100 mm unless otherwise specified in the MR.
1.18 For reducers to manufacturers' standard, length of reducer shall not be less than 0.7D where D
is the outside diameter of the larger end.
1.19 All seamless pipes employed for manufacturing of fittings shall be required to have undergone
hydrostatic test to ASTM A 530. Welded pipes employed for manufacture of fittings shall be
tested as given below :
Welded Pipe Employed For Manufacture Of Welded Fittings. Test Criteria

ASTM A671 Gr. C65,70 (C1.32) P= 2ST /D
ASTM A672 Gr. C60,65,70 (C1.12, 22) S = 90% of SMYS.
ASTM A671 Gr. CF60,65,70,66 (C1.32) T = Nom. Wall Thickness
ASTM A691 Gr. 1/2Cr, 1Cr, l'ACr, 21/4Cr, 5Cr, 9Cr (C1.42), 91 D = 0.D. of Pipe.
(C1.42)
API 5L P = 2ST /D
ASTM A358 TP 304, 304L, 304H, 318, 318L, 318H, 321, 347 S = 85% of SMYS.
(CI.1, 3, 4) T = Nom. Wall Thickness
D = 0.D. of Pipe.
ASTM B725 ASTM B725
ASTM B517 ASTM B517
ASTM B514 ASTM B514
1.20 The bevel ends of all butt weld fittings shall undergo 100% MP / DP test.
1.21 Abbreviations for ends of swages and nipples shall be as follows:

PBE Plain Both Ends
TBE Threaded Both Ends
TOE Threaded One End
TSE Threaded Small End
TLE Threaded Large End
Page 1215 of 1823

0 el ENGINEERS
$igar aReg INDIA LIMITED WELDED, SOCKET WELDED 6-44-0054 Rev. 7
f MOWZMIJOOvvit
Ottl, I A Govt of India Unclettalon91 AND SCREWED FITTINGS Page 7 of 9
1.22 All types of SS321 or SS347 fittings shall be in stabilized heat treated condition. Stabilizing
heat treatment shall be carried out subsequent to normal solution annealing. Soaking
temperature and holding time for stabilizing heat treatment shall be 900°C and 4 hours
respectively.
1.23 For Hydrogen service fittings following special requirements shall also be met:
a. All carbon steel fittings having wall thickness 9.53 mm (0.375") and above shall be
normalised. Cold drawn fittings shall be normalised after the final cold draw pass for all
thicknesses. In addition, fittings made from forgings shall have Carbon- 0.35 % max. and
Silicon- 0.35 % max. The normalising heat treatment shall be a separate heating operation
and not a part of the hot forming operation
b. All alloy steel (Cr-Mo) fittings shall be normalised and tempered. The normalising and
tempering shall be a separate heating operation and not a part of the hot forming operation.
The maximum room temperature tensile strength shall be 100,000 psi.
c. For carbon steel fittings, hardness of weld and HAZ shall be 200 BHN (max.). For alloy
steel fittings, hardness of weld and HAZ shall be 225 BHN (max.).
d. For all Carbon steel and Alloy steel fittings with wall thickness over 20mm, Charpy-V
Notch impact testing shall be carried out in accordance with paragraph UG-84 of ASME
Section VIII, Div-1 for weld metal and base metal from the thickest item per heat of material
and per heat treating batch. Impact test specimen shall be in complete heat treated condition
and accordance with ASTM A370. Impact energies at 0°Celsius shall average greater than
27J (20 ft-lb) per set of three specimens, with a minimum of 20J (15 ft-lb).
1.24 For all welded alloy steel fittings with mandatory requirements of heat treatment and
radiography, radiography shall be performed after heat treatment.
1.25 All 1Cr-0.5Mo & 1.25Cr-0.5Mo fittings shall be normalized and tempered. All 2.25Cr-1Mo,
5Cr-0.5Mo, 9Cr- 1 Mo & 9Cr-lMo-V welded fittings shall be normalized and tempered.
1.26 Fitting material as per ASTM A234 Gr.WP5/WP9/WP91, wherever specified, shall be as per
1C1.11, unless otherwise specified.
1.27 Materials designated as structural steel grades like IS 2062, SA 36 etc. or similar specification
are not permitted for manufacture of fittings.
Page 1216 of 1823

ENGINEERS
01:alii91101Ong
t
\r
‘,. .Z1
INDIA LIMITED WELDED, SOCKET WELDED 6-44-0054 Rev. 7
RIPMOW.1
,13MM (A Govt of hew undertaking) AND SCREWED FITTINGS Page 8 of 9
2.0 IBR REQUIREMENTS
2.1 IBR Documentation Required
2.1.1 Fittings under the purview of "IBR" (Indian Boiler Regulations) shall be accompanied with
original IBR certificate in Form III-C duly approved and countersigned by IBR authority / local
authority empowered by Central Boiler Board of India. Photocopy of the original certificate
duly attested by the local boiler inspector where the supplier is located is the minimum
requirement for acceptance.
2.1.2 For materials 11/4Cr - Y2Mo (ASTM A 234Gr.WP11 & ASTM A234 Gr.WP11W) & 21/40- -
1Mo (ASTM A 234 Gr.WP22 & ASTM A234 Gr. WP22W) & 9Cr-lMo-V (A234 Gr.WP91/
A234Gr.WP91W),where fittings are manufactured from pipe, Form III-C approved by IBR
shall include the tabulation of Et, Sc, & Sr values for the entire temperature range given below.
Et, Sc, & Sr values shall be such that throughout the temperature range
Et 11.5 >
Sr/ 1.5 > SA
Sc >
SA Allowable stress at the working metal temperature.

Et Yield point (0.2% proof stress at the working metal temperature)
Sc The average stress to produce elongation of 1%(creep) in 100000 hrs at
the working metal temperature.
Sr The average stress to produce rupture in 100000 hrs at the working metal
temperature and in no case more than 1.33 times the lowest stress to
produce rupture at this temperature.
SA (psi)
Temp( F) 500 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100
Material
A234Gr.WP11/ 16200 15700 15400 15100 14800 14400 14000 13600 9300 6300 4200 2800
A234Gr.WP11W
A234Gr.WP22 / 17900 17900 17900 17900 17900 17700 17100 13600 10800 8000 5700 3800
A234Gr.WP22W
A234Gr.WP91/
28100 27700 27300 26700 25900 24900 23700 22300 20700 18000 14000 10300
A234Gr.WP91W
Note : SA values shall be as per the latest edition of ASME B31.3 prevailing.
2.2 For carbon steel pipes under IBR the chemical composition shall conform to the following:
Carbon (max) 0.25%

Others (S, P, Mn) As prescribed in IBR.
The chemical composition as indicated in this clause is not applicable for pipes other than IBR
services.
3.1 Seamless fittings are acceptable in place of welded fittings, however, welded fittings are not
acceptable in place of seamless fittings. Forged fittings are acceptable in place of wrought
Page 1217 of 1823

0 eir ENGINEERS
lig-ZEE idOtag INDIA LIMITED WELDED, SOCKET WELDED 6-44-0054 Rev. 7
(an, undertaking) AND SCREWED FITTINGS
(A GOvt GI India
Page 9 of 9
fittings. However, wrought seamless fittings are acceptable in place of forgings only in case of
swages.
3.2 Fittings of Grades SS317 of corresponding material are acceptable in place of Grades SS316 or
SS316(2.5Mo min.).
3.3 Fittings of Grades SS317L of corresponding material are acceptable in place of Grades SS316L
or SS316L(2.5Mo min.).
4.0 MARKING AND DESPATCH
4.1 Each fitting shall be legibly and conspicuously stamped in accordance with the requirements of
applicable standards along with special condition like "IBR", "Cryo", "NACE" and "H2" etc.
4.2 Steel die marking with round bottom punch may be permitted on body of butt weld CS & lower
alloy steel fittings, but for SS & higher alloy steel fittings, the same should be marked by electro-
etching only.
4.3 Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metals or metal salts such as Zinc, Lead
or Copper which causes corrosive attack on heating.
4.4 Fittings shall be dry, clean and free of moisture, dirt and loose foreign materials of any kind.
4.5 Fittings shall be protected from rust, corrosion and mechanical damage during transportation,
shipment and storage.
4.6 Rust preventive used on machined surfaces to be welded shall be easily removable with a
petroleum solvent and the same shall not be harmful to welding.
4.7 Fittings coming under the purview of "IBR", "CRYO" , "NACE" & "H2"(hydrogen) shall be
painted with one circumferential stripe of colour red, light purple brown, canary yellow & white
respectively for easy identification. Width of stripe shall be 12mm for sizes less than 3" and
25mm for sizes 3" and above. Stripe shall be located centrally for elbows, diagonally for caps,
at the larger end for reducing fittings, longitudinally for couplings and at one end near to the
bevel/socket/screwed end for other fittings.
4.8 Each end of fitting shall be protected with a wood, metal or plastic cover.
4.9 Each size of fitting shall be supplied in separate packaging marked with the purchase order
number, item code number, material specification, size and schedule / thickness / rating. For
small quantities, fittings of different sizes may be packed in separate packing size-wise and
these packing may be packed in a bigger package/ container clearly identifying the contents.
5.0 REFERENCES
6-81-0001 Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at

Supplier's Works
6-81-0005 Inspection & test plan for forged, seamless and welded fittings
6-79-0013 Material requirements for carbon steel components used in

sour service for petroleum refinery environments
Page 1218 of 1823

ENGINEERS TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
INDIA LIMITED GASKETS 6-44-0056 Rev. 6
, (A Govt of Indio Undettaking)
Page 1 of 5
ReR
cicbl ch ii' 1i1
TECHNICAL NOTES
FOR GASKETS
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD

6 11.08.21 PK SH
SPECIFICATION
5 30.03.18 PK SH MI RN
SPECIFICATION
4 21.03.13 UK SH RN ATD DM
SPECIFICATION
3 23.07.07
SPECIFICATION RN ATD DM VC
REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
2 15.06.98 SH BRB BN AS
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
Rev. Prepared
Date Purpose Checked by Convenor Chairman
No by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 1219 of 1823

Jt4:MI
- . ENGINEERS TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
Ogar W INDIA LIMITED GASKETS 6-44-0056 Rev. 6
(411Ern (A Govt of Inds Undertak,n9)
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
AARH : Average Arithmetic Root Height
BHN : Brinnel Hardness Number
CS Carbon Steel
MR : Material Requisition
PMI : Positive Material Identification
RTJ : Ring Type Joint
Convenor : Mr. G. Balaji
Members : Mr. Mahesh kumar

Mr. UdayanChakravarty
Mr. R. Giridhar
Mr K Anjaneyulu (S&ME)
Mr. SC Maity (Strl.)
Mr. Pankaj Kumar Rai (Construction)
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — Alf rights reserved
Page 1220 of 1823

IfilitaeiAlItENGINEERS TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
€1151ftW•NDI I A UMITED GASKETS 6-44-0056 Rev. 6
1•11V, olgoollMIJOI.O
IA Govt ot India UnOIDOOMIO)
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 REFERENCES
Page 1221 of 1823

k311 ENGINEERS TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
moral fet5leg
MMI1512 JIMMII
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Me Undeltaking)
GASKETS 6-44-0056 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 5
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 All gaskets shall conform to the codes/standards and specifications given in the
requisition. Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations shall
be permitted.
1.2 Process of manufacture, dimensions and tolerances not specified in requisition shall be in
accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer's standards.
1.3 Testing
1.3.1 Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests for gaskets as per the standards
specified in the requisition.
1.3.2 Chemical composition and hardness of RTJ gaskets shall also be furnished in the form of
test reports on samples.
1.3.3 For Spiral wound material following shall be furnished:
a. Manufacturer's test certificate for filler material and spiral material as per the relevant
material specifications.
b. Manufacturer's test certificate for raw materials and tests for compressibility/ seal-
ability & recovery as per the relevant material specifications.
1.3.4 PMI shall be performed as per the scope and procedures defined in the Specification for
PMI at Supplier's Works (6-81-0001) for ring type joint gaskets.
1.3.5 Refer Specification no 6-81-0008 for 'Inspection & Test Plan for Gaskets'.
1.4 Full face gaskets shall have bolt holes punched out.
1.5 Filler material for spiral wound gaskets shall not have any colour or dye.
1.6 All spiral wound gaskets shall be supplied with Outer ring. Material of the outer ring shall
be CS unless otherwise specified in the MR.
1.7 Inner rings shall be provided for all Spiral Wound Gaskets. For spiral wound gaskets,
material of Inner Compression ring shall be same as Spiral Strip material.
1.8 Hardness of metallic RTJ gaskets shall not exceed the values specified below unless
otherwise specified in MR:
Ring Gasket Material Maximum Hardness (BHN)
Soft Iron 90
Carbon steel 120
5 Cr. 1/2 Mo 130
Type 304, 316, 321, 347 140
Type 304L, 316L 135
Page 1222 of 1823

*Igen E1151-eg INDIA LIMITED GASKETS 6-44-0056 Rev.6
eIMAZ MIJMIril IA Govt 01 India Undertaking)
Page 5 of 5
Inconel UNS N06625 200
Incoloy UNS N08825 190
Duplex SS UNS S32205, S31803 230
1.9 Face finish of metallic RTJ gaskets shall be 32 to 63 AARH.
1.10 Gaskets of different types and sizes shall be placed in separate shipping containers and
each container clearly marked with the size, rating, material specification and item code.
1.11 All items shall be inspected and approved by EIL Inspector or any other agency
authorized by EIL.
1.12 Any additional requirements specified in the requisition, shall be fully complied with.
1.13 Non-metallic ring gaskets as per ASME B16.21 shall match flanges to ASME B16.5 upto
24" and to ASME B16.47B above 24" unless specified otherwise.
1.14 Spiral wound gasket as per ASME B16.20 shall match flanges to ASME B16.5 upto 24"
and to ASME B16.47B above 24" unless specifically mentioned otherwise.
1.15 The following abbreviations have been used in the Material Requisition for Spiral Wound
Gaskets :
(I) Inner Ring

(0)• . Outer Ring
GRAFIL : Grafoil Filler
1.16 Specialties mentioned in item description like "IBR", "LT", "HIC1", "H2", etc. shall be
ignored.
2.0 REFERENCES

Works
6-81-0008 Inspection & Test Plan for Gaskets
6-78-0001 Specification for Quality Management System Requirements from

Bidders
Page 1223 of 1823

t31 el ENGINEERS TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
11-4-ar tlf5reg INDIA LIMITED BOLTS AND NUTS 6-44-0057 Rev. 5
oren eirergem.,,m) (A Govt of 11101.3 Undettaung) Page 1 of 5
7•11 r--R "RA111 Tqi fffq

achl 4) ulql
TECHNICAL NOTES
FOR BOLTS AND NUTS

5 30.03.18 PK MI >RN
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD RN ATD DM
4 21.03.13 UK SH
SPECIFICATION
3 23.07.07
SPECIFICATION RN ATD DM VC
2 15.06.98 SH BRB BN AS
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD AS
1 30.12.92 AKG BPV GRR
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 1224 of 1823

oga fadleg
1.12n 2.1i4M172
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India UnOettalung)
BOLTS AND NUTS 6-44-0057 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
ASME : The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM : The American Society for Testing and Materials
PMI : Positive Material Identification
SS Stainless Steel
Members : Mr. Amrendra Kumar

Mr. G. Balaji
Mr. Mr. S. Ghosal (Process-2)
Mr. Pankaj Kr. Rai (Construction)
Page 1225 of 1823

iti&reYENGINEERS TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
ligar laWg
?.re
INDIA LIMITED
IA Go, of India Undertaking)
BOLTS AND NUTS 6-44-0057 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
3.0 REFERENCES 5
Page 1226 of 1823

tWg INDIA LIMITED BOLTS AND NUTS 6-44-0057 Rev. 5
lawn eikkaire aft,pgr,q) IA Govt of India undertaking)
Page 4 of 5
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 The process of manufacture, heat treatment, chemical & mechanical requirements and
marking for all stud bolts, m/c bolts, jack screws & nuts shall be in accordance with the
codes/standards and specifications given in the requisition. The applicable identification
symbol in accordance with the material specification shall be stamped on each bolt and
nut. Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations shall be
permitted.
1.2 Testing
1.2.1 Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the relevant material
specifications.
1.2.2 Material test certificate shall also be furnished. (Heat Analysis, Product Analysis and
Mechanical Requirement)
1.2.3 PMI shall be performed as per the scope and procedures defined in the Specification for
PMI at Supplier's Works (6-81-0001).
1.2.4 Stress Rupture Test as detailed in ASTM A453 shall be carried out for all ASTM A453
bolting material irrespective of the temperature.
1.2.5 Refer Specification no 6-81-0007 for 'Inspection & Test Plan for Bolting Material'.
1.3 All bolting shall be as per ASME B 18.2.1 for studs, M/c bolts and jackscrews and ASME
B18.2.2 for nuts.
1.4 Threads shall be unified (UNC for up to 1" dia and 8UN for > 1" dia) as per ASME B1.1 I
with class 2A fit for studs, M/c bolts and jackscrews and class 2B fit for nuts.
1.5 Stud bolts shall be threaded full length with two heavy hexagonal nuts unless otherwise
specified. Length tolerance shall be in accordance with the requirement of Table D2 of
Annexure-D of ASME B 16.5.
1.6 The nuts shall be double chamfered, semi-finished, heavy hexagonal type and shall be
made by the hot forged process and stamped as per respective material specification.
1.7 Heads of jackscrews and m/c bolts shall be heavy hexagonal type. Jackscrew end shall be
rounded.
1.8 Each size of studs & m/c bolts with nuts and jackscrews shall be supplied in separate
containers marked with size and material specifications. `CRY0' shall be marked
additionally in case `CRY0' is specified in the requisition.
1.9 All items shall be inspected and approved (stage-wise) by EIL inspector or any other
agency authorized by EIL.
1.10 The heat treatment for stud bolts & nuts shall be as per code unless mentioned otherwise.
1.11 All austenitic stainless steel bolts, nuts, screws shall be supplied in solution annealed
condition unless specified otherwise in the material specification.
1.12 Any additional requirements specified in the requisition shall be fully complied with.
1.13 Stud bolts, nuts & jackscrews shall be impact tested wherever specified in the material
specification and also where the material specification is indicated as "CRYO". For S.S.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL —All rights reserved
Page 1227 of 1823

151fMTRA ENGINEERS TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
$41-dMr
I aiR elea, ■ 754,17,41
INDIA LIMITED BOLTS AND NUTS 6-44-0057 Rev. 5
IA Go of India underlalong)
Page 5 of 5
nuts and bolts minimum impact energy absorption shall be 27 Joules and test temperature
shall be -196°C unless mentioned otherwise. For other materials impact energy and test
shall be as per respective code.
1.14 Bolts/nuts of material of construction B7M/2HM shall be 100% Hardness tested as per
supplementary requirement S3 of ASTM A193.
1.15 When specified as galvanized, the studs, M/C bolts and nuts shall be 'hot dip zinc coated'
in accordance with requirements of 'class C' of ÀSTM A 153'. As an alternative, electro-
galvanizing as per IS 1573, 'Service Grade Number 2' is also acceptable.
1.16 All Stud Bolts of Bolt diameter size 1" and above shall be provided with three nuts
irrespective of whatever has been specified elsewhere in the MR.
1.17 Bolting shall be protected by non-corrosive oil or grease before dispatch to prevent
rusting.
1.18 For stud bolt diameters not covered in ASTM A320, mechanical properties shall match
the values specified for the matching grades and stud bolt diameters in ASTM A193.
1.19 In cases where the lengths of Stud/Machine bolts specified in the MR are not multiples of
0.25", the length supplied shall be equal to the specified length rounded up to the next
higher 0.25".
1.20 All Specialties mentioned in item description like "IBR", "LT", "H2", etc. other than
"CRYO" & "NACE" shall be ignored.
2.1 'Nuts' to ASTM A194Gr.7 are acceptable in place of ASTM A194Gr.4.
2.2 Stud Bolts to ASTM A453 Gr.660 CLB are acceptable in lieu of ASTM A453 Gr.660 I
CI.A and vice versa.
3.0 REFERENCES

Works
6-81-0007 Inspection & 'rest Plan for Bolting Material

Bidders
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIS—All rights reserved
Page 1228 of 1823

7-0 ENGINEERS
nariet 0 TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
INDIA LIMITED STRAINERS 6-44-0067 Rev. 2
) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 9
crab,-1 ch du-1 ul I
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STRAINERS
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD A44*

2 20 01 2020 PK SH MI
SPECIFICATION
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD
1 23.09 2014 SH AK RN ATD SC
SPECIFICATION
0 29 06 2009 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION PK RN SC ND
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 1229 of 1823

101 ei , - ENGINEERS TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
6-44-0067 Rev. 2
ligtif Mieg INDIA LIMITED STRAINERS
IIII24 liet.2,013PCITA, (A Govt of lode Undertaking) Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
AARH Arithmetic Average Roughness Height

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
BW Butt Weld
DP Dye Penetrant
FLGD Flanged
FN Ferrite Number
H2 Hydrogen
MOC Material of Construction
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
SCRD Screwed
SW Socket Weld
UNC Unified Coarse
WN Weld Neck

Mr. G. Balaji
Page 1230 of 1823

dala.1 ENGINEERS TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
Oge..ff 254-ag mo INDIA LIMITED STRAINERS 6-44-0067 Rev. 2
2,Ort,IN .3.10.11
(A Gavt of In Undettaking) Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 PURPOSE & SCOPE 4

2.0 DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION 4
3.0 DOCUMENTATION 7
4.0 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HYDROGEN SERVICE 7
5.0 TESTING & INSPECTION 8
7.0 MARKING & DESPATCH 8
8.0 ATTACHMENTS FOR MR 9
9.0 REFERENCES 9
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 1231 of 1823

Ill~iel ENGINEERS TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
og,...utpeg INDIA LIMITED STRAINERS 6-44-0067 Rev. 2
WWI ereiliff <61.3sR3.1) IA Govt of India Undertaking) Page 4 of 9
1.0 PURPOSE & SCOPE
This specification covers the design and construction, IBR requirements, documentation,
testing, inspection, marking and despatch requirements for Strainers. Vendor shall supply
Strainers in accordance with the technical notes and details specified in the Data Sheet for
strainers. Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations shall be
permitted. Post order Concession/ Deviation as mentioned in Cl. 5.17 of Specification for
Quality Management System Requirements from Bidders (6-78-0001) is not applicable.
2.0 DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION
2.1. All codes and Standards for manufacture, testing and inspection etc. shall be of latest editions.
2.2 The material of construction shall be as per the data sheet; for parts not mentioned in the data
sheet, vendor shall guarantee the material used for the service conditions specified.
For flanged strainers, MOC of end flanges shall correspond to the material specified in the Data
sheet.
For welding of dissimilar materials required for strainer assembly, welder qualification
procedure shall be done prior to welding.
2.3 The material composition, physical properties, heat treatment, mandatory test reports,
dimensions and tolerances shall confirm to the applicable codes/ standards/specifications as
specified in the requisition.
2.4 Design shall be based on EIL Std 7-44-0300 for temporary strainers, EIL Stds 7-44-0303/0304
for T-type permanent strainers and Manufacturer's std. for Y-type strainers.
2.5 Dimension Standards for various components are as follows:
Body ASME B16.9/B16.11

Flanges ASME B16.5/B16.47 Series B
Gaskets ASME B16.20/B16.21
Bolts & Nuts ASME B18.2.1 & B 18.2.2 respectively
2.6 Ends of body shall either be Flanged, BW, SW or Screwed as specified in the data sheet.
2.6.1 The ends for strainers shall correspond to the following standards:
FLGD ASME B16.5/B16.47 Series B

BW ASME B16.25
SW ASME B16.11
SCRD ASME B16.11
2.6.2 Bevel end details for BW strainers shall be as per ASME B16.25. Contour of bevel end shall be
as follows:

Low Temp. Carbon
Steel) > 22 mm Figure 3 Type A
Page 1232 of 1823

5sar legreg @ INDIA LIMITED STRAINERS 6-44-0067 Rev. 2
I MIER" 2.1W/AZ t111.3rriMi ) IA Govt of Inds Undertaking) Page 5 of 9

Stainless Steel & > 10 mm & Upto 25 mm Figure 5 Type A
Low Temp. Carbon Steel
2.7 Flange face finish shall be normally specified in the strainer data sheet. The interpretation for
range of face finish shall be as follows:
Stock Finish 1000 µ in AARH max.

Serrated/Smooth Finish/125AARH Serrations with 125 to 250 µ in AARH
Extra Smooth Finish/63 AARH 32 TO 63 IA in AARH
2.8 For strainers with ring type joint flanged ends the hardness shall be as follows:
Flange Material Min. Hardness of Max. Gasket

Groove (BHN) Hardness (BHN)
Carbon Steel 140 90
1% Cr to 5% Cr, 9% Cr 150 130
Type 304, 316, 321, 347 160 140
Type 304L, 316L 150 135
2.9 For strainers with flanged ring type joint ends, the hardness shall be recorded in the test report.
2.10 Ends of screwed strainers unless otherwise specified shall have taper threads as per
ASME/ANSI B1.20.1 (upto 1.5" NB) & IS 554 (for 2" to 6" NB).
2.11 All 2" and higher size Y type strainers shall be provided with 3/4" screwed plug for drain
connection. For less than 2" this shall be 1/2" size.
For Y type, SW end Strainers (size 1.5" & below) to MNF'STD, blind end is also acceptable
with threaded plug cover instead of flanged end. In this case, plug shall be of forged material
equivalent to body material.
2.12 For Y type strainers, cast strainers with integrally cast flanges and with end cover / blind
flange in cast/forged construction is acceptable.
2.13 For flanged end strainers, weld-on flanges (WN) are acceptable.
2.14 Pressure drop calculations shall be furnished by vendor along with the offer, wherever specified
in the data sheet.
2.15 Stainless Steel Strainers
2.15.1 All Austenitic Stainless Steel items shall be supplied in solution annealed condition.
2.15.2 For all Austenitic Stainless Steel items Inter-granular Corrosion Test shall be conducted as per
following:
Page 1233 of 1823

Ogeji &kg INDIA LIMITED STRAINERS 6-44-0067 Rev. 2
I 411VM ?WIFE m1310,./ (A Goof of Indta Undertakong) Page 6 of 9
ASTM A 262 Practice 'B' with acceptance criteria of `60mils/year (max.)'

OR
ASTM A262 Practice E: The bent specimen shall be examined under 20X
magnification. The acceptance criteria is that there will be no crack or fissure in the bent
specimen. The bent specimen shall also be subjected to metallographic examination at
250X magnification to ensure no crack or fissure. The photograph of the bent specimen
along with comments shall be submitted for review.
2.15.3 When specifically asked for in MR for High Temp. application of some grades of Austenitic
Stainless Steel (like SS 309, 310, 316H etc.) ASTM A 262 practice 'C' with acceptance criteria
of "15mils/year" shall be conducted.
2.15.4 All types of SS321 or SS347 material shall be in stabilized heat treated condition. Stabilizing
heat treatment shall be carried out subsequent to normal solution annealing. Soaking temperature
and holding time for stabilizing heat treatment shall be 900 °C and 4 hours respectively.
2.16 IBR Requirements
2.16.1 For SW / BW end carbon steel strainers under IBR, the chemical composition shall conform to
the following :
Carbon (Max) 0.25%

Others (S, P, Mn) As per IBR regulations
2.16.2 Strainers coming under the purview of "IBR" (Indian Boiler Regulations) shall each be
individually accompanied by original IBR certificate in Form III-C, duly approved by IBR
authority / local authority empowered by the Central Boiler Board of India. Photocopy of
original certificate duly attested by the local boiler inspector where the supplier is located is the
minimum requirement for acceptance.
2.17 In case of T-type strainer, body construction shall be 'Seamless' unless otherwise specified in
the data sheet.
2.18 Welded Tees shall not be of fabricated (Stub-in/stub-on) type.
2.19 Strainers with welded body shall be in normalized condition & 100 percent radiographed by X-
ray.
2.20 All 1Cr-0.5Mo & 1.25Cr-0.5Mo strainers shall be normalized and tempered. All 2.25Cr- 1 Mo,
5Cr-0.5Mo, 9Cr- 1 Mo & 9Cr-lMo-V welded strainers shall be normalized and tempered & 100
percent radiographed by X-ray.
2.21 Weld joints shall be stress relieved as per the requirement specified in the Strainer MR
Attachment.
2.22.1 Strainines under "NACE" category or those designated as "HIC1" shall meet the requirements
of NACE MR-0103 unless otherwise specified.
2.22.2 Strainers made from plates and designated as "HIC1" shall meet the HIC requirements of EIL
specification 6-79-0013 unless otherwise specified.
2.23 Strainers of Hydrogen service category shall meet the requirements as specified in clause 4.0
below.
Page 1234 of 1823

ei ENGINEERS TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
STRAINERS 6-44-0067 Rev. 2
Ogeir 215leg INDIA LIMITED
1•117rt 29E2151eIMIJMI.11 IA Govt of India Undertaloom Page 7 of 9
2.24 Galvanized strainers shall be coated with zinc by hot dip process conforming to IS 4736 / ASTM
A153.
2.25 Gaskets
2.25.1 Non-metallic gaskets shall conform to B16.21 (corresponding to B16.5) up to 24" and B16.21
(corresponding to B16.47 Series 'EY) beyond 24", unless otherwise specified.
2.25.2 Spiral wound gaskets shall conform to B16.20.
2.25.3 Ring type and spiral wound gasket shall be self-aligning type.
2.25.4 Ring Joint gasket shall be Octagonal type and shall conform to B16.20.
2.26 Bolting
2.26.1 All bolts shall conform to B18.2.1, nuts to B18.2.2. Reference shall also be made to B16.5 for
studs.
2.26.2 Threads shall be unified (UNC for upto 1"dia and 8UN for > 1"dia) as per ANSI B.1.1 with
class 2A fit for studs and M/C bolts and class 2B fit for nuts.
2.26.3 Nuts for Bolts & Studs shall be the American Standard Hexagon Heavy Series.
3.0 DOCUMENTATION
3.1 No documents shall be submitted with the offer.
3.2 Detailed dimensioned cross section drawing with parts, materials, weight, etc. shall be
submitted through EIL eDMS for records/information.
4.0 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HYDROGEN SERVICE
4.1 Method of Manufacture
4.1.1 All carbon steel strainers having wall thickness 9.53 mm and above shall be normalized. Carbon
content shall be limited to .35% max. and silicon .35% max. The normalizing heat treatment
shall be a separate heat treatment operation and not a part of the hot forming operation.
Normalizing shall be done after final cold draw pass for all thicknesses if cold drawn.
4.1.2 All alloy steel (Cr-Mo) strainers shall be normalized and tempered. The normalizing and
tempering shall be a separate heat treatment operation and not a part of the hot forming
operation. The maximum room temperature tensile strength shall be 100,000 psig.
4.2 Impact Test
For all carbon steels and alloy steels with wall thickness over 20 mm, Charpy-V Notch impact
testing shall be carried out in accordance with paragraph UG-84 of ASME Section VIII, Div-1
per heat of material and per heat treating batch. Impact test specimen shall be in accordance
with ASTM A370. Impact energies at 0° C shall average greater than 27J (20 ft-lb) per set of 3
specimens, with a minimum of 20 J (15ft-lb).
4.3 Hardness of weld and HAZ shall be 200 BfIN (max) for carbon steel and 225 BHN (max) for
alloy steel.
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL—All rights reserved
Page 1235 of 1823

q..1 ENGINEERS TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
6-44-0067 Rev. 2
ogeji 251-eg INDIA LIMITED STRAINERS
(.112,, 2.120A? 4,1J9i1.11 (A Govt of India Undertaking) Page 8 of 9
5.0 TESTING & INSPECTION
5.1 All strainers shall be hydrostatically tested at the lower of twice the design pressure and 1.5
times the class rating as per ASME B16.5 at ambient temperature.
5.2 All BW joints shall be 100% Radiographed and Fillet welds shall be 100% DP/MP checked.
5.3 Positive Material Identification (PMI) shall be performed as per the scope and procedures as
defined in the 'Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at Supplier's Works'
(No. 6-81-0001).
5.4 All welded Tees indicated in the MR as "Cryo" & "LT" shall meet Impact test requirements of
ASME B31.3. The Impact test temperature shall be (-)196°C & (-)45°C for Stainless Steel &
Low Temperature Carbon Steel respectively unless otherwise mentioned in the MR.
5.5 The stage wise inspection of non-IBR Strainers shall be done by EIL inspector before despatch.
EIL/Client's authorized representatives reserve full right to witness stagewise inspection of all
mandatory/applicable supplementary tests. However, for IBR items, the tests/inspection shall
be by IBR authority.
5.6 Material Test Certificates (Physical Properties, Chemical Composition and heat Treatment
Report) shall also be furnished.
5.7 Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the relevant material
specifications/requisition. Test reports shall also be furnished for hydrotest and other
supplementary tests as specified in the requisition.
5.8 Refer Specification 6-81-0133 for Inspection & Test Plan for Strainers.
6.1 Following alternative body materials are acceptable :
AISI 420/AISI 410/A743 Gr.CA40/A743 Gr.CA15 in lieu of ASTM A105.

A182 F22 in lieu of A182 F11.
AISI 420/A182 Flt in lieu of A182 Fl.
6.2 Cast strainers with integrally cast flanges are also acceptable in lieu of equivalent forged
material. All castings offered in place of forgings shall be radiographed.
6.3 Forgings of equivalent material shall be acceptable in place of castings.
6.4 In the case of T type strainers, 'Seamless' body is acceptable in place of "Welded" body.
`Welded' body shall not be acceptable in place of 'Seamless'.
7.0 MARKING & DESPATCH
7.1 Each Strainer shall be legibly & conspicuously stamped on the body, in accordance with the
requirements of applicable standards along with special condition like IBR, CRYO, NACE, H2
etc. Vendor shall also mark on the body the Location/Tag No. and Line Number mentioned in
MR attachment.
7.2 All items shall be dry, clean and free from moisture, dirt and loose foreign material of any kind.
7.3 All items shall be protected from rust, corrosion, and mechanical damage during transportation,
shipment and storage.
Page 1236 of 1823

5-1
11Re..1e-1 ENGINEERS TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
STRAINERS 6-44-0067 Rev. 2
fge..n 25:leg INDIA LIMITED
fA Govt of India Undertaking) Page 9 of 9
7.4 Rust preventive, on machined surfaces to be welded, shall be easily removable with a petroleum
solvent or shall not be harmful to welding.
7.5 Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metallic salts such as Zinc, Lead
or Copper which causes corrosive attack on heating.
7.6 Strainers under "IBR", "CRYO", "NACE" & "I-12" shall be painted in Red, Light Purple, Canary
Yellow and sea green strips respectively for easy identification. Width of strip shall be 25 mm.
Strainers coming under the purview of "IBR", "CRYO" , "NACE" & "H2"(hydrogen) shall be
painted with one circumferential stripe of colour red, light purple brown, canary yellow & white
respectively for easy identification. Width of stripe shall be 12mm for sizes less than 3" and
25mm for sizes 3" and above. Stripe shall be located one end near to the
bevel/socket/screwed/flanged end.
7.7 After testing, one coat of inorganic zinc silicate (minimum DFT 65 to 75 microns) shall be
applied as primer over the external surface for carbon steel / alloy steel strainers.
7.8 Each end of strainer shall be protected with the following materials
Flange Face Wood or Plastic Cover

Bevelled End Wood or Plastic Cover
SW & SCRD End Plastic Cap
End protectors of wood / plastic to be used on flange faces shall be attached by at least three
bolts and shall not be smaller than the outside diameter of the flange. However plastic caps for
SW & SCRD end strainers shall be press fit type. End protectors to be used on beveled end shall
be securely and tightly attached.
8.0 ATTACHMENTS FOR MR
Format No.3-1643-0093: Data sheet for Strainers
9.0 REFERENCES
6-81-0001 Specification for PMI at Supplier's Works
6-81-0133 Inspection and Test Plan for Strainers
6-78-0001 Specification for Quality Management System Requirements

from Bidders
Page 1237 of 1823

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS INSTRUMENTATION OF
0g4n 0151-ez INDIA LIMITED 6-52-0052 Rev. 4
Wen :120,
11r ,CJOO,s0 (A Govt of Inda Undertakng) PACKAGE UNITS Page 1 of 58
Uoi if4d- fq
t-fggitua. cHiGict)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
INSTRUMENTATION OF PACKAGE
UNITS
.-11111109bwil
4 08.12.20 REVISED AND REISSUED SM KS
3 16.03.15 REVISED AND REISSUED

RK RKG RG SC

RG RP TGM ND
1 25.06.97 REVISED AND REISSUED. RK BRS RB AS
0 30.06.86 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION. RK RB AKV AK
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 1238 of 1823

INSTRUMENTATION OF 6-52-0052 Rev. 4
PACKAGE UNITS Page 2 of 58
Abbreviations:
AARH : Arithmetic Average Roughness Height

AC : Alternating Current
AWG : American Wire Gauge
CPU : Central Processing Unit
CRCA : Cold Rolled Cold Annealed
DCS : Distributed Control System
DPST : Double Pole Single Throw
DTM : Device Tool Manager
EDDL : Electronic Device Description Language
FDT : Field Device Tool
FF : Foundation Fieldbus
FISCO : Fieldbus Intrinsically Safety Concept
FNICO : Fieldbus Non-Incendive Concept
HART : Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
HIC : Hand Indicating controller
I/O : Input /Output
IP : Ingress Protection
LAS : Link Activity Scheduler
LED : Light Emitting Diode
MCB : Miniature Circuit Breaker
MR : Material Requisition
NB : Nominal Bore
NC : Normally Close
NO : Normally Open
NPT : National Pipe Threads
NPTF : National Pipe Threads Female
NPTM : National Pipe Threads Male
P&ID : Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
PID : Proportional, Integral and Derivative
PLC : Programmable Logic Controller
PTC : Performance Test Code
PTFE : Poly Tetra Fluoro Ethylene
PVC : Poly Vinyl Chloride
RAM : Random Access Memory
RB : Rockwell Hardness in B Scale
RTD : Resistance Temperature Detector
RTU : Remote Terminal Unit
SPDT : Single Pole Double Throw
TMR : Triple Modular Redundant
UPS : Uninterrupted Power Supply
URV : Upper Range Value
WC : Water Column
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 1239 of 1823

Instrumentation Standards Committee
Convener : Mr. Mainak Nandi
Members : Mr. Arupjyoti Saikia

Mr. Sachin Garg
Mr. Jerry Johnson
Mr. Mayank Kaushik
Mr. Sourav Mukherjee
Ms. K.Pratheepa
Ms. R K Gupta (Proj.)
Page 1240 of 1823

CONTENTS
PART I GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTATION .................................................. 5
1.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................ 6

2.0 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY .................................................................................................... 13
3.0 SPARES PHILOSOPHY .................................................................................................... 20
4.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTS ......................................................... 20
5.0 LIST OF DOCUMENTS ATTACHED .............................................................................. 47
PART II SPECIFICATION FOR MATERIAL, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND

COMMISSIONING ............................................................................................................ 48
1.0 INSTALLATION MATERIALS ........................................................................................ 49

2.0 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................ 55
3.0 TESTING AND CALIBRATION ....................................................................................... 56
4.0 COMMISSIONING ............................................................................................................ 58
ANNEXURES:
ANNEXURE – I MATERIAL SELECTION CHART

ANNEXURE – II BLANK FORMATS
ANNEXUIRE-III HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE FOR INSTRUMENT TUBING
& TUBE FITTINGS
Page 1241 of 1823

PART I
GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF
INSTRUMENTATION
Page 1242 of 1823

1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.1.1 This specification together with the attachments covers the design and engineering of
instruments, control systems, accessories and materials, along with special test equipments,
where the supply is part of a package being supplied by vendor. This specification is general
and all instruments/systems included may not be required for the proposed package. The
scope shall be as defined in the scope of supply of Instrumentation.
1.1.2 The detailed scope of work, specific job requirements, exclusions, deviations, additions etc.
if any, will be indicated in Scope of Supply of Instrumentation and Job Specification of
Instrumentation included in the Requisition / Tender.
1.1.3 This specification provides only the qualitative specifications of commonly used
instruments. Specifications of Instruments not covered in this specification shall be
submitted by vendor for Purchaser review.
1.1.4 Vendor shall be fully responsible for design, material selection, sizing and selection of the
proper instruments for their system. The compliance to this specification does not absolve
the vendor of the responsibility towards contractual obligations with regards to
completeness, proper selection, satisfactory operation and easy maintenance of the unit/
package.
1.1.5 All items, as offered, shall be field proven and should have been operating satisfactorily for
a period of minimum 6 months on the bid due date in the similar application with the
process conditions similar to those as specified in the purchaser’s data sheets. Items with
proto-type design or items not meeting provenness criteria specified above shall not
beoffered
1.1.6 In the event of any conflict between this specification, data sheets, related standards, codes
etc., the vendor shall refer the matter to the purchaser for clarification and only after
obtaining the same should proceed with the engineering & manufacturing of the item in
question. DCS/ PLC is not included in this specification. Vendor shall refer specifications
attached separately in case DCS/ PLC is included in scope of supply.
1.2 Bids
1.2.1 Vendor shall provide the following information along with their offer:
a) Compliance to Complete Requisition/Tender.
b) Utility requirements including Power consumption and Instrument air supply,
Nitrogen, Cooling Water, Steam consumption. The offer shall indicate the power
requirement for Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS), Non-UPS power clearly
indicating the locations for each.
c) Estimated heat load for the equipment located in satellite rack room / control room.
d) Control room size and layout (Tentative)
1.2.2 Vendor shall clearly define the operational philosophy proposed, which shall be in line with
requirements specified in the job specification. Vendor shall also clearly indicate the
provision of control panels and control systems required for the package along with offer.
1.2.3 Documents like Instrument list and typical specifications and any other details if submitted
by vendor in their bid, shall not be reviewed and shall be retained for records only. All such
details shall be submitted by vendor only after the finalization of P&ID (Piping and
Instrument Diagram) during detail engineering. No implication shall be admissible on the
basis of these documents and vendor shall be responsible for completeness and correctness
of the same with respect to Purchase Requisition/Tender.
1.2.4 Vendor's offer, catalogues, drawings, instrument manuals etc. shall be in English.
Page 1243 of 1823

1.2.5 In addition to mandatory spares, commissioning and consumables indicated elsewhere in

this specification, Vendor shall also quote recommended spares for 2 years normal operation
and maintenance for the complete instrument and control system for the offered package.
1.3 Applicable National/International Standards:
1.3.1 Design and terminology shall comply, as a minimum, with the latest edition of following
codes, standard practices and publications, unless otherwise specified:
AGA American Gas Association, Gas Measurement Committee
Report No.3 Orifice Metering of Natural Gas and Other Related
Hydrocarbon Fluids – Concentric, Square-Edged Orifice
Meters
Report No.7 Measurement of Natural Gas by Turbine Meter
AG181 Foundation Fieldbus System Engineering Guidelines

B 1.20.1 Pipe Threads.
B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24
Metric/Inch Standard
B 16.47-B Large diameter Steel Flanges: NPS 26 Through NPS 60
Metric/Inch Standard
B 16.20 Ring Joint Gaskets and Grooves for Steel Pipe Flanges.
ANSI/FCI American National Standards Institute/Fluid Controls Institute

70.2 Control valve seat leakage classification.
ANSI/ISA American National Standards Institute/Fluid Controls Institute/International
Society of Automation
100.11a Wireless systems for industrial automation: Process control
and related applications
RP 520 Sizing, Selection and Installation of Pressure Relieving
System in Refineries.
Part-I - Sizing and Selection
Part-II - Installation
RP 521 Guide for Pressure Relieving and Depressurizing Systems.
RP 526 Flanged Steel Safety Relief Valves.
RP 527 Seat Tightness of Pressure Relief Valves.
MPMS Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards.
RP 551 Process Measurement Instrumentation.
Part 1 - Process Control and Instrumentation.
RP 552 Transmission Systems
RP 554 Process Instrumentation and Control
RP 555 Process Analyzers
STD 2000 Venting Atmospheric and low pressure storage tank.
STD 670 Machinery Protection Systems
STD 598 Valve inspection & testing
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), Section VIII, Division 1:
Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels.
PTC 19.3
TW : 2016 Thermowell Performance Test
MFC-3M Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes using Orifice, Nozzle
and Venturi
MFC-14M Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes using Small Bore
Precision Orifice Meters
Page 1244 of 1823

ASTM American Society for Tests and Materials

AERB Atomic Energy Regulatory Board
BS / EN British Standard / European Standard

50288-7 Multi Element Metallic Cables used in Analogue and Digital
Communication and Control – Part-7 : Sectional
specification for Instrumentation and Control cables
10204 Inspection Document for Metallic Products
12266 Industrial Valves – Testing of Metallic Valves : Pressure

Tests, test procedures and acceptance criteria
IBR Indian Boiler Regulations.
IS/IEC Indian Standard /International Electrotechnical Commission.
60079 Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas atmosphere.

60085 Electrical Insulation – Thermal Evaluation and Designation
60332 Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions
- Part 1-1: Test for vertical flame propagation for a single
insulated wire or cable - Apparatus
Parts and Sections
60529 Classification of degree of protection provided by enclosures.
60534-2 Industrial Process Control Valves-Flow capacity.
60584-2 Thermocouples – Tolerances
60587 Electrical insulating materials used under severe ambient
conditions - Test methods for evaluating resistance to
tracking and erosion
60751 Industrial Platinum Resistance Thermometer and Platinum
Resistance Sensors
61285 Industrial Process Control Safety of Analyser Houses
61000-4 Electromagnetic compatibility for Industrial Process
measurement and Control equipment
61158 Foundation Fieldbus Specifications
61804-3 Functional blocks for process control – part 3 Electronic
Device Description Language (EDDL)
62591 Industrial networks-Wireless communication network and
communication profiles-Wireless HART
IS Indian Standard
5 Colors for ready mixed paints.
319 Specification for free cutting Brass bars, rods and sections
1239 Mild steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings
1271 Specification of Thermal Evaluation and Classification of
Electrical Insulation
1554 PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables-working
Part I voltage up to and including 1100V
2074 Ready mixed paints, air drying, red oxide- zinc chrome.
3624 Specification for pressure and vacuum gauges
5831 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables
7358 Specifications for Thermocouples
8784 Thermocouple compensating cables
16485 Flame Arresters - Performance Requirements, Test Methods
and Limits for Use
Page 1245 of 1823

ISA International Society of Automation
S-5.1 Instrument Symbols and identification

S-5.2 Binary logic diagrams for process operations.
S 7.0.01 Quality standard for Instrument Air
S-75.xx Standards related to Control Valves
ISO 5167 Measurement of fluid flow by means of orifice plates, nozzles and venturi
tubes inserted in circular cross-section conduits
ISO 16852 Flame arresters - Performance requirements, test methods and limits for use
ISO 15848-1 Industrial valves - Measurement, test and qualification procedures for fugitive
emissions - Part 1: Classification system and qualification procedures for type
testing of valves
ITK Interoperability Test Kit (latest version)
NEC National Electric Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NFPA-496 National Fire Protection Association - Purged and pressurized enclosures for
electrical equipment
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Authority.
SAMA Scientific Apparatus Maker’s Association

1.4 Drawing and Data
1.4.1 Detailed drawings, data and catalogues required from the vendor shall be as per Vendor
Data Requirement attached elsewhere in the Requisition / Tender. In case the tender /
requisition specifies requirement of submission of drawings / documents in specific software
& versions (for example, Smart-plant Instrumentation (SPI) Latest version), all applicable
documents as per vendor data requirement shall be prepared by vendor using the same
software and version as specified in the tender / requisition. Vendor shall handover the final
SPI database file (i.e. “.db”) for complete package for loading into Purchaser’s database.
1.4.2 The minimum requirements expected from the various documents listed in Vendor Data
Requirement shall be as follows:
1.4.2.1 Document Control Index (DCI)
This document lists out all drawings and documents prepared and/or submitted by vendor to
purchaser after placement of order through vendor portal. Following information shall be
available in this document:
a) Name and number of each drawing and document listed.
b) Expected and Actual date of submission to purchaser.
c) Review category of the documents
All of the above information shall be in accordance with the Vendor Data Requirements
(VDR).
Page 1246 of 1823

1.4.2.2 Instrument Index

Instrument Index lists out all instruments appearing on the P&ID without any exception. It
is a basic instrument document which is necessary for the smooth execution of a job and is
also a reference document after the completion of job. Instrument Index shall be prepared in
EIL Format in the specified software.. In case, any other format is used, it must contain all
information as listed in this format as a minimum & the format shall be subject to owner’s
approval.
1.4.2.3 Sub Vendor List (for Instruments and Accessories)
The list of sub-vendor is specified elsewhere in the requisition / tender. Vendor shall
propose sub-vendors as per the list from whom vendor is likely to procure these items.
Instrument Sub-vendor shall meet the enlistment conditions of EIL approval at the time of
placing the order on sub-vendor for the Project Approved Vendor List. The EIL approval
conditions are available with the Sub-Vendors. Vendor shall follow the approval
requirement.
For Instruments / items not covered in the vendor list, Vendor shall get approval from
purchaser/ owner for the vendors proposed, prior to the placement of order. In such cases the
sub-vendors suggested shall be manufacturer of repute and it shall meet the provenness
criteria specified in this document.
1.4.2.4 Instrument Sizing Calculations
Following sizing calculations shall be applicable, in general, duly approved by the authority
indicated in Vendor's Standard Quality Plan;
a) Control valve including noise and velocity,
b) Pressure relief valves/pilot operated pressure relief valves/rupture disc/breather
valve/flame arrester.
c) Flow element including orifice plates, averaging pitot tubes, venturi, flow nozzle,
Coriolis Mass Flowmeter, Restriction Orifice Sizing to check occurrence of Multiple
restriction orifice based on pressure drop indicated in the process data datasheet.
d) Utility consumption calculation including power supply (UPS/Non UPS), Instrument
air, steam for tracing, cooling water, nitrogen etc.
e) Cable sizing calculations for power cables.
f) Intrinsically safe loop calculation for proper selection of cables considering various
entity parameters.
g) Fieldbus Segment loading calculations.
h) Thermowell wake frequency calculations as per ASME PTC 19.3.
1.4.2.5 Utility & Power Requirements
a) Utilities (Cooling water, Nitrogen, instrument Air, steam for tracing)
i. The utilities available along with their respective operating and design
conditions (temperature & pressure) for cooling water, instrument air ,
nitrogen & steam (for tracing) is indicated elsewhere in the tender.
ii. Vendor shall indicate the maximum / Normal / Minimum requirement for each
utility at each location.
b) Power (UPS / Non-UPS)
i. The available UPS & Non-UPS power along with its voltage & type (AC /
DC) is indicated elsewhere in the tender.
ii. Vendor shall indicate the power consumption requirement, in-rush current
with duration and power factor and incomer size requirement at each location.
Page 1247 of 1823

1.4.2.6 Nozzle Elevation for Level Instruments

Nozzle elevation for level Instruments represent the nozzle elevation, nozzle sizes and
rating, requirement of stand-pipes, type of level instrument etc. for all the vessels, columns,
exchangers and tanks shall be in the format provided.
1.4.2.7 Purchase Requisition (PR)
Purchase Requisition shall contain following information as a minimum but updated in line
with the finally accepted offer of the successful vendor including:-
a) Instrument specifications including detailed instrument data sheet and special
requirements, if any
b) Testing and Inspection requirements
c) Vendor's Technical catalogue with model decoding and Vendor's Sizing calculation for
applicable items like control Valves, Safety Valves, Flow elements etc.
d) Vendor data requirements
e) Tag wise applicable Statutory Certificates
f) Approval from PESO Approval for Projects being executed in India in addition to
statutory certificates.
g) For international projects, statutory approval certificates from ATEX/PTB/TUV etc. shall
be provided even for items manufactured in India.
h) Other related documents like Standard Specifications, Quality Assurance requirements
etc.
1.4.2.8 Functional Schematics
Functional Schematics details out the functionality of all the loops shown on the P&ID
including their correlation. The schematic shows all the hardware necessary to configure a
loop including their physical location, their interconnection and important software blocks as
applicable to make a loop complete. Similar loops may be combined under the same
functional schematic.
1.4.2.9 Logic Diagrams
Vendor / contractor shall prepare logic diagram which shall include owner, vendor and sub-
vendor’s specified requirements. The schematic shall be prepared based on ISA S5.2 – A
Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations and shall show the physical location of
Input/output devices, their interconnection with functional blocks, bench status of all
electrical devices etc. The schematic shall also be supplemented with operational
requirements like startup and process bypasses, reset and shut down push buttons, selector
switches, status lamp etc.Any soft tags as information to DCS shall be shown in the logic
diagram.
1.4.2.10 Instrument Loop drawings
Each loop (FF & Non-FF) shall have a separate Instrument Loop drawing which shall show
each component from field device to final receiver including physical location; initiating
device, its terminal number; junction box with its terminal number; cable number with pair
number/polarity; receiver instrument terminals/cabinet terminals; system functional blocks
of loop in simplified manner (without configuration details). Fuse rating shall be shown
wherever fuses are applicable in the loop drawing.
1.4.2.11 Control Room Layout
Indicative control room layout shall be provided in the tender. Vendor shall prepare detailed
control room layout on control room architectural drawing and shall also show layout of
equipment in engineering room/computer room etc. Control room layout drawing shall
indicate the location of control panels, system cabinets, marshalling racks and other
Page 1248 of 1823

auxiliary cabinets, consoles with monitors, hard wired consoles, printers, non-system
panels/cabinets including panels/cabinets for packages, LEL panel, fire alarms panels or any
other equipment required to be installed in control room.
1.4.2.12 Panel Front Arrangement
This drawing shall show the arrangement of panel mounted instruments like indicating
instruments, alarm annunicator, indicating lamps, push buttons/switches etc. including their
approximate sizes and their mounting locations.
1.4.2.13 Configuration Diagram
The basic configuration diagram shall be provided in the tender. Vendor shall prepare
detailed configuration diagram with graphical representation of all major hardware required
for the control system control system which are necessary to meet all the expected functional
requirements.
1.4.2.14 Dynamic Graphic Display Drawings
These drawings provide a graphic representation of P&ID's arranged in a sequence which
when displayed on the HMI, shall provide easy and logical operational views.
1.4.2.15 Input/ Output Assignment
This document indicates the physical assignment of various I/O modules and their respective
channels to various physical inputs and outputs.
1.4.2.16 Instrument Duct/Tray/Trench Layout
Instrument duct/tray /trench drawing indicating routing of main instrument duct/tray trench
in the unit/plant shall be prepared on plot-plan/Equipment layout and shall show the size,
cross-section at various locations, general notes, symbols, reference drawings and the
control room entry.The scope shall be as per the tender and it shall match the drawing
provided in the tender.
1.4.2.17 Instrument Location Plans
Instrument Location Plans shall show the location of instruments, location of tapping points,
location of local panels, junction boxes, main cable trenches, instrument air distribution
scheme etc. These drawings are prepared on equipment layout drawings in 1:50 or 1:100
scale depending on density of instruments.
1.4.2.18 Instrument Cable Schedule
The instrument cable schedule shall show all instrument and power cables required for
complete instrumentation. The document shall show tag number, cable number, type, length
and size of cables, type of junction box, identity of local panel, control room panel/cabinet
location etc. The document shall also show the size of terminals considered for power
junction boxes and the dimensions of cable considered by the vendor. The cable type and
size shall be as per the details provided elsewhere in the tender.
The cable schedule document shall include all single & multi pair cables indicating
terminations of instruments, field junction boxes and respective termination in satellite rack
room / Control room cabinets. The instrument cable schedule shall be prepared on EIL
format.
1.4.2.19 3D Modelling:
Whenever 3D modeling is included in package vendor’s scope, it shall include the following
instrumentation items as a minimum:
a. Instrument Cable Duct/ Cable trench
b. Analyzer shelter/ cabinet
c. Local Control Panels
Page 1249 of 1823

d. Prefabricated Hook-ups (as applicable for the project)

e. Gas Detectors, Hooters / beacons
f. CCTV Camera along with water tank (wherever supplied)
g. Instrument Junction Boxes
h. Instrument Stanchions and Canopy
i. For DP type level Instruments with Drain / Vent connected to CBD/ ABD / Flare
j. Volume bottles for Control valves & on-off valves.
k. Fire/Flame detectors.
l. ESD Push buttons/ Field push buttons/ lamps
1.4.2.20 MCT Block Assignment
MCT Block assignment drawing shall be prepared by the vendor if supply of MCT frame
and blocks is in vendor’s scope of supply.
1.4.2.21 Instrument installation Standards and Hook-up drawings
Instrument Installation standards and Hook-up drawings shall be generated by package
vendors for applicable instruments in package vendor scope of supply.
2.0 DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
2.1 Instrumentation shall be complete in every respect in accordance with latest approved
P&IDs for the safe, efficient and easy operation, start up and shut down of the plant.
2.2 All instruments and equipment shall be suitable for use in a hot, humid and tropical
industrial climate in which corrosive gases and/or chemicals may be present. As a
minimum, all instruments and enclosures in field shall be metallic construction, dust proof
and weatherproof to IP-65 as per IS/IEC-60529 and secure against the ingress of fumes,
dampness, insects and vermin. Instruments like flowmeters located below grade (in sumps,
pits etc.) shall have ingress protection of IP-67.All external surfaces shall be suitably treated
to provide protection against corrosive plant atmosphere.
2.3 The design of electronic instruments shall be in compliance with the electromagnetic
compatibility requirements as per IEC 61000-4 'Electromagnetic compatibility for Industrial
Process measurement and Control equipment.
2.4 Instrument Requirements for Classified Area:
a) Certified Intrinsically Safe (IS) equipment as per IS/IEC-60079-11 shall be used, in
general, in hazardous area, for conventional loops.
b) Field instruments in fieldbus loops shall be designed and certified as per the hazardous
area protection specified in Job Specification.
c) In case intrinsically safe equipment is not available, flameproof enclosures as per
IS/IEC-60079-01 may be considered.
d) Junction boxes, cable glands and accessories required for flameproof instruments shall
also be certified flameproof.
e) All non-flameproof panels and cabinets installed in classified area shall be purged as
per requirements specified in NFPA-496, as a minimum with Type X or Z as
applicable.
f) For FF junction box (High Power trunk),Exe type of protection is acceptable. However,
the cable glands shall be “Ex-d” certified, ET type with check-nut.
g) Other type of protection specified in IS/IEC-60079 shall not be used.
Page 1250 of 1823

2.5 Statutory Approvals

a) Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all statutory approvals, as applicable, for
all instruments and control systems.
b) In addition, equipments/instruments/systems located in the hazardous area shall be
certified by the local statutory authorities for their use in the area of their installation. In
general following certification shall be given:
i) For all intrinsically safe/ FISCO/FINICO/ explosion proof/flameproof equipment/
instruments/systems or equipments with any other type of protection allowable as
per this package which are manufactured abroad and certified by any statutory
authority like Laboratorie Central Des Industries Electriques(LCIE), British
Approval Service for Electrical Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres(Baseefa),
Factory Mutual(FM), Underwriters laboratories(UL) etc. for compliance to ATEX
directives or other equivalent standards. All these equipment/ instruments/systems
shall additionally have the approval of Petroleum and Explosives Safety
Organisation (PESO), Nagpur, if installed in INDIA and the same is mandatory.
ii) For all flame proof equipment manufactured locally (indigenously), the testing
shall be carried out by any of the approved test house like Central Institute of
Mining & Fuel research(CIMFR)/Electronics Regional Testing
Laboratory(ERTL)etc. The equipment shall in addition bear the valid approval
from Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation (PESO), Nagpur and a valid
BIS license.
iii) For all intrinsically safe equipment manufactured locally (indigenously), the
testing shall be carried out by any of the approved test house like Central Institute
of Mining & Fuel research(CIMFR)/Electronics Regional Testing
Laboratory(ERTL)etc. The equipment shall in addition bear the valid approval
from Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation (PESO), Nagpur.
c) Approvals other than above shall neither be offered nor will these be acceptable.
d) Atomic energy regulation board (AERB) approval for nucleonic instruments.
2.6 Ranges for instruments shall be selected in general, such that in normal process operation
the indication is between 35% to 65% of the range i.e. middle 30% of the full working
range.
2.7 All instrument type shall be strictly as per the P&ID.
2.8 Field mounted process switches shall not be considered unless its use is unavoidable and the
same shall be subject to purchaser’s approval. Instead transmitters shall be used along with
primary element. In case switch has been considered, same shall be provided with sealed
micro switch contacts rated for the specified application. Also contacts shall be SPDT type
unless otherwise specified. Contacts used in intrinsically safe applications shall be suitable
for the application.
Tuning fork type switches can be used for tank overfill protection.
2.9 Intrinsically Safe System Requirements (for Non Fieldbus Instruments)
Following points must be considered while designing an intrinsically safe system;
a) All intrinsic safety isolators shall be active type with three port isolation.
b) IS isolators shall be provided by the vendor for all intrinsically safe input/output analog
circuits wherever field signals are from electrically hazardous area. In such cases, the
system shall be designed intrinsically safe based on entity concept. For hazardous area
for Gas Group IIC, 50% rule as per IEC-61079 shall be applied for selecting suitable IS
isolator for the filed cable distances given in the requisition. The IS isolator shall be
Page 1251 of 1823

certified by a statutory authority like Baseefa, LCIE, CSA, UL, PTB, CIMFR etc., for
the use in the area classification as specified elsewhere in the job specifications. The
proper selection of the IS isolators shall be the vendor's total responsibility.
c) Each input and output in a loop shall have separate IS isolator. No IS isolator shall be
shared between two loops or input/outputs.
d) Any device required to be connected to any intrinsically safe loop in the hazardous side
permanently or temporarily shall also be certified intrinsically safe.
f) Configurator and local indicator shall also be certified for the hazardous area
classification.
2.10 Power Supplies and their Distribution
a) Power supply shall be made available at the following voltage levels, unless otherwise
specified:
° For Instruments, Control Systems, 240V AC/110V AC UPS
Analyzer
° Solenoid Valves, Relays, lamps 24V DC/ 110 V AC UPS
° Input interrogation voltage 24V DC
° Panel/cabinets lighting 240V AC Non-UPS ± 10%
In case 24 V DC is required for Input interrogation, relays and lamps, any other vendor
supplied instruments/ electronics), same shall be considered by the vendor using dual
redundant power packs (110 V AC to 24 V DC converter). 24 V DC feeders shall not be
provided by Purchaser unless indicated specifically in the job specifications.
b) All instruments, control systems (PLC and DCS) and analyzer system shall be able to
operate at the following UPS specification:
Voltage level : 240V AC/110V AC± 10%
Frequency : 50 Hz ±3 Hz
Power interruption : 20 millisecond
c) Power feeders shall be supplied to the vendor at only one location. All further
distribution within the package shall be taken care of by the vendor. Number and size of
power feeders shall be informed during detail engineering. Vendor shall provide
adequate number and size of terminals and cable glands required.
d) Instrument power circuits shall be individually protected and isolated from fault with
the help of fuses and DPST switches. Power supply to the individual instrument shall
be disconnected with the help of DPST switch and protected with the help of fuses.
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB's) may be selected in place of switch fuse unit in case
protection is provided for overload protection.
e) For the following vendor supplied systems which can accept redundant UPS power
supply feeders, primary feeder shall be used to power the primary components and the
secondary feeder for the secondary components inside the system cabinets:-
(i) Machine Monitoring System
(ii) Anti-Surge System
(iii) Governor System
(iv) Over-speed Protection system
(v) Any other standalone microprocessor based system
Wherever redundant UPS power supply is provided by the Purchaser to Vendor
supplied systems, vendor shall ensure that common 240 or 110 V AC UPS bus-bar is
Page 1252 of 1823

not made inside the system cabinets. Only 24V DC bus bar where required shall be
allowed inside the cabinets using redundant Bulk power supplies (BPS) and
corresponding ORings.
2.11 Alarm Philosophy
a) Alarms shall be provided to give audible and visual warning of any process and
machine malfunction in the package.
b) All trips shall have a pre-trip warning alarm in addition to alarm at the trip condition.
c) Package alarms including pre-trip warning alarms and trip alarms (shutdown alarms)
shall be annunciated on the local panel as per approved P&ID.Both Intrinsic Safe (IS)
type or Flameproof (Ex'd') type Alarm Annunciators are acceptable for Local Panel.
d) ‘Fail-safe’ type with normally closed alarm contacts shall be used.
2.12 All line or equipment mounted instruments like control valves, pressure relief valves,
thermo-wells, orifice flanges, level instruments etc., installed on pipes and vessels under
IBR shall be certified by IBR or their authorized representative.
2.13 Location of process connections shall be from the side or from the top of the process
equipment but not from the bottom unless bottom nozzle requirement is specifically required
as per Licensor. This requirement is applicable to both pipes and vessels. The location of
bottom side (wherever used as per Process Licensor requirement) connection for level
measurement shall be extended minimum 50mm inside the equipment with the approval of
purchaser to prevent plugging due to dirt or other suspended solids. In addition, the
connections shall be short, vertical or horizontal and without any pockets.
2.14 Material of construction of instruments shall be as per the material selection chart, attached
as Annexure I of this specification, as a minimum. However vendor is responsible to ensure
that the selected material is consistent with temperature, pressure, corrosion conditions and
other process requirements.
2.15 Field Transmitters
2.15.1 SMART (4-20 mA + HART)Field Transmitters:
2.15.1.1 The field transmitters in all conventional loops shall be smart (4-20 mA + HART) type only
unless specified otherwise. Field transmitters for flow, pressure, temperature, differential
pressure and level applications shall be yoke mounted type unless specified otherwise. Meter
electronics used for flow measurement etc. shall include all the associated items like pre-
amplifier, converter, transmitter, integrator, integral output meter etc.
2.15.1.2 Field transmitter shall be intrinsically safe and meter electronics shall be intrinsically safe, in
general. In case, intrinsically safe is not available from the approved vendor list enclosed
with this requisition/tender, flameproof enclosure is acceptable. In case sensor/ pick up coil
is intrinsically safe, suitable barrier shall be provided and installed in flameproof enclosure.
2.15.1.3 These transmitters shall be 2 wire systems having 4 - 20 mA DC output with superimposed
digital signal having simultaneous analog and digital communication with HART
communication protocol, unless otherwise specified.
2.15.1.4 The transmitter shall be microprocessor based and it shall incorporate a non-volatile memory
which shall store complete configuration data of transmitter and sensor characterization. All
necessary signal conversions, including conversion to produce output with the required
protocol shall be carried out in the transmitter electronics. The configuration data of the
instruments shall be stored in a non-volatile memory such that this remains unchanged
because of power fluctuations or power off condition. In case vendor standard instrument
has battery backed RAM, vendor to ensure that battery drain alarm is provided as diagnostic
maintenance message.
2.15.1.5 Transmitter shall also run complete diagnostic subroutines and shall provide diagnostic
alarm messages for sensor as well as transmitter healthiness. In the event of detection
Page 1253 of 1823

failure, the output shall be driven to a predefined value, which shall be field configurable.
2.15.1.6 Universal hand held configurator / terminal for the configuration and maintenance of
instruments with HART output shall be provided for all HART based smart
instruments.Quantity of the same shall be as per Job specification document which will be
part of the package input.
2.15.2 Fieldbus Field Transmitter and devices:
2.15.2.1 Fieldbus transmitters/ devices shall be provided, if specified, in fieldbus loops.
2.15.2.2 Field bus based transmitter/ devices shall meet the following requirements;
a) All instruments must satisfy the requirements of the fieldbus registration laboratory
with applicable check mark like foundation fieldbus as specified in Job Specification.
b) All instruments shall be polarity in-sensitive. Also transmitter shall be LAS capability.
c) All instruments shall have Analog Input (AI) block and Proportional, Integration and
Differential (PID) control block, as a minimum.
d) All instruments must be interoperable and shall have valid interoperability test
clearance like ITK latest version for foundation field bus or equivalent for profibus PA,
as applicable.
e) The field bus instruments shall support peer to peer communication with two wire
communication and bus powered supply.
f) All instruments shall support EDDL or FDT/DTM requirements.
g) Internal software shall be configured by the vendor including the following information
such as serial number, Device Tag (Tag Number) and Process description
h) All instruments shall be capable of supporting incremental Device descriptor (DD) for
extra functionality and /or software revisions in device memory.
i) Soft copy of the Device Descriptor (DD) files for configuring the FF device parameters
and common file format (CFF) files for integrating the device into the system shall be
provided by the vendor for offline configuration by System vendor immediately after
despatch.
j) Fieldbus based field indicator shall be able to indicate all signals available in the
fieldbus segment, selectively.
2.15.2.3 The fieldbus / devices provided shall be able to communicate with latest universal fieldbus
communicator.
2.15.3 Accuracy of transmitters (Pressure & Differential pressure), smart as well as fieldbus based
shall be as follows:
Type of Transmitter Range of Transmitter Accuracy
Direct 760 mm WC and above Equal to or better than ±0.065%
Direct Less than 760 mm WC Equal to or better than ±0.15%
Diaphragm seal 500 mm WC and above Equal to or better than ±0.25%
Diaphragm seal Less than 500 mm WC Equal to or better than ±0.5%
The accuracy is defined as the combined effect of repeatability, linearity and hysteresis.
The stability shall be as follows:
Page 1254 of 1823

Range Of Transmitter Stability
760 mm WC and Above ±0.2% of URL for a period of minimum 5 year
Less Than 760 mm WC ±0.2% of URL for a period of minimum 1 year
Rangeability of transmitters shall be 1:100

2.15.4 Transmitter shall update the output at least 8 times a second unless otherwise specified.
Unless specified otherwise in purchaser’s specification, transmitter response time shall be as
follows:
a) For transmitter range of 760 mm WC and above, the response time shall be equal to or
better than 500 milliseconds.
b) For transmitter range below 760mm WC, the response shall be equal to or better than 1
second.
The response time of the transmitter shall be considered as the sum of dead time and 63.2%
step response time of the transmitter.
2.15.5 Unless specified otherwise, the over-range/static pressure protection of the transmitter shall
be as follows;
Over range/ static pressure <N1>

Range of Transmitter
Pressure Transmitter Differential Pressure
(kg/cm²) Transmitter (kg/cm²)
0 < ® < 250 mm WC 20 20
250 < ® < 1000 mm WC 40 100
1000 mm WC < ® <10 kg/cm² 40 160
10< ® <25 kg/cm² 52 160
25< ® < 100 kg/cm² 160 160
> 100 kg/cm² 200 210
<N1> However if the Over range/ static pressure value specified above is less than the
maximum/ design pressure of service conditions, offered instrument shall be suitable for the
maximum/ design pressure.
2.15.6 Diaphragm seal DP transmitters in flow measurement with a DP of less than 250mmWC shall
be avoided and alternate type of flow meters shall be provided for such cases suitable to the
process condition.
2.15.7 All transmitters shall have vent and drain facility and the same shall be provided with metallic
plugs. All the cable entries shall also be provided with metallic plugs.
2.15.8 In place of capillary diaphragm seal differential pressure / level transmitter, remote sensor
type differential pressure transmitter based on digital calculation shall be used wherever total
capillary length combining both the legs is greater than 10 meters.
2.15.9 Line plugging detection facility shall be provided, whenever specified in requisition.
Page 1255 of 1823

2.16 Instrument Connections

2.16.1 The connections of instruments installed on vessels, tanks, standpipes and piping shall be as
per following EIL Standards.
a) 7-52-0001 Instrument Connections on Vessels and tanks.
b) 7-52-0002 Instrument connection on Piping.
2.16.2 Pneumatic instrument connections for signal and air supply shall be 1/4" NPT (F).
2.16.3 Electrical cable entry connection shall be 1/2" NPT (F)/3/4”NPT(F) as per the cable size.
2.16.4 End connections shall meet the following, unless, otherwise specified:
a) Threaded end connection shall be NPT as per ASME B1.20.1.
b) Flanged end connection shall be as per ASME B16.5 or ASME B16.47B or
AWWAC207 Cl D as per related Piping Specification.
c) When Flanges are Raised Face (RF) type, the face finish shall be as per ASME B 16.5
and shall be as follows:
125 AARH : 125 to 250 microinch AARH
63 AARH : 32 to 63 micro inch AARH
d) Grooves of ring type joint flanges shall be octagonal as per ASME B 16.20 and
groove finish shall be as follows:
63 AARH : 32 to 63 micro inch AARH
2.17 Instrument Air Supply
2.17.1 Air supply at pressure specified elsewhere shall be made available to the vendor at the
battery limit for distribution to the instruments.
2.17.2 For Control & On-off valve, the actuator sizing shall be done considering a pressure value
0.5 Kg/cm2 less than the minimum air pressure supplied at instrument battery limit, unless
specified otherwise in job specification.
2.17.3 Instrument air quality shall be as per ISA- S 7.0.01and free from corrosive, hazardous and
toxic contaminants.
2.17.4 Vendor can utilize 6 way or 12 way Air distribution Manifold for air supply to consumers
within the package battery limit.
2.18 Interface with Main Control Room
2.18.1 All signals from package battery limit to purchaser’s control room shall be terminated in
junction boxes or local control panels supplied by the vendor, located within package battery
limit. Marshalling details between purchaser-vendor cabling shall be shown with
corresponding junction box termination number allocated against appropriate
purchaser's/vendor's instrument tag number in the format provided by purchaser.
2.18.2 Signals shall be segregated by providing separate junction boxes.
- Fieldbus based Signals
- Intrinsically Safe Analog Inputs/Outputs (4-20mA)
- Non -intrinsically Safe Analog Inputs/Outputs (4-20mA)
- Intrinsically Safe Thermocouple Inputs
- Intrinsically Safe RTD Inputs
- Intrinsically Safe contact Inputs
- Non-Intrinsically Safe contact Inputs
- Intrinsically safe contact Outputs
Page 1256 of 1823

- Non-Intrinsically Safe contact Outputs

DCS and PLC signals shall be further segregated and shall in no case be mixed up.
Dedicated terminal strips shall be provided in the local control panel to ensure segregation
philosophy.
2.19 Local control loops shall be avoided. In case these are unavoidable, these shall be electronic
field mounted manual loading station with specific approval.
3.0 SPARES PHILOSOPHY
3.1 Mandatory Spares
The following mandatory spares shall be provided by vendor as a minimum.
3.1.1 Predefined Mandatory Spares
Mandatory spares shall be ware-house spares and shall be supplied as loose items.
3.1.1.1 Higher of 10% or minimum one of each type (range, type, material and rating ) of complete
instruments for commonly used instruments such as transmitter, gauges, temperature
elements, switches, probes, special cables (like cables between ultrasonic flow meter probe
to pre-amplifier or JunctionBox or vibration probe to pre-amplifier or JunctionBox as
applicable), Valve positioner including PST positioner.
3.1.1.2 For Control valve and on-off valve,one set of packing and bonnet gasket with tag, one set of
stem seal o-ring for each actuator and piston o-ring additionally for each piston actuated
valve, line bolting (set of studs and nut) and set of gasket with each tag no.
3.1.2 Commissioning Spares
Vendor shall be responsible to supply all spares which are found necessary to replace while
performing pre-commissioning and commissioning activities and this includes system
oriented items (hardware / software).
3.1.3 Consumable spares
Vendor shall supply consumable spares for six months or twelve month of normal operation
as per job specification.
3.1.4 Engineering Spares
3.1.4.1 For Control system, installed spare module of higher of 10% or minimum one of
input/output modules (including termination panels, if applicable) to enhance the system
functional requirements of control system.
3.1.4.2 For Hardwired console / Local control panel:
a) A minimum of 20% spare windows with alarm modules shall be provided in alarm
annunciator.
b) A minimum of 20% spare status lamps / switches / pushbuttons / terminals or one no of
each type, whichever is higher, shall be provided.
c) For pneumatic panels, 10% spare instrument air header branch lines and 15% spare
bulkheads and tapping points shall be provided in each panel.
d) Control panels shall have additional spare-space as per clause 4.2.8 of this specification.
3.2 Spares for 2 years normal operation
Vendor shall supply a list of recommended spare parts for each instrument and system
required for two (2) years of normal operation. These spares shall be quoted separately.
4.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTS
4.1 Panel Board Instruments
Page 1257 of 1823

4.1.1 Alarm Annunciator shall be microprocessor based programmable type with plug in modules
and integral power supply. Window display shall be cluster LED type integral power supply.
For window display with back lighted incandescent lamps two numbers of incandescent
lamps of minimum 5 watt each shall be provided for each window. For cluster type LED
display, the number of LED’s in the cluster matrix windows shall be sufficient to provide
illumination level of at least 150 lumens. The circuit shall be designed in such a way that
removal/failure of one lamp or LED from a window/ cluster shall not hamper functioning of
that particular window/display. The annunciator lamps shall be replaceable from the front of
the enclosure panel. In general, dedicated alarm logic module shall be used for each alarm
input.
Both Intrinsically safe or Flameproof annunciator circuit can be used. For, Intrinsically safe
annunciator circuit, when used, shall have power supply unit in a safe area. Annunciator
alarm sequence shall be as per F3A of ISA.
Alarm annunciator shall be SIL certified. Redundant card shall be used for annunciator and
failure of one card shall not cause failure of indication.
The design of the alarm annunciator system shall be such that transient alarms of less than
330 milliseconds duration shall be automatically rejected.
4.2 Panel Design
4.2.1 All panels shall be supplied in pre-wired condition and shall be completely tested at
manufacturer's works prior to dispatch.
4.2.2 Panels shall be freestanding type. Panels with instruments mounted on the front shall be
fabricated from 3 mm thick cold rolled steel sheet. If the same is not available, 4 mm thick
hot rolled steel sheet shall be used. All other panels shall be fabricated from 2mm thick cold
rolled steel sheet. Angle iron framework shall use a minimum section of 50 x 50 x 4 mm
angle. Panel painting procedure shall include blast cleaning, grinding, chemical cleaning,
surface finishing by suitable filler and two coats of high grade lacquer with wet blasting
wherever required. Two coats of paint in the panel color shall be provided for non-glossy
high satin finish. Final coat shall be given after assembly at shop before dispatch.
Unless otherwise specified, exterior/interior portion of all panels and closed cabinets shall
have a color as per RAL-7035. Channel base shall be of black color.
4.2.3 Panel shall be enclosed cubicle type with each section of typically 2100 mm high, 1200 mm
wide and 800 mm deep mounted on 100 mm channel base.
4.2.4 Enclosed cubicle panels shall have removable hinged doors for easy maintenance and
accessibility of the instruments. Doors shall be double leaved type with handle and shall be
provided with lock and key. Adequate illumination shall be provided inside the panel. All
light fittings shall be suitable for 240 V, 50 Hz AC. Power supply greater than 240 V shall
also not enter the control panel.
4.2.5 All cable entries to the panel shall be from panel bottom only using cable glands of adequate
size. Cable gland plate thickness shall be a minimum of 3 mm cold rolled cold annealed
(CRCA) as a minimum. Adequate ET type with check-nut cable glands shall be provided by
vendor for cable entry. All unused cable entries must be plugged.
4.2.6 Space heater shall be provided where condensation is expected. The space heater provided
shall be with temperature cut off and manual control.Air Conditioner shall be provided to
maintain inside temperature and avoid failure of components if ambient temperature is more
than the operating temperature of any component / equipment inside the panel. This is
applicable for local control panel only.
4.2.7 The design of panel shall incorporate provision for expansion by installing adequate spare
capacity. Each panel shall be designed to accommodate the following additional equipment,
as a minimum:
a) 20% of panel front/inside mounted instruments including lamps, push buttons,
Page 1258 of 1823

switches, relays etc.

b) 20% additional power feeders each provided with switch fuse assembly.
c) 20% additional spare windows in alarm annunciators.
d) 20% spare cable entry points.
4.2.8 Panel layout shall be designed considering ease of operation. No push button or hand switch
shall be located below 600 mm. Instrument mounting heights, in general, shall be as follows:
a) Electronic Instruments Bottom row 1100 mm
Middle row 1350 mm
Top row 1600 mm
b) Annunciators - 1950 mm
c) Electric push buttons/ - 700 mm
switches, lamps etc.
4.2.9 The internal panel layout shall be designed considering proper approach for instruments,
terminals and other accessories for maintenance, easy removal and online calibration. No
instrument, terminals, power distribution box etc shall be mounted on the panel side plates
inside the panel.
4.2.10 All lamps, status as well as alarm, shall be provided with lamp test facility. One single lamp
test push button shall be used for each panel. Logic for lamp test shall not be implemented
through relay logic in the panel.
4.2.11 Color Scheme
a) Status Lamps
On/Open/Permissive : Green
Off/Close/Emergency : Red
b) Alarms
Normal/Pre-trip alarms : Amber
Shutdown alarms : Red
c) Push/Pull buttons
On/Open : Green
Off/Close : Red
Emergency shut-down (ESD) : Red
(Push-button with cover/
Mushroom push button)
ESD push button shall be provided with acrylic protective cover.
4.2.12 Panel Wiring
4.2.12.1 Open terminals shall generally be avoided. Terminal strips shall preferably be mounted in an
enclosure. Fused terminal may be used wherever necessary.All terminals shall be of
mechanical screw clamp/screwless type with pressure plates as per the job specification.
Self-insulating crimping wire lugs shall be used for all terminations on terminal blocks,
whereas forked tongue type or lug with eyehole type shall be used for termination on
screwed terminals such as on relays, push buttons, lamp etc. Terminal blocks shall be rated
for 600 V.
Page 1259 of 1823

4.2.12.2 A minimum of 1 mm2 multi stranded PVC insulated copper conductor shall be used in
general. All wiring shall be laid in the PVC troughs. No trough shall be more than 70%
full.
4.2.12.3 Wires carrying measurement signals associated with thermocouples, resistance
thermometers and other low level signals shall be routed in separate troughs/wire ways and
not along with power cables. Power wiring and control wiring shall be separated by not less
than 150 mm. The crossing, if unavoidable, shall be as close to right angles as possible.
4.2.12.4 Extension cables/wires shall be used for all thermocouple inputs. These wires shall be
routed in separate troughs/wire-ways.
4.2.12.5 All intrinsically safe wires shall be routed in separate wire ways from non-intrinsically safe
and power wiring. Intrinsically safe wiring and terminals shall be light blue in color and
shall be separated from non-intrinsically safe terminals at least by 50 mm.
4.2.12.6 All incoming power feeders shall be terminated on separate terminals suitable for the
incoming feeder size. These shall be located at the bottom of the panel and shall be suitably
covered for protection against accidental shorting and for human safety.
4.2.12.7 Power supply shall be made available at one point. Further power distribution network shall
be designed such that a single power fault in any instrument branch system shall not cause a
trip of the entire system. Each consumer shall be provided with a separate switch and fuse
for isolation and protection of the system.
4.2.12.8 Panel rear and front shall only be used for installation of all applicable components. Panel
sides shall not be used for mounting any components unless specifically required with the
approval from EIL/ Owner and only utility power sockets can be mounted on the side of the
cabinet.
4.2.13 Electrical Wiring
All the cabinets, consoles and panels shall be completely wired. Interconnections shall
preferably be done with the help of pre-tracked cables. Vendor may follow their standard
wiring practices, however the requirements specified herein must be complied.
a) All wiring shall conform to API RP 552- Transmission Systems. Different signal level
cables shall be routed with separation distances as recommended by code.
b) All wiring inside racks, cabinets, and back of the panels shall be housed in covered,
non-flammable plastic raceways arranged to permit easy assembly to various
instruments for maintenance, adjustments, repair and removal.
c) All wiring in the raceways shall be properly clamped. All incoming cable shall be
terminated by vendor at marshalling rack with cable glanding including supply of
cable glands. Total wiring cross-sectional area shall not exceed 50% of the raceway
cross sectional area.
d) Separate wiring raceways shall be used for power supply wiring, DC and low level
signal wiring, and intrinsically safe wiring. Parallel runs of AC and DC wiring closer
than 300mm shall be avoided.
e) Vendor can alternately offer prefabricated cables for interconnection between
different cabinets and panels.
f) Wire termination shall be done using self-insulating crimping lugs. More than two
wires shall not be terminated on one side of single terminal. The use of shorting links
for looping shall not be done.
g) No splicing is allowed in between wire / cable straight run.
Page 1260 of 1823

4.2.14 Terminals and Terminal Blocks
a) Terminals shall be non-hygroscopic type made up of unbreakable, fire-retardant, safe

extinguishable, halogen free polyamide compound.
b) Terminals shall be suitable for wires up to 2.5 sq. mm base solid or stranded
conductor in general. For power cables, higher size terminals shall be used.
c) The metal parts of terminals shall be of high quality (pure electrolytic) copper and
shall be tin or nickel plated (of thickness up to 15 micron).
d) The spring material for all terminals shall be chrome nickel spring steel of high tensile
strength and of excellent corrosion résistance. All terminal / terminal blocks shall be
DIN Rail mounted type and shall be easily removable. The size of the terminal blocks
/ terminals of different types shall be consistent and identical.
e) All terminal blocks shall be mounted on suitable anodized metallic or plastic stand-
off.
f) Terminal strips shall be arranged group-wise for incoming and outgoing cables
separately. Terminal blocks for intrinsically safe wiring shall be separate. 20% spare
terminals shall be provided, as a minimum, preferably in each terminal strip.
4.2.15 Following design philosophy shall be followed while deciding the internal layout of panels,
as a minimum;
a) Distance between terminal strip and : 100 mm (min.) + trough
side of the panel up to 50 terminals width
b) Distance between two adjacent terminal : 100mm (min.) + trough
strips width
c) Distance between gland plate and : 300mm (min.)
bottom of the strip
d) Distance of terminal strip : 100mm (min.)
from instrument/trough/panel top
4.3 Local Control Panel (LCP)
4.3.1 Local control panel for the package units shall be installed within the battery limit of the
package considering operational and maintenance requirements and accessibility. In case of
skid mounted packages, panel shall be located away from the skid.
In case local control panel is housed outdoor i.e. not in a local control room, it shall be
designed to meet IP-55 requirements. In addition, panel must be provided with a rain cum
sun shade/canopy.
4.3.2 Local control panel/panels shall be totally enclosed cubicles. Panel sizing shall be carried
out based on equipment being installed keeping in view the maintenance clearances and
easiness of operation. Although the panel dimensions shall be guided by the actual
requirements, typical dimensions shall be 2100 mm height x 1200 mm width x 1000 mm
depth. In any case, vendor shall not proceed with panel manufacturing before getting prior
approval from the purchaser.
4.3.3 Local control panels located in the hazardous area shall either be purged type or flame proof
Ex’d’ or weather proof with Ex’d’ components such as lamps, push buttons, switches etc. as
specified in job specification. In case pressurized panels are specified the same shall be
purged and pressurized as per NFPA 496 requirements to render space within the panel non
hazardous. For panels located in IEC Zone 2, hazardous area type Z purging shall be used
Page 1261 of 1823

with a purge fail alarm in main control room. In case, panels are located in Zone 1, the
power shall be cut off on pressurization failure as per X-purge requirements of NFPA-496.
An alarm shall be provided on local panel and a contact shall be provided for remote
annunciation, whenever the panel pressurization falls below 2.5 mm of H2O. A protective
device to protect the panel from over pressure must be provided.
4.3.4 Panel pressurization with start-up panel purging scheme shall be fully automatic however it
shall be started manually from a push button. Solenoid valves and differential pressure
switch required for panel purging shall be flameproof, however other items like relays,
switches/pushbuttons, timers etc. shall be located in a flameproof housing. Other items like
valves, restriction orifice plates, dual filter regulators, pressure gauges, rotameters etc.
required for pressurization shall also be located in the non-pressurized section of the panel.
4.3.5 It shall be possible to switch off incoming power to panel from panel front. All such power
on/off switches shall be flameproof type.
In addition, all those devices and terminals, which cannot be powered off from on/off
switches shall also be located inside flameproof enclosures.
4.3.6 All hinges, screws and other non-painted metallic parts shall be of stainless steel material.
Door handle and its latching rod shall be stainless steel type.
4.3.7 All other requirements as specified in clause 4.2 of this specification shall also be applicable
for local control panels.
4.3.8 Whenever weatherproof local panel is provided by vendor for classified area, the Alarm
Annunciator shall be either intrinsically safe or Flameproof and push button, lamps; selector
switches shall be flame-proof "Exd" type mounted on LCP. IS Barriers/ relays for IS alarm
annunciator shall be supplied by vendor along with IS annunciator and potential free non-
flameproof contact for the same shall be considered from the PLC / DCS/ control systems.
The IS power supply module for alarm annunciator shall be installed in a flameproof box in
local panel by vendor. For Lamps, wet contact shall be considered from the PLC/ control
system and the lamp test logic shall be realized in PLC/ control system. The Power supply
distribution box inside the Local Panel shall also be flame-proof "Exd'. IS PCs for display of
loop powered indicators shall be used in weather-proof local panels in case no. of tag local
display more than Five tags. The same IS PC can also be used for local display of vibration
and temperature monitoring system parameters at field instead of separate display unit at
field. For 5 or less number of tags for local indication, normal IS loop powered indicators
shall be provided on weather proof local panel.
Intrinsically Safe (IS) type with minimum 15” Display (Remote interactive PC terminal) unit
certified suitable for the hazardous area shall be mounted on the panel front of local control
panel of the package, wherever IS PC is considered. All local control panel mounted field
remote output indicators, wherever required as per approved P&IDs, shall be displayed in
this remote PC. Single serial interface (RS 485 with Modbus RTU protocol or Modbus
TCP/IP Protocol, as available) corresponding to these signals from control system shall be
considered and vendor’s scope shall include all necessary converters, power supply module,
connectors at both ends along with serial communication cables for connecting to serial
interface cards. For serial interface with Plant DCS, the IS PC shall be designed to be slave
device with the plant DCS as master. IS PC shall be equipped with required driver software
for displaying graphics.
The PC terminal shall be equipped with necessary keyboard suitable for specified hazardous
area.
4.4 Local Gauge Board
4.4.1 Local gauge board shall be used to install skid-mounted instruments like pressure gauges,
temperature gauges and transmitters.
4.4.2 Location of local gauge boards, when provided, shall be decided to allow easy access at the
rear and front for all instruments and accessories for maintenance and operation.
Page 1262 of 1823

4.4.3 Gauge board shall be constructed from 3 mm stainless steel sheet with other necessary SS
supporting structure.
4.4.4 Local gauge board shall be supplied with all instruments installed and completely in
tubed/wired condition before shipment.
4.4.5 All pressure transmitters and gauges shall be provided with block and bleed valves securely
fastened. Identification tags shall be securely fastened for easy identification. Wherever local
temperature indicator is required with temperature transmitter, Loop powered indicator shall
be provided.
4.5 Temperature Instruments
4.5.1 Thermowells
a) All temperature elements shall be provided with thermowells fabricated out of bar stock
of minimum SS 316 material as per EIL Standard 7-52-0035.The base of the
thermowells shall be chosen to fit the instrument without air gap for minimizing
measurement lag.
b) Built-up thermowells shall be used in low pressure and low velocity services like in
fired heaters and also where thermowell immersion lengths greater than 500 mm are
required.
c) Immersion length of thermowell shall be as follows:
Line Size Immersion length
From 4" to 6" 280 mm
From 8" to 20" 320 mm
From 20" to 24”
and Vessels / columns 400 mm
Greater than 24” 500 mm
In special applications, not covered above, vendor shall decide the immersion length
based on actual requirements. Immersion length is based on 200 mm length between
flange face and outer wall of pipe and 200 mm length between flange face and inner
wall of the vessel.
d) Any pipe line less than 4" nominal bore shall be blown to 4" size to install thermowell.
e) Thermowell flange and well material shall be as per material selection chart.
f) The vibration analysis shall be carried out as per PTC 19.3 and corrective measures
shall be taken as necessary. Proprietary designs shall be selected in case conventional
design thermowells do not meet wake frequency criteria as per AME PTC.
4.5.2 Temperature Gauges
a) Local temperature gauges shall be in general bimetallic type. The temperature bulb
shall be of stainless steel construction. The gauge connection shall be all angles
adjustable. Gas filled type shall be used when measuring range is beyond the limits of
Bimetallic gauge or thermowell length exceeds 550 mm or in applications involving
excessive vibrations. Mercury filled type temperature gauge shall not be used.Gas
Filled Temeperature Gauges shall be with Full compensation and not case
compensation.
b) All local temperature gauges shall have 150 mm dial size. The bulb size shall be
selected to suit the thermowell.
c) Cases shall be minimum 304 SS and weatherproof to IP-65 as per IS/IEC-60529.
d) Temperature gauges shall have accuracy of ±1% URV (upper range value).
Page 1263 of 1823

e) Bimetallic type dial thermometers shall be avoided where excessive vibrations are
encountered, such as reciprocating compressor discharge. Only filled type with
capillary extension shall be used in such cases. Capillary tubing shall be a minimum of
304SS with stainless steel flexible armouring, and PVC covering over armour. Filled
type gauges shall be manufactured as per relevant SAMA class.
f) Thermometer stem adjustable gland with union connection and bushing shall be
suitable for 1/2" NPTF connection.
4.5.3 Temperature Elements
a) For remote temperature indication/recording/control/switch etc., resistance temperature
detector (RTD) shall be used up to 400 deg C (operating) and above 400 deg C
(operating) thermocouples shall be used. Elements shall be spring loaded, mineral
insulated and shall have stainless steel sheath as a minimum.
c) Thermocouple assemblies shall be furnished with weatherproof screw type heads as per
EIL Standard 7-52-0036.
d) Thermocouples shall be as per IEC-60584-2 and shall have a wire size of 18 AWG for
single and 20 AWG for duplex thermocouples. These shall be magnesium oxide (MgO)
filled grounded type, unless necessary otherwise. The type of thermocouple shall be
selected based on temperature. The selection of type shall be as per following
guidelines:
Chromel-Constantan (ISA-Type-E) : (-) 200 to 600OC
Chromel-Alumel (ISA-Type-K) : 0 to 1200OC
Platinum Rhodium-Platinum (ISA Type-S) : 600 to 1600OC
N-type (Nicrosil / Nisil) thermocouple for hydrogen rich service in very high
temperature shall be used to avoid green rot effect as per Licensor Specification.
d) The design of thermocouple assemblies shall be such that replacement on line is
possible.
e) RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) shall be platinum element 3 wire type with
100 ohms resistance at 0OC calibrated as per IEC 60751. Three-wire system shall be
adopted in connecting the element.
f) RTD shall be used where accuracies of the order of 0.25% or better and smaller
measuring spans are required.
g) Duplex element sensors shall be supplied. Two separate cable entries shall be provided
with plugs. cable entry shall be ¾” NPTF suitable for 2 pair/ triad cables)
h) Extraction or welded type skin thermocouple assembly shall be used for heater tube
application. Thermocouple element shall be duplex type and element wire diameter
shall correspond to 16 AWG for duplex.
4.5.4 Temperature Transmitter
a) Temperature transmitters shall have a built-in linearising function to produce an output
linear to temperature range.
b) The Temperature transmitters with RTD shall have an accuracy of 0.075% of URV as a
minimum for range above 3500 C, 0.15% of URV for temperature range 3500 C to 1500
C and 0.25% for calibrated range below 1500 C.
The Temperature transmitters with cold junction compensation for thermocouple shall
have an accuracy of 0.25% of URV as a minimum for range above 3500 C, 0.5% of
URV for temperature range between 3500 C to 1500 C and 0.75% for calibrated range
below 1500 C.
c) Transmitters shall be provided with dual compartment with metallic separation.
Page 1264 of 1823

4.5.5 Burn out protection must be provided with temperature transmitters. Upscale or downscale
protection shall be decided based on its application to ensure fail-safe operation.
4.5.6 All Temperature transmitters shall also have following features:
- shall be universal type i.e. suitable for accepting both RTD and Thermocouple inputs.
- Have Dual input capability with automatic transfer to back-up sensor. Accordingly
both the elements of the duplex sensor shall be wired to transmitter with 2 Pair cable.
- Remote Mounting type. Vendor shall consider approximately 10 meter cabling
between temperature element and transmitter.
4.6 Pressure Instruments
4.6.1 Pressure Gauges
a) Pressure gauge dial shall be white with black figures. The dial face shall be marked
with pressure element material. Pointers shall have micrometer adjustment.
b) Pressure gauges shall be weatherproof with dial size of 150 mm and shall have features
like over range protection (at least 130% of max. operating pressure) and blowout
discs. Glass shall be shatter proof. Pressure gauge sensing element shall be of SS 316
and movement of SS 304, as a minimum.
c) Pressure gauges shall have an accuracy of ±1% of URV as a minimum. Differential
pressures gauges, diaphragm seal pressure gauges and draft gauges may have an
accuracy of ±2% of URV.
d) Over range protection shall be provided whenever gauge over-range protection is not
suitable for specified process design pressure. Over range protector and pulsation
dampener, whenever used, shall be of SS 304, as a minimum. Pulsation dampener shall
be used for all pulsating services. It shall be floating pin type, externally mounted and
externally adjustable. Syphon shall be supplied for steam services.
e) Pressure gauges with range 0-100 kg/cm2g and more shall have safety type solid front
case.
f) Connection shall normally be 1/2" NPTM bottom.
g) Cases shall be minimum 304 SS and weatherproof to IP-65 as per IS/IEC-60529.
h) Ranges shall be so specified that the gauge normally operates in the middle third of the
scale and shall conform to IS-3624 standard dials, wherever possible.
i) Diaphragm seals shall be furnished where plugging of the element may occur or where
suitable material is not available in highly corrosive services. When chemical seals are
required, they shall be of the clean out type with flushing connection.
j) Where vibrations and pressure fluctuations are expected, glycerin filled type and
snubber shall be used. Pressure gauges at the discharge of reciprocating compressors /
pumps shall be provided with snubbers.
k) Receiver pressure gauges for local transmitter output indication shall have 100 mm dial
with stainless steel element and 1/4" NPTM connection.
l) The pressure element shall be bourdon, diaphragm or bellows depending upon process
condition. Single diaphragm type Differential pressure gauges shall not be considered,
Instead double diaphragm type or bellows shall be considered.
4.6.2 Pressure/Differential Pressure Transmitters
a) Pressure/differential pressure transmitter shall have electronic state-of-art capacitance
or any other type of sensor meeting all functional specifications as per clause 2.16.
Element material for transmitters shall be 316 SS, as a minimum. Element material of
transmitter used in hydrogen service shall be SS316L gold plated.
Page 1265 of 1823

b) All transmitters shall have an integral output meter. Remote mounted meters may be
provided if required in addition.
c) Diaphragm seal element with capillary shall be used for congealing, corrosive and
highly viscous services.
4.6.3 Pressure Switches
a) Process switches shall not be considered unless its use is unavoidable and the same
shall be subject to purchaser’s approval
b) Pressure switches shall have either diaphragm or bellow type of process element with
SS 316 material of construction as a minimum. Switch type shall be sealed micro-type
with contact rating suitable for specific application. Also contacts shall be SPDT type
unless otherwise specified. Contacts used in intrinsically safe applications shall be
suitable as per the process condition.
c) Pressure switches shall be blind type with 1/2 NPTF process connection and shall be
operative in full-specified range. The switch differential shall be selected as per
operating conditions.
d) Pressure switches shall have repeatability of ±0.5% of URV, as a minimum. Pressure
switch shall have over range protection of at least 130% of maximum working pressure.
The set pressure shall fall in the middle third (between 35% to 65%) of the adjustable
range in general. Set point shall be field adjustable.
4.7 Level Instruments
4.7.1 Level gauges
a) All gauge glasses shall be steel armoured reflex or transparent type with body and cover
material of forged carbon steel as a minimum and shall have tempered borosilicate glass
with asbestos or other suitable gasket. Transparent type of gauges shall be provided
with integral illuminators operating at 240 V 50 Hz Non-UPS supply and shall be
suitable for electrical area classification specified. All gauge glasses must have a rating
equal to or more than the vessel design pressure and temperature.
b) Reflex type will be used for clean and colourless liquids, except liquids level interface.
For low temperature, low boiling point service, large chamber type will be used.
Transparent type will be used on acid, caustic, dirty or viscous, coloured liquids and
liquid interface. Transparent type with Mica or Kel-F shields shall be used for treated
water, boiler and condensate services, and for corrosive liquids, which will attack glass.
Tubular gauge glasses shall, in general, not be used in Hydrocarbon/hazardous services.
They may be used for non-hazardous services at ambient temperature and low pressures
(less than 10 kg/cm2goperating).
c) Large chamber gauges with frost shields shall be provided for cold services below 0OC.
Heating jacket shall be provided for viscous liquids with 1/2” flanged connection.
d) All gauges shall have top and bottom chamber connections, unless otherwise specified.
However side-side chamber connection is acceptable where nozzle installation is a
constraint. In addition each gauge shall be provided with ball check valves and pipe
union.
e) The visible range of level gauge shall be selected to cover the complete operating level
as well as measuring range of the other level instruments provided for the same
purpose. In general, the visible length and C to C distance of the top and bottom level
gauges shall be selected from the following:
Visible length Centre to Centre Length
220 470
470 720
720 970
Page 1266 of 1823

980 1230
1230 1480
1490 1740
For side-side level gauge C to C distance shall be 10 mm less than visible length.
f) For level gauging in very viscous, corrosive liquids, liquids with crystals and high
pressure service (e.g. Rating more than 600#) or whenever specified in job
specifications, float operated magnetic gauges with 2" (50 mm) flanged end
connections, shall be used. C to C length of single magnetic level gauge shall not be
more than 2500mm.
g) All level gauges shall be provided with vent/drain valves with plug or connected to
closed drain/vent as per P&ID and job specifications. For higher rating (i.e. rating more
than 600 class) and Hydrogen services, flanges shall be used instead of plugs.
4.7.2 Level Transmitter
a) Guided Wave Radar type level instruments with accuracy ±3mm shall normally be used
for level measurement up to 2500 mm with external cage and side-side connections.
b) Guided wave radar inst shall have ±3mm accuracy. The instrument shall work on TDR
principle and shall be capable of measuring level of process fluid of dielectric constant
as low as 1.9. Wherever dielectric constant is not specified in the datasheets, vendor
supplied instrument shall be suitable for dielectric constant of 1.9 and minimum
separation of interface.
c) For interface level measurement, guided wave radar or displacer level measurement
shall be used as per job specification.
d) Differential pressure transmitter shall be used for level measurement above 2500 mm,
for services requiring purge or where liquid might boil in external portion.
e) Differential Pressure transmitters for use on corrosive or fouling service shall generally
be diaphragm wafer with extended filled capillary type. Flush or extended diaphragm
type differential pressure transmitter shall be considered for special applications only.
Diaphragm material shall normally be stainless steel or any other special alloy.
f) For sump levels, Guided wave radar or non- contact type radar level instrument shall be
used depending on the application within accuracy ± 3mm.
g) Generally for top mounted level transmitters, internal guided wave radar type
instruments shall be used for level measurement up to 3000mm. Above that non-
contact type radar shall be used.
h) Level transmitters shall meet all requirements specified in clause 2.16.
i) Non Contact Radar Level Transmitters is recommended for slurry, powder, viscous and
cryogenic services in process applications
4.7.3 Other Special types of level instruments like ultrasonic, hydrostatic, nucleonic, capacitance,
conductivity type shall be used as necessitated by application requirements.
4.7.4 For high pressure steam drum application at least one number conductivity type (Hydrastep
or equivalent) level instrument shall be provided with the other one as DP type. Also level
gauges shall be of bi-color type for such application. GWR type in steam application can
also be considered.
4.7.5 For solid level measurement, type of instrument shall be ultrasonic/
electromechanical/capacitance/Tuning Fork / nucleonic/non-contact type radar as per the
process condition. The actual type selection shall be carried out based on the provenness of
the selected type for similar type of application.
Page 1267 of 1823

4.8 Non-contact Radar / Servo Level Instruments

a) Tanks shall be provided with minimum 2 types of tank level instruments operating on
different principles like one servo and other one non-contact radar (Antenna) type.
b) Non-contact Radar and Servo Level instrument shall be provided with ±3 mm accuracy
for storage tanks / process vessels and ±1 mm for custody transfer application.
c) Non-contact Radar instrument process connection :
Process vessels
For process vessels, non-contact radar instruments shall have process connection of
minimum 4” size. In case 4” nozzle is provided, the nozzle shall be 4” LWN with ID of
101.6 mm. Still well (in case required) shall be of size 4” Sch-80 and Stainless Steel
metallurgy.
Atmospheric tanks with clean service

For atmospheric tanks with clean service, process connection for non-contact radar
gauge shall be 8” of SS metallurgy with schedule 40 with 8” Stainless Steel 316 Sch-40
still well. Stillwell shall be having 20mmdia hole and every hole shall be turned 180
Deg. With 500mm equal space between 2 holes for entire pipe length.
Atmospheric tanks with viscous service

For atmospheric tanks with viscous service, nozzle connection shall be 24”.
Pressurized Tanks
For pressurized tanks, process nozzle connection for non-contact radar instrument shall
be 8”. Still well shall be 6” / 4” MOC SS316 and Sch-40. Still well shall be having
20mm or 5 mm diameter hole on one side of still well with 500 mm spacing between 2
holes for the entire length of the still well. Still well size and diameter of holes shall be
as per Radar instrument vendor specific requirements.
d) Servo type instruments process connection

Servo type level instrument shall have 6” process connection with 12” diameter SCH
40 still well of SS316 metallurgy, having 20mm dia. hole and every hole turned 180 deg
500 mm equal space between 2 holes for entire pipe length.
e) Raising or lowering of displacer of servo level instrument shall be possible for on-line
calibration with the design of still-well. Isolation valve shall be provided for servo level
instrument in pressurized tanks / spheres / bullets.
The wetted material like float, displacer, tape, wire etc. shall generally be 316 SS.
The accessories for servo-controlled level gauge shall include isolation ball valves for
pressurized tanks and calibration/maintenance chamber for all tanks. Each calibration
chamber shall be provided with a viewable window of blast proof glass. The
calibration chamber can be either integral to the instrument or separate. Whenever
calibration chamber is separate i.e. not integral to the tank level instrument, the material
of construction of calibration chamber shall be stainless steel. The calibration chamber
shall also permit insertion / removal of displacer for maintenance without removing the
instruments.
f) Servo and Radar type instruments shall be capable of providing serial output as per
vendor standard protocol or field bus protocol as per IEC-61158 in addition to analog 4-
20 mA DC current output. These instruments shall also be capable of accepting input
from multi element tank temperature sensors (thermocouple/ RTD), water cut probes
and transmit the same as a part of serial signal from the transmitter.
g) Multi-element tank temperature sensors when used shall be provided with 3” process
connection and 3” still well of SCH-40 with SS metallurgy or SCH-80 with CS
Page 1268 of 1823

metallurgy. For atmospheric tanks, the still-well shall be equipped with 20 mm diameter
hole and every hole turned 180 degree with 500 mm space between 2 holes for the
entire pipe length. For pressurized tanks, still well closed up to bottom (like thermowell,
without any hole) shall be provided.
4.9 Flow Instruments
The selection of flow measurement instruments shall be based on the requirement of
accuracy, repeatability, location, physical properties of the flowing fluids handled, pressure
drop and ease of maintenance.
In-line flow instruments shall have a direction of flow indication clearly marked and easily
visible in the final installed position.
Flow switches shall not be used without prior approval from the purchaser.
4.9.1 Orifice Plates
a) Flow measurement shall normally be carried out by using thin square edged concentric
orifice plate mounted between a pair of weld neck flanges of minimum 300 pounds
ANSI rating for line size 2" and above. Flange taps shall be used for line sizes upto 14"
while D-D/2 taps shall be used for line sizes more than 14" (for rating 300# ). However
for rating 600# and above, D-D/2 taps shall be used for sizes more than 12”. The
material of the orifice plates shall be normally 316 SS, as a minimum.
Quadrant edge or quarter circle orifice plates shall be used for highly viscous liquids
and for pipe Reynold number below 10,000.
Conical entrance type of orifice plates shall preferably be used for very highly viscous
liquids upto throat Reynolds number of 250. These plates shall be fabricated as per
Flow Measurement Hand Book by RW Miller.
Vent and Drain holes shall be provided for bore dia. above 25.4 mm.
b) Sizing of orifice plate shall be carried out in accordance with ISO-5167 (Latest
Edition). For orifice plates not covered in ISO 5167, sizing methods shall be ASME
MFC-14M (latest Edition) or AGA Report No. 3 or ‘Flow measurement-Engineering
Handbook’ by RW Miller. Plate thickness shall be as per RW Miller.
c) Integral orifice type meter run assembly with transmitter shall be used in line size with
1.5" (40 mm) nominal diameter or below.
d) Upstream and downstream straight length shall be provided based on maximum d/D
ratio of 0.7 , in general. Where it is difficult to meet this requirement, the actual d/D
ratio can be considered for reducing the straight length as permitted by the codes. Flow
straighteners are to be considered, where straight runs are difficult to achieve otherwise.
e) Meter taps shall be horizontal for liquids, condensable vapours and shall be from top
for steam, however the transmitters shall be mounted below for these cases. The taps
shall be on top for gas, non-condensible vapour, or liquids which boil at or below the
maximum design ambient temperature at operating pressure. Where piping clearances
are a factor, taps may be located upto 45 degree below the horizontal center line for
condensable vapour and liquid. The taps may be located upto 60 degree from vertical
for gas, non-condensible vapour and steam.
For Cryogenic liquid, the meter tap shall be from below the horizontal line wherein the
transmitters shall be mounted above tapping.
4.9.2 Venturi Flowmeters
a) Venturi shall be designed and constructed as per ISO 5167-4(Latest Edition) or ASME
MFC-3M.
b) The Venturi Flow element shall be classical, machined, non truncated type.
Page 1269 of 1823

c) Impulse piping connection for venturi tubes shall be provided with 1/2" NPTF
connection, unless otherwise specified in the data sheet.
d) Venturi tube shall be forged/cast construction in general. However fabricated
construction shall also be acceptable, wherever allowed as per ISO-5167.
e) Venturi tube shall be provided with Annular chamber / Piezo-metric Ring. Material of
construction of Annular chamber / Piezo-metric Ring shall be same as material of
Venturi tube.
f) Material of construction of Venturi tube shall be SS316 as a minimum. Material of
construction for Throat, Divergent section and Convergent section shall also be SS316
as a minimum. Flanges shall be provided as per the material specified in the datasheet.
g) Flow calibration for those Venturi tubes, which are necessitated due to their installations
outside the limits as defined in ISO 5167 for D (Pipe Inside Diameter), beta and
Reynolds numbers shall be considered in the base quote
4.9.3 Averaging Pitot Tube
Averaging pitot tube in general shall not be considered unless specifically required by the
purchaser. Averaging pitot tube shall meet the following requirements:
a) The flow sensor shall be continuous averaging velocity head producing type of pitot
tube with four or more equal averaging pitot tube sensing ports or continuous slots to
suit line velocity profile. The sensor shall also incorporate a rear port for the
measurement of line static pressure.
b) Averaging pitot tube shall be of 3” flanged connection with isolation ball valve.
c) The insert retract mechanism shall be provided to allow on line removal and insertion
of the average Pitot tube under maximum pressure and flow condition.
d) Vibration analysis for each averaging pitot tube element shall be done for the indicated
flow condition to ensure that the averaging pitot tube is of sufficient thickness and
strength to withstand the vibration effects created due to Karman vortex shedding in the
fluid stream.
e) The free end of the averaging Pitot tube shall be pressure supported at the pipe wall.
However, for the large pipe sizes and where vibration analysis recommends the
requirement of end support, the end support/weld cap support shall be provided.
f) The offered averaging Pitot tubes shall have ±1% accuracy of actual value and
repeatability of ±0.1% of actual value.
4.9.4 Variable area Flow Meters
Variable area flow meters or rotameters shall be provided as per the P&ID or where
rangeability in flow precludes the use of an orifice. Variable area flow meters shall be as per
ISA-RP 16.1, 16.2, 16.3, 16.4, 16.5 and 16.6. Metal tube rotameters shall be used for all
fluids. External devices for indicating or transmitting shall be magnetically coupled to the
float or extension.
Glass tube rotameters shall not be used unless it is necessitated for low range or for low
pressure utility services for local indication and where line size is 1-1/2” (40mm) or less
with the approval of purchaser.
Purge flowmeters shall be provided with needle valves.
Reducer shall be considered, in case the size of the flowmeter is less than the line size.
Unless otherwise specified, the metal tube variable area flow meter shall meet the following
performance specifications:
The accuracy of Variable area flowmeter shall be of Accuracy Class 1.6 or Better as per
VDE/VDI - Directive 3513.
Page 1270 of 1823

Repeatability better than ± 0.5% of full scale

4.9.5 Mass Flow Meters
The mass flow meters shall meet the following requirement:
a) Flow meter shall be of in-line mounting design and shall be of flanged body
construction with stainless steel as minimum material of construction.
b) The mass flow meter shall be provided with the external flow tube housing. In all
such cases, the flow tube housing shall have provision to monitor housing pressure
continuously.
c) The mass flow meter shall have high vibration immunity.
d) Flow meter electronics shall be microprocessor based and shall include pre-amplifier,
converter, transmitter electronics and integral output meter. The indication on the
output meter shall be digital with engineering units.
e) The mass flow meter shall be capable of computing field density and shall incorporate
temperature sensor flow fluid temperature measurement. Whenever required, the flow
meter electronics shall have capability to compute volumetric flow rates. Density
output provision shall be provided.
f) The meter electronics shall be protected against transients induced by lightning and
power supply surges. Transient protection electronics shall preferably be provided in
the terminal block. The transient protection shall meet the requirements specified in
IEC-60587.
g) Unless specified otherwise in the job specification, the performance requirements for the
mass flow meter shall be as follows:
i. Flow meter accuracy: ± 0.2% of mass flow rate for liquid service.
± 0.5% of mass flow rate for gas / vapour
service.
ii. Flow meter repeatability: ± 0.1% of mass flow rate for liquid service.
± 0.25% of mass flow rate for gas / vapour
service.
The performance requirements specified above includes the effect of zero stability of
the flow meter on these parameters.
Flow accuracy shall be maintained between the minimum and maximum flow. Where
only normal flow is specified, the maximum and minimum flows considered for the
purpose of sizing shall be:
Maximum flow = 1.4 times the normal flow
Minimum flow = 0.4 times the normal flow
When only maximum flow is specified minimum flow shall be considered as 0.2
times the maximum flow for sizing the meter.
The maximum pressure drop at meter maximum shall not exceed the allowable
pressure drop across the meter specified in the data sheet.
The meter shall be selected such that both accuracy and allowable pressure differential
across the meter are complied.
4.9.6 Ultrasonic flowmeter
Ultrasonic flow measurement with insertion / spool piece design (depending on the line sizes
and application) shall be considered where non-intrusive flow measuring is required.
Page 1271 of 1823

The Ultrasonic flow meter shall be based on transit time technology. They shall have at-least
two acoustic path for process / flare applications and four acoustic paths for custody transfer
applications.
The design used shall provide maximum reliability, maximum on-line performance and
minimum maintenance. It shall be immune to other impurities in the fluid stream.
Ultrasonic flow meters and the meter runs/flow conditioners shall be rated for the maximum
design pressure.
Spool piece type Ultrasonic flow meters shall have flanged end connections. Weld joints, if
any, shall be of radiographic quality.
Clamp-on type ultra-sonic flow-meters shall not be provided unless specifically indicated in
the job-specifications.
Vendor shall indicate the range of viscosities over which the measurement accuracy remains
within limits.
Ultrasonic flowmeters shall be suitable for measuring the flow with the specified accuracy
with upstream and downstream straight length of 10D and 5D respectively for both process
and flare application. In case required calibration analysis to establish the specified
performance shall be carried out by the vendor without any implication.
Spool piece type design shall be selected for meter sizes up to 16". For higher meter sizes,
Insertion type design shall be used.
Ultrasonic signal frequency shall be dependent on the application. Accordingly, vendor to

select suitable piezo-crystal probes meeting the specified requirements.
Meter Sizing:
Selected meter size shall ensure that flow meter operates within 85% of their standard range
considering density and viscosity of the fluid. Extended range shall not be referred for the
meter selection.
Vendor to ensure the velocity in the Ultrasonic flowmeter and meter run shall not exceed
maximum permissible velocity.
Performance Requirements
Vendor shall meet the accuracy requirements mentioned herein, and indicate the same in the
offer with sizing calculations and back-up documentation. The minimum no. of paths, as
defined for each application, shall be ensured.
For Process Applications:
a) Liquids
Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading
Repeatability: ±0.3% of reading
b) Gases
Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading
Repeatability: ±0.3% of reading
c) Flare
Accuracy: ±2-5% of reading
Repeatability: ±1% of reading
For flare application, UFM model shall be suitable for measuring flow velocities from 0.3
m/s to 120 m/s with specified accuracy.
4.9.7 Vortex meter shall be considered where high rangeability is the prime requirement.
Page 1272 of 1823

4.9.8 Differential Pressure type flow transmitter shall meet all the requirements specified in clause
2.16.
4.9.9 Wedge flow meter shall be considered in slurry services or where powder deposits may form.
4.9.10 Thermal mass flowmeters shall be used for stack flue gas measurement.
4.10 Control Valves
4.10.1 Control valves shall normally be globe type. Other valve types like butterfly, ball, rotary
plug, angle or 3way etc., shall be selected as per service and process requirements.
4.10.2 Control valve sizing shall be carried out as per ISA S75-01. The valve shall permit upto
150% of normal flow or 110% of maximum flow, whichever is higher. In general, control
valves shall be sized so that the valve opening is as noted below:
At max. flow : about 90% open
At normal flow : about 75% open
At minimum flow : about 10% open.
4.10.3 Flanged control valves shall be used. Body material, body rating and flange rating shall be
as per piping specifications. However body and flange rating shall be minimum 300#.
4.10.4 Valve shall be suitable for installation in both vertical and horizontal lines.Minimum control
valve body size shall be 1" in general unless lower size is specifically required as per
Licensor’s documentations. Reduced trims can also be considered.
4.10.5 For globe valves trim characteristics shall be equal percentage type unless required
otherwise. Control valve plugs shall be heavy top guided for single seated valves. Cage
guiding may be used in clean applications and sizes above 2”. Top guided shall be provided
upto 2” valve sizes except for anti-cavitation and low noise trims.
4.10.6 Anti-cavitation trim shall be selected wherever cavitation is expected in the valve. For
flashing services hardened trim shall be used and anti-cavitation trim shall not be provided.
4.10.7 Noise from control valve during operation shall be limited to OSHA specified level or
better. The maximum allowable noise is 85dBA SPL (Sound Pressure Level). Source
treatment for noise may be performed by using special trims like low noise trims, in case
noise exceeds the specified level. Other methods based on merit are also permissible.
4.10.8 Valve seat leakage shall be minimum class IV as per ANSI/FCI 70.2 unless tight shutoff
requirement is required as per the P&ID and valves in flare application.
4.10.9 Flanged bolted type gland packing boxes shall be used. Packing shall normally be PTFE on
liquid and gas service upto 200OC (design). Graphite/grafoil shall be used above
200°C(design) temperature. Asbestos based packing material shall not be used. Valves shall
meet fugitive emission requirement as per ISO 15848-1 class-C as a minimum. For toxic
services, more stringent requirements shall be followed.
4.10.10 Bellows seal shall be used where it is required to isolate the packing from the process fluid
or where no leakage to atmosphere can be tolerated like toxic, explosive and precious fluids.
4.10.11 Material used for trim shall be minimum SS 316, with guide bushing of hardened stainless
steel like 440 C, 17-4 PH. For higher pressure drops (more than 10 kg/cm2) or erosive and
slurry services and in general for all steam services, flashing and cavitating services, plug
and seat shall be stellited.
Special cases may require 17-4 PH seat ring and 440 C solid plugs or other materials like
Hastelloy, Monel etc.
4.10.12 Valve actuator shall be pneumatic spring opposed diaphragm type, in general. Piston type
actuators may be used for very high shut off pressure requirements. Additional equipment
including volume bottle necessary to meet fail safe condition shall also be included in case
double acting piston type actuator is selected.
Page 1273 of 1823

For control valves with leakage class IV and below, the actuator shall be sized considering
actuator thrust more than 1.5 times the total force induced by shut-off conditions specified in
the data sheet and the force required to overcome packing friction.
For control valves with leakage class V and above, the actuator shall be sized considering
actual thrust more than 1.7 times the total force induced by specified shut-off conditions in
the purchaser's data sheet and the force required to overcome packing friction.
Actuator casing shall be suitable for the maximum Instrument Air supply pressure. Else,
Overpressure protection feature shall be available for the same in the valve positioner or
safety valve shall be provide at the AFR outlet for actuator casing protection.
4.10.13 Whenever limit switches are specified as inductive proximity type, these shall meet
NAMUR (DIN-19234) requirements.
4.10.14 Solenoid valves, wherever used, shall be universal and continuous rated type with class H
coil insulation. These shall be SS body as a minimum.
4.10.15 Self-actuating regulators for flow, pressure and temperature shall be used where loads are
constant and requirements of precision and accurate controls are not stringent.
4.10.16 The actuator shall be painted as below:
Direct action (open on air failure) valves - Green
Reverse acting (close on air failure) valve - Yellow
Items like air volume tanks etc., supplied as an accessory along with the actuators, shall be
painted as per corresponding actuator.
4.11 ON-OFF VALVE
4.11.1 On-off valves shall be generally full bore ball type. Wherever no specific operating time is
specified, the same shall not exceed 1 sec. per inch of valve. On-off valves shall have
flanged end connections integral to the valve body. Top entry valve design shall not be
offered unless specifically indicated. Body rating of valve shall be minimum 300#.
a) Lug type body design with long studs and bolts shall be considered for butterfly
type on-off valves body size up to 6 inches.
b) Above 6”, flanged design shall be provided.
4.11.2 For on-off valves with fire safe design, flanged body construction shall only be acceptable.
4.11.3 For all services where full port valves are specified, following shall apply:
a) Port size shall be equal to line size for rating up to ASME Class 1500.
b) Port size shall not be less than one size than the line size for rating ASME Class
2500 and above.
4.11.4 For fully jacketed valves, body and port size of valves shall be same as line size, with end
connection one size higher.
4.11.5 On-off valve body, bonnet, bottom flange, line flanges and other pressure containing
assemblies shall be of the same material of construction as specified for valve body.
4.11.6 In case of ball-type of on-off valves;
a) The valve design shall ensure valve seat and body protection against thermal expansion
of the entrapped fluid when the on-off valve is fully close.
Page 1274 of 1823

b) For size up to 4" and rating up to ASME Class 300, the on-off valve shall have floating
ball design. For ratings ASME Class 600and above, floating ball is acceptable for sizes
less than 2". For higher sizes trunion mounted ball design shall be provided.
4.11.7 Rotary type on-off valves like Ball valves, butterfly valves etc. shall have blow out proof
shaft guiding design.
4.11.8 Guide bushing shall be of a sufficiently hard material to resist side thrust on the plug or
shaft.
4.11.9 Vendor shall be responsible for trim design and selection of the on-off valve. However, it
must meet the following minimum requirements:
a) The valve characteristics shall be quick-opening (on-off) type.
b) Vendor shall select proper material pairs, surface finish, hardness and clearances to
avoid galling.
c) Valves operating under extreme temperature conditions, vendor shall consider

increased clearances at room temperature and seal welding of threaded seat rings
etc whenever required. Hard facing of trim including guide bushing shall be
considered for all valves operating at high temperatures (i.e. temperature more than
200°C). For very low temperature application, material used shall have adequate
cold impact strength.
d) For all on-off valves including 3-way type of valves, stem and plug shall be
detachable and shall be attached together by suitable threaded design secured with
a pin to avoid plug rotation during operation.
4.11.10 Trim material shall be as specified in control valve section.
4.11.11 Actuator shall be painted as below :
FO / FC shutdown valves - Red
Fail Lock on-off valves - Grey
4.11.12 Vendor shall select the soft seat (elastomer) material suitable for the process conditions
i.e., shut off pressure, maximum temperature and process fluid. Metal seated on-off
valves meeting the leakage class shall also be acceptable. Metal seated on-off valve shall
be tested for high pressure closure test.
4.11.13 For application in vacuum service, vendor to provide inverted packing design suitable for
vacuum service. For pressure-cum-vacuum service, the on-off valve shall have dual
packing design suitable for the application. Dual packing design shall also be provided
for on-off valves in toxic / explosive service, with a facility to connect inert fluid between
the packing.
4.11.14 Valve actuator shall be designed to move the valve to the failure position as specified.
For failure position specified as ‘fail-locked’, vendor shall provide air reservoir with all
required accessories to meet the fail lock position of the valve.
4.11.15 Whenever double acting spring less type of actuator is unavoidable, all accessories like
pilot valves, booster relays, non-return valve, pressure gauge, volume tank etc. shall be
provided to ensure desired action on air failure.
4.11.16 The volume tank shall be of carbon steel construction and sized as per ASME Section
VIII with design pressure of 10kg/cm2g as a minimum.Each volume bottle shall be sized
Page 1275 of 1823

for a minimum of 3 valve strokes.Minimum thickness volume tank shall be 6mm with
corrosion allowance of 1.4 mm.
4.11.17 The actuator casings and diaphragms shall be designed for minimum twice the maximum
pneumatic operating pressure of the on-off valve. Actuator casing shall be suitable for the
maximum Instrument Air supply pressure. Else, Overpressure protection feature shall be
available for the same in the valve positioner (PST) or safety valve shall be provide at the
AFR outlet for actuator casing protection.
4.11.18 Vendor shall be fully responsible for sizing and selection of correct actuator & while
sizing the actuator vendor shall consider minimum actuator thrust equal to two times (2)
the total force induced by shut off condition and the force required to overcome packing
friction.
4.11.19 Wherever the valves are indicated as fire safe, they shall be tested for fire safe as per BS
EN 12266 when the valves are supplied with metal-to-metal seats and shall be tested as
per API 607 latest edition or equivalent standard when the valves are provided with soft
seats.
4.11.20 Wherever fire safe actuator and controls have been asked for, actuators and all accessories
such as solenoid valves, air volume bottles etc. shall meet the fire proof requirement to
ensure normal valve operation even during and after exposure to fire. Vendor shall
clearly define the schemes they propose to achieve the above requirements and ensure
that the proposed schemes shall meet the requirement in terms of type of exposure and
exposure time of the testing procedure given in BS EN 12266/API 607/ API 6FA.
4.11.21 Vendor shall furnish type test certificate duly witnessed by third party inspection agency
like M/S LRIS,BV,DNV,TUV etc. for fire safe testing of valve, actuator and controls for
the offered models.
4.11.22 Valves shall meet fugitive emission requirement as per ISO 15848-1 class-C as a
minimum. For toxic services, more stringent requirements shall be selected.
4.12 Smart Type and Fieldbus Type Positioners

Digital smart positioners or fieldbus type of positioners with diagnostic capabilities shall be
provided as per job specific requirement. These shall meet the following minimum
requirements:
a) The positioner sensor and sensing mechanism shall be rugged and shall not be affected
by the line/valve vibration. The performance of the positioners shall be immune to
above vibration.
b) The positioner’s output and input range shall be field adjustable without any hardware
modification. The output from the positioners shall be available for both single acting
as well as double acting actuator.
c) Each positioner shall be operable, configurable and accessible through HART
compatible hand held configurator/fieldbus configurator as applicable. Smart
positioners shall also have dedicated buttons for the above functions.
d) Control valve’s operating signatures in the form of hard copy and soft copy for each
control valve provided with smart positioners shall be supplied. The necessary software
for advanced control valve diagnostics like seat ring condition, gland packing condition,
actuator leakage etc. shall also be included.
e) Fieldbus positioner shall have the capability to perform functions like PID etc.
f) All positioners shall have metallic casing and cover.
g) On-off valve positioners for partial stroke test shall not cause spurious trips in case of
positioner or positioner power failure. The PST positioner shall be reverse port type.
Page 1276 of 1823

h) Vendor to provide removable protective caps/ cover on all gauges pertaining to

positioners. The material of construction of the gauges on AFR / positioned shall be
stainless steel.
4.13 Pressure Relief Valves and Rupture Discs
4.13.1 Pressure Relief Valves
4.13.1.1 All pressure relieving devices shall be designed in accordance with ASME code for 'Boilers
and Pressure Vessels', API-521 and Indian Boiler Regulations. The pressure relief valve
sizing shall be as per API 520. For mixed phase fluids, sizing shall be as per Leung-Omega
method (or Diers) sizing shall be followed. The orifice sizing, area and designation, valve
size and rating shall be as per API RP 526.
4.13.1.2 Pressure relief valves shall be full nozzle full lift type except for thermal relief valves.
4.13.1.3 Conventional valves shall be specified for constant back pressure while bellows seal type
valves shall be specified for variable back pressure. Pilot operated pressure relief valves
shall be used when Back pressure is greater than 50% of set pressure or when the difference
between operating pressure and set pressure is within 10% of the set pressure.
4.13.1.4 Lifting lever shall be specified for steam, air or water above 65 degree service. Open bonnet
shall be used for steam service.
4.13.1.5 The percentage accumulation in case of pressure relief valves/safety valves shall be as
follows:
a) Steam Service
- ASME SEC I(steam generation/consumption) 3%
- IBR (Before steam let-down station) 5%
- IBR (Distribution & utilities) and 10%
ASME Section VIII
b) Gas, Vapour or liquid for process service 10%
c) Liquid for thermal Relief 25/ 10% (as per Process requirement)
d) Fire exposure on unfired vessels 21%
4.13.1.6 3/4" x 1" threaded (NPT) modified nozzle type valves with typically 0.38 cm2 orifice size
shall be specified for thermal relief. However, if discharge is connected to flare or with
variable back pressure more than 10% of set pressure, 1D2 flanged valves as per API-526
as a minimum to be provided.
4.13.1.7 The body material shall, as a minimum, be as per piping specifications. Nozzle and disc
material shall be SS316 as a minimum with machined stainless steel guide and spindle.
Whenever semi nozzle designs are unavoidable, body material shall be at-least same as
nozzle and disc material.
4.13.1.8 The spring material of pressure relief valves shall be as follows unless otherwise necessary
because of process conditions;
(-) 29OC to 230OC : Carbon steel with weather protective coating.
O
above 230 C : Tungsten alloy steel.
O
Below (–) 29 C : 316 Stainless Steel
4.13.1.9 Flanged connection shall be for standard sizes 1" or larger.
4.13.1.10 Where permissible, screwed connections shall be used on sizes 3/4" and below.
4.13.2 Rupture Disc
4.13.2.1 Rupture discs shall be reverse buckling type, in general and shall be supplied in pre-torqued
holder assembly, which shall fit inside the inner diameter of the bolt circle of standard
Page 1277 of 1823

flanges. Disc material shall be compatible with the vessel contents and shall be consistent
with the bursting requirements. Inconel discs shall be used above 100OC if compatible with
the process fluid.
4.13.2.2 When rupture disc is used upstream of a pressure relief valve, a pressure gauge shall be
provided on the downstream of the disc to indicate any rupture of the disc in addition to an
excess flow check valve. In addition combination capacity factor of 0.9 shall be used for
sizing unless the combination has been tested and approved for any other combination
capacity factor.
4.13.2.3 The bursting tolerance of the rupture disc shall be 5% of the specified bursting pressure or
less, unless otherwise specified. Manufacturing design range shall be 0%.
4.13.2.4 Vendor shall consider 5 nos. rupture discs (1 for testing + 1 for installation + 3 nos. spare) of
the same specifications.
4.14 Interlock and Shutdown System
4.14.1 Interlock and Shutdown System shall be an independent system with its own dedicated
primary element except for orifice flow measurement. For orifice flow element, separate set
of tapping for each flow transmitter for shut down / interlock shall be considered.
4.14.2 The system shall be designed fail safe and shall meet the following requirements, as a
minimum:
a) All initiating contacts shall be close (except limit switches for which contact shall close
when the limit reaches)under normal conditions and shall open under abnormal
conditions.
b) All relays and solenoid valves shall be energized under normal conditions and shall de-
energize under abnormal conditions.
c) If desired, because of operational or maintenance requirements, adequate trip by-pass
facilities are to be provided with warning lights to indicate that the trip has been
bypassed. Trip bypass alarms shall be provided. All such by-pass switches shall be key-
operated type.
4.14.3 Each shutdown circuit and solenoid valve shall be provided with a switch-fuse unit
separately.
4.15 Instrumentation for Rotating Equipments
Rotating Equipment vendor shall be completely responsible for providing adequate
instrumentation for safe and efficient operation of the machine. The commonly used
instruments are being detailed out in the following clauses; however this does not absolve
the vendor of providing additional instrumentation, if required.
4.15.1 Anti surge and performance control system (ASC)
a) Vendor shall be fully responsible for the complete design of Anti surge/performance
control system (ASC) including selection of type of flow element, controller Algorithm,
type of explosion protection, type and operating timings of final control element. Vendor
shall guarantee the performance of machine with the offered ASC system. Wherever
required, ASC system shall be designed in such a way that it is capable of correcting the
compressor operating point so as to avoid surge in order to protect machine from possible
damage, to minimize process upsets and to minimize recirculation.
b) ASC system shall typically consist of but not limited to flow element, flow transmitter,
differential pressure transmitter, ASC controller, control valve and other accessories as
felt necessary by the vendor.
c) Vendor shall supply all the hardware and software related to the operation and safety of
the equipment. This shall include but not limited to the following;
i. Design and operation of surge control loop scheme based on offered equipment
Page 1278 of 1823

performance.
ii. Supply of all hardwares in antisurge control loop including dedicated controller,
transmitters, measuring elements, final control element etc.
iii. Fast response transmitter and control valve etc. as required.
iv. Algorithm required for antisurge/Performance control application.
d) The ASC shall be a dedicated single loop controller on proprietary Hardware Platform or
single/multi loop controllers of common hardware platform such as PLC. The single loop
controller shall be dedicated controller for each Anti-surge or Performance control
application/Tag. Dedicated panel mounted facia shall be provided. The ASC system
when provided on common hardware platform shall be with redundant configuration as
minimum viz-dual processor, dual input/output, redundant communication & dual power
supply system. The multiloop controller/ system shall be dedicated for Anti-surge/
Performance applications/ Tags of each machine/each machine tag. Unless specified
otherwise dedicated PC with all software to be mounted in Purchaser's Control Room
e) It should be able to accept 4-20 mA signal from field or from HIC at purchaser DCS or
at LCP as a manual override to anti-surge control system with bump less transfer.
f) Auto-manual operation with bump less transfer shall be provided.
g) The controller response time (total time to read input, processing time and output) shall
be as per the machine dynamics and safety and shall be of the order of max. 40-milisec.
Any faster response required based on machine dynamics shall be considered by
vendor. The input sampling interval shall be as per machine dynamics within the
controller response time as above. The processor cycle time shall be considered to meet
the overall response time.
h) The ASC shall be field proven, specific to the make of machine and for the similar
application in hydrocarbon industries. Vendor shall provide the proven track record for
the offered ASC meeting the above.
i) The anti surge/ performance control algorithm shall be implemented using standard
firmware in the controller/ processor system.
j) The algorithm developed by vendor shall be specific for given application, surge
control, performance, load sharing etc. and shall be field proven for the compressor
make.
k) The algorithm implemented in the system shall be protected against any
modifications/changes.
l) The configuration shall be stored in non-volatile memory or battery back-up for
configuration shall be provided (minimum 48 hours) in case of volatile memory along
with battery drain indication.
m) In case of ASC on common hardwired platform separate configurator with necessary
hard ware/ soft ware shall be provided for application programming.
n) Anti surge controller shall not be used for performing any other machine related inter
locks/logics.
o) All the instruments (transmitters, Positioner and temperature elements and / or
transmitters) connected with anti-surge control loop shall be flame proof "Exd" type
suitable for the area as specified. The suitability of smart transmitter/ Positioner shall be
confirmed by vendor and to be provided accordingly.
p) The ASC system vendor shall be fully responsible for the sizing and selection of the anti-
surge valve. Vendor to provide the sizing calculations duly vetted by ASC system
manufacturer.
Page 1279 of 1823

4.15.2 Machine Monitoring System (MMS)

Machine Monitoring system shall be provided for continuous monitoring and indication of
machine parameters like vibration & axial displacement, bearing and winding temperature,
key-phasor etc. MMS system signals shall be hard-wired to PLC (package PLC or plant PLC
as applicable) for interlocks and serially linked to plant DCS for monitoring. Location of
Vibration/ Temperature Monitoring racks ( Local Panel or Control room) shall decided
based on the distance limitations between Probes and Monitors based on API standard.
4.15.2.1 Vibration and displacement monitoring system shall be as per API-670. 4 channel vibration
modules, 6 channel temperature modules shall be provided as per requirement. The extent
and type of monitoring shall be as defined elsewhere. However, vendor shall furnish any
additional requirements for monitoring deemed essential by them with reasons. Two probes
at 90 degree apart for each location shall be provided and connected to same dual channel
monitor for vibration monitoring.Separate JBs shall be provided for temperature and
vibration signals.
4.15.2.2 The machine monitoring system shall be provided with preferably built in intrinsically safe
barrier and shall be duly mounted in separate panel. However, separate terminal blocks shall
be provided for terminating the field cables for maintenance purpose. Direct cable
termination on modules shall not be considered.
4.15.2.3 For MMS the display unit shall be provided at local control panel with necessary statutory
certification. Alternatively purged enclosure (suitable for the hazardous area) is also
acceptable with necessary certification.
4.15.2.4 The sensing probe shall be accessible for adjustment, repair and replacement without
dismantling the machine.
4.15.2.5 Vendor shall provide hardwired Voted contact output of each parameter for Pre trip and trip
alarms for alarms/ interlock in purchaser’s control system. The alarms/trips of the channels
within each monitor/ Module can be grouped together and common pre-trip alarm and
common trip contact for each monitor/ Module shall be provided. Each digital output from
MMS shall be realized at least through two relay modules configured with same logic and
independently hardwired to ESD. 4-20 mA signals from Vibration & Temperature
Monitoring System racks to DCS system are not required separately, unless specified and
vendor to ensure that all the parameters are available through serial interface. For multi
racks, vendor shall provide common serial interface through multi drop link.
4.15.2.6 In addition to this, it shall be provided with necessary hardware (communication gateway
module) including the cable for serial data communication from monitoring system to
purchaser’s DCS for machine monitoring through purchaser’s DCS via redundant serial
data interface. This serial link shall be either RS 422 / RS 485 with MODBUS RTU
protocol or Modbus TCP/IP protocol and shall be specifically indicated as part of offer.
Vendor shall furnish all details like pin configuration and tag number wise MODBUS
address mapping list etc. for smooth interfacing of this communication link with DCS.
Vendor shall also provide necessary hardware and software for providing raw data to
conditioning monitoring system for each rack.
4.15.2.7 Vendor shall also supply one common laptop based configuration unit for the package unit
with required configuration software (refer clause 4.17) and hardware for configuration of
MMS system including the serial communication cable required between configuration unit
(laptop) & MMS monitors.
4.15.2.8 Vendor shall ensure the following for connectivity with Condition Monitoring System:
(i) Vendor shall provide hardwares like communication processors in each rack.
(ii) Enabling softwares required if any for connecting to purchaser’s condition monitoring
system for acquisition of raw data from various monitors with respect to each sensor
shall be provided by vendor.
Page 1280 of 1823

(iii) Individual monitors shall have provision for giving raw data (buffered output for
vibration & key-phasor hardwired from panel rear of each of the monitor) to the
condition monitoring system. For vibration signals connected to purchaser’s control
system, sensor and transmitter with 4-20mA DC output shall be provided by vendor.
4.15.2.9 Key Phasor
Key phasor system shall be provided by vendor for performing analysis of vibration signals
to determine machine malfunctions. It shall consist of a proximity probe and transmitter,
extension cable etc. and other accessories to make the system complete. Vendor shall
provide necessary reference on the shaft to determine one-per-turn occurrence.
4.15.2.10 Vibration and Axial Displacement Monitoring

Monitors shall be four channel types and shall meet the following specifications as a
minimum:
a) Continuous channel monitoring with each channel input from one probe. Readout
scale shall read higher of the sensors.
b) Each channel shall have two independent alarm levels one for pre trip alarm and one
for each trip and that can be set continuously over measurement range. Two relay
contacts for each pre-trip alarm and trip alarm per channel shall be provided.
c) Broken sensor failure detection without causing shut down.
d) LED lamps on monitor front for each channel to indicate pre-trip alarm, trip-alarm and
circuit fault conditions.
e) Selector switches on monitor front to read vibration/ displacement pre-trip alarm and
trip set points for each channel shall be provided.
4.15.2.11 Bearing & Winding Temperature Monitoring
a) Sensor shall be three wires RTD element of platinum having 100 ohms resistance at
0OC.
b) The temperature sensor, cables, terminal heads, junction boxes etc. shall be capable of
withstanding the mechanical vibration and environment of a rotating machinery
atmosphere.
c) Bearing and Winding temperature shall be monitored by means of a temperature
monitor. It shall meet following requirements:
i. Accept RTD inputs (platinum, 100ohm at 0OC).
ii. Continuous six channel monitoring check with each channel input from each
RTD. Read out scale shall read higher of the six temperatures.
iii. Each channel shall have two independent alarm levels one for pre-trip alarm and
one for trip alarm and that can be set continuously over measurement range.
iv. Broken sensor failure detection without causing shut down.
v. Selector switches on monitor front, to read temperature, pre-trip alarm and trip set
points for each channel shall be provided.
vi. Analog output 4-20 mA DC isolated signals shall be provided for each channel
for remote indication, if specified.
4.15.2.12 Wherever MMS is not specified, vendor shall provide suitable transmitter for all the
vibration and axial displacement, temperature, key phasor to provide 4-20mA signal to
purchaser’s control system.
Page 1281 of 1823

4.15.2.13 For reciprocating compressor, where PV analysis is requirement is specified in the

equipment data sheets, required cylinder pressure sensors shall be supplied to consider the
implementation of PV analysis.
4.15.2.14 All Cables from field mounted MMS probes to MMS System in Control room shall be by
vendor.
4.15.3 Speed Governor System
4.15.3.1 Digital microprocessor based system mounted in standalone cabinet and located in rack room
shall be provided. Fault tolerant triple modular redundant (TMR) system shall be supplied for
special purpose turbine and single for general purpose turbine as per Job Specification.
4.15.3.2 HMI for operator interface shall be supplied loose with all mounting accessories for
mounting this HMI in purchaser’s hardwired console in general. This shall include all basic
features of governor to enable operator to do all control and monitoring operations from
console itself.
4.15.3.3 This shall include features like assignable speed range, adjustable speed set point, remote
speed set point input, digital speed indication, adjustable speed ramp, override for testing the
external over speed trip system etc.
4.15.3.4 It should be able to accept 4-20 mA signal from HIC at purchaser’s DCS or LCP as a manual
override to governor and pass on the same, after a bump less auto / manual selection and
local / remote selector switches configured in speed governor (shall be possible through
HMI) to governor valve as manual control.
4.15.3.5 Vendor shall provide all hardware & software in the system (including the cable for serial
data communication from system to purchaser’s DCS) for serial communication link for all
data transfer from governor to purchaser’s DCS. This serial link shall be either RS 422 / RS
485 with MODBUS RTU protocol or Modbus TCP/IP as per vendor’s recommendation and
shall be informed, vendor shall furnish all details like pin configuration and tag number wise
MODBUS address mapping list etc. For smooth interfacing of this communication link with
DCS.
4.15.4 Accumulator of Lube Oil System
4.15.4.1 If accumulators are used with nitrogen for lube oil dampening at the desired pressure to meet
the system requirement the following instrumentation with the accumulator to be provided
by vendor:
a) Accumulator shall have charge kit with isolation valves and connection hoses.
b) Standard nitrogen cylinders available in India are at pressure of 140 kg/cm2g with
standard connection sizes. Vendor shall provide the complete regulator system with
protection for charging nitrogen from nitrogen cylinder to accumulator at the desired
pressure. Regulator shall be suitable for the inlet pressure variation of 140 to 150
kg/cm2g while charging with suitable inlet connection to match the Nitrogen cylinder
connection. Regulator system shall have pressure indicator, regulator, relief valve,
needle valve etc. as a minimum. Material of construction shall be stainless steel.
4.15.5 The compressor loading-unloading scheme for reciprocating compressors shall be provided
as per the minimum requirements specified in the job specifications. Manual as well as
automatic schemes shall be provided.
4.15.6 Emergency switch shall be provided in the local panel/local. All such switches shall have a
protective cover to avoid inadvertent shutdown.
4.15.7 Vendor shall provide the following common alarms for purchaser:
a) Common machine pre-trip alarms.
b) Common machine trip alarm.
4.15.8 Stepless Capacity Control system for reciprocating compressors
Page 1282 of 1823

a) Stepless capacity control System shall be a digital microprocessor based system

mounted in standalone cabinet and located in satellite rack room or control room.
b) It shall comprise of Hydraulic Unit, Hydraulic Actuator and Compressor Interface Unit
(CIU) for the respective compressors along with interconnecting cabling. Stepless
Capacity control system for each individual train shall be independent.
c) It shall be provided with necessary hardware & software for serial data communication
from capacity control system to purchaser’s DCS via redundant serial data interface
with either RS 422 / RS 485 with MODBUS RTU protocol or Modbus TCP/IP as per
vendor’s recommendation and shall be informed.
4.15.9 Overspeed Detection system (ODS)
a) Electronic overspeed detection shall be separate and distinct from the speed control
system, with exception of final control elements. Each driving machine requiring
overspeed detection shall have its own over-speed system. Combining multiple driving
machines into a single ODS shall not be allowed.
b) It shall be provided with necessary hardware & software for serial data communication
from ODS to purchaser’s DCS via redundant serial data interface for monitoring
purpose.
c) Hardwired Trip output for interface with PLC to be provided for interlocks.
d) The design of the electronic ODS shall conform to standards IEC 61508, IEC 61511.
4.15.10 Surge Detection system
a) Surge detection system shall comply API 670. For axial flow compressors, this is
mandatory, while for centrifugal, the same shall be provided as specified.
b) It shall be independent of Antisurge control System. The intention of surge detection is
to generate an alarm that compressor is experiencing multiple surge cycles. This alarm
can indicate the failure of the antisurge control system.
4.16 System Cabinets, Racks and Consoles
4.16.1 All system cabinets, marshalling racks and hardwired consoles shall be free standing and
enclosed cubicles type. All these items shall have bottom cable entry.
4.16.2 Cabinets shall be fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet (CRCA) of minimum 1.6 mm
thickness for side and top suitably reinforced to prevent warping and buckling. Doors shall
be fabricated out of 2.0 mm thick CRCA sheet. Cabinets having modular construction and
with basic frame structure of heavy duty aluminium shall also be acceptable.
4.16.3 Cabinet/Console finish shall include sand blasting, grinding, chemical cleaning, surface
finishing by suitable filler and two coats of high-grade lacquer with sanding between coats.
Two coats of paint in the cabinet colour and a final coat after assembly at site, shall be given
for non-glossy high satin finish.
4.16.4 In order to remove dissipated heat effectively vent louvers backed by wire fly screen shall be
provided. Further, ventilation fans shall be provided wherever required. High temperature
annunciation shall be provided on operator console.
4.16.5 Illumination shall be provided for all cabinets by fluorescent / LED lamps, which shall be
operated by door switch.
4.16.6 All cabinets/racks/consoles shall be adequately sized to avoid any congestion. Wiring shall
be done as per guidelines provided in clause 4.2.14 of this specification.
4.16.7 The height and colour of the cabinets shall be inline with other equipments being installed in
the control room.
Page 1283 of 1823

4.17 System software / License

Systems (like PLC, ASC, Speed Governor etc.) software shall include the operating system
and application program. The application program shall include software for performing
functions like interlock and shutdown logic, programming/program modification,
documentation etc. Two copies of application program and two sets of licensed system
software shall be supplied. The program language shall be English.
The licenses and application program shall allow:
- Monitoring of system program for troubleshooting purpose.
- Carrying out any modifications to the PLC/system program if need arises (engineering
license with proper validity)
- Troubleshooting of any system related failures.
- Monitoring of the system healthiness
The system shall be supplied with programming tools and related accessories.
4.18 Wireless Monitoring
Wherever wireless monitoring system has been asked in the job specification, the following
shall be considered as a minimum
4.18.1 Wireless signal Processing module, Wireless Signal Repeater, Routers, Antennas / Access
points, Gateways, interconnecting cables and network switches etc.
4.18.2 All the instruments and electronics supplied which are to be mounted in hazardous area
should be suitable for the area classification of its location of installation and minimum IP 65
rated. For wireless instruments non-metallic enclosures are also acceptable.
4.18.3 All wireless devices and its accessories in the network shall comply to WIRELESS HART as
per IEC-62591 or ISA100.11a. The Wireless devices network shall be designed in such a
way that continuous communications with gateways are established. Adequate amount
repeaters infield for wireless network design shall be considered for ensuring multiple
communication paths.
4.18.4 Wireless devices shall be power sourced by low powered battery. The shelf life of the battery
shall be minimum 5 years. Vendor shall provide calculation for battery life considering 4
sec. Update rate. Battery drain indication / alarm shall be available in Host system as part of
diagnostics/ maintenance data.
5.0 LIST OF DOCUMENTS ATTACHED
7-52-0001 Instrument connections on vessels, standpipes and tanks
7-52-0002 Instrument connections on piping.
7-52-0035 Thermowell
7-52-0036 Thermocouple / RTD assembly with thermowell
7-52-0041 Orifice Plates and Flanges -Dimensional details.
7-52-0042 Orifice Plates and Flanges – Dimensional details RTJ Flanges
7-52-0254 Duct Fabrication – Bolted Construction Details
Page 1284 of 1823

PART II
SPECIFICATION FOR MATERIAL, INSTALLATION,

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Page 1285 of 1823

1.0 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

1.1 Vendor shall ensure and supply all erection hardware required for the installation of
complete instrumentation which form a part of the package unit. This includes items like
cables, cable glands, junction boxes, instrument valves and manifolds, mounting accessories,
impulse piping/tubing, pipe/tube fittings, pneumatic signal tubes, air line pipes and fittings,
filter regulators, steam/electrical tracing, insulation materials, cable duct and trays, conduits,
prefabricated canopies for instruments, identification tags, structural material required for
instrument supports and trays etc.
1.2 Clause 1.1 above broadly covers the items required for any typical plant, however vendor
shall supply all necessary items to make the installation and commissioning work complete
in all respect, irrespective of whether these have been explicitly included in their scope or
not.
1.3 Salient feature and minimum requirement for some of the main installation materials is
being described in the following paragraphs. For items for which no specification has been
provided, vendor may follow their own specifications and prevailing international standards.
1.4 Cables
1.4.1 All cables shall have PVC insulated primary insulation of cable shall be 85OC Polyvinyle
Chloride type as per IS-5831 and inner and outer sheath of cable shall be flame retardant
made of extruded PVC Type ST-2 at 90OCas per IS-5831. Oxygen index of PVC shall be
over 30% at 27 OC+2 OC and temperature index shall be over 250OC. However, Polyethylene
(PE) insulation shall be provided in IIC area classification.
1.4.2 In general cables shall be flame retardant as per standard IEC 60332 Part 3Cat.A. However,
cables with fire-safe valves shall be fire resistant also as per the following.
1.4.2.1 The insulation grade shall be 500 V as a minimum and shall meet insulation resistance,
voltage and spark test requirements as per EN50288-7.
1.4.2.2 All cables shall be twisted and armored. Armor over inner jacket shall be of galvanized steel
wire/flat as per IS-1554 part I.
1.4.3 For signal and control cables, inner jacket color shall be black. Outer jacket color shall be
light blue for intrinsically safe application and black for others. For thermocouple extension
cables the inner and outer jacket color shall be as per IEC.
1.4.4 Maximum DC resistance of the conductor of the completed cable shall not exceed the
following:
a) 12.3 ohms/km at 20OC for cables with 1.5 mm2 conductor.
b) 39.7 ohms/km at 20OC for cables with 0.5 mm2 conductor.
1.4.5 The mutual capacitance of the pair or adjacent cores shall not exceed 250 pF/m at a
frequency of 1 kHz whereas the same shall not exceed 100 pF/m for PE insulated cables.
The capacitance between any core and screen shall not exceed 400 pF/ m at a frequency of 1
kHz.
1.4.6 L/R ratio of adjacent cores shall not exceed 40 µH/Ω for cables with 1.5 mm2 conductor and
25 μH / Ω for cables with 0.5 mm2 conductor.
1.4.7 The drain wire resistance including shield shall not exceed 30 ohms/km.
1.4.8 A pair of communication wire shall be provided for multi-pair/multi-triad cables. Each wire
shall be 0.5 mm2 of plain annealed single or multi-strand copper conductor with 0.4 mm
thick 85OC PVC insulation. Insulation shall be green and red color coded.
1.4.9 Each multi-pair / multi-triad cables shall have 20% pairs as spare.
1.4.10 Running length of the cable shall be printed on the outer sheath at least at every 5 meter
interval.
Page 1286 of 1823

1.4.11 Signal Cables

a) Single pair shielded signal/alarm cables shall be used between field instruments and
junction boxes/local control panels.
b) Multi-pair individually and overall shielded signal/alarm cables shall be used between
junction boxes/local control panels and control room, in general.
c) The single pair and triad cables shall be of 1.5 mm2 conductor size made of electrolytic
copper conductor of 7 strands with each strand of 0.53 mm diameter, multipair cables
with 0.5 mm2 conductor size shall have 16 strands of annealed electrolytic grade copper
conductor with each strand of 0.2 mm diameter, multi triad cable or multi pair cable
with 1.5 mm2 conductor shall have 7 strands with each strand of 0.53 mm diameter, as
per the job specification.
d) Shield shall be aluminum backed mylar/polyester tape bonded together with the
metallic side down helically applied with either side having 25% overlap and 100%
coverage. The minimum shield thickness shall be 0.05 mm in case of single pair/traid
and 0.075 mm incase of multipair/triad cable.
e) Drain wire shall be provided for individual pair and overall shield which shall be 0.5
mm2 multi stranded bare tinned annealed copper conductor. The drain wire shall be in
continuous contact with aluminum side of the shield.
f) All multi pair cables shall have 6 pair/12 pairs only while multi-triad cable shall have 6
triads/8 triads only.
1.4.12 Control Cables
a) Single pair control cables shall be used between field mounted solenoid valves and
junction boxes/local control panels and shall meet the requirements specified in para
1.4.11 above.
b) Multi-pair control cables shall be used between junction boxes/local control panel and
control room mounted devices in general. These cables shall have only overall
shielding.
c) These control cables shall have 1.5 sq mm conductor size with 7 stranded conductors of
annealed electrolytic grade copper, with each strand of 0.53 mm diameter.
1.4.13 Fieldbus Cables
a) Fieldbus cables shall be 16AWG (1.31 mm2) for trunk and 18 AWG (0.82mm2) for
spurtwisted in pair individually and overall shielded with aluminum mylar tape with
drain wire and armored. Other parameters shall be as per Type A defined in IEC-
61158-2.
b) Fieldbus trunk cables shall be two pairs.
c) Fieldbus cable shall be field proven for FF applications.
d) Fieldbus cable shall comply with H1 cable test specification FF844.
e) Outer jacket color shall be orange with 3 longitudinal blue stripes for spur cables and
black stripes for trunk cables.
1.4.14 Thermocouple Extension Cables
a) Single pair shielded thermocouple extension cables shall be used between
thermocouple head and junction boxes/ transmitters/local control panel mounted
instruments.
b) Multi pair individually and overall shielded thermocouple extension cables shall be
used between junction boxes and control room mounted devices.
c) The type of thermocouple extension cables shall be compatible with thermocouple
used. In addition the color coding of the primary insulation shall be as per IS-8784.
Page 1287 of 1823

d) The cable shall have 16 AWG and 20AWG solid conductors for single and multi-pair
respectively.
e) All thermocouple extension cable shall be matched and calibrated in accordance with
IEC-60584-2.
f) Shield shall be aluminum backed by mylar/polyester tape bonded together helically
applied with the metallic side down with either side having 25% overlap and 100%
coverage. Minimum shield thickness shall be 0.05 mm for single pair and 0.075 mm for
multi-pair cable. Drain wire shall be similar to individual pair and shall be in
continuous contact with the aluminum side of the overall shield.
g) Inductance shall not exceed 4mH/Km.
h) Electrostatic noise rejection ratio shall be over 76dB.
i) All multi-pair cables shall have 6 pairs/12 pairs only.
j) For S type thermocouples, suitable TC compensating cable shall be acceptable in place
of extension cables.
1.4.15 Power Supply and Other Cables
a) All power supply cables shall be as per IS-1554 Part I and shall have copper
conductors. Minimum conductor size shall be 2.5 mm2 of copper conductor. All these
cables shall be PVC insulated and armored.
1.4.16 Any other special cable required for instruments shall also be supplied as per the
requirement. Vendor shall ensure that these cables are armored type and shall meet all other
requirements specified in paragraph 1.4.1 through 1.4.10, as applicable.
1.5 Cable Glands
a) Vendor shall supply all cable glands required for glanding the above mentioned cables
at field instrument side, local control panel side, junction boxes side and at control
room side.
b) All cables glands shall be of nickel-plated brass and shall be double compression type
suitable for armoured cables.
c) Flame proof glands wherever required shall be supplied with Ex (d) certification.
d) PVC Cable shrouds shall be provided with all the cable glands.
1.6 Junction Boxes (Non-Fieldbus loops)
a) Vendor shall supply junction boxes as per the cables selected, wherever required. These
shall be of Cast Light Metal alloy body and shall be weather proof to IP 65as a
minimum All terminals shall be screwless clamp type.
b) These boxes shall have terminals suitable for minimum 4.0 mm2 cable termination
mounted on rails. 20% spare terminals shall be supplied in each junction box.
c) Telephone sockets and plugs shall be provided in junction boxes.
d) Flame proof junction boxes shall be used in explosion proof/ flame-proof instruments
circuits and supplied with Ex (d) certification. All such boxes shall be weatherproof
also.
e) Each junction box shall have a minimum 12 numbers of entries with 20% or 2 Nos. as
spare entries for branch cable and minimum 2 numbers of entries for multipair cable
with 1No. spare. All entries shall be provided with suitable plugs.
f) Suitable 3-way power junction box shall be considered for higher size of incomer
power cable, which is not matching with the terminals provided in the control panel.
g) Junction Box shall have bottom entry for single pair as well as multi-pair cables.
Page 1288 of 1823

1.7 Junction Boxes for Fieldbus Loops

1.7.1 For Fieldbus segment, junction box shall be used for mounting the wiring/ terminal blocks to
terminate the trunk and spurs in the fieldbus networks.
Unless otherwise specified, vendor must use the following type of terminal blocks:
For all FISCO signals : Weatherproof terminal blocks
For all safe signals : Weather proof terminal blocks
For all Explosion proof signals : Explosion proof/Flameproof terminal blocks
1.7.2 Junction box for Fieldbus field barrier concept:
Fieldbus junction boxes with field barrier assembly/ assemblies shall be provided. No of
Field Barrier assemblies in each junction box shall be suitable for 12 spurs including 25%
spare spurs as a minimum.
Each junction box shall not have more than two segments and no. of field barrier assemblies
shall be considered accordingly. Field barrier assemblies in a segment shall be multi-
dropped (shall not be daisy chained in a trunk). Only one closed loop can be considered per
segment. Remaining spur connections in the segment can be used for open loop. For multi
field barrier assembly in a junction box, Field barrier assemblies shall be DIN rail mounted.
Vendor shall terminate the spare pair of trunk cable in DIN rail mounted terminal in junction
box. One field barrier assembly shall contain:
a) Isolation facilities for isolating the field barrier assembly from fieldbus trunk.
b) Not more than one field device in each spur connection.
c) Internal short circuit protection for each spur (short circuit current <= 45 mA)
d) LED indicator for each spur short circuit.
e) Each spur shall be galvanically isolated from trunk.
f) Fieldbus terminator for each segment shall be inside junction box.
1.7.3 Housing of the fieldbus junction boxes shall be electro polished type SS 316.
1.7.4 Surge protectors on the field side shall be provided whenever specifically mentioned in job
specification either within the FFJB or along with the instrument.
1.7.5 Sufficient spacing shall be provided inside the Junction Boxes for mounting of field barrier
assemblies, termination and routing of Trunk/ Spur cables to the barrier/Megablocks,
sufficient space shall be provided for installing terminator etc. inside the Junction Box.
1.7.6 For spur and trunk cables, 20 % addition cable entries must be provided. Unused entries
shall be plugged.
1.7.7 Each junction box shall be provided with sufficient entries with weatherproof, flameproof
plugs, as required. Trunk and spur entries shall be from the bottom.
1.8 Instrument Valves and Manifolds
a) Vendor shall supply instrument valves (miniature type) and valve manifolds wherever
required. The Impulse pipe/tube connection port shall be ½” NPT(F).
b) The hydrostatic test pressure for instrument miniature valves shall be 153 Kg/cm2g for
pipe class upto 600 and whereas for Instrument air lines, it shall be 41 Kg/cm2g. All
valves and manifolds shall be forged type only.
c) Valve body and trim material shall be 316 SS unless otherwise specified. Superior trim
material shall be selected as required by process conditions. Packing material in general
shall be of PTFE.
Page 1289 of 1823

1.9 Impulse Piping/Tubing

a) Vendor shall supply 1/2" OD x 0.065" thick ASTM A 269 TP 316 L stainless steel
seamless tubes with Molybdenum content of minimum 2.5% for impulse lines.
b) Where the pressure (operating) exceeds 70kg/cm2g or if piping is specified as impulse
line, seamless pipes of size ¾” NB of required thickness shall be supplied with material
as per piping class.
c) Seamless tubes shall have a hardness of max 80 RB as typical.
d) Steam tracing shall be 10 mm OD copper tubes of electrolytic grade copper.
e) Hydrostatic test pressure of instrument tubing shall be as per Annexure-III.
1.10 Pipes and Tube Fittings
a) Vendor shall supply flareless compression type of tube fitting and of three piece
construction.
b) The fitting/ferrule hardness shall not be less than HRB 90 so as to ensure a minimum
hardness difference of 5 to 10 between tube and fittings. The fitting/ferrule shall be of
SS316 material.
c) Socket-weld type forged pipe fittings of suitable material and rating shall be supplied
for pipe fittings as per Piping Material Specification. The minimum rating shall be 3000
Lbs. Weld neck fittings shall be used where socket weld type are not allowed by piping
class.
d) Brass fittings, wherever used as per job specification, shall be suitable for use on
copper tubes conforming to ASTM B68/B68M hardness not exceeding RB 50. All
fitting parts shall be manufactured from Brass as per IS-319 bar stock or equivalent and
shall be nickel plated.
e) All threaded fittings shall have NPT threads as per ANSI/ASME B 1.20.1only.
f) Hydrostatic pressure of tube fittings shall be as per Annexure-III.
1.11 Pneumatic Signal Tubes
a) Vendor shall supply 6mm OD x 1mm thick SS316L tube for pneumatic signal tubes.
b) Vendor shall avoid use of intermediate connections and shall estimate single length for
each instrument location.
1.12 Instrument Air Lines Fittings and Valves
a) Stainless Steel (SS 304) pipes and fittings shall used for instrument air distribution.
b) Isolation valves on instrument air service shall be packless gland type full bore ball
valves.
c) Instrument Air Manifold 6 way or 12 way shall be provided by vendor for Air
distribution within package.
1.13 Air Filter Regulators
a) Instrument air filter regulator of suitable size, range and capacity shall be supplied for
each pneumatic instrument.
b) The body of the filter shall be anodized aluminum with epoxy paint.
c) The filter shall have 5 micron sintered bronze filter element and shall be provided with
manual drain and 2" nominal size pressure gauge.
d) Case material of gauges which are part of air filter regulator shall be SS metallurgy.
e) Vendor to provide removable protective caps/ cover on all gauges pertaining to Air
filter regulator.
Page 1290 of 1823

1.14 Cable Trays and Cable Ducts

a) All cables on the main pipe rack shall be laid in cable duct. Cable ducts shall be of
galvanized mild steel with SS bolts and shall be fabricated as per 'Duct Fabrication-
bolted Construction Details' standard No. 7-52-0254.
b) All branch cables/tubes shall run on cable trays. Cable trays shall be perforated Cable
Trays.
c) These cable trays shall be made out of galvanized mild steel sheets of minimum 2.5
mm thickness. Ladder trays shall be of galvanized mild steel. 50 mm x 50 mm x 6mm
thick angle shall be used as a minimum.
d) The width shall be so selected that 50% of tray space is available for future use.
e) Suitable SS wire cable clamps shall be supplied for binding the cables/tubes at every
500 mm. Nuts/Bolts used for cable trays fixing shall be SS.
f) FRP / GRP cable tray with thickness minimum 4 mm shall be provided when specified.
1.15 Instrument Support/Structural Steel
a) Vendor shall supply instrument stands, stanchions and other structural steel material
required for supporting the cable trays, impulse lines and instruments.
1.16 Heat Tracing and Insulation
a) Heat tracing and insulation of line mounted instrument impulse lines shall be carried
out as per line specifications. Similar philosophy shall also be followed for equipment
mounted instruments. However, impulse lines for instruments/level instrument in
congealing, viscous services shall also be stream traced even though the
pipe/equipment not traced.
b) Instruments mounted on jacketed lines and jacketed equipments shall be jacketed only.
In case the jacketing of any particular instrument item is not possible, heat tracing may
be selected after intimation to Owner/ Owner Representative before proceeding ahead.
c) For all steam traced lines and steam jackets, a suitable type of steam trap must be
provided for proper and efficient tracing. Separate dedicated steam trap shall be used
for each instrument. Steam trap shall preferably be located on ground level with its
outlet connected to drain funnel or as advised elsewhere in the package. Each
instrument to be traced shall be provided with steam isolation valve.
d) Wherever electric tracing is shown in the approved P&ID and selected for instruments
and instrument lines, this must be suitable for the line operating temperature.
e) Steam tracing shall be avoided inside any room/ or shelter. The heat tracing required
for analyzers shall be carried out by electrical tracing using prefabricated tube tracers.
f) Insulation of all in-line instruments like control valves, safety valves etc. shall be done
as per the line requirements. Also all direct equipment mounted instruments like level
gauge, displacer/float type instruments etc. shall be properly insulated as per insulation
requirements of the equipment on which these are installed.
g) The insulation with ¾” dia. Sodium silicate inhibited ceramic fiber rope (SS wire
braided) by spiral winding in position, wrapping the rope around piping so as to cover
the piping completely without leaving any gap, application of two layers of self
adhesive aluminum foil tape (min 0.1 mm thick) spirally wound over the rope surface
with the joints in two layers staggered. Ceramic fibre rope shall be of minimum density
250 kg/m3 shall be made up of ceramic fibre insulation with other properties of ceramic
fibre rope confirming to specification “6-44-0002 for hot insulation” work.
h) Steam tracing shall be considered for instrument impulse line for cryogenic services
(i.e. operating temperature is less than 0ºC).
Page 1291 of 1823

2.0 INSTALLATION
2.1 Vendor shall be completely responsible for installation of all instruments within their battery
limit, in line with the installation standards (typical) furnished along with package
specification.
2.2 Whenever installation is beyond the scope of vendor/contractor, purchaser shall install the
instruments as per the details/documents/drawings provided by the vendor/contractor.
However, in such a case it must be ensured that complete installation materials shall be
supplied.
2.3 All direct mounted instruments like thermocouples, thermowells, temperature gauges,
pressure gauges, pressure switches etc. shall be installed in such a way that they have good
readability and accessibility.
2.4 The capillary of all capillary type instruments shall be supported properly and shall be
protected against mechanical damage.
2.5 All pressure/differential pressure instruments shall be provided with block and bleed/by-
pass, drain/vent valves etc as per the installation standards, and shall have accessibility.
2.6 All primary piping/tubing (impulse lines) shall have a slope of 1 in 12 on the horizontal run.
2.7 All welding shall be carried out as per the relevant codes with proper electrodes. Any testing
(non destructive) like DP test and radiography on root weld and final weld shall be carried
out as applicable. All consumables shall be part of vendor's scope of supply. Any pre/post
weld treatment as required by the relevant codes shall be carried out.
2.8 All threaded joints shall be joined with PTFE tapes only.
2.9 All impulse lines shall be supported at regular intervals (minimum 1.5 meter).
2.10 Instrument drain/vent connections shall be piped to safe area like oily water sewer or above
pipe racks to avoid accumulation of hazardous fluid in the plant atmosphere.
2.11 Steam tracing wherever required shall be carried out by 10 mm OD x 1 mm thick copper
tubes and condensate traps shall be provided to collect all the condensate and shall be piped
to the nearest pipe drain funnels.
2.12 All tubes/cables shall be properly laid on cable trays, which shall be supported at regular
intervals. SS cable Tags shall be provided for all cable entering in Instruments and in
Junction Boxes for branch as well as Multipair cables.
2.13 Separate routing or physical separation shall be maintained between signal, shut down and
power cables.
2.14 The cases of instruments having separate UPS power supply shall be earthed by earthing
wire to the nearest earth bus bar for safety reasons.
2.15 In case the cables are to be buried or laid in concrete trench the same shall be carried out by
vendor. In case civil work is carried out by purchaser, requirement of trenches shall be
provided with prior intimation to client.
2.16 Painting of angle trays, instrument supports and all structural supports shall be carried out as
under :-
a) The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned with brush and sand paper to
remove all scales. After cleaning, one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer shall be
given conforming to IS-2074 and allowed to dry. One coat of final paint shall be
applied.
Second and final coats of paint of final color shall be given before handing over the
plant/ commissioning.
Page 1292 of 1823

2.17 Installation of Systems (MMS, Analyzers etc.)

2.17.1 The system as applicable shall be installed by the system vendor who would be responsible
for installation and termination of interconnecting cables in the system racks/cabinets. All
interconnecting cables shall be identified and the individual cores/wires shall be properly
identified using ferrules. Direct-cross ferruling method shall be used for identification.
2.17.2 All system communication cables shall be laid in covered GI (galvanized iron) trays away
from power cables. Prefabricated cables shall be avoided for interconnection if these are to
be routed out side the cabinets. If unavoidable these should be laid in covered GI trays.
2.17.3 All panels/cabinets shall be properly leveled and secured firmly with the base supporting
structure. However, the consoles and printer stands need not be secured to base structure.
2.17.4 Grounding
a) Each cabinet, console and other equipment supplied as a part of system shall have
earthling lugs which shall be secured to the 'AC mains earthling bus'.
b) All circuit grounds, shields and drain wires shall be connected to the 'system ground'
bus which is isolated from 'AC mains earth'. This bus shall typically be 25 mm wide
and 6 mm thick of copper.
The total resistance of system ground shall be less than one (1) ohms unless otherwise
recommended by system manufacturer.
c) All Junction Boxes shall be earthed to nearest Earthling point available.
2.17.5 All other installation guidelines as recommended by system manufacturer shall be followed.
3.0 TESTING AND CALIBRATION
3.1 All impulse lines shall be tested hydrostatically at 1.5 times the design pressure /maximum
operating pressure. Ensure that instrument and vessel/piping is isolated during this test.
3.2 In case of special instruments/items where hydro testing is not permitted due to service
conditions, the impulse lines testing shall be carried out by using air or nitrogen.
3.3 After pressure testing, all these impulse lines shall be drained and dried with dry air for 15
minutes to remove any traces of moisture, oil and dust.
3.4 Instrument air lines shall be duly tested for any leak after pressurizing and isolating the main
root valve by soap solution and bubbler unit. After isolation, the rate of fall in pressure shall
be less than 1 kPa for every 4.4 metre (1 psi for each 100 feet) of tubing for a test period of 2
minutes.
3.5 All instrument cables shall be tested for continuity and insulation. While meggering the
cables for insulation testing, ensure that all instruments and barriers are isolated at both ends.
The megger testing at site is not required to be carried out for the field bus cables and
thermocouple extension cables. However, for field bus cables and thermocouple extension
cables, the loop resistance and capacitance shall be checked by the contractor before and
after completion of cable laying. For all cables from field instruments to Junction Boxes and
Junction Boxes to Control cabinets, continuity check to be done.
3.6 All instruments supplied by the vendor shall be calibrated using proper test equipment.
3.7 All instruments shall be calibrated for 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% and vice versa.
3.8 All temperature gauges shall be calibrated using temperature baths.
3.9 All thermocouple activated instruments shall be calibrated by generating milli-volts by a
potentiometer.
3.10 All transmitters shall be calibrated as per instrument ranges.
3.11 All displacer type level transmitters shall be calibrated with water or suitable fluids and
corrected for specific gravity.
Page 1293 of 1823

3.12 All alarm and trip switches shall be calibrated over the entire range, finally set and checked
for alarm/trip points and reset points as per the alarm/trip set point schedule. After setting,
these shall be sealed.
3.13 All control valves, prior to stroke checking, shall be externally cleaned thoroughly. The full
stroke of valve shall be checked for opening and closing. Any adjustment required for
obtaining full stroke and reducing hysteresis shall be carried out. The hysteresis shall not be
more than 1% URV (upper range value) with positioners and 5% URV without positioners.
Full stroke check shall be done for on-off valves also.
3.14 Solenoid valve shall be checked functionally for its operation and also compatibility with
respect to barrier.
3.15 Safety valves and relief valves shall be set/ tested by using dry air/nitrogen. Leakage if any
shall be removed by proper lapping of seat and disc.
3.16 All electronic/pneumatic receiver instruments shall be calibrated as per the manufacturer's
instructions. Controllers shall be aligned properly.
3.17 All special instruments like analyzer shall be checked and calibrated as per manufacturer's
instructions. Prior to testing, all analyzer sample lines shall be thoroughly cleaned by carbon
tetra chloride or any other cleaning liquid. After cleaning, these lines shall be thoroughly
purged with dry nitrogen.
3.18 No oil should be used in oxygen and chlorine service lines.
3.19 After performing the calibration of all instruments, the entire loop shall be checked for
proper operation.
3.20 The entire shutdown scheme shall be simulated from the process trip switches/ control
system and the scheme shall be tested for its proper operation prior to start up of the unit.
3.21 If no instrument air is available vendor shall provide necessary nitrogen cylinders with
suitable regulators to carry out the above activity.
3.22 The delivery of calibration gas cylinders having shelf life shall be staggered in such way that
the composition and stability of gas do not deteriorate. Date of supply shall be intimated to
the vendor and shall be prior to commissioning.
3.23 Testing Of Systems
3.23.1 All the system functions shall be checked thoroughly for proper functioning. These shall
include but not limited to the following tests:
a) Visual and mechanical.
b) Complete system configuration loading.
c) Demonstration of all system functions.
d) Checking of all systems displays.
e) Checking of correct functioning of all keyboards.
f) Demonstration of all system diagnostics.
g) Checking of proper functioning of all printers, hardcopy unit and printing of all reports.
h) Checking of all disc drives.
i) Complete checking of logic system, loading of user's program and checkout of results.
j) Checking of correct changeover of the back-up/redundant units in case of failure of
main units.
Vendor shall also carryout the system checks as per respective items specifications wherever
provided along with package.
Page 1294 of 1823

3.23.2 The input signals shall be simulated by disconnecting the field wires for all inputs. Wherever
control room mounted Transmitters/Converters/Receiver switches are used, the functioning
of same shall also be checked.
3.24 Loop Checking
3.24.1 Loop checking shall be carried out by vendor, which shall include proper functioning and
interconnection of all items in the loop.
3.24.2 All input signals shall be generated in the field and corresponding reading shall be checked
at all corresponding displays.
All the outputs shall be checked in the field, by physical verification of valve stroke or
operation of solenoid valve/pick-up of electrical contactor.
3.24.3 After loop checking is completed, vendor shall connect back any terminals and connections
removed during loop checking.
3.24.4 For fieldbus loops, the segment verification shall be carried out by DCS vendor. Any field
side modifications required shall be carried out by vendor.
4.0 COMMISSIONING
4.1 This activity shall be carried out in a systematic manner so as to avoid any accident to plant
and operating personnel.
4.2 During the plant start up all the instruments calibration, controller alignment, trip point
settings shall be trimmed so as to meet the operation requirements.
4.3 Prior to guarantee run of any package unit, the vital instruments as required by vendor have
to be recalibrated and the results recorded.
Page 1295 of 1823

MATERIAL SELECTION CHART Annexure I to
STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO.
6-52-0052 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 5
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Material selection chart defines the base material requirements for major instrument
items. The materials have been specified as per 'piping class' in which these
instruments are installed. Additional requirements like stelliting etc. shall be selected
based on process conditions.
1.2 Although materials as specified in Material Selection Chart shall be acceptable, in

general, this does not absolve vendor of the responsibility of proper selection of
material as per the fluid being handled and process conditions.
1.3 For all instruments in sour service requiring NACE as per Piping class, all materials
of construction shall meet the requirements specified in NACE MR 01-03 latest
edition. In addition, any other requirements if specified in respective piping class,
shall also be complied.
1.4 Impulse pipe material shall be as per the corresponding piping class. However, for
Impulse tubing material shall be 316L SS, as a minimum. Better material shall be
selected wherever required.
1.5 This gives details of selection criteria for most of the common EIL Piping Classes.
However, variations may exist from these in jobs and also new piping classes may
arise. In those circumstances, the material selection shall be based on the relevant job
piping classes and evaluation of actual requirements.
1.6 For testing requirement like Radiography, IBR, NACE, Hydrogen testing, Post weld
heat treatment, etc shall be followed as per piping material specification for the
respective piping class.
Page 1296 of 1823

Annexure I to
MATERIAL SELECTION CHART
6-52-0052 Rev4
Page 2 of 5
CONTROL VALVE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

SL.
PIPING CLASS
NO Body / Nozzle /
Body Trim Bellow
Bonnet disc
1. A1A, A3A, A5A, A6A, A8A, A9A, A216 SS 316 A216 SS 316 SS 316L
A10A, A14A, A19A, A22A, A28A, Gr. WCB Gr. WCB
B1A, B5A, B6A, B9A, B13A,
B19A, B28A
2. A16A, A23A, A26A, A68A, B16A, A216 SS 316L* A216 Gr. SS 316L * Inconnel *
B23A, B24A, B26A, B68A Gr. WCB * WCB *
3. D23A, D26A A216 SS 316L A216 Gr. SS 316L * Inconnel *
Gr. WCB * Stellited* WCB *
4. A2A, B2A, B21A, D1A, D9A, A216 SS 316 A216 SS 316 SS 316L
D19A, D2A, D5A, E1A, E2A, F1A, G.r. WCB Stellited Gr. WCB
F2A, F5A
5. A4A, B4A, D4A A352 SS 316 A352 SS 316 SS 316L
Gr. LCB Gr. LCB
6. A1B, B1B, D1B, D2B A217 SS 316 A217 SS 316 SS 316L
Gr. WC1 Stellited Gr. WC1 stellited
7. A1D, B1D, B5D, D1D, D2D, F2D A217 SS 316 A217 SS 316 SS 316L
Gr. WC6 Stellited Gr. WC6 stellited
8. A4F, B3F, B4F A217 SS 321 A217 SS 321 SS321
Gr. C5 Gr. C5
9. A4G, B4G A217 Gr. C12 SS 321 A217 Gr. SS 321 SS 321
C12
10. D4G A217 Gr. C12 SS 321 A217 Gr. SS 321 SS 321
Stellited C12
11. A1H, B1H, D1H A352 SS 316 A352 SS 316 SS 316L
Gr. LC3 Stellited Gr. LC3 stellited
12. A1K, A2K, A3K, A22K, B1K, B2K, A351 SS 316 A351 SS 316 SS 316L
D2K Gr. CF8 Gr. CF8
13. D2K A351 SS 316 A351 SS 316 SS 316L
Gr. CF8 Stellited Gr. CF8
14. B25K A351 SS 316L A351 SS 316L SS 316L
Gr. CF3 Stellited Gr. CF3 stellited
15. B18K, D18K A351 SS316 A351 SS316 SS 316L
Gr. CF8 Gr.CF8
16, A1M, B1M A351 SS 316 A351 SS 316 SS 316L
Gr. CF8M Gr. CF8M
17. A1N, B1N, B6N A351 SS 316L A351 SS 316L SS 316L
Gr. CF3M GrCF3M
18. A26N A351 SS 316L* A351 SS 316L* Inconnel*
Gr. CF3M* GrCF3M*
19. D26N A351 SS 316L A351 SS 316L* Inconnel*
Gr. CF3M* Stellited* GrCF3M*
20. B4K, B5K A351 SS 304H A351 Gr. SS 316 SS 316L
Gr. CF10M Stellited CF10M
21. A70M, A74M, B70M, B74M A351Gr. SS 321 A351Gr. SS 321 SS 321
CF8C CF8C
22 D25M A351Gr. SS 347 A351Gr. SS 347 SS 347
CF8C Stellited CF8C Stellited
23. A11K, B11K A351Gr. CF3 SS316L A351Gr SS316L SS 316L
CF3
Page 1297 of 1823

Annexure I to
6-52-0052 Rev4
Page 3 of 5
ORIFICE/SENIOR ORIFICE FIELD TRANSMITTER

S.
PIPING CLASS
NO
Flange/Body Plate Body Sensor
1. A1A, A3A, A6A, A8A, A9A, A10A, A105 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316L
A14A, A19A, A22A, B1A, B21A, B6A,
B9A, B13A, B19A, D1A, D9A, D19A,
E1A, F1A,
2. A16A, A23A, A26A, A68A, B16A, B23A, A105 * SS 316L* SS 316* SS 316L*
B24A, B26A, B68A, D23A, D26A
3. A2A, B2A, D2A, E2A, F2A, A105 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316L
4. A4A, B4A, D4A A350 GrLF2 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316L
5. A1B, B1B, D1B, D2B A182 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316L

GrF1
6. A1D, B1D, B5D, D1D, A182 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316L
D2D, F2D GrF11
7. A4F, B3F, B4F A182 SS 321 SS316 SS321 or
GrF5 Hastelloy-C
8. A4G, B4G, D4G A182 SS 321 SS316 SS321 or
GrF9 Hastelloy-C
9. A1H, B1H, D1H A350 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316L
GrLF3
10. A1K, A2K, A3K, A22K, B1K, B2K, D2K A182 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316L
GrF304
11. B25K A182 SS 316L SS 316 SS 316L
GrF304L
12. B18K, D18K A182 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316L
GrF304
13. A1M, B1M A182 SS 316 SS 316 SS321 or
GrF316 Hastelloy-C
14. A1N, A26N*, B1N, B6N, D26N* A182 SS 316L SS 316 SS 316L
GrF316L
15. A5A, B5A, D5A, F5A, F25A A105 SS316 SS 316 SS316L with
Note-1 gold plated
16. B4K, B5K A182 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316L
GrF304H
17. A70M, A74M, B70M, B74M A182GrF321 SS321 SS316 SS321 or
Hastelloy- C
18. D25M A182GrF347 SS347 SS316 SS316L with
gold plated
19. A11K, B11K A182GrF304L SS316L SS316 SS316L
Page 1298 of 1823

Annexure I to
6-52-0052 Rev4
Page 4 of 5
THERMOWELL LEVEL INSTRUMENT

S.
PIPING CLASS
NO
Flange Well Cage/ Chamber
1. A1A, A3A, A6A, A8A, A10A, A14A, A105 SS 316 A106
A19A, A22A, B1A, B21A, B6A, B9A, Gr. B
B13A, B19A, D1A, E1A, F1A, A5A,
B5A, D5A, D9A, D19A, F5A
2. A16A, A23A, A26A, A68A, B16A, A105 * SS 316L A106 GrB*
B23A, B24A, B26A, B68A, D23A,
D26A
3. A2A, B2A, D2A, E2A, F2A A105 SS 316 A106 GrB
4. A4A, B4A, D4A A350 GrLF2 SS 316 A333 Gr6
5. A1B, B1B, D1B, D2B A182 GrF1 SS 316 A335 GrP1
6. A1D, B1D, B5D, D1D, A182 GrF11 SS 316 A335 GrP11

D2D, F2D
7. A4F, B3F, B4F, A182 GrF5 SS 321 A335 GrP5
8. A4G, B4G, D4G A182 GrF9 SS 321 A335 GrP59
9. A1H, B1H, D1H A350 GrLF3 SS 316 A333, Gr3
10. A1K, A2K, A22K, A3K, B1K, B2K, A182 GrF304 SS 316 A312 GrTP304
D2K
11. B25K A182 GrF304L SS 316L A312 GrTP304L
12. B18K, D18K A182 GrF304 SS 316 A312 GrTP304
13. A1M, B1M A182 GrF316 SS 316 A312 GrTP316
14. A1N, B1N, B6N, A26N*, D26N* A182 GrF316L SS 316L A312 GrTP316L
15. B4K, B5K A182 GrF304H SS 304H A312 GrTP304H
16 A70M, A74M, B70M, B74M A182 GrF321 SS321 A312 GrTP321
17. D25M A182 GrF347 SS347 A312 GrTP347
18. A11K, B11K A182 GrF304L SS316L A312 GrTP304L
Page 1299 of 1823

Annexure I to
6-52-0052 Rev4
Page 5 of 5
PRESSURE, DIFFERENTIAL
LEVEL GAUGE PRESSURE AND VACUUM
SL. GAUGE
PIPING CLASS
NO Sensing
Cock Cock
Chamber Element Diaphragm
Body Trim
/ Socket
1. A1A, A3A , A6A, A8A, A10A, A105 A105 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316
A14A, A19A, A22A, B1A, B6A,
B9A, B13A, B19A, B21A, D1A,
D9A, D19A, E1A, F1A, A5A,
B5A, D5A, F5A
2. A16A, A23A, A26A, A68A, A105* A105* SS SS 316* SS 316L*
B16A, B23A, B24A, B26A, 316L*
B68A, D23A, D26A
3. A2A, B2A, D2A, E2A, F2A A105 A105 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316
4. A4A, B4A, D4A A350 A350 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316

GrLF2 GrLF2
5. A1B, B1B, D1B, D2B A182 A182 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316
GrF1 GrF1
6. A1D, B1D, B5D, D1D, A182 A182 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316
D2D, F2D GrF11 GrF11
7. A4F, B3F, B4F A182 A182 SS 321 SS 316 SS 321 or Hastelloy
GrF5 GrF5 or Inconel
8. A4G, B4G, D4G A182 A182 SS 321 SS 316 SS 321 or Hastelloy
9. A1H, B1H, D1H A350 A350 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316
GrLF3 GrLF3
10. A1K, A2K, A22K, A3K, B1K, A182 A182 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316
B2K, D2K GrF304 GrF304
11. B25K A182 A182 SS 316L SS 316 SS 316
GrF304L GrF304L
12. B18K, D18K A182 A182 SS 316 SS 316 SS 316
GrF304 GrF304
13. A1M, B1M A182 A182 SS 316 SS 316 SS 321 or Hastelloy
14. A1N, B1N, B6N, A26N*, D26N* A182 A182 SS 316L SS 316 SS 316L
GrF316L GrF316L
15. B4K, B5K A182 A182 SS 304H SS 316 SS 316
Gr. F304H GrF304
H
16. A70M, A74M, B70M, B74M, A182Gr. A182Gr SS321 SS 316 SS 321 or Hastelloy
F321 F321 or Inconel
17. D25M A182Gr. A182Gr SS347 SS 316 SS 347 or Hastelloy
F347 F347 or Inconel
18. A11K, B11K A182Gr. A182Gr SS316L SS 316 SS 316L
F304L F304L
Notes:
* Material shall be hardness controlled and shall comply with NACE MR-0103 latest edition.
1. For Hydrogen service wetted part material for switches, transmitters shall be SS 316L gold
plated, base material Hastelloy shall be avoided
2. SS 316L, SS 316Ti are also acceptable in place of SS316.
Page 1300 of 1823

ANNEXURE-II TO
PACKAGE UNITS
Page 1 of 11
ANNEXURE-II
1. Format of Instrumentation Index

2. Format of Point Data Base
3. Format for Functional Schematics
4. Format For cable Schedule (Non-FF)
5. Format For cable Schedule (FF)
6. Format for Logic Diagram
7. Format for Electrical/Instrumentation interface
8. Format for FF instrument details
Page 1301 of 1823

Page 1302 of 1823
Instrument Index
P&ID Data Sheet P.R. No. Inst. Loc. Installation Tubing Steam Bill of Functional /
Location-
Tag no. Fluid Description No. No. Drawing Std. No. Hook up Tracing Std. Material Loop Remarks
Line No.
No. No. No. No. Schematic
Equipment No.
No.
PLANT:-
PLANT:- DRAWING NO
NO.
ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED UNIT:-
UNIT:-
NEW DELHI CLIENT:-
CLIENT:- REV. DATE BY CHKD APPD
borrower,s
This drawing and the design it covers are the property of ENGINEERS INDA LIMITED.They are merely loanded and on the borrower, s express
used
agreement that they will not be reproduced, copied, loaned, exhibited, nor use d expect in the limited way and private use permited by any EIL-
EIL-1651-
1651-599 REV.1 A4-
A4-210X297
written consent given by lender to the borrower.
Page 1303 of 1823
POINT DATA BASE FOR
LOCATION : LOOPTYPE :
Tag Number SET POINT FOR ALARM TEMP SENSOR
INPUT Max Contact_St

Loop Min Inst Control FS/ LOGIC IS/ NON- Interloc
Tag_Nu PID Service System MCC SIGNAL Inst Engg Unit Fail Position Burnout atus on REMARKS Note ID
System Tag Type Range Action HIGH LOW HIGH_HIGH LOW_LOW Type DWG IS k No.
mber TYPE Range Status Actuation
NOTES:
DIVISION : DRAWING NO. REV.

ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED PLANT :
ENGINEERING
A545-110-16-51-PD01 A
NEW DELHI DEPT :
CLIENT : INSTRUMENTA REVISION DATE PREPARED BY CHECKED BY APP. BY SHEET OF
TION
Page 1304 of 1823
Page 1305 of 1823
Fieldbus Signal Cable Schedule
FFJB NO.:- Trunk Length Mtrs. Type Size Dia-
Segment No. Drum No. Control Room JB Location:

Local Control Room
Marsh. Cabinet: Sys. Cabinet
Spur Cable
Tag No. Surge
Terminal Spur Length Type Terminal No. FFPS NO. H1 Card No.
Barrier no. No. m Protector Remarks
1+
1-
S
2+
2-
S
3+
3-
S
4+
4-
S
1+
1-
S
2+
2-
S
3+
3-
S
4+
4-
S
1+
1-
S
2+
2-
S
3+
3-
S
4+
4-
S
Project: Document No.
ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED Unit:-
NEW DELHI Client:
Unit no:- Rev Prep. By Checked by Appd SHT. ___ OF __
This drawing and the design it covers are the property of ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED. They are merely loaned and on the borrower’s express agreement that they will not be reproduced, copied,
loaned, exhibited nor used except in the limited way and private us
Page 1306 of 1823

Page 1307 of 1823
Document No.
XXXX-XX-16-51-ED55 Rev.0
EI interface details
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Motor/ Analog
Electrical Command (4-20mA) / Control
Equipment Equipment Electrical Interlock Control Sub-
Sl. no. heater Signal tag no. Description P&ID NO (C) / Contact system
tag no. description Location No system System
rating Status (S) (Pot-free) / location
(kW) Serial
1 110-PA-101A BFW PUMP 100 SS# 01 1110-XL-1011 PUMP RUNNING 1101 S S DCS 1 SRR #01
RIO-
1110-XL-1011 PUMP RUNNING S C 1 SRR #01
PLC
RIO-
1110-PA-101ASTP PUMP STOP C C 1 SRR #01
PLC
1110-PA-101ASTR PUMP START C C RIO- 1 SRR #01
PLC
1110-PA-101ASTRP START PERMISSIVE C C RIO- 1 SRR #01
110-PA-101AREM PUMP IN REMOTE C DCS 1 SRR #01
110-SY-1011 SPEED CONTROL TO VFD C A DCS 1 SRR #01
110-SI-1011 SPEED INDICATION S A DCS 1 SRR #01
START PUSH BUTTON ON
110-HS-1011A Note-2.4 DCS 1 SRR #01
DCS CONSOLE
Stop PUSH BUTTON ON
110-HS-1012B Note-2.4 1 SRR #01
HWC
110-HS-1012C LCP STOP Note-2.4 LCP 1 DIERCT TO SS
11-HS-1012D FIELD STOP (15m AWAY) Note-2.4 PLC 1 SRR# 01
Legend
EI interface Electrical - Instrumentation interface signals SRR Satellite Rack Room
MCC Motor Control Center CR Control Room
VFD Variable Frequency Drive / Variable Speed Drive S/S Sub-station (Electrical)
DCS Distributed Control System CCR / MCR Central Control Room / Main Control Room
PLC Programmable Logic Controller MOV Motor Operated Valve
LCS Local Control Station (Electrical) RIO Remote IO cabinet of DCS/PLC located in Electrical sub-station
P&ID Piping and Instrument Diagram DC Data concentrator
LCP Local Control Panel C&E Cause & Effect diagram
Note - Tag numbers have been provided in this document for vendor's understanding. While preparing the El interface details, vendor shall fill the table using tag numbers relevant to the package.
page 1 of3
Page 1308 of 1823

EI interface philosophy
1 Unit wise allocation of Control Room (CR) / Satellite Rack Room (SRR) and Sub-Stations (S/S)
Unit no. Unit name CR / SRR S/S no.
2 Interface signals and cabling philosophy

2.1 All signals shall be hardwired or serial as identified in E&I interface column-10
Following cable segregation to be ensured:
i. Between DCS and PLC
2.2
ii. Between Commands and Status
Iii. Between Analog ( AI/AO) and Contact (DI/DO) type signals
2.3 Separate cable shall be used for package vendor supplied control systems (as identified in E&I interface document).
Wherever there are both manual stop from DCS/PLC and a logic trip, the manual stop shall be clubbed with the logic trip at DCS/PLC end and only one contact (common) shall be provided to Electrical.
2.4
However, licensor specifications / P&ID requirements (if any) shall govern & same be indicated in E&I interface document.
Unless otherwise indicated in E&I interface, Instrumentation’s stop command for all motors, drives, etc shall be stay-put type. Electrical’s circuit shall be designed to inhibit the motor / drive from starting
2.5 as long as stop command is maintained / active.
3 Interface signal ratings *(kW/Voltage rating indicated is in general rating, however actual kW rating shall be as per approved EDB (Elect))
Instrumentation’s contact ratings for discrete outputs from Inst. (i.e. commands):
LT (contactor feeder): 240 VAC, 5A (motor rating ≤ 55kW)
3.1 LT (breaker driven): 220 VDC, 2A/ 110 VDC, 0.1A (55kW < motor rating ≤ 160kW)
HT (breaker driven): 220 VDC, 2A/110 VDC, 0.1A (motor rating > 160kW)
For these above commands, Instrumentation’s contact shall be potential-free.
3.2 Electrical’s contact ratings for discrete inputs from Elect. (i.e. status / indications) shall be 24 VDC, 2A, i.e. Instrumentation shall interrogate by 24VDC.
3.3 All 4-20mA 2-wire isolated signals suitable for 600Ω load shall be provided for current, voltage, power, speed, etc. for commands/feedbacks. Such motors shall be identified in the E&I Interface.
4 Type of start / stop signals

Type of signal Type of contact Remarks
4.1 Start command NO (All drives) Close to start, pulse of 2s duration
4.2 Stop command NC (up to 55 kW) Open to stop, stay-put type
4.3 Stop command NO (above 55 kW) Close to stop, stay-put type
4.4 Status Indication NO Close to indicate running status
4.5 Start Permissive NO Close to permit start, stay-put type
4.6 VFD Shall be as per vendor’s requirement which shall be intimated by Electrical
page 2 of3
Page 1309 of 1823

5 Local / Remote (L/O/R) selector switches on LCS
Wherever electrical equipment is being remotely-started from control room as indicated in EI-interface document above, L/O/R shall be provided in LCS by Electrical. Instrumentation may not explicitly
5.1 identify L/O/R in EI interface document. This L/O/R along with the default LCS start/stop shall be directly wired to MCC / PCC / HT switchgear by Electrical. These switches may also be indicated as H-O-A
(Hands-Off-Auto) for some units based on licensors’ terminology / P&ID depiction.
5.2 Remote starting from control room shall only be possible when L/O/R switch is in ‘R’ position.
5.3 Stop / trip command from control room shall be possible irrespective of L/O/R switch’s position.
5.4 Electrical shall consider L/R switch in LCS as defualt. Instrumentation shall use remote start as per P&ID / C&E diagram
6 Auto / Manual (A/M) selection

6.1 Wherever A/M selection is required, it shall be in the control system with no separate contact to Electrical.
For VFD controlled motors, the A / M selector switch shall be provided in VFD. In case of ‘A’ mode, the speed control shall be through the 4-20mA signal from DCS; In case of ‘M’ mode the speed shall be
6.2
adjustable from VFD / LCS. The VFD / LCS selector switch shall be located in VFD panel unless otherwise specified as per Client’s philosophy.
7 Variable speed drives

7.1 Separate 4-20 mA hardwired signal (isolated) for feedback of speed, current, power, etc from VFD to DCS/PLC shall be provided for drives identified in E&I Interface. Cable by Elect
7.2 Separate 4-20 mA hardwired signal for speed reference from DCS to VFD shall be provided for drives identified in E&I Interface. Cable by Elect
7.3 Serial interface shall be provided, wherever required. Instrumentation will identify all such drives in E&I Interface document. Serial interface Cable by Inst
8 Motor operated valves

8.1 MOV status: Potential-free contacts (NO type, 24 VDC, 2A) from field (MOV limit-switches) for open and close
8.2 MOV command: Potential-free contacts (NO type, 24 VDC, 2A) to field (MOV actuator) for open, close and jog.
8.3 Supply, routing and laying of cables up to respective control room for all status and commands shall be by Electrical.
9 RTD/BTD
9.1 Electrical to provide list of motors that require RTD/BTD to be connected to DCS in the motor list provided to Instrumentation
10
10.1 “contact” and “Analogue” are all hardwired signals and “serial” interface is soft signal.
10.2 “Contact” & “Analogue” signal cabling shall be by Elect while Serial interface cabling shall be by Instrumentation
11 Soot blower PLC

11.1 Signal cable to PLC and PLC to DCS, Field to SRR will be by INST. All other cables from Field to Substation by ELECTRICAL
page 3 of3
Page 1310 of 1823

FF DATA Document No.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Rev. No. 0
Page 1 of 1
Make (Vendor Node Device PID function FF transducer FF transducer FF transducer

Sl.No Model no Device ID Device Tag Device Type Device Class DD Revision CFF Revision L- Type Downloadable file
Name) Address Revision required (yes/no) HI LO Unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Note : - Node Address data will be communicated to the Device vendor after finalization of segment loading.It is Device Vendor's responsibility to incorporate this data in the device before Supply
Device Type :- Manufacturer's model number associated with the resource - used by interface devices to locate the DD file for the resource
Device Revision :- Manufacturer revision number associated with the resource - used by an interface device to locate the DD file for the resource
DD Revision : - Revision of the DD associated with the resource - used by an interface device to locate the DD file for reference.
L-Type : - Determines if the values passed by the transducer block to the AI block may be used directly (Direct) or if the value is in different units and must be converted linearly (indirect) , or with square root (IND Sqr Root), using the input
Transducer HI,LO Scale & Unit :- The high and low scale, engineering units code, and the number of digits to the right of the decimal point used with the value obtained from the transducer for a specified channel.
Page 1311 of 1823

ANNEXURE-III TO
ANNEXURE-III
1. Hydrostatic Test pressure for Instrument Tubing

2. Hydrostatic Test pressure for Instrument Tube Fittings
Page 1312 of 1823

ANNEXURE-III TO
PACKAGE UNITS 6-52-0052 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 3
1. Hydrostatic Test Pressure for Instrument Tubing
Page 1313 of 1823

ANNEXURE-III TO
PACKAGE UNITS 6-52-0052 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 3
2. Hydrostatic Test Pressure For instrument Tube Fittings
Page 1314 of 1823

STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
A.11 ENGINEERS
elf ' INDIA LIMITED CIVIL-STRUCTURAL 6-68-0021
(A Goof of thole Undertaking)
LSTK WORKS Rev. 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 7
fkr441TR-
Pfei
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
CIVIL - STRUCTURAL
w+-31qa zr4--*r wrir.

wrzt)
LUMP-SUM TURN-KEY WORKS
(L. S. T. K. WORKS)
311-
0414)(11q
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1 04 07 2019 REVISED AND ISSUED AS SPECIFICATION AVM AJS RS RKT
0 30 08 2013 ISSUED AS SPECIFICATION GV AS/RS PKM DM

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All nghts reserved
Page 1315 of 1823

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS
Oge.fr *Peg INDIA LIMITED CIVIL-STRUCTURAL 6-68-0021
1411111 eviRAR MI J.RIM) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
LSTK WORKS Rev. 1
Abbreviations:
AFC : Approved for Construction

BIS : Bureau of Indian Standards
DCI : Document Control Index
EDB : Engineering Design Basis
EIL : Engineers India Limited
GAD : General Arrangement Drawing
LOI : Letter of Intent
LSTK : Lump-sum Turn-key
MTO : Material Take-off
PC : Personal Computer
RCC : Reinforced Cement Concrete
VDMS : Vendor Document Management System
VDR : Vendor Document Requirement
Structural Standards Committee:
Convenor: Mr. Rajanji Srivastava
Members: Mr. Anurag Sinha

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Mr. Charanjeet Singh (Projects)
Mr. Ravindra Kumar (Construction)
Page 1316 of 1823

011oki ENGINEERS
Ogeir feli5leg INDIA UMITED CIVIL-STRUCTURAL 6-68-0021
(WM (A Govt of Incla Undataktng)
LSTK WORKS Rev. 1
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 DESIGN & DOCUMENT REVIEW 5
ANNEXURES:
ANNEXURE-1 : General Check List

ANNEXURE-2 : Format for Comment & Compliance Sheet
ANNEXURE-3 : Check List for analysis & Design of Normal foundations
ANNEXURE-4 : Check List for analysis & design of Foundation for Rotating equipments
ANNEXURE-5 : Check List for analysis & design of Liquid Retaining Structures
ANNEXURE-6 : Check List for analysis & design of Concrete buildings
ANNEXURE-7 : Check List for analysis & design of Shed type buildings
ANNEXURE-8 : Check List for analysis & design of Technological/ Process structures
ANNEXURE-9 : Check List for analysis & design of Pipe racks (unit/ offsite)
ANNEXURE-10 : Check List for analysis & design of Tall structures (concrete/ steel)
ANNEXURE- 1 1 : Check List for analysis & design of Conveyor galleries & trestles
ANNEXURE-12 : Check List for analysis & design of Foundation for storage tanks
ANNEXURE-13 : Check List for analysis & design of Foundation for static equipments
ANNEXURE-14 : Check List for analysis & design of Furnace foundations
ANNEXURE-15 : Check List for preparation of Structural drawing
Page 1317 of 1823

ENGINEERS
fel5leg INDIA LIMITED CIVIL-STRUCTURAL 6-68-0021
1.11U,eRenreaxjmrts0 (A Gort of Inde Undertaking)
LSTK WORKS Rev. 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 The design considerations given hereunder establish the minimum basic requirements for
civil-structural works for LSTK contracts.
This standard specification shall be read in conjunction with the Engineering Design Basis
document (EDB) issued for the Job and Standard Specification No. 6-68-0022 for Material &
Construction requirements.
All structures shall be designed for satisfactory performance and functions for which the same
are to be constructed.
a) Whenever any reference to BIS/ other code is made, the same shall be taken as the
latest revision (with all amendments issued there to) on the notified date of
submission of tender.
b) Apart from the codes mentioned in particular in the EDB document, all other relevant
codes related to the specific job under consideration and/ or referred to in the above-
mentioned codes, shall be followed wherever applicable. Reference to some of the
codes does not limit or restrict the scope of applicability of other relevant codes.
c) In case of any variation/ contradiction between the provisions of BIS codes and the
requirements given in EDB document, the provisions given in EDB document shall
have precedence over all others. In absence of relevant BIS codes, reference to
corresponding British or American codes may be made (in that order of preference).
All designs, detailing and construction shall strictly conform to the standards,
specifications and 'specific requirements' enclosed with the tender. Only if relevant
information is not available in these documents, reference to relevant BIS code shall be
made.
1.2 A Document Control Index [DCI, i.e. detailed list of drawings/ documents, including
specifications, standards, design philosophy (foundation & superstructure), general notes,
design calculations, design drawings, Bulk Material Take-off (Bulk MTO), bar bending
schedules (for RCC works) and fabrication drawings (for structural steel works)] indicating
the document/ drawing category (review or record as applicable) together with the scheduled
and actual date of submission of the documents, shall be submitted by the Contractor through
the Vendor Document Management System (VDMS) and kept updated at all times in the
DCIM for review by Owner/ owner's representative.
13 The Bulk MTO document containing Cement, Re-bars (diameter-wise) and Structural Steel
(section-wise) shall be submitted within 45 days from the date of receipt of LOI. The same
shall be updated at 50% & 90% stages of the engineering.
1.4 Structure-wise quantity statements (showing anticipated, released and balance quantities of
concrete, structural steel and piles) shall be submitted by the Contractor and kept updated at
all times in the Vendor Document Management System (VDMS) for review by Owner/
owner's representative. The DCI shall also indicate the document/ drawing category (review
or record as applicable) together with the scheduled and actual date of submission of the
documents.
1.5 Vendor Document Management System (VDMS) is a web application that lets suppliers/
contractors manage their Document Control Index (DCI) through an interface, submit their
documents for review/ record and get the reviewed/ approved documents/ drawings.
Page 1318 of 1823

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Ogez fdlies INDIA LIMITED CIVIL-STRUCTURAL 6-68-0021
lase„ mow off Joomo IR Govt of !mho linden afoog)
LSTK WORKS Rev. 1
2.0 DESIGN & DOCUMENT REVIEW
2.1 Before proceeding with design and drawing preparation, the Contractor shall submit detailed
philosophy of design of various parts of (all) the structures and foundations (including
equipment foundations) along with explanatory sketches for review by Owner/ owner's
representative. Only after the approval (including review and incorporation of comments as
offered during the review) of the design philosophy, the Contractor shall submit any design
document and/ or drawing for review or record or issue the same for construction.
2.2 The Contractor shall carry out the structural design of all structures and prepare complete set
of civil and structural approved for construction (AFC) drawings needed for correct and
accurate construction. The design/ drawing shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
design philosophy prepared for the structure (including "Design Criteria" given in the EDB)
and architectural/ structural general arrangement and shall incorporate all the comments/
suggestions given by Owner/ owner's representative without any extra cost to the Owner and
without any implication on the time-schedule for completion of works.
2.3 Design and detailing of the structures and foundations shall fulfill all functional requirements
for which the same is intended and it shall be ensured that adequate accesses, clearances,
clearing of interferences, provision of cutouts, etc. have been provided to make the structure/
foundation fully operational.
2.4 Construction of units/ structures identified for design/ drawing review (as referred in Vendor
Document Requirement (VDR) attached in the bid document or DCI) by Owner/ owner's
representative shall not be taken up at the site till these documents are reviewed by Owner/
owner's representative and comments/ suggestions given by Owner/ owner's representative
are incorporated along with submission of compliance sheet indicating incorporation of all
comments. For all other foundations and structures the Contractor shall directly submit the
AFC drawings to Engineer-in-Charge and construction of such works shall be taken up
immediately. Design and drawings for such foundations/ structures shall also be
simultaneously submitted in VDMS for Owner/ owner's representative's record. In the event
Owner/ owner's representative offers any comment on documents/ drawings of record
category, it shall be ensured by the Contractor that these comments are duly incorporated in
the documents/ drawings and revised set of document/ drawing is issued to site for
construction and simultaneously submitted in VDMS for Owner/ owner's representative's
record.
2.5 Submission of typical review category documents shall be taken up prior to corresponding
record category documents. Owner/ Owner's representative comments on typical review
category documents shall be duly taken care in all relevant record category documents as well
before issuing them for construction and simultaneously submitted in VDMS for Owner/
owner's representative's record.
Wherever review is carried out the same shall be restricted to following:
a) Conformance of general arrangement of the structure to approved design philosophy

and design basis.
b) Overall framing of the building/ conceptual foundation system.
c) Detailed design and drawings including input/ output of computer analysis and design
vis-a-vis actual drawing.
Irrespective of the identified structures requiring review, the Contractor shall submit
complete set of design and drawings of all structure/ foundation systems.
Page 1319 of 1823

ENGINEERS
51:ge..110154-ez—vi
gW INDIA LIMITED CIVIL-STRUCTURAL 6-68-0021
fA Govt W India Untied*no
LSTK WORKS Rev. 1
2.6 To facilitate an overall systematic review, the Contractor shall ensure the following:
a) Structural design/ drawings for any structure/ foundation are submitted for review
only if referenced input (e.g. architectural drawing, equipment layout, piping general
arrangement drawing (GAD), equipment data sheet, vendor drawing, etc.) have been
reviewed by the concerned Owner's specialist in approval/ review Code-2 or Code-1
and are available in the VDMS on or before the date of submission of structural
design/ drawings.
b) Complete set of design and drawings of each independent building/ structure are
submitted simultaneously
c) Relevant checklist(s) duly filled-up, signed (by the approver of civil-structural design/
drawing) & stamped, shall accompany each deliverable of civil-structural document/
drawing submitted by the contractor. The checklist(s) are to be used as a guide while
performing the related activities. The same are attached as annexure. All points listed
therein are mandatory check point. Other points/ observations/ comments may be
added based on need and judicious discretion depending on the importance of
activity/ deliverables.
d) Soft copy of files created as input for computer analysis/ design are also part of the
respective design documents.
e) All re-submissions are accompanied with a compliance statement (a document stating
point-wise compliance to all comments by Owner/ owner's representative on previous
submission)
2.7 In case the referenced input (e.g. geotechnical recommendations, architectural drawing,
equipment layout, piping general arrangement drawing (GAD), equipment data sheet, vendor
drawing, etc.) as applicable, reviewed by the concerned Owner's specialist in approval/
review Code-2 or Code-1 are not available in the VDMS on or before the date of submission
of structural design/ drawings for any structure/ foundation, the date of submission of
structural design/ drawings shall deemed to be considered as the date of submission of
approved reference drawing.
2.8 To ensure accuracy, correctness and completeness of documents before submission to Owner/
owner's representative, the Contractor shall ensure that all such submitted designs and
drawings are complete in all respects, thoroughly checked, stamped APPROVED FOR
CONSTRUCTION, and signed APPROVED by the Contractor's own responsible civil/
structural graduate (minimum) engineer (irrespective of the fact that the same are prepared in
the Contractor's own design office or by an approved agency/ sub-contractor).
Incomplete, unchecked, unsigned and unstamped design documents/ drawings shall not
be reviewed/ accepted for construction and shall be deemed to be considered as void/
withdrawn.
2.9 The accuracy/ correctness of all designs and drawings shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor and any delay/ loss/ damage to the Owner in respect of any mistake/ discrepancy/
anomaly in such designs and drawings shall be entirely borne by the Contractor.
2.10 Owner/ owner's representative reserves the right to review any/ all or none of the designs and
drawings. Review by Owner/ owner's representative shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for correct design and execution of the works.
2.11 Revision of any design/ drawing/ detailing shall not be permitted unless the same is
necessitated due to comments on review of such documents by Owner/ owner's
representative. Such revisions shall be restricted to incorporation of these comments only and
no new details shall be added in the drawings unless called for by comments during review.
All revised portion shall be clearly marked and clouded on the respective drawing for easy
Page 1320 of 1823

0 ei tr
4 ENGINEERS
Ogell tifleg INDIA LIMITED CIVIL-STRUCTURAL 6-68-0021
1.912,1 efeesre MIJIiITA,
(A Govt of India Undertaking)
LSTK WORKS Rev. 1
identification. Subsequent review of such revised documents, if required shall be limited to

revision as clouded.
2.12 All fabrication/ erection drawings and bar bending schedules shall be prepared by the
Contractor and shall be directly issued through VDMS for construction to the work. Such
drawings together with design calculations for all splices, joints and gusset plates shall
simultaneously be reviewed by Owner/ owner's representative at site (Resident Construction
Manager). The Owner/ owner's representative at site at his discretion may review all or some
or none of these designs & drawings.
Wherever such review is carried out the same shall be restricted to the following:
a) Structural layouts, orientation, elevation of structural members.

b) Section/ size of members.
c) Adequacy of few critical connections and joints for their required strength.
2.13 For analysis and design of structures, latest version of internationally accepted commercial
software viz. STAAD.PRO or equivalent are permitted.
In case software packages (commercially available or in-house developed) other than above
are intended to be used for analysis and design, the same shall be informed in writing to
Owner/ owner's representative. A validation report consisting of calculations and relevant
computer files containing input and detailed output (also refer clause 2.14) shall be submitted
by the Contractor through VDMS. Only after getting written approval from Owner/ owner's
representative, to this effect, such intended software be put to use for detailed analysis and
design.
2.14 The following minimum documentation shall be submitted through VDMS for computer
aided analysis and design as a part of structural analysis & design document:
a) Complete input and output files in native format.

b) Relevant sketches of structure geometry with node and member numbering, loading,
bending moment, shear force, deflected shape diagrams, etc.
c) Summary of member end forces, support reactions, stress ratio, deflections, etc.
2.15 Contractor shall depute the concerned Civil-Structural design engineer to the review office of
Owner/ owner's representative as and when required for review of contractor's documents.
During such reviews involving computer aided analysis/ design/ drafting of structures, the
contractor shall make his own arrangement of Personal Computer (PC) in the form of Lap-top
in the premises of review office of Owner/ owner's representative. This is required to
expeditiously resolve all the comments including those involving the use of PC by contractor
in his submission. The contractor shall ensure that these PC's are fully operational along with
necessary software already loaded including the input/ output/ drawing files of the structures
being reviewed. The contractor shall revise and re-submit the analysis/ design and drawings
as required during review, through VDMS.
Reviewing of designs/ drawings is not obligatory on the part of Owner/ owner's

representative and complete correctness/ soundness of the designs/ drawings and their
execution at the site shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor irrespective of the
fact whether the same has been reviewed by Owner/ owner's representative or not. Any
defect observed during construction or till the defect liability period of works' shall be
rectified and removed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out whatever
modification or reconstruction is needed for the purpose, to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge/ Owner without any extra cost and/ or time implication to the
Owner.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copynght EIL — All rights reserved
Page 1321 of 1823

ANNEXURE-1
15IfRad ENGINE1RS GENERAL CHECKLIST OF 6-68-0021
* eil Mit-6' INDIALIMIIFI)
.4 '..). ol Inetu UNIttian,
Page 1 of 2
Filled-up, signed (by the approver of civil-structural design/ drawing) & stamped
checklist shall accompany each submission of civil-structural document/ drawing by the
contractor:
Project: Job No.:

Document No.: Rev. No.:
Document Title:
SI. Contractor's
PMC Requirement Remarks
No. Response
I. The submission is as per submission schedule as per o Yes
approved DCI.
2. The submission is as per submission sequence as per o Yes
approved DCI.
3. Basic documents prepared by the contractor (e.g. design o Yes
philosophy, specifications, standards, general notes, etc.) are
already approved.
4. Bulk MTO has been submitted. a Yes
5. All the referenced input (e.g. geotechnical recommendations. o Yes
architectural drawing, equipment layout, piping general
arrangement drawing (GAD), equipment data sheet, vendor
drawing, etc.) as applicable have been reviewed by the
concerned Owner's specialist in approval/ review Code-2 or
Code-1 and are available in the DCIM on or before the date
of submission of structural design/ drawings.
6. The design calculations being submitted herewith are o Yes
complete in all respects, thoroughly checked and confirm to
approved engineering design basis, relevant approved input
documents and applicable codes & standards, stamped
APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION, and signed
APPROVED by the Contractor's own responsible civil/
structural graduate (minimum) engineer (irrespective of the
fact that the same are prepared in the Contractor's own design
office or by an approved agency/ sub-contractor).
7. The drawings being submitted herewith are complete in all o Yes
respects, thoroughly checked and confirm to approved design
calculations, approved general arrangement, stamped
APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION, and signed
APPROVED by the Contractor's own responsible civil/
structural graduate (minimum) engineer (irrespective of the
fact that the same are prepared in the Contractor's own design
office or by an approved agency/ sub-contractor).
8. The documents/ drawing being submitted are complete with o Yes
respect to the whole structure.
9. In case this submission is for drawings only, the related o Yes
analysis & design have already been submitted.
10. Structure-wise quantity statements (showing anticipated, o Yes
released and balance quantities of concrete, structural steel
and piles) are updated & submitted.
11. In case this submission is of record category document/ o Yes
drawing, similar review category documents/ drawings have
already been submitted.
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copynght EIL — All nghts reserved
Page 1322 of 1823

ENGINEERS ANNEXURE-1
effialaeg INDIA LIMITED GENERAL CHECKLIST OF 6-68-0021
.04"f /.1.0 .„ r M .1.1.nderiak491
Page 2 of 2
SI. Contractor's
PMC Requirement Remarks
No. Response
13. In case this submission is of record category document/ o Yes
drawing, the submitted document/ drawing incorporates
comments on the similar review category document/
drawing.
14. The accuracy/ correctness of all designs and drawings shall o Yes
be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and any delay/
loss/ damage to the Owner in respect of any mistake/
discrepancy/ anomaly in such designs and drawings shall be
entirely borne by the Contractor. Review by Owner/ owner's
representative shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for correct design and execution of the works
Date: Name & Signature
Note:
Contractor to check & confirm that the submission meets the above requirements of
PMC and categorically tick RI mark in the "0 Yes" response.
Page 1323 of 1823

laRad ENGINEERS FORMAT FOR COMMENTS ANNEXURE-2
.ii Kiift INDIA LIMITED & COMPLIANCE SHEET OF 6-68-0021
WV./ ei.vIW 011 I...M. ,'..n, .1 Iola Undr-alanl,
Page 1 of 1
Filled-up, signed & stamped compliance sheet shall accompany each re-submission of
civil-structural document/ drawing by the contractor:
Document No. : Rev. No.:
Date of Submission: Date of Review:
Review Code: o 1 02 o3 o R oV
SI.
Reference Clause PMC Comments Contractor's Response
No.
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Review Code Legend:
Code I No comments.
Code 2 Proceed with manufacture/ fabrication as per commented document.

Revised document required.
Code 3 Document does not confirm to basic requirement as marked.

Resubmit for review.
R Retained for Records.
V Void.
Page 1324 of 1823

CHECKLIST FOR ANNEXURE-3
oizr ENGNEERS
1241 - INDIA LIMITED ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF OF 6-68-0021
A C. Ha Au ttruienA0)! NORMAL FOUNDATIONS Page 1 of 1
Project: Job No.:

Document Title:
SR. Tick Mark

CHECK/ CONTROL POINTS
NO. as per Legend
Founding level/ depth of foundation with respect to 1-1PP/ FGL/ NGL/ EGL/
1
FFL (strike out whichever is not applicable).
2 Requirement & Level of plinth/ tie beams.
3 Type, Shape & Dimensions of footing.
4 Adequacy of loading for foundation.
5 Correctness of the design forces as per analysis.
6 Selection of critical loading cases/ combinations.
7 Long/ short column effect for pedestal.
8 Size of pedestal:
a) type of anchor bolts
b) bolt spacing (with respect to clearance between the bolts)
c) edge distance of anchor bolts
d) depth of embedment of anchor bolts
9 Location co-ordinates & Orientation with respect to North direction.
10 Conformance to Geotechnical recommendations:
a) check for SBC at founding depth (w.r.t. settlement/ shear)
b) consideration of ground water table.
c) check for FOS against overturning, sliding
d) increase in SBC (limited to 25% for wind or seismic/ 100% for blast)
e) spacing of piles (within group & inter-group)
f) pile cut-off level
g) load check conforming to pile capacity
h) increase in pile capacities (limited to 50% for vertical & 25% for lateral
for wind/ seismic/ 50% for blast)
Projection of foundation outside battery limit is co-ordinated with Civil
11
Department for under-ground piping, etc.
12 Ductile detailing requirements for reinforcement, wherever applicable.
13 Internal co-ordination with all concerned departments.
Legend :
✓ : Check carried out and found OK

it NA : Check carried out and found not applicable
Page 1325 of 1823

CHECK LIST FOR ANNEXURE4
lot
ifazte? ENGINEERS ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF
INDIA LIMITED OF 6-68-0021
$‘ige_IT ea
I 411,1 ....M.' IL, A. A f..4 A ...Linde UlcAg. FOUNDATION FOR
Page 1 of 1
ROTATING EQUIPMENTS
Project: Job No.:

Document Title:
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
1 Approved (at least review code 2) inputs available.
Complete loading data:
a) reference line of machine, base frame dimensions and suction side &
discharge side (for pumps)
b) size of block/ deck, pedestal above HPP
1 c) static/dynamic loads (or dynamic load factor) & their location of
application (as per vendor)
d) permissible limiting values of vibration parameters
e) pocket dimensions, locations
f) grout type & thickness
g) whether anti-vibration pads are provided
3 Founding level/ depth of foundation w.r.t. HPP/ FGL/ NGL/ EGL/ FFL
Value of C„ & net SBC from soil recommendations.
4
For pile foundations, the pile stiffness value.
5 Amplitude of vibration and resonance check in required modes.
6 No fouling with adjacent foundation as per equipment layout.
7 Check for limiting size of element(s).

Check for critical speed, whether the machine is variable speed or fixed
speed?
8 if variable speed motor is used, whether amplitude has been checked
considering the machine speed same as the natural frequency of the
foundation system.
9 Minimum reinforcement requirement as per IS:2974.
10 Specified number of construction joints & their details.
II Note for single pour.
Legend :
1 : Check carried out and found OK

1 NA : Check carried out and found not applicable
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copynght EIL — All rights reserved
Page 1326 of 1823

CHECK LIST FOR ANNEXURE-5
‘31fae-leigkrAENGINtERS ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF
'err felfileglitW INDIA LIMITED OF 6-68-0021
1.1471,4,T. {1 1.1.14 ,/,‘ / /KU uncle 7.11, ng, LIQUID RETAINING
STRUCTURES Page 1 of 1
Project: Job No.:

Document Title:
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
I Design method (cracked or un-cracked) to be identified for each element.
Check for stability & uplift as per respective structure/ pit/ tank w.r.t. water
2
table at various stages of construction.
3 Requirement of minimum thickness & reinforcement.
4 Reinforcement provided on both faces (for slab & walls).
5 Treatment to be given on surfaces in contact with earth.
6 Anti-corrosive treatment for structures storing corrosive liquids.

Requirement of joints, water stops, puddle flanges, giving notes for
execution sequences.
Legend :

I NA : Check carried out and found not applicable
Page 1327 of 1823

CHECK LIST FOR AN NEXURE-6
ENGINEERS ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF OF 6-68-0021
41geji EPteg INDIA LIMITED
oaiRA ~T., ICAO.] IA Govt 04 Indu Undertaking,
CONCRETE BUILDINGS Page 1 of 4
Project: Job No.:

Document Title:
SR. Tick Mark

CHECK/ CONTROL POINTS as per Legend
NO.
1.0 Availability of Inputs
1.1 Approved Architecture drawings of building
1.2 Approved Plot Plan
1.3 Approved related Area Drawings
1.4 Contour plan
1.5 Approved Geotechnical Recommendation
1.6 Approved Electrical Drawings for Substation Building
1.7 Approved Instrumentation Drawings for Control Room Building
1.8 Vendor Inputs for:
a) Air Conditioning Equipments
b) Transformers etc.
c) Lift
2.0 Correctness of Inputs
2.1 With respect to Architecture Drawings:
a) Framing arrangement.
b) Level & Location:
i) Co-ordinate of building
ii) Finished Ground Level
iii) Finished Floor Level
iv) Approach Road Level
c) Brickwork arrangement
i) Length/ height of brickwork.
ii) Stability check for brickwork with Steel frame.
iii) Flushing of Brickwork with frame structure.
iv) Brick supporting arrangement for Rain water Pipe
encasing.
d) Requirement of expansion joints as per codal provisions.
e) Arrangement & levels of false flooring & false ceiling.
f) Clear height of floors.
g) Cross-checking of elevations at FFLs of Ground Floor, Upper
Floors, Roof etc., w.r.t. FGL, Approach Road Level.
h) Monorail location & extent of monorail beam for Substation
building.
2.2 With respect to Mechanical Drawings:
a) Lift Pit Size and loading available in Approved Mechanical/
Vendor Drawing.
b) Machine Room Details available in Approved Mechanical/
Vendor Drawing.
c) Cut-out details for duct in AC Plant room/ AHU rooms in
Approved Mechanical/ Vendor Drawing.
d) Details of pedestals for AC Plant/ AHU in Approved Mechanical/
Vendor drawing.
e) Monorail location & Capacity as per Approved Mechanical
drawing.
Page 1328 of 1823

4--- CHECK LIST FOR ANNEXURE-6
till ENGINEERS
*fir fnikitag (ELT) INDIA LIMITED
WWI eteafr rni igra.1, IA Gov, Of WIOpa Undertaking)
ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF OF 6-68-0021
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
2.3 With respect to Electrical Drawings:
a) Transformer details.
b) LT-I IT Switch gear panel location.
c) Cable trench layout.
2.4 With respect to Instrumentation Drawings:
a) Panel resting arrangements.
b) Cable tray details.
c) Pipe sleeves details.
d) MCT location.
e) Cable tray in superstructure.
f) Cable trench layout.
2.5 With respect to General Civil Area Drawings:
a) Co-ordinates of building
b) Orientation of building with respect to North direction.
c) Approach Road level/ Finished Ground Level.
d) Contour for NGL from Plot Plan.
e) Fouling with existing/ proposed facilities from Area/ Foundation
drawing.
0 Underground facilities from Area Drawing.
2.6 With respect to Geotechnical Recommendation:
a) Type of foundation (Shallow or Pile).
b) Depth of foundation.
c) Net Allowable SBC for foundation from Geotechnical Report.
d) Pile Capacity from Geotechnical Report.
e) Diameter of Pile & Spacing of Piles from Geotechnical Report.
f) Specification of Piling.
g) Drawing of Pile.
3.0 Design Aspects
3.1 Structure is analysed as 3D Framed Structure.
3.2 Uses of Codes as per approved EDB:
a) For Concrete (IS:456/ IS:13920)
b) For Steel (IS:800)
3.3 Grade of Material as per approved EDB:
a) Concrete
b) Reinforcement
c) Structural Steel
3.4 Covers as per approved EDB:
a) Foundation
b) Column
c) Beam
d) Slab
e) Wall
3.5 Checking of Minimum thickness as per approved EDB:
a) Foundation
b) Column
c) Beam
d) Slab
e) Wall
3.6 Loadings
Page 1329 of 1823

CHECK LIST FOR
lai(zA ENGINEERS ANNEXURE-6
I iilatiteg W INDIA LIMITED ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF OF 6-68-0021
t (.o,1 Indo Unonialuog)
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
3.6.1 Dead Load:
a) Self weight
b) Slab load
c) Brick load
d) Gutter/ Parapet load
3.6.2 Live/ Imposed load as per approved EDB for panels, ducts, cables etc. on
floor, roof canopy, passage, lobby & stair case:
a) Office Building
b) Administrative building
c) Substation building
d) Control room
3.6.3 Seismic Load as per approved EDB:
a) Method of Seismic Analysis (Seismic Coefficient/ Response
Spectra).
b) Importance factor (Mention Value).
c) Response reduction factor accordingly consideration of ductile
detailing (Mention Value).
d) Damping factor (Mention Value).
e) Type of soil.
f) Type of structure.
g) Time period for frame structure as per IS:1893.
3.6.4 Wind load for Shed type Building
a) Basic Wind Speed (Mention Value).
b) Probability Factor (1 ci ) (Mention Value).
c) Terrain, Height, Structure Size Factor (k2) (Mention Value).
d) Topography Factor (k3) (Mention Value).
Blast load for Control Room shall be as per RRA report (Mention Blast
3.6.5
Pressure).
3.6.6 Load combination shall be as per approved EDB:
3.7 Design of concrete member of building shall be as per IS:456/ IS:13920.
3.8 Ductile detailing requirements for Reinforcement, wherever applicable.
3.9 Slenderness check for design of columns.
3.10 Crack width of beam/ slab.
3.11 Deflection of slab/ staircase.
3.12 Foundation design.
3.12.1 Fouling of under-ground cable trench with foundations/ plinth beams etc.
3.12.2 Alignment of plinth beams with brick walls.
3.12.3 Factor of safety against overturning & Sliding as per approved EDB.
Checking of SBC/ pile capacity as per approved Geotechnical
3.12.4
Recommendation.
3.12.5 Maximum allowable settlement of soil as per approved EDB
3.12.6 Checking of modified pressure calculation in case of tension occurred.
3.12.7 Increase in stress shall be as per Geotechnical Recommendation.
3.12.8 Minimum percentage of reinforcement as per approved EDB
3.12.9 Minimum spacing of reinforcement bar as per approved EDB.
4.0 Internal coordination with other departments.
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL —All rights reserved
Page 1330 of 1823

,'"ENIGINEERS
MITED
51gar WiesW INDIA LI ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF OF 6-68-0021
eferit Jastso IA GOA of WO. Undertalan0
SR. Tick Mark

CHECK/ CONTROL POINTS as per Legend
NO.
5.0 MTO for super structure & Substructure
a) Area of building
b) Concrete in foundation
c) Concrete in superstructure
d) Reinforcement in foundation
e) Reinforcement in superstructure
f) Reinforcement per Cu. M. of Concrete for foundation
g) Reinforcement per Cu. M. of Concrete for superstructure
Legend :

✓ NA : Check carried out and found not applicable
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright Ell — All rights reserved
Page 1331 of 1823

latiazE4 ENGINEERS ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF
le-af OWE; INDIA LIMITED OF 6-68-0021
, A+A-7, us,. -. Al. a. A ,..• A row Ilndenak nj
SHED TYPE BUILDINGS Page 1 of 1
Project: Job No.:

Document Title:
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
A SUB-STRUCTURE
1 Refer separate checklist for foundation.
2 Check fouling with machine/equipment foundation.
B SUPER-STRUCTURE
1 Check the clear gap for isolation of rotating machine foundation.
Requirement of roof monitor, extent of side cladding & height of parapet
2
wall.
3 Identification of braced bay & maintenance bay.
4 Whether provision of extension of shed by one bay considered (for future).
Live loads & superimposed loads at various locations, including crane
5
loading & centerline distance between rails
6 Check the critical load combination for design.
7 Check the horizontal (transverse & longitudinal) deflections.
8 Check flooring details conforming to likely superimposed load.
9 Compatibility between pedestal level & anchor bolts with base plate details.
Check whether correct limiting values of slenderness ratios for structural
10
elements (columns, beams, bracings, etc.) used in design.
Check whether correct effective lengths of structural elements (columns,
11
beams, bracings, etc.) used in design.
Check whether minimum 90% mass participation achieved (in both
12
horizontal directions) for calculating seismic forces.
13 Check over-all compliance to approved Architectural drawings.
Legend :

Page 1332 of 1823

k31 el ENGINEERS ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF
sifgar tifift NIA LIMITED OF 6-68-0021
GOO .1 1,11.• Ulde TECHNOLOGICAU
Page 1 of 2
PROCESS STRUCTURES
Project: Job No.:

Document Title:
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
A SUB-STRUCTURE
I Refer separate checklist for foundation.
2 Check fouling with equipment foundation.
B SUPER-STRUCTURE
Material of construction as per engineering design basis of the project and
1
departmental guidelines.
2 Check the application of equipment load (correction, magnitude & location).
., Live load/ superimposed load considered for respective level/ floor, air-
.)
coolers, fire proofing load, etc. where applicable.
4 Whether loading due to one extra floor considered (for future expansion).
Check the estimation of seismic/ wind force to be applied at respective
5
level/ floor.
Check whether critical design forces from various likely load combinations
6
have been considered for the design of structural element/ foundation.
Identify critical areas where limiting beam sizes need to be provided for
avoiding any fouling.
Location of braced bay, co-ordinated with Piping. Bracing angle is within
8
30° & 60°. Plan bracing considered.
9 Check the horizontal (transverse & longitudinal) deflections.
Check the capacity of overhead mono-rails & its location with extent (in &
10
outside plan dimensions) w.r.t. the respective equipment.
Verify whether all vertical & horizontal piping loads have been correctly &
11
completely taken care.
Equipment supporting arrangement - check fouling with bottom nozzle or
12
hood.
Arrangement of intermediate/ secondary beams to clear opening
13
requirements.
14 Inter-connection with pipe rack.
Joint details:
16 a) reference standard no. is furnished
b) details for connections not available in standard are furnished
Compatibility between member sizes in General Arrangement &
17
Reinforcement Details (in drawing).
18 Whether integrated analysis done with equipment/ piping.
19
elements (columns. beams. bracings, etc.) used in design.
20
I Check w hether minimum 90% mass participation achieved (in both
- horizontal directions) for calculating seismic forces.
Page 1333 of 1823

4at-aelei ENGINEERS ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF
Oge_21 Et;egW INDIA LIMITED OF 6-68-0021
e•feMv aw AtIlY Tn. Unchntairog • TECHNOLOGICAL!
PROCESS STRUCTURES Page 2 of 2
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
Check requirement of ductile detailing for reinforcement (for concrete
21
' elements).
23 Summation of applied forces matched with reactions.
Legend :

if NA : Check carried out and found not applicable
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL —M rights reserved
Page 1334 of 1823

zi ENQNEERS ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF
siga farileg INDIA LIMITED OF 6-68-0021
toll,' a4.1.- Im f,..1 A , w oil CI 1,31.1. Vncie J. r), PIPE RACKS
(UNIT/ OFFSITE) Page 1 of 2
Project: Job No.:

Document Title:
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
A FOUNDATION
B SUPER-STRUCTURE
Layout and configuration of pipe rack conforming to piping inputs/
1
approved equipment layout.
Levels of pipe rack/ tiers conforming to piping inputs/ approved equipment
2
layout.
Whether load due to one extra tier considered (for future expansion) to be
3
confirmed by Piping/ PMC.
Location of expansion joints and braced bays coordinated with Piping
4
department.
Material of construction as per engineering design basis of the project,
5
including fire-proofing requirements.
Check the loading considered given by piping conforming to the
6
requirement of design basis, including for fire proofing where applicable.
Check consideration of friction/ anchor/ guide loads as per design basis and
7
as forwarded by piping.
Check the layout & loading of Air-coolers including supports required for
8
inlet & outlet piping.
Check the routing of electrical cable trays & instrument duct to be supported
9
on the pipe rack and their respective loading as per design basis.
10 Check the horizontal & vertical clearances at road/ railway crossings.
Location and arrangement of vertical & horizontal bracing fulfilling design
II
requirements and confirmed by piping
Check whether additional load due to extra length of pipes have been
12
considered or not at the location where pipes are rising or getting dropped.
Check the level at top of grout w.r.t. actual profile of ground levels for off-
13
site pipe rack.
14 Local design checks at junction locations
Whether any two-phase flow lines are there? If yes, have these been taken
15
care as per the Design basis.
Joint details:
17 a) reference standard no. is furnished
b) details for connections not available in standard are furnished
Compatibility between member sizes in General Arrangement &
18
Reinforcement Details (in drawing).
19 Transverse beams are designed for horizontal bending.
20 Tray support members are provided as per electrical guidelines.
21 Battery Limit platform & approach for the same.
22 Bracing angle is within 30° & 60°.
23 Inter-connection with technological structures.
Page 1335 of 1823

101 ZI ENGINEIRS
4fgeir felf51e-gW INDIA LIMITED ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF OF 6-68-0021
anCTI :AMA, . MC. ..10P
PIPE RACKS
(UNIT/ OFFSITE) Page 2 of 2
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
24 Fouling of vertical bracing with anchor bolt in pedestal (in drawing).
25
Check whether correct effective lengths of structural elements (columns.
26
beams. bracings, etc.) used in design.
Check whether minimum 90% mass participation achieved (in both
27
horizontal directions) for calculating seismic forces.
Check requirement of ductile detailing for reinforcement (for concrete
28
elements).
Legend :

if NA : Check carried out and found not applicable
Page 1336 of 1823

,`1(R 4r ENGINEERS ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF OF 6-68-0021
Ogit faalft INDIA LIMITED TALL STRUCTURES
t, t11 tr;oie of 44. 19 0400,41
(CONCRETE/ STEEL) Page 1 of 1
Project: Job No.:

Document Title:
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
A SUB-STRUCTURE
B SUPER-STRUCTURE
1 Check wind & seismic parameters considered.
2 Check estimation of wind forces.
3 Check estimation of seismic loads.
4 Check structural configuration and bracing system (vertical & horizontal).
5 Check analysis corresponding to critical wind/ seismic direction.
6
Check whether critical maximum design forces have been considered from
8
various load combinations for the design of respective elements.
9 Check for permissible horizontal (transverse & longitudinal) deflections.
Legend :

Page 1337 of 1823

CHECK LIST FOR AN NEXURE-11
,39/a,....70,ENGNEERs
gzit 1.4, at
VINDIA LIMITED
nog gi
ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF
CONVEYOR GALLERIES
OF 6-68-0021
& TRESTLES Page 1 of 1
Project: Job No.:

Document Title:
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
A SUB-STRUCTURE
I Refer separate checklist for foundation.
B SUPER-STRUCTURE
Check the system stability & dynamic analysis as per design basis/Job
I
specification.
Check the correctness in estimation of wind pressure corresponding to right
2
shape factor for exposed members.
3 Check the lateral load transfer from gallery to top of trestle.
Check the supporting arrangement of gallery for keeping proper provision
4
for expansion, check limiting vertical deflection.
5 The analysis & design shall conform to the erection scheme being adopted.
Legend :

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All nghts reserved
Page 1338 of 1823

lofeiei ftENGINEERS ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF
Igeg Wes- ft INDIA LIMITED OF 6-68-0021
r..aa ina.i indetowg, FOUNDATION FOR
Page 1 of 1
STORAGE TANKS
Project: Job No.:

Document Title: --1
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
1 Check equality of bottom pressure below ring wall and intermediate
compacted soil mass.
, Check the detailing/ arrangement of ring wall w.r.t. anchor bolts and clean
- out drain, requirement of minimum edge clearance for Anchor Bolt.
Check the thickness. size, shape and spacing of piers with protective
3
coating/ lining for tanks storing corrosive liquid.
Check the special requirements/ consideration (size, solid concrete slab
4 below bottom plate, anchorage, counter weights etc.) for storage tanks
storing liquids at high pressure and/ or high/ low temperature.
5 Location co-ordinates & Orientation w.r.t. North direction.
Legend :

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copynght EIL - All nghts reserved
Page 1339 of 1823

lailitad ENGINEOZS ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF
ell Rift INDIA LIMITED OF 6-68-0021
4 ',..K , ,1,11. Und,ak.), FOUNDATION FOR
STATIC EQUIPMENTS Page 1 of 1
Project: Job No.:

Document Title:
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
I Design loads as per approved data sheet.
Check the input files for:
a) depth of foundation
2 b) depth of water table
c) wind/ seismic load as per Design Basis
d) support details as per data sheet
Check the out-put file for:
a) SBC conforming to Geo-Tech Recommendations
3
b) FOS against overturning
c) size restriction for likely fouling
Legend :

Page 1340 of 1823

(.111Releift;ENGINERS
fa5legNii, WA LIMITED ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF OF 6-68-0021
FURNACE FOUNDATIONS Page 1 of 1
Project: Job No.:

Document Title:
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
I Loading as per approved data sheet of equipment
2 Additional load due to supported ducts/ lining
3 Check for SBC at founding level and FOS against overturning
4 Size limitations if any to avoid fouling
Legend :

Page 1341 of 1823

.79faa-t4 A -2-A,
ENGIRS
PREPARATION OF
4geir tinaeg
=I j
, .
INDIA LIMITED OF 6-68-0021
,...00 . t Ink UNt0-1.‘"11
STRUCTURAL DRAWING Page 1 of 3
Project: Job No.:

Document Title:
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
I GENERAL
a Drawing number is as per approved DCI
b Electronic file number is as per approved DCI
c Draughting is as per design requirements
d North line/ orientation as per input data
e Notes comply with Job Specifications and General Notes
f Field notes for specific instructions/ scope of work defined
Layout of grids and spacing/ dimensions/ equipment location, support,
g orientation etc. as per input data
h Referenced Drawings specified
i Referenced Standards specified
If not adequately clear in General Notes, grade of concrete and grade of
J reinforcement bars s 1 ecified
k Bill of materials furnished (for the detailed portion)
I Necessary internal co-ordination done with relevant departments as per
requirements
m Resolution/ incorporation of comments received
2 FOUNDATIONS
Coordinates/ location is as per input data, suction side & discharge side (for
a
pump foundations) as per layout drawing
Referenced level and elevations specified are as per approved General Civil/
b
Architectural drawings/ Piping GAD (viz. NGL/ FGL/ I 1PP)
c Elevation/ depth of foundation bottom furnished
d Fouling with surrounding foundations/ services cleared
e Any extra cover for rebar required and specified
f Any extra minimum cement content required and specified
g Thickness, projection and grade of lean concrete specified
h Anchor bolt location and orientation specified
Adequacy of foundation depth checked to accommodate anchor bolt
i
assemblies
j Anchor bolt description (as per standard) specified
k Depth of pockets specified
I Minimum cover on anchor bolts/ pockets checked
m Fouling between anchor bolt assembly and pedestal rebar checked
n Grout thickness specified
o Reinforcement provided as per design/ codal requirements
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 1342 of 1823

Illy Jt M-
-; ENGINEERS
$Q211 5W INDIA LIMITED PREPARATION OF OF 6-68-0021
,A,., tnclu STRUCTURAL DRAWING Page 2 of 3
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
p Links and ties detailed
q Dowel lengths for column rebars staggered and specified
r Depth of machine foundations with respect to building foundations checked
s Separation detail for machine foundations and pouring sequence given

Requirement of water bars at construction joints for liquid retaining
t
structures furnished
u Requirement of protective painting
Field note for sequence of construction, if adjoining foundations are at
v
different level
For pump foundations, following field note shall compulsorily be added in
foundation drawings:
w "The pump discharge nozzle is facing towards North/East/West/South".
(appropriate direction shall be selected as per layout drawing, in case
discharge is upwards, direction of suction nozzle shall be specified)
3 SUPER STRUCTURE Reinforced Cement Concrete
a Layout is as per approved Piping GAD/ Architectural drawings
b Requirement of expansion/ separation joints checked
c Anchor bolt location and orientation specified
d Anchor bolt description (as per standard) specified
e Pockets for bolts located/oriented and specified

f Depth of pockets/ length of bolts in RCC members checked
g Minimum cover on anchor bolts/ pockets checked
h Fouling between anchor bolt assembly and rebar checked
i Grout thickness specified
j Reinforcement provided as per design/ codal requirements
k Cut-outs as per requirement provided with edge protection

1 Slope has been provided over RCC roof
m Curb around all openings
n Insert plates & pipe sleeves provided wherever required
o Extra reinforcement around cut-outs & openings

p Dowel bars for lap length & anchorage length
q Nominal links in column, stirrups for beams & their arrangement
4 SUPER STRUCTURE Structural steel

a Layout is as per approved Piping GAD/ input drawings
b Requirement of expansion/ separation joints checked
c Bolting details for equipments specified
d Member sizing and connection details furnished
e Grating/ chequered plate requirements with supporting members furnished
f Welding requirements furnished
_ g Fire-proofing requirements furnished

Page 1343 of 1823

16iIiikre? rffr" ENGINEERS CHECK LIST FOR ANNEXURE-15
sigelfiaMegNDIA ..) LIMITED PREPARATION OF OF 6-68-0021
.4W! ri.kr. t r.r.r .,
A , : ,A A Oa Undefla4.91
STRUCTURAL DRAWING Page 3 of 3
SR. Tick Mark

NO. as per Legend
h Requirement of removable floor/ handrails checked
i Requirement of grouting holes in base plates specified
j Vertical & Horizontal bracings provided as per piping clearance
k Splicing location has been proposed/ suggested
I Approach staircase/ ladder provided with proper landing at entry point
m Toe plate around openings
n Stiffness/ diaphragm plates have been suitably provided
o Vertical clearance below monorail beam checked
Capacity of monorail specified & structurally stable cantilever projection
P given
5 Drawing issued through DCIM (Document Control Index Module)
Legend :

Page 1344 of 1823

`lfiel
doI ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Ogar kipteg v INDIA LIMITED
Redd riernreattantrni) IA GON of India Undertaking)
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL 6-68-0022 Rev.1
LSTK WORKS
Page 1 of 14
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
Trrew itiWkerg.
CIVIL - STRUCTURAL
th—Tig Wral-
(VW•VITiett•*-• Wrat)
LUMP-SUM TURN-KEY WORKS
(L. S. T. K. WORKS)
st111+114) WM-
REVISED AND ISSUED AS

.‘mo,)16
1 27.08.2018 AS RS RKT
0 26.07.2013 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION AS RS PKM DM
Standards Standards
Rev. Committee Bureau
Date Prepared Checked
Purpose Convenor Chairman
No by by
Approved by
Page 1345 of 1823

ENGINEERS
telMeg INDIA UMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 6-68-0022 Rev. 1
1,2,ag GLADYS,' (A Govt ol India Undertaking)
LSTK WORKS Page 2 of 14
Abbreviations:

CPCIA : Concrete Penetrating Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture
HSFG : High Strength Friction Grip
IS : Indian Standard
LSTK : Lump-sum Turn-key
OISD : Oil Industry Safety Directorate
PCC : Plain Cement Concrete
PVC : Polyvinyl Chloride
RCC : Reinforced Cement Concrete
STD : Standard
TMT : Thermo-mechanically Treated
Structural Standards Committee:
Convenor: Mr. Rajanji Srivastava
Members: Mr. Anurag Sinha

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Mr. Charanjeet Singh (Projects)
Page 1346 of 1823

laraeleT ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
5iges klf5idu WA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 6-68-0022 Rev. 1
(WM 292,01? M13.0.1) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 REFERENCED CODES, STANDARDS & PUBLICATIONS 4
3.0 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS 4
3.1 General 4
3.2 Water 4
3.3 Aggregate (for Concrete) 5
3.4 Sand (for Masonry & Filling) 6
3.5 Cement 7
3.6 Steel 7
3.7 Brick 8
3.8 Stone 8
3.9 Admixtures 9
3.10 Water Bars (Water Stops) 10
3.11 Bitumen/ Bituminous Materials 10
3.12 PVC Pipes 10
3.13 Wood/ Timber 10
3.14 Concrete Block Masonry 11
3.15 FaL-G Masonry 11
3.16 Anti-termite Compounds 11
3.17 Poly-sulphide Sealants 11
4.0 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 11
4.1 Construction 11
4.2 Tolerances 12
4.3 Hanger Scaffolding for Pipe Rack 14
Page 1347 of 1823

_=)) ENGINEERS 6-68-0022 Rev. 1
Ogeir Haleg INDIA LIMITED
IA Goo of 0104 Undertaking)
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 The material and construction considerations given hereunder establish the minimum basic
requirements for reinforced cement concrete (RCC), structural steel and masonry structures/
works.
This specification shall be read in conjunction with the Engineering Design Basis (EDB) for
the Job and Standard Specification No. 6-68-0021 for General requirements.
Project specific civil-structural requirements as mentioned in the Engineering Design Basis

(EDB) shall supersede the any such requirements given in this standard specification.
All codes referred in this document pertain to BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) publications
and bear prefix IS.
Whenever any reference to BIS code is made, the same shall be taken as the latest revision
(with all amendments issued there to) on the notified date of submission of tender.
Apart from the BIS codes mentioned in particular in the various clauses of this document, all
other relevant codes related to the specific job under consideration and/ or referred to in the
above-mentioned codes, shall be followed wherever applicable. Reference to some of the
codes in the various clauses of this document does not limit or restrict the scope of
applicability of other relevant codes.
1.5 In case of any variation/ contradiction between the provisions of BIS codes and the
requirements given hereunder, the provisions given in this document shall have precedence
over all others. In absence of relevant BIS codes, reference to corresponding British or
American codes may be made (in that order of preference).
All material and construction shall strictly conform to the enclosed standards, specifications
and 'specific requirements'. Only if relevant information is not available in these
documents, reference to relevant BIS code shall be made.
2.0 REFERENCED CODES, STANDARDS & PUBLICATIONS
For list of applicable codes, standards & publications, reference to Engineering Design Basis
(EDB) shall be made.
3.0 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 General
The minimum requirements of various materials to be used in Civil and Structural works are
as below:
3.2 Water
a) Water used in construction for all Civil & Structural works shall be clean and free
from injurious amounts of oil, acids, alkalies, organic matters and/ or other harmful
substances which may be deleterious to concrete, masonry or steel. The pH value of
water sample shall not be less than 6. Potable water will be considered satisfactory.
All requirements of IS 456 have to be met.
b) Tests on water samples shall be carried out in accordance with IS 3025 and these shall
fulfil all the guidelines and requirements given in IS 456.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — AU rights reserved
Page 1348 of 1823

(-
L=0)ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Ogl.ir Ei5lag INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 6-68-0022 Rev. 1
1.0277 2.122PR 101300.0 (A Govt. In Undertaking)
c) Water for curing shall be of the same quality as used for concreting and masonry
works.
33 Aggregate (for Concrete)
3.3.1 General
a) Coarse and Fine aggregates for Civil and Structural Works shall conform in all
respects to IS 383 (Specification for Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural
Sources for Concrete). Aggregates shall be obtained from an approved source known
to produce the same satisfactorily. Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring
(crushed or uncrushed) stones, gravel and sand or a combination thereof. These shall
be chemically inert, hard, strong, dense, durable, clean and free from veins, adherent
coatings, injurious amounts of alkalies, vegetable matter and other deleterious
substances such as iron pyrites, coal, lignite, mica, shale, sea shells etc.
b) Aggregates which may chemically react with alkalies of cement or might cause
corrosion of the reinforcement shall not be used.
c) The maximum quantities of deleterious materials in the aggregates as determined in
accordance with IS 2386 Part II (Methods of Test For Aggregates for Concrete), shall
not exceed the limits defined in IS 383.
3.3.2 Coarse Aggregates
a) Coarse aggregates are the aggregates, which are retained on 4.75 mm IS Sieve. It
shall have a specific gravity not less than 2.6 (saturated surface dry basis).
b) These may be obtained from crushed or uncrushed gravel or stone and may be
supplied as single sized or graded. The grading of the aggregates shall be as per IS
383 or as required by the mix design, to obtain densest possible concrete.
3.3.3 Fine Aggregates
a) Fine aggregates are the aggregates which pass through 4.75 mm IS sieve but not
more than ten percent (10%) pass through 150 micron IS sieve. These shall comply
with the requirements of grading zones I, II and III of IS 383. Fine aggregates
conforming to grade zone IV shall not be used for reinforced concrete works.
b) Fine aggregates shall consist of material resulting from natural disintegration of rock
and which has been deposited by streams or glacial agencies, or crushed stone sand
or gravel sand. Sand from sea shores, creeks or river banks affected by tides, shall not
be used for filling or concrete works.
3.3.4 Sampling and Testing
The Contractor shall carry out all tests including mix designs of concrete, at the start of
work as well as during any stage of construction as per the requirement. Tests shall be
carried out in accordance with IS 516 (Methods of Test for Strength of Concrete) and IS
2386 (Methods of Test For Aggregates for Concrete). The method of sampling shall be in
accordance with the requirements given in IS 2430.
3.3.5 Storage of Aggregates
a) Storage of all types of aggregates at the site of work shall be as specified in IS 4082.
Aggregates shall in no case be stored near excavated earth or directly over ground
surface.
b) Fine aggregates delivered at the site in wet condition or becoming wet due to rain or
any other means, shall not be used for at least 24 hours. For the use of such
aggregates the contractor shall adjust the water content in accordance with IS 2386 to
achieve the desired mix.
Page 1349 of 1823

,3114z.1 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
*gar fatAeg WA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 6-68-0022 Rev. 1
men etiverz 0,1J9P.3) to Govt of India Undertaking)
3.4 Sand (for Masonry & Filling)
3.4.1 Sand for Masonry Mortars

a) The sand shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed gravel sand,
manufactured sand or a combination of any of these. The sand shall be hard, durable,
clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain the
amount of clay, silt and fine dust more than specified in IS 2116.
b) The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts,
coal, or other organic impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, soft
fragments, sea shells in such form or in such quantities as to affect adversely the
hardening, strength or durability of the mortar.
c) The maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the
sand, when tested in accordance with IS 2386, shall not be more than 5% by mass in
natural sand, or crushed gravel sand or crushed stone sand or manufactured sand. For
organic impurities, when determined in accordance with IS 2386, colour of the liquid
shall be lighter than that indicated by the standard solution specified in IS 2386.
3.4.2 Grading of Sand
a) The particle size grading of sand for use in mortars shall be within the limits as
specified below:
IS Sieve Designation Percentage Passing Reference to method
(IS 460 Part-1) (by mass) (IS 2386 Part-1)
4.75 mm 100
2.36 mm 90 to 100
1.18 mm 70 to 100
600 micron 40 to 100
300 micron 5 to 70
150 micron 0 to 15
b) In case of sand whose grading falls outside the specified limits due to excess or
deficiency of coarse or fine particles, this shall be processed to comply with the
standard by screening through a suitably sized sieve and/ or blending with required
quantities of suitable sizes of natural sand particles or crushed stone screening which
are by themselves unsuitable. The various sizes of particles of which the sand is
composed shall be uniformly distributed throughout the mass.
3.4.3 Sampling and Testing
a) The method of sampling shall be in accordance with IS 2430. The amount of material
required for each test shall be as specified in relevant parts of IS 2386. All tests shall
be carried out in accordance with the relevant parts of IS 2386.
b) If further confirmation as to the satisfactory nature of the material is required,
compressive test on cement mortar cubes (1:6) may be made in accordance with IS
2250 using the supplied material in place of standard sand and the strength value so
obtained shall be compared with that of another mortar made with a sand of
acceptable and comparable quality.
3.4.4 Sand for Filling
Sand for filling shall meet the requirements of IS 383 and shall be natural sand or
manufactured sand, hard, strong, free from any organic and deleterious materials. Sand
obtained from sea shores, creeks or river banks affected by tides shall not be used for
filling. Fine aggregates suitable for concreting works shall be suitable for filling also. No
sand below grading zone-III as per IS 383 shall be allowed for filling.
Page 1350 of 1823

,e..1 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
*la ..II Efigles SINDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 6-68-0022 Rev. 1
IA Govt o India Undertaking)
3.5 Cement
Cement shall be as specified in the Engineering Design Basis.

3.6 Steel
3.6.1 General
All steel bars, sections, plates, and other miscellaneous steel materials, etc. shall be free
from loose mill scales, rust as well as oil, mud, paint or other coatings. The materials,
construction specifications such as dimensions, shape, weight, tolerances, testing etc, for all
materials covered under this section, shall conform to respective BIS codes.
3.6.2 Reinforcement Bars
Reinforcement shall be TMT (Thermo-mechanically treated) bars of minimum Grade
Fe500D (unless specified otherwise in the EDB/ Job Specifications), conforming to IS 1786
and bearing standard mark of the Bureau of Indian Standards.
Corrosion protection to reinforcement bars, if any shall be as specified in the EDB/ Job
Specification.
3.6.3 Structural Steel
Structural Steel shall be of minimum Grade E250A/E250B (unless specified otherwise in the
EDB/ Job Specifications) conforming to IS 2062 and bearing standard mark of the Bureau of
Indian Standards, excluding bars and rods of diameter/ thickness less than 6 mm and
structural (angle) below ISA 50x50x6.
Hollow Sections shall be of minimum Grade YSt 310 (unless specified otherwise in the
EDB/ Job Specifications) conforming to IS 4923 (for SHS/RHS) and IS 1161 (for CHS) and
bearing standard mark of the Bureau of Indian Standards.
3.6.4 Miscellaneous Steel Materials
Miscellaneous steel materials shall conform to the following BIS codes:
a) Specification for Expanded Metal Steel Sheets for General Purposes IS 412
b) Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel Bars and Hard-Drawn Steel Wire for IS 432
Concrete Reinforcement
c) Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws and Nuts of Product Grade 'C' - Part 1 : IS 1363
Hexagon Head Bolts
d) Cold formed light gauge structural steel sections. IS 811
e) Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners. IS 1367
f) Plain washers IS 2016
g) Steel wire ropes for general engineering purposes IS 2266
h) Thimbles for wire ropes. IS 2315
i) Bulldog grips IS 2361
j) Mild Steel Tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fillings IS 1239
k) Drop forged sockets for wire ropes for general engineering purposes IS 2485
1) Steel chequered plates. IS 3502
m) High Strength Structural Nuts IS 6623
n) Washers for High Strength Structural Bolts & Nuts IS 6649
3.6.5 Connection Bolts
Connection bolts shall be High Strength Hot-dip Galvanised Structural bolts of minimum
Property Class 8.8, material and installation shall comply to requirements of IS 3757 and IS
4000 respectively. The acceptable methods of tightening the bolts in order of preference are
listed below:
Page 1351 of 1823

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Ple..6
men eRaire 931,3M1.11
INDIA UMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 6-68-0022 Rev. 1
Govt of Indta undertaking)
a) "Automatic Torque Control" where tightening is by a torque control impact wrench

with automatic cut-off, calibrated to shut off at the desired bolts tension.
b) "Stall Torque Control" where tightening is by a standard impact wrench, calibrated by
regulation of air pressure to "stall" at the desired bolt tension.
c) "Turn-of Nut" where tightening is by a standard impact wrench, by turning the nut V2
to % turn beyond the "snug" position. The snug position is that position where the
wrench begins to impact.
d) "Manual Torque Control" where tightening is by hand wrench equipped with a torque
indicator and calibrated for the desired bolt tension.
All the bolts in a joint shall be tightened to a minimum tension value as per Table 3 of IS
4000.
Properties of Bolt Class 4.6 wherever specified shall conform to IS 1367. Black hexagonal
nuts and washers wherever specified shall be as per IS 1363.
3.6.6 Anchor Bolts
Material for Anchor Bolts such as bars, washers, nuts, pipe sleeves and plates etc. shall be
as per relevant BIS codes mentioned in the EDB.
3.7 Brick
3.7.1 General
a) All masonry works shall be designed in accordance with IS 1077, IS 1905, IS 1597,
IS 2185, IS 4326, IS 12894 and other relevant IS Codes as applicable.
b) Brick masonry shall be of Class 5.0 as per IS 1077.
c) All external brick masonry walls shall be of minimum 230 mm thickness (except for
fire walls).
3.8 Stone
3.8.1 General
All Stones used for masonry works shall conform to the requirements of following BIS
codes:
a) Method of identification of natural building stones IS 1123

b) Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship of IS 1127
natural building stones for masonry work
c) Recommendations for dressing of natural building stones IS 1129
3.8.2 Quality of Stones
d) Stones shall be hard, dense, strong, sound, durable, clean and uniform in colour.
These shall also be free from veins, adherent coatings, injurious amounts of alkalies,
vegetable matters and other deleterious substances such as iron pyrites, coal, lignite,
mica, sea shells etc. As far as possible, stones from one single quarry shall be used for
any one work. The strength of stones should be adequate to carry the imposed load
and shall meet all the requirements of IS 1905, taking into account the appropriate
crushing strength of stone and type of the mortar used. The percentage of water
absorption, when tested in accordance with IS 1124, shall not exceed 5%.
e) The length of the stone shall not exceed 3 times the height. Width of stone on base
shall not be less than 150 mm and in no case exceed 3/4th thickness of the wall. Height
of the stone shall not be more than 300 mm.
Page 1352 of 1823

! STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS
Oge.ir owes INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 6-68-0022 Rev. 1
(A Govt or India Undertalung)
3.9 Admixtures
3.9.1 General Requirements

a) All concrete admixtures shall comply with the following Indian standards:
i. Specification for integral cement water proofing compounds IS 2645
ii. Specification for other admixtures for concrete IS 9103
In case of non-availability of any IS code for testing and acceptability criteria,
relevant American, British or German Code shall be applicable.
b) No admixture shall impair the durability of the concrete nor combine with the
ingredients to form harmful compounds, nor increase the risk of corrosion of
reinforcement. Use of admixtures shall not reduce the dry density of concrete. Once
the proportion of admixtures has been established, strict check shall be maintained
not to alter the proportions of ingredients and water-cement ratio of the Design Mix
during execution.
c) The chloride contents in admixtures shall not exceed 2% by mass of the admixture or
0.03% by mass of the cement.
d) Admixtures which do not meet the requirements stipulated in this document shall not
be used.
3.9.2 Corrosion Inhibiting Admixtures
Bipolar Concrete Penetrating Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture (CPCIA) shall be added to

the concrete matrix for protection of embedded steel in concrete against corrosion.
The CPCIA shall be concrete penetrating type which upon addition into the concrete matrix
inhibits the corrosion process. It need not be in direct contact with the steel. Its vapour
penetrate through fissures, honeycomb structure of concrete, pure water solution added in
concrete and seals steel reinforcement at both anodic & cathodic sites, for inhibition. This is
due to the bipolar mechanism property of the system.
Non-concrete penetrating, nitrite & nitrate corrosion inhibitors shall not be used.
The dosage shall be 1% by weight of cement or as recommended by the manufacturer.
In case the product is not as per the Suppliers List, the same shall be got approved by the
Owner/ Owner's representative.
3.9.3 Water Proofing Compounds (Crystalline/ Non-crystalline)
a) The permeability of the specimen with the admixture shall be less than half of the
permeability with a similar specimen without the use of these compounds. These
compounds shall be used in such proportion as recommended by manufacturer but in
no case it shall exceed 3% by weight of cement.
b) The initial setting time of the cement with the use of these compounds shall not be
less than 30 minutes and final setting time shall not be more than 10 hours. Tests
shall be carried out in accordance with IS 4031.
c) Compressive strength of the specimen at 3 days shall not be less than 160 kg/cm2 nor
80% of the 3 days compressive strength of mortar cubes prepared with same cement
and sand only, whichever is higher. Similarly compressive strength at 7 days shall not
be less than 220 kg/cm2 nor less than 80% of the 7 days compressive strength
prepared with the same cement and sand only, whichever is higher. The test to
determine the compressive strength shall conform to IS 4031.
Page 1353 of 1823

lolfR4 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
6-68-0022 Rev. 1
0.41iMiteg WA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
1411E71 eiE9Re AAJ ) (A Govt of India Undeftalung)
3.10 Water Bars (Water Stops)
a) PVC water bars shall be used in reinforced concrete construction of liquid retaining
structures or any other structure to safeguard them from hydrostatic pressure and
water leakage and any relative movement between two parts of the structure due to
thermal loading shrinkage or differential movement of foundations. These shall be
preformed and shall provide a permanent water tight seal along the entire joint in the
poured concrete structures. These shall also be flexible enough to withstand
deflection/ displacements at joints arising due to variation of temperatures or
settlement of foundations.
b) Performance requirements of PVC water bars shall meet the requirements of IS
12200. These shall be of an approved make and of ribbed/ serrated/ plain type with a
bulb at the centre. The thickness and width of water bars shall in no case be less than
5 mm and 150 mm respectively. However, for concrete sections greater than 300 mm
thick, the width of water bars shall not be less than 230 mm.
3.11 Bitumen/ Bituminous Materials
Bitumen to be used for various types of work shall meet all the requirements of relevant
BIS codes as given below:
i. Specification of Paving Bitumen IS 73

ii. Specification for bitumen mastic for flooring.(Grade IV) IS 1195
iii.Specification for Bitumen felts for water proofing and damp proofmg IS 1322
iv. Specification for Bituminous compounds for water proofing and IS 1834
caulking purposes
v. Specification for preformed fillers for expansion joint in concrete IS 1838
pavements and structures
vi. Specification for bitumen mastic for use in water proofing of roofs IS 3037
vii Specification for bitumen primer for use in water proofing and damp IS 3384
proofing
vii Specification for Bitumen Mastic for Tanking and Damp proofing IS 5871
ix. Specification for Glass fibre base coal tar pitch & bitumen felts IS 7193
x. Code of practice for damp proofing using bitumen mastic IS 7198
xi. Specification for bitumen Mastic, Anti Static and electrically conducting IS 8374
grade
Tests and acceptable criteria shall be as per relevant BIS codes.
3.12 PVC Pipes
PVC Pipes shall conform to the requirements of IS 4985.
3.13 Wood/ Timber
a) Wood recommended for platforms of cold vessels or below cold vessels/ exchangers
shall be hard and shall be of group A, grade I, and shall have safe permissible stress of
7 N/mm2 in compression, perpendicular to grains on outside location as per IS 883.
General characteristics like durability, treatability etc. shall conform to IS 883 and IS
3629.
b) Timber required to be used for form work shall be fairly dry before use. It should
maintain its shape during the use and even when it comes into contact with moisture
from the concrete. Storage of Wood/ Timber shall be as per the requirements of IS
4082.
c) For proper identification and selection of suitable timber for form work, following
codes shall be referred.
Page 1354 of 1823

4 ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
51 ii Wes
Olen elarre ax.ylarg)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt Of India Undertaking)
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 6-68-0022 Rev. 1
i. Classification of commercial timbers & their zonal distribution IS 399

ii. Specification for ballies for general purposes IS 3337
iii.Specification for Ply wood for concrete shuttering work IS 4990
3.14 Concrete Block Masonry
Grade of solid and hollow concrete block masonry units shall be as follows:
a) Solid concrete blocks : Grade C(5.0)

b) Hollow concrete blocks : Grade A(5.5) closed cavity
The nominal dimensions (length, height & width), density & compressive strength of solid
& hollow concrete block masonry units shall be in conformance to IS 2185 (Part-1)
corresponding to the above mentioned grades.
Concrete block masonry of following thicknesses shall preferably be used:
a) 100 mm thickness : Solid concrete block masonry

b) 200 mm thickness : Hollow concrete block (closed cavity) masonry
c) 400 mm thickness (fire walls) : Hollow concrete block (closed cavity) masonry
3.15 FaL-G Masonry
Pulverise Fuel Ash Lime Gypsum (commonly known as FaL-G) units shall be of Class 5 as
per IS 12894, however quantity of Gypsum (80% purity tested as per IS 1288) shall be 5%.
The nominal dimensions (length, height & width), density & compressive strength of FaL-
G block masonry units shall be in conformance to IS 12894 corresponding to the above
mentioned class.
FaL-G masonry of using modular units shall be of 180 mm thickness.
3.16 Autoclaved Cellular (Aerated) Concrete Blocks (AAC Block Masonry)
AAC Block masonry units shall be in conformance to IS 2185 (Part-3).
3.17 Anti-termite Compounds
Chloropyrifos emulsifiable concentrates (1%) conforming to IS 8944 shall be used for

treatment of soil for protection of buildings against attack by subterranean termites.
3.18 Poly-sulphide Sealants

All Poly-sulphide Sealants shall conform to IS 12118. Test conditions and requirements
shall be as given in the above referred BIS code.
4.0 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Construction
4.1.1 All concrete works shall be carried out as per the provisions of IS 456, IS 3370, IS 2974 and
other relevant BIS Codes. Concrete mix proportioning and design mix; sampling and
strength test of concrete, production and control of concrete, tolerances and placing of
reinforcement and for cover; transporting, placing, compacting and curing etc, inspection
and testing of structure (including requirement of non-destructive testing) shall be as
specified in IS 456.
Page 1355 of 1823

ENIGINEERS
.fge_jrEas INDIA
FR,
LIMITED
VIV +131.3q0A) (A Govt of India Undertakng)
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 6-68-0022 Rev. 1
4.1.2 Continuous concreting shall be done for structures supporting dynamic equipment as per the
provisions of IS 2974.
4.1.3 The damp proof course shall be laid in two layers of equal thickness and each layer given
two coats of hot bitumen on top (grade VG-10 conforming to IS 73) at the rate of 1.7 kg/m2.
Dry sharp sand shall be sprinkled evenly over the top layer of bitumen before hardening.
4.1.4 Form work and stripping of form work shall be as per the provisions of IS 456.
4.1.5 Only steel shuttering shall be used for civil construction.
4.1.6 Assembly of reinforcement in RCC structures shall conform to IS 456.
4.1.7 Fabrication of all structural steel works shall be carried out as per the provisions of IS 800/
IS 801/ IS 802/ IS 806 and other relevant BIS codes. Fabrication shall include cleaning,
straightening, cutting, bending, holding, bolting, welding, machining, painting, marking,
assembling, erecting, inspecting and testing etc. Welding procedure and welder qualification
shall be as per IS 800 and/ or referenced BIS codes only.
4.1.8 Erection of all structural steel works including supply of plant & equipment, storing and
handling, setting out, field connections, field welding and security during erection shall
conform to IS 800/ IS 801/ IS 802/ IS 806.
4.1.9 All masonry works shall be carried out as per the provisions of IS 1597/ IS 2185/ IS 2212/
IS 4326 and other relevant BIS codes.
4.1.10 Construction of all other items of works shall conform to relevant Indian Standards and
sound engineering practices.
4.1.11 The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete safety pertaining to all construction
works.
4.2 Tolerances
4.2.1 The limits of dimensional tolerances for Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete Structures
shall be as follows:
a. Deviation from specified dimensions of cross section of -6 mm to +12 mm
columns and beams
b. Deviation from dimensions of footings (refer note

below)
i. Dimensions in plan -12 mm to +50 mm
ii. Eccentricity 0.02 times the width
of footing in the
direction of deviation
but not more than 50
mm
iii. Thickness ±0.05 times the
specified thickness
Note: Tolerances apply to cast-in-situ concrete dimensions
only, not to positioning of vertical reinforcing steel or dowels.
c. Deviation in length (major dimension of single unit)

i. Up to 3.0m • 6 mm
ii. 3.0m to 4.5m ± 9 mm
iii. 4.5m to 6.0m ±12 mm
iv. additional deviation for every subsequent 6m ± 6 mm
d. Deviation in straightness or bow (deviation from

specified line) for a single or continuous member), e.g,
beam, column or slab edge:
Page 1356 of 1823

5ENGINEERS
4Real 1aite..4 INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 6-68-0022 Rev. 1
IA God of India Undendongi
i. Up to 3.0m 6 mm
ii. 3.0m to 4.5m 9 mm
iii. 4.5m to 6.0m 12 mm
iv. additional deviation for every subsequent 6m 6mm
e. Deviation in squareness shall be measured taking the longer of two adjacent sides
as the base line. The shorter side shall not vary in its distance from a
perpendicular so that the difference between the greatest and shortest dimensions
exceeds 6mm. For this purpose, any error due to lack of straightness shall be
ignored. Squareness shall be checked with respect to the straight lines that are
most nearly parallel with the features being checked. When the nominal angle is
other than 90 degrees, the included angle between check lines shall be varied
accordingly.
f. Deviation in twists shall be within a limit such that any corner shall not be more
than the limit given below from the plane containing other three corners:
i. Up to 600mm wide and up to 6m in length : 6 mm
ii. over 600mm wide and for any length : 12 mm
g- Maximum deviation in flatness from a 1.5 m straight edge placed in any position
on a nominally plain surface shall not exceed 6mm.
4.2.2 The limits of dimensional tolerances for Steel Structures shall be as follows:
4.2.2.1 For columns and tower-type structures:
a. Deviation of column axes at foundation top level
with respect to true axes
i. In longitudinal direction ±5 mm
ii. In lateral direction ±5 mm
b. Deviation in the level of bearing surface of ±5 mm
columns at foundation top with respect to true level
c. Out of plumb (verticality) of column axis from true

vertical axis, as measured at top
i. Up to and including 30m height lesser of ±14/1000 or ±25mm
ii. Over 30m height lesser of ±H/1200 or ±35mm
d. Deviation in straightness in longitudinal & lesser of ±H/1000 or ±10mm
transverse planes of column at any point along the
height
e. Difference in the erected positions of adjacent pairs ±5 mm
of columns along length or across width of building
prior to connecting trusses/ beams with respect to
true distance
f. Deviation in any bearing or seating level with ±5 mm
respect to true level Up to 600mm wide and up to
6m in length
g. Deviation in difference in bearing levels of a ±5mm
member on adjacent pair of columns both across &
along the building
Notes.
1. Tolerance specified for out-of-plumbness should be read in conjunction with
`Deviation in straightness....' & 'Difference in the erected positions.... '.
2. 'H' is the column height in mm.
3. Tolerance limits as given under clause 4.2.2.1 above for steel structures are
applicable to concrete columns/ pedestals also.
Page 1357 of 1823

ENGINEERS
err Was INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL 6-68-0022 Rev. 1
1.4121, ewasre 051,710..1) (A Govt india Undertaiong)
4.2.2.2 Trusses
a. Shift at the centre of span of top chord member ±1/250 of height of truss in mm at
with respect to the vertical plane passing through centre of span or ±15 mm,
the centre of bottom chord whichever is less
b. Lateral shift of top chord of truss at the centre of ±1/1500 of span of truss in mm or
span from the vertical plane passing through the ±10 mm, whichever is less
centre of supports of the truss
c. Lateral shift in location of truss from its true ±10 mm
position
d. Lateral shift in location of purlin from true position ±5 mm
e. Deviation in difference of bearing levels of truss ±1/1200 of span of truss in mm or
from the true level 20mm, whichever is less
4.2.2.3 Gantry girders and Rails

a. Shift in the centre line of crane rail with respect to ± [web thickness of
centre line of web of gantry girder girder(mm)+2mm] / 2
b. Shift of alignment of crane rail (in plan) with ±5mm
respect to true axis of crane rail at any point
c. Deviation in crane track gauge with respect to true
gauge
i. For track gauge up-to and including 15m ±5 mm
ii. For track gauge more than 15m ±[5+0.25(S-15)] subject to
maximum ±10 mm, where S in
metres is true gauge
d. Difference in level between crane track rails
(across the bay) at
i. Supports of gantry girders 15 mm
ii. Mid span of gantry girders 20 mm
e. Relative shift of crane rail surfaces (at joint) in plan 2 mm
and elevation
4.3 Hanger Scaffolding for Pipe Rack
Hanger scaffolding (fixed/ movable) shall be provided in the pipe rack to facilitate
mechanical works over the first tier & above. The same shall provide protection from falling
material as well as act as a safe working platform. This shall be provided about one meter
below the entire pipe rack first tier elevation.
The scaffolding shall be light weight, easy to remove when the work is complete. The deck
planks may be perforated sheets suitably folded at the ends and open web ladder type of
beams may be used to support them. These beams shall be supported on the hangers
provided from the beams of the pipe rack.
The design load under the working condition shall be 120 kg/m' and that for the limit state
of collapse shall be twice the same. However individual panel shall be designed for the
concentrated loads of 120 kg at spacing of 1 m and double that load for the limit state of
collapse.
Deflection of individual planks shall be maximum span/100. For the beam, the deflection
shall be controlled as per IS 800:2007.
The design shall be supported by the properly testing of the checking for the specified loads.
After completion of work over the pipe rack, the contractor shall remove the hanging
scaffolding from the pipe rack and take back the scaffolding material.
Page 1358 of 1823

ENGINEERS PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
fii5leg INDIA LIMITED 6-68-0033 Rev.9
tarKgr elEvrreokanesai) IA Govt. India Undertaking)
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE) Page 1 of 17
Hilich
iTTRff7-4*itr•iiirliCh qh IV
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
k-.1.4 11 *item wr iZstt4 aiiiThmir4

I ch I isigi .FITTF6K al-RR)
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
REVISED AND ISSUED 4‘1.16 o -/ r-- A

9 30.12.2020 AS M AS SM
AS SPECIFICATION
REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS
8 10.03.2019 AVM AJS RS RKT
SPECIFICATION
TITLE REVISED, UPDATED & REISSUED
7 23.09.2013 AJS PJS PKM DM
AS SPECIFICATION
6 23.06.2010 REVISED & REISSUED AS SPECIFICATION YPC PKM SC ND
UPDATED & REISSUED AS
5 02.05.2001 RPM SKP SCJ MI
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Rev. Prepared Checked Committee Bureau
No Date Purpose by by Convenor Chairman
Approved by
Page 1359 of 1823

6-68-0033 Rev.9
(100.100000000.700,0) (A GOA Cl MOM Urideft*kV OF STEEL STRUCTURES
Abbreviations:
AS : Australian Standard
ASTM : American Society for Testing & Materials
EN : European Norm
DFT : Dry Film Thickness
IS : Indian Standards
MS : Mild Steel
QAP : Quality Assurance Plan
SFRM : Spray-applied Fire-resistive Material
SWG : Standard Wire Gauge
UL : Underwriters Laboratories
Structural Standards Committee
Convenor: Mr. Anurag Sinha
Members: Mr. C Damodaran

Mr. VK Panwar
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Gyasuddin
Mr. Charanjit Singh (Project)
Special Invitee:
Mr. Prasenjit Saha (Refractory & Insulation)
Page 1360 of 1823

fft
a: ENGINEERS PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
NitegWff INDIA LIMITED 6-68-0033 Rev.9
Goof of Into UndedalonSO OF STEEL STRUCTURES
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE ..4

2.0 REFERENCES 4
3.0 DESIGN BASIS 4
4.0 FIREPROOFING SYSTEM AND MATERIALS 5
5.0 SURFACE PREPARATION 8
6.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROOFING 8
7.0 APPLICATION METHOD 9
8.0 SCAFFOLDING & FORM WORK 11
9.0 FINISHING AND JOINT SEALING 11
10.0 TESTING REQUIREMENTS 11
11.0 PAYMENT 12
ANNEXURES 13-16
ATTACHMENT .17
Page 1361 of 1823

lara ENGINEERS PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
Oge.11 Elf5iegJ INDIA LIMITED 6-68-0033 Rev.9

NAM fiANZ(IN.ARIFA) (A Govt. of India Undertakong) OF STEEL STRUCTURES
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements of passive fire protection of external steel
structures against hydrocarbon pool fire using Spray-applied Fire-resistive Materials (SFRM).
Structural steel members shall be fire-proofed for two (2) hours such that the protected steel
substrate temperature shall be restricted to 538 °C (1000 °F), whereas in case of equipment
skirts/ saddles/ supports the steel temperature shall be restricted to 427 °C (800 °F).
Following fireproofing materials and systems have been covered in this standard:
a) Type-I: In-situ cement concrete of minimum M30 Grade

(for application up to 1.8 m from grade level for steel structures)
b) Type-II: Spray applied vermiculite based lightweight cementitious concrete

(for application above 1.8 m of grade level for steel structures)
c) Type-III: Spray applied vermiculite based lightweight cementitious concrete

(for application over equipment skirts/ saddles/ supports)
2.0 REFERENCES
a) UL 1709: Rapid Rise Fire Tests of Protection Materials for Structural Steel
b) UL 2431: Standard for Safety for Durability of Fire Resistive Coatings and Materials
c) OISD-STD-164: Fireproofing of Steel Supporting Structures in Oil & Gas Industry
d) NORSOK Standard M-501: Surface Preparation and Protective Coating
e) Relevant ASTM Standards like ASTM C177, ASTM D790, ASTM D2240, ASTM E84,
ASTM E605, ASTM E736, ASTM E760, ASTM E761, ASTM E859, ASTM E937,
ASTM G21, etc.
0 Relevant BIS Standards like IS 383, IS 412, IS 455, IS 456, IS 1367, IS 1489 (Part-1), IS
1566, IS 2062, IS 2585, IS 8112, IS 9103, IS 12269, IS 12330, etc.
g) Relevant European Standards like BS EN 1992-1-1, etc.
h) EIL Specification No. 6-68-0004 for Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete
i) EIL Specification No. 6-68-0019 for Self Compacting Concrete
3.0 DESIGN BASIS
Fire resistance of a material is defined by fire rating, evaluated through a fire test based on
applied thickness and time taken to reach the defined critical steel temperature. Fire rating
adopted in the present standard is based on UL 1709 "Rapid Rise Fire Tests of Protection
Materials for Structural Steel", conducted by Underwriters Laboratories, USA. In this test, fire
resistance of a material is evaluated on a W10x49 steel column (having section factor Hp/A =
160) as per UL 1709 fire curve and fire rating is published in a UL design number under XR
category for thickness and time. In addition to the fire rating, under this test, material for exterior
use is also evaluated for accelerated ageing, high humidity, salt spray, wet-freeze-dry cycling,
acid spray, solvent spray etc.
3.1 Fireproofing Thickness
Thickness of fireproof coating to be applied shall be based on the following:
a) Type-I:
In-situ cement concrete for application up to 1.8 m from grade level for steel structures
shall be applied with minimum 65 mm thickness.
Page 1362 of 1823

161
ÌS
*igen iMegMOINDIA LIMITED 6-68-0033 Rev.9
12.2WAAa‘RAA) IA Govt of k1IIIA IA./MO.9) OF STEEL STRUCTURES
b) Type-II:
For Structural steel members such as column, beam etc. which shall be protected for
two (2) hours from reaching critical temperature 538 °C (1000 °F), shall be applied with
vermiculite based lightweight cementitious fireproofing of thickness corresponding to
two (2) hours fire rating as per respective UL design number under UL 1709 (XR
category) subject to a minimum of 20 mm. Wherever section factor (Hp/A) wise UL
thickness chart is available, thickness can be adopted based on the following table:
Hp/A < 80 : Use thickness corresponding to Hp/A = 80

80 < Hp/A < 100 : Use thickness corresponding to Hp/A = 100
100 < Hp/A < 130 : Use thickness corresponding to Hp/A = 130
Hp/A > 130 : Use thickness corresponding to Hp/A = 160
c) Type-III:
For Equipment skirts/ saddles/ supports (which shall be protected for two (2) hours
from reaching critical temperature 427 °C (800 °F), two (2) hours fire rating as per UL
design is not adequate as the UL 1709 test is based on 538 °C (1000 °F) critical
temperature. Therefore for the required fire protection from reaching 427 °C (800 °F),
higher thickness shall be necessary. For this, vermiculite based lightweight cementitious
fireproofing thickness corresponding to three (3) hours fire rating as per respective UL
design number under UL 1709 (XR category) shall be adopted subject to a minimum of
30 mm.
The thickness of fireproofing shall be measured from the substrate of structural steel in case of
only weld mesh and from the surface of metal lath in case of expanded metal lath.
4.0 FIREPROOFING SYSTEM AND MATERIALS
All materials to be used shall conform to the requirements of UL 1709/ UL 2431/ respective BIS
codes/ respective acceptance criteria (as applicable). Materials shall meet the minimum
acceptance criteria given under this section. Samples, test results and approval certificates for all
materials shall be submitted and got approved from the Engineer-in-Charge before execution of
work.
a) Vermiculite based lightweight cementitiuos fireproofing system shall have following

compatible components:
i) Primer
ii) Reinforcing system
iii) Fireproof coating as per UL 1709
iv) Curing
v) Water shed sealing at terminating edges/ metal joints
vi) Weather barrier finish coat
b) In-situ cement concrete fireproofing system shall have following compatible components:
i) Primer
ii) Reinforcing system
iii) Cement concrete
iv) Curing
v) Water shed sealing at terminating edges/ metal joints
vi) Weather barrier finish coat
Page 1363 of 1823

PASSIVE FIREPROOFING 6-68-0033 Rev.9
Imer, AWARE. ma...SW IA Govt. of India tIndertillung) OF STEEL STRUCTURES
4.1 Vermiculite Based Lightweight Cementitious Fireproofing Material
Vermiculite based lightweight cementitious fireproof material shall be UL certified (bearing

UL's mark) for UL 1709 "Rapid Rise Fire Test of Protection Materials for Structural Steels",
UL classified under XR category, investigated for durability as per UL 2431 Classification
Category I-A and Exterior Environmental purpose and covered under UL follow up service
(indicated by UL label/ mark/ sticker on the packing). For list of UL certified materials, UL
website (www.ul.com) shall be referred. The essential criteria for the material shall be:
a) Must be UL 1709 certified having UL design number under XR category

b) Must be investigated for UL 2431 Classification Category I-A and Exterior Environmental
Purpose
c) Listed on UL website under specified category
d) Bear UL 1709 label/ mark/ sticker on packing bags/ container
The material shall be factory-blended, supplied in single component pre-mixed dry form, non-
flaking and non-dusting suitable for spray-application, with added mold and fungi inhibitor.
Material shall not contain asbestos & mineral wool and shall not contain more than 1% Sulphate
(expressed in SO3). The material shall be free from toxicity release when subjected to heat.
In addition to the UL 1709 certificate, the contractor shall supply test certificate covering the
information for the supplied batches of material as per Attachment-I.
Fire proofing materials shall be stored in well ventilated, dry place away from source of heat &
direct sunlight. Special storage requirements such as temperature, humidity, stacking height, etc.
as per manufacturer's specifications shall be ensured.
4.2 Reinforcement (for both Vermiculite based cementitious and In-situ concrete
4.2.1 Expanded Metal Steel Sheet/ Lath
Expanded metal steel sheet shall conform to IS 412, galvanized (having minimum zinc coating
of 250 g/m2) and shall weigh minimum 1.84 Kg/m2. Size of the mesh shall be 4.5 mm x 13.5
mm.
4.2.2 Wire Fabric
Welded wire fabric to be used as reinforcement, shall conform to IS 1566 and shall be post weld
hot dipped galvanized having minimum zinc coating of 250 g/m2 of uncoated wire surface.
Mesh size shall be 50 mm x 50 mm and thickness of wire shall be 2 mm (minimum).
4.2.3 Attachments
a) Mild Steel Tie Wire
MS Tie wires shall be minimum 16 SWG and galvanized (having minimum zinc coating of
100 g/m2).
b) Mild Steel Nuts
MS Nuts shall conform to IS 1367 and IS 2585.
c) Mild Steel Studs/ Pins/ Nails
Page 1364 of 1823

sigem taktg INDIA LIMITED 6-68-0033 Rev.9
(mw, eware awn.0 In Govt of India Undertaking) OF STEEL STRUCTURES
MS Studs/ Pins/ Nails shall be zinc coated and may be used as an alternate to MS Nuts.
Minimum Diameter shall be 3 mm and Length shall be suitable to the fireproofing thickness.
d) Cover plates
Cover plates shall conform to IS 2062 Grade A/ BR.
e) Cover blocks
Cover blocks shall be prepared in cement coarse sand mortar (1:3) with minimum 50 mm x
50 mm size of thickness equal to half of the fireproofing thickness with MS Tie wire of
sufficient length protruding from them for tying with the wire fabric.
4.3 Curing Compounds (for both Vermiculite based cementitious and In-situ concrete)
Membrane curing may be used in lieu of moist curing with the permission of the
Engineer-in-Charge. Such compounds shall be compatible and applied to all exposed surfaces by
spraying or brushing as soon as possible after the material has set. Minimum film thickness of
such curing compounds shall be as per the recommendation of the manufacturer so as to obtain
an efficiency of 90% as specified by BS EN 1992-1-1. This film of curing compound shall be
fully removed from the surface after the specified curing period.
4.4 Water Shed Sealing at Terminating Edges/ Metal Joints (for both Vermiculite based
cementitious and In-situ concrete)
All termination of the fireproofing and steel junctions shall be sealed by non-bituminous
polysulfide or silicon rubber mastic sealant. The sealing compound shall be compatible and
approved by fireproofing material supplier.
4.5 Weather Barrier Finish Coat (for both Vermiculite based cementitious and In-situ
concrete)
a) Sealer Coat
A sealer coat of epoxy polyamide shall be applied over the fireproofing surface as a base for
the finish coat. The sealing compound shall be compatible and approved by fireproofing
material supplier.
b) Finish Coat
The finish coat shall be pre-qualified for coating system No. 1 of NORSOK Standard
M-501. Two coats of acrylic elastomeric or polyurethane coating shall be used as finish
coat. The sealing compound shall be compatible and approved by fireproofing material
supplier.
4.6 Water
Water shall conform to the requirements of IS 456.
4.7 Materials for In-situ Concrete
4.7.1 Cement
Type of cement to be used shall be as per EIL Specification No. 6-68-0004.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL— All rights reserved
Page 1365 of 1823

kigeg INDIA LIMITED 6-68-0033 Rev.9
eietereattakem) fA Coot of India Undertaking) OF STEEL STRUCTURES
Fireproofing of all structures in Sulphur handling units shall necessarily be by using Sulphate
resisting Portland cement conforming to IS 12330.
4.7.2 Aggregates
a) Fine aggregates (Sand) shall conform to the requirements specified in EIL Specification No.
6-68-0004. Sand conforming to Zone IV shall not be used.
b) Coarse aggregates shall conform to the requirements specified in EIL Specification No.
6-68-0004. Maximum size of aggregates shall be 10 mm.
4.7.3 Admixture
Admixture shall conform to IS 9103. The admixture shall be mixed with concrete strictly as per
manufacturer's recommendation and shall also meet the requirements of IS 456.
5.0 SURFACE PREPARATION
Before starting the work, the contractor shall furnish the information about fireproofing material
as detailed in Attachment-I.
5.1 Surface Cleaning
All steel surfaces to be in contact with the fire proofing coating material, shall be cleaned of all
oil, grease, loose rust, scales and dust by using wire brushing and washing using detergents.
5.2 Mesh Support System
5.2.1 Welding of Nuts and Application of Primer
MS Nuts of M10 diameter bolts shall be welded to the steel members to be fire proofed.
Maximum spacing of nuts shall be 300 mm center-to-center in staggered fashion. Nuts shall not
be welded to the equipment skirts/ legs (to be welded by equipment fabricator); unless directed
by Engineer-in-Charge. Primer paint shall be applied to the MS nuts and affected surfaces of the
members due to welding after proper cleaning. Primer paint shall be compatible with the primer
already applied to the steel members.
5.2.2 Fixing of Studs/ Pins/ Nails
MS Studs/ Pins/ Nails shall be fastened by using shot guns (gas/ pneumatic based) to the steel
members to be fire proofed, as an alternate to welding of MS Nuts. Maximum spacing shall be
300 mm center-to-center in staggered fashion. Studs/ Pins/ Nails shall not be welded to the
equipment skirts/ legs (to be welded by equipment fabricator)
5.2.3 Placement of Cover Blocks
Cover blocks shall be tied with the wire fabric at 300 mm center-to-center along the span and at
suitable locations along the periphery of the member/ over the metal sheet. The whole
arrangement shall be held in position with the help of MS Tie wires wrapped at cover block
locations. Cover blocks shall not be used over equipment skirts/ legs, angles and box sections.
5.3 Fixing of Expanded Metal Steel Sheet/ Lath
Metal sheet/ lath shall be kept in position true to line and face, and shall be attached firmly to
structural steel member by tack welding or with the help of clips and MS Tie wire at 300 mm
Page 1366 of 1823

lalfaeit4 ENGINEERS PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
Ogar Rift WI INDIA LIMITED 6-68-0033 Rev.9
MON Govt of Inds Undeflakng) OF STEEL STRUCTURES
center-to-center. Minimum lap of 75 mm shall be provided wherever required, however laps

shall be avoided at bends. Metal sheet shall be supported with 3 mm thick stiffener at the centre
in case depth of steel section exceeds 600 mm. These stiffeners shall be placed at 600 mm
center-to-center (maximum). Strands of the expanded metal steel sheet shall slope inwards &
downwards.
5.4 Placement of Wire Fabric
Wire fabric shall be placed in the middle of coated material thickness. It shall be bent
confirming with outlines of finished encasement and rigidly secured in place by tie wire with all
the nuts/ studs or the cover blocks as the case may be. Minimum lap at ends and sides shall be
100 mm and lapped wire fabric shall be tied firmly.
6.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROOFING
6.1 Vermiculite Based Cementitious Material
6.1.1 Vermiculite based cementitious coating material shall meet the design requirements as specified
under clause 3.0 & 4.0.
6.1.2 The coating shall be non corrosive to the steel members & shall not be affected by
environmental conditions, whether natural or from local leaks, spillage or pollution. It shall also
be asbestos free.
6.13 The coating shall be able to withstand both thermal shock and impingement of water from fire
hoses and/ or monitors.
6.1.4 The coating material shall be durable and easily repairable.
6.1.5 Application procedure of the coating shall be easy, non hazardous and also shall not interfere
with the working of the adjoining areas.
6.2 In-situ Concrete
6.2.1 Concrete mixing and placing shall be done as per EIL Specification No. 6-68-0004.
6.2.2 Steel structures shall be fire proofed with concrete up to a minimum height of 1.8 m from grade
for protection against mechanical damage or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. A suitable
slope of about 30° shall be provided at the junction of concrete and vermiculite based
cementitious fireproofing material to avoid accumulation of water.
6.23 Concrete shall be poured into well made forms properly oiled and made to correct dimensions.
Concrete shall be vibrated as necessary to ensure smooth surface, free from voids and
irregularities. Any defects, honeycomb etc. shall be made good by contractor at his own cost.
6.2.4 Self Compacting Concrete (SCC) conforming to EIL Specification No. 6-68-0019 can also be
used which do not require vibrators.
7.0 APPLICATION METHOD
a) Application of fire proofing material coating shall be carried out by skilled and experienced
applicators.
Page 1367 of 1823

51geji OPez INDIA LIMITED 6-68-0033 Rev.9
4.11LTI !ROW 0,1300.1/ In Govt. Indta Undertaking) OF STEEL STRUCTURES
b) Before start of application, pipes and equipments in the vicinity shall be covered with
polythene/ tarpaulin to protect them against damage. Open end of pipes shall be covered
with wooden plugs or with other suitable shielding materials.
c) Steel sections shall be covered with metal steel sheet/ lath before application of fire proofing
material. For equipment skirts/ saddles/ supports, the coating material shall be applied in
horizontal bands working upwards from the bottom of skirts/ saddles/ supports base plate.
All outside edges of the fire proofing shall be chamfered by 20 mm (Refer relevant
Annexures).
d) Thickness of fire proof coating shall be established by providing ground wires both in
vertical and horizontal directions. Ground wires shall be tight and true to line, and placed in
such a manner that they can be further tightened if required.
e) The fire proofing material, after application, shall be cured by keeping it in moist condition
for at least 7 days (or as per vendor requirement) or else the surface shall be coated with a
membrane of approved curing compound. Brand name, name of manufacturer, test results
and method of application shall be submitted to and got approved from the Engineer-in-
Charge prior to procurement of curing compound.
7.1 Specific Requirement for Vermiculite Based Cementitious Material
7.1.1 The contractor responsible for fireproofing application shall be certified by the fireproofing
material vendor. Further, the application crew shall be pre-qualified through a mock application
to establish their skill to meet desired quality parameters. Application tools and machineries
shall also be approved by the fireproofing material vendor. The mock-up shall be demonstrated
on a test surface resembling the actual application conditions to ascertain skill of the applicator.
Installation surface shall be inspected within one hour of application for any shrinkage/ gaps/
cracks. Incase defects observed, the mixture and the method of application shall be adjusted for
successful mock-up.
Parameters maintained in successful mock-up i.e. mixing time, application methods etc. shall be
followed during actual application.
7.1.2 Vermiculite based cementitious material shall be mixed with water on a clean platform or in a
clean mixing box or in a suitable mixer as per manufacturer's specification. Water cement ratio
shall be adjusted so that vermiculite based cementitious coating adheres properly to steel surface
and does not sag or slide upon application.
7.1.3 Primer compatible with the vermiculite based cementitious coating shall be applied over the
steel surface after cleaning the shop primer if required as per the manufacturer's specification. If
primer as per manufacturer specification is not available then inorganic/ organic zinc rich primer
shall be used and applied with minimum two coats @ 65-90 micron DFT per coat.
7.1.4 Mixed vermiculite based cementitious coating shall generally be applied, over the steel surface,
with the help of spray gun except for small areas and inaccessible location, where application
with conventional hand tools shall be permitted. Mixed vermiculite based cementitious coating
shall be used within the pot life specified by the manufacturer. Under no circumstance rebound
material shall be used.
7.1.5 Parameters like water quality, % water addition, wet density check at mixer discharge and spray
head, slump test and other operating parameters like air pressure etc. shall be checked during
application to ensure achievement of specified quality parameters.
7.1.6 Minimum thickness of fire proofing coating as specified under clause 3.1 shall be maintained.
Page 1368 of 1823

6-68-0033 Rev.9
(A Govt of India UncleItaiong) OF STEEL STRUCTURES
7.1.7 Application of mixed vermiculite based cementitious coating shall not be carried out if the air
temperature or the temperature of the surface to be fire proofed is 4 °C or less. Provision shall
be made for adequate ventilation during and after application, until the coating is dry.
7.1.8 All patching of damaged fireproofing work shall be done by the contractor certified by the
fireproofing material vendor.
8.0 SCAFFOLDING & FORM WORK
8.1 The Contractor shall arrange all approaches, scaffolding, stair ways, ladder, working platform
etc, for carrying out the entire works safely. The working area shall be neatly maintained and all
the facilities required by Engineer-in-Charge for proper supervision of the work shall be
provided. In case, any special precaution is needed for the safety of the structure till the
completion of application, the Contractor shall make and provide all such arrangement to the
complete satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall remove the same after completion of
works.
8.2 Form work shall be adequately supported and braced to protect against deformation on account
of vibration during the application. Forms shall be oiled, dampened and cleaned before use. All
other requirements pertaining to the form work shall be as per EIL Specification No. 6-68-0004.
9.0 FINISHING AND JOINT SEALING
9.1 Weather Barrier Finish Coat
In-situ concrete/ Vermiculite based cementitious fireproof coating shall be protected from
weather damage by means of suitable coating. The weather barrier coat shall be applied after full
curing (after a gap of min 28 days) and drying of the fire proofing coating. A sealer coat of
epoxy polyamide @ 50-75 µ DFT shall be applied over the fireproofing surface as a base for the
finish coat. The finish coat shall be UV resistant, suitable to withstand mechanical abrasion/ air
erosion, shall be pre-qualified for coating system No.1 of NORSOK Standard M-501. Two coats
of acrylic elastomeric or polyurethane coating shall be used as finish coat @ 100-125 t DFT per
coat. Number of coats shall be increased in case desired DFT not achieved. The coating system
for finish coat shall be compatible and approved by fireproofing material vendor.
9.2 Water Shed Sealing at Terminating Edges/ Metal Joints
All termination of vermiculite based cementitious fireproofing and steel junctions shall be
sloped to shed water and sealed by non-bituminous polysulfide or silicon rubber mastic sealant
to prevent water ingress into the fireproofing from these joints. The sealing shall be applied by
cutting a U shaped groove approximately 10 mm deep and 10 mm wide in to the fireproofing
immediately adjacent to the junction. The sealing compound shall be approved by fireproofing
material vendor.
10.0 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
10.1 For Vermiculite Based Cementitious Fireproof Coating
Test samples shall be taken during application of coating, which shall be tested for bulk density
and compressive strength as per applicable standards. Hardness of the finish surface after curing
shall be measured by Shore D Durometer.
Test results shall comply with the requirements as mentioned in Attachment-I.
Page 1369 of 1823

lalaeitai( ift; ENGINEERS PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
Oge.fifatsW INDIA LIMITED 6-68-0033 Rev.9
Merl evEtameottaotim
(A Govt India Ondenakino) OF STEEL STRUCTURES
10.2 For In-situ Concrete
Testing of specimens and their Acceptance criteria shall be as per EIL Specification No.
6-68-0004.
11.0 PAYMENT
11.1 Payment shall be made on square metre (m2) basis measured at the periphery of the actual
finished work or as calculated from construction drawing whichever is less.
11.2 The rate quoted shall be inclusive of all labour, material, formwork, plant & tools etc. required
for the successful and satisfactory completion of work including curing, curing compound,
admixtures, all cleaning operations before and after the work, preparation of the surface as
specified, primer paint to MS nuts/ studs and affected surfaces of members due to welding and
applying the primer coat if recommend by the manufacturer compatible with the primer already
applied, finishing the surface smooth, painting the surface with sealer coat and weather barrier
finish coats & sealing the joints with sealing compounds, providing required access, working
platforms, props, scaffolding and other safety measures including their removal after
completion.
11.3 The rate shall also be inclusive of supplying and welding of nuts/ studs/ pins, wherever required
on Structural Steel and equipment skirts/ saddles/ legs/ supports and fixing of reinforcement
with nuts/ cover blocks by using tying wire, wrapping of tying wire around metal sheet for
holding the reinforcement over cover blocks, supplying and fixing of metal sheet/ lath, wire
fabric, cover plates, stiffeners, cover blocks and other required accessories for satisfactory
completion of the work as specified and directed.
11.4 The rates quoted shall be inclusive of the tests specified and directed to establish the quality and
strength of materials.
Page 1370 of 1823

STANDARD SPECIFICATION- STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS PASSIVE FIRE PROOFING
INDIA LIMITED OF STEEL STRUCTURES 6-68-0033 Rev.9
INSULATION
ANNEXURE - 1
(TYP.)
SUPPORT RING
(BY VESSEL FABRICATOR)
M S NUTS WELD+ TO SKIRT

WATER SHED SEAUNG
ALROUND (TYP.) 30• (BY VESSEL FABRICATOR)
FIRE PROOF COATING REINFORCEMENT 1(TYP.)

MATERIAL (TYP.)
EXPANDED METAL STEEL
SHEET/ LATH (TYP.)
TYPE-A (INSULATED VESSEL)
INSULATION
(TYP.)
SUPPORT RING TANGENT UNE
(BY VESSEL FABRICATOR)
WATER SHED SEAUNG

ALROUND (TYP.)
M S NUTS WEDDED TO SKIRT
30* (BY VESSEL FABRICATOR)
FIRE PROOF COATING REINFORCEMENT (TYP.)

MATERIAL (TYP.)
SHEET/ LATH (TYP.)
TYPE-B (INSULATED VESSEL)
1/1 /1_1,4
SUPPORT RING
(BY VESSEL FABRICATOR) TANGENT UNE
WATER SHED SEAUNG

ALROUND (TYP.)
1
M S NUTS WET
30* (BY VESSEL FAED
RICATOR)
TO SKIRT
REINFORCEMEIIT (TYP.)
FIRE PROOF COATING
MATERIAL (TYP.)
I •.11 .11, 1 ,1111,
SHEET/ LATH (TYP.)
TYPE-C (UNINSULATED VESSEL)

DETAIL OF FIRE PROOFING FOR SKIRTS OF VESSELS
NOTES: -
1. OPENING FOR MANHOLE, VENT PIPES ETC. ARE NOT SHOWN IN THIS DRAWING.
2. 'If = INDICATE THE FIRE PROOFING COATING THICKNESS.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev.O Copyright EL - All rights reserved
Page 1371 of 1823

c1K)1 ENGINEERS PASSIVE FIRE PROOFING
6-68-0033 Rev.9
Oge..a tif5ieg INDIA LIMITED OF STEEL STRUCTURES
WWI FRaSIZ a31,71WIR IA Govt of India Undertaking) (HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE) Page 14 of 17
ANNEXURE-2
INSULATION
INSULATION INSULATION
(C
:1/4°
TANGENT LEG SUPPORT
TANGENT TANGENT
UNE LEG SUPPORT UNE UNE
TOP OF
M.S. PLATE
M.S. PLATE
M.S. PLATE
REINFORCEMENT 40/ !4 t:. REINFORCEMENT
FIRE PROOFING COATING
MATERIAL TYP.
" FIRE PROOFING
REINFORCEMENT OATING MATERIAL
(TYP.)
WATER SHED SEALING
7c1 ALROUND
VT 71
R.S.JOIST (ISMB) LEG ANGLE (ISA) LEG PIPE LEG
INSULATED VESSEL WITH LEG SUPPORT
TANGENT TANGENT TANGENT

UNE UNE UNE REINFORCEMENT
FIRE PROOFING
REINFORCEMENT COATING MATERIAL
FIRE PROOFING (TYP.) FIRE PROOFING
COATING MATERIAL COATING MATERIAL
REINFORCEMENT (TYP.)
(TYP.)
LEG SUPPORT
LEG SUPPORT LEG SUPPORT
LV 3N
R.S.JOIST (ISMB) LEG ANGLE (ISA) LEG PIPE LEG
UNINSULATED VESSEL WITH LEG SUPPORT
REINFORCEMENT M.S. NUTS

(TYP.) (BY VESSEL FABRICATOR)
(TYP)
FIRE PROOFING COATING REINFORCEMENT

\VESSEL SHELL MATERIAL TYP (TYP.)
(TYP.)
SECTION 1 —1 SECTION 2-2 SECTION 3-3
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 1372 of 1823

q-J ENGINERS PASSIVE FIRE PROOFING
6-68-0033 Rev.9
$L5eIl 'Meg INDIA LIMITED OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(a4W + a~rz1n0 an al (A God of India Undertaking) (HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE) Page 15 of 17
ANNEXURE-3
M10 M S NUTS
WELDED TO STEEL FIRE PROOFING
MEMBER 0 300 c/c COATING MATERIAL
(TYP.)
REINFORCEMENT
(TYP.)
tf
DEPTH < 300 DEPTH > 300 DEPTH < 300 DEPTH > 300
[I-SECTIONS] [I-SECTIONS] [CHANNELS] [CHANNELS]
FIRE PROOFING EXPANDED METAL

COATING MATERIAL TEEL SHEET/ LATH
REINFORCEMENT
COVER BLOCKS
STAR COLUMN WITH I-SECTIONS
MS NUTS
ANGLE BRACING DOUBLE ANGLE BRACING CHANNEL BOX
FULLY ENCASED STEEL SECTION
Page 1373 of 1823

ENGINEERS PASSIVE FIRE PROOFING
f851-au
eV4512 3)
INDIA LIMITED
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
6-68-0033 Rev.9
Page 16 of 17
ANNEXURE-4
M10 MILD STEEL NUTS COVER PLATE

SQUARE OR HEXAGONAL
6 THK (TYP.)
WELDED TO STRUCTURE
STEEL MEMBER 0 300 c/c
REINFORCEMENT FIRE PROOFING
(TYP.)
(TYP.) COATING MATERIAL
WATER SHED
SEAUNG
a. (TYP.)
O
tf f
tf
DEPTH < 300 DEPTH > 300 DEPTH < 300 DEPTH > 300
[FOR I—SECTIONS] [FOR CHANNELS]
STEEL SECTION WITH TOP FLANGE EXPOSED

BEAM SECTIONS
NOTE: THE MS COVER PLATE IN WATER SHED SHALL BE CONTINUOUSLY
WELDED TO THE MAIN MEMBER BY THE MAIN CONTRACTOR BEFORE
HANDING-OVER THE JOB TO THE FIRE-PROOFING SUB-CONTRACTOR
FIRE PROOFING COATING MATERIAL
REINFORCEMENT
XPANDED METAL STEEL SHEET/ LAT
4•4 A..
• 6• •6• .46 •6 .6 ..
• 6 ••
COVER BLOCKS
•
...• ••• ••• ••• •• ••••
4.6 :•47.• iai ••• ia.
THK STIFFENER FOR

MEMBER DEPTH > 600 COVER BLOCKS
0 600c/c
FIRE PROOFING FOR BUILTUP SECTIONS
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev.0 Copyright Ell_ - All rights reserved
Page 1374 of 1823

of ENGINEERS PASSIVE FIRE PROOFING 6-68-0033 Rev.9
2151eg INDIA LIMITED
eialW ,INJW,F1) IA Govt of India Undertaking) OF STEEL STRUCTURES Page 17 of 17
ATTACHMENT-I
A) FIREPROOFING MATERIAL DATA TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR TO SPECIFY

Primer to be used —
brand name, datasheet, application procedure
Finish coat system including sealer coat —
Sealing compound details —
Method statement for application
QAP for site quality control
B) FIREPROOFING MATERIAL TEST CERTIFICATE REQUIREMENTS
CONTRACTOR LIMITING
CHARACTERISTICS UNIT STANDARDS
TO SPECIFY VALUES
Material brand name
UL design number - XR - UL 1709
Manufacturer's certificate of
authorization submitted
(in case application by a - - -
contractor other than
fireproofing material vendor)
Fireproofing material is
covered under UL follow up _ _ _
service (products having UL
mark/ sticker on packing)
Average dry density kg/m3 700-900 ASTM E605
Compressive Strength kg/cm2 25-40 ASTM E761
Flexural Strength kg/cm2 20-25 ASTM D790
Bond Strength kPa min. 400 ASTM E736
Bond Impact - Pass ASTM E760
Thermal conductivity at 20°C W/mK 0.19 ASTM C177
Flame spread index - 0-5 ASTM E84
Smoke development - 0 ASTM E84
Air erosion gm/mm2 0 ASTM E859
Corrosion gm/mm2 0 ASTM E937
Fungal Resistance - Pass ASTM G21
Sulphate content (S03%) <1%
Date:
(Contractor's signature with seal)
Page 1375 of 1823

ENGINEERS
4ge_JI QCs INDIA umiTED APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND HYDRAULIC 6-76-0002 Rev. 3
I. 212ZIAZ,TAJ,10.1) IA Govt d India undenak.n9)
BOLT TENSION FOR FLANGE JOINTS Page 1 of 35
.11§ik fc
wd-anui (aci)) MIT I1§-nct) GI) -4111
Nett) fe#RT

APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND
HYDRAULIC BOLT TENSION
FOR FLANGE JOINTS
q?./41 12g/L4k
3 30-06-2021 Revised and reissued for Implementation
PVK PG Vitll SM
2 04-05-2016 Issued for Implementation PG SVRS RP RN
1 26-05-2008 Issued for Implementation PG KPS AA VC
0 15-05-2003 Issued for Implementation PG KPS VC SKG

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 1376 of 1823

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO.
16if&re?
ogeir a4h
famegw,: ENGINEERS
INDIA moo) APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND HYDRAULIC 6-76-0002 Rev. 3
IA Govt of India UncleftakIng) BOLT TENSION FOR FLANGE JOINTS
"'R" °"'°°"" Page 2 of 35
Abbreviations:

PMS Piping Material Specification
General Engineering Standards Committee
Convenor : Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Members : Mr. Harish Kumar

Mr. Amit Prakash
Mr. VK Tonger
Mr. Satyabrata Biswas
Mr. Shishupal Choudhary
Mr. Vinay Sonker
Mr. Deepak Agrawal
Mr. Ankul Mondal
Mr. Sachin Joshi
Mr. Bharat Bhushan Shukia
Mr. Surojit K Gayen
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyrights EIL —A11 rights reserved

Page 1377 of 1823
oaeximeolv ENGINEERS
INDIA ummD APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND HYDRAULIC 6-76-0002 Rev. 3
lagkweraw.3q0.1) IAGoA al WM Undertalungl BOLT TENSION FOR FLANGE JOINTS Page 3 of 35
CONTENTS
1.0 PURPOSE 4
2.0 SCOPE 4
3.0 REFERENCES 4
4.0 DEFINITIONS 4
5.0 METHODOLOGY AND CONTROL 4
6.0 RESPONSIBILITIES / APPROVALS 11
7.0 DOCUMENTATION 11
ANNEXURE-I 34
ANNEXURE-II 35
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyrights EIL — All rights reserved

Page 1378 of 1823
ilft
" .--; ENGINEERS
egW INDIA LIMITED APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND HYDRAULIC
sigem 16151- 6-76-0002 Rev. 3
IarRR eRawz all A) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this specification is to describe the methodology for preparation of bolted flange
joints by controlled bolt tightening during construction and commissioning stage of process plant
piping. This specification shall be used in conjunction with the other process/project specific
requirements and the licensor/vendor recommendations.
2.0 SCOPE
This specification covers ASME B16.5 and ASME B16.47 Series B bolted flanged joints,
involving identical pair of flanges, which are tightened by means of either hydraulic bolt
tensioning or calibrated torque wrenches.
3.0 REFERENCES
EIL Spec no. 6-44-0005 Rev 7 - Standard Piping Material Specification

ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (1/2" to 24" NPS)
ASME B16.47 Series B Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings (26" to 60" NPS)
ASME B31.3 Process Piping
BP RP 42-2 - British Petroleum Recommended Practice: Bolting for
flange joints
ASME Section VIII Division 1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
and Division 2
4.0 DEFINITIONS
None.
5.0 METHODOLOGIES AND CONTROL
5.1 Identification of joints for controlled bolt tightening
Controlled bolt tightening can be done either by application of calculated bolt tension with
hydraulic tensioner or by application of calculated bolt torque with calibrated torque wrenches.
The criteria for selection of joints for these two application procedure are given below.
5.1.1 Hydraulic Bolt tensioning
Hydraulic bolt tensioning shall be applied for all joints where the bolt sizes match the criteria
outlined in Table 1, except those in the category 'D' services. Category 'D' service is defined in
ASME B31.3.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyrights EIL —All rights reserved

Page 1379 of 1823
3afaeJel',.", ENGINEERS
ogell Efigegviip INDIA umiTED APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND HYDRAULIC 6-76-0002 Rev. 3
womeweareas,xiam)
BOLT TENSION FOR FLANGE JOINTS
(A Govt d India Undertaking}
Page 5 of 35
Table 1: Criteria for Bolt Tensioning —

Not applicable for flange joints in category 'D' services
Nominal Bolt
Condition Remarks
diameter
When specified by the Process licensor/
All
vendor / project specifications
50 mm and above All joints
Class 600 and above
Hydrogen service (See Note-1 below)
38 mm and above,
Category `M' fluid services Refer ASME B31.3
but less than 50 mm
Joints with leakage potential (See Note-2 below)
Critical joints with equipments (See Note-3 below)
25 mm and above, Joints with leakage potential (See Note-2 below)
but less than 38 mm Critical joints with equipments (See Note-3 below)
Note-1: Hydrogen Service
In absence of project specific definition, Hydrogen service may be defined as service in
contact with Hydrogen or gaseous mixtures containing Hydrogen in which the partial
pressure of Hydrogen is 7 bar (100 psi) abs. or more.
Note-2: Joints with leakage potential shall include
a) Joints involving tapped holes.
b) Joints not subjected to hydro test e.g. joints for equipment manholes,
equipment mounted temperature, pressure and level instruments, line mounted
temperature connections, on line instrument joints like control valves and
safety valves, compressor volume bottles.
c) Items involving two sets of gaskets with one set of bolt e.g. orifice flange
joint, joints with spectacle blind, spacer, flangeless wafer check valve, wafer
type butterfly valves.
d) Tie-in joints with other contractors and package vendors.
e) High temperature (above 371°C) joints in hydrocarbon services.
Note-3: Critical joints with the equipments shall include the inlet and the outlet flanges of
pumps, compressors and turbines.
5.1.2 Application of torque
Controlled bolt torque, with calculated torque values, shall be applied using calibrated torque
wrench. Joints those qualify for hydraulic bolt tensioning per 5.1.1 shall not be considered for
torque application. Controlled bolt torque should be applied for the joints meeting the criteria
given in Table 2. Joints fulfilling the criteria for Hydraulic bolt tensioning need not be checked
for these criteria
Table 2: Criteria for Bolt Torque application
Service Joints
Hydrogen service All joints (Note-1)
Category `M' services All joints (Note-1)
Other services Class 600 and above
Note-1: Joints, those qualify for hydraulic bolt tensioning as per cI. 5.1.1, shall not be
considered for torque application.

Page 1380 of 1823
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION Nd.
lara_it'lENGINEERS
og,.11 vviez INDIA LIMITED APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND HYDRAULIC 6-76-0002 Rev. 3
loierr efeas2.,J.C.) IA GUN of India Undertak.ng)
5.2 Pre-bolting Operations
5.2.1 Design
a) Flange connection with bolting of nominal diameter 25 mm and above shall have sufficient
clearances and access to allow the use of hydraulic tensioning equipment (wherever
hydraulic bolt tensioning is being used).
b) Stud bolts shall be longer by one diameter to suit the bolt tensioners for hydraulic bolt
tensioning. Excess threads shall be protected by using nut, threaded cap etc. On bolts at
ambient temperature duty the cap should have a grease nipple.
c) All flanges on hydrogen service must be left exposed unless otherwise agreed.
d) Interface joints shall be system pressure tested as per the relevant code to ensure their
integrity.
5.2.2 General
a) Use of right type of gasket, fasteners etc. conforming to the specifications as per design and
drawings should be ensured.
b) The Vickers hardness number of ring joint gaskets should be 30 to 40 less than that of the
mating face of the flange.
c) All non-ring joint gaskets shall be replaced with the new ones whenever an opened joint is to
be re-closed during construction and commissioning stage. Ring joint gaskets normally can
be re-used provided they are inspected and are free from any damage
d) Shop tested flange joints should not be disturbed at site. In case the joint is opened, the
Contractor shall be responsible for final hook-up joints including bolt tensioning if
applicable.
5.2.3 Visual inspection
a) Condition of flange faces should be checked. Those shall be free from dirt, scale, remnant
gasket, and protrusions. Faces with pitting, indentations or radial tool marks, or scratches are
not desirable. Surface finish should conform to specifications.
b) Flanges should be aligned properly. Flange faces shall be parallel and boltholes shall match
so that the studs can be inserted freely.
c) Visual examination of gaskets should be carried out prior to installation to ensure that these
are free of any defects such as bends, crease or loose spiral windings etc.
d) Gasket position should be checked.
e) Studs and nuts shall be free from dirt, nicks, burrs and chips. Studs shall be straight and nuts
shall turn freely on the stud.
0 No external load shall be used to align the flanges.

Page 1381 of 1823
s er
9144Iele ENGI
IN
NDIA APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND HYDRAULIC 6-76-0002 Rev. 3
G-9Id u NI BOLT TENSION FOR FLANGE JOINTS Page 7 of 35
5.2.4 Corrective measures
a) Faces with pitting, indentations or radial tool marks, or scratches that form leakage paths or
with the surface finish not in accordance with design requirements shall be replaced or re-
machined to specified surface finish.
b) If necessary, gasket seating face should be cleaned using wire brush (SS bristles on alloy
components) and/or suitable solvent.
c) Damaged gaskets shall be replaced.
d) If holding gasket in place after installation is a problem, a thin adhesive tape should be used
along the outside edge of gasket.
5.2.5 Lubrication/anti-seize compound
a) Threads and nuts to flange contact face should be lubricated with suitable lubricant. Thread
compound or lubricant, suitable for line temperature, may be used.
b) Gaskets should not be lubricated.
c) Lubricant shall not be applied on bolts, used in oxygen services.
d) Some of the types of lubricants used are as follows:
Molybdenum Lead oxide (graphite based)

Molykote G-n plus
Molykote P37
Molykote HSC Plus / Never Seez nickel special
API SA2
Molykote 1000
Machine oil
Graphite grease
5.2.6 Assembly
a) Suitable lubricant (refer cl. 5.2.5) to be applied to the threads and the face of the nut that
contacts the flange.
b) Four studs should be placed in positions 1, 2, 3 and 4 according to "Stud Tightening Pattern"
in Fig.1, as centring guides for the gasket.
c) Balance studs should be inserted next.
d) Nuts should be run down by hand in such a way that an equal number of threads project at
each end.
5.2.7 Torque/tension calculation
a) Bolting load calculation and stress analysis used for computation of the listed tightening
torque and tension values primarily follow the procedures outlined in ASME Section VIII
Division 1/ Division 2.
b) Basic formulae used for torque calculation takes care of friction between bolt threads and nut
threads as well as that between nut and back face of flange.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyrights EIL - All rights reserved

Page 1382 of 1823
ENGINEERS
1815teg INDIA LIMITED APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND HYDRAULIC 6-76-0002 Rev. 3
1•11,2,1e1MR.IAJMNR) IA Govt of ind. Undertamg)
c) A frictional co-efficient of 0.15 is assumed for calculation of torque values for the lubricant -
graphite grease. When a lubricant with different co-efficient of friction (µ) is used, the
calculated values get multiplied by the ratio µ/0.15. The approximate µ values of some of the
lubricants are as follows:
Type of Lubricant Co-efficient of friction (µ)

Molybdenum lead oxide + graphite based 0.085
Molykote G-n plus 0.09
Molykote P37 0.10
Molykote HSC Plus / Never Seez nickel special 0.11
API SA2 0.117
Molykote 1000 0.13
Graphite grease / Machine oil 0.15
However, it is advisable to obtain the appropriate co-efficient of friction (µ) value from the
lubricant manufacturer.
5.2.8 The PMS classes included in this specification are given in Table 3.
Table 3: PMS classes included in this specification
SI. Piping SI. Piping SI. Piping SI. Piping

no class no class no class no class
From Standard PMS (6-44-0005 rev 7)
1 A1A 26 B1A 51 B6N 76 F2D
2 A2A 27 B2A 52 D IA 77 F2G
3 A4A 28 B4A 53 D2A 78 G2G
4 A6A 29 B5A 54 D4A
5 A7A 30 B6A 55 D5A
6 A8A 31 B9A 56 D9A
7 A9A 32 B13A 57 D16A
8 Al IA 33 B16A 58 D19A
9 A13A 34 B19A 59 DID
10 A15A 35 B32A 60 D2D
11 A16A 36 BID 61 D5D
12 A19A 37 B5D 62 D5E
13 A20A 38 B1E 63 D1K
14 A32A 39 B3F 64 D2K
15 A33A 40 B4F 65 E1A
16 A4F 41 B4G 66 E2A
17 A4G 42 B1K 67 E5A
18 AlK 43 B2K 68 E9A
19 A2K 44 B4K 69 EI9A
20 A6K 45 B5K 70 E5E
21 AI1K 46 B6K 71 FIA
22 A 1M 47 BIM 72 F2A
23 A1N 48 B3M 73 F5A
24 A4Y 49 B5M 74 F9A
25 A33Y 50 BIN 75 F19A

Page 1383 of 1823
lagazrd „."ENGINEERS
imegva-, INDIA umn-ED APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND HYDRAULIC 6-76-0002 Rev. 3
Goal al India Undertaking)
1.1Vr eliMV axe) IA BOLT TENSION FOR FLANGE JOINTS Page 9 of 35
5.2.9 Torque and tension values
Table 4 contains the tension and torque values to be used for bolt tightening of each bolt using
hydraulic bolt tensioner and torque wrench respectively. These values are listed PMS class and
flange size wise. The tension values specified are the target load per bolt intended after the bolt
tensioning operation is complete. This means any allowance inherent in bolt tensioning
equipment (viz. backlash etc.) shall also to be taken care of as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer.
5.2.10 Notes to Torque and tension values in Table 4
a) The maximum allowed design pressure & temperature combination and test pressure
values are listed in Table 4. These values corresponds to PMS rating table values, except
as stated in c) below. Recalculation of torque and tension is necessary if the design
condition exceeds these limits.
b) Values in the table are not valid if the design condition for pipe wall thickness
calculation is lower than 80% of the class rating condition. Recalculation of torque and
tension is necessary in such cases.
c) It may be noted that for the sizes above 24" and rating class above 150 (except Lists B-1
and B-2), the calculations are carried out for 80% of the pressure used for sizes up to 24".
d) Torque / tension computation of sizes and pipe thickness, which are not covered in the
respective classes of the standard PMS, are carried out based on approximate calculated
pipe thickness for the specified pressure and temperature condition.
e) The "Flange Std" column of table 4 is the standard rating class followed by a suffix.
Suffixes to the rating class numbers denote the flange dimensional standard and are as
follows:
S - ASME B16.5 B - ASME B16.47 Series B
f) The values in the tables are not valid for non-standard flanges or flanges conforming to
any other dimensional standards, e.g., ASME B16.47 Series A, AWWA (American
Water Works association) etc.
g) All pressure values are in kg/cm2 (g) and all temperature values are in °C
h) Bolt tightening torque or tension values at equipment interface flanges, if specified by the
equipment vendor, shall be used.
5.3 Bolting Operation
5.3.1 General
a) Categorisation of joints for tension or torque application shall be as per cl. 5.1.
b) Bolt tightening tension or torque value shall be as per cl. 5.2.9.
c) Guidelines and safety requirements provided by the manufacturer bolt tightening equipment
should be followed.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyrights EIL —All rights reserved

Page 1384 of 1823
ENGINEERS
Oge0151eg 1-- 407 INDIA LIMITED APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND HYDRAULIC 6-76-0002 Rev. 3
Wren' eliknR RM Jgagt) (A Govt ol India Undertaking)
5.3.2 Hydraulic bolt tension application
a) Hydraulic pressure adequate to get the target bolt load can be calculated dividing the bolt
load by the load cell hydraulic seal area. This pressure should be applied simultaneously to
all load cells.
b) 4 load cells equally spaced should be used.
c) Nuts should be run down to flange surface manually.
d) Load cells should be shifted following the Criss-cross Pattern shown in Fig. 1 but in-groups
of 4 bolts each (i.e. 1-2-3-4, 5-6-7-8, 9-10-11-12 etc.) and the tensioning of all bolts should
be completed.
e) Tensioning operations should be repeated once again applying the same pressure.
5.3.3 Stud bolt torque application
a) Bolt torque application sequence shall be in accordance with "Criss-cross Stud Tightening
Pattern" (Fig. 1).
b) Properly calibrated torque wrenches should be used.
c) Torque wrench should be held perpendicular to the axis of the bolt and if hydraulic wrench is
used, it has to be ensured that it reacts against a rigid support parallel to the axis of bolt.
d) Torque should be applied using a minimum of following five steps:
i. All the nuts should be made snug tight with a short wrench (Criss-cross Pattern — Fig.1).
Flange should be bearing uniformly on the gasket (Distance between mating flanges shall
be uniform).
ii. Tightening to 30% of the final torque value (Criss-cross Pattern — Fig. 1).
Flange should be bearing uniformly on the gasket (Distance between mating flanges
shall be uniform).
iii. Tightening to 60% of the final torque value (Criss-cross Pattern — Fig.1).
Flange should be bearing uniformly on the gasket (Distance between mating flanges
shall be uniform).
iv. Tightening to the final torque value (Criss-cross Pattern — Fig. 1).
Flange should be bearing uniformly on the gasket (Distance between mating flanges shall
be uniform).
v. Tightening should be continued with the final torque in a clockwise manner (bolt to bolt)
until no further rotation is observed.
e) In the event of nut seizure, the nut should be backed off and additional lubricant should be
applied or the nut or/and bolt should be replaced, if necessary.

Page 1385 of 1823
oliaeielENGINEERS
51geir mieg WA umiTED APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND HYDRAULIC 6-76-0002 Rev. 3
1.117Pf elEVORGINJ0.1) IA Govt of India Undertakongt BOLT TENSION FOR FLANGE JOINTS Page 11 of 35
5.3.4 Testing of joints
Checking up of the individual joints for any leak during system pressure testing should be carried
out using special tapes, soap solutions.
6.0 RESPONSIBILITIES / APPROVALS
6.1 All procedures/documents to be used during Construction should be submitted by the Contractor
to Engineer-in-charge at site in advance.
6.2 The equipment supplier shall be subjected to EIL/Owner approval.
6.3 The details of hydraulic tensioner equipment to be used for tightening shall be intimated to
Engineer-in-charge before application.
6.4 Boxing up and tightening of flange joints shall be done by skilled technicians, qualified and
approved by Contractor and EIL/Owner.
6.5 Any conflict between the requirements of this standard specification and applicable codes,
licensor specification, standards, data sheets, drawings, requisitions etc. shall be referred to client/
consultant. Agency carrying out bolt tightening shall list and describe all the deviations from this
standard specification and the related reference documents.
7.0 DOCUMENTATION
7.1 History sheet for flange joints shall be maintained as per Annexure-I.
7.2 Sequence of the activities involved for reopening/ making/ blinding/ de-blinding/ wedge opening
of flange joints shall be as per Annexure-II.
7.3 All joints shall be boxed-up and the record shall be maintained of salient points and names of the
persons involved in the execution/inspection of boxing-up operation.
7.4 All critical joints shall be boxed-up under the supervision of the Contractor's representative and
EIL's Engineer-in-charge or his representative and separate records shall be maintained for such
joints.
7.5 Box up records of interface joints and on-line instrument joints, like control valves, safety valves,
turbine flow meters etc., which are not subjected to hydro test shall be maintained separately.
7.6 If mentioned in project specification, complete set of Bolt Tensioning Equipment/ Torque
Wrenches shall be supplied by Contractor to the Owner, after commissioning of the plant, as
mandatory spares.

Page 1386 of 1823
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No:
ENGINEERS
*1ga Eilajeg INDIA um-FED APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND HYDRAULIC 6-76-0002 Rev. 3
WWI eRevir aliJER1.1) IA Govt 01 India Underlakm
4 BOLT FLANGE 8 BOLT FLANGE
12 BOLT I FLANGE / 16 BOLT FLANGE
20 BOLT FLANGE
24 BOLT FLANGE
Figure 1 Typical "Criss-cross" Bolt tightening/Torque application pattern
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyrights EIL - All rights reserved

Page 1387 of 1823
78.3 I
Torque
a-. CO ..• CO at a-. e• CM CI CO ICJ N CO A A A. A• CO 1t) ts4 Cal A
. A A. A el Call
kg-m
STANDARDSPECIFICATION No.
N N VS 4 at v.: oi r.: O m tti M M ri A r- co C,) I- .- co Cc) tal CI 0 tO
a- a-NNNCIC•11010 e. a- .1- e- el el at et 'It et A CO
6841
4931
4522
3020
7750
2562
8583
10570
3972
7750
5326
7750
5135
11379
11230
1027
8583
6249
ur
Tension
6274
0
Page 13 of 35
U) CD A Of a- a- co 1-- en
co ter st co s- s- in csi
kg
s- tsi to et et et u, t'
t•-
Copyrights EIL — All rights reserved

O
O
sr sr sr sr sr at CO OD CO N Ca! N CO 0 CD 0 at CO 0 at 0 at CO 0 at
9 ..- 4 .- Cal N CI et at at at at at at a (0 at at
z °m 0
1.7
to
I
5/8
7/8
r 7/8
co CO at CO CO
N Cs4 N CN CO CO .sr ....
co
7/8
at .....
..._ .....
0.
m
0
c ..-- ..-- ,..- ..-- 43 in -cet
75. ..cat
z.s. a- a- a- .....
at 'It
.,- ..-- ..--
._ ,-- .-. ,- ,-- ‘-- co co co co r-.
401
Calculation Data
201
12
32
28
Flange
Call
inch
size
04 at a-
sr .q.
14
42
0 tO CO at CO 0 co co CD 00
a... ZI
. ar.. a- N CI et tO 00 a- e- a- N Cal VI co el Cal at at at
150B
SI
L
Flange
150S
0) to CO CD C0 0) CO In CO CO CD CO CO 03 CO CO OD M CO 03 CO 03 03 CO 03
Std
r 150
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CD 0 0
U) U) U) U) U) U) U) U) U) U) U) 1.0 10 10 LO U) U) U) LO It) 10 U) U) III U)
Refer cl. 5.2.8, 5.2.9 and5.2.10for applicability of these values
30.05I
30. 05I
30.05
30.05
30. 05
30. 05
30. 05
30.05
30.05
LC)
30.05
10 La ir) 1.0 10 LC) la La 10 La U) La La In

kg/cm (g)
IC)
Pressure
0.0 111
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Test
2
ci 6 ci ci ci ci 0 0 ci 0 0 ci d ci ci ci 6 ci
el tn el Cl) el el co el el C') el co) el C') el in en r)
Ta ble 4: Bolt Tension andTorque Values
I
I
4I N- V- ‘...
0 ci. A A A A A A r- r-• r- r- I-- r-- A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
at E0 el CO CI CO CO CO CO CO CO CO 01 C, CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO
CI 0 °
I-
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
C+) el el el el C') el r-) el el el el el eq v.) 0) el CI c,)

7.73
7.73
7.73
kg/cm (g)
Pressure
A r-- r-- r-- r-- r- r- r- r- I-- r- r-- r-- r- r-- r- r-- N- r-

N: N: r-: r--: h:. N: r-:. N. N: N: rs: r-: N: r-: r-:
2
r-:
Des
h: Is.: I,:
LA106Gr. B
L2p to 24"
LA672 Gr.B 60CI.22

LUp to 48"
Up to 36"
Pipe
0
(.0
cla
0
CD
m
0
<0
0
co 0 0
co
m
0
co
Spiral woundS SA106Gr. B
I_Up to 48"
CO CO CO CO CO 0:1 CO 03 CO
=
Up to 24"
LUp to 36"
[Up to 24"
LA106Gr.
...:
I-:
(0
0 C 00 00 VI 0 (15 0 00 0
N CNI CO CN1 CO N 0 CO Cal CNI CO N CO
h-
A 0 N- 0 A 0 U, 0 N- 0
.- (s) ,- <-
o
O
CD CO
N- a- CD CD ,-
< < < < < < D < < < < <
Temperature, pressure, materials and size range
_
Spiral woundSS
Gasket
A193Gr. B7 Spiral wound SS

Spiral wound SS
Spiral woundS S
Spiral wound SS
Spiral wound SS
Spiral wound SS
371 / 7.73
371 / 7.73
371 / 7.73
371 / 7.73
/ 7.73
371 / 7.73
cn
r-- U)
PMS class data
I'•:- I,:
371
--- ---
,.... .-
rs. 1.....
CO C)
A193Gr. B7
A193 Gr. B7
1....
1 A193 Gr. B7
A193Gr. B7
A193Gr. B7
A193Gr. B7
Bolt
CO
PMS rated Temperature / Pressure

PMS ratedTemperature / Pressure

PMS rated Temperature /Pressure
L.:
0
Format No. 8-00-0001-F7Rev. 0
C')
a)
•,.
Flange
in in to in to in
a a a a 1
0°
,- a u")
o 0
a- a- a- a- a-
4 < < •7
(
co . i- < < <

C gn U) < < < < < N- VI
a al _1
CO
:.
:-
c Cal CD A C) :,-c a-
E0 < < < < <
I
Page 1388 of 1823

41
45. 5]
Torque
7.
N a- a... a- CO CO 1.-Wa-. CO V ,
:t CD 0 CO CO CD CD 111 CO )- CO )- CO V a- a- N 01
.
4
kg-m
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONNo.
CO 4 .1: pi pi N N C) 44 N C- (4 ri 0 0 ..- •-• U el N N M v 0) • -• oi r: .-
40 10 41 CO 0) 0) •••• e- N N C) CO V CO ,- a- N
3014 1
1027
13488
684
1027
7263
5499
855
7263
10240
855
o
10570
41 01 01 c.)
10240
Tension
4931
10240
4 184
684
9272
2471
13488
5499
.it I, 04 01
Page 14 of 35
10 A- .)- a- a- CO 0) (1) N 10
N0000
CO 0 0)
kg
a- 01 N C4 V) a- 0.1 01 lv)
Copyrights EIL -All rights reserved

O
I
co 03 N (0 CD CO N V V Tr NI. V V CO CO 00 01 N 01 CO CO 0 0 '111- V V V N V CO CO 00
O o „_ ...-. N U) U) co N U) 04 C)/
co z 0 0
CO
7/8
5/8
CO O CO CO
=
'1 1 to .0 --...
-..... -.... --... -.... --.... ....... CO
--... -....
.0- ,E-m-
5/8
N 01 N 0.1 CO CO N N CO N 01 N 01 CO 00 V V
03 1:11 .U
0 r- e-,- ,- a-e-1-,-A-.)- 1. B 1..C3
. C 1 0 1 F:: ..... N-A--t-m- i'
.6 ii r)
Calculation Data
3/4
Flange
N 01
inch
size
,-
.....
0 N ...r 0) olvw cp., NV
10
2
18
56
10 U) 10 U) ..- .0. e.. 01 01 V CO CO a-a-a- NN n-C-75)-A-N4414. (0W
150S
150S
Flange
U) U) U)
150 S
03 03 03 03 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO (/) CO CO Ci) U) CO CO CO U) (.0 U) CO
Std
000000 0000000000000 0 00000000

000000 0000000000000 0 00000000
15.80
15.80
15.80
27.95
15.80
15.80
15.80
15.80
27.95
15.80
15.80
27. 95
15.80
U) U) U) U) U)
kg/cm (g)
10 U) U) U) U) U) CD CD CD U)
Pressure
CD 0 0
000000 O 00 CO CO O. 0) CA 0) 0) CA 0)
<6 di 46 .:=1 do 6
Test
2
U) U) U) iri 6 to N.: N: N. N: N: N:
el cy, C') co c4 0) .- v- NN N NNN
el) E
0 CI 0 I
A- ,- .-- ..,--
N. N. N. N. N. N.
el CO 4'M r) cn CO
CO tO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO (.0 CO CO
COCOODCOC00003C003C0C00303C0000,
.t—r-
gag..
NNNNNNNNN
CD 8. 1,
I
-
7.73
7.73
10.55
14.06
10.55
10.55
7.73
7.73
7.73
kg/cm (g)
14.06
(0 U) U) U) U) U) U)
14.06
10.55
10.55
U) U) U) U)
Pressure
C_) CD CO CO CO (0CO
N. 4). 10. 11). 10. 10. 41
. 10. 1.0 141 10 U)
6. CD 0 CD 0 0 CD
2
Des
N. 0 CD 0 CD 0 CD CD d ci 6 4 N 4 N 4 N
A307GR.BBUTYLRUBBER API 5L GR.B PSL1
A320 GR.L7 Spiral wound SS A 333 GR.6

A 671 GR.CC60 CL.32
50 / 10.55 Up to 12"
Up to 48"
Pipe
.6
..4
0
M
0 W
0
4
PMS class data
.....
4
O
N
Bolt
Format No. 8-00-0001-F7 Rev. 0

A350GR.LF2 CL.1
=
Z <
IJJZ
Flange
U)
CD
<
I LIST A-2
I LISTA-3
11
,
0) to
Cin >- 'CC
B. 40 4 4
4 4
ii: 0
Page 1389 of 1823

53.7I
43.7I
70.3I
Torque
10In C.I CO I.. el Is. 1".. CD CO Cl CI 1••• 1... 1".. N v. CO a- CO at a-. a- CM el 10 ICI Cal
kg-m
STANDARD SP ECIFICATIONNo.
CO 115 40 C4 Ca r: e: cc; a; ei (4 co ei ei ei 4 a; s- oi e: s- cri co Iti

N N V) el CD 1... a.- N' a- a- el VI at at at CD e- a-010101M
4931
10570
43851
7750
2562
5326
11230
6249
7750
30 20
8583
1027
5326
7750
7750
Tension
11379
I- 6274
6274
1597
10 01 01 el a- a- N V tt) v.. N U)
Page 15 of 35
M V CD CO a- ,r• N CO 1.11 r- r- cl
Cal 0) 141 zi. ;T
r CO tO CO 0 CD a-
kg
CO CO 111 CO 0 N VI Ul
C%1
Copyrights EIL - All rights reserved

O
O
O go) Cal N Cs4 CD CD 0 0 CO 0 0 CO CD 0 CD 0 CO N CD 0 .:1• -4- v. Tt 0 0 CO CO CO Ca/ Cal Cal
• a.. e-- a- a-- a-- a- N CV 01 0 Nr 0 0 0 0 0 V ID 0 M- a- ...- e-
to O "- —
z 0 0
CO
(0 7/8
7/8
I
*a .c CO CO 0 CO CO
3/4
— CO a- .- .-- ..y. s- .-
3/4
3/4
5/8
0 — 0 4 co co NNNNCO CO 'Cr Op CO
I I I ..... ..... ..... ...... ".... ......
ca 0 C V. .4 . T.... I... el in I.
: r`• •,- ', ,.. .,- i..
..
1 1'
-1. I'. ,.'"
321
381
Calculation Data
42
20
26
Flange
N
I inch
size
N V e-
10
40
C) N V CD CO Nr CO a et co 4 co co .... -.. VI at
a- a- gr. a- a"- Cal N V) C0 10 'V 0 'Cr a- es v- s- 04 VI 0 CD CO e- a-
150S
Flange
CO M CO M CO M CO CO M CO CO M CO G3 m c0 co co co M m m co m co co co m m m
Std
O o a a o a o o o o o o o o o o a a o o o o o a o a o o o o
co co co U) co co U) U) to co co co U) co in in U) co co co co co U) U) co an co co co co
30.05
30.05
30. 05
27.95
27.95
30.05
30.05
30.05
27.95
27.95
27.95
27.95
30.05
kg/cm (g)
U) U)
Pressure
LC) U) U) It) U) LC) 1.0 U) 121 tr) 10 Ill III U) Ul tfl

0) 01 CS) 0) CD 0) CD 0) Cr/ CD CD 0) 0) 0 0 CD 0 0
ci ci ci ci
Test
ci
2
I,: 1...: t•- ts: 1".: h: is: r.: 1,.: ts: r1".: r:
N N N N N N CV Cal N IN N Cai N el VI 10 Col C')
I
1
4 4 4 0 0 0 at V 0 V 0 Nr 0 "Ct 0 0 0 0 Nr mcnelcntnne)r) noor, cn
co 6 o o o a o a o o oo cpo o occo o o o 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CDEU CaINCNINNNOINNNNNNCSINNNNN CO C0 VI C0 V) V) el C0 Cr) VI el V)
0 co
1-
8.78
14.06
14.06
8.78
14.06
14.06
14.06
14.06
14.06
14.06
14.06
14.06
14,06
8.78
8.78
14.06
14.06
8.78
14.06
14.06
8.78
kg/cm (g)
Pressure
CO CO CD CD 030303C0 CO CO
0 CD CD CD I,- 1.-- I,- IN- r..- t"--
4 .4 4 CO CO CO c0 co
2
Des
.0 CO
GRX A 106 GR.B
A 106 GR.B
A 106 GR.B
1
Up to 3"
A106GR.B
0
0. a o
CO CD
ii- CO CO
F.0
f.0
0 0 N 0 N
r- r-
cc 0- CD co
0 D < 0 4
GRX
GRX
Gasket
GR X
0)
BS753 1
BS7531
BS753 1
BS7531
343/8.78
r•-• CO a-
a- I"- a-
PMS class data
ai ai ‘-
--. -....
el cz,
co 4 co
(43 Cl) N
A193GR.B7
A193GR.B7
A193GR.B7
A193GR.B7
Bolt

PMS ratedTemperature /Pressure

Flange
U) U) U) u")
CD 0 CD
s- 0
a- .7
c
I <
<
Piping
I-
Class
m < < < <

CO ln 0 N
-1 el VI
4 *X 4 *1
I
Page 1390 of 1823

53.7
53.7
Torque
CO C•1 I,- Is- CA 10 CI CI 1... ts n r•-• CI 04 N a- a- a- CO CO a- CO a- CO at a-. a- CI Cl CO
kg-m
..ci 4 4 c.1 oi
Co Co NZ e: Co Co t- t- Co Co Co Co cO CO Co N N Co at Co I-. Co r.. t- tri
co r-, t- .- t- t- Co co at st sr sr I.- CO co to CO CO 0) CO a- a- N N
39721
4931
10570
10240
10240
4385
1597
11230
7750
7750
3020
13488
7750
5135
Tension
8 583
10570
2471
7750
10240
6274
Co Co Co a- e- N at 00 at 10 ts. NI
0) 00 0. e... a- N 0. CO CO U) NI CO
0) Ul 01 a- e- 111 NA et CO CO 0 Ul
kg
10 CO a- at at at CO Co a- 01
a-- a-

I
cri CO CO 0 0 CO 0 at CO a mr a sr ao N 0 at 03 0 N 'at '4' -:1- ..4 -.4- at CO CO 03 CNI
• 4-, e- a- 04 N 01 '0' at Co at at at at at 1.0 at at at N
1C) 10
111 CO (0 LO a—
0 ..- —
m
5/8
4.• ..c CO 03 'Cr CO CO CO CO CO CO at at
— CI
g - -I -I .4 -4
..., •1-
...... at
...., 03 CO
..... ......
a- a- a- a- a- a- a- a- NNNN CO co -4- -4- co
8
......
M ..... '- ,. ,-... Co Co Co Co I., 1, . '," l
." V-. l
- N... ,- N'. V- T-.. 'l a- ••-• I- a- a- 17(3 113 (71.5 F..
..
Calculation Data
Flange
NI
inch
size
N
st ,.
10
40
56
48
38
CO Co 0 'et CO CO 0 N at CO N at CO 0 N 'at 0
5
,.a-NNINN010101C.1 at at at AO U) IC) CO .- Co a- a- N Co v. CO 03
150S
150B
Flange
150S
150B
150B
150S
(.0 (i) (t) 03 CO CO CO 111 03 CO 03 CO CO 03 CO 03 CO CO V) 43 U) CO (.0 co u) u)
Std
o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
LC) Ill U) 10 U) U) U) 10 U) CO U) U) U) to U) to U) to to to U) Lc-) U) U) U) U)
,.. l- n- 1.. 1- ,l
.. 'l . .l . ,I . .l '.l 1- l
- ',. .l . .l . .l . ,lr l
- .l . V.- r- ,l .I . ,I... l".
30. 05
30.05
30.05
30.05
30.05
30.05
30.05
30.05
30. 05
30.05
30. 05
30.05
30. 05
30.05
kg/cm (g)
30.05
30. 05
30.05
10 10 LO 10
Pressure
an In In U) In In U) LO 113 U) 10
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Test
2
ci ci ci ci a a a ci ci a c; a c; ci c;
co Co co co co co Co co co co Co co co Co co
_
I
1
„, 1-
z 0 Ea 0 c.)v
O
co cn
Ni-
co
coroelco com
Nr -4- ..)- at at at
el ("I r-) r) r) v.)
Co coroco
at -4- at al'
r) r) el r-)
coelcoco Co
at at at al' at
r) iv) r) r) el
rocoroco Co
at
elat V -4- -4
r) r-) co en
n n N.
r) co t-•-)
n N-
r) (v.)
n N.- N. C-
el r) (-.) co
N-
Co
Ci m *
}O 1.--
7.73
8.78
7.73
8.78
8.78
8.78
8.78
8.78
8,78
8.78
8.78
8.78
8.78
8.78
8.78
8. 7 8
7.73
8.78
7.73
8.78
8.78
8.78
u)
-3
kg/cm (g)
Pressure
co co co Co co r)r)r, Co Co
O 0 N N. 0- N- 1,- N- N. N- N. Ps
2
Des
z Co Co 03 Co Ps: ts; ts: ts: Is: Is:

• <
O al —.I
X A 106GR.B
A193 GR.B7 BS7531GRX A 106GR. B
iZ
IS-3589GR.410
U gh
Up to 48"
Up to 4 8"
Up to 24"
0
a. 0 u-
CO I— Z
IS-3589GR.410
ce 00 (7)
Pipe
0
• z (9
03 03
Cl LU
Z 1— L.: s
0 0
'41 •<, CO N
0 I.-
a- CO
7i
s-'
371 / 7.73
< <
0
A 193 Gr. B7M Spiral wound SS
A 193 GR.B7 BS7531 GR
Gasket
0) 0)
PMS class data
Co CO
s, s..
10 LC)
LO (0
Bolt

Flange
U) U) 10
0 0 0
,-. a- a-
I LISTA-5
CO in
C en < >- <
in Co CO
,-
Z. 63 Co Co
67 0 < < <
Page 1391 of 1823

2.9
2.4
VI 01
. . A.
N 10 0) ell• at CO CD 10 is. 0 0 01
Torque
10 NI CO N. A VI sr CO a- a- a- 10 CO OA
kg-m
ti
c
co lei M M ri ri 4 el .4.
a- a- Cal 01 a- a- CO 0 sr N a-. A CO 0) ID ILO CO 0) A
Cal r) c..) 10 U) A sr.. a- a.- N Cal V) ra mi. U 1.- r- co .- a- a- Cal in M'r st Sr
r
14751
7249
4383
11554
11885
6847
8748
8249
3020
6277
4520
8748
5205
3020
5274
8583
8583
798
11379
6249
5326
4794
6277
Tension
Of A CO
0)
0)
0
A at
as ‘-
.r. 0 CO
.4.
to .1.
N.
o el
o
co
crl a
kg
10 a- a- 01 if 4.-

I
I
I
I
in C11 Cal CO CO CD 0 St st sr V' sr sr CO CO CO N Cal N CO CO 0 C) CD CD st CO 0 Sr CD st CO
ci ._ 4L4 N Cal N N Cs, sr sr v Sr sr sr st sr
Z ° °
In
I
3/4
5/8
CO CO St CO CO St
••• ..0
OD
.41. CO CO
7/8
..- a- 1- CO CO st sr CO s- s-. s- el sr
0
CS NN
N .....
•
0 . 8 ......
Ca CI .C 1,.. .‘. gr.. ,, LT) 1:6 C7 (75 F.
,
: r..., ....- .,- a- a- a- el V) (Z'S A i... a- a- a-
Calculation Data
20
12
10
30I
18
38
I
3/4
Flange
N
inch
size
a- Csi air tO CD Cal

18
CO
14
N tO 0 at Sr (C) sl• CD
a- a- N N r .r. a- N Col sr CD CO a- a- CM Cal N el (1) V) ..d• ,:t
I
I
I
03 cf.1
Flange
03 CO CO CO 03 CO
SOG I.
CO CO if3 CO CO CD 03 U) U) CO 03 U) CO U) CO CO CO CO V) CO CO CO
Std
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0
U) U) U) U) U) tO in U) U) U) U) U) U) U) U) U) U) U) U) U) U) tO in In U) U) U) U) in U)
,l . `,.. '.I . l' . ,1-.. ,l . ,L . X— ,i . ,l . ..,. V— ,11 •l . V.. V— •I . ,,.. V... ,, N— .L ,,. ,, l
— •.L . ,t . Ir.. V`- ,L
30.05I
30.57
30.57
30.57
30.57
30.57
30. 57
F.- A A A
kg/cm (g)
A N- A
i
A N- N. A A A
Pressure
U) U) ii, U) 11) A A A A A
30.5
0 CD CD 0 0 10 LC) 1.0 in tC) 1.0 if) LC) IC) LO LO If) LC) gl) cf) LC) LC) LC)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0i ci 0 0i
0
0 ci 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 el 0 0 a
Test
2
C+) Cl) el el el m or) cn in el el V*1 VI Cl) el C,) VI VI Cq VI C.) Co)
< r.• 1.... N. h. Is- Is-

I- 1- a- a- a- a- e- a- a- a- e-- ... .,.. .,.
I,
-
V.- — .•
I.... l t . V .
A A r- N. r- r- r- r- r- r- A A A A A A A A A A N. A A r-.
I , ,
re z (DEC)
U) gi
mr)romm el cneltn el co mrqcnrommtnentneqcnr,,cleIrqmenc,-)mn
Q I-
• o0
0 .
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
Z =„7
.
7.73
Cl) C.”) CI CI C.) CI ts) Cl) Cs)

kg/cm (g)
Cl)
A A A 1-- r- r- Is- A
Cl) CO CO ts)
Pressure
ts) Cl) Cl) CO 0,)

Oo 5 N. A. A. N- A. N. N-. F-.
A A A A A A A A A A A
r-: N. N: N. N. N.:
2
Des
N- N. N. N- N.
Z z
• < <
O W
A691GR.5Cr CL.42
,are
u,
▪oo u.
co z
o
• o(7)
Pipe
A335GR.P5
zz
0 cu
Up to 24"
z
• <
cn 0
ca
4..
Spiral woundSS
ap
ae
0
CC
C.9
/ 7.73
PMS class data
371
A193Gr.B16
Bolt
FormatNo. 8-00-0001-F7Rev. 0
I
Flange
A182Gr.F5
LISTA-6
0/ fn
C gn U.
sr
EL "3
<
E (3
Page 1392 of 1823

Torque
a) co to oz) et et .- .1- et N in .4: st I..
76.5
107.3
35.5
0 0 01 e... OS 00 t- CD all: CO 1,- OR
U)
kg-m
V..
A oi
Lei
1-
N N M U) *- N N 1•)14 U) cii a 1-. ‘- N co 4 cc; %-
O
N
et CO
,L- a- .r. N N el at NY I,- a- a- N N el gt, U) U) a-
47261
c)
12
3203
Tension
1255
1825
11885
3386
6847
>:
T5
7037
8748
15594
00
4589
0
1141
1597
570
01
8998
2379
855
CO N N OS 01 N N Cal 01 C1
Of es 0 00 et 1t OS CO 0101010IN
01 at
2
A Of
kg
N CI 01 V) a- a- V..
e.) ell U) to Ns et U) N. N. 0) Of
Cs11 co

O
O
I
I
I
w
4 I
4
4
Nt et et et et et CO 00 00 NI .cr co ID v- 0
it
4
4
4
I co NI Cal CO CO 0 ID CD CD 'et CO
le e- .0- A- .1- a- Cal V
V
.4 N 01 V et `tt ‘t et .1
CD a.
Z
z 0 0
CO
co
co 00
R
inch
Bolt
y
Dia
a
5/8
N CNI NI CA4 CO CO et`Ct0003 47
'-' ''' ‘- '1' ...... '1 '1 CO CO NI NI N NI CO CO
...... ....... s.... ....
, c-- ,-. ‘-. .-- 1.:15 176 (....
.i (
"73 i
:s
.' h. v .l .l
- el C., C..) i..) 1.... I's .l V.- V V-. N- '1- 1
.-• 115 It)
Calculation Data
42
Flange
N N
inch
size
N et a-
3/4
e-
10
12
18
14
..t to a NI
38
CO 0 CD CO 0 01
Ir. .C75 c. e- N 01 et CO CO ,- N N N N co in 1') co Tr .- s- s- N co
150SI
cn
29.00I
a.0 0) u) co co co u) co co 0) to u) u) co u) co m co co co co m co co to co co u) to m u)
C .+ o o o o o 0 o o o cp o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 0 0 0 0
11 CO 111 1.0 LO LO SO 1.0 1.0 11 tC1 1.0 tO 1.0 ttl 1.0 MI 1.0 ISI I.0 SO LO tO LC) 1.0 tO SO U) Ill 1.0 11 Ul
a-
1.-. ..-
LL
a- a- e- ..- a.- a- a- e- a- e- a- a- ,
e-a- a- ..- a- a- N- ,t- .t- .,,. V.- ,• .l . 1
-
30. 57 I
30.57I
30.57 1
29.00
29. 00
29.00I
kg/cm (g)
120I
N. N. N..
30.57
Pressure
30.57
30. 57
o o
30.57
N. N- F- N. t.... ts. IN F- 1"-- N- N.- N. N. IN- N.

1.0 U) U) ill SO U) U) U) AO U) 11 U) U) U) 11 1t1 121 Ill 0 0
Test
ci ci
2
co co
ci 6 ci
co co co
ci ci ci ci ci 6 d ci 6 ci ci ci ci ai ai
01 01 01 01 01 VI CO (,) CI CI V) VI V) N N
I_
1201
120.
s- s- s- s- s- T-• 't ,r- e-- a- ••-• s-
120
`l- V.. .l . ,l
, `l- ,l . ,l . .l . l
- l
- .l .
to ci.
,L- ,.... 0 0
I'.N.. 1.... N- ts- N. N- N. N. N. 1,- 1"-- 1 ,-
N. N. N.- N- N. N. N.- ts. N. N. N- N- N N
e E C.) el e) 0) co el el el in v) 0) el el cn V) VI Cn VI el C') In CI VI C.1 CI VI a- a-
h
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
15.32
kg/cm (g)
cc) cc) 0, el cc) cc) cc) cc) cc) M

Pressure
7.73
cc) V) C') CO VI
7.73
M
7.73
N
0.1 N N NI
r.- N. N- N. N- I,- N- N. P N. 14-- 1"... N. ts- 1.-- N- in c.,) on cn c..)
2
Des
N: rs: N: N- N: r--: N.: N: N:

— eri
— Uri
— tri
— Lci
N: N: N: r-s: N: N.: N: N: kri
—
A182Gr.F9A193Gr.B16 Spiral wound SS A 335GR. P9
A 691G R.9Cr CL.42
A358GR.304
Pipe
371 / 7.73Up to 24"
A 312 TP304
Up to 24"
Gasket
Spiral woundSS
120 / 15.32
PMS class data
I A320 GR.B8CL.2
Bolt

LIST A-8
I
A182 GR.F304
Flange
ILIST A-7
CD
C gia (.9
Z. 65 V Cal
a0 < <
I
Page 1393 of 1823

I
CO
33.8
mt o) al ..t en m v- a) as a 1- ( ai in C.) 00 . a- N CO . ICI IC N A A
Torque
t.: et A NI: er a-
kg-m
a). N. ,.- to to
STANDARDSPECIFICATIONNo.
Oei v- N. a; Ni a> a; oi N: t-: oi CCUoi 0)oi .- oi Li r.) a) .- O 1.0 CO CO CO

a- a• N N N at CO Ill 10 CO •r• a- ar. a- N Cal 9 V.• NI N N CO 1.0 I/1 A
2471
11379
5135
570
9574 I
6249
3020
8583
4109
4383
798
4246
5516
4520
5896
5068
4383
2837
9574
12644
Tension
01 C) to CO a- la4 N a- CO Of CO
Page 19 of35
01 et 01 Of a- al• CO A CO N 01 CO
NI• A CO C) 01 a- 0 0) 01 CO 01 10
kg
A CO 10 tO mr- N C.1 et Ill U) CO

O
O
O 4 co CO CO N
a-
N
e-
CM
a-
CO
a-
CO
a-
0
C\I
0
Cal
CO
CO
0
V'
Nt
Nt
CO
V'
0
INt
'It
NJ'
Nt .0- Nt Nt at OD CO CO Ca/
a-
Cal
a-
N
•-•
CD
a-
CO
1-
0
Cal
0
Cal
CD CFI 4- —
Z °
r CO
CD
1/2
I
7/8
5/8
5/8
3/4
3/4
CO CO N/ CO CO NI'
ay .0
7/8
7/8
0 C./ CO NI" .4* CO OD 7 '7 7 ‘r 't NI-
...., CO N Cal N CO NY 7 7 7
co u c 4.5 M Z.5 h N.. I-- N- .t-- •-• •L- C5 M r's ,.. .,-.. ,L- ;:i3 cn ,- .‘- ‘-. .L- ..,-
Calculation Data
14
I
I
I
Ni
Flange
inch
size
N NI' a-
10
18
36
CD
18
24
N 0 at
14
0 N ID 0 CO CO Cl N Nit
Nr (0 CO a- a.. a- Cal N N CO CO CO a-. CO a- Ca4 CO er CD CO N.• a- N Cal
1506I
I
I
Flange
(/) (/) (/) (/) (.0 (/) (/) CD (/) (/) 03 CO CO CO 03 U) CO CO CO CO U) CO V) CD CO V) CO CO CO CO Ci)
Std
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
u) in to U) in Lo an Lo 0 CO 10 U) U) U) 0 U)
'..'
U)
.l
0
v-
U)
e-
U)
,l .
U)
•••..
CO
,..
0
a-
0
l
-
U)
N-.
U)
,i .
U)
,l .
0
l
.--
0
a-
U)
.l .
U)
V.-
a-• a- a- a- ,,. ,I . <- e- ,l . ,l ,-. .t . ,l V- ,..
29.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
29.00
29. 00
29.00
29.00
0 0 0 C.) 0 0 0 C. C.) 0
kg/cm (g)
C. 0 0 0 0 CI
Pressure
0 0 0 0 0 C. 0 0 0 0 0 C. C) 0 0 C)
ai ai oi oi ai ai ai
Test
oi ai ai oi 0)
2
Cri. Oi ai 6
r
IN N Cal N Cal Cal Cal N Cal Cal Cal N Cal N N N
Cl) 0000000000000000 a- a- a- a- a- a- a- a- a- e•••• a- a--- a- a- a- ..-

IA CI C•4 N Cal N Cal N N Cal CM N Cal N Cal N Cal C \ I A A A Is A A A A A A A A A A A A
cl) E (.) a- a- a- a- a- e- a- a- a- e- 1- .1- a- a- e. e- VI Cr.) CO VI C) C) VI 01 CO CI C) el CO el C) C)
z 0 0 0
O F-
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
15.32
7.73
7.73
7.73
CO CO CO CO CO
kg/cm (g)
CO CO CO
Pressure
Cal N Cal Ca/ Cal N Cal C ... t Cal Cal Cal Ca1 N Cal N
0 CO CO C1 CO CO CO CO CO C.1 CO CO CO CO CO 01
16
A
r-: N:
Is A
N:
A
N:
A
N:
A A
N: N: N.:
A
2
Des
zz 00
„_.
U) U) U)
.,_
ID 0
.-- ..--0 U) U) 0 U)
..- ..-- .-- U) U)
.,-.
w A 312T P304L
A 312 TP304L
A 358GR.304 L
A 358GR.304L
CY
ce O Up to 24"
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
0 u_
U)
w u_ O
re 0 U)
A 358GR.304
Pipe
A 312TP304
az
z
z
z
a
CO
Spiral woundSS
Spiral woundSS
Spiral woundSS
V/
..Y
(a
0
371 / 7.73
371 /7.73
371/ 7.73
PMS class data
•
I
A193GR.B7
A193GR.B7
A193G R.B7
Bolt


I
I
A182GR.F304L
A182GR.F304L
A182 GR.F304
Flange
LISTA-9
I
CO (0)
in
:;c
NC
-
NC
co %-
.17(
<
E
a 0
I
Page 1394 of 1823

,...m.....
53.7I
r
Torque
11, et II, el: et. 1- (V Cl 10 Ill CV CO A A en I.. , 04 el
25.5
10
33.8
v-
35.2
`11' A VI act r,
kg-m
a- 04 Cal 01 0) a- Of r..: .- vi cli 16 ei ei ri CO T- ei ei 4 o) ‘-- oi e: CO C4
1.- ,0. N N CV VI el U) 10 Is a- e- N N 10
1426I
3020I
Tension
1141
4931
T70
798
2471
2562
3020
913
N 10 U1
6249
858 3
798
8583
570
11379
C•1
52
01 a- U) CO
6249
8583
01 a- N 0)
Page 20 of35
IN 01 N 0) a- A A 01 01 N 0) CO
0) e. CI CD CA a- 10
kg
el• 01
01 10 141 01 01 VII. in U) U) CO
N

O
O
O U) Q et V' `14- '4' Q CO CO C4 0/ 01 (.0 CO 0 0 .11' Q .:1' '0' et CO CO CO N N CO (0 0
..- — N N a- a- a- a- a- N
z 0 0
co
CD
I
.c co co .cr co CO
e- a- a-
7/8
5/8
5/8
3/4
N 01 N N
5/8
NN040/03 CO Nt NI• CO CO
Calculation Data
I
I
Flange
N N
inch
size
N at a- a-
3/4
CI N at CO CO Cal
20
Q 0 04 aer 40 CO 0
a- el a- r N el Mt tO 03 N a,... a- a- N rl V tO CO a- a- a- v. a- 04
Flange
co
150S
SOS
S09 1.
U1 CO C0 U) CD CO CO CO CO CO CO CD V) CO CO V) CI) CI) CO V) Cf) CO CI) CI) CI) CO CO
Std
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .0 0 000000000000000
10 111 111 U) U) U) 10 10 U) (0 U) 111 U) U) U) 11) 1.0 U) 1$) CO U) 10 U) U) U) U) UI U)
a- 1- .- r a- .- a- a- a- a- e- a- .- a- a- e-- a- a- e.- e- a- a- .l. l•-• a- a- a--
24.26I
24.26I
1
24.26.
29.00
29.00
kg/cm (g)
29.00
29.00
29.00
Pressure
29.00
0 0 0 0
29.00
29.00
29.00
0 0 0 CD CO CO CO CD CD 0 CD CO CD CD CD
0 0 0 0 0 CD 0 N Cal 04 CV 01 Cal 01 01 04 01 04 CV
•
Test
2
ai ai 0) ai ai ai ai 4 4 Ni 4 4 ni 4 4 4 4 4 4
01 01 CV N N N N N 01 N N N 04 0/ N N N 04 N
U
_
< N CI A 0- A A N. A A 1, - 0- 0- N- N. A A N- 0-
a-
A
a-
h-
e...
A
a-
N-
a-
A
e-
A r- A
a- .- a-
A A A
•-•
0-
a-
N-
11-•
A
V....
A
Z a) E o co el M el c) a) co el co 0) (.1 M in cr) 0) 01 el el 0) el e) c.) el el c.) on el M e) co 0)
0 Ci e °
LL ›. 0 I-
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
7.73
kg/cm (g)
el co 0) 01 el el el cl
7.73
el el el
7.73
7.73
Pressure
el el cl (.1 el el
7.73
7.73
LU el el 0)
0 A A N- A A A A A A A A A A- N- A A A A A A
2
Des
Z N: N: A N.: N N: hs: A N.: N.: N.: N; N: N.: I,: N: t.: t•••: rs: r•••:
• < <
W —I
LL u-
A358 GR.316
A 182 GR.F316 A193GR. B7 Spira l woundSS A 312 TP316
a a cc
A 312TP316L
A 358GR.316L
Up to 24"
o
• o
Z
re IL
00 (7
N)
Pipe
< Z
• 0 LLJ
Z 01
01
< 0
0-
_1O D
am
Gasket
Spira l wou ndSS
M
371 / 7.73
rs.
PMS class data
I A193 G R. B7
Bolt
PMS ratedTemperature / Pressu re

I
A 182 GR.F316L
Flange
0
LISTA-11
<
13) 0) 1-
_,
c 0) sn 2 Z
a tv 7, —
it o 4:( .7.7c
I
Page 1395 of 1823

206.5I
22.5I
01
Torque
01 N 0 0 CO 1••• (11 CO CO 03 at 03 at CV tD 0! Of Of 0 a- 10 CV 10 N 0 0 CO Ps
kg-m
U)
CO N to 46 s- ts: is.: csi r-: a) N Lei BO .- CO st oi oi si O P.: O v.; t-- N cO .- t.:
is. ,r- e- DI 01 Mr I's to t. co Of sr co co ..- Po sr —,— Ps a-
a- a- ,r a- CV Cal N
741
6-76-0002Rev. 3
24392
I
1373
1647
5205I
11801I
18168
25154
11379
17849
18487
2740
2105
23630
14330
13065
13065
10958
3972
5205
8748
8913
7608
2740
29631
11554
Tension
2105
03 P. 1, a-
Page 21 of35
0 0)
CO ar-
kg
a.- a- ID
a...

I
0 0 0 0 0 CO 03 CO Cal CV CO CO Co 0 0 •0 0 CV CO CO CV CO CV CO (0
• 4+ ..- a- a- .- CV CV CV CV Cal 01 el 01 0) 01 tt1 CI 0 ty)
0 ..- —
z 0 0
CO
5/8
I
.r
... as .c co CO 0 0 0' CV 0 0 CO CV N CO CO CO 0
a- a- I- a- a- a- e- a- CI a- a- i() 01 to 01 CO CO NI'
3/4
N CO CO 0 0 CO CV
0 — 0 CO 0 1111111.1111 ii
...) ii
.3 (....5.
M 0 .0 to to c%3 to f7 el :
F, l'''' e- 1- e- 1- e- e- a-- e- 1- 1-
Calculation Data
I
I
j
Flange
C4 CV
inch
size
3/4
0 v-.
14
18
20
---, 0 N CD et (0 00 CD CV 'V CO CO 0 CV
-
01 el 01 C") C') V r a- a- N
N
.a• a- a- CV CV N V
a,
VI a- a- N 01 V CO 03
300B
I
I
Flange
&IOC
SON
son
SC:1£
sooc
SOOC
sooc
U) (1) (1) U) CO CD U) U) CO V) U) 03 CO CO CO 03 03 CO CO U) CD
Std
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
in 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
V') el (,) c") C., VI C., el V) el Cl) el C') V') 01 C') C") Cr) 0) Cr)
79.10
79.10
79.10
79. 10
79.10
79.10
79.10
79.10
79.10
24.26
79.10
79.10
kg/cm (g)
0 0 0
Pressure
0 0 0 0 CD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
..-- e- a- a- a-- a- a..-- a- a- •t' ,r". l"." ,1— `,.
oi ai oi oi ai oi ai oi cri ai ai oi ai to a) a) ai ai oi
Test
2
r- Ps I,- N- N. I,- N. N- r- r- r-- n N- N. I,- N. P.- N- Is-
r
r.-- Ps r- N- N. N- N. N- N.. N- N- I,- N- N. Ps N-. N. I,- n N- N. N- Ps 1,- N-
(V
Ps.
N
I,
CV
- N-
CV
I,
N
- N...
CV
0 ti N N CV N N CV CV CV N N (V N CV CV CV CV CV CV N CM CV CV CV CV
p
mE 0 v.) 0 •tt V '0 0 '0 0 0 .0 V 0 0 V 0 0 V st V 0 0 0 0 4t V 0 0 •V• 0 `CP V
a) s
i-
28.82
28.82
7.73
kg/cm (g)
CV CV Cal CV CV CV CV N CV CV CV CV
Pressure
CV CV CV CV CV 01 CV Cal CV N CV CV CV N CV N
CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO 03 CO COCO CO CO CO CO CO CO 03 00 C00003C0C0
ai 6 CO 6 CO
2
CO cd 6 CO oi 6 6 od
Des
CO CO CD Co 03 Co 03 03 6 cd 6 CO cc> co op
CV CV CV CV (V Cal CV Cal CV N N 0,1 CV CV CV N Cal N CV N CV CV CV CV CV CV N CV
A193 Gr.B7M Spiral woundSS A106Gr.B

Spiral woundSS A106 GR.B
A106 GR.B
A 106GR.B
A 106GR.B
A333Gr.6
A672G R.B60 CL.12
A672 GR.B60CL. 12
A 672GR.B60CL.12
A 672G R.B60 CL.12
A 672GR.B60CL.12
A_ 672GR.B60 CL.12
A672 GR.B60CL.22
A671Gr.CC60CL.32
A672GR.B60CL.32
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
Up to 3"
A106 GR.B
A106 GR.B
Pipe
A106 GR.B
A106 GR.B
Up to 24"_
Gasket
Spiral woundSS
Spiral woundSS
Spiral woundSS
Spiral woundSS
Spiral woundSS
Spiral woundSS
Spiral woundSS
Spiral woundSS
427 / 28.82
427 / 28.82
230 / 43.66
427 / 28.82
427/28.82
427 / 28.82
427/28.82
CV N 01
CO CO CV
03 03 Cti
PMS class data
CV CV 0
...., -.....
I,- (-- sr
tV CV 0
V st CV
A193G R.B7
A193GR.B7
A193GR.B7
A193GR.B7
A193 GR.B7
A193GR.B7
A193GR.B7
A193 GR.B7
A320Gr.L7
Bolt


PMS rated Temperature / Pr essure


I A350Gr.LF2CL.1
0
0/
C
01
LL
A105
in
A105
41 41 41 41
O 0 0 0 0
I
0 0 0
1- ,- N—
LIST B-1
< <
CO
CA tn < < <
C in < < < < < (/) <
o. go ,_ Cal ID CD 01
el
l-
OF
%-
CV
el Tr
tD
Mi M 03 03 00 m
FL 0
I
Page 1396 of 1823

75.4 I
,,,..
75.41
Torque
a• 1- U) Oa •
22.5
N MI 10 CO VI 11' CO CI (1) Cl 0) 0) 0 N l's 0 CI 1- 1... (11 0) (0 et a$ Cl et
kg-m
is: oi ts: Oi cai oi a- cia .4. a; cy; Ti oi ri ui ei oi ci tti cai .4: a; .-
.1... CV N V) 11' I, U) 100)11 . 0:1C0a- ay. N N V) U) V. 11 CO CO 0 4 1"..-
a- 1-- a'
C)
17849 1
15197
747-1
10958
14751
14330
Tension
3972
8913
6205
11554
5205
11801
17849
13065
10958
10958
7608
8748
13065
11801
11885
2196
5205
9574
9498
I, Is Nt if 10 CO (V
Page 22 of 35
a) a 11' 1- Of 0 N CV
kg
0 CO 0 I's N V.1 CV
a- a- VI et ill I, CV
.,.
C•1

O
O 0) CO CO N N CO CO 0 0 'CY NI- .4- IN CO CO •Ch 'CY 'cl' '1' CO CO CO Cs1 01 CO CO 0 0 '1' •11' "I' C)1 CO
CO Z ° 0
e- e- e- I- CV N N CV N C1 C1 VI a-- .- a-- l
.... N N N N N 01 C3
M
CO
I
I
..0
CO CO '1' 11' `1' Cal 11' 13' CO CO CO .(1' 11' 11' N 1/ `0
a- e- a- v- CI N CO CO
3/4
7/8
a- a-- e- a- .4-
3/4
3/4
0 ,....
.- 0 't _.,
V ,.... ...... ...... c,,s
V' CO a- a-- a- e-- ••-• l
.... V.. l
...
Ca " .c cn 't ... ,I.... ,,- N- ,r- 'l . 1

... e. 1-. C., i'
":: N... a- a- a- v- a- a- a- a-
Calculation Data
10
Flange
OA
inch
size
N
14
20
O N CO CO 11' 02 CO 0 CV v. 40 03 0 et CO CO
VI 1/' CO CO v• a- a- a- CV N N VI a- a .v. 1".• CV 01 1, (.0 CO ., a•-• v• CV N CV N
L
rsooc
I
Flange
79.10I 300B
S00£-
WOE
SOOE
sou1
SOK
son
SOU
S00£
S00£
SOOE
CO CO CO CO CO Cr) CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO
Std
CO CO CO CO CO CO
0 0 0 0 a a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 o o o 0
0 o 0 0 0 o a o 0 o a o a o o 0 o 0 0 o
el cn el co cn VI C') el 01 01 01 C3 03 VI 01 C3 01 03 C') C')
79.10]
79.10
I
63.28
L79.10
79.10
79.10
kg/cm (g)
79.10
Pressure
6 3.28
0 0 0 CD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
a- a- a-. a- v- a- a- e-- ,,- ,.-. a- e-- a- a- a- ,- a- a- ,r- a- a- a- a-
Test
Of Oi cri ai oi
2
oi oi oi oi oi cri oi a; ai oi oi cri oi oi oi oi oi oi
r--. r.- F- N. N. r-. 1-.- F- r-- N- r•-• N. N- N. F- N- N.. N. N. N.. F- N- c-.
I- F- N. N. N. N- r-- N- N- N.. N. N. F- N. COC0000003C003030303COC0000303000303

(1) aNV( CVN CVNNNCVNNCVN N C1 01 01 (1 03 01 03 C3 C3 C7 01 03 01 C3 C3 C') 01 01
1) E (..) act- st .4- Tr .4- Tr -.3- .4- .4- NI- .4- Tr .4- .4- 10 to 10 1.0 If) to tO III LO 42") LO If) If) 1.0 10 113 10 10
a 0
11--
28.82
28.82
12.09
kg/cm (g)
Pressure
N CV CI1 N CV N CV CV N N N N a-- e- a- ...- e- a- v- a- e- a- a- a- a- a- a- a-- 0)

CO CO 03 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO a- ar- a- a- a- a- a- a- a- a- a- ,t...- ',. .‘
. .l...
.
.,- 0
2
Des
Co Co co (0 Ocai
CO ad co 05 cad co ari tri to la to ui in U) in an U) in U) cn Lc) in N
N N N N NCV N CVNNNCV a-. e- a- a-
A193 Gr. B16 Spiral wound SS A335Gr. P11 e- a- •%. .‘. .l . ,L . a- a- N- ,M. ‘r. e- •,.
Spiral woundSS A 335 GR.P5
A 182 GR.F5A193GR.B16 Spiral woundSS A 335GR.P5

GR5CR CL.42
Gr.1.25Cr CI.42
A 691Gr. 5CR CL.42

A672 Gr. B60CL.22
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
538/ 14.06Up to 24"
a
A691 Gr.1.25Cr C 1.42
Spiral woundSS A335Gr. P11
0
A691
A691
538/ 15. 11
538/ 15. 11
538 / 14.06
Gasket
PMS class data
I A193Gr. B16
CD
,-
Bolt
03
0
C3
0)
<
A 182GR. F5
A182 Gr. F11 Cl. 2
0
Flange
a-
11
0
(NI
CO
LISTB-3
.
",
i
al en
C 01 Ci C) 11 U.
en sr
ei C.) CO CO CO
I
Page 1397 of 1823

21.31
23.1I
8 7.01
252.3I
124.2I
Torque
134.6
CO10
M at N N U) (01 0 1, N at a- 0) 0 U) a- 0) .0 a- 0.1 N N 10 0) e-
kg-m
.0: 0; C.i Vi 0 c•i mi ui 4 co vi of) U) co 4 ci .ct 0 ‘- a- N 0 CO 0 a; ci
O) N ..-- o.) co .- N 01 10 P. W. 00 0 U) CO U) 0 Col CO CM 0) CO
a- a- t V. a. a- N e- N
11801
12215
15173
1830
13625
28 733
13065
23630
22868
15937
17212
22105
19819
855
18487
7418
11801
a- N
Tension
12644
1098
16574
1.- 1.-
15299
10234
2288
26937
9748
0)
Page 23 of35
0 0. '10 co co 4 N4 sr
in 0) N 0) el in co
kg
N v- co 4 to so .-
a- 01 N
CNA
Copyrights EIL -All rights reserved

O
0 CO NI CO N (0 CO oo co co N rs1 CO CO 0 0 at at at N CO CO NJ CO N CO 0 (0
O • O ...-. NIC•IN,CIVIst 01 a- e- a- a- CNINCVNNMVIC,)C,)r )Cr )C') 'Cr CI
co -—
0
z
Z 0
co
co
5/8
5/8
CONNC00003at 03 CO at at at N at at CO N N 03 CO CO at
CO •C
€.)Cal a-- a- Lt? 1.0 11") NI x-- 1- I- x- a- x- a- x- (33 x- a- If) CO Co V)
5/8
0 •,:t NI• CO
3/4
ea , . I
N at
V- .- an '
63 ..
C.3 i:::: l- A- a- a- a- a- a- V- a- a- A- a- a-. a- a- a-
Calculation Data
40
10
30
40
Flange
0.11
inch
size
e-
3/4
01
U)
14
N
34
N
30
38
Nair 0 00 N 03 0 at CO 00 41)
C0 NI NI (a) 'Ct ..- a- a- N Col at U) CO a- a- a- N N OA N CI NI at
Flange
SOU
SOOE
SOOE
SOOE
SOOE
SOW
SOOE
800E
03 03 CO CO 03 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO 03 CO 03 CO 03 CO CO CO
Std
0 0 0 0 cp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CD 0 0 0 0 0 0 CD
cocorococoroco co to co co co co co cocnincorocom ro co co
79.10
79.10
79.10
63.28
63.28
63.28
63.28
63.28
79. 10
63.28
kg/cm (g)
co co CO co o o o o o o o o o cp co 000000303 CO CO
Pressure
a- a- a- a- a•-• a- a-- a•-• a-
-
N N NI C0 N NI N C4 N N
a
Test
2
(,) Ca) ri cO a; oi ai oi ai oi oi oi ai oi 0) oi ei ri c6 ei c•-i (6

co (0 CO CO N- rs N. N- N- N- N- N- N . N- N- N- CO CO CD CO CD CO
1
00
C0030303C003 coc000coco co co co co cocoo3 co cococoo3cocococ000 coco co
U) O. co rocorocoroco meilinci3r-icor-intnincninciltncnen(ilcoincocomincnin
ili E 0 in in io in in in in in IC) LO IC) LO LC) LC) WO in in in ic) in in LO LO LO LC) in iri LO IC) LC) LO LC)
00
0 t-
18.63
12.09
12.09
14.90
18.63
18.63
12.09
18.63
o) n
12.09
12.09
el el v.> or)
12.09
kg/cm (g)
el el el co el el cq o o co o o o o o
Pressure
0 CO CO CO CO CO (0 CO CO CO CO CD CO 0) CY) CY) 0) 01 0) 0) CD
CO
2
Des
N CO Co CO CO CD co oci cci co cci CD 4 4 •l 4 4 4 4 4

Spiral woundSS A335G R.P9
Gr.2.25Cr Cl.42
GR9CR CL.42
Spiral woundSS A335Gr. P22
538 / 17,92 Up to 24"

538/ 18.63Up to 24"
Pipe
A691
A69 1
1 )..
-10
1/1
01
C9
PMS class data
A193 GR.B16
A193 Gr. B16
Bolt
PMS ratedTemperature-/ Pressure

LLI
WJ T
Z <
A 182GR. F22CL. 3
Flange
A 182GR. F9
I
co
co 0 t-
a
_ 0 0 w C9
o. co _i
m
E. 0
Page 1398 of 1823

. I
sr r- Tr r.. .4. el 0) ps:
54
Torque
INI et N. ID U3 Co (0 CO CD CA et CD N. CI a- CO CV N. el ID el 0
kg-m
O ctS coli a; U) N ei Is:
,- (4 .1): a; c; .- v.; 4 a; sti ei .- N 4 ad %- t.: 6 r-: r.: ci N a; •-. 03
a- e- a- N CV et et CO 43 I, e- e- e- e- V) .1, In N. I,-
a-
3561
8851
11379
14662
1464
6933
11379
798
4945
10537
2740
570
9574
2466
5249
3150
1281
1281
Tension
el el
915
3972
1464
N et CD ID 03
3
Page 24 of35
0) U) 01 et CD 0 CO CD
CO1 ID
er- N CO ts a- 0 et N CO
kg
CV ts. 03 N N et CD Is CO CV
e-
CSC
Copyrights EIL — A ll rights reserved

O
O (a et et et et CO CO CO Cel CV CD CD 0 CD et ett et et et et et 00 CO OD CV CV CD CD •gr
• •-•
0 e- —
CNINNNN N N N CV
CD z 0 0
ti CO
CO
5/8
5/8
5/8
.." 03 .c co co •cs. et et CV CO CO et et et
— ,L-. ,-. „-
5/8
3/4
ge .,. ,,.
3/4
0 CV et et et et CO CV CO CO et et CO
-c
75. ....o
in .0 .- CO M co, -i-:: ,- ‘- . ‘- .1- ,- V' - to
i .b
.. i zi
. (
7 )
. p...
... ,L .
Calculation Data
Flange
N Cel
inch
size
3/4
N et N e-
0 N et CO CO 0
20
0 N et CO CO et
e- C+) e- el N Cel et (0 03 e- a- e- a- e- N e- e- a- N Col et tO CO 1- e- a- v- a- N
300S
Flange
U) co U) U) CO CO U) U) U) U) 0)
SOOE
SOOE
SOU
S00£
Soot
SOU
SON
SON
U) U) U)
S00£
S00£
S00£
SON
S00£
U) U)
Std
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C.,) CO PI Cc) C., CO VI CI V) CI CO (e3 C') V) CI VI
75.93
75.93
75.93
75.93
63.27
63.27
75.93
r- r•-• r- r- 63.27 r- r- r-
kg/cm (g)
Pressure
I,- N- 1,- N- N. I,- VI CI el Ce3 CO CO C') tel CO VI

CV C,I CNI Cs/ CV CV CV Cel CV CV CV CV N CD 03 CD 0 CD Cb CD Ch 4:31 al
Test
U) ui U) U) U) U)
2
CO CD Vi C6 CO ei ei CD ri ei el ri ei ui 6 ui wi
N-
CO C co CD CO CO co C CD co CD CD CD N-• N. Ns N- I,- N. N. Iss. ts•
C)
< N.
N
N- N.
N
N. N. I,- N.
N
t•-• N.
N
ts- N.
N
I", I,-
N
I,- N.
N N
ts et et et et et et et et et v et v et et et
03 C CV CV CV CV CV CV CV CV 0 CD CD CD CD 0 0 0 0 CD 0 0 CD 0 0
Z rp E C.) et et et et et et et et et et et et et et et et 1,-. N. ts• N- N. N. N- N- N- N. N- N.- 1,- N. N-
•0 ›-O I-
5.97
5.97
24.25
5.97
5.97
Z
5.97
5.97
kg/cm (g)
5.97
Pressure
CO U) U) U) U) CD CO U) U) U) CO tO U) U) U) N. N. N- N. N- N- N- N-
0 CI
OCR CV Ck/ CV CV CV CV CV CV CV CV CV CV CV CV CV 01 03 0) CD CM CA
6 6
CD 0)
Z 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 tri 6 iti U)
2
Des
V et et et et 6 ui
CV CV N N CV CV N CV N N CV N CV N N
< <
W -J
427 / 24.25Up to 24"
A193 GR. B7 Spira l wou ndSS A 312TP304L
5 a r‘
Up to 24"
704 /8.08Up to 24"

la IX 0
• 0 u_ A358TP316L CL. 1
(1) z
A358TP304L CL. 1
A358TP304 CL. 1
o (-0
O LI- 7.) I
Pipe
A 312 TP304H
-cr
Spira l wou ndSS A 312TP304
A193 G R.B7 Spira l woundSS A 312TP304
< Z Z 0
En
ILJ 0_
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
Z r-
cm
I— < _1 C")
V) 0
o <
m
Spiral woundSS
Gasket
Spiral woundSS
NI-
454 / 27.77
-
704/8.08
0
PMS class data
et
......
CD
CV
,..
A453GR.660CL.A
A453 GR.660CL.A
A320GR.B8CL.2
Bolt

PMS ratedTemperatu re / Pressure

A 182GR.F304H
A 182 GR. F304L
A 182 GR.F304H
A 182 GR.F304
A182 GR. F304

Flange
I LIST B-6
I LISTB-5
C
c u.) IC Y Y IC Y
a. (0 e- CV
a)
et ID
ii 0
CO CO CO
I
Page 1399 of 1823

132.0 I
Torque
5.0
at 10 el el et at N 0) CV 10 1--: 0 co t.: N N N et U) A: U) A AO .- U) 10 V (0 AO ID
kg-m
Cii Oi I- 4 cn Of en oi ci to .- eci a; 10 T" es: I.: ad O.
- I-: to csi csi (%i ai .- cc; ai
N A a) C) N N A A A V) a- a- .- N rl 10 et CO A A A CO N e- U)
a- N a- e- a-
2058 1
M
11801
16256
19819
10537
8253
7593
1556
1373
570
5706
10537
1373
2603
3972
15937
15937
15937
10537
12577
14981
17913
Tension
0) tel N N 01 et. el A a- cl
Page 25 of 35
a- et 0) A 01 0) Cc) a) a
a) 00 a- a- 01 01 ID N co t- el
kg
0) to N co ac Ch CV 0 a- et
a- N a- a- a- e-
Cs1
Copyrig hts EIL — All rig hts reserved

O
I
O
O y) et CV CO CO N CO el CD 0 CD et et et et CO 00 03 N CV 0 tO 0 0 et et 4 css CO CO N CO el
N co e) cc) el V) cc) el et C,1 1- A- 1- x- N N N N CV VI VI el C') C') M
t0 "" ••
"
Z ° °
03
CD
7/8
I
I
CV et et c0 CV N 03 c0 U) 4 co co 4 4 CV et et c0 el CV a)
.0
5/8
a- 11)
3/4
a- a- a- a- e- to LC) c0 el N CO et CO et et
I
6 • I I I
M
03 C in el in CO
Calculation Data
12
10
Flange
ed
inch
size
el et e-•
14
18
et (0 a) 0 CV cOCOON tD 0 et to a) 0 N et c0
N N N Cl) r) V1 Cr) et et a- C') T- .- N C') et 10 03 N Cl N N C0 r) cl r)
300BI
Flange
sooc
sooc
CO CO CO CO CO CO CD 03 133 CO 03 CO
S00£
CO m m CO CO CO CO CO CO W CO 01 CO CO CO
Std
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 o cp
C') cn r) el col el el el el el el el ol 0
el el el el el C') el el el el C') el el el
60.82
60.82
60.82
75.95
75.95
60. 74
75.95
60.74
60.74
60.74
60.74
kg/crn (g)
U) al Ul Ul ul 10 10 N N N
Pressure
C°) et et et U) IC) al U) al U)
0) A A A A 0) 01 0) 0) 0) 0) 01 0) CI) CI) 0) 0) 0) CO c0 U)
Test
in to Lc) ai eri Uri ai to Uri Uri Uri Uri Uri ci ci 0

2
u-) ci 6 ci o
A al CO CO CO N- A A A A A A A A 1-- r- A N- CO CO cD
U
.73
< al ti
et et
0 0
et
o o o o
V' et et v
0
V*
o o o
et et c0
co
c0 CO c0 CO
co co co en co co co co co co co co (.1 eil l") t") el co co co co
c0 c0 c0 c0 c0 CO CO CO CO c0 c0 c0 c0
U)
c0 c0
to
c0 c0
r‘ z 0 E0 A A A A N- A N- A N- A a) c0 10 ID 10 LO LO LO ID ID tO LO 10 LO ID cr) 10 al a) al
0 — CI 0
I—
4.78
4.78
4.78
4.78
Z = hi'
26.66
o3 a) co co
kg/cm (g)
el CO VI VI Cr)
A358TP316CL.1
t- CO CO CO el
Pressure
a3 CO a) CO CO CO CO 03 CD CO CO CO CO
O — 0) N- A A A A CO 0 CO CO CO CO CO CO CD CO CO CO CO CO CO c0 cil 10 10 1.0 1.0
•Z co CD (0 Co co co 0 0 0 0 0 0
2
cc) co co (0 (0 CD co CD cci
Des
10 "5: 4 4 v 4
N N CV N CV N CV N CV N N CV CV N CV CV el N CV N N
<< <
O W -J
[ A312TP316H
A 312 TP321
LL U-
• Ce
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
▪ LI" 0
0. 0 Um
A 358TP321CL.1
• Z
12" 0
IX
CI0 (
7 ) a)
A 312TP316
< Z
° Z W
Up to 24"
Z
1
4! <
• .j
o
m
a.
Gasket
Spiral woundSS
Spira l woundSS
Spiral wou ndSS

538/ 25.66
538/ 24.60
427 / 29.52
PMS class data
A453 GR.660C L.A
A453G R.660CL.A
A193G R.B7
Bolt
0
PMS ratedTemperature / Pressu re
Format No. 8-00-000 1-F7Rev. 0
z
I
'(
Z °
A 182GR.F316H
A 1 82 GR.F316
A 182 GR.F321
Flange
a)
C
fft as ,- el to
J ca in
ii 0
I
Page 1400 of 1823

214.4I
I- 0) 0
Torque
45.5
(0 0) 0: at A U) at U3 CO CO CO U3 at 10 0) U) U) A
50.7
at C) 4... 03 at U) CD
kg-m
uS a> T- (4 4 GO iti c; •‘- ei 4 cri en 46 ci CO ai N ui tr: ai ‘- N ui ci ,,i .- a;
ca U) I-a-a-NN at CO CO A a- a- e- N 01 CO 0 0 N
a- a- e- a- a- a...
3112I
45201
14751 I
14662
v
18294
1281
Tension
915
1464
228 97
8861
11379
3150
12875
5249
7263
2466
970
tO O N 0 SO 01 se 01 01 10 CO CO •••••
Page 26 of 35
LU O A 0)
.- er el ot r....- o N 0) MI a)
0 U) r- a) 0) to 01 0 N N 0) A N
kg
CL C)
.-
N Cal et tO 0) a... N 10 A CO at r-
e-
.-
C•I

O
L
cv CO CD CO tt at .4t at co co CO N CS) CD U3 0 CD at at at al' at at at CO 03 CO 04 01 CO 0 0
O • 4+ ta) a t' 01 s- a-a-s-CNINNNN a-a-a-CNN
co 0 's" —
Z ° CO
0
ti
to
3/4
5/8
.., co CO st c0 c0 ‘r N CO at at 03
U) 10 V) at CO Nr at ct co
5/8
N 03
5/8
N 03 at CO s- s- 7 C?
co C .- v- ,- 01 U) 01 01 0) A • 1ni;i 1.
-:
Calculation Data
3/4
Flange
04 N
inch
size
04 at s- N•e-
CO 0 IN
20
C) 01 at VD CO CD CU at
01 at at a••• C-7-
1 ,r. a- 04 01 at U) CO ..... N a- a- a- N 0) at CO CO a- I- %-
Ison
Flange
MMM MM U) M M
S00£
S009
S009
S009
CO CI) CI) U) CI) CD CI) U) CO CI) WWWWW WWW
Std
cra0 00 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 0 o o o o o
0 0 0 0 o o o o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
C7 r•-) 0-) el cn r.) cnelmcnrommelr-)com (0 CO CO CO CD U3 CO (0 (0
63.27
63.27I
156.08
156.08
156.08
156.08
63.27
156.08
156.08
156.08
156. 08
156.08
60.82
kg/cm (g)
156.08
63.27
Pressure
N N
156.08
A A A A A A A A A A A A CO
CO CO Cs4 N N 01 N CS/ CV 01 N OA 04 N 0
cid 66 66666666
Test
66 CO
2
CO CD CD CO CD CO CO CD CO CO CO CD CO 03 U)
U
< CO CO Co at at at at at 'at al• at V' •ct at at at A A A A A A A r-, r- r- r- r-

V) 0. 01 01 01 3 U) U) U) U) U) U) U) (C) to (t) U) in Li, In Lo N CSINCsINNOINNO4N01
E C, to u) to a NI- at at at '0 at at al* at at at at at at at at 'V at at at V at at at at al* at
0 0 0 i-
a) *
• 0
23.90
23.90
23.90
23.90
23.90
A358TP 316LCL.1 23.90
23.90
A 358TP 316LCL.1 23.90
58.00
58.00
58.00
23.90
23.90
58.00
58.00
58.00
58.00
58.00
58.00
58.00
Z X uj
—) co o o o o o
kg/cm (g)
20.53
Pressure
el
O 0 U) U) 0) 0) a) a) 0 a) 0 c)
czt 6 666
2
Des
Z N c4 N csi 04 04 Cal
ei
Cs!
cocd
10 cil
et < <
O W
A193GR. B7 Spira l wou ndSS A 106GR. B

A193GR. B7 Spira l woundSS A 106G R.B
Spira l wou ndSS A 106GR. B

A193 G R.B7 Spira l woundSS A 106GR. B
A 672 G R. B60CL. 12
A672GR. B60CL.12
A 672GR.B60CL. 12
A 6 72G R. B60CL.32
Spira l wou ndSSA 312TP316L
re
454 / 23.90 Up to 24"
427 / 58.00 Up to 24"
427 / 58.00 Up to 24"
230 /86.96 Up to 24"
427 / 58.00 Up to 24"

Z.5
• oreu_
o
co z
IL 0
Le0 cu
Spira l woundSSA 312 TP316L
< Z Z _
0 0 LU
Z
N
< 0
Q
• :3 0 D
am
427 / 24.25
11-
Gasket
PMS class data
B7
A 182GR.F316L A193GR.B7
A182G R. F316L A1 93 G R.B7
-
PMS rated Temperatu re / Pressu re
PMS rated Temperature / Pressu re
GR.
PMS ratedTemperatu re / Pressu re

1 A193
Flange
U) U) (0
A105
0 0 0
CO 0
O l- I--
C w
m 0 Z Z W Q
..._ < < <
a. — . c... . tr,
CO a a 0
E. 0
Page 1401 of 1823

226.5I
354.2
643.2I
233.2I
343.7I
233.2
Torque
Ae..
CO CO CO ,• et 0) 03 IR .41: 10 ep AO CI) A CD 10 10 Ps CO 03
kg-m
STAN DARDSPECIFICATION No.
O Of M Of .- CO ed ID N 11) ur- a .— N iri ci 6 v- .- oi c; a
Is v.) to CO CO CI CO a- v..NC•111303CIONACI
a- N N co CO 40 CO a- a- e.. a- N
14751
1373
12875
8998
34482
55895
4520
39708
26679
17294
Tension
27441
14751
2667 9
25917
A CI A et N A ICI CO N
21037
0 ID CO N
CI CO N CO et in a) Ir.- .- a- 0 N
0 Ps ID CO CIN a- 0) a- N CV
kg
CO 10 01 et a- CO N el IC) A
N N 01 V' it) 1/1 CO

L
0 0 0 et et CO CO CO CO et CO CO CV 00 et et et et CO CO 03 CV N CO 0 0 0 0 et et
• 4-. CV CV N CV CV CV CV CV CV CV N Col CV e- e- e- Cs1 N Cs1 N N N
0 e'' —
z 0 0
CO
NCOCOCOCOet CO et et V' et N 03 V' et CO N CO 03 03

63 •C .to r-. to rq r-. .- .r-
0 a) co .a a:) .a %- to r-
7/8
O U) N
03 b c ' N N N N N N IC) to CI 1.0 CI
Calculation Data
42
18
18
20
30
40
38
Flange
N
inch
size
N et U) N V' er.
26
CO CO 0 N et CO 0 et
M VI CI a- U) a- a- N VI at CO CO a-. a- a- a- N N
1
Flange
mm
600S
S009
9009
9009
S009
0) (/) C0 03 mm mm C/) Cf) CO (/) U) (/) U) C/) CD (/) V) CO (/) CD
Std
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CD CD 0 0 0 0 CD 0 0 CD 0 0 0 0 CD 0
0 CD CD 0 CD 0 0 0 0 CD 0000000000 0000
CO CD CD CD CD CO CO CO CO CD CD CD CD CO CO CO CO CO CD CD CD CD CD CD
147.0 5
156.08
147.05
147.05
156.08
147.05
147.05
147.05
147.05
147.05
147.05
147.05
147.05
147.05
124.90
156.08
124.90
124.90
124.90
124.90
kg/cm (g)
124.90
CO
Pressure
147. 05
CD 0 0 If) 1.0 01
0 01 0) 0) 0 0 0
Test
Tr r-: r- r-:
2
CD et et
Tr Tr
N
tC)
CV CV et
‘,... ,--
C.)
Zi
r, r- h. r- r- r- r- r- r-
1100< E-0Z co O.
0 E 0
CI ID °
N N
.4- et
Is- Is-
N CV
et et
Is- A
N CV N CV N N N CSI N
Tr Tr Tr Tr Tr Tr Tr Tr Tr
et 1
, et et 'I' et V' et V' V' '1' V' et et et et
000000CD 000000000
N Cs/ N CV N Cs/ N CV N N CV N CV CV CV Csl
} I-
86.47
86.47
86.47
86.47
86.47
86.47
58.00
58.00
46.40
46.40
86.47
58.00
46.40
Z
kg/cm (g)
86.47
46.40
46.40
46.40
Pressure
86.47
86.47
000 0 et V' `ct et et NI: '1' Nt et
17- z z cci co
2
co ai co
Des
IC) Tr Tr Tr co co O
CO ao co co
<
o w
A1 93GR. B7M Spiral wou ndSS A 106G R.B
A333GR.6
A1 93GR.B7 Spiral woundSS A 106 GR.B
A 671 GR. CC60C L. 32

A 6 72G R.B60CL.22
A672GR. B60CL.22
Up to 24"
a r‘
u.
w re
00
.
u) z
i' 0
L
%.1
Pipe
< Z Z
L1J
427 / 58.00 Up to 24"
204/ 86.47 Up to 24"
Z
< <
N -0
m
a.
Gasket
A320GR. L7 Spiral woundSS

427 / 58.00
PMS class data
Bolt

A350GR.LF2CL. 1
Flange
rj.
0
0
,_ —
LISTD-2
as on < <
c us CO CT)
<
15. e- a-
0
EL 0
I
Page 1402 of 1823

253.21
233.21
433.4 I
285.91
55.0
3.3
38.8
23.7
oto a-
Torque
0 e... VI .v. a- CO CO CO N Col CO 0 10 UI N IX) I, ,- •- CO CO
kg-m
4
STANDARDS PECIFICATION No.
iri cc; C. ci cc; ri a a n n: oci oti 4cri .- ri id a; 16
N
CO
.-- a... N VI ICI a- 0 VI ts. V CD S CO 03 N a- CO
a- am. a- a- N V) VI CO CO
1373
1255
5479
13535I
21674I
21961
94981
1084
30529
9748
26679
7798
28966I
4246
15594
35527
55895
3478
4657
N
Tension
40911
E.
CO
VI N CO Co) N at CO a- ICI
Page 28 of 35
O) V CI et 0 Is. 03 10 Is. VI
N VI t... VI N 10 CO 4/3 atl• ID
kg
VI 10 ts. CO 00 CO CO CO a- N VI
N VI .C, a-
Cs11

O
O
O 40) at 4 ..4- -4- co co co N CNC CD 0 0 0 0 `4* •gr CO CO CO CO NI• CO V' ir 'I' at CO CO CO CV N
‘- ‘- ‘-- NNNCNINNOINNNNN L- 1--
<0 o 12
z 0 0
ti CO
5/8
7/8
CO
ei..0
N
I5/8 CO at Tr
co
a-
•Cf
a-
,a-
a--
CO
VI
N
a-
CO CO CO CO
LO It) I,- LC)
'a
el
CO
I,-
‘f
.1-.
..a
.1- N OD X) .4' CO •Ct CO
CO
1--
0 -... 0 iii -(...-3 -,..,.)
,
to C
— ..- <- .- a- a- e- a- a- a- a- a- a- a- (\1 N N . - a) .1
" 6 co ;13 co i7"----
Calculation Data
I
Flange
N CV
inch
size
Am.
3/4
3/4
CV a- N
12
14
36
0 COCOOVQ3000Nal.
a- a- a- N CI at tO 00 a.- .w.
a-NNCVNVI VIVI e- a-a-Nelar (003
600S
Flange
u) co co u) co u) co co mm u) co u) cn u) co u) u)
8009
S009
U) CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO
Std
0 0 c) 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 o o o 0 0 a a 0 co a o a 0 a a 0 o a
a cp a ca o co cp a o o a cp 0 a a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a a
co a CO CO CO CID CO CD CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CID CO CO CO CD CO CO CO CO CO CD
158.201
126.56
158.20
158.20
158.20
158.20
158.20
126.56
158.20
158.20
158.20
158.20
158.20
158.20
158.20
158.20
158.20
158.20
158.20
126.56
158.20
158.20
126.56
158.20
126.56
126.56
kg/cm (g)
Pressure
0 CI 0 0 0
N CNI N N CNI
Test
2
CO Co Co Co OD
LC) if) LC) LO LC)
CO CO CO CO 00 CO CO CO CO 03 03 CO CO CO 00 CO CO CO CO CO CO 03 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO
00 0 ' el r) VI el n m m cn VI C•1 VI VI Col (,) Cc) 01 V) el r) el el m m CO co e) el el co (,) el
0 E 0 in LC) LCD LID LO LO LC) LO LCD In L() (C) III LID LC) LO In LO IC) al LO CO LO LO LC) In to LO to LO LO
0 '
H
37.61
37.61
24.19
24.19
24.19
30.23
30.23
30.23
co co co co co co co tv, in el el el 0) 24.19 cr) .-

kg/cm (g)
Pressure
co , I• . ,I V.- 4. . . . , . •,.
CV N N N CV CV Cal CV 04 N N C.I N v". L.-- CO CD CO CO CO CO CO
2
ci c; 6 4 F- N- is: N- N- r--: h:
Des
6 ci• ci ci o ci ci 6 ci ci 4
co co co co co co on co co co co co VI N N V, U) V, Col VI VD CI
ISOal woundSS A335GR.P11
GR.1.25Cr CL.42
GR.1.25Cr CL.42
A 691GR. 1.25Cr CL.42
A 691GR2.25CRCL.42
Up to 24"
538/30.23Up to 24"
U_Rto 24"
538 / 30.23 Up to 24"

Pipe
Spiral woundSS A 335GR.P11
..-
A335Gr. P22
CI-
ce
A691
A 691
(9
..0
M
M
.4c
Spiral woundSS
Gasket
SS
I1 Spira l wound
538/37.61
5 /30.23
PMS class data
38
1
A193 GR.B16
A193G R.B16
A193 GR.B16
B16
Bolt

I A193 Gr.

LISTD-3
A 182 GR.F11 CL.2
A 182 GR.F11 CL. 2
A 182 GR.F11CL.2
A182 Gr. F22 Cl. 3

Flange
10
ci
LIST t
CO in
C In Ci CI CI W
la cm In in
ii.
o CI CI 13
I
Page 1403 of 1823

253.2I
250.0I
385.4I
302.7I
VI CO
Torque
a- a- el 10 0 CA CI CO CO 0 Is CD 0 CD ID CV 03 02 CO at CV CD CO CA Vt. CO
kg-m
VS Coi a; CO a; ui ui ai oi 4 .- ri 4 s6 u:i ri ui ui tri cai a; a 4 to ui a; r, oi
.‘ a... V. CO ID 0 Is.10 0) Col a- a-. CV VI 10 (0 CD a) CV 0 CD ID 0) CI
1... a- a.. a- CV CV Col 0 CO CO a- s.- a- a- a- CV
1281
28966
38662
6249
12053
3150
89 13
18294
1647
25078
19914
22949
29728
43318
Tension
16437
37617
10115
15299
9272
2466
59000
52789
16437
627
VI tC) 01 ID CAD 0 N VI
CD 011 a- VI 0 0 10 al
or) 0 01 t• 0 0 tO 0
kg
CO
NCo4 10 0) 02 CD V'
O Na) a- a- CV CV
CNI rn

O N
O N
00 CO fo) 000000 00300300 CO CO CO CV CV 0 0 CD 0 Co 0 0 CO CO CO
-1 .._ ••-•
_ a- NI CV CV NI CV CV CV CV CV CV CV CV N- a- 1- CV CV CV CV CV NI CV CV CV
CO
1.
Z
z 0 0
CO
CO I
5/8
.., = 0 0 CO CV CO CO 00 CO 0 CO V' 0 c0 0 Tr CO CV CO 03 03 CO ,:1- CO
0.- (0,1 v. co .0-
. al. iii r;.
,_ oi c•- 0- 0- .- 01 0- to 9 r... so cal r-
5/8
0 al 0 e-
7/8
a-- (
75 a— 1.1? 1-
11 i."'"
?
ea 3. . . . . . 4 cz, 1 c
....5 a . a a
IC)co
•-0- 0- 0- 0- 0- 0- 0- 0- 0- 0- 0- 0--
Calculation Data
18
26
30
Flange
CV
inch
size
NI 0 a-
34
CD N 0 CO CD 0 CO N CD 0 N 0 CO 00 0 at CD CO 0
v.- a- a- a- N N N VI CV a- Cli c. I.- N Col V. 0 CO a-,- v- ia- N CV N Cool 0)
Flange
8009 03 133 (0
8009
00
S009
C/)
S009
CD CD CO V) CD CO CD CO CO u) u) u) u) u) u) u) u) u) u) u) 0) c0 a)
Std
o oc co co a a 0 0 0 CD Co 0 CD a a a a o o o o o o o o o o o
o o o o o a o o o o o a 0000poocaocap000
co co co CO CO CO CO CD CO CD CO
D CO
D CD CD CO CD CO (0 CO CO CO CO CO CD CO 0 CO CO
114.00
126.60
126.60
126.60
114.00
114.00
114.00
114.00
114.00
114.00
158.20
114.00
158.20
114.00
126.60
126.60
158.20
158.20
158.20
kg/cm (g)
114.00
114.00
91.20
a o o o
Pressure
CD 0 0 0 0 0
CV NI CD CD 0 0 0 0 Cl CV
Test
2
Co 0 CD V 4 4 0 V: .-
in O CV ,t-- a- e- ..- v- 0)
.- e- %- '‘. V.• .l
. 1.... 'V"
CO 00 CO CO CO 00 00 CO CO CO 00 CO CO *tr V V' 0 V' 0 '0 0 0 0 V- 0 0 'Cl- V' V* 0 0 0

0 CI CI VI VI CV VI VI el VI CI V) cal (0) r) to ul to to an LO an 0 0 0 0 0 IC) 0 0 0 0 Itl 0
C4 re Z 0E 0 0 10 to to to in u-) Lo in Lo in in to 4 0 V' at 0 0 V 0 0 0 V' 0 4 V' 0 0 0 0 0
0 a) 0
}O i-
55.54
30.09
55.54
30.09
Z X uj-) -1- .4-

37.61
30.09
30.09
55.54
55.54
kg/cm (g)
55.54
55.54
A 358TP304CL. 1
A358 P304CL.1
Pressure
0) 0) V 0 0 0 0 0 V 0 0 0 Ni*
O 0
0
CO CO 0 II) tO 0
CD CO CO CO CO . 0. ID 0 0 in 0 `0: V- 0
r
-:
n: 0 0
2
Des
Z z r: r-: r-: a•:, ui t ri ti to to Ili ari tri ui U) 4 Ti 4

a
co el co ca) co co el r) an an an 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V- V- 0
< <
• W -I
5 a re
ce 0
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
IL 0 u_
CO
0
Ix 0
0 N '
a
A 312TP304
A 312 TP304
• Z z a".
0 U/
Z
T
• <
120 / 80.12
M
Spiral wound SS
A320G R.B8CL.2 Spiral woundSS
%
-1C
0
tO
454 / 55.54
0
PMS class data
A193 GR.B7
Bolt

A 182 GR.F304
A 182GR.F304
Flange
I LIST D-5
0 0
C ta
oa
a la
a0 6 0
Page 1404 of 1823

37.7I
223.0I
28.0I
25.3I
24.4I
77472 1152.8I
338.8
l's 01 CO CO 01 CO CV
Torque
01 CO l's: CO ,2' Cl 0 al a- CO tO 10 011 CO 0 CO CC!
kg-m
STANDARDSPECIFICATION No. a- la a- C4 a- ..- ai co 4 CO 4 a; U) U) 0) ui r 6 0) U) O O N. ei
...-4- 01 CO 10 CO 0 4- N CO a- ts 10 4.• .4. 4.. V 0.
0) 141 (0 a- N N
a- 4- r r at ts N- a/ r 4- 4- 4.•
40911
62301
17818
10894I
26679
16245
16770
15197
4565
5896
2877
8583
5135
60354
7749
6847
N. .4
22949
16245
Tension
3150
21674
CO 0) 4:, 0. 04 111
Page 30 of35
W 0) 0) aOt c.4 al 0) N to o
co a) 04 CM 10 0. CO CO 41/. CD
kg
CO 0) U) a1 01
CO
0 0. 10 CO
am le- 04 CO
Csi

O
1
O • e)
.... '1' 'a V' '1' co (0 co N N CO CD 0 CI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 'I' 'cr 44' CO CO CO N N CO 0 0
a- a- a- N N
e- A- A- N 010/NN010104N
co 0 4- —
z 0 0
ti 03
7/8
'1-' CO .0 o3cococ0000s CO CO 04 N "a CO CO CO CO CO N
—
as 13
— cc) ,a- ,:t co —1 — i-i 0) 0) — U) 0.- (-75 el .c"73
7/8
3/4
7/8
.r VI Mr CO CO
I ......01111
. C., i4 1.... V.. .l ,l 1... csi (44 CV CV erl CO F FFFF F
Calculation Data
10
14
20
24
Flange
04 01
inch
size
04 '1' a- N et 4-
26
30
0 N 41. CO CO CO 01
a- a 4- 4.- N CO V' CO CO 4... a-.. 4.- a- 4.. N a- el c- c- cm an er co co c-
900S
900S
900S
900S
900S
900S
900$
Flange
cn cn cn cn
soos
(0 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO CO 0 CO M CO CO CO 03 Co CO
Std
O o o o o o o o o o o o o o a o a o o o o o o
O o a o o o o o o o a a o o o o o cp o o o o a
cp CO 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 01 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 01 0) 0) 0) CD 0) CO
234.12
237.28
234.12
237.28
237.28
237,28
234.12
187.30
237.28
237.28
237.28
kg/cm (g)
04 01 01 01 N 01 04 0 CD CO CO CO CO 03
Pressure
N 04 N
„.- 01 N N
.- 4- •L-. 4- •l . V- ',. l
- .,. C.
1 C.
) 01 01 Cs/ 01 01
r•- N.: N: N. N: N. N.
Test
2
NI NI: 41: 4:1: 4 NI 44 4 4 4 .ci 4

M co 01 cn col cn col el cn 01 cn el CO CO CO CO CO CO CO
N
N N 01 N N N NNNNN0401.t- n- N N N IN
N. N. 1,- N. N. N. N. N. N. N. N. 0- 1,- N. 1,- 1,- N. N. N. CO CO co co (0 co CO (0 co co co co

< co Ci Ne4N0INNNCVN0401010INNOIN0101 CO 01 CO CO CO CO 01 CO CO CO el cq
Z mEU 4 .4 .4- 4 4 .4' '41' 'Cr 'cr '41' •Ch .111' 'V Nr "t 41- '11' 'cr st• 111 LO LO 10 LO 1.0 10 CO LC) 10 10 11)
0 oh .
0>- 0
LL.
86.83
86.83
86.83
86.83
86.83
86.83
86.83
86.83
86.83
86.83
86.83
86.83
Z --)
tu
86.83
4 0 .4 4 'a 'cl'
56.24
kg/cm (g)
0) CO N.N.N. 0 'cl' 'Cl' 'cl .11'

Pressure
01
O00 CO OD CO 0 410 V' OA 01 04 01 04 CV 01 01 01 N N
6 ai 0) (0
2
ca
Des
pz ca co CO (a cd CO co ai 6 co (0 co
0) co 03 CD CO (0 U) 14 ) 10 III in 10 IA In LO LO
< <
• W
A106 GR.B
A 106GR.B
A 106GR.B
A 1 06GR.B
A335Gr. P22
A672GR. B60CL. 12
A691GR2.25CRCL.42
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
427 / 86.83Up to 24"
Up to 24"
A 672GR.B60CL. 32
A672G R. B60 CL. 22

A672GR.B60CL. 12
cc
o
o u_
A 672GR. B60 CL. 22
u) z
re 11"
0O( (7)
Pipe
A 106GR.B
< Z Z
0 0 ill
Up to 24"
230 / 130.63Up to 24"
Z 1--
<
71 0
M
Gasket
RTJ - 5Cr-0.5Mo
7 RTJ - SoftIron
A193 GR.B7 RTJ - Soft Iron
RTJ - Soft Iron

RTJ - Soft Iron
RTJ - Soft Iron

427 / 86.83
427 / 86.83
427 / 86.83
538/ 56.24
PMS class data
CO
A193GR.B7
A193 GR.B7
A193GR.B7
v--
Bolt
GR.B
M
0
3
CO
A19
CO
‘-
cc
A105
A182 Gr. F22Cl. 3 I

Flange
U) 10 LC) U)
C> C) 0 CD
I
v..- 4- e- a-
LISTE-1
I LISTE-2
< < <

Piping
Class
< < 4 4 4 W
01 LC) CO CO CO
W W ru• W
W
I
Page 1405 of 1823

105.4 I
103296 1537.0I
73956 1013.8I
85884 1177.3I
2467.4 I
248.5I
632.8I
Torque
CO A a- to 0) N at at 10 at Is. 04 CO 10 0 0 at at CO 0) 141 a- CA at
kg-m
O OD oi ri CO oi to pi o ci vi N oi a; p-.. a) o ei ai ei a; 6 6
N 4 10 10 0 CD e... a- N at CD fs at OS ta) F. am. N N at CO Is- a- 10
NeDatC003 N ea CD at CO
a- .
92481
6-76-0002 Rev. 3
4931
7037
36572
13205
3972
68142
20962
3014
55895
6277
3972
4945
12215
83211
Tension
16858
44521
70089
7499
64248
142889
41797
CD Is. CO at CO 00
Page 31 of35
0
Call O 0 CA l's CD
kg
00 W 0) 01 V)
N e- N a

0 op000 0 0 at at at at CO CO CO CM N OS (0 (0 (C) (0 CO (0 at at at at CO CO 00 Cal
' , .-. N N N N N Ca/ N a- .,- .1,-. '•-• .1. ' ,-. .l . ,t- .C... II-
°
Z 0 .7)
Ca
.zr ,.. .c CO
.... CO
..... N N at COatCOCOCO at N at Cal CO at CO
,- .- C') CO a- N- C') U) r-- e- e- CO e-. 0) ,-- v-
g 0
._ • r•-
V) , at at CO -.... , I • I I
at at 03
-... . . 8
,
cti — .- ,- ,- csi c4 c4 (4,1 cn el C75 r-- ..- t-- ‘- ‘- ‘- ‘- ..- CNI 4 c4 A el A i zi r ) i::: ,•- - A.- a- a-
Calculation Data
18
10
14
3/4
26
30
Flange
Cal Cal
inch
size
N at tr. N a-
18
.et
20
20
CO 10 N CO at
a- N Cal a- VI a- a- N CD at CO CO a- a- N a- a- a- N CD at SO
900S
Flange
S009 1,
S009
S009
CD CD (0 CD CO (D 0) CD LO CO CD (0 Cl) CD 0.) (0 CD (0 CD CO 0
8006
8006
8006
(0 (0 Cfl
Std
CD C) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CD
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 Oto U) 11")
it)
ID IC) 10 LC) LC) If) ID IC) (C) 10 LC) la LO LO 10 rn

0)
0) 0) a- a- a- a- .4- .1 . .‘. .l . •I 'l ,l . ,l . V"' ,I .. l.... 't .. V "t .l .
395.48
395.48
i
395.48
189.83
189.83
189.83
237.28
237.28
395.48
390.74
390.74
390.74
390.74
390.74
390.74
390.74
kg/cm (g)
390.74
390.74
390.74
390.74
390.74
390.74
390.74
Pressure
CO OD .4. CO CO CO CO
01 N F- r-- 4 4 4 4
Test
2
F- r-:. 0 ci 11) U) LCS U)

CD CD
N N t..1
0)
t.)
0)
en
CD 0)
CD
0)
CD
0)
CD
I
cococococooaa) fs- ts Is- Is- ts- Is- I,- Ts- l•-• Is- Ts- P.- Is- Is- I,- Is- 0000000000CO1OCO
CO) CI el CI el CD el CD CD NOINC.INNOINNOINNNOINN CD VI CD Cal ta) Col CD CD
o ho
(I) E CI LO LO LO LO 141 LO LC) at at at at at at at at at at at at at at at at LC) LO LO in 10 ID ID 11)
144.83
144.83
144.83
144.83
144.83
144.83
144.83
75.93
144.83
4
144.83
4
56.24
kg/cm (g)
56, 24
144.83
56.24
56.24
56.24
Pressure
ff) V") VI t'') CO Co) CD CD CD tal CD VI CD

N N CO CO CO CO CO 00 0) CD 0) CD 0) CD 0)
2
4 4 4 4 4 4 6 6 ai 6 ai U) a)
Des
to (0
tr) tr) 4 4 4 4 4 4 r-- r-- r•-• Is- Is- Is. Is-
A 106GR. B
A 106GR. B
A106 GR.B
A 672 GR.B60CL.12
A 672 GR.B60 CL. 12
A672Gr. B60Cl. 2 2
A672Gr. B60Cl. 22
A672 GR.B60CL.22
Up to 24"
427 / 144.83Up to 24"
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
Up to 24"
A 691 GR.1.25Cr CL.42

Pipe
A 335G R.P11
A106G R.B
A106 GR.B
to 24"
427 / 144.83
Gasket
RTJ - 5Cr-0.5Mo
RTJ - SoftIron
RTJ - SoftIron
RTJ - SoftIron
RTJ - SoftIron
A193 G R.B7 RTJ - Soft Iron
427 / 144. 83
230 / 217.79
427 / 144.46
538/75.93
PMS class data
A193 GR.B16
A193GR.B7
A193GR.B7
A193GR.B7
A193GR.B7
Bolt


P MS ratedTemperatu re / Pressu re
PMS rated Temperatu re / Pressure
fl
F
Z
9E
A182 GR.F11CL.2
Z
Flange
la la la la la
0
.7c
0 0
_ —
0 0
: :7c :Tc
LIST F-1
LISTF-2
a
Piping
.:(
Class
a
a-
aCal U)
a
0) 0)
0N
Laz
LL U. U. U. U.
I
Page 1406 of 1823

....
106165 1579.7I
146858 2535.9I
632.8I
22.6I
88270 1210.0I
1210.0I
475.5I
2535.9I
Torque
0 10 CO C•1 •41: Ti: CO 01 10 v.- CA el: 01 AO 10 el 1, 0) nt •,, CO CO a-
kg-m
STANDARDSPECIFICATION No. ir cti oil .- to a ai ri a; cl; a 71. cc; .6 — cx; ci
W ol eq a gr. N N et VI 1, ‘-'. CO 10 0) 1, 0 1, CV A. CO
-. "
Cr). 7:
0 CC'
0s O
_.
N el CO 01 a- v- el el .0 0) ID
a-
1
20962
55895
72036
55895
13535
397 2
15594
16858
46927
46927
41797
30490
72036
9248
7228
30490
7037
6277
41797
146858
Tension
88270
4931
5068
In Ul 0)
0 CO is ell• N
N 0.- 1, C11
3 a, .2.
kg
CO (0
a- 0 N
a-

y IN N CO CO CO CO CO .cr '7 st ci- CO CO CO N CV N CO CO CO CO CO CO '4 .0' a .0 CO CO CO
,-. .,- ,-. ,-- 1- l
- ..,' ,l . 1..-
zo o'' in
`"' `- `- `- `- `"" `- to
7/8
7/8
N
CO CO .4' CM Nt CO VOOCC303 V N'Cr N CO NI* N
1-. c --.. ,_ .,..._ c.., •- co ,- ,- co iii Is- •- ..- ,-
10 r; Nr- Nt
3/4
3/4
0 •- Q --.. . . . a I
l- C., N-•
co .c ,1 ,- 01 N C.:1 N C') j.
'. el .-- r-- .-- •- ,- ,- ,- cst CV CV CV in VS 01 .,- .,-- .- a-
Calculation Data
3/4
CD N N
0) CD .c a
3/4
C N a N a- C11
a
10
14
18
C11 et CO CO 0 C11 CO 0
CC .0
.0 C CO a- ,L- a- e•• I- N1 N •- a. ‘-• Cs1 C.) et CO CO a- a- N N at- a- a- el el at
LI.
2500S
Flange
SOOSL
S009 1.
CO CO CO CO CO (/) (I)
(I) CD U) CO (I) CO CD (1) 0) 0) 4) 0) (1) U) CO Cl) W U) (I) (1) (1)
Std
O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0
CO ar) U) al LO al COal CO al CO al In in in In in in in La La in in on in in In in
•— ,-- ,-- , - ,-- ,-- ,—. ,-- ..— ,— ar- a- a- a- a- a-- ..- e- a- a-- a•-• a- N N CM N N N
395.48
395.48
395.48
510.00
395.48
395.48
395.48
395.48
395.48
510.00
510. 00
395.48
395.48
395.48
395.48
395.48
395.48
kg/cm (g)
Pressure
03 CO CO 03 CO 0) CO CO CO CO Cr) 0 CD 0
'4" st sr .4- V NY et" et V' vr a o a a
Test
2
Lti CO ui 0
Ll) cli CO IC) al in c; a a c;
a) a) CO 0) 1 0) CD 0) al CD <- 1- •.- 1-
C') VI V1 O
CQ) cn el rl el, el el in In 0 CO
U
7.1
D
< (0) C.
1.01
CO COCOCO
01 VI Cal
COC00003
el V) 01 01
CO
0)
C0
CO
03030303C0C000 03
0) 0) Ol Cl 01 0) 01 Cl
CO
0)
CO
el
CO
V)
CO
e)
OD
erl
CO
C'')
00
V)
C0
l',
03
C'')
C0
C'')
C0
C'')
C0
C')
CO
V1
z (I)E o in
0 ID 0
CO CO to in CO CO to to u) CO Ln CO to Lo Lc) CO CO CO CO ill LC) atl 1.0 en in u-) IA CO al CO
•o o o
- I-
75.93
75.93
75.93
127.95
127.95
127.95
127.95
127.95
127.95
127.95
Z= ' cq in in In
kg/cm (g)
127.95
Pressure
Ca) C') co el CO in LI) CO LO Cal CM N N N N N

O 00 O) 0) 0) al C7) 0 a) 0) CO 0) 0) 0) 0) 0 CD 0 CD 0 CD CD
r-:
2
Z
Des
CO 6 in CO ui t.- N: N. ts Is- Vi 0) Ca) Cl V/ 07 el

fs- N- N- Is- N- N Ca 04 Ca Cal Csi a-- a- a- a-- a- a- a---
a .:z
A335GR. P91
N N a- <- a- a- a- a- Cal N Cal CV Ca N N
Lu
ir. 1+-
G R. P91 CL.42
A 691 GR.P91 CL.42

F.) a ce
538 / 127.95Up to 24"
Up to 12"
IA o
• o u_
(I) z
o LL- o
e 0 as 0
A335G R. P91
a.
▪z z 0-
0 0 IL
Z 1—
A69 1
‹ <
C)
co :I 0
am
Q.
Gasket
R TJ - 5Cr-0.5Mo
RTJ - 9Cr-1Mo
1 538/213.02
PMS class data
L
A193 GR.B16
CO
a-
a..
CO
0
ce
CO
oc,
<—
Z<!
RE A_
Flange
A182 Gr F91
A182 Gr. F91
l
i
l
LISTG-1
LISTF-3
0) .
C 0 (.9
O. 15 N ral
u. 0
E 0
I
Page 1407 of 1823

1I
8 77.0
in
Torque
so
kg-m
1308.
STA NDARDSPECIF ICATIONNo.
tri id
Is. rs
a
95426I
mr
70089
46927
46927
Tension
Page 33 of35
kg
N

O
0
O ,4 ,._
in CO N N N
tD .±. 0 0
1.7 CO
CD
.... .0 N 'Cr
CO
— 2
0 ,... , c?
m .--..- N CV N CV
Calculation Data
10
Flange
inch
size
N
CO CO .—
Flange
SOOGZ
CO CO (/)
Std
0 0 0
0 0 0
tO LO LO
CNI N N
510.00
510.00
510. 00
510.00
kg/cm (g)
Pressure
Test
2
U
7.1
CO CO OD OD
< to ci- n
el co tn
re z E 0 in to tn in
0 0 0
• 0 1.-
z
kg/cm (g)
Pressure
N N CO N
O a 0 0 0 0
2
C')
Des
Coiei t0i
Z „.._
< < N
0 W -J
LL 11-
a O a'
re o
• o u_
• 1-- z
IXIX IL0 (0
7)
Pipe
Z Z
< 0 ILI
z
< <
co %-•
n0
ca
a_
r)
-v
0)
co
0
PMS class data
Bolt
Wg
FormatNo. 8-00-0001-F7 Rev. 0
HO
WW
z<c s
Flange
0) (4
o 0
am
E 0
I
Page 1408 of 1823

Annexure - I
Owner/
EIL
Page 34 of35
/1
1.) e^".•
Flange joint
Acceptance
N
a
Copyrights EIL— All rights reserved

a•
O -to -c
Contractor
O c
CO
ti a) a)
CO
0
... . 0 CO
,6.i. . , cu) ,,3 a)
•: ..-1 cu >
0
z
CI) • ttO
= U • a CID to CA
E
0 .--..,.
H '-- CA 0
a)
Accepted
U -
a) Nos
g •
ci)
Y
0 0
U S. U
7
ci a)
a) E
0, a)
cc tx CA
HISTORY SHEETFORFLANGE JOINTS
O 0
O
Accepted
Accepted/
z a)
O 0
Nos
(.9
<
z
LL M LL
a
Studs *
OC —a vi
w C)
a_ 0 0 °
HZ
cn
u- z C.) O
0 (7)
fx a) U
< zz a,
v.) ...0
00
a) a)
Z'
I a N
—J 'CZ
(0 O a)
a. CO a)
a.
°
O
Gasket
0 0.
7
U -0
a) 0
Cl.
ch
a) 0
a) to O
ta ct a
= • — c,.3 .,_,
—.
cz n ai a) -
Er. c4
Acceptance by L icensor/Owner.
•CG >
Stream
Down
co)
Flange Para lle lity
OK/Not OK
a--
a) 5
o
al _o
a)
,...
._, O c.)
cn
0
a) 0
ki
C'T
C)
a) E
a)
a. 0
on 4a. •
c •_.
al 0
a)
0
Page 1409 of 1823

ENGINEERS
age..II ii115ieg INDIA umiTED APPLICATION OF TORQUE AND HYDRAULIC 6-76-0002 Rev. 3
1.11Crrt 212,1AZ Cl/W.W.I) (A Gort al endie Undertaking)
Annexure - II
SEQUENCE OF ACTIVITIES INVOLVED FOR REOPENING / MAKING /

BLINDING / DEBLINDING / WEDGE OPENING OF FLANGE JOINTS
SI. Activity Checked by

No. Contractor
(Signature)
1 Compliance of all check points.
2 Availability and use of recommended tools i.e. Standard tools / Non-sparking

tools/Pneumatic of Hydraulic torque wrench with suitable sockets and other
accessories / Hydraulic bolt tensioner etc depending upon service pressure
temperature rating of the line on which job is to be carried out.
3 Skilled manpower with protective clothing, safety shoes etc.
4 Proper access to flange joints for all bolts, proper scaffolding etc if required.
5 Proper escape route
6 Readiness of proper type, size & rating of blinds/gaskets/wedges & fasteners

etc
7 Loosening of the flange joints, starting from 6 '0' clock position (vertical joints)
8 Check for leakage of any hot water / gas / steam / hydrocarbon etc and wait for
depressurization of line, if any product leakage is observed.
9 Complete opening of flange joint with recommended tools
10 Removal of gasket / blind / wedge etc. and checking of old gaskets for improper
loading from marking on gasket surface.
11 Checking of old fasteners for proper metallurgy, sizing, length etc and ensure
replacement of fasteners based on observations during final box up and also
ensure that all fasteners to be of same size for uniform loading.
12 Making gap in flange joints with proper tools (flange spreader etc.) For proper
observations of gasket sitting area. Ensure proper cleaning of gasket seating
surface with suitable non-sparking tools and inspection of gasket face.
13 Ensure use of recommended gaskets of proper type and size for blinding / final
box up
14 Placing of fasteners in bottom half of flange joint (vertical joints).
15 In case of blinding ensure that tail of the blind is vertically upward and blind is
of proper size and not interfering with studs movement.
16 Ensure proper placement of gasket on raised face/ring groove/serrated area.
17 Ensuring slight tightening of studs in random in bottom half vertical joint(s) for
holding of gasket in proper position
18 Fixing all fasteners in position and tightening of nuts by hand to ensure uniform
stud length on both sides.
19 Tightening of all studs as per tightening sequence by recommended tools.
ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER / EIL
Page 1410 of 1823

011 ENGINEERS WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR
$tg INDIA LIMITED 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
...ARITA I iA Govt of Incha Ifficlertakong) FABRICATION OF PIPING
Page 1 of 40
‘-r91,:k111 * fffq f4F-InkkrT
WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR

FABRICATION OF PIPING
ft (.
REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD
4 8/07/14 P CHOWDHARY S GHOSAL P P LAHIRI S CHANDA
SPECIFICATION
3 28/12/07 MPJ VRK VRK VC
SPECIFICATION
REVISED TO INCLUDE CHECK
2 08/02/32 GC RN TVD
RADIOGRAPHY
1 15/05/98 MPJ TVD JRP AS
SPECIFICATION
ISSUED AS STANDARD
0 31/07/87 TVD TVD JRP AK
SPECIFICATION
Standards Standards
Date Purpose Prepared by Checked by
No Convenor Chairman
Approved by
Page 1411 of 1823

ENGINEERS
WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
$t&.1( fatMeg > INDIA LIMITED
1.~ "WIWS MI,R.S. I
•
Govt ot Undeftak.3)
FABRICATION OF PIPING Page 2 of 40
ABBREVIATIONS
ASNT American Society for Nondestructive Testing
AWS American Welding Society
AUT Automated Ultrasonic Testing
BPVC Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code
CFH Cubic Feet per Hour
DWDI Double Wall Double Image
DWSI Double Wall Single Image
GTA Gas Tungsten Arc
GTAW Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
IQI Image Quality Indicator
NDT Non Destructive Testing
PQR Procedure Qualification Record
RT Radiographic Testing
SMAW Shielded Metal Arc Welding
SWSI Single Wall Single Image
UTS Ultimate Tensile Strength
Welding Standards Committee
Convenor : Mr. P. P. Lahiri (SMMS)
Members : Mr. R.Nanda(Piping)

Mr. S.Ghosal (SMMS)
Mr. K. Anjaneyulu (SED)
Mr. D. Jana (Construction)
Mr. R.K. Singh (Inspection)
Mr. Raj Kishore (Pipeline)
Page 1412 of 1823

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
54,41 I ∎A rX.
Page 3 of 40
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARDS 4
3.0 BASE METAL 5
4.0 WELDING CONSUMABLES 5
5.0 SHIELDING & PURGING GAS 5
6.0 EQUIPMENTS & ACCESSORIES 6
7.0 WELDING PROCESS 6
8.0 EDGE PREPARATION 6
9.0 ALIGNMENT & SPACING 7
10.0 WEATHER CONDITIONS 7
11.0 WELDING TECHNIQUE 7
12.0 HEAT TREATMENT 8
13.0 CLEANING OF THE WELD JOINT 10
14.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING 10
15.0 REPAIRS OF WELDS 14
16.0 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED BY CONTRACTOR (4 COPIES EACH) 14
EXHIBIT — A: ELECTRODE QUALIFICATION TEST RECORD 16
EXHIBIT — B: STRESS RELIEF HEAT TREATMENT PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION 20
EXHIBIT-D: FORMAT FOR PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD (PQR) 24
EXHIBIT — E: FORMAT FOR MANUFACTURER'S RECORD FOR WELDER OR WELDING
OPERATOR QUALIFICATION TESTS 27
EXHIBIT — F: RADIOGRAPHIC PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD FOR PIPE
WELDING 29
EXHIBIT — G: WELDER'S IDENTIFICATION CARD 30
EXHIBIT — H: TYPE OF SOURCE AND FILMS TO BE USED FOR RADIOGRAPHY 31
EXHIBIT — I: AUTOMATED ULTRASONIC TESTING 32
Page 1413 of 1823

ENGINEERS
$vg 22egL INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
Go.i ol trxt. Undenalong>
1.??7 ".5.,151,1,77141
Page 4 of 40
1.0 GENERAL
This specification shall be followed for the fabrication of all types of welded joints of piping
system within the battery limits of the plant. This specification shall be used in conjunction with
Welding Specification Charts.
The welded pipe joints shall include the following:
a) A11 pipe joints, longitudinal butt welds, circumferential butt welds and socket welds.
b) Attachments of forgings, flanges and other supports to pipes.
c) Welded manifold headers and other sub-assemblies.
d) Welded branch connections with or without reinforcing pads.
e) Join,ts in welded/fabricated piping components.
f) The attachments of smaller connections for vents, drain drips and other instrument tappings.
Any approval granted by the Engineer-in-Charge or Owner's inspector, shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities and guarantee.
This specification shall not be applicable for welding of pipelines for transportation of liquid
petroleum , gas and other similar products in on shore and off shore.
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARDS

A11 welding work, equipments for welding, heat treatment, other auxiliary functions and the
welding personnel shall meet the requirements of the latest editions of the following accepted
standards and procedures unless otherwise specified in the Welding Specification Chart and the
Technical Notes attached thereof. In the case of conflicting requirements, the requirements
mentioned in Welding Specification Chart/Technical Notes shall be applicable.
i) ASME B31.3: Process Piping, ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31
ii) ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code, Sec II Part C: Specifications for Welding Rods,
Electrodes and Filler metals.
iii)ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code, Section V: Non destructive examination.
iv) ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX: Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
v) The Indian Boiler Regulations I.B.R.
vi) 6-44-0016: Standard Specification for Non-Destructive Examination Requirements of

Piping.
vii) 6-77-0005: Welding Specification charts for Piping Classes.
viii) API 582: Welding Guidelines for the Chemical, Oil, and Gas Industries.
In the event of any differences due to the additional requirements mentioned in this
specification, over and above those obligatory as per codes, this specification shall be binding.
Page 1414 of 1823

,31
-1f4zre? ENGINEERS
92e INDIA LIMITED
t. Go, d indu ltneipd*mg)
117,I :151 ,11,1,33.1
3.0 BASE METAL

3.1 In general, use of carbon steel, alloy steel and stainless steel is envisaged. The details of the
material specifications are given in the Welding Specification Chart.
3.2 The Contractor shall provide the manufacturer's test certificates for every batch of the
materials supplied by him.
4.0 WELDING CONSUMABLES

4.1 The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, all the welding consumables necessary for
the execution of the job such as electrodes, filler wires, argon etc. and these should bear the
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.2 The welding electrodes and filler wires supplied by the Contractor shall conform to the class
specified in the Welding Specification Chart. The materials shall be of the make approved by
the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.3 Electrode qualification test records should be submitted as per the Exhibit-A (attached) in
respect of the electrodes tested by the Contractor, for obtaining the approval of the Engineer-
in-Charge. It shall record the minimum test results required for classification of welding
consumables as per ASME Section II part C.
4.4 The Contractor shall submit batch test certificates from the electrode manufacturers.
4.5 A11 electrodes shall be purchased in sealed containers and stored properly to prevent
deterioration. The electrodes removed from the containers shall be kept in baking ovens at
temperatures recommended by the electrode manufacturer. "Out of the oven time" of
electrodes, before they are consumed, shall not exceed the limits recommended by the
electrode manufacturer. The electrodes shall be handled with care to avoid any damage to the
flux covering.
4.6 All low hydrogen type of electrodes and others, shall be baked as per manufacturers
recommendation and stored in holding ovens at temperature recommended by the
manufacturer.
4.7 The electrodes, filler wires and flux used shall be free from rust, oil, grease, earth and other
foreign matter which affect the quality of welding.
5.0 SHIELDING & PURGING GAS

5.1 Argon gas used in GTA welding for shielding purposes shall be minimum 99.995% pure. The
purity of the gas shall be certified by the manufacturer. The rate of flow for shielding
purposes shall be established through procedure qualification tests.
5.2 Argon gas with a purity level of minimum 99.995% shall be used for purging.
5.3 When GTAW process alone or a combination of GTAW and SMAW processes is
recommended for the production of a particular joint, the purging shall be maintained during
the root pass and for the first filling pass to minimize oxidation on the inner side of th,; pipe,
unless otherwise specified in Welding Specification Chart.
5.4 Initial purging shall be maintained for sufficient period of time so that at least 4-5 times the
volume between the dams is displaced, in order to completely remove the entrapped air. In no
case should the initial purging period be less than 10 minutes. High gas pressure should be
avoided.
Page 1415 of 1823

~e? ENGINEERS
$#@LI1 22eg INDIA LIMITED
(A Go,1 o■ indta udeftak.nw
5.5 After initial purging, the flow of the backing gas should be reduced to a point where only a
slight positive pressure prevails.
5.6 Gas backing (purging) is not required for socket type of welded joints.
5.7 Dams, used for conserving inert gas during purging, shall be removed after completion of the
welding, and shall be accounted for. Wherever, removal of dams is not possible after welding,
use of water-soluble dams should be made.
6.0 EQUIPMENTS & ACCESSORIES

6.1 A11 the equipment for performing the heat treatment, including transformers, thermocouples,
pyro-meters, automatic temperature recorders (with suitable calibration arrangement etc.) shall
be provided by the Contractor at his own expense along with certificate traceable to national
/international standard.
6.2 Contractor shall make necessary arrangements at his own expense, for providing the
radiographic equipments, radiographic films, processing equipment all other darkroom
facilities and all the equipments/materials required for carrying out the dye-penetrant/magnetic
particle test/ultrasonic testing.
7.0 WELDING PROCESS

7.1 The welding processes to be employed are given in the Welding Specification Chart.
7.2 In addition to Shielded Metal Arc Welding Process (SMAW) and Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
Process (GTAW), Welding of various materials under this specification may be carried out
using one or more of the following processes with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW)

Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW)
Submerged Arc Welding (SAW)
7.3 The Welding procedure could be employed for a particular joint only after duly qualifying the
welding procedure to be adopted.
8.0 EDGE PREPARATION

8.1 General
The edges to be welded shall be prepared to meet the joint design requirements by any of the
following methods recommended:
(a) Carbon Steel

Gas cutting, machining or grinding methods shall be used. After gas cutting, oxides
shall be removed by chipping or grinding.
(b) Low Alloy Steels (containing up to 5% Chromium).

Gas cutting, machining or grinding methods shall be used. After gas cutting,
machining or grinding shall be carried ozit on the cut surface.
(c) High alloy steel (> 5% Chromium) and stainless steels, nickel alloys:
Plasma cutting, machining or grinding methods shall be used. After plasma cutting,
cut surfaces shall be machined or ground smooth.
Page 1416 of 1823

k31 ENGINEERS
$1gar 02-"
dg INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
lA Gni, Unelmtaiang)
Page 7 of 40
8.2 Cleaning
(a) The ends to be welded shall be properly cleaned to remove paint, oil, grease, rust,
oxides, sand, earth and other foreign matter. The ends shall be completely dry before
the welding commences.
(b) On completion of each run, craters, welding irregularities, slag etc., shall be removed
by grinding and chiseling. Wire brushes used for cleaning stainless steel joints shall
have stainless steel wires and the grinding wheels used for grinding stainless steel
shall be of a suitable type. Separate grinding wheels and wire brushes should be used
for carbon steels and stainless steels.
9.0 ALIGNMENT & SPACING

9.1 Components to be welded shall be aligned and spaced as per the requirements laid down in
applicable code. Special care must be taken to ensure proper fitting and alignment when the
welding is performed by GTAW process. Flame heating for adjustment and correction of ends
is not permitted unless specifically approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
9.2 A wire spacer of suitable diameter may be used for maintaining the weld root opening while
tacking, but it must be removed after tack welding and before laying the root bead.
9.3 For pipes of wall thickness 5 mm and above, the ends to be welded shall be secured in position
with the aid of couplers, yokes and 'C' clamps, to maintain perfect alignment. Yokes shall be
detached after the completion of weld, without causing any surface irregularity. Any
irregularity caused on the pipe surface must be suitably repaired to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
9.4 Tack welds, for maintaining the alignment, of pipe joints shall be made only by qualified
welders using approved WPS. Since the tack welds become part of the final weldment they
shall be executed carefully and shall be free from defects. Defective tack welds must be
removed prior to the actual welding of the joints.
9.5 Tacks should be equally spaced. Minimum number of tacks shall be:
3 tacks - for 2 1/2" and smaller dia. pipes.

4 tacks - for 3" to 12" dia. pipes.
6 tacks - for 14" and larger dia. pipes.
9.6 Welding shall commence only after approval of fit-up by the Engineer-In-Charge.
10.0 WEATHER CONDITIONS

10.1 The parts being welded and the welding personnel should be adequately protected from rain
and strong winds. In the absence of such a pritection no welding shall be carried out.
10.2 During field welding using GTAW process, particular care shall be exercised to prevent any
air current affecting the welding process.
11.0 WELDING TECHNIQUE

11.1 Root Pass
(a) Root pass shall be made with electrodes/filler wires recommended in the welding
specification chart. For fillet welding, root welding shall be done with consumables
recommended for filler passes. The preferred size of the electrodes is 2.5 mm
diameter (12 SWG) but in any case not greater than 3.25 mm (10 SWG).
Page 1417 of 1823

~:Te? ENGINEERS
.g
$ wINDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
(A Govt ot ,rtdo Undettalono
(b) Upward technique shall be adopted for welding pipe held fixed with its axis
horizontal.
(c) The root pass of butt joints should be executed so as to achieve full penetration with
complete fusion of the root edges. Weld projection inside the pipe shall be as per
applicable code. It shall be limited 3mm max. when the applicable code does not
place any restriction.
(d) Any deviation desired from the recommended welding technique and electrodes
indicated in the welding specification chart should be adopted only after obtaining
express approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
(e) Welding shall be uninterrupted.
(f) While the welding is in progress care should be taken to avoid any kind of movement
of the components, shocks, vibrations and stresses to prevent occurrence of weld
cracks.
(g) Peening shall not be used.
11.2 Joint Completion
(a) Joint shall be completed using the class of electrodes, recommended in the Welding
Specification Chart. Size of the electrode shall not exceed 4 mm in diameter for
stainless steels and alloy steels used for low temperature applications.
(b) Two weld beads shall not be started at the same point in different layers.
(c) Butt joints shall be completed with a cover layer that would affect good fusion at the
joint edges and a gradual notch free surface.
(d) Each weld joint shall have a workmanship like finish. Weld identification work shall
be stamped clearly at each joint, just adjacent to the weld. Metal stamping shall not be
used on thin pipe having wall thickness less than 3.5mm. Suitable paint shall be used
on thin wall pipes for identification.
(e) Rust preventive/protective painting shall be done after the weld joint has been
approved.
11.3 Dissimilar Welds
Where welds are to be produced between carbon steels and alloy steels, preheat and post weld
heat treatment requirements shall be those specified for corresponding alloy steels and filler
wire/electrodes shall correspond to ER70S-2 or E-7016/7018 type. For welds between two
dissimilar Cr-Mo low alloy steels, preheat and post weld heat treatments shall be those
specified for higher alloy steel and electrodes used shall correspond to those specified for steel
of lower alloy content. For carbon steel or alloy steel to stainless welds, use of filler
wire/electrodes E/ER-309/ERNiCr-3/E Ni Cr Fe-3/ENiCrMo-3 shall be made. The welding
procedure, electrodes/filler wires to be used shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
12.0 HEAT TREATMENT

12.1 Preheating
(a) No welding shall be performed without preheating the joint to 10°C (50°F) when the
ambient temperature is below 10 degree.
Page 1418 of 1823

t.31 ENQNEERS
IC:Wg
1.1177,iveYDT± 3.11,10.T311
A no, 1d Indu Unt1Prtak.)
Page 9 of 40
(b) Preheating requirements for the various materials shall be as per the Welding
Specification Chart attached.
(c) Preheating shall be performed using resistance or induction heating methods.

Preheating by gas burners, utilizing oxy-acetylene or oxy-propane gas mixtures, with
neutral flame may also be carried when permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge.
(d) Preheating shall extend uniformly to at least three times the thickness of the joint, but
not lens than 25 mm, on each sides of the weld.
(e) Preheating temperature shall be maintained over the whole length of the joint during
welding. Temperature recorders shall be provided by the Contractor to record the
temperature during alloy steel welding. For carbon steel piping, preheat temperature
shall be ensured by use of temperature indicating crayons, pyrometers or other suitable
means.
12.2 Post Heating
In case of alloy steel materials such as Cr-Mo steels, if the post weld heat treatment is not
performed immediately after welding, the weld joint and adjacent portion of pipe, at least 50
mm on either side of weld, shall be uniformly heated to 300°C. This temperature shall be
maintained for half an hour minimum, and then wrapped with mineral wool before allowing it
to cool to room temperature. If the Post Heating temperature specified in the Welding
Specification Charts exceeds 300°C, the same shall be followed. Similarly, if the welding
specification chart specifies post-heat time, the same shall be applicable. Post weld heat
treatment as specified in the Welding Specification Chart shall be carried out later on.
12.3 Post Weld Heat Treatment (PWHT )
(a) Post weld heat treatment, wherever required for joints between pipes, pipes and
fittings, pipe body and supports shall be carried out as per the welding specification
chart, applicable codes standards and the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge. In
this regard procedure qualification to be done before carrying out PWHT in
production welds
(b) The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge, well before
carrying out actual heat treatment, the details of the post weld heat treatment
procedure as per Exhibit B attached, that he proposes to adopt for each of the
materials/assembly/part involved.
(c) Post weld heat treatment shall be done in a furnace or by using an electric resistance or
induction-heating equipment, as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.
(d) While carrying out local post weld heat treatment, technique of application of heat
must ensure uniform temperature attainment at all points of the portion being heat-
treated. Care shall be taken to ensure that width of heated band over which specified
post weld heat treatment temperature attained is at least that specified in the relevant
applicable standards/codes. Control of temperature shall be done using
microprocessor/computer controlled system. The desired time-temperature cycle shall
be entered into the microprocessor/computer.
(e) Throughout the cycle of heat treatment, the portion outside the heated band shall be
suitably wrapped under insulation so as to avoid any harmful temperature gradient at
the exposed surface of pipe. For this purpose temperature at the exposed surface
should not be allowed to exceed 50% of the peak temperature.
Page 1419 of 1823

k31 ENGINEERS
$stga. t INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
1.11WS ",
(1,77 2191~70 (A Gom. of Indo Undertalong)
(f) The temperature attained by the portion under heat treatment shall be recorded by
means of thermocouple pyrometers. Adequate number of thermocouples should be
attached to the pipe directly at equally spaced location along the periphery of the pipe
joint. The minimum number of thermocouples attached per joint shall be 1 up to 6"
dia., 2 up to 10" dia. and 3 for 12" dia. and above. However, the Engineer-in-Charge
can increase the required number of thermocouples to be attached if found necessary.
(g) Automatic temperature recorders, which have been suitably calibrated, shall be
employed for measuring & recording temperature. The time-temp graph shall be
submitted to Engineer-in-Charge immediately on completion of Stress Relieving
Cycle The calibration record of each recorder should be submitted to the Engineer-in-
Charge prior to starting the heat treatment operations and his approval should be
obtained.
(h) Manufacturer's test certificate shall be submitted for the thermocouples materials and
record shall be maintained by the Contractor.
Immediately on completion of the Heat Treatment, the Post Weld Heat Treatment
charts/records along with the hardness test results on the weld points, wherever
required as per the Welding Specification Chart, shall be submitted to Engineer-in-
Charge for his approval.
(i) Each weld joint shall bear a unique identification number, which shall be maintained
in the piping sketch to be prepared by the Contractor. The weld joint identification
number should appear on the corresponding post weld heat treatment charts. The
chart containing the identification numbers and piping sketch shall be submitted to the
Engineer-in-Charge in suitable folders.
13.0 CLEANING OF THE WELD JOINT

All weld joints shall be free from adherent weld spatters slag, swarf, dirt or foreign matter.
This can be achieved by brushing. For stainless steels, brushes with only stainless steel
bristles shall be used.
14.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING

14.1 General
(a) The Owner's inspector shall have free access to all concerned areas, where the actual
work is being performed. The contractor shall also accord the Owner's Inspector all
means and facilities necessary to carry out inspection.
(b) The Owner is entitled to depute his own inspector to the shop or field where
prefabrication and erection of pipe lines is in progress for (but not limited to) the
following objectives:
i) To check the conformance to relevant standards and suitability of various

welding equipments and the welding performance.
ii) To witnes„ the welding procedure qualification.
iii) To witness the welder performance qualification.
iv) To check whether shop/field welding being executed is in conformity with the
relevant specifications and codes of practice followed in piping construction.
Page 1420 of 1823

ot ENGINEERS
IMf5tg INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
Gou ■nau 11,d.rtak■ nT
I 4,11,77 of
Page I I of 40
(c) Contractor shall intimate sufficiently in advance the commencement of qualification

tests, welding works and acceptance tests, to enable the Owner's inspector to be
present to supervise them, as decided by the Engineer-In-Charge.
14.2 Welding Procedure Qualification
Welding procedure qualification shall be carried out in accordance with the applicable
requirements of ASME Sec. IX latest edition and/or other applicable codes and the job
requirements. The contractor shall submit the welding procedure specification in format as per
Exhibit-C (attached) immediately after the receipt of the order. Owner's inspector will review,
check and approve the welding procedure submitted and shall release the procedure for
qualification tests. The procedure qualification test shall be carried out by the Contractor at
his own expense. A complete set of test results in the format as per Exhibit-D attached) shall
be submitted to the Owner's inspector for his approval immediately after completing the
procedure qualification test and at least 2 weeks before the commencement of actual work.
Standard test as specified in the code shall be carried out in all cases. In addition to these tests,
other tests like macro/micro examination, hardness tests, dye penetrant examination, charpy V-
notch, Corrosion tests, impact tests etc. shall be carried out on specimens depending upon the
type of base material, operating conditions and requirements laid down in the detailed
drawings and specifications. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to carry out all the
tests required to the satisfaction of the Owner's inspector.
14.3 Welder's Qualification
(a) Welders shall be qualified in accordance with the ASME Section-IX or other
applicable codes. The Owners inspector reserves the right to witness the test and
certify/approve the qualification of each welder separately. Only those welders who
have been approved by the Owner's Inspector shall be employed for welding.
Contractor shall submit the welder qualification test reports in the format as per
Exhibit-E (attached) and obtain express approval before commencement of work.
It shall be the responsibility of
Contractor to carry out qualification tests of welders. For welding of the steam piping,
falling under the purview of Indian Boiler Regulations, only those welders with IBR
Certification, qualified by Boiler Inspectorate, and acceptable to the local Boiler
Inspector authority shall be employed.
(b) The welders shall always have in their possession, an identification card containing
information contained in Exhibit-G and shall produce it on demand by the Engineert-
In-Charge or his representative. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to issue
the identify cards after it has been duly certified by the, owner's Inspector.
(c) No welder shall be permitted to work without the possession of the identify card.
(d) If a welder is found to perform a type of welding or in a position for which he is not
qualified, he shall be debarred from doing any further work. All welds performed by
an unqualified welder shall be cut and redone by a qualified welder at the expense of
the Contractor
14.4 Visual Examination
Visual Examination of all welds shall be carried out as per the latest editions of the applicable
codes and specifications. All finished welds shall be visually inspected for parallel and axial
alignment of the work, excessive reinforcement, concavity of welds, shrinkage cracks,
inadequate penetration, unrepaired burn-through, under cuts, dimensions of the weld, surface
porosity and other surface defects. Undercutting adjacent to the completed weld shall not
exceed the limits specified in the applicable standard/code.
Page 1421 of 1823

ENGINEERS
INDIA L1MITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
INRf "Mlfi?1,12 .10,1,311 Go,1 d inda Undertak.91 FABRICATION OF PIPING
Page 12 of 40
14.5 Radiographic Examination
(a) The Radiographic Examination procedures to be adopted shall be submitted by the

contractor as per Exhibit-F and shall be got approved from the Owner's Inspector
prior to employment. A person qualified to ASNT Level-II or ASNT Level-III in
Radiographic testing shall prepare the procedure. The Radiography Procedure shall be
established to demonstrate that the required sensitivity can be consistently achieved
under the most unfavorable parameters (e.g. source to film distance, geometric
unsharpness, thickness etc.). The radiographic technique and procedure adopted shall
conform of the requirements mentioned in Article 2 as well as Article 22 of ASME
Sec.V. The IQI sensitivity obtained shall be equal to or better than the requirements
mentioned in Article 2 of ASME Sec.V. Source nide penetrameter shall be used in
establishing radiographic procedure/ technique. The acceptance criteria shall be as per
the relevant codes of Fabrication and over riding requirements if mentioned else where
in the technical specifications of the contract. The Contractor shall be responsible for
carrying out Radiography; rectification of defects and re-radiography of welds
repaired/rectified at his cost.
(b) The extent of Radiography shall be as per specifications to be supplied to the
Contractor. For welds between dissimilar materials, the extent of Radiographic
Examination shall be the more stringent of the two recommended for the materials
being welded. Wherever random Radiography is called for, in a particular piping
class, the dissimilar materials weld joints shall essentially be included.
(c) Type of Radiation source and film to be used shall be as per Exhibit-H for carrying out
radiographic examination. However if specifications (as given else where in the
contract) for some critical material require usage of X-Radiation, then Radiography
shall be done using X-Rays only.
(d) The Contractor shall fulfill all the statutory and owner's safety requirements while
handling X-ray and Gamma-ray equipments.
(e) In case of random radiography, the joints for Radiography shall be selected by the
Owner's Inspector and the Radiography shall be performed in his presence, if he
instructs the contractor to do so. The contractor shall furnish all the radiographs, to the
Owner's Inspector immediately after processing along with evaluation by a person
qualified to ASNT Level-II in Radiographic testing, inline with Article 2 of ASME
Sec.V. The certificate of ASNT/ISNT Level II qualification of the NDT personnel
shall be submitted to owner's inspector for his approval prior to start ofjob.
(f) The Contractor shall provide the Owner's Inspector, all the necessary facilities at site
such as a dark room with controlled temperature, illuminator (viewer) suitable for
varying densities, a duly calibrated electronic densitometer with batteries, magnifying
glass, tracing papers, ruler, marking pencils etc. to enable him to review the
radiographs.
(g) Where random radiography is specified, the first weld of each welder shall be
completely radiographed. In the case of pipe of size 6" and below, the first two welds
shall be completely radiographed.
(h) For each weld performed by a welder found unacceptable, two additional checks shall
be carried out on welds performed by the same welder. This operation is iterative and
the of two additional welds for each weld deemed unsatisfactory shall be continued till
such time that two consecutive welds of satisfactory quality are found for every
defective weld.
(i) The Contractor shall carry out these additional radiographic testing at his own
expense. To avoid the possibility of too many defective welds by a single welder
Page 1422 of 1823

■
31 ENGINEERS
$1g-zir 2ffl-eg INDIA UMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
(4,7757, IA Govt t>f IrWit IlrOwtalonW
remaining undetected for a long period to time, the Contractor shall promptly arrange
for Radiographic Examination so that there is no accumulation of defective joints.
(1) Contractor shall quote rates for X-ray as well as Gamma Ray for joints indicated to be
radiographed by X-ray in Table of Exhibit-H.
14.5.1 Check shots
(a) Owner / Engineer- in- charge or his representative shall select 5% of the total joints
radiographed on a day for check shots. Contractor shall carry out check shots as
directed.
(b) Weld profiles of check shots shall be compared with weld profile observed in the
earlier Radiographs. In the event of any one variation in the check shots and earlier
Radiographs, contractor shall re-shoot the entire lot of joints radiographed by
particular Radiography agency on the particular date. All the re-shot films shall be
compared with the originally submitted films.
14.6 Liquid Penetrant and Magnetic Particle Examination
(a) Whenever such tests are specified, the tests shall be carried out on joints chosen by the
Owner's inspector, as per ASME Section V article 6 and 7 respectively. The tests are
to be performed by a person possessing a valid ASNT/ISNT Level-II qualification in
the method being used.
(b) For austenitic stainless steels and other nonmagnetic materials, liquid (dye) penetrant
test shall be carried out. For carrying out this test, the materials shall be brought
within a temperature limit of 15° to 50°C.
14.7 Automated Ultrasonic examination (AUT)
(a) Automated ultrasonic testing (AUT) can be used in substitution of radiographic

examination when permitted by ASME B31.3 code case 181 shall require prior
approval of Engineer-in-charge as detailed in EXHIBIT-I.
(b) The automated ultrasonic testing (AUT) procedure to be adopted shall be submitted by
the CONTRACTOR as per EXHIBIT-I and get it approved from EIL/OWNER.
(c) The CONTRACTOR shall make all the arrangements for the Automated Ultrasonic
Testing of work at his expense. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all the reports to the
EIL/OWNER, immediately after examination together with the corresponding
interpretation reports on the approved format. The details of the AUT reports along
with the joint identification number shall be duly entered in a register and signed by
the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the EIL/OWNER for approval. The
EIL/OWNER will review all the Automatic Ultrasonic Testing records of welds and
inform the CONTRACTOR to those welds, which are unacceptable. The decision of
the COMPANY shall be final and binding in this regard.
(d) In addition, Radiography examination shall be carried out when in the opinion of
EIL/OWNER, Radiography inspection is required to confirm or clarify defects
indicated by Automated Ultrasonic examination. Repaired welds and transition spool
piece weld joints shall be additionally examined by radiography if it is examined by
automated ultrasonic testing.
(e) The automated ultrasonic testing system used for inspecting welds shall be approved by
EIL/OWNER.
Page 1423 of 1823

ENGINEERS
$12_.11 INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
1.??, 2A41,72 I A Govt of INA43 Undertaloog)
14.8 Hardness Test
Hardness requirements for welds shall be as per the Welding Specification Chart/Non
Destructive Examination Specification attached elsewhere in the contract. Hardness testing
shall be carried out by Vickers Hardness Tester during welding procedure qualification and
shall be cross sectional. For production welds, hardness testing shall be carried out by portable
digital hardness testers. Poldi hardness tester shall not be permitted. Contractor shall produce
documentary evidence/calibration certificate to the Owner's Inspector and obtain approval of
the hardness testing equipment.
14.9 Proof Tests
Hydrostatic and pneumatic tests shall be performed as per the requirements laid down by
respective flushing and Testing specification/applicable codes to demonstrate the soundness of
the welds. The tests shall be conducted after fulfilling the requirement of visual examinations
radiography etc., and after the entire work has been certified by the Owner's inspector to be fit
for being subjected to such tests.
15.0 REPAIRS OF WELDS

(a) No repair shall be carried out without prior permission of the Owner's inspector.
(b) Repairs and/or work of defective welds shall be done in time to avoid difficulties in
meeting the construction schedules.
(c) Defects ascertained through the inspection methods, which are beyond acceptable limits
shall be removed after the joint is completely radiographed by the process of chipping
and grinding. The repaired welds shall be subjected, as a minimum requirement to the
same testing and inspection requirements as the original weld.
(d) The number of times repair welding can be permitted for the same weld shall be
governed by the standard specification, 6-44-0016.
(e) When the entire joint is judged unacceptable, the welding shall be completely cut and
edges suitably prepared as per required alignment tolerances. The rewelded joint shall
again be examined following standard practices.
16.0 DOCUMENTS TO BE SUBMITTED BY CONTRACTOR (4 COPIES EACH)
(a) Electrode and Welding Consumable Qualification Records as per Exhibit-A, for the
Welding Consumables tested and approved for the work.
(b) Batch Test Certificates, for the Electrodes used, obtained from the Electrode
Manufacturers.
(c) Proposed Heat Treatment Procedure as per Exhibit-B.
(d) Heat Treatment Charts.
(e) Weld joint hardness test results.
(f) Welding Procedure Specifications as per Exhibit-C immediately after receipt of the
order.
(g) Welding Procedure Qualification records as per Exhibit-D.
Page 1424 of 1823

ENGINEERS
IA Go, ■.4 lnda UntWialong
HIR7f
(h) Welder Performance Qualification records as per Exhibit-E immediately after

conducting Welder Qualification Tests.
(i) Radiography Procedure as per Exhibit-F and other NDT procedures.
Radiographic test Report along with Radiographs and other NDT reports.
(k) Piping Sketch (Isometric) giving all the details regarding the pipe specifications,
welded joints, joints radiographed magnetic particle, tested, ultrasonic tested,
penetrant tested, joints heat treated, WPS used, welders identification number, etc.
Page 1425 of 1823

IMWg. INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4

IA Govt d indo Undertahang)
EXHIBIT — A: ELECTRODE OUALIFICATION TEST RECORD
Date:
Test started on:
Test completed on:
A: DETAILS
CONTRACTOR
Tested at (Site name)
Code of Reference (used for testing)
Special Requirements (if any)
S1. Classificat Size of Batch Manufacturer Intended for Remarks

No. ion of electrode no. name/brand/date welding in
electrode of manufacture position
B: All-weld Tensile Test

Base Material used
Buttering used : Yes/No
Pre-heat temperature
Inter-pass temperature
Post weld heat treatment details
Visual examination
Radiographic examination results
Tensile test results
Sheet 1 of 4
Page 1426 of 1823

ENGINEERS
fax INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
■A GAA ol ind“, UndeAak■N»
Page 17 of 40
S1.No. Batch no./ Size of Current UTS YS % elongation

identification electrode & Remarks
no. polarity
As Actual As Actual As Actual

per per per
code code code
C. Impact Test Results
Test Temperature Notch in
Type of Specimens (Charpy) Size of Specimens
S1.No. Batch no./ Size of Current Impact value Remarks

identification electrode &
no. polarity
As per 1 2 3 4 5 Average
code,
max./avg.
i
I
Sheet 2 of 4
Page 1427 of 1823

frc ENGINEERS
1.'7,1",?ffirt del".■ (A Govi 01 inda Undenak.g) FABRICATION OF PIPING Page 18 of 40
D. Chemical Analysis Results

Batch no./ Size of Current % % % % % % % % % others Remarks
identification electrode &
SI.No.
no. polarity C Mn Si P S Cr Ni Mo V
As per
code
Actual
As per
code
Actual
E. Fillet Weld Test Results
Base Materials
Batch no./ Size of Current Macro Fracture Remarks
Welding Visual
identification electro &
Sl. no. de polarity position
No.
Horizontal
Vertical
Overhead
Horizontal
Vertical
Overhead
F. Other Test Results
1. Transverse tensile test
In combination with
Base material used
Position of welding
Preheat temperature
Post weld heat treatment
Radiography
Sheet 3 of 4
Page 1428 of 1823

,41 ENGINEERS
$1g- 1122- INDIA LIM1TED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
Go, Q1 Intlu Ilnd.°0».ng} FABRICATION OF PIPING
Page 19 of 40
Identification No. U.T.S. Fracture in Remarks
2. Guided Bend Test
Position Identification No. Root, Face or Side Bend Remarks
G. Any other tests
H. Conclusions
PREPARED BY REVIEWED BY APPROVED BY

(CONTRACTOR) (CONTRACTOR) (EIL/OWNER)
Sheet 4 of 4
Page 1429 of 1823

71 ENGINEERS
$424T181~~INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
(A Govt d unenak.no
Page 20 of 40
EXHIBIT — B: STRESS RELIEF HEAT TREATMENT PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION
LSTK CONTRACTOR
Name of the Heat treater
Name of the Project
Specification /Reference No.
Line no./Joint No.
1. General Details Other Details
Name of the Type of Heating : Elec. Res./

Equipment : Induction
(Tick mark applicable method)
Maximum Permissible Temp at

Uncovered Parent Metal
Width of heated band

Width of Insulation
Material : No. of Themo couples (dia wise)
Type of Thermo couples
3. Heat Treatment Cycle Details
Charging Temp ° C
Rate of heating ° C /Hr.
Soaking Temperature, ° C
Soaking Time, Hrs.
Rate of Cooling ° C /Hr.
Method of Cooling
4. Other details, if any
Page 1430 of 1823

ENGINEERS
$agzu f81W-g INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
EXHIBIT — C: FORMAT FOR WELDING PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION (WPS)
Company Name By
Welding Procedure Specification No. Date Supporting PQR No. (S)
Revision No. Date
Welding Process (es) Type (s)

(Automatic, Manual, Machines or Semi Auto)
JOINTS
Joint Design
Backing (Yes) (No)
Backing Material (Type)
Sketches Production Drawings. Weld Symbols Written
Description should show the general arrangement of the parts to be welded. Where applicable, the
root specing and the details of weld groove may be specified.
(At the option of the Manufacturer sketches may be attached to illustrate joint design weld layers and
bead sequence e.g. for notch toughness procedures, for multiple process procedures, etc.)
BASE METALS
P.No. Group No. to P. No. Group No.
OR
Specification type and grade

to Specification type and grade
OR
Chem. Analysis and Mech. Prop.

to Chem. Analysis and Mech. Prop.
Thickness Range :
Base Metal : Groove Fillet
Deposited Weld Metal : Groove Fillet
Pipe Dia Range : Groove : Fillet
Other
SHEET IOF 3
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — AII rights reserved
Page 1431 of 1823

■31 ifFr", ENGINEERS
Ofjt- g INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
I .AM ,.11,7175T7 I A GA41 of india Unde~n0
Page 22 of 40
FILLER METALS
F.No. Other
A.No. Other
Spec. No. (SFA)
AWS No. (Class)
Size of filler metals
(Electrodes, Cold Wire, Hot Wire etc.)

Electrode-Flux (Class)
Flux Trade Name
Consumable Inset
Each base metal/filler metal combination should be recorded individually.
WPS NO. Rev.
POSITIONS: POSTWELDED HEAT TREATMENT
Position (s) of Groove Temperature Range
Welding Progression : UP Down Time Range
Position (s) of Fillet
PREHEAT GAS
Shielding Gas (es)
Preheat Temp. Min. Percent Composition (mixtures)
Interpass Temp. Max. Flow Rate

Gas Backing
Preheat Maintenance Trailing Shielding Gas Composition
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Current AC or DC Polarity
Amps (Range) Volts (Range)
(Amps and volts range should be recorded for each electrode size, position, and thickness, etc. This
information may be listed in a tabular form similar to that shown below).
Tungsten Electrode Size and Type

(Pure Tungsten, 2% Ceriated, etc)
Mode of Metal Transfer for GMAW
(Spray arc, short circuiting arc, etc.)
Electrode Wire feed speed range
SHEET 2 OF 3
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright E1L — All rights reserved
Page 1432 of 1823

ENGINEERS
A Govl of Incka Undwuk.gi
TECHNIQUE
String or Weave Bead

Orifice or Gas Cup Size
Initial and Interpass Cleaning (Brushing, Grinding, etc.)
Method of Back Gouging

Oscillation
Contact Tube to Work Distance
Multiple or Single Pass (per side)
Multiple or Single Electrodes
Travel Speed (Range)
Peening
Other
Filler Metal Current Travel

eld Volt
Process Speed Others
Layer(s)
er(s) Type Amp. Range
Class. Dia. Range
Polarity Range
e.g. Remarks,
Comments, Hot
wire Addition,
Technique Torch
Angle, etc.
SHEET 3 OF 3
Page 1433 of 1823

d-2:1-g
fflf= ENGINEERS
(A Govt crt inch Undeft )
Page 24 of 40
EXHIBIT-D: FORMAT FOR PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORD (POR)

RECORD OF ACTUAL CONDITIONS USED TO WELD TEST COUPON
Company Name
Procedure Qualification Record No. Date
WPS No.
Welding Process (es)

Types (Manual, Automatic, Semi-Auto)
JOINTS
Groove Design of Test Coupon
(For combination qualification the deposited weld metal thickness shall be recorded for each Filler metal or process weld)
BASE METALS POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT

Material Sepc. Temperature
Type of Grade Time
P.No. to P.No. Other
Thickness of Test Coupon
Diameter of Test Coupon
Other
FILLER METALS GAS

Weld Metal Analysis A No. Type of Gas/Gases
Size of Filler Metal Composition of Gas Mixture
Filler Metal F.No. Other
SFA Specification
AWS Classification
Other
POSITION ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Position of Groove Current
Weld Progression (Uphill, Downhill) Polarity
Other Amps.
Tungsten Electrode Size
Other
PREHEAT TECHNIQUE
Phreheat Temp. Travel Speed
Interpass Temp. String or Weave Bead
Oscillation
Multipass or Single Pass (per side)
Single or Multiple Electrodes
Other
SHEET 1 OF 3
Page 1434 of 1823

ENGINEERS
101?n,4,151,1,1,,..43■ A Gos1
TENSILE TEST
Specimen Width Thickness Area Ultimate total Ultimate tensile Type &
No. force, kgf stress, location of
Kgf/mm2 failure
GUIDED BEND TESTS
TOUGHNESS TESTS
Lateral Exp. Drop Weight

Specimen Notch Notch Test Impact
No. Location Type Temp. Value No
% Shear Mils Break
Break
FILLET WELD TEST
Result - Satisfactory : Yes No Penetration into Parent Metal : Yes No.

Marco - Results
SHEET 2 OF 3
Page 1435 of 1823

ENGINEERS
$°gelf 22egW.' INDIA IJMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
3~1 fA Govt oi intl o UndefIak.g)
OTHER TESTS
Type of Test
Deposit Analysis
Other
Welder' s Name Clock No. Stamp No.

Test Conducted by Laboratory Test No.
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and test welds were prepared, welded and
tested in accordance with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Code.
Date Manufacturer
By
(Detail of record of tests are illustrative only and may be moulded to conform to the type and number
of tests required by codes and specifications).
SHEET 3 OF 3
Page 1436 of 1823

01
'12—Jt4 ENGINEERS
$
11g-
ar f&1 51e
— g INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
t. Go, ol Ind4. Iln<1.1fflong)
1.17R ,P4244,
Page 27 of 40
EXHIBIT — E: FORMAT FOR MANUFACTURER'S RECORD FOR WELDER OR

WELDING OPERATOR QUALIFICATION TESTS
Welder Name Check No. Stamp. No.
Using WPS No. Rev.
The above welder is qualified for the following ranges
Variable Record Actual Values Qualification Range

Used in Qualification
Process
Process Type
Backing (metal,
Weld metal, flux, etc)
Material Spec. to to
Thickness
Groove
Fillet
Diameter
Groove
Fillet
Filler Metal
Spec. No.
Class
F. No.
Position
Weld Progression
Gas Type
Electrical Characteristics
Current
Polarity
SHEET 1 OF 2
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL All rights reserved
Page 1437 of 1823

ENGINEERS
INATY ("AWAR 1161 30~1 (A Govt of india Unclefla~
Guided Bend Test Results
Type and Fig. No. Result
Radiographic Test Results

For alternative qualification of groove welds by radiography
Radiographic Results
Fillet Weld Test Results

Fracture Test (Describe the location, nature and size of any crack or tearing of the specimen_
Length and Per Cent of Defects inches
Macro Test - Fusion
Appearance - Fillet Size (ing) x Convexity or Concavity
Test Conducted by Laboratory - Test No.
We certify that the statements in this record are correct and that the test welds were prepared.
Welded and tested in accordance with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Code.
Date Organization
By
(Details of record tests are illustrative only and may be modified to conformation to the type & number
of tests required by the Code).
Note: Any essential variables in addition to those above shall be recorded.
SHEET 2 OF 2
Page 1438 of 1823

ENGINEERS
Go, oi ,n(). Ilndpflffiong, FABRICATION OF PIPING
Page 29 of 40
EXHIBIT — F: RADIOGRAPHIC PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION

RECORD FOR PIPE WELDING
1. Location
2. Date of Testing
3. Name of the LSTK CONTRACTOR/Agency
4. Material: Carbon steel/Alloy Steel/Stainless Steel
4 A. Technique: DWSI/SWSI/DWDI
5. Diameter & Thickness:
6. Type of Weld Joint:
7. Radiation Source:
8. Intensifying Screens/Lead Screens:
9. Geometric Relationship:
10. Limit of Film Coverage:
11. Film Type and Make:
12. Exposure Time:
13. Processing:
14. Density:
15. Sensitivity:
16.* Type of penetrameter:

(Source side)
17.* Type of penetrameter:

(Film side)
Signature of LSTK CONTRACTOR/Agency with Seal
Approval of OWNER/ PMC's Inspector
Ref. Para regarding recommended practice on placement of penetrameters Article 22, SE 142,
ASME Sec. V.
For "Random Radiography" lines placement of penetrameters as per Article 2, ASME, Sec. V
is permitted.
Page 1439 of 1823

ENGINEERS
$42L11 INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
.4.197f ~15r71,34~7.11 IA GoN of india UndortalOng)
EXHIBIT — G: WELDER'S IDENTIFICATION CARD
1. Name:
2. Identification:
Photograph
3. Date of Testing:
4. Process
5. Thickness range
6. Diameter range
7. P. No.
8. Date of approval of welding
9. Position(s)
Approved by: Employer's Signature with Seal
Page 1440 of 1823

k31 ENGINEERS
$1g-ar 22-eg INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
( A Go, oI indk, l}n~lak■Flg)
Page 31 of 40
EXHIBIT — H: Type of Source and Films to be used for RADIOGRAPHY
NOMINAL WALL
SHOP WELDED JOINTS IN-SITU WELDS
THICKNESS (T) IN mm
SOURCE FILM : CEN Class SOURCE FILM : CEN Class
T > 19 A11 Materials Gamma Ray ' C5 Gamma Ray C5
8 < T < 19 Carbon Gamma Ray Gamma Ray
C4 C4
Steel
A11 other Gamma Ray Gamma Ray
C3 C3
materials
<8 Carbon Steel
Other than C3/C1
Gamma Ray C3 Gamma Ray
Inspection
Class IV *
A11 other X-ray with C4 or Equivalent to be
materials and used. Gamma Ray (Se 75 Source
Carbon Steel only) with C3/C2 Equivalent may be
of Inspection allowed only if in the assessment of
X-Ray C4
Class IV * the owner's inspector, Joints are
inaccessible for X-ray equipment
and radiographic sensitivity is
achieved.
Note: Integral to above table
1) Films slower than the above may have to be used, if required radiographic sensitivity is not
achieved consistently.
* Piping classes where 100% RT is specified. Refer Std. Spec. No. 6-44-0016
COMPARISON OF FILMS FROM DIFFERENT MANUFACTURERS
CEN Classification KODAK AGFA FUJI

CX D8 ---
C5 AA400 D7 IX100
C4 T200 D5 IX80
C3 MX125 D4 IX50
C2 M100 D3 ---
Cl DR50 D2 IX25
--- SR** --- ---
** Special films, extremely fine grain & very high resolution
Page 1441 of 1823

~Zr& rEr") ENGINEERS
041f INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
Govt ot Indo UndertalonW
1.11W■ ~115rf ffit "PAI tA
EXHIBIT — I: AUTOMATED ULTRASONIC TESTING (AUT)
1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
3.0 AUT SYSTEM
4.0 COUPLANTS
5.0 CALIBRATION/DEMONSTRATION BLOCK
6.0 CALIBRATIONS
7.0 PROCEDURE
8.0 TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION
9.0 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
Page 1442 of 1823

(31 ENGINEERS
A ewu c ndMUndert.long)
1.0 INTRODUCTION
The specification shall be applicable for Automated Ultrasonic Testing (AUT) system or Semi-
Automated Ultrasonic Testing suitable for full penetration butt welds of piping. The system
shall incorporate Phased array probes and Time of Flight Diffraction (TOFD) probes plus pulse
echo probes. The procedure shall evaluate the performance of Phased Array Ultrasonic
examination instruments and system. This specification is intended to be used on thickness of
13.0 mm and greater. Lesser thicknesses may be tested using the standard practice if the
technique can be demonstrated to provide adequate protection on mockups of the same wall
thickness and geometry.

The latest edition with addendum of the following standards shall be referred here:
a) ASME B31.3 — Process piping
b) ASME B31 Case 181-2. 2012 Use of alternative Ultrasonic Examination Acceptance
Criteria in ASME B31.3
c) ASME Section V- Non Destructive Examination (Latest edition)
d) ASNT SNT-TC-1A - Recommended Practice for Personnel Qualification and Certification

in Nondestructive Testing
3.0 AUT SYSTEM
3.1 Instrument Requirement

The ultrasonic examination shall be performed using a system employing automated/ semi-
automated scanning with computer based data and analysis abilities.
The instrument shall be capable of real-time sectorial scan (also called an S-scan) image during
scanning to assure that proper data has been collected, generating and displaying sectorial-scan
image, which can be stored and recall for subsequent review.
The system shall provide an adequate number of examination channels to ensure the complete
volumetric examination of the weld through the thickness in one circumferential scan.
The evaluation zones should be of maximum 2.0mm height. The instrument linearity should be
such that the accuracy is within 5%.
Each examination channel should be selective for pulse-echo or through transmission mode gate
position and length for a minimum of two gates and gain.
TOFD techniques & B-scan mapping should be available to improve characterization.

Recording thresholds should be selectable to display signals between 0 and 100% of full screen
height for simple amplitude and transit time recording and it should be from 0 to 100% for B-
scan or mapping type recording of data. Two recordable signals output per gate should be
available being either analog or digital and representative of signal height and time of flight.
Measuring distance accuracy of circumferential weld shall be within 1.0 cm from zero (0)
position.
Electronic noise shall be lower than acoustical noise in all channels for the probes and
sensitivities to be used during inspection. The signal to noise ratio for each channel during
examination shall be at least > 20 dB for shear waved probes.
The Contractor shall provide the detail information of the equipment like model, trade name,
software used to the OWNER/EIL.
Page 1443 of 1823

ENGINEERS
Ogl_JE fdt&I-g INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
iNt?Pf k.R+151?,12,1,R1r. A Govt Undertak.g)
3.2 Probes
The phased array search unit frequency shall be between 1 MHz and 10 MHz depending on
material type and thickness. The Contractor shall provide the detail information of the probe
frequency, no. of elements, size, pitch etc. to the OWNER/EIL.
3.3 Wedge
Phased array wedges shall be of a design to accommodate phased array search unit. Nominal
refracted-wedge angles shall be possible from 35 to 75 degrees to ensure 100 % coverage of the
weld and heat affected zone. The Contractor shall provide the detail information of the wedge
to the OWNER/EIL.
3.4 Encoder
The encoder shall be capable of permitting a scan resolution of 1.0mm as minimum.
4.0 COUPLANT
The couplant shall be obtained by using a medium suitable for the purpose. It shall be suitable
for the temperature used. The couplant, including additives, shall not be detrimental to the
material being examined. Couplants used on nickel base alloys shall not contain more than 250
ppm of sulfur. Couplants used on austenitic stainless steel shall not contain more than 50 ppm of
halides (chlorides plus fluorides).A method should be employed to determine that constant
coupling is achieved during examination. An examination of the test piece with its surface
wiped dry should produce a record showing an absence of the couplant recording signal.
The same couplant shall be used during calibration and examination.
5.0 CALIBRATION/DEMONSTRATION BLOCK
5.1 Calibration/Demonstration Block Material
5.1.1 Material selection

The material from which the qualification and calibration blocks are fabricated shall be of the
same product form and material specification or equivalent P-number grouping as one of the
materials being examined.
5.1.2 Heat treatment

The calibration and qualification blocks shall receive at least the minimum tempering treatment
required by the material specification for the type and grade. If the calibration and qualification
blocks contains welds other than cladding, and the component weld at the time of the
examination has been heat treated, the block shall receive the same heat treatment.
5.1.3 Reflectors
a) Calibration blocks reflectors: Side drilled holes shall be used to confirm adequate sensitivity
settings.
b) Demonstration blocks reflectors: Surface and sub-surface notches
5.1.4 Quality of calibration and demonstration blocks

Prior to fabrication, the block material shall be completely examined with a straight beam
search unit. Areas that contain an indication exceeding the remaining back-wall reflection shall
be excluded from the beam paths required to reach the various calibration reflectors.
5.1.5 Cladding
When the component material is clad, the block shall be clad by the same welding procedure as
the production part. It is desirable to have component materials, which have been clad before
the dropouts, or prolongations are removed. When the cladding is deposited using an automatic
welding process, and, if due to block size, the automatic welding process is impractical,
deposition of clad may be by the manual method.
Page 1444 of 1823

k31 ENGINEERS
$1gZIE~g INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
A Go.t ei IntlU Undeftaing)
5.1.6 Surface roughness of calibration and demonstration blocks

The roughness of the Demonstration and calibration surfaces of the blocks shall be
representative for the scanning surface of the components to be examined.
5.2 Calibration Blocks
5.2.1 Standard block

IIW VI calibration block or V2 or equivalent calibration block are a recognized test reference
for sweep range scale, index point of shear wave transducer, and refracting angle.
5.2.2 Calibration reference block

Reference block shall be made with notch and side-drilled hole as per ASME Section V article
4, Fig.T-434.2.1 and Fig.T-434.3 and shall be used for gain calibration and construction of
reference curves. The reference calibration block shall be a section of pipe of the same nominal
and schedule and normally be manufactured from the actual material examined and have
approved dimensions.
5.2.3 Non-piping Calibration block

The basic calibration block configuration and reflectors shall be as shown in ASME Section V
article 4, Fig.T-434.2.1. The block size and reflector locations shall be adequate to perform
calibrations for the beam angles used.
5.2.4 Piping Calibration block

The basic calibration block configuration and reflectors shall be as shown in ASME Section V
article 4, Fig.T-434.3. The block size and reflector locations shall be adequate to perform
calibration for the beam angles used.
5.2.5 Block Curvature

The block curvature shall be as per ASME Section V article 4.
5.3 Demonstration Block
5.3.1 Preparation
A demonstration block shall be prepared by welding or, provided the acoustic properties are
similar, the hot isotactic process (HIP) may be used.
5.3.2 Thickness
The demonstration block shall be within 25% of the thickness to be examined. For welds
joining two different thickness of material, demonstration block thickness shall be based on the
thinner of the two materials.
5.3.3 Weld joint configuration

The demonstration blocks weld joint geometry shall be representative of the production joints
details.
5.3.4 Flaw location

Unless specified otherwise by the referencing Code Section, the demonstration block which
three EDM notches oriented and major groove faces. The flaws shall be located at or adjacent to
the blocks groove faces as follows:
(a) One surface flaw on the side of the block representing the component O.D. surface
(b) One surface flaw on the side of the block representing the component I.D. surface
(c) One subsurface flaw
When the scan plan to be utilized subdivides a weld into multiple examination zones, a
minimum of one flaw per zone is required.
Page 1445 of 1823

~Zie? ENG1NEERS
fM2-èg IND1A L1MITED
Govt uldia Undenakmg)
I N1WItIe.,7,7 t1,1,127.1 A
Page 36 of 40
5.3.5 Flaw Size

Demonstration block flaw sizes shall be based on the demonstration block thickness and
shall be no larger than that specified by the referencing Code Section.
(a) Maximum acceptable flaw height for material less than 1 in. (25 mm) thickness, or
(b) 0.25 aspect ratio acceptable flaw for material equal to or greater than 1 in. (25 mm)
thickness based on the demonstration block
5.3.6 Single I.D. / O.D. flaw alternative

When the demonstration block can be scanned from both major surfaces during the qualification
scan [e.g., joint I.D. and O.D. have a similar detail, diameter of curvature is greater than 20 in.
(500 mm), no cladding or weld overlay present, etc.], then only one surface flaw is required.
5.3.7 One-sided exams

When, due to obstructions, the weld examination can only be performed from one side of the
weld axis, the demonstration block shall contain two sets of flaws, one set on each side of the
weld axis. When the demonstration block can be scanned from both sides of the weld axis
during the qualification scan(e.g., similar joint detail and no obstructions), then only one set of
flaws is required.
6.0 CALIBRATION
6.1 General Calibration Requirements

1) Ultrasonic system: Calibration
Calibration shall be performed for complete ultrasonic system and shall be done prior to
examination in the desired thickness range.
2) The surface condition of the calibration block shall be similar to that on which production
test will be performed with respect to the surface geometry and cladding.
3) Same couplant shall be used for calibration as well as production testing.
4) Contact wedges, if used, shall be same for the calibration as well as for the production
testing.
5) Any control, which affects instrument linearity (e. g. Filters, reject, or clipping), shall be in
the same position for calibration, calibration checks, instrument linearity checks and
examination.
6) Focal-Law: The focal law to be used during the examination shall be used for calibration.
7) Beam Calibration
All individual beams used in the examination shall be calibrated to provide measurement of
distance and amplitude correction over the sound path employed in the examination. This
shall include applicable compensation for wedge sound path variations and wedge
attenuation effects.
8) The maximum temperature difference between test blocks and examination surface shall not
exceed 14°C.
6.2 PA Instrument Linearity

The following requirements shall be met at intervals not to exceed one year or prior to first use
thereafter.
1) Screen height linearity: The PAUT equipment's screen height linearity shall be evaluated in
accordance with Mandatory Appendix I of ASME Sect. V, Art.4.
2) Amplitude control linearity: The PAUT equipment's amplitude control linearity shall be
evaluated in accordance with Mandatory Appendix II of ASME Sect. V, Art.4 for each pulse-
receiver circuit
3) Equipment linearity shall be such that accuracy of indicated amplitude or time is ±5% of
actual full scale amplitude or time.
Page 1446 of 1823

ENGINEERS
$1g-a. fa2g INDIA LIMITED
IA Co, VI Ind. Unel.t.,,■ no,
Illri 3,405,41i
Page 37 of 40
6.3 Phased array system calibration

Calibration shall be performed from the surface of the calibration block which corresponds to
the component surface to be examined. System calibration shall include the complete ultrasonic
system. Screen distance calibration shall be at least 1-1/2 "veepaths"(also known as skip) for the
minimum angle that will be used during the examination.
The system shall be calibrated for velocity and wedge delay calibration, sensitivity calibration,
Time Corrected Gain (TCG) calibration. Encoder calibration and confirmation of sensitivity.
The system shall require re-calibration due any of the following conditions:
1) Search unit transducer or wedge change.
2) Search unit cable or length change.
3) Ultrasonic instrument change.
4) Change in examination personnel.
5) Change in type of power source.
7.0 PROCEDURE
7.1 Safety
At first, safety supervisor or technician should be confirmed regarding safety matters before
starting examination. Those are included mainly of scaffolding, ladder, lighting, electric
conditions and personnel safety equipments have been checked by themselves as followed
Project Safety Regulation. If there is not clear for safety questions for personnel, equipment and
examination, the technician has right to stop his job whenever.
7.2 A detailed Automated Ultrasonic examination procedure shall be prepared and qualified for each
wall thickness and joint geometry to be examined prior to the start of any NDT work. Repair
procedure shall be separately qualified for each joint geometry. The procedure as a minimum
shall include the following:
Scope; equipment; probe type and details; surface preparation, cleaning and couplant; technique
sheet for each technique specified (number of techniques to be sufficient to cover all type of
joints to be covered by the procedures scope); material; weld material (if different); sketch
showing joint configuration, beam coverage; extent of scan; scanning pattern; material thickness
and curvature; calibrations and frequency; means of setting and scanning sensivity Ievels and
DAC curves; flaw location and size evaluation; acceptance criteria; reporting format; operator
qualifications.
7.3 Lamination Check

A-UT shall be performed using a device employing automatic computer based data acquisition.
The straight beam material examination (T-472 of Section V, Article 4) for reflectors that could
interfere with the angle beam examination shall be performed:
a) Manually,
b) As part of a previous manufacturing process, or
c) During the A-UT examination provided detection of there reflectors is demonstrated.
d) The coverage shall be included minimum 100mm from centerline of welding.
7.4 Examination Coverage

The required volume of the weld and base material to be examined shall be scanned using a
linear scanning technique with an encoder. Each linear scan shall be parallel to the weld axis at
a constant standoff distance with the beam oriented perpendicular to the weld axis.
The ultrasonic examination area shall include the volume of the weld, plus the lesser of 25mm
(1 in.) or "t" on each side of the weld.
Page 1447 of 1823

~2d
- ig ENGINEERS
2Wg INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
14~ "..;1157,39KNI GoN otIndo Untlertak■ng)
A documented examination strategy or scan plan shall be provided, showing transducer

placement, movement, and component coverage, that provides a standardized and repeatable
methodology for weld acceptance. The scan plan shall also include ultrasonic beam angle used,
beam directions with respect to weld centerline, and pipe volume examined for each weld. The
documentation shall be made available to the owner's Inspector.
7.5 Examination side

Basically shall be examined on the both sides of welding line axis but can be examined from
one side in case of another side is not available access under full coverage volume condition.
7.6 Surface condition

The contact surface shall be cleaned of weld spatter, dirt, pitting, rust and/or any other
impurities or roughness that will interfere with the free movement of the ultrasonic transducers
or would prevent adequate transmission of ultrasound. Prior to inspection the NDT technician
shall judge the suitability of the surface and when required remedial action shall be taken.
7.7 Scanning
1) The search unit shall be maintained at a fixed distance from the weld axis by a fixed
guide or mechanical means.
2) The examination angle(s) for E-scan and range of angles for S-scan shall be appropriate for
the joint to be examined.
3) Scanning speed shall be such that data drop-out is less than 2 data lines per inch (25mm) of
the linear scan length and that there arr no adjacent data line skips.
4) For E-scan techniques, overlap between adjacent active apertures (i.e., aperture incremental
change) shall be a minimum of 50% of the effective aperture height.
5) For S-scan techniques, the angular sweep incremental change shall be a maximum of 1 deg or
sufficient to assure 50% beam overlap.
6) When multiple linear scan are required to cover the required volume of weld and base
material, overlap between adjacent linear scans shall be a minimum of 10% of the effective
aperture height for E-scan or bean width for S-scan
7) Each scan shall have an overlap of minimum 1 in. (25 mm) - (in case of re-acquisition of
missing or poor data line etc.)
8) TOFD channel
The TOFD gate start will be set 1 1.1.Sec before the arrival of the lateral wave and should
extend up to the first back wall echo to achieve full cover of wall thickness.
7.8 Data Recording

A-scan data shall be recorded in an unprocessed form with on threshold, at a minimum
digitization rate of five times the examination frequency, and recording increments of a
maximum of
a) 0.04 in. (1 mm) for material < 3 in. (75 mm) thick
b) 0.08 in. (2 mm) for material > 3 in. (75 mm) thick
7.9 Reflectors Transverse to the Weld Seam

As an alternate to line scanning, a manual angle beam examination may be performed for
reflectors transverse to the weld axis. Manual angle beam UT shall be accordance with manual
ultrasonic examination procedure based on (T-472 of Article 4, ASME Sec V).
Page 1448 of 1823

ENGINEERS
$1g-ar1~--g INDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
dorr, 151.3.0.1, IA Go, ol Und.■,11.ng>
Page 39 of 40
7.10 Re-examination
1) Re-examination for repaired welds shall follow the same condition (same examination
method, same acceptance criteria) as for the original weld.
2) The additional testing shall be extent a length at least equal to 1 in.(25 mm) from the both
end of repaired area.
3) Additional NDT methods of UT and MT shall be carried out to make ensure for the repaired
area
8.0 TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION
All Inspectors of the EIL/OWNER (EIL/OWNER) shall be imparted training at the

CONTRACTOR's cost. The inspector shall be provided complete awareness and
knowledge regarding the equipment, limitations, capabilities complete range, method of
operation, calibration, scanning, including development of suitable procedure, training on
variables effecting the system performance and interpretation of results.
The Ultrasonic lead operator performing the examination shall be qualified in accordance with
the EIL/OWNER's written practice, ASNT-TC-1A, ASME B31 Case 181-1. The minimum
qualification of AUT operator who analyze and interpret the collected data shall be a ASNT
Level II or III.
Only qualified UT personnel trained in the use of the equipment and who have demonstrated the
ability to properly acquire examination data, shall conduct production scan.
Scanner technician, Band setter, scribe line technician shall have sufficient experience and
capabilities to perform their duties to the satisfaction of AUT operator.
9.0 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
9.1 Evaluation
9.1.1 Data analysis criteria
Reflectors exceeding the limits in either a) or b) below, as applicable, shall be investigated to
determine whether the indications originates from a flaw or is a geometric indication in
accordance with Para. 9.1.3 (Flaw sizing) below.
a) For amplitude-based techniques, the location, amplitude, and extent of all reflectors that
produce response greater than 20% of the reference level shall be investigated.
b) For non amplitude-based techniques, the location and extent of all images that have an
indicated length greater than the limits, as applicable, shall be investigated.
9.1.2 Geometric
Ultrasonic indications of geometric and metallurgical origin shall be classified as follows:
1) Indications that are determined to originate from the surface configurations(such as

weld reinforcement or root geometry) or variations in metallurgical structure of materials (such
as cla-Iding to base metal interface) may be classified as geometric indications, and
a) Need not be characterized or sized.

b) Need not be compared
c) Location shall be recorded
2) The following steps shall be taken to classify an indication as geometric:
Page 1449 of 1823

51
12_.1t4'"ENGINEERS
OW-g WINDIA LIMITED WELDING SPECIFICATION FOR 6-77-0001 Rev. 4
I /11?7( ",(75,7 (151.YATI711 (A Go,1 ot tnOka Undettatong)
a) Interpret the area containing the indication;

b) Plot and verify the indication coordinate, provide a cross-sectional display showing the
indication position and surface discontinuity such as root or counter bore; and
c) Review fabrication or weld preparation drawings.
3) Altematively other NDE methods or techniques may be applied to classify an indication

as geometric (e.g. altemative UT beam angles, radiography, ID and/or OD profiling).
9.1.3 Flaw sizing

The dimensions of the flaw shall be determined by the rectangle that fully contains the area of
the flaw.
Flaw Sizing - Reflectors determined to be flaws shall be sized in accordance with a procedure
demonstrated to size similar flaws at similar material depths. A flaw may be sized by manually
analysis the data using sizing techniques that have been demonstrated on the calibration block.
The dimension of the flaw shall be determined by the size of the rectangle that fully contains the
,area of the flaw.
9.1.4 Flaw evaluation

Flaws shall be evaluated for acceptance using the applicable criteria of ASME B31 Case 181-2.
9.2 Acceptance criteria

Weld quality shall be judged on the basis of the acceptability criteria mentioned in ASME
B31 Case 181-2.
Page 1450 of 1823

Page 1451 of 1823
SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 6-78-0001 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
ISO - International Organization for Standardization

MR - Material Requisition
PO - Purchase Order
PR - Purchase Requisition
QMS - Quality Management System
QMS Standards Committee
Convener: Mr. S.K. Badlani
Members: Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar (Engg.)

Mr. R.K. Singh (SCM)
Mr. B. Biswas (SCM)
Mr. Ravindra Kumar (Const.)
Mr. Vinod Kumar (CQA)
Mr. Swapnil Vaishnav (Projects)
Page 1452 of 1823

CONTENTS
Clause Title Page

No.
1.0 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................ 4
2.0 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................ 4
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS .................................................................................................... 4
4.0 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM – GENERAL .............................................................. 4
5.0 QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................... 4
6.0 AUDITS ...................................................................................................................................... 7
7.0 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 7
Page 1453 of 1823

1.0 SCOPE
This specification establishes the Quality Management System requirements to be met by

BIDDER for following purpose:
 QMS requirements to be met by suppliers / contractors after award of work / during

contract execution.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Bidder
For the purpose of this specification, the word “BIDDER” means the person(s), firm,
company or organization who is under the process of being contracted by EIL / Owner for
delivery of some products (including service). The word is considered synonymous to
supplier, contractor or vendor.
2.2 Project Quality Plan
Document tailored from Standard Quality Management System Manual of BIDDER,

specifying how the quality requirements of the project will be met.
2.3 Owner
Owner means the owner of the project for which services / products are being purchased and
includes their representatives, successors and assignees.
6-78-0002 Specification for Documentation Requirements from Contractors

6-78-0003 Specification for Documentation Requirements from Suppliers
4.0 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM – GENERAL
Unless otherwise agreed with EIL / Owner, the BIDDER proposed quality system shall fully
satisfy all relevant requirements of ISO 9001 “Quality Management Systems –
Requirements.” Evidence of compliance shall be current certificate of quality system
registration to ISO 9001 or a recent compliance audit recommending registration from a
certification agency. The quality system shall provide the planned and systematic control of
all quality related activities for execution of contract. Implementation of the system shall be
in accordance with BIDDER’S Quality Manual and PROJECT specific Quality Plan.
5.0 QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
5.1 BIDDER shall prepare and submit for review / record, Project Quality Plan / Quality
Assurance Plan for contracted scope / job. The BIDDER’S Quality Plan shall address all of
the applicable elements of ISO 9001, identify responsible parties within BIDDER’S
organization, for the implementation / control of each area, reference the applicable
procedures used to control / assure each area, and verify the documents produced for each
area. The Project Quality Plan shall necessarily define control or make reference to the
relevant procedures, for design and engineering, purchase, documentation, record control,
bid evaluation, inspection, production / manufacturing, preservation, packaging and storage,
quality control at construction site, pre-commissioning, commissioning and handing over (as
applicable) in line with contract requirement and scope of work.
Page 1454 of 1823

5.2 BIDDER shall identify all specified or implied statutory and regulatory requirements and
communicate the same to all concerned in his organization and his sub contractor’s
organization for compliance.
5.3 BIDDER shall deploy competent and trained personnel for various activities for fulfillment
of PO / contract. BIDDER shall arrange adequate infrastructure and work environment to
ensure that the specification and quality of the deliverable are maintained.
5.4 BIDDER shall do the quality planning for all activities involved in delivery of order. The
quality planning shall cover as minimum the following:
 Resources
 Product / deliverable characteristics to be controlled.
 Process characteristics to ensure the identified product characteristics are realized
 Identification of any measurement requirements, acceptance criteria
 Records to be generated
 Need for any documented procedure
The quality planning shall result into the quality assurance plan, inspection and test plans
(ITPs) and job procedures for the project activities in the scope of bidder. These documents
shall be submitted to EIL / Owner for review / approval, before commencement of work.
5.5 Requirements for sub-ordering of outsourced items / sub-contracting / purchasing of services

specified in MR / contract / tender shall be adhered to. In general all outsourced items will be
from approved vendors of EIL. Wherever requirements are not specified, or approved sub
vendors do not exist, the sub-contractor shall establish and maintain a system for purchasing
/ sub-contracting to ensure that purchased product / service conforms to specified
requirements in concurrence with EIL / Owner. Criteria for selection of sub-contractor,
evaluation, re-evaluation, maintenance of purchasing data and verification of purchased
product (sub-contractor services), constitute important components of this requirement.
5.6 BIDDER shall plan and carry production and service provision under controlled conditions.
Controlled conditions shall include, as applicable
a) the availability of information that describes the characteristics of the product

b) the availability of work instructions
c) the use of suitable equipment
d) the availability and use of monitoring and measuring devices
e) the implementation of monitoring and measurement
f) the implementation of release, delivery and post-delivery activities
5.7 BIDDER shall validate any processes for production and service provision where resulting
output cannot be verified by subsequent monitoring and measurement. This includes any
process where deficiencies become apparent only after the product is in use or service has
been delivered.
5.8 BIDDER shall establish a system for identification and traceability of product / deliverable
throughout product realization. Product status with respect to inspection and testing
requirements shall be identified.
Page 1455 of 1823

5.9 BIDDER shall identify, verify, protect and safeguard EIL / Owner property (material /
document) provided for use or incorporation into the product. If any Owner / EIL property is
lost, damaged or otherwise found to be unsuitable for use, this shall be reported to the EIL /
Owner.
5.10 BIDDER shall ensure the conformity of product / deliverable during internal processing and
delivery to the intended destination. Requirements mentioned in the MR/ tender shall be
adhered to.
5.11 BIDDER shall establish system to ensure that inspection and testing activities are carried out
in line with requirements. Where necessary, measuring equipment shall be calibrated at
specified frequency, against national or international measurement standards; where no such
standard exists, the basis used for calibration shall be recorded. The measuring equipment
shall be protected from damage during handling, maintenance and storage.
5.12 BIDDER shall ensure effective monitoring, using suitable methods, of the processes
involved in production and other related processes for delivery of the scope of contract.
5.13 BIDDER shall monitor and measure the characteristics of the product / deliverable to verify
that product requirement has been met. The inspection (stage as well as final) by BIDDER
and EIL / Owner personnel shall be carried out strictly as per the approved ITPs or ITPs
forming part of the contract. Product release or service delivery shall not proceed until the
planned arrangements have been satisfactorily completed, unless otherwise approved by
relevant authority and where applicable by Owner / EIL.
5.14 BIDDER shall establish and maintain a documented procedure to ensure that the product
which does not conform to requirements is identified and controlled to prevent its unintended
use or delivery
5.15 All non-conformities (NCs) / deficiencies found by the BIDDER’S inspection / surveillance
staff shall be duly recorded, including their disposal action shall be recorded and resolved
suitably. Effective corrective actions shall be implemented by the BIDDER so that similar
NCs including deficiencies do not recur. The BIDDER shall take appropriate actions to
address the Risks and Opportunities in the project.
5.16 All deficiencies noticed and reported by EIL / Owner shall be analyzed by the BIDDER and
appropriate corrective actions shall be implemented. BIDDER shall intimate EIL / Owner of
all such corrective action implemented by him.
5.17 BIDDER should follow the standards, specifications and approved drawings. Concessions /
Deviations shall be allowed only in case of unavoidable circumstances. In such situations
Concession / deviation request must be made by the BIDDER through online system of EIL
eDMS. URL of EIL eDMS is http://edocx.eil.co.in/vportal.
5.18 BIDDER shall have documented procedure for control of documents.
5.19 All project records shall be carefully kept, maintained and protected for any damage or loss
until the project completion, then handed over to EIL / Owner as per contract requirement
(Refer Specification Nos. 6-78-0002 - Specification for Documentation Requirements from
Contractors and 6-78-0003 - Specification for Documentation Requirements from Suppliers),
or disposed as per relevant project procedure.
Page 1456 of 1823

6.0 AUDITS
BIDDER shall plan and carry out the QMS audit for the job. Quality audit programme shall
cover design, procurement, construction management and commissioning as applicable
including activities carried out by sub-vendors and sub-contractors. This shall be additional
to the certification body surveillance audits carried out under BIDDER’S own ISO 9001
certification scheme.
The audit programmes and audit reports shall be available with bidder for scrutiny by EIL /
Owner. EIL or Owner’s representative reserves the right to attend, as a witness, any audit
conducted during the execution of the WORKS.
In addition to above, EIL, Owner and third party appointed by EIL / Owner may also
perform Quality and Technical compliance audits. BIDDER shall provide assistance and
access to their systems and sub-contractor / vendor systems as required for this purpose.
Any deficiencies noted shall be immediately rectified by BIDDER.
7.0 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
BIDDER shall submit following QMS documents immediately after award of work (Within
one week) for record / review by EIL / Owner/ TPIA, as applicable.
 Organization chart (for complete organization structure and for the project)
 Project Quality Plan / Quality Assurance Plan
 Job specific Inspection Test Plans, if not attached with PR
 Job Procedures
 Inspection / Test Formats
In addition to above QMS documents, following documentation shall be maintained by the

BIDDER for submission to EIL / Owner on demand at any point of time during execution of
the project.
 Quality Manual
 Certificate of approval for compliance to ISO: 9001 standard
 Procedure for Control of Non-conforming Product
 Procedure for Control of Documents
 Sample audit report of the QMS internal and external audits conducted during last one
year
 Customer satisfaction reports from at least 2 customers,
 Project QMS audit report
 Technical audit reports for the project
 Corrective action report on the audits
Documents as specified above are minimum requirements. BIDDER shall submit any other
document / data required for completion of the job as per EIL / Owner instructions.
Page 1457 of 1823

Page 1458 of 1823
SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0002 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
DCI - Document Control Index

FOA - Fax of Acceptance
IC - Inspection Certificate
IRN - Inspection Release Note
ITP - Inspection and Test Plan
LOA - Letter of Acceptance
URL - Universal Resource Locator
V Portal- Vendor Portal

Mr. B. Biswas (SCM)
Page 1459 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0002 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTENTS
Clause Title Page No.

1.0 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................ 4
2.0 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................ 4
4.0 DOCUMENTATION AND DATA REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 4
Attachments
Format for completeness of Final Documentation : Format No. 3-78-0004
Page 1460 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0002 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
1.0 SCOPE
This specification establishes the Documentation Requirements from Contractors
All documents / data against the Tender / Contract shall be developed and submitted to EIL /
Owner by the contractor for review / records, in line with this specification.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Contractor
For the purpose of this specification, the word “CONTRACTOR” means the person(s), firm,
company or organization who has entered into a contract with EIL / Owner for delivery of
some products and services. The word is considered synonymous to bidder, supplier or
vendor.
2.2 Owner

Bidders
4.0 DOCUMENTATION AND DATA REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Order Acknowledgement and Assigning Project Manager
After placement of order, Contractor shall acknowledge order through V-Portal within 7 days
of receipt of FOA / PO. Contractor shall assign a Project Manager for that order though
online portal and provide requisite details. Project Manager details shall include e-mail
address, mailing address, mobile / telephone nos., fax nos. and name of Project Manager. All
the system generated emails pertaining to that order shall be sent to the assigned Project
Manager.
4.2 Documents / Data to be submitted by the Contractor
4.2.1 The contractor shall submit the documents and data against the Tender / Contract as per the
list specified in respective Tender / Contract.
4.2.2 Review of the contractor drawings / Documents by EIL would be only to review the
compatibility with basic designs and concepts and in no way absolve the contractor of his
responsibility / contractual obligation to comply with Tender / Contract requirements,
applicable codes, specifications and statutory rules / regulations. Any error / deficiency
noticed during any stage of manufacturing / execution / inspection / installation shall be
promptly corrected by the contractor without any extra cost or time, whether or not comments
on the same were received from EIL during the drawing review / inspection stage.
4.2.3 Unless otherwise specified, submission of documents for Review / Records shall commence
as follows from the date of Fax of Intent / Letter of Intent/ Fax of Acceptance (FOA) / Letter
of Acceptance (LOA):
Page 1461 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0002 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
QMS - 1 week
Document Control Index - 2 weeks
Other Documents/Drawings - As per approved Document Control Index
4.2.4 Documents as specified in Tender / Contract are minimum requirements. Contractor shall
submit any other document / data required for completion of the job as per EIL / Owner
instructions.
4.3 Style and Formatting
4.3.1 All Documents shall be in ENGLISH language and in M.K.S System of units.
4.3.2 Before submitting the drawings and documents, contractor shall ensure that the following
information are properly entered in each drawing:
Tender Number
Name of Equipment / Package
Equipment / Package Tag No.
Name of Project
Owner
Main Contractor (if work is sub-contracted)
Drawing / Document Title
Drawing / Document No.
Drawing / Document Revision No. and Date
4.4 Review and Approval of Documents by Contractor
4.4.1 The Drawing / Documents shall be reviewed, checked, approved and duly signed / stamped by
contractor before submission. Revision number shall be changed during submission of the
revised contractor documents and all revisions shall be highlighted by clouds. Whenever the
contractor require any sub- contractor drawings to be reviewed by EIL, the same shall be
submitted by the contractor duly reviewed, approved and stamped by the contractor. Direct
submission of sub- contractor’s drawings without contractor’s approval shall not be
entertained.
4.5 Document Category
4.5.1 Review Category
Following review codes shall be used for review of contractor Drawings / Documents:
Review Code 1 - No comments. Proceed with Manufacture /

Fabrication / Construction as per the document.
Review Code 2 - Proceed with Manufacture / Fabrication / Construction
as per commented document. Revised document
required.
Review Code 3 - Document does not conform to basic requirements as
marked. Resubmit for review.
R - Document is retained for Records. Proceed with
Manufacturing / fabrication as per Tender/ Contract
Requirement.
V - Void
Page 1462 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0002 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
4.6 Methodology for Submission of Documents to EIL / Owner
4.6.1 Document Control Index (DCI)

Contractor shall create and submit Document Control Index (DCI) for review based on PO /
PR / MR along with schedule date of submission of each drawing / document on EIL Vendor
Portal. The DCI shall be specific with regard to drawing / document no. and the exact title.
Proper sequencing of the drawings / documents should be ensured in schedule date of
submission.
4.6.2 Submission of Drawings / Documents / Data

Drawings / documents, data and DCI shall be uploaded on the EIL Vendor Portal. The detail
guidelines for uploading documents on EIL Vendor Portal are available on following URL
http://edocx.eil.co.in/vportal
4.6.3 Statutory Approvals

Wherever approval by any statutory body is required to be taken by Contractor, the Contractor
shall submit copy of approval by the authority to EIL.
4.6.4 Schedule and Progress Reporting
Contractor shall submit monthly progress report (MPR) and updated procurement, engineering
and manufacturing status (schedule vs. actual) and highlight constraints, if any, along with
action plan for mitigation, to the EIL / Owner by 1st week of every month. One month Look-
ahead schedule including the mobilization plan shall be submitted within 2 weeks from FOA /
LOA. In case of exigencies, EIL / Owner can ask for report submission as required on weekly
/ fortnightly / adhoc basis depending upon supply status and contractor shall furnish such
reports promptly without any price implication. Format for progress report shall be submitted
by the contractor during kick off meeting or within one week of receiving FOA / LOA,
whichever is earlier.
4.6.5 Quality Assurance Plan / Inspection and Test Plan

Inspection and test plans attached if any, to the tender are generic and indicative only.
Immediately after receipt of the order, contractor shall submit within one week of receiving
FOA / LOA, job specific ITPs based on the indicative ITPs. Further, contractor shall also
submit Quality Assurance Plan for project activities in the scope of contract, starting from
manufacturing to handing over / commissioning, these plans shall cover / identify the activities,
relevant procedure, if any, code of conformance, resources for performance and checking /
monitoring, approval requirements and authority, records to be generated and audit scope by
EIL/Owner.
For EPCC / LSTK / Package contracts, the contractor shall prepare a list of items / equipment
and their inspection categorization plans for all items included in the scope of supply
immediately after receipt of order and obtain approval for the same from EIL. The items shall
be categorized into different categories depending upon their criticality for the scope of
inspection of TPIA and / or EIL.
4.6.6 Inspection Release Note (IRN)/ Inspection Certificate (IC)

Contractor shall ensure that all documents viz. documents reviewed, manufacture’s test
certificate etc., mentioned in Inspection Release Note (IRN), issued by EIL / third party against
the materials supplied by contractor, are sent to EIL along with the IRN.
Page 1463 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0002 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
IRN / IC shall be issued by EIL Inspector / third party inspection agency only after all the
drawings/documents as per DCI are submitted and are accepted under review code-1 & code
R. Material / Equipment dispatch from contractor’s / sub vendor’s works shall not commence
till above condition is met.
Note 1: Non fulfilling above requirement shall result into appropriate penalty or with- holding
of payment as per conditions of Tender / Contract.
Note 2: For items where IRN/IC is issued by TPIA, supplier to ensure that following as a
minimum must be mentioned by TPIA in IRN/IC
a) Tender document number
b) List of drawings / documents with EIL approval code
c) Tests witnessed, documents reviewed
d) Compliance statement by TPIA that product meets the requirement as specified in EIL
standard specifications, Inspection Test Plan / QAP and approved documents.
4.6.7 Pre Commissioning & Commissioning Activities Management System (PCAMS)

Pre Commissioning & Commissioning activities management system software shall be
followed for Mechanical completion, check listing of loops, punch points, hydro test and issue
of Formats during the Pre Commissioning and Commissioning activities and the same can be
accessed on following URL
https://pcams.eil.co.in/
4.7 Final Documentation

4.7.1 As built Drawings
Minor Shop / Site changes made by contractor after approval of drawings under ‘Code 1’ by
EIL and deviations granted through online system , if any, shall be marked in hard copies of
drawings which shall then be stamped ‘As-built’ by the contractor. These ‘As-built’ drawings
shall be reviewed and stamped by EIL Inspector / Site engineer / TPIA also, as the case may
be. Format for completeness of final documents (Format No. 3-78-0004) is attached with this
specification. Contractor shall prepare scanned images files of all marked – up ‘As – built’
drawings. Simultaneously contractor shall incorporate the shop / site changes in the native soft
files of the drawings also.
4.7.2 As built Final Documents

As built final documents shall be submitted as listed in Tender / Contract
4.7.3 Packing / Presentation of Final Documents

Final Documents shall be legible photocopies in A4, A3 size only. Drawings will be inserted
in plastic pockets (both sides transparent, sheet thickness minimum 0.1 mm) with an extra strip
of 12 mm wide for punching so that drawings are well placed.
Final Documentation shall be bound in hard board plastic folder(s) of size 265 mm x 315 mm
(101/2 inch x 121/2 inch) and shall not be more that 75 mm thick. It may be of several volumes
and each volume shall have a volume number, index of volumes and index of contents of that
particular volume. Where numbers of volumes are more, 90mm thickness can be used. Each
volume shall have top PVC sheet of minimum 0.15 mm thick duly fixed and pressed on folder
cover and will have 2 lever clips. In case of imported items documents, 4 lever clip shall also
be accepted. All four corners of folders shall be properly metal clamped. Indexing of contents
with page numbering must be incorporated by contractor. Spiral / Spico bound documents
shall not be acceptable. As mentioned above, books should be in hard board plastic folders
with sheets punched and having 2/4 lever clips arrangement.
Page 1464 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0002 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
Each volume shall contain on cover a title block indicating Tender No., name of project, name
of customer, package equipment tag no. & name (if applicable). Each volume will have hard
front cover and a reinforced spine to fit thickness of book. These spines will also have the title
printed on them. Title shall include also volume number (say 11 of 15) etc.
4.7.4 Submission of Soft copies

Contractor shall submit to EIL, the scanned images files as well as the native files of drawings
/ documents, along with proper index.
In addition to hard copies, contractor shall submit soft copies of all the final drawings and
documents in pen drive or any other specified medium with proper identification tag, all text
documents prepared on computer, scanned images of all important documents (not available
as soft files), all relevant catalogues, manuals available as soft files (editable copies of drawings
/ text documents, while for catalogues / manuals / proprietary information and data PDF files
can be furnished).
All the above documents shall also be uploaded on the EIL Vendor Portal and if applicable on
Client Server also.
4.7.5 Completeness of Final Documentation

Contractor shall get the completeness of final documentation verified by EIL / TPIA and attach
the Format for Completeness of Final Documentation (Format No. 3-78-0004) duly signed by
EIL or TPIA as applicable to the final document folder.
Page 1465 of 1823

COMPLETENESS OF FINAL
DOCUMENTATION
Page 1 of 2
COMPLETENESS OF FINAL DOCUMENTATION
Name of Supplier/Contractor :
Customer :
Project :
EIL’s Job No. :
Purchase Order No./ :
Contract No.
Purchase Requisition No./ :

Tender No. Rev. No. :
Name of the Work/ Equipment :
Tag. No. :
Supplier’s / Contractor’s Works :
Order No.
Certified that the Engineering Documents / Manufacturing & Test Certificates submitted by the
supplier (as per Index sheet mentioned in Annexure-1) are complete in accordance with the Vendor
Data Requirements of Purchase Requisition / Tender.
Signature : ………………………………. Signature : ……………………………….

Date : ………………………………. Date : ……………………………….
Name : …………………………….. Name : ……………………………..
Designation : ……………………………… Designation : ………………………………
Department : ……………………………… Department : ………………………………
Supplier / Contractor EIL / TPIA
Format No. 3-78-0004, Rev. 2/ 12.06.2020 Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 1466 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
Page 2 of 2
Annexure-1
Final Documentation Index Sheet

PR/PO/Tender Rev. No.
No.
Serial No. Document Title Page/ No. of Pages

Folder No.

Date : ………………………………. Date : ……………………………….
Name : …………………………….. Name : ……………………………..
Page 1467 of 1823

Page 1468 of 1823
DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0003 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
DCI - Document Control Index

eDMS - Electronic Document Management System
FOA - Fax of Acceptance
IC - Inspection Certificate
IRN - Inspection Release Note
ITP - Inspection and Test Plan
LOA - Letter of Acceptance
MR - Material Requisition
PO - Purchase Order
PR - Purchase Requisition
PVC - Polyvinyl Chloride
QAP - Quality Assurance Plan
RPO - Regional Procurement Office
TPIA - Third Party Inspection Agency
URL - Universal Resource Locator
V-Portal- Vendor Portal

Mr. B. Biswas (SCM)
Page 1469 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0003 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTENTS
Clause Title Page No.

1.0 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................ 4
2.0 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................ 4
4.0 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 4
Attachments
Format for completeness of Final Documentation : Format No. 3-78-0004
Page 1470 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0003 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
1.0 SCOPE
This specification establishes the Documentation Requirements from Suppliers.
All documents / data against the PO / PR / MR shall be developed and submitted to EIL /
Owner by the suppliers for review / records, in line with this specification.
2.0 DEFINITIONS
2.1 Supplier
For the purpose of this specification, the word “SUPPLIER” means the person(s), firm,
company or organization who has entered into a contract with EIL / Owner for delivery of
some products (including service). The word is considered synonymous to bidder, contractor
or vendor.
2.2 Owner

Bidders
4.0 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Order Acknowledgement and Assigning Project Manager
After placement of order, Supplier shall acknowledge order through V-Portal within 7 days
of receipt of FOA / PO. Supplier shall assign a Project Manager for that order though online
portal and provide requisite details. Project Manager details shall include e-mail address,
mailing address, mobile/telephone nos., fax nos. and name of Project Manager. All the
system generated emails pertaining to that order shall be sent to the assigned Project
Manager.
4.2 Documents / Data to be submitted by the Supplier
4.2.1 The Supplier shall submit the documents and data against the PO / PR / MR as per the list
given in respective PO / PR / MR.
4.2.2 Review of the supplier drawings / documents by EIL would be only to review the
compatibility with basic designs and concepts and in no way absolve the supplier of his
responsibility / contractual obligation to comply with PR requirements, applicable codes,
specifications and statutory rules / regulations. Any error / deficiency noticed during any
stage of manufacturing / execution / inspection/ installation shall be promptly corrected by
the supplier without any time and cost implications, irrespective of comments on the same
were received from EIL during the drawing review stage or not.
Page 1471 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0003 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
4.2.3 Unless otherwise specified, submission of documents for Review / Records shall commence
as follows from the date of Fax of Intent / Letter of Intent / Fax of Acceptance (FOA) / Letter
of Acceptance (LOA):
QMS - 1 week
Document Control Index - 2 weeks
Other Documents / Drawings - As per approved Document Control Index
4.2.4 Documents as specified in PO / PR / MR are minimum requirements. Supplier shall submit

any other document / data required for completion of the job as per EIL / Owner instructions.
4.3 Style and Formatting
4.3.1 All Documents shall be in ENGLISH language and in M.K.S System of units.
4.3.2 Before forwarding the drawings and documents, contractor shall ensure that the following
information are properly mentioned in each drawing:
Purchase Requisition Number
Name of Equipment / Package
Equipment / Package Tag No.
Name of Project
Client
Drawing / Document Title
Drawing / Document No.
Drawing / Document Revision No. and Date
4.4 Review and Approval of Documents by Supplier
4.4.1 The Drawing / Documents shall be reviewed, checked, approved and duly signed / stamped by
supplier before submission. Revision number shall be changed during submission of the
revised supplier documents and all revisions shall be highlighted by clouds. Whenever the
supplier require any sub-supplier drawings to be reviewed by EIL, the same shall be submitted
by the supplier duly reviewed, approved and stamped by the supplier. Direct submission of
sub-supplier’s drawings without contractor’s / suppliers’ approval shall not be entertained.
4.5 Document Category
4.5.1 Review Category
Following review codes shall be used for review of supplier Drawings / Documents:
Review Code 1 - No comments. Proceed with Manufacture /

Fabrication as per the document.
Review Code 2 - Proceed with Manufacture / Fabrication as per
commented document. Revised document
required.
Review Code 3 - Document does not conform to basic requirements as
marked. Resubmit for review.
R - Document is retained for Records. Proceed with

Manufacturing / Fabrication as per PR / Tender
requirements.
V - Void
Page 1472 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0003 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
4.6 Methodology for Submission of Documents to EIL/Owner
4.6.1 Document Control Index (DCI)
Supplier shall create and submit Document Control Index (DCI) for review based on PO / PR
/ MR along with schedule date of submission of each drawing / document on EIL Vendor
Portal. The DCI shall be specific with regard to drawing / document no. and the exact title.
Proper sequencing of the drawings / documents should be ensured in schedule date of
submission.
4.6.2 Submission of Drawings / Documents / Data

Drawings / documents, data and DCI shall be uploaded on the EIL Vendor Portal as per
approved DCI. The detailed guidelines for uploading documents on EIL Vendor Portal are
available on following URL
http://edocx.eil.co.in/vportal
4.6.3 Statutory Approvals
Wherever approval by any statutory body is required to be taken by Supplier, the Supplier shall
submit copy of approval by the authority to EIL.
4.6.4 Manufacturing Schedule
Supplier shall prepare manufacturing schedule for the order, with key milestone activities (such
as document submission, sub ordering, manufacturing, Inspection, dispatches, etc) to meet
delivery as per FOA / PO terms. Supplier shall submit manufacturing schedule to concerned
Regional Procurement Office (RPO) of EIL / Owner for review within 2 weeks from date of
FOA / PO.
4.6.5 Schedule and Progress Reporting
Supplier shall submit monthly progress (MPR) report and updated procurement, engineering,
manufacturing status, Inspection and dispatch status (schedule vs. actual) and highlight
constraints, if any, along with action plan for mitigation, to the concerned Regional
Procurement Office (RPO) of EIL / Owner by 1st week of every month., First MPR shall be
submitted within 2 weeks from FOA / LOA. In case of exigencies, EIL / Owner can ask for
report submission as required on weekly / fortnightly / adhoc basis depending upon supply
status and supplier shall furnish such reports promptly without any price implication. Format
for progress report shall be submitted by the Supplier during kick off meeting or within 2 weeks
of receiving FOA / LOA, whichever is earlier.
4.7 Inspection and Testing
4.7.1 Quality Assurance Plan / Inspection and Test Plan

If Inspection and test plans (ITP) are attached with MR / PR same shall be followed along with
additional tests requirement (if any) mentioned in MR/ PR. However for cases wherein EIL
Standard ITPs not available / have not been attached with MR / PR, Supplier shall submit
within one week of receiving FOA / LOA, the Quality Assurance Plan for inspection & testing
at various stages of production, quality control records for critical bought out items / materials
and site assembly & testing as may be applicable to the specific order and obtain approval from
concerned Regional procurement Office of EIL / third party inspection agency, as applicable.
Page 1473 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0003 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
For Package equipment contracts, the supplier shall prepare a list of items / equipment and
their inspection categorization plan for all items included in the scope of supply immediately
after receipt of order and obtains approval for the same from EIL. The items shall be
categorized into different categories depending upon their criticality for the scope of inspection
of TPIA and / or EIL.
4.7.2 Inspection Requisition:
Supplier shall perform internal inspection as per ITP/ approved QAP at their works based on
approved documents / drawings. Upon satisfactory internal inspection, supplier shall raise
inspection call to concerned Regional Procurement Office (RPO) of EIL / TPIA / Owner with
advance notice as per contract along with Internal test reports.
All changes w.r.t. PR shall be recorded through agreed variations or Concessions & Deviations.
Conflict, if any, between PR / Job specifications and approved drawings, shall be brought to
the notice of EIL / owner by the supplier / contractor. Decision of EIL / owner will be binding
on the supplier and to be complied without time and cost implications.
Identified bought out items/ raw material shall be procured under TPIA as per ITP.
4.7.3 Inspection Release Note (IRN)/ Inspection Certificate (IC)
IRN / IC shall be issued by EIL Inspector / third party inspection agency on successful
inspection, review of test reports / certificates as per specifications & ITP / agreed quality plan
(as applicable) and only after all the drawings / documents as per DCI are submitted and are
accepted under review code-1 or code R. Supplier shall ensure that necessary documents /
manufacturing and test certificates are made available to EIL / TPIA as and when desired.
Note 1: Non fulfilling above requirement shall result into appropriate penalty or with- holding
of payment as per conditions of PO / PR / MR.
Note 2: For items where IRN/IC is issued by TPIA, supplier to ensure that following as a
minimum must be mentioned by TPIA in IRN / IC
a) PR document number
b) List of drawings / documents with EIL approval code
c) Tests witnessed, documents reviewed
d) Compliance statement by TPIA that product meets the requirement as specified in
EIL PR, standard specifications, Inspection Test Plan / QAP and approved
documents.
4.8 Transportation Plan

Transportation Plan for Over Dimensional Consignments (ODC), if any, shall be submitted
within 2 weeks of receiving FOA / LOA, for approval. Consignment with parameters greater
than following shall be considered as over dimensional.
Dimensions: 4 meters width x 4 meters height x 20 meters length
Weight : 32 MT
Dimensions and weight provided above are inclusive of all nozzles, attachments, transportation
saddles etc.
Page 1474 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0003 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
Physical Rout survey for ODC movement shall be submitted to EIL within 8 weeks of
receiving FOA / LOA.
4.9 Dispatch Details

Upon receipt of IRN / IC from EIL inspector / TPIA, supplier shall dispatch items within 2
days. Supplier shall submit dispatch details to concerned RPO of EIL / Owner within a day of
dispatch. Dispatch details shall include Lorry Receipt (LR) number / Dispatch Number,
Transporter Name, Date of dispatch, Packing list, Invoice copy etc.
4.10.1 Supplier shall prepare final documents in line with VDR (Vendor Document Requirements)
attached with PR/Tender. A copy of final document along with filled in Format for
Completeness of Final Documentation (Format No. 3-78-0004) to be submitted to EIL
Inspector / TPIA for review & approval within 2 weeks from dispatch. Upon receipt of
EIL/TPIA endorsement on Completeness of Final Documents, supplier shall submit soft / hard
copies of Final documents to EIL / Owner in requisite quantity as per PO / PR details, along
with covering letter. A copy of covering letter to be submitted to the concerned Regional
Procurement Office (RPO) of EIL/Owner.
4.10.2 As Built Drawings
Minor Shop changes made by Supplier after approval of drawings under ‘Code 1’ by EIL and
deviations granted through online system ,if any, shall be marked in hard copies of drawings
which shall then be stamped ‘As-built’ by the supplier. These ‘As-built’ drawings shall be
reviewed and stamped by EIL Inspector / TPIA. Supplier shall prepare scanned images files
of all marked – up ‘As – built’ drawings. Simultaneously Supplier shall incorporate the shop
changes in the native soft files of the drawings also.
4.10.3 Packing / Presentation of Final Documents
Final Documents shall be legible photocopies in A4, A3 size only. Drawings will be inserted
in plastic pockets (both sides transparent, sheet thickness minimum 0.1 mm) with an extra strip
of 12 mm wide for punching so that drawings are well placed.
Final Documentation shall be bound in Hard board Plastic folder(s) of size 265 mm x 315 mm
(101/2 inch x 121/2 inch) and shall not be more that 75 mm thick. It may be of several volumes
and each volume shall have a volume number, index of volumes and index of contents of that
particular volume. Where number of volumes are more, 90mm thickness can be used. Each
volume shall have top PVC sheet of minimum 0.15 mm thick duly fixed and pressed on folder
cover and will have 2 lever clip. In case of imported items documents, 4 lever clip shall also
be accepted. All four corners of folders shall be properly metal clamped. Indexing of contents
with page numbering must be incorporated by supplier. Spiral/Spico bound documents shall
not be acceptable. As mentioned above, books should be in hard board plastic folders with
sheets punched and having 2/4 lever clips arrangement.
Each volume shall contain on cover a Title Block indicating package Equipment Tag No. &
Name, PO / Purchase Requisition No., Name of Project and Name of Customer. Each volume
will have hard front cover and a reinforced spine to fit thickness of book. These spines will
also have the title printed on them. Title shall include also volume number (say 11 of 15) etc.
4.10.4 Submission of Soft Copies
Supplier shall submit to EIL, the scanned images files as well as the native files of drawings /
documents, along with proper index.
In addition to hard copies, Supplier shall submit soft copies of all the final drawings and
documents in pen drive or any other specified medium with proper identification tag, all text
documents prepared on computer, scanned images of all important documents (not available
Page 1475 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
6-78-0003 Rev. 2
REQUIREMENTS FROM
as soft files), all relevant catalogues, manuals available as soft files (editable copies of
drawings/text documents, while for catalogues / manuals / proprietary information and data,
PDF files can be furnished).
All the above documents shall also be uploaded on the EIL Vendor Portal and if applicable on
Client Server also.
4.10.5 Completeness of Final Documentation
Supplier shall get the completeness of final documentation verified by EIL / TPIA, as
applicable, and attach the Format for Completeness of Final Documentation (Format No. 3-78-
0004) duly signed by EIL Inspector or TPIA as applicable to the final document folder.
Page 1476 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
Page 1 of 2
COMPLETENESS OF FINAL DOCUMENTATION
Name of Supplier/Contractor :
Customer :
Project :
EIL’s Job No. :
Purchase Order No./ :
Contract No.
Purchase Requisition No./ :

Tender No. Rev. No. :
Name of the Work/ Equipment :
Tag. No. :
Supplier’s / Contractor’s Works :
Order No.
Certified that the Engineering Documents / Manufacturing & Test Certificates submitted by the
supplier (as per Index sheet mentioned in Annexure-1) are complete in accordance with the Vendor
Data Requirements of Purchase Requisition / Tender.

Date : ………………………………. Date : ……………………………….
Name : …………………………….. Name : ……………………………..
Page 1477 of 1823

DOCUMENTATION
Page 2 of 2
Annexure-1
Final Documentation Index Sheet

PR/PO/Tender Rev. No.
No.
Serial No. Document Title Page/ No. of Pages

Folder No.

Date : ………………………………. Date : ……………………………….
Name : …………………………….. Name : ……………………………..
Page 1478 of 1823

STANDARD SPECIFICATON
INDIA LIMITED FOR
• /1 s • 1 1,, 1
HSE REQUIREMENTS FOR 6-79-0024 Rev. 0
REFRACTORY Page 1 of 8
114)ci-d FarTz;zr, To. 3ft-{.

q rdf4W
FOR
HSE REQUIREMENTS FOR
REFRACTORY
0 19-07-2019 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPEC PP BS PS

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 1479 of 1823

STANDARD SPECIFICATON STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS FOR
fellitegW INDIA LIMITED 6-79-0024 Rev. 0
(WM 2.170,1Z MIJWISSI) (A Govt of India Undertaking) HSE REQUIREMENTS FOR
Abbreviations
HSE Health Safety and Environment
MSDS Material Safety Datasheet
PPE Personal Protective Equipment
RCF Refractory Ceramic Fibre
Refractory & Insulation Standards Committee
Convenor : Mr Prasenjit Saha
Members :
Mr Biswarup Sarkar
Mr P. Pal
Mr Udayan Chakravarty (Piping)
Mr Prag Goel (Fired Heaters)
Mr Ayush Mathur (Projects)
Mr Tarun Kumar (Equip Div)
Mr Neeraj Mathur (Inspection)
Dr Arijit Roy (Materials & Corrosion)
Mr Neeraj Rai (Pipeline)
Mr Ravindra Kumar (Construction)
Page 1480 of 1823

Ofaziei ENGINEERS FOR
0g-aRae?!
EP& W INDIA LIMITED 6-79-0024 Rev. 0
elielaZ analeim)
(A Gout of India Undertaking) HSE REQUIREMENTS FOR
CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION 4
2.0 GENERAL 4
3.0 REFRACTIORY TYPES 4
4.0 HSE FOR REFRACTORY HANDLING 5
5.0 JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS FOR REFRACTORY WORK 5
6.0 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN AND DISPOSAL 7
Page 1481 of 1823

ENGINEERS FOR
m -eg
Igar idfl-j
'
INIPPY eiETUR,
1313c10571)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaiong) HSE REQUIREMENTS FOR
6-79-0024 Rev. 0
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
This specification outlines the Health and safety issues pertaining to handling refractory
materials and waste generated during installation of refractory and /or removal of spent lining
after service with an objective to minimize risk of the potential hazards.
The guideline mentioned in this specification is meant for compliance by the contractors who
are involved in supply, installation, removal of refractory lining.
2.0 GENERAL
Refractory materials are generally composed of non metallic oxides like A1203,Si02, MgO,
Na20, K20 etc. which may contain varying degree of other constituents like high alumina
cement and chemical binders. Risks associated are different with different materials depending
on its mineralogical constituents, fineness etc.
The potential risks associated in handling a particular material are usually addressed in the
MSDS (material safety datasheets) provided by refractory supplier. The contractor responsible
for the job must categorize the materials according to the risks involved and comply to the
requirements specified in MSDS with respect to HSE requirements for the employees and
environment.
The contractor shall submit MSDS to owner/ PMC for review and carry out a job safety
analysis for compliance to MSDS and project/ client specific HSE requirements.
3.0 REFRACTIORY TYPES
3.1 Refractory Brick
Refractory bricks which are used in Oil and gas are generally based on aluminosilicate.
Respirable dust from these products may contain crystalline silica, which is known to cause
respiratory disease. With respect to hazardous material identification system, the material is
not reactive, non-flammable and no adverse effects of this material on the environment are
anticipated.
3.2 Refractory Castable
Refractory castable which are generally used, are based on aluminosilicate cement bonded
castable or High alumina chemically bonded castable. Prolonged or repeated inhalation of
dusts of this product may cause lung disease (Silicosis). The product is stable under normal
conditions and hazardous decomposition or polymerization does not occur. No adverse effects
of this material'on the environment are anticipated.
3.3 Ceramic Fiber Material
Refractory ceramic fibre (RCF) which is used for insulation, particularly in kilns and furnaces,
is a form of man-made vitreous (silicate) fibre and consists of alumino-silicate fibres which
can irritate the skin, eyes and upper respiratory tract but the main concern is that the individual
fibres are small enough to penetrate deep into the lungs and possibly lead to the development
of lung cancer and mesothelioma. An additional problem for users with ceramic fiber is that
after being exposed to high temperatures for prolonged periods as can happen in kilns and
furnaces, it is known that RCF at the surface of the lining devitrifies to crystalline phases
including cristobalite, a form of crystalline silica which can cause silicosis.
Page 1482 of 1823

loi eit4 ENGINEERS FOR
ta en tameg
1.2,, e:12,15re ,01.3P0.1)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot Inca Undertakng) HSE REQUIREMENTS FOR
6-79-0024 Rev. 0
Ceramic fiber is inert, stable and it is not soluble with water and as such does not pose
detrimental effect on environment.
4.0 HSE FOR REFRACTORY HANDLING
4.1 General
The contractor executing the job shall be responsible for hazard identification and job safety
analysis with respect to handling and application of various refractory types. All staff involved
with refractory works and related activities should be provided safety induction and briefed
about the risks and mitigation, first aid as per MSDS by refractory supplier.
4.2 All the staff will be provided with overalls, and anti-dust mask, in order to avoid inhalations of
noxious dust. All the staff in charge of the works will wear necessary PPE like helmet,
accident-prevention shoes, eye protection and protective gloves, etc.
4.3 Environmental protection should minimize the waste generated and impact by a specific
segregation of difference type of waste, compaction and storage.
4.4 Barriers need to be installed around the installation area and area destined for handling of such
material. Signage indicating danger and no-entry for unauthorized persons need to be put up at
the barriers. General transit should not be allowed in the installation area, due to possible
falling down of harmful elements.
4.5 Operators of gunning machine or paddle mixer and brick cutting machine must be competent,
experienced people, and operate strictly as per approved operation procedure or manuals. The
machines need to be checked regularly for good condition as per check list and certificate
5.0 JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS FOR REFRACTORY WORK
The refractory lining in furnace or high temperature equipment broadly includes lining
materials like refractory brick, castable and ceramic fiber. The general risks associated during
execution of those refractory works, potential hazard and current precautionary measures are
tabulated below. The entire work force should be trained for fall protection and confined space
working. Scaffolding should be checked and tagged prior to use, and related safety manual
shall be implemented according to the project HSE requirement. While working in confined
space air condition should be checked by certified tester.
Description Potential HSE Current precautionary

People at risk
of the Job hazard measures
• Ensure that access is not
blocked by the other materials,
meanwhile keep the view clear
and be careful of the loading
the material.
• Pay attention to loading the
material in good order and the
Refractory
Stumble and slip Working people stack of the container not
material
when carrying the and site higher than the plate of the
transport from
material personnel truck
storage
• Assign Flag man with the red
vest to guide the driver
• Use the correct tie connection
of the rope to secure the
material to prevent the material
fall from the truck.
Page 1483 of 1823

ENGINEERS FOR
1854--eg w INDIA LIMITED
12,610,10A) IA Govt of India Undertaking) HSE REQUIREMENTS FOR
6-79-0024 Rev. 0
Description Potential HSE Current precautionary

People at risk
of the Job hazard measures
• Blasting work should be by
experienced person, and
operate strictly as operation
Suffocated injury procedure
Surface
and hurt by pressure Operator • Regularly check that the
preparation
in case blasting sandblasting machine is in good
condition
• Ensure mechanical ventilation,
and use respirators
• All the castable material should
be well stored with good
ventilation conditions
Injury hurt by
• Regularly check the condition
machine, bad
Operator, Site of the machine as per check list
Castable ventilation, bags
worker and and certificate
mixing catching fire, Skin
personnel • Put warning signs on the
contamination,
storage and keep fire
Inhalation
extinguishers
• Put MSDS at the working and
storage location
• The operator of Refractory
gunning machine should be an
experienced person, and
operate strictly as operation
Castable procedure
Injury hurt by
gunning,
machine, bad • Regularly check the condition
casting, hand Site workers and
ventilation, Skin of the machine as per check list
packing, Personnel
contamination, and certificate
Vibracasting
Inhalation • The working area should be
etc.
barricaded, and have suitable
s ignage
• Worker should wear correct
PPE and dust mask
Occupational • Check the effect with respect to
diseases MSDS
(Eyes and skin • Worker should wear correct
Ceramic fiber Site workers and
irritation, PPE and proper respiratory
Installation Personnel
respiratory mucous mask
membrane • Good housekeeping and
irritation) material management
• During brick installation the
silica dust is created by the use
of power saws cutting the
bricks. Silica dust is a serious
health threat. Use wet saws
Brick Skin contamination, Site workers and whenever possible when cutting
installation Inhalation Personnel brick.
• Worker should wear correct
PPE and proper respiratory
mask
• Good housekeeping and
material management
Page 1484 of 1823

lot eatl ENGINEERS FOR
Ogem 2M-eg INDIA LIMITED 6-79-0024 Rev. 0
0 Govt of India Undertaking) HSE REQUIREMENTS FOR
6.0 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN AND DISPOSAL
6.1 General
Material safety datasheet of refractory materials should be checked and there should be
awareness about the effect to people and environment, hazardous identification, first aid and
fire fighting measures. Management of waste is an integral component of management of
environment. Waste refractories which are intended to be disposed can be done with the
following manners:
(a) Reusable portion of salvaged refractories can be recycled

(b) Broken pieces can be recycled/sold to outside parties
(c) Remaining debris can be dumped as a waste at some authorized disposal sites.
6.1.1 Do not handle the waste until all the safety precautions have been read and understood.
Dispose the waste in accordance with local/regional/national/international HSE regulations.
6.1.2 The waste should be removed from site as soon as possible.
6.1.3 The cleaner should wear proper PPE when entering site.
6.1.4 The waste should be thrown into the assigned area; and should not set on fire.
6.1.5 Barriers need to be installed around the disposing area and area destined for handling of such
material. Signage indicating danger and no-entry for unauthorized persons need to be put up at
the barriers, while the work is in progress.
6.2 Disposal of Waste Refractory Bricks
6.2.1 The unused refractory brick is not considered a hazardous waste. The material may be
recycled back to manufacturer or can be used for land filling.
6.2.2 For used refractory brick (for example in revamp work), disposal method shall be consulted
with client. Refractory exposed to the furnace environment may have contaminations due to
exposure to fuels and process conditions, hence client shall advise specific disposal method.
6.2.3 Avoid creating dust during handling, use or storage of this product. Do not breathe dust that
may be created during the handling or use of this product.
6.3 Disposal of Waste Refractory Castable
6.3.1 The as manufactured refractory, dust or hydraulically set castable is not considered as
hazardous waste. The material can be used for land filling.
6.3.2 For used refractory castable (for example in revamp work), disposal method shall be consulted
with client. Refractory exposed to the furnace environment may have contaminations due to
exposure to fuels and process conditions, hence client shall advise specific disposal method.
6.3.3 During handling, minimize dust, sweep, shovel or vacuum. Watch footing if particles fall onto
walkways. Avoid direct contact with the product by wearing protective clothing, using
approved respiratory protection and wearing gloves of the impermeable type.
6.4 Disposal of Waste Ceramic Fiber
Page 1485 of 1823

7.7.) ENGINEERS FOR
51g-ar 16101-eg INDIA LIMITED
OMR 2.12X61,171J931.1) (A Gout 431 IndA Unclertalong) HSE REQUIREMENTS FOR
6-79-0024 Rev. 0
6.4.1 Wastes generated during fabrication, installation or removal of RCF's is not defined as
hazardous. Waste fibre should be carefully placed directly into heavy duty plastic bags and
clearly labelled to indicate the contents and placed into deep landfills.
6.4.2 Because of the possible presence of crystalline silica in used RCF, particular care should be
exercised during tear-out to minimize the generation of dust.
6.4.3 Whenever practical, used RCF products should be wetted with water from a fine spray nozzle
and hose prior to removal. Effective use of the wetting procedures will reduce the cristoballite
exposure hazard of RCF products.
6.4.4 All activities involving the cutting of RCF products shall be restricted to a designated area.
Caution signs must be posted before work begins. Local exhaust ventilation must be
employed.
6.4.5 Removal and demolition of RCF insulation should begin at the top of a structure and progress
downward. Do not drop insulation from elevated areas to ground levels.
6.4.6 Handling can be source of dust emission and therefore the process should be designated to
limit the amount of handling. Whenever possible handling should be carried out under
controlled condition i.e. using dust exhaust system.
Page 1486 of 1823

Page 1487 of 1823
HOT INSULATION OF VESSELS, 6-79-0026 Rev. 0
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2 of 70
Abbreviations:
ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials

CG : Cellular Glass
CUI : Corrosion Under Insulation
DFT : Dry Film Thickness
ESCC : External Stress Corrosion Cracking
GI : Galvanized Iron
IE : Insulation for Electrically traced surfaces
IH : Insulation for heat conservation
IJ : Insulation for Steam jacketed surfaces
IS : Insulation for Personnel safety
IS : Indian Standard
IT : Insulation for Steam traced surfaces
ITP : Inspection Test Plan
max : shall indicate a maximum limit value
min : shall indicate a minimum limit value
PIR : Poly Isocyanurate Foam
PUF : Poly Urethane Foam
SS : Stainless Steel
SWG : Standard Wire Gauge
Definitions:
Ambient temperature: Unless otherwise mentioned, ambient temperature referred in this specification
shall mean 300C
Hot service: Operating temperature from ambient to 760 deg C is considered as Hot service
Dual service: Operating temperature ranging from minus (-) 200 to + 350 deg C is
considered as dual service
Refractory & Insulation Standards Committee
Convenor : Mr Prasenjit Saha
Members : Mr Biswarup Sarkar

Mr Prasenjit Pal
Mr Udayan Chakravarty (Piping)
Mr Prag Goel (Fired Heaters)
Mr Ayush Mathur (Projects)
Mr Tarun Kumar (Equip Div)
Mr Neeraj Mathur (Inspection)
Dr Arijit Roy (Materials & Corrosion)
Mr Neeraj Rai (Pipeline)
Mr Ravindra Kumar (Construction)
Page 1488 of 1823

CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ 4
2.0 GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 4
3.0 DESIGN BASIS ............................................................................................................ 5
4.0 INSULATION MATERIALS ........................................................................................ 11
5.0 ANCILLARY MATERIALS .......................................................................................... 19
6.0 APPLICATION ........................................................................................................... 24
7.0 QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................................................. 38
8.0 REFERENCE CODES & STANDARDS..................................................................... 40
9.0 INSULATION DIAGRAMS ......................................................................................... 43
Page 1489 of 1823

1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design and material aspects of external insulation of
above ground piping, vessels and equipment having operating (process fluid)
temperature from ambient to 760OC for the purpose of heat conservation, process
stabilization, temperature maintenance, personnel protection and fire protection.
Insulation material and thickness for a project shall be as per Process design basis,
BEDB Part-B agreed with client. Insulation system, material properties and specific
design requirements are provided in this specification.
Exclusion:
Unless otherwise specified, this specification shall not be binding for insulation of
incinerators, boilers, economizers, air pre-heater / ducting of fired heaters etc. for which
requirements may be covered in respective package specification. This specification
shall not apply to licensed units, where licensor’s standard/ specification is applicable.
2.0 GENERAL
Main constituents of a hot insulation system are insulation material and weather
protection cladding. Insulation can lead to corrosion to the substrate (commonly known
as CUI), especially at low operating temperatures (below 1750C), hence some CUI
prevention measures are adopted. Several other materials are used for fixing and
securement ancillaries.
HOT INSULATION
SYSTEM
INSULATION PROTECTION CPRROSION FIXING &

MATERIAL CLADDING PROTECTION SECUREMENT
ANCILLARIES
2.1 Insulation materials generally used in the industry for hot insulation are given below.
Service temperature of each material is different and some may overlap. Material for an
application temperature range is selected based on specific advantage of the materials
in that range with respect to CUI and other relevant aspects. Insulation material for a
project shall be specified in the Process design basis BEDB Part-B.
Insulation Material General Classification Temperature limit

Rock wool ASTM C-547/592/612 / IS 8183 5500C
Calcium silicate ASTM C-533 / IS 9428 760ºC
Moulded Perlite ASTM C-610 6490C
Ceramic fiber ASTM C-892 7600C
Cellular glass ASTM C-552 4270C
PUF/ PIR ASTM C-591 100/1250C
Glass wool ASTM C-553 350ºC
Aerogel ASTM C-1728 649ºC
Insulating cement ASTM C-195 760ºC
Page 1490 of 1823

2.2 Insulation shall be covered with a weather protection jacket, commonly known as
cladding. Unless otherwise specified, aluminium is to be used as default cladding
material. Stainless steel / aluminized steel cladding shall be used at higher temperature
(>550°C) or where fire protection is an intended service requirement and / or fire safe is
a criteria. Non-metallic cladding like UV cured GRP and HDPE can also be used for
specific purposes.
2.3 Water ingress into insulation is a major concern, especially at low operating
temperature, which may remain into the system and can cause corrosion to the
substrate. The risk of corrosion is maximum at operating temperature <175°C
(hereinafter referred as CUI risk zone).
2.4 Painting is used for general corrosion protection for all temperature range and for all
types of insulation. Additional corrosion protection measure is necessary at CUI risk
zone particularly when insulation material is fibrous in nature (like rock wool, glass
wool, calcium silicate) and metal cladding is used for weather protection.
2.5 In order to prevent / minimize moisture ingress into insulation, a layer of moisture
barrier / breather mastic shall be used in CUI risk zone where insulation is designed
with fibrous material and metal cladding. All insulation system designed with fibrous
material and metal cladding, falling in CUI risk zone, irrespective of the purpose i.e.
whether it is for heat conservation, acoustic, fire protection or any other service, shall
use this barrier layer. This layer is however not necessary when insulation is designed
with a closed cellular material like PUF, PIR, Cellular glass or a water repellent material
like aerogel or moulded perlite and / or non-metallic cladding like UV cured GRP or
HDPE is used for weather protection.
2.6 Inspection window shall be provided at specific intervals to facilitate periodic inspection
for CUI.
3.0 DESIGN BASIS
Insulation type and thickness for a project is finalized in Process design basis, BEDB
Part-B. Wherever insulation is provided for heat conservation, thickness is decided on
the basis of thermal conductivity of the insulation material, allowable heat loss, max
allowable surface temperature/ maintenance temperature, emissivity of cladding
material and wind velocity.
3.1 Insulation is required to meet any (or combination of) of the following objectives,
generally indicated in P&IDs and line lists:
 Heat conservation
 Process stabilization to assist process control.
 Heat tracing (Steam or Electric)
 Hot water or solvent tracing (liquid)
 Hot Oil tracing
 Steam jacketing
 Hot water or liquid or Oil jacketing
 Fire protection
 Personnel protection
Page 1491 of 1823

3.2 Insulation type and thickness shall normally be specified in project specification/ SOR
and any of the following documents:
 Piping and Instrument Diagrams (P&IDs) and Line Lists.

 Piping General Arrangement Drawings & Isometrics.
 Instrument Piping Details and Schedules.
 Vessel, Exchanger, Storage Tank and sphere documents and Insulation
Schedules.
 Equipment suppliers General Arrangement Drawings for equipment
items in Package plant.
3.3 Typical details of any vessel part not covered in this specification, but needs insulation
as per good engineering practice shall be submitted by the contractor for approval of
owner/ engineer in charge. The details shall include the following as minimum:
 Removable insulation housings

 Flashing details
 Additional Insulation supports
 Vessel head insulation supports
 Expansion joints
 Vessel insulation details
 Exchanger removable housings
 Machinery removable housings etc.
3.4 Codes & Standards
This specification shall be used along with relevant standards / code of practice
wherever specified. However, specific technical requirement mentioned in this
specification shall prevail over standards/ code and in the event of any difference or
conflicting requirement between the code and this specification, stringent of the two
shall apply.
Latest issue of the codes/standards prevailing on last submission date of the tender
shall be applicable.
3.5 Extent of Insulation
Internally refractory lined piping and equipment and any other items for which heat loss
is essential shall not be insulated.
Insulation is not desired for piping and equipment for which heat loss is desired -
excepting for personnel protection or to avoid thermal stress problems. Instruments
and associated piping (other than impulse piping/tubing) subject to operating flow
and/or temperature conditions prevailing in the connected piping or equipment shall be
insulated to the same requirements as that of piping or equipment.
Page 1492 of 1823

3.5.1 Extent of insulation on piping system
a) Items requiring insulation
 Insulated piping systems shall have straight pipe, bends, tees and pipe-fittings
completely insulated.
 Unless otherwise specified, all valves and flanged joints shall be completely
insulated only in steam, condensate service, hot oil lines and in lines which are
trace heated or jacketed to maintain temperatures.
 For bucket and float type traps the inlet piping and trap shall be insulated.
 Insulation on inlet piping to thermostatic and thermodynamic steam traps shall

terminate at approximately 500mm before the trap.
 Steam trap outlet piping other than closed condensate recovery system shall
not be insulated except for personnel protection reasons.
 Heat traced instrumentation shall be insulated. The fluid containing sections of

such instruments and the associated piping shall be completely insulated.
Indication length shall remain visible. Instrumentation other than heat traced
shall not be insulated unless otherwise required by Instrumentation department.
b) Items NOT requiring insulation
 Piping which becomes hot intermittently, such as relief valves, vents, steam-out
and snuffing steam systems, flare and blow down systems.
 Steam condensate lines downstream of steam traps discharging to drainage

system, unless otherwise mentioned.
 Supports for piping, excluding pipe hangers to the extent covered by insulation.
 Steam Traps (except as noted above).
 Valves, including control valves and flanges in process piping systems (except
as noted above). However, personnel protection insulation for these items shall
be applied, as required.
 Pipe Union fittings.
 Thermowell bosses, temperature and pressure tappings.
 Expansion joints, hinged joints and hose assemblies
 Sight flow indicators.
 Flange joints in Hydrogen service.
Page 1493 of 1823

3.5.2 Extent of insulation on equipments
a) Items requiring insulation

 Support skirts of insulated vertical vessel greater than 1200mm diameter shall
be insulated both internally and externally for a minimum distance of 600mm
below the bottom tangent line. The insulation shall terminate not less than
300mm above the anchor chair.
 Support skirts of insulated vertical vessels of 1200mm and less shall be

insulated externally.
 Bottom heads of insulated vertical vessels enclosed by a support skirt shall be

insulated without finishing material and shall be insulated only when the vessel
outside diameter is greater than 1200mm.
 Turbines shall be insulated for heat conservation.
 Liquid ends of pumps shall be insulated when heat traced and jacketed.
b) Items NOT requiring insulation
 Pumps with operating temperature below 200oC unless pumped fluid has a
pour point above minimum design ambient temperature.
 Fans, compressors and blowers and Liquid ends of pumps as noted above
 Internally insulated or refractory lined equipment unless specially designed for

metal temperature control.
 Heads of vessels enclosed by support skirts with vessel diameters 1200mm and
less.
 Internal surfaces of insulated vessel support skirts with vessel diameter

1200mm or less.
 Turbine casings to be insulated shall exclude shaft seal caps, shaft bearing
housings, throttle valves, governors and supports.
 Exchanger channel and covers; shell and channel flanges & Exp. Joints.
 Nozzles flanges, manholes, handholes and flanges of equipment.
 Surfaces of coolers and condensers, Thermowell bosses, temperature and

pressure tappings.
 Nameplates of all equipment items.
3.6 Safety Insulation (Personnel Protection)
Exposed surfaces of piping, equipment/ vessels above 60°C in normal or even for a
short-term operation, where insulation is not a requirement from heat conservation or
process point of view, but in approachable range of operating and maintenance
personnel, shall be protected from accidental touch for human safety by appropriate
personnel protection. Extent of personnel protection may be decided by the field
construction personnel using the criteria that exposed surfaces within 600mm
Page 1494 of 1823

horizontally and / or 2100mm vertically of a normal access of walkways or adjacent to

handrails, platforms travelled by personnel shall be protected as minimum.
3.6.1 Insulation at low temperature carries a risk of CUI. Hence, insulation to the extent
possible should be avoided in CUI risk zone and appropriate personnel protection shall
be selected based on the criteria given below.
a) Metal cage / guards may be used for personnel protection for 61 to 175°C
b) Insulation shall be used for personnel protection for 176°C and above
c) Equipment / piping having internal refractory / other lining, shall not be insulated
unless specifically required in the design. Personnel protection wherever
applicable shall be provided by means of metal cage / guards only.
3.6.2 Requirement and type of personnel protection to be adopted in a project shall be

specified in Process design basis BEDB Part-B.
3.6.3 The metal cage / guards, wherever used for personnel protection shall typically be
placed at a gap from the surface as given below:
Gap to be maintained from

Pipe / Equipment dimension
hot surface (mm)
Pipe diameter up to 6 inches 50
Pipe diameter greater than 6 inch but less than 10 inch 75
Pipe diameter greater than 10 inch 100
Equipment / vessels 100
3.7 Hot insulation in Acoustic service
In specific cases, where a line is to be provided both hot insulation as well as acoustic
insulation, following shall be adopted:
3.7.1 Wherever, the material for hot and acoustic insulation are same (e.g. materials like rock
wool, glass wool or ceramic fibre), higher of the insulation thickness shall be adopted,
cladding shall be as per acoustic requirement.
3.7.2 If the material for hot insulation is different (for example, calcium silicate, PIR, perlite,
Cellular glass etc.), hot insulation except the metal cladding shall be first installed over
the pipe and then the complete acoustic system installed over it with cladding as per
acoustic requirement.
3.7.3 EIL standard specification 6-79-0022 shall be referred for Acoustic insulation.
3.8 Hot & Fire safe insulation
Insulation system in certain service may require serving the purpose of heat
conservation and meeting the fire safe criteria. In such cases, insulation thickness
needs to be designed for heat conservation during normal operation as well as to limit
heat gain in a fire situation, when surrounding is at a higher temperature due to high
heat flux released in a hydrocarbon fire.
Wherever insulation material selected for heat conservation is suitable for the fire safe
range (for example rock wool, calcium silicate, ceramic fibre etc.), higher of the
Page 1495 of 1823

thickness required for heat conservation and fire safe requirement shall be adopted.
Cladding shall be of stainless steel / aluminized steel.
Wherever material for hot insulation is not fully fire resistant (for example, PIR, PUF
etc.), insulation for heat conservation except the metal cladding shall be first installed
over the pipe/equipment and then a layer of fire resistant insulation like rock wool /
ceramic fibre etc. of appropriate thickness as applicable for fire safe criteria shall be
installed over it with stainless steel / aluminized steel cladding.
3.9 EHT (Electrical heat trace) insulation
Unless otherwise specified, insulation system for the electrically heat traced piping
shall consist of pre formed pipe sections of rock wool (LRB is acceptable for higher
pipe diameter, refer 4.1.2) with an outer layer of preformed PUF/ PIR, wrapped with a
multiplex foil, followed by metal cladding as weather barrier.
Wherever EHT system uses a heat tube, the rock wool pipe section shall be one inch
higher size of the pipe diameter. The PUF pipe section shall be of appropriate diameter
so that same is snugly fit over the rock wool layer.
Unless otherwise specified, a heat containment shall be created by wrapping a layer of

0.1-0.15mm aluminium foil over the tracing (along with heat tube wherever used) prior
to installation of insulation.
3.10 Steam traced insulation
Unless otherwise specified, insulation system for steam traced piping / equipments and
instruments shall consist of pre formed pipe sections of rock wool (LRB is acceptable
for higher pipe diameter, refer 4.1.3) with a multiplex foil underneath metal cladding as
weather barrier. In general, rock wool pipe section shall be one inch higher size of the
pipe diameter to accommodate tracer pipes.
A heat containment shall be created by wrapping the tracer pipe (heat tube) along with
the parent pipe with a layer of 0.1-0.15mm aluminium foil (or stainless steel foil for
>400 deg C) prior to installation of insulation.
Steam tracing expansion loops or couplings extending outside of insulated pipe

surfaces shall be insulated for heat conservation.
3.11 Impulse lines
Unless otherwise specified, for impulse lines of austenitic stainless steel, insulation
material shall be sodium silicate inhibited ceramic fiber rope (min density 250 Kg/m³).
Ceramic fiber ropes shall comprise of ceramic fibres laid parallel and reinforced with
stainless steel wire.
3.12 Removable Insulation
Part of equipment and piping requiring periodic inspection may be provided with a
removable and reusable type insulation. Pumps or turbines requiring insulation should
have removable insulation cover.
3.12.1 Removable insulation may consist of a fibrous insulation stitched into a quilt of glass
cloth fabric envelope and tied with wire around the valve or flange connections.
Insulation thickness / number of wraps shall provide equivalent insulation as that of
adjacent piping/ equipment.
Page 1496 of 1823

3.12.2 Wherever box insulation is used, removable insulation shall be of the same type and
thickness as adjacent pipe or equipment insulation.
3.12.3 Removable insulation cover box shall be fabricated from 1mm cladding sheet with
insulation installed inside the box. Removable covers box for valves shall cover the
body, bonnet, and flanges as applicable.
3.12.4 Insulation covers box shall fit tightly over fittings and protrusions and shall be held in
place with straps and stainless-steel toggles. Box shall have an integral metal flashing
extending at least 50 mm on adjacent pipe insulation and must be designed to prevent
air movement behind insulating covers.
4.0 INSULATION MATERIALS

Insulation material shall be selected primarily based on range of service temperature
and other parameters like desired thermal performance, fire protection requirement etc.
All materials shall be of high quality and good appearance. Insulation materials shall be
of low chloride content, chemically inert, non-sulphurous , rot proof, vermin proof, non-
injurious to health and non-corrosive to steel and aluminium (even if soaked in water at
ambient temperatures for extended periods), shall not disintegrate, settle, change its
form of composition, in a detrimental way during service conditions. Typical details/
minimum technical specification of the major insulation materials and accessories are
given in this specification as a guideline.
 Insulation materials in general shall conform to respective ASTM standard/

grade. Equivalent IS grade are acceptable.
 ASBESTOS in any form is NOT permitted. Insulation or finishing materials shall

contain no asbestos.
 No inflammable material shall be attached to the insulation.
 Special attention shall be paid for use over austenitic stainless steel surfaces for
max permissible chloride level and additional testing for respective material.
 Unless otherwise mentioned, dimensions and tolerances for pipe sections,

mattresses & slabs shall generally be as per respective codes. Lesser the
number of segments is better. The installed insulation shall fit snugly and shall
have a tight joint.
4.1 Rock wool

Rock wool is a fibrous insulation made from molten rock, bonded with resin or suitable
binder. The term rock wool shall mean fibrous insulation wool made from natural rock
and does not refer to products manufactured from slag or glass. For application over
austenitic stainless steel, the material shall be zinc free and shall be inhibited with
sodium silicate as per ASTM C-795.
4.1.1 The material may be used up to 5500C, but shall meet the general classification of
respective standards and service temperature requirements as mentioned below:
Page 1497 of 1823

Max service
Form of Fibrous Material Quality standard
temperature
ASTM C547 TYPE-II /
Preformed pipe sections 7600C
IS 9842
Insulation blanket with wire net facing ASTM C592 CLASS-III/
6490C
(details as per 4.1.4, 4.1.5 & 4.1.6) IS 8183
Resin bonded mattress (max 2% resin) ASTM C612/ IS 8183 7600C
4.1.2 Rock wool shall meet following minimum properties:
Properties Values Remarks

Density (kg/m3) Pipe sections 140
as per IS 8183 /
IS 3144 / ASTM Resin bonded mattress / Insulation
blanket (density is measured 128
C-167
without metal facing)
Linear Shrinkage (%) at 550°C/ 24 hours as per ASTM- 2 Note-1
C-356, max
Non fibrous shot (%) as per ASTM C-1335 / 3144, max 15
Compressive strength at 10% deformation (kg/m2), min 120
Alkalinity, pH as per ASTM C- 871 / IS 8183 7-10

Leachable Chloride as per ASTM C-871, ppm, max 10 Note-1, 2
(+) 100°C 0.052
Thermal conductivity (W/mK)
(+) 200°C 0.068
as per IS 3346 / ASTM C-177
/ ASTM C-518 (+) 250°C 0.080
at mean temperature, max Note-3
(+) 300°C 0.090
Incombustibility Pass
Test of incombustibility as per IS 8183 / IS 3144
OR fire resistivity OR flame spread index 25
as per ASTM E84, max
Note-1: Supplier shall provide test certificate for each production Batch
Note-2: Max 20ppm allowed for application over carbon steel and low alloy steel
Note-3: Supplier shall provide Type test certificate no older than 2 years
4.1.3 Forms of rock wool insulation
Nominal pipe diameter Form of Fibrous Material

Up to 6 inch Preformed pipe section is mandatory
> 6 inch to 14 inch Preformed pipe section is desirable
Insulation blanket with wire net facing OR
>14 inch & equipments
resin bonded mattress
Page 1498 of 1823

4.1.4 For operating temperature up to 175°C for application over carbon steel and low
alloy steel pipe, insulation blanket wherever used shall have GI metal facing on one
side with hexagonal shaped (25mm) wire-woven netting (0.88 to 0.73mm dia.)
stitched with tie wires (0.41mm dia.). Galvanization shall be minimum 30gsm.
4.1.5 For operating temperature 176°C and above, for application over carbon steel and
low alloy steel pipe, insulation blanket wherever used shall have metal facing as
per ASTM A167 type SS 304 with 25mm mesh and 0.8mm wire diameter,
stitched with 0.41mm dia. tie wires.
4.1.6 For austenitic stainless steel and alloy 20 piping, irrespective of operating
temperature, insulation blanket wherever used shall have metal facing as per
ASTM A167 type SS 304 with 25mm mesh and 0.8mm wire diameter, stitched
with 0.41mm dia. tie wires.
4.2 Moulded Expanded Perlite

Perlite block and pipe sections shall be made of expanded perlite and sodium silicate
or appropriate binder, shall be suitable for continuous service up to 649°C.
4.2.1 Material shall conform to the general classification of ASTM C-610 and meet the
following minimum properties:

Density (kg/m3) as per ASTM C-302/303, max 240
Compressive strength at 5% deformation (kPa), min as per 483
ASTM C 165 (for block)
Length and width 2
Linear Shrinkage (%) max
at 649°C for 24hrs, thickness 8 Note-1
Water absorption after heat aging at 315°C & 48 hr water 50
immersion, weight gain %
Alkalinity, pH as per ASTM C- 871 6-10.5
Flexural Strength as per ASTM C203, Proc-D (kPa), min 310

Leachable Chloride as per ASTM C871, ppm, max 10 Note-1 & 2
(+) 93 deg C, max 0.079
Thermal conductivity (+) 149 deg C, max 0.086
(W/mK) ASTM C-177 /
ASTM C-518 / ASTM (+) 204 deg C, max 0.095 Note-3
C-335, at mean (+) 260 deg C, max 0.106
temperature
(+) 371 deg C, max 0.126
Note-1: Batch test - Supplier shall provide test certificate for each production Batch
Note-2: Max 20ppm allowed for application over carbon steel and low alloy steel
Note-3: Type test - Supplier shall provide Type test certificate no older than 2 years
4.2.2 For application over austenitic stainless steel, perlite block and pipe sections shall also
meet the requirements of ASTM C-692.
Page 1499 of 1823

4.2.3 Forms of moulded perlite

Up to 14 inch Preformed pipe section
>14 inch & equipments Pipe sections / Wedge cut from block
4.3 Calcium silicate

Calcium silicate block or pipe sections shall conform to general classification of IS 9428
(950 grade) or ASTM equivalent C533 TYPE II, shall be suitable for continuous service
up to 927°C.
4.3.1 Material shall conform to the general classifications of respective ASTM / IS code and
meet the following minimum properties:
Density (kg/m3) as per IS 5688 / ASTM C302/303, min 240

Linear shrinkage as per IS 5688 / ASTM C-356 at 9270C
2
for 24hrs, (%) max.
Moisture content , by weight, max, % 20
Compressive strength (of dry IS 5688 OR 415

Note-1
sample) at 5% deformation, kPa ASTM C165 688
Heat resistance after
(%) loss in weight, max 15
exposure to 9270C for
24hrs, as per IS 5688 Compressive strength at 10%
345
deformation, kPa, max
Leachable Chloride as per ASTM C871, ppm, max 50
(+) 200 0C, max 0.072
0
Thermal conductivity (W/mK) at (+) 300 C, max 0.078
mean temperature as per IS 9490 Note-2
0
/ AST C-177 (+) 400 C, max 0.084
0
(+) 500 C, max 0.088
4.3.2 Forms of calcium silicate insulation

Up to 14 inch Preformed pipe section
>14 inch & equipments Pipe sections / Wedge cut from block
4.4 Ceramic Fiber

Ceramic fiber is a fibrous insulation made from molten alumino-silicate compositions,
fibers are mechanically interlocked through a needling process into blanket form
Page 1500 of 1823

without use of chemical binder, shall conform to general classification of ASTM C892
Type III, Grade 8 (1260°C Grade) and meet the following minimum properties:

Density (kg/m3) as per ASTM C-167, min 128
Linear Shrinkage (%) at 1200°C for 24hrs as per ASTM 3
C-356, max
Al2O3, min 43
SiO2, max 57
Chemical composition
Fe2O3, max 0.1
TiO2, max 0.3
Note-1
Mean fibre diameter (microns), 3% standard deviation 2.5-3.5
Non fibrous shot (%) as per ASTM C-1335, max 20
Tensile strength as per BS Longitudinal 0.6

1902 Part-6, kg/cm2, max Transverse 0.5
Leachable Chloride as per ASTM C871, ppm, max 50
Thermal conductivity (W/mK) ASTM C-177 / IS 3346 at

0.13 Note-2
600°C mean temperature, max
4.5 Cellular Glass

Cellular glass is a closed cellular structured rigid insulation made from glass, a
preferred material for cyclic service in the temperature range of (-) 200 to (+) 427 0C.
The material conform to general classification of ASTM C552 Type-II, Grade-6, cut into
pipe sections or profile of the substrate as per ASTM C1639 and meet the following
minimum properties:
Characteristics Values Remarks

Density( kg/m3), min. (ASTM C303) 98
Closed cell content 100
Compressive Strength (kPa) (ASTM C165), min. 414
Flexural strength (kPa), ASTM C203, min. 283
Water absorption (Volume %), max., (ASTM C240) 0.5
Note-1
Water Vapour Permeability, ng/Pa.s.m (ASTM E96) 0.007
(+)10°C, max 0.046
Thermal conductivity , w/mK (-) 18°C, max 0.042
(ASTM C518/ASTM C177)
(-) 73°C, max 0.033
(-)101°C, max 0.030
Surface burning characteristics Flame spread index,
5 Note-2
as per ASTM E84 max
Page 1501 of 1823

Smoked developed
0
index, max.
4.6 PIR / PUF Rigid Foam Insulation
Rigid PIR (polyisocyanurate) / PUF (polyurethane) is closed cellular structured plastic

foam insulation. PUF is generally suitable for use up to 1000C, whereas PIR can be
used to little higher, up to 1250C. Wherever in the specification PUF / PIR or PUF is
specified, any of the two can be used, but wherever PIR is only specified, PUF shall not
be used.
4.6.1 PIR shall be performed into free rise rigid buns using HCFC free chemicals and cut into
pipe sections or required profile using a CNC machine. The material shall be
chemically inert, moisture free, rot and vermin proof, shall not disintegrate, settle,
change its form or composition in a detrimental way while in service, shall conform to
general classification of ASTM C591 Grade-2 Type-II, suitable for application up to
1250C and meet the following minimum properties:
Characteristics Value Remarks

Bulk density (kg/m3) ASTM-C302/ ASTM -D1622/ IS- 40
11239, min
Closed Cell content (%) ASTM D-6226 Procedure-2/ IS- 95
11239 Part-5, min
Chloride content (ppm) ASTM C 871, Procedure 2, max 60
Note-1
pH (ASTM C 871) 6-7
Water vapour transmission (ng/Pa-s-m) 5.1
ASTM E-96 method-A at 23°C & 50% RH, max
Compressive strength at 10% deformation (kPa), ASTM 240.
D 1621, min
Flame spread Index as per ASTM E84 OR 25
Horizontal burning as per equivalent BIS method, max
Thermal conductivity of 180 days (+)10 °C, max 0.024 Note-1
aged sample at mean temp
(+)24 °C, max 0.024
(W/mK) ASTM C-177
4.6.2 PUF shall generally be supplied in performed pipe sections or required profile using
HCFC free chemicals from vendor shop. The material will have equivalent physical
properties as of PIR except temperature limit shall be 1000C and may exhibit higher
horizontal burning characteristics compared to PIR.
4.6.3 In-situ foaming of polyuretnane (PUR)
Certain applications like tank may specify use in-situ polyurethane foam (PUR), where
the insulation foam can be formed by in-situ injection of the chemicals into an enclosed
volume that after curing will be converted into PUF. The quality of in-situ foaming can
Page 1502 of 1823

vary and depends on substrate temperature, ambient temperature, humidity etc. Every
time the in-situ foaming going to be adopted, it requires demonstration through mock
up for achievement of optimum quality. This shall only be used where in-situ PUR is
specified and NOT to be used as replacement for preformed rigid PIR / PUF.
4.7 Flexible Aerogel Insulation

Flexible aerogel insulation is a composite of an amorphous silica-based aerogel, a
fibrous carrying media, or reinforcements, or a combination thereof, that allow the
construct to be flexible. The material shall be in accordance with ASTM C1728 Type-III,
Gr.1A. The material shall have following general properties:
Characteristics Value Remarks

Temperature range (°C) 24 to 649
Density (kg/m3) ASTM C303, min 160

Compressive Strength (kPa), min, at 10%
20.7
deformation (ASTM C165)
Linear shrinkage at maximum exposure temperature
2
for 24h , max, % (ASTM C356) in length & width
Water absorption, max, % by weight 8
Water vapour sorption, by weight, max %, (ASTM
5
C1104/C1104M)
Flame spread index (ASTM E84) , max 5
Smoke developed index (ASTM E84) , max 10
(+) 24 °C, max 0.021

Thermal conductivity (W/mK) (+) 149 °C, max 0.025
at mean temperature (°C) (+) 204 °C, max 0.029
(ASTM C177)
(+) 260 °C, max 0.032
(+) 371 °C, max 0.043
.
4.8 Glass Wool
Glass wool is a fibrous insulation made from molten glass into fibrous form bonded with
organic or inorganic binder and suitable for application up to 350oC. Glass wool blanket
shall meet the requirements specified in ASTM C553 Type-I and meet the following
minimum properties:
Characteristics Values Remarks

Density (kg/m3) as per ASTM C-167, max 64
Water vapor sorption % by weight, max, (ASTM
5 Note-1
C1104/C1104M)
Chlorides, ppm, (ASTM C 871, procedure 2) 10
pH values, (ASTM C 871) 6-10
Thermal conductivity, W/mK (+) 24 0C, max 0.030
(ASTM C518)
(+) 50 0C, max 0.033 Note-2
0
(+) 100 C, max 0.040
Page 1503 of 1823

4.9 Insulating Cement

Insulating cement is primarily composed of chopped rock wool and heat resistant
cement and may contain inorganic fillers / suitable heat resistant binder. The material
shall conform to general classification of ASTM C195 and shall be suitable up to
10380C.

Linear Shrinkage (%) (at 871°C) for 24hrs, max, 5
ASTM C356
Volume change (shrinkage) upon drying, max, 35 Supplier shall
ASTM C166 provide test
Thermal (+) 93 deg C, max 0.101 certificate for
conductivity, at each production
(+) 260 deg C, max 0.123 Batch
mean
temperature, (+) 482 deg C, max 0.173
ASTMC177
4.10 Materials / Components for Specific Insulation System

Primary insulation type / combination and thickness shall be specified in Process
design basis BEDB Part-B. Based on the insulation type and temperature range,
additional components like moisture barrier mastic, foil etc. needs to be as per below
guideline:
4.10.1 There is always a risk of water ingress into the insulation through joints of metal
cladding. Hence, except specific applications were non-metallic cladding like UV cured
GRP or HDPE are used, the risk of CUI needs to be addressed by appropriate material
selection and moisture barrier system.
4.10.2 The risk of CUI is highest in the operating zone 50-175°C. Materials like Perlite,
Cellular glass, PIR (up to 125°C) and PUF (up to 100°C) are preferable in this zone.
4.10.3 When a fibrous material like rock wool / glass wool is used in CUI risk zone (<175°C), a
moisture barrier layer of breather mastic must be used underneath metal cladding.
4.10.4 A combination system with inner aerogel (5-10mm) + outer rock wool can provide good
CUI prevention in low operating temperature (<175°C) and shall not require this
breather mastic moisture barrier.
4.10.5 The breather mastic need not be used in CUI risk zone (<175°C) wherever moulded
perlite or a closed cellular material like PIR/ PUF/ Cellular glass is used as insulation
material and / or where a layer of aerogel is used in the innermost layer. The joints of
the block insulations shall be sealed with appropriate joint sealant and a multiplex foil
(commonly known as mylar foil) shall be used over the outermost insulation layer
underneath cladding.
4.10.6 In general, the breather mastic and / or multiplex foil is not necessary above 175°C.
However, for HP steam lines longer than 2km which uses rock wool as insulation, a
layer of multiplex foil shall be used underneath the metal cladding. The multiplex foil
need not be used where insulation is designed with perlite or rock wool in combination
with a closed cellular material like PIR or aerogel on the outermost layer.
Page 1504 of 1823

4.10.7 Cellular glass be shall be chosen where any one of the following is a requirement:
a) Service is dual temperature, the lower range extents below ambient and upper limit
of the exposure exceeds (+) 125 0C
b) The insulation requires fireproofing over it (epoxy intumescent or vermiculite)
4.11 Insulation thickness

Insulation thickness and thickness for inner and outer insulation for combination lining
shall be specified in schedule of rate / equipment datasheet.
Unless otherwise specified, layering of insulation as given below shall be followed:
Insulation thickness (mm) Number of layers

< 75 Single layer
76-150 Two layers
>150 Three layers
4.12 Form of Insulation

All the preformed insulation (Cellular glass, PIR, Calcium silicate, Perlite, Pipe section
made from Rock wool etc.) should match the contour of pipe /surface profile of the
equipment. Half sections or radial sections shall have longitudinal and circumferential
faces flat and smooth so as to match with the other half/ section. Ends of the
preformed half sections shall be flat and perpendicular to the center line.
Cellular glass shall be fabricated as per ASTM C1639.
Preformed rigid insulation blocks of PIR shall be cut from buns using CNC machine.
Application Sections
Pipes up to 12 inch NB Two half sections
>12 inch up to 20 inch NB Max 3 radial sections
>20 inch NB Max 4 radial sections
Equipments, Vessel shells Machine cut radial sections in required
contour of the substrate/ underneath layer
Vessel heads Manually cut slabs contoured to the profile of
vessel heads is acceptable
5.0 ANCILLARY MATERIALS
Hot insulation system shall have the following ancillary components:
Primary components Secondary components Other ancillaries

 Multiplex foil  Heat transfer cement  Band
 Weather protection  Painting  Sealant for cladding
Jacket  Expansion joint  Screw
 Protection guard  Sealing tapes  Clips
 Adhesive  Rivets
 Compression spring
Page 1505 of 1823

5.1 Weather Protection Jacket (Cladding)
5.1.1. Insulation shall be protected with cladding. Type of cladding shall be as below:
a) Unless otherwise mentioned, aluminium jacketing shall be used as weather

protection cladding up to temperature 550 deg C. Aluminium cladding shall be as
per ASTM C1729, Class-A having polysurlyn lamination on inside surface and shall
meet the requirements of ASTM B209 alloy 3003 H14. Equivalent IS code shall be
acceptable for the metal sheet.
b) For temperature above 550 deg C and/ or for fire safe insulation (for all temperature
range) cladding shall be stainless steel or aluminized steel as per ASTM A167 /
A240 type 304 or aluminized steel as per ASTM A463, type 2, coating designation
T2-100, with polysurlyn lamination on inside surface. Equivalent IS code shall be
acceptable for the metal sheet.
c) For grade piping in offsites jacket material shall be galvanized steel. Galvanized
jacketing shall not be used over insulation on or near austenitic stainless steel
and/or austenitic nickel steel Piping & Equipment. Galvanized steel shall be as per
ASTM A526 with 275 gsm of coating of Zinc Layer on both the surfaces. Equivalent
IS code shall be acceptable for the metal sheet.
5.1.2. Thickness of metal cladding shall be as follows:
Application Thickness for Aluminium Thickness for Stainless

cladding steel /Aluminized steel
cladding
For shells of vertical 0.7lmm (22 SWG) Corrugated; 0.56mm (24 SWG)
storage Tanks & The profile of corrugated sheet Corrugated; The profile of
Vessels shall be 32mm x 5mm corrugated sheet shall be
32mm x 5mm
For tank Roofs 1.22mm (18 SWG) Flat 0.91mm (20 SWG) Flat
For Horton Spheres & 0.7lmm (22 SWG) Flat 0.56mm (24 SWG) Flat
Horizontal vessel shell
and heads; vertical
vessel heads
For removable covers 1.22mm (18 SWG) Flat 1.22mm (18 SWG) Flat
For all piping, other than 0.7lmm (22 SWG) Flat 0.56mm (24 SWG) Flat
grade piping in offsites
For grade piping in 0.56mm (24 SWG) Galvanized
Offsites steel (Refer note below)
Note: For grade piping in offsites the cladding material shall be Galvanized steel.
5.2 Securement Bands / Wires
1 If material is Aluminium, then specification shall be ASTM B209 Alloy 3003 H16,
If Stainless Steel, it shall be 18/8.
2 For securing fibrous insulation
A On Piping
Band, 24 SWG thick x 12mm (min) wide, Stainless Steel.
Page 1506 of 1823

B On Equipments
Band, 24 SWG thick x 20 mm wide, Stainless Steel.
C On Vertical Storage Tanks

Band, Stainless Steel, 25mm wide x 24 SWG thick.
D Horton Sphere
16 SWG SS Wire & Band, Stainless Steel, 25mm wide x 0.8mm thk.
3 For Securing Rigid Insulation
A On Piping upto 16” OD

Wire, stainless steel, 16 SWG.
B On Piping 18” OD & Larger, Vertical and Horizontal equipments

Band, stainless steel. 20 wide x 24 SWG thick.
4 For Securing Cladding on Insulation (all types)
A For Piping
Band, SS 12mm (min) wide x 24 SWG thick.
B On Equipment
Band, SS, 20mm wide x 24 SWG thick.
C On Vertical Storage Tanks & Spheres

Band, Stainless Steel, 25mm wide x 24 SWG thick.
5.3 Compression Spring
Compression spring (commonly known as MITY spring) shall be used on jacketing over
tank, pressure vessels and equipment. The compression springs shall be of 100mm
length made of SS 302 / SS 304 stainless steel, shall not be stretched more than
13mm during installation.
Requirement for springs on banding to secure metal jacketing shall be as follows:
Equip. Equip. Number of Jacket Expansion Springs

OD Circ.
Steel Temperature
(m) (m) 93°C 204°C 315°C 427°C 538°C 649°C
1 2.9 0 0 0 1 1 1
2 5.7 0 1 1 1 2 2
3 9.6 0 1 2 2 2 2
4.6 14.3 1 1 2 3 3 4
6 19.1 1 2 3 3 4 4
7.6 23.9 1 2 3 4 5 6
5.4 Rivets
Rivets required for metal jacket securement shall be the expanding Aluminium "POP"
blind eye type/ Stainless Steel, 9.5mm long x 5mm diameter.
Page 1507 of 1823

5.5 Screws
Screws required for metal jacket securement shall be Stainless Steel/cadmium plated
steel self tapping type A No.8 dia. x 12mm long to BS 4176 complete with neoprene
washers under the head.
5.6 ‘S.' and ‘J’ Clips
Formed from 25mm wide stainless steel banding.
5.7 Heat Transfer Cement
Maximum Exposure Temperature: 677oC

Heat Transfer Coefficient to Equipment wall: 114-227 W/m2oC
Bond Shear: 1.034 kPa
Electrical resistivity: 1.299 ohm/cm
5.8 Sealant for Cladding
Sealing materials which may either be in the form of a elastomeric sealing compound
or fibre based bituminous felt strips.
The technical requirement and typical elastomeric material for joint sealant of metal
cladding (aluminium and stainless steel) is specified below.
General Combustibility/ fire resistance Water vapour permeance

Characteristics (max)
Average 52% FSI (flame spread index) < 0.0092 metric perms (as per
volume solid as per 20 as per ASTM E-84, tested ASTM F-1249 with DFT
ASTM C461 on a 6.3mm inorganic 2.8mm)
reinforced cement board with
DFT ~2mm
5.9 Moisture Barrier (Breather Mastic)
When a fibrous material like rock wool / glass wool is used in CUI risk zone (<175°C), a
moisture barrier layer of breather mastic must be used underneath metal cladding. The
moisture barrier shall be a polymeric water based, breather type mastic (vapor under
pressure will pass through it), fire resistive, flexible and be compatible with the type of
insulation. Material shall be suitable for the range of temperature to which it is exposed.
Material shall be evaluated for fire resistance as per as per ASTM E-84 (flame spread
index ~10) and water vapour permeability in accordance with ASTM E96, procedure-B
>1perms for 1/16’’ thickness. Average nonvolatile content: 60 to 64% by volume (64%
by weight).
5.10 Multiplex Foil
Multiplex foil may be used as an alternative to mastic moisture barrier in specific

applications (details shall be as per respective SOR). Multiplex foil shall consist of
sandwiched sheets of aluminium and polyester be applied over the insulation prior to
weather protection jacketing. It shall confirm to the following requirements:
Page 1508 of 1823

12 µm polyester film
Foil composition: 25 µm aluminum foil
Tensile strength 100 MPa
Yield strength 70 N / cm
Tear resistance 400 g / mm
Temperature range +120°C to -60°C
Volumetric mass 1.93 kg / dm³
Water vapour permeability in acc. with ASTM max. 10.10-6 g / (m².h.mmHg)
E 96, procedure E (37.8°C, 90% RH)
5.11 Sealing Tapes for Multiplex Foil
The sealing tape for joints in the multiplex foil shall meet the following requirements:
Foil composition 12 µm polyester film
25 µm aluminium foil
adhesive layer: polyacrylate
Total thickness exclusive of adhesive layer 50 µm
Temperature range +120°C to -45°C
Volumetric mass 1.93 kg / dm³
Water vapour permeability in acc. with ASTM E 96, Max. 10.10-6 g /
procedure E (37.8°C, 90% R.H.) (m².h.mmHg)
5.12 Joint Sealant for Insulation Blocks
The joint sealant for joints between insulation blocks shall be compatible with the base
insulation material and suitable for the temperature range to which it is exposed.
Typical material and technical requirement for PUR/PIR insulation system is specified
below. For cellular glass insulation, compatibility or specific products shall be
recommended/ confirmed by the cellular glass supplier
General Combustibility/ fire resistance Water vapour permeance

Characteristics (max)
Average 82% Flame spread ASTM E-84 and
Negligible when measured
volume solid as fuel contribution negligible
across 3.2 mm wide sealant
per ASTM when used as 3.2 mm wide
between joints of impermeable
D2369 sealant between joints of
insulation blocks
incombustible insulation blocks
5.13 Protection Guard
Guards and their supports shall be manufactured from carbon steel, which may be
galvanized or painted or with Stainless Steel (SS-304). (The mesh may be painted with
yellow stripes, 50 mm wide, and shall include a hazard sign indicating ‘Hot surface’.).
Page 1509 of 1823

The guard mesh shall be of 2mm thick and 12 mm square. Guard shall be designed
with end cap of 0.7 to 1mm thk from galvanized Al-Zn coated or Al coated carbon steel
with recommended spacing of 450mm to 600mm. Care to be taken that end caps are
fitted in an orientation that will allow water drainage. If the metal surface requires
greater protection, a fibre glass insulation tape can be fitted to area where end caps
make contact to protect pipe work and reduce heat transfer. Mesh shall be rolled to
shape as per normal cladding and shall be provided with 50 mm of overlap, sharp
edges of cut mesh to be filed. In case of removable guard, the same can be made from
toggle clips.
In case of protection guard for small bore piping, perforated metal sheet may be used.
Sheet thickness shall be 1mm.Perforation hole shall be minimum 5mm, with minimum
40% free passage. Steel sheet shall be stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A167,
type 304.
6.0 APPLICATION
6.1 General Requirements
6.1.1 The application methods, given in this specification are general in nature. The
Contractor is responsible for applying an insulating system that will give a satisfactory
operational performance and the requirements given herein shall be regarded as the
acceptable minimum. The Contractor shall carryout the work in accordance with the
best practices of insulation application with the minimum of waste and debris and the
final job shall have a neat, efficient and workmanlike appearance.
6.1.2 The insulation shall be so designed/ applied such that ingress of water is prevented,
leaked product can drain off and vapour can escape.
6.1.3 All hydrostatic tests on piping and equipment, including steam tracing systems, shall be
carried out before insulating material is applied. The insulation Contractor shall only
insulate those sections of the plant that have been specifically released for such work
by the engineer-in-charge. If insulation must be installed before pressure test, then all
welds and flanged joints in the pipe shall be left uncovered till successful completion of
pressure test. Then insulation shall be completed.
6.1.4 Co-ordination with Other Agencies
Contractor shall work in close co-ordination with the erection Contractor. Wherever
temporary supports are provided the contractor shall remove these and provide
necessary support as per standard or as specified in the bid package/tender.
6.1.5 Surfaces to be insulated shall be thoroughly cleaned, dried and made free from loose
scale, oil or grease. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to remove loosely
adhering scale and dirt before applying insulation.
6.1.6 Under Insulation Painting
Equipments and piping shall be protected from corrosion by providing appropriate

painting under insulation, as per applicable painting specification for the project.
Austenitic stainless steel especially 300 and 400 series are susceptible for external
stress corrosion cracking (ESCC). For to avoid ESCC in stainless steel, 0.1mm thick
aluminium foil up to 550oC, above which stainless steel foil can be wrapped with an
overlap of 50mm. Overlap joint shall be sealed with barium chromate sealer or self-
Page 1510 of 1823

adhesive (chloride free) aluminum tape at the edge of foil. Foil shall be secured in
position either by pressure sensitive tape or aluminium band.
6.1.7 The insulation contractor shall not carry out any welding or drilling on plant equipment
and piping.
6.1.8 Wet or Damaged Insulation shall not be used under any circumstances. Material
awaiting its protective cover shall be adequately protected from damage, rain and
contamination and shall be covered with cladding at a minimum loss of time.
6.1.9 Insulation shall be finished, bevelled and weatherproofed at all terminal points where it
is required to remove bolts etc. without damage to the insulation.
6.1.10 Equipment nameplates shall remain visible after insulation has been applied by
bevelling back the insulating material and carefully sealing the exposed edges to
prevent ingress of moisture.
6.1.11 All projections, such as lifting lugs, trunnions and stiffeners on piping and equipment
(i.e. vacuum rings) shall be insulated with the same thickness of insulation as specified
for the equipment item or pipeline.
6.1.12 Thermowell bosses, pressure tappings and weephole nipples shall not be insulated in
but left accessible.
6.1.13 A minimum clearance of 25mm between outside surface of any insulation finish and
adjacent equipment, pipe or structural members shall be maintained.
6.1.14 Insulation supports shall not project out of the insulation outer surface and shall be
given sufficient coverage of insulating material to avoid hot spots on the metallic cover
at support positions.
6.1.15 Where insulated horizontal piping is supported on steel shoes, the height of the shoe
shall be such that the underside of the insulation finishing material is clear of the
supporting structure upon which the shoe rests by 25mm minimum.
6.1.16 Pieces of insulation with crushed and damaged ends shall not be used.
6.1.17 Packing and transport to site
Insulating materials should be packed in cartons, crates, bags or shrink film wrapping
to minimize mechanical damage and to provide adequate weather-protection and to
avoid contamination. Preferably, insulating materials should not be unpacked on site
until required for immediate use.
All forms of packaging of insulating materials should be carefully marked. The marking
should indicate the type of material and the size, thickness, quality, and quantity
contained in each package.
6.1.18 Protection of Materials During Storage
Insulation materials must be protected against any damage, from delivery to finish
cladding. Decking and covering with tarpaulins alone are not considered sufficient
protection from weather for any length of time and shall not be permitted. Insulation
material slabs, blankets and sections shall be stored on a flat surface in a horizontal
Page 1511 of 1823

position. Insulation material shall never be stacked directly on the ground. The
contractor shall make own arrangement for covered storage for insulation materials as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
6.1.19 Protection of Partially Completed Jobs
Precautions must be taken to ensure that each day’s work is adequately protected
before being left over-night to prevent seepage of water. Unfinished / partially finished /
ongoing insulation jobs shall be protected from water ingress by appropriate water
shed / wrapping and other protective means.
6.2 Piping Applications
6.2.1 Horizontal Pipe
a) General
Insulation material shall be applied to fit snugly against the contours and shaped
only where necessary to achieve this requirement
b) Pipe Section / Moulded Blocks / Segments
- End joints of adjacent blocks shall be staggered one half of the length of the
block.
- Included angle between segments shall not be less than 30 deg. for both
single and double layer insulation.
- Further, minimum arc length of segments should meet following staggering

requirements.
When double layer is applied, both longitudinal and circumferential joints shall be
staggered. The arc between the longitudinal seam lines of the inside and outside
layers of insulation shall have an angle of over 15 deg. or the longitudinal joints
staggered at least by one-layer thickness, whichever is more stringent.
Circumferential seams of the inside and outside layers shall be at least 100mm
apart.
c) Blankets (Fibrous insulation) shall be applied over the surface with joints tightly
butted and laced together with stainless steel lacing wire.
d) Insulation Securement (All insulation materials)
Each layer of insulation shall be secured firmly in place with at least 3 loops of
binding wire / band, one loop to be placed not more than 75 from each end and at
least one loop to be equally spaced between end loops, for each section.
Binding wire shall be drawn about the insulation with ends tightly twisted together,
bent under & pressed into the surface of insulation. Bands or wires in no case be
spaced more than 200mm apart.
- For calcium silicate and moulded expanded perlite, all joints shall be sealed
with insulating cement of same composition as the Moulded block.
- For Cellular glass, Polyurethane foam and polyisocyanurate, joints shall be

sealed with suitable compatible material
Page 1512 of 1823

e) Frame work for supporting cladding fibrous insulation
This is not necessary for rigid materials. This is required only for horizontal pipe
runs provided with fibrous insulation, in blanket forms; vertical piping provided with
fibrous materials need not be provided with this. Piping provided with fibrous resin
bonded pipe sections also need not be provided with this framework.
Spacer rings shall be fabricated out of 25x3 M.S. Flats. The outside diameter of
these rings shall be equivalent to the outside diameter of the insulation. Spacer
rings shall be riveted to ‘Z’ shaped stays fabricated from the same sized M.S.
Flats. These rings shall be suitably painted for corrosion protection. Stays shall be
provided at intervals of not more than 300 along the circumference of the
insulation, subject to a minimum of 3 stays. Spacer rings shall be provided at every
approx. 900. To minimize direct heat conduction through the stays, a packing of 2
sheets of 3 thick CF paper shall be provided at the joints of the stays and pipes.
Joints between M.S. Spacer Ring and stays shall be riveted by 6 dia M.S. Rivets
with 2 Sheets of 3 thick mill board interposed.
6.2.2 Vertical Pipe
Insulation on vertical or near vertical piping (i.e. greater than 45 deg. angle from
horizontal) shall be supported by bolted on metal collars. Metal collars shall be of 6
thick M.S. or Alloy Steel bar (to suit piping material).
Outside diameter of collar shall be around 12 less than O.D. of insulation. Where multi-
layer insulation is used, support collar shall be extended to provide for each layer.
Support positions shall be at no greater distance apart than the following:
Pipe operating Temp.(oC) Support Spacing (mm)

Upto 400 4500
401 to 500 3500
501 to 550 2500
551 to 650 2000
651 to 760 1500
6.2.3 Expansion Joints (Both vertical and horizontal piping. Rigid insulation Materials)
Expansion joint shall be provided at regular intervals as below:
Temp.(oC) Spacing (mm)

Upto 200 Not required
201 to 300 10
301 to 350 8
351 to 400 6
401 to 550 5
551 to 650 4
651 to 760 3
Expansion joint shall be formed by a 25mm space between the pipe insulation sections
and the space shall be filled by compressed loose rock wool. Expansion joints in each
layer shall be offset at least 150 from each other in case of multi-layer insulation.
Page 1513 of 1823

Expansion joint for first layer for vertical pipe shall preferably be just below insulation
support collars.
6.2.4 Elbows and Bends (All insulation materials)
Insulation material shall be mitred and shall be same as that of pipe. Insulation
securement bands/wire shall be same as that for equivalent dia pipe. Each mitred
section shall be secured with minimum 2 wires/bands. For bends / elbows of nom. pipe
size 6” & below, due to lack of space, for all insulation materials, insulation shall be
secured by spirally wound 16 SWG SS wire for hard materials & 10 SWG SS wire for
soft materials.
Insulation joint for calcium silicate shall be suitably sealed by insulating cement. Fittings
below 50mm nom. dia, if insulated of calcium silicate shall be insulated with insulating
cement build up in 6mm layers to the thickness of insulation of the adjacent piping.
Each layer of insulation cement shall be reinforced with 25mm No. 20 SWG wire
netting.
6.2.5 Tee (All Insulation Materials)
Preformed pipe sections or segments shall be carefully cut and shaped around "Tee,'
junctions and the insulation material of the tangential pipe shall be carefully and neatly
cut to mate upto the material applied to the parent pipe without the creation of voids or
gaps, at the junction. Insulation shall be adequately secured by wire / bands of same
specification as that of same size pipe.
6.2.6 Flanged Joints or Valves (all insulation materials)
Flanged Joints or Valves, if to be insulated, shall be insulated with removable type

insulation.
6.2.7 Insulation Flashing (all insulation materials)
Insulation shall be stopped short of flanged joints and unions by a sufficient distance to
permit easy removal of the flange nuts and bolts or breaking of the unions to take place
without disturbance or damage to the insulating material. At these positions the
insulation shall be beveled and sealed with a metal closure which in turn shall be
sealed with waterproof sealing material.
6.2.8 Pipe Supports: (All insulation materials)
Insulation at solid welded or clamped supports shall be cut and shaped to fit around the
support and banded securely to enable the insulation to be carried with the pipe
movement. When the pipe hangers pass through insulation on piping outdoors, metal
hoods packed with a waterproof sealing material shall be furnished and installed.
Upper bolts of the hanger clamps are not to be covered with insulation.
6.2.9 Steam Traced Piping (All insulation materials)

Steam traced piping and fittings shall be installed with oversized sections to allow
accommodation of both parent pipe and tracer without damage or deformation of the
insulation. Traced instrument line and fittings shall be totally enclosed by the insulation
in a similar manner and the designed warm air annulus maintained throughout the
tracer pipe length. Insulation supports for vertical pipe shall have suitable clearance for
tracer pipe. Composite box type insulation may be provided on the steam supply lead
lines, in case they are routed together similarly this may be provided for the return lines
to manifolds after the run of tracers.
Page 1514 of 1823

6.2.10 Electrical Traced Piping
Electrical traced piping shall be provided with the same size insulation as would be
provided if the piping were not electrically traced, unless otherwise specified.
6.3 Horizontal Equipments
6.3.1 Application in horizontal vessel
a) The vessel fabricator shall provide insulation cladding support /securement as

per fabrication drawing / standard. Insulation contractor shall verify the same
before commencing.
- For vessels of diameter 2000mm and above are provided insulation

support at horizontal centre line as also vertically at tangent lines. Ring
support at tangent lines are provided with 6mm diameter holes. These
are to be used for insulation securement.
- At vessel heads above 600mm outside diameter are provided flats

having 6mm dia holes. The flats are for insulation support and holes
provided in them are to be used for insulation securement.
Also provided on either head is a central ring made of 10 dia stainless
steel rod.
- Boot of vessel, if any, is provided with circular support ring with holes, as
indicated in sketch.
b) Blanket shall be applied over the surface with joints tightly butted and laced
together with 1mm dia stainless steel lacing wire.
Other block insulation shall be applied with the longer dimension parallel to the
axis of the vessel or equipment. When blocks are applied in multiple layers, all
joints in successive layers shall be parallel to the long axis, shall be staggered
and sealed with suitable sealant.
6.3.2 Insulation Securement
Each layer of insulation on shells of equipment shall be secured by bands at every 300
centres. Each band shall be machine stretched and tensioned to remove slack only.
Each layer of insulation on vessel heads shall be secured as follows:
Band shall be in radial direction connecting the head central floating ring and shell girth
ring. The radial bands shall be placed at not more than 150 centres for rigid and 300
for fibrous insulation, measured at the girth ring. These bands shall be machine
stretched and sealed. Outermost layer of insulation shall also be supported by drawing
and securing 16 SWG annealed wire through the 6 diameter holes provided in the shell
girth ring as also the flats provided on heads. The wire shall be drawn through every
hole and it shall be secured to the ring with a knot.
Page 1515 of 1823

6.4 Vertical Equipments
6.4.1 Application in vertical vessel
Application details on shell, top and bottom heads shall be similar to that of horizontal
equipment. Insulation shall be laid on insulation support rings provided by the
fabricator.
6.4.2 Insulation Securement (For all insulation materials)
Bottom and Top Head insulation shall be supported by 16 SWG SS wire drawn through
holes in the insulation supports provided by the fabricator.
Top head insulation shall be secured by floating ring/bands provided by vessel

fabricator similar to head of horizontal vessel.Shell insulation shall be supported by
bands at every 300 centres on the cylindrical portion and the bands shall be kept
horizontal.
Insulation Securement for Bottom head for vessel supported on legs shall be identical
to that of Top head.
For insulation securement of bottom heads inside skirt no floating rings/bands need be
provided; Firm securement should be ensured just by 16 SWG annealed SS wire
drawn over insulation tightly and through the holes on support rings provided by the
fabricator.
6.4.3 Expansion Joints (For rigid insulation)
Expansion joints shall be provided every 4000mm (max.). The expansion joint shall be
provided at insulation support rings. It shall be a 25mm space between the top of the
insulation and the bottom of the support ring. The space shall be filled up by
compressed rockwool fibre.
6.5 Flange, Nozzle, Channel Cover, Manway & Handhole Flanged Cover (For All
Insulation Materials)
Where insulation is required, these shall be insulated with lined removable

prefabricated covers secured with bands or quick release toggle clips.
Otherwise, insulation shall be stopped short of uninsulated flanges and nozzles etc., a
sufficient distance to permit withdrawal of bolts without disturbing the insulation.
Insulation shall be weatherproofed and sealed at these locations.
6.6 Application over Irregular Surfaces Such as Pumps, Compressors, Turbines etc.
a) Rockwool: This shall be prefabricated removable covers, lined with pipe

sections / lags / slabs / mattresses.
b) Calcium silicate/ Moulded expanded perlite: Insulation material shall be loose fill
insulating cement/block insulation cut and fitted.
Insulation shall be applied in maximum 25mm thick layers until the scheduled
thickness is obtained.
Page 1516 of 1823

Each layer shall be covered with a layer of 25mm hex. 20 SWG galvanised iron
wire mesh for other than SS surfaces and with SS wire mesh for SS surfaces.
The final layers shall be trovelled to a smooth finish with a 6mm thick finishing
cement.
Insulation shall be beveled back at 45 deg. from all casing flanges, shaft seal
caps and bearing boxes.
6.7 Vertical Storage Tanks (Carbon Steel)
a) Supporting rings / spikes (rods) for supporting insulation / cladding
 Shell
The extent of insulation/ cladding support/ securement details shall be as per the
relevant tank fabrication standard/ drawings. Insulation contractor shall check for
its presence before insulation application work.
Water Shed
At the junction of shell and roof, a watershed is provided to act as top covering for
the shell insulation. The details of water shedding shall be as per the relevant tank
fabrication standard/ drawings. Insulation contractor shall check for its presence
prior to insulation application work.
Insulation Support
Insulation support will consist of 5mm dia steel rods provided at 400mm dia
diamond pitch. Length of these lugs is 3mm less than insulation thickness.
Cladding Support
From tank top, horizontal rings shall be provided at every 1175mm on tank shell.
 Tank Roof
Shall be provided as per relevant tank fabrication standard.
b) Insulation laying and securement
 Shell (Application of fibrous insulation)
Insulation shall be applied between rings in horizontal mode. Mattresses

insulation shall be applied with joints tightly butted and laced together with 1mm
dia. Stainless steel lacing wire. Matts shall be impaled to the 5mm rod and speed
washers fixed and pressed home for intimate contact of the insulation. In the
case of multiple layers, speed washers are necessary only over the final layers,
(upto and including 150mms). Rods and speed washers of spring steel should be
selected to suit each other. While rods are provided by tank fabricator, speed
washers shall be furnished by insulation contractor. Insulation shall be further
secured by bands spaced centrally between insulation supports.
 Shell (Application of Polyisocyanurate / Polyurethane foam)
Shall be foamed cast in-situ as per vendor's procedure (approved by

Client/Client’s representative) and to the satisfaction of Site-in-Charge. The
Page 1517 of 1823

minimum requirement for thermal conductivity, density, compressive strength, fire

properties and water vapour permeability shall be as specified herein this
specification. Contractor shall ensure that cladding & band thicknesses are
capable of withstanding foaming pressures which are developed at the time of
injection of foam. Contractor can use foamed cast in-situ insulation only after
getting the approval to material specification and application procedure.
 Roof (For all materials)
Application fibrous insulation, Polyisocyanurate / Polyurethane foam shall be

similar to that as for shell. Insulation support from 5mm dia M.S. lugs shall be
exactly same as in shell.
6.8 Horton Spheres
c) Structural members provided by spheres fabricator for insulation/cladding

securement. Insulation & Cladding supports shall be as per relevant sphere
fabrication standard
d) Insulation laying and securement
Insulation shall be applied between rings. Insulation shall be applied with joints
tightly butted and laced together with 1mm dia galvanized lacing wire.
Insulation shall be secured by drawing and securing tightly 16 SWG stainless

steel wire through the 6 dia holes, provided every 200 centres, in the horizontal
leg of the insulation support angle ring. The wire shall be rightly drawn over the
insulation and the insulation firmly secured. The wire shall be drawn through
every single individual hole and it shall be secured with angle with a knot at
every fourth hole.
6.9 Inspection Windows
Removable plug type inspection window shall be provided on the outside thermal
insulation metal jacketing to facilitate the maintenance inspection of substrate. The
removable plug shall be made of silicon rubber and secured with small chain or
lanyard made of stainless steel. Sealing flange shall be made of stainless (SS-304).
An O-ring made of rubber shall be placed for any metal seal flange for proper retrofit.
Plug flange shall be fixed by screws and washers to outside metal jacketing and
same shall be silicon sealed for a perfect watertight assembly sealing.
When inspection window installed on corrugated metal jacketing, a neoprene transition

gasket shall be installed between cladding and flange
6.9.1 Piping
Plug type inspection windows of ellipsoidal shape shall be provided on all the insulated
pipelines having diameter 2” and above. The locations of inspection plugs shall be as
follows:
 Straight section:
Two inspection window at 0-6 o’clock position shall be provided at a distance of

every 12 meters.
Page 1518 of 1823

 Bends/Elbows:
There must be three inspection window shall be installed near the bends. In case of
no supports are welded at the centre of the elbows, one inspection window at the
centre of the outer arc and another two at 100 mm away from the above and
downstream of the plug. In case of supports are welded at the centre of the elbows,
one on side of the elbows and another two at 100 mm away from the support
upstream and downstream.
 Tee joints:
Two no. inspection window shall be installed, one at the Tee bottom and another at
the side of Tee.
6.9.2 Exchangers
All the heads shall be provided with one inspection window each. Minimum two
inspection windows shall be provided on the shell side.
6.9.3 Columns & Vessels
Heads shall be provided with one inspection window each. One inspection window
shall be provided at every platform. Minimum two inspection windows shall be provided
on shell portion.
6.9.4 Tanks
One inspection window shall be provided at each course of the tank and also at the
top.
6.9.5 Dimension of Inspection window
Application Size
Pipe dia 2’’ 35mm minor diameter x 120mm major diameter
Pipe dia 3” 45mm minor diameter x 120mm major diameter
Pipe dia > 8” 120mm minor diameter x 120mm major diameter
Exchangers, Columns& 120mm minor diameter x 120mm major diameter
Vessels and Tanks
6.10 Impulse Lines for Heat Traced Lines
Wrap the impulse lines with insulation (Sodium Silicate inhibited Ceramic rope) of
required thickness after cleaning the impulse lines from dust, rust, grease etc. Ensure
that the rope(s) have been tightly wrapped without leaving any gaps. Apply two layers
of self adhesive Aluminium foil tape of minimum 0.1 mm thick spirally bound over the
fibre rope surface with the joints in two layers staggered. Ceramic rope shall have
minimum density of 250 Kg/m3, other property like maximum use temperature, tensile
strength, linerar shrinkage, non-fibrous content etc. shall meet the requirement
specified as per ASTM C892, Type III. A suitable sealant shall be provided to stop the
water ingress at the termination points of insulation.
Page 1519 of 1823

Note: Impulse line insulation details shall be as follows:
Size of Impulse line Temperature No. of layers Thickness of each

( inch) (oC) layer (inch)
1/2 150 2 1/2
3/4 150 2 1/2
1/2 250 2 3/4
3/4 250 2 3/4
6.11 Impulse Lines for Hot Insulated Lines
Wrap impulse lines with sodium silicate inhibited ceramic fiber rope (SS-wire braided)
with thickness of layer as 3/4” irrespective of temperature, after cleaning the impulse
lines from dust, rust, grease etc. The wrapping of the rope around impulse line shall
cover it completely without leaving any gap. Apply two layers of self adhesive
Aluminum foil tape of minimum 0.1 mm thick spirally bound over the fiber rope surface
with the joints. Ceramic rope shall have minimum density of 250 Kg/m³, other property
like maximum use temperature, tensile strength, linerar shrinkage, non-fibrous content
etc. shall meet the requirement specified as per ASTM C892, Type III. A suitable
sealant shall be provided to stop the water ingress at the termination points of
insulation
6.12 INSULATION FINISH
6.12.1 Multiplex vapor barrier
In case of closed cell material (Cellular glass, perlite etc.) in CUI risk zone and on PIR
in case of electrical tracing and multiplex vapour barrier shall be applied over the outer
surface of Insulation. The joints of the vapor barrier foil shall be overlapped by 50mm.
The joints shall be sealed with a tape confirming to the specification as mentioned
herein in this specification.
6.12.2 Moisture Barrier
(Applicable for application on outer surface of the fibrous insulation in CUI risk zone)
The mastic shall be applied in two coats with glass cloth reinforcement such that total
dry thickness is ~ 3mm.
Immediately after the insulation, a 3mm thick coating of the mastic shall be applied to
the surface and a glass cloth shall be laid over the surface and embedded in the
mastic. Care shall be taken to ensure that the glass cloth is laid smooth and free from
wrinkles and that no pockets of air are trapped beneath the surface. The glass cloth
shall have min 75mm overlap at joint. A second coat of 3mm shall be applied after
approximately 12 hrs. During the drying time, the insulation shall be protected from the
weather by "Alkathene” film type tarpaulin or similar materials approved by engineer-in-
charge.
Page 1520 of 1823

6.12.3 Insulation Finish with metal jacketing
The insulation finish shall provide a weatherproofed and covering over the whole of the
insulated areas and be applied and fitted in such a manner as to provide a close fitting
assembly without gaps.
a) Piping
- Straight pipe shall have metal jacketing cut and machine rolled, (approx. 1metre
long) wrapped around, with 50mm minimum overlaps on both longitudinal and
circumferential overlaps. All laps shall be arranged to shed water.
- A single bead shall be made on all overlaps to ensure tight metal to metal water
tight arrangement. Self-tapping screws, at every 150, shall be provided at all
longitudinal overlaps for both horizontal & vertical piping.
- At all operating temperatures the seams at overlap positions shall be rendered
watertight to ensure that insulation remains dry and unwetted, whether the
possible water impingement is from rain, hose or fire sprinklers.
- The metal coverings shall be secured tightly around the insulated pipe and held
in place with bands on a maximum of 300mm centres. One band shall be
located on each circumferential lap and the distance between laps divided at
equal band spacings. The band securing seals shall be kept neatly in line and
positioned away from viewing angles as much as is possible.
- Vertical overlaps on vertical or near vertical piping shall be staggered to provide

overlaps at 'North,' and 'South' positions in alternate sections of covering.
- Each sections of metal covering on vertical piping with insulation OD's larger
than 250mm shall be supported from the next lower section with two ‘S' clips,
fabricated from banding material. The ‘S' clip shall be of sufficient length to
allow the minimum overlap of 50mm.
- On vertical piping with OD's of 600mm and larger, the securing bands shall be
supported by ‘J’ clips, fabricated from banding material. The ‘J’ clip spacing
shall be a minimum of two per band. All ‘J’ clips shall be screwed into position
and secured.
- Insulated bends and elbows in piping 80mm and larger, shall be metalled with
'lobster back' segments using 10mm minimum ball swage to assist shaping.
The metal bands shall be screwed with self tapping screws and metal sealants
are to be provided to get a completely waterproofed arrangement.
- Insulated bends and elbows in piping smaller than 80 mm may use complete
pressed and humped back flat metal elbows or fabricated 'stove pipe' elbows.
- The practice of locating all joints in the top portion of elevated horizontal pipes
for the sake of good appearance when looking up from grade shall be strongly
discouraged. The joints shall be located to shed water.
b) Equipments
- The metal jacket over vertical vessel shells shall be constructed of sheet metal
panels with the weight of the panel taken on the equipment insulation support
rings, via angle brackets bolted to the panel.
Page 1521 of 1823

- The panels shall be applied commencing at the bottom of the vessel. Each
circumferential ring of panels shall be tensioned by means of tensioning bands
until the final joint is screwed tight. 'S' clips shall be used as sheeting support at
unscrewed circumferential overlaps.
- The panels shall be held tight over the vessel insulation by means of
circumferential bands and sealed. The bands shall be positioned on all
horizontal overlaps and at 300mm centres. Bands shall be held in their relative
positions with ‘J’ clips fastened to the jackets with screw. Each band shall have
J-clips on 1.8m maximum centre but not less than four J-clips per band. Each
band shall have compression spring as specified in this specification.
- The panels shall have a minimum overlap of one corrugation on vertical joints
and 80mm on horizontal joints. The overlaps shall be arranged to shed water at
all times.
- The vertical and horizontal overlaps shall be secured with self tapping screws at
150mm pitch except the horizontal overlaps pre-selected to act as expansion
joints, these shall be constructed with a 150mm overlap and shall remain
unscrewed and left free to permit expansion. All overlaps shall be rendered
watertight.
- All equipment projections such as nozzles, shall have the jacketing sealed
using a metal flashing, cut to fit the projection and extending above the jacket at
least 80mm. The seal between the flashing and jacket shall be made watertight
by use of self-tapping screws and sealing mastic.
- Horizontal cylindrical equipment shall be furnished with flat metal jacket

arranged in circumferential bands with the edge of the sheets, with the longer
dimension applied around the circumference of the equipment insulation.
- The panels shall have a minimum of 80mm overlap of both longitudinal and
circumferential edges, both overlaps being finished with a simple ball swage
and rendered watertight.
- Horizontal overlaps shall be secured with No. 8x12mm long self-tapping screws
set in the overlap at 150mm intervals and shall be so arranged that staggered
bands of panelling encircle the equipment. Vertical overlaps shall not be
screwed for horizontal equipment.
- The metal finish shall be banded and sealed at 450mm centres.
- The insulated heads of vertical and horizontal equipment shall be fabricated

from flat metal, an "Orange peel" construction with all radial seams overlapping
a minimum of 50mm and secured with self-tapping screws at 150mm centres.
All overlaps shall be ball swaged and be rendered watertight.
- Projections from the heads shall be sealed using metal flashings, neatly cut to
fit around the projections and extending above the jacket for a minimum of
80mm. The seal between flashing and jacket shall be weatherproofed with self-
tapping screws and mastics.
- Insulation at bottom heads of fully skirted equipments does not require

weatherproofing.
Page 1522 of 1823

- Heads of equipments 24” OD and smaller shall be finished and waterproofed

with square ended fabricated covers.
c) Vertical Storage Tanks
Cladding Applications and Securement
 Shell
Cladding is applied over the system of horizontal rings as follows :
- Overlaps in the vertical joints will be one corrugation.
- Overlaps in the horizontal joints shall be 50mm (min.).
- Cladding to cladding fastening, at both horizontal and vertical overlaps

shall be alternately by "POP" Rivets & selftapping screws at 150mm
pitch.
- Cladding shall be secured to support ring by bolting. Bolts are provided

by tank fabricator at 300mm centres on angles provided at every 1175
centres vertically. Felt washer, aluminium washer and nut shall be
supplied by insulation contractor for all bolted connections at shell, roof
and curb angle.
- Insulation shall be tucked into the skirt portion of the curb angle. Shell
cladding and extended roof cladding shall be secured to curb angle by
bolting as per relevant fabrication standard.
- Horizontal stainless steel bands over-cladding to be provided every

800mm and also to coincide at every horizontal cladding overlaps.
Bands shall be tightened, locked and lock fastened featuring stainless
steel fastening systems. In order to prevent sliding of the bands
downwards, the bands shall be secured to the cladding using POP rivets
at horizontal pitch not over 2 metres .
 Roof
- All cladding joints shall be sealed by elastomeric metal sealants.
- Min. 75mm overlap shall be ensured at all joints.
- At all joints, cladding-to-cladding securement shall be provided by self-

tapping screws and pop rivets alternately, every 150 centres.
- Cladding shall be secured by bolting at every 300 provided by tank

fabricator.
d) Horton Sphere
 Cladding Support
Insulation contractor shall provide 25mm x 0.8mm S.S. Bands over insulation
and install them longitudinally from top to bottom of the sphere in such
numbers so as to afford a maximum spacing of 1175mm at the equator. The
Page 1523 of 1823

S.S. Bands are spanned between four floating rings, the one at the top and
bottom of the sphere are provided by the sphere fabricator. Generally the
other two rings and SS bands are provided after insulation is applied prior to
application of cladding. Floating rings will be constructed of 10mm diameter
rods of S.S.. Diameter of ring at the top and bottom, to be provided by sphere
fabricator would be around 1.2m. Cladding support bands shall be tightened
using mechanical tighteners and fastened to MS / AS angles using two
S.S.Rivets or four Nos. of Aluminium POP rivets, per angle cleat.
 Cladding Application
While applying cladding, following shall be ensured
-Minimum overlap both horizontal and vertical shall be 50mm.
 Cladding Securement and Scaling of Joints
All joints to be sealed using elastomeric metal sealant.
Cladding to cladding securement of both vertical and horizontal overlaps shall

be alternately by POP rivets and self-tapping screws, at every 150mm
spacing.
Cladding shall be secured to the insulation angle support by bolting the

cladding on the bolts provided at every 300 pitch.
Further cladding shall be secured by 25mm x 0.5mm S.S. bands, applied

identical to those for insulation securement. The bands shall be provided
between two floating rings, one at the top and one at the bottom and
arrangement & details shall be identical to that of insulation securement.
Bands shall be secured to cladding every 2M by one SS or two aluminium
POP rivets. While providing floating rings, for both insulation and cladding
securement, following points shall be taken care of:
- Floating rings shall clear nozzles / manholes etc.
- Exercise extreme care while installing floating rings regarding cut outs in
cladding around projections,
- Cladding at interface between leg and the body of the sphere to be

provided with care and suitably sealed to prevent water ingress.
7.0 QUALITY CONTROL
7.1 Incoming Material Control
7.1.1 Insulation materials and accessories shall be inspected by appropriate authority

according to inspection categorization of the materials as per project execution
philosophy.
7.1.2 Irrespective of the inspection performed by TPI / PMC / Owner’s representative,

contractor shall submit QAP (quality assurance plan) of the materials and internal test
reports for every production batch and type test wherever specified in this specification.
Page 1524 of 1823

The QAP shall include every stage of manufacturing process starting from raw material
stage to final stage of manufacturing. The QAP shall also include reference of
purchase order number and date, the types of checks, methods of tests followed,
frequency of checks, lot size & acceptable criteria with permissible deviations.
7.1.3 Besides the inspection performed at supplier premises and / certificate of conformance
provided by supplier, at the discretion of engineer-in charge, random inspection may be
performed on the supplied materials. Parameters and extent of testing shall be
advised by engineer-in charge.
On the advice of engineer-in charge, the contractor shall organize the testing on
representative sample selected at random from an independent NABL approved
laboratory. In the event of non-conformance in testing, repeat test may be performed.
Failure in repeat test may call of rejection of the batch.
7.2 Installation Quality Control
7.2.1 Insulation shall be installed after hydrostatic testing and inspection. Insulation shall be
protected from weather before and during installation.
7.2.2 Insulation system should be applied as per approved drawings/sketches, installation

procedure and quality plan.
7.2.3 Contractor shall prepare an inspection test plan (ITP) for installation of insulation
identifying inspection / witness points, frequency etc. and submit for approval of owner
/ engineer in charge at construction site.
7.2.4 The engineer in-charge may finalize the same with consultation of HO specialist. If so
desired by engineer-in charge, HO specialist may assist inspection of insulation work at
critical stages.
7.3 Qualification of Application Crews
Prior to start for installation work, contractor’s credential shall be approved by engineer
in-charge of insulation work. The application crew must be fully trained work force. At
the beginning of every installation, the application shall be demonstrated and quality
checks shall be carried out at site and shall be certified by Owner/Engineer in charge.
7.4 Documentation
Insulation contractor shall submit Insulation Application Procedure for review and
approval. Such procedure shall contain minimum following information:
- Product data sheet, material safety data sheet and compliance certificate of all
the insulation and ancillaries material.
- Insulation detail drawings showing insulation system, expansion/contraction

joints, insulation supports, terminations etc.
- Method statement for insulation system application and repair.
- Quality Control Plan for Insulation application (QCP)
Page 1525 of 1823

7.5 Safety
The insulation contractor shall provide adequate protective appliances like hand
gloves, masks, glasses etc. to the workmen carrying out the insulation work, to protect
them from inhaling and touching insulation dust and fibers.
7.6 Specification Deviation / Concession Control
The insulation contractor shall notify Owner/Engineer in charge of any apparent conflict
between this specification, product data sheets, the codes and standards, and any
other specification or document noted herein. Resolution and/or interpretation
precedence shall be obtained from the Owner/Engineer in charge in writing before
proceeding with application of any insulation material.
Any technical deviation to the purchase order/contract and its attachment including, but
not limited to, the data sheets and specification shall be sought by the insulation
contractor only through the concession request format. Concession requests require
the Owner’s/Engineer in charge’s review and approval, prior to the proposed technical
changes being implemented. Technical changes implemented prior to Owner’s
approval are subject to rejection.
7.7 Guarantee for Supply and Installation Quality
Contractor shall ensure supplied materials conform to the technical requirements of this
specification and relevant standards / codes applicable for the job. The insulation and
ancillary materials shall be procured fresh for the project. Use of excess material from
other site which does not have proper traceability shall not be allowed. It is the
responsibility of insulation contractor to ensure adequate precautions are taken against
damage and deterioration during sourcing, transportation and storage of insulation
materials. For major insulation materials like rock wool, Perlite, Ceramic fiber PIR,
cellular glass, aerogel etc. batch and type test certificates as applicable shall be
submitted. For ancillary materials like multiplex foil, band, sealant etc. and metal
cladding may be accepted based on supplier's compliance certificate.
Any deviations shall be clearly stated, and work shall proceed only after the deviations
are approved by competent authority. The workmanship in execution of the insulation
works shall be in accordance with sound engineering practice.
8.0 REFERENCE CODES & STANDARDS
ASTM Standards and Specifications
ASTM A167 Specification for stainless and heat-resisting chromium nickel steel
plate, sheet and strip
ASTM A240 Specification for heat-resisting chromium and chromium-nickel stainless
steel plate, sheet and strip for Pressure Vessels
ASTM A463 Specification for steel sheet, aluminum coated, by hot-dip process
ASTM A526 Specification of steel sheet, zinc coated (galvanized) by the hot-dip
process, commercial quality
ASTM B209 Aluminum - Alloy sheet and plate
ASTM C165 Measuring Compressive properties of thermal insulations
Page 1526 of 1823

ASTM C177 Standard test method for Steady-state heat flux measurements &
thermal transmission properties by means of the ‘guarded-hot-plate’
apparatus
ASTM C240 Standard test methods of testing Cellular glass insulation block
ASTM C302 Standard test method for Density and dimensions of preformed pipe-
covering-type thermal insulation
ASTM C303 Standard test method for Density and dimensions of preformed block
and board type thermal insulation
ASTM C335 Standard test method for Steady-state heat transfer properties of
horizontal pipe insulation
ASTM C356 Standard test method for Linear shrinkage of preformed high-
temperature thermal insulation subjected to soaking heat
ASTM C390 Standard criteria for Sampling and acceptance of preformed thermal
insulation lots
ASTM C446 Standard test method for Breaking load and calculated modulus of
rupture of preformed insulation of pipes
ASTM C518 Standard test method for Steady-state thermal transmission properties
by means of the heat flow meter apparatus
ASTM C533 Standard specification for Calcium silicate block and pipe thermal
insulation
ASTM C547 Standard specification for Mineral fiber pipe insulation
ASTM C552 Standard specification for Cellular glass thermal insulation
ASTM C591 Standard specification for Unfaced preformed rigid cellular
polyisocyanurate thermal insulation
ASTM C592 Standard specification for Mineral fiber blanket insulation and blanket-
type pipe insulation (metal-mesh covered) (industrial type)
ASTM C610 Standard specification for block and pipe thermal insulation
ASTM C612 Standard specification for Mineral fiber block and board thermal
insulation
ASTM C795 Standard specification for thermal insulation for use in contact with
austenitic stainless steel
ASTM C871 Standard test methods for Chemical analysis of thermal insulation
materials for leachable chloride, fluoride, silicate and sodium ions
ASTM C892 Standard specification for High temperature fiber blanket thermal
insulation
ASTM D1622 Test method for apparent density of rigid cellular plastics
ASTM E96 Standard test methods for Water vapor transmission of materials
EIL Standards and Specifications
7-13-0003 Hot insulation supports for storage tanks

7-13-0015 Hot insulation supports for spheres
7-12-0025 Fireproofing and insulation supports
7-13-0033 Hot insulation supports for horizontal vessels
Page 1527 of 1823

6-79-0022 Standard specification for acoustic insulation

6-79-0027 Standard specification for cold insulation of vessels, piping and
equipment
IS Standards and Specifications
IS 8183 Bonded mineral wool - Specification

IS 9428 Calcium silicate insulation blocks and pipe-coverings
IS 11239 Method of test for rigid cellular thermal insulation materials
Page 1528 of 1823

9.0 INSULATION DIAGRAMS
The drawings/ sketches are general in nature. Specific insulation system/ requirement
if any from insulation manufacturer, shall be submitted by contractor for approval by
owner/ Engineer in charge.
The attached sketches describe general arrangement of insulation material, ancillaries

and cladding. Difference if any on material type & quality between sketch and the
description elsewhere in this specification/ SOR, later shall apply.
S.No. Description Drawing

1 Pipe insulation details (fibrous &rigid insulation) DRAWING. No. 01
2 Pipe insulation method of staggering of sections rigid DRAWING. No. 02
& fibrous insulation (preformed pipe sections only)
3 Horizontal pipe : fibrous insulation; detail of spacer DRAWING. No. 03
rings for cladding support
4. Detail of spacer ring fibrous insulation (mattress) DRAWING. No. 04
5. Bolted on insulation support for vertical pipe DRAWING. No. 05
6. Insulation details for bends / elbows DRAWING. No. 06
7. Insulation details : pipe bends & elbows DRAWING. No. 07
8. Insulation details: pipe branched & reducer DRAWING. No. 08
9. Example of removable flange box, horizontal DRAWING. No. 09
10. Removable flange box, vertical DRAWING. No. 10
11. Insulation details pipe supports DRAWING. No. 11
12. Insulation of traced piping DRAWING. No. 12
13. Horizontal equipment insulation DRAWING. No. 13
14. Horizontal equipment heads DRAWING. No. 14
15. Use of flexible insulation in combination with rigid DRAWING. No. 15
insulation to compensate for vessel expansion
16. Insulation details : vertical vessel DRAWING. No. 16
17. Insulation details vertical vessel heads DRAWING. No. 17
18. Insulation details : vertical vessels DRAWING. No. 18
19. Insulation details : vertical storage tank DRAWING. No. 19
20. Insulation details : sphere DRAWING. No. 20
21. Non- insulated flanges, horizontal and vertical DRAWING. No. 21
22. Removable valve box, "T" connection, horizontal DRAWING. No. 22
23. Removable valve box, "T" connection, vertical DRAWING. No. 23
24. Hanger support DRAWING. No. 24
25. Personal protection DRAWING. No. 25
26. Details of lifting lugs DRAWING. No. 26
27. Removable box for pump DRAWING. No. 27
Page 1529 of 1823

APPLY MOISTURE BARRIER OVER

THE INSULATION
FIGURE – 01
PIPE INSULATION DETAILS
(FIBROUS &RIGID INSULATION)
Page 1530 of 1823

APPLY MOISTURE BARRIER OVER

THE INSULATION
FIGURE – 02
PIPE INSULATION METHOD OF STAGGERING OF SECTIONS
RIGID & FIBROUS INSULATION (PREFORMED PIPE SECTIONS ONLY)
Page 1531 of 1823

FIGURE – 03
HORIZONTAL PIPE : FIBROUS INSULATION; DETAIL OF SPACER RINGS FOR CLADDING
SUPPORT
Page 1532 of 1823

FIGURE – 04
DETAIL OF SPACER RING FIBROUS INSLUATION (MATTRESS)
Page 1533 of 1823

FIGURE – 05
BOLTED ON INSULATION SUPPORT FOR VERTICAL PIPE
Page 1534 of 1823

APPLY MULTIPLEX FOIL OVER THE
INSULATION
FIGURE – 06
INSULATION DETAILS FOR BENDS / ELBOWS
Page 1535 of 1823

FIGURE – 07
INSULATION DETAILS : PIPE BENDS & ELBOWS
Page 1536 of 1823

FIGURE – 08
INSULATION DETAILS: PIPE BRANCHED & REDUCER
Page 1537 of 1823

NOTE

1. MATERIAL AND FINSHING IN ACCORDANCE WITH INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND
SPECIFICATION
2. DISTANCE BETWEEN INSULATION AND FLANGE TO BE BOLT LENGTH + 30 mm
3. INSULATION THICKNESS
FIGURE – 09
EXAMPLE OF REMOVABLE FLANGE BOX, HORIZONTAL
Page 1538 of 1823

NOTE

1. MATERIAL AND FINSHING IN ACCORDANCE WITH INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
AND SPECIFICATION
2. DISTANCE BETWEEN INSULATION AND FLANGE TO BE BOLT LENGTH + 30 mm
3. INSULATION THICKNESS
FIGURE – 10
REMOVABLE FLANGE BOX, VERTICAL
Page 1539 of 1823

FIGURE – 11
INSULATION DETAILS PIPE SUPPORTS
Page 1540 of 1823

FIGURE – 12
INSULATION OF TRACED PIPING
Page 1541 of 1823

FIGURE – 13
HORIZONTAL EQUIPMENT INSULATION
Page 1542 of 1823

FIGURE – 14
HORIZONTAL EQUIPMENT HEADS
Page 1543 of 1823

FIGURE – 15
USE OF FLEXIBLE INSULATION IN COMBINATION WITH RIGID INSULATION TO
COMPENSATE FOR VESSEL EXPANSION
Page 1544 of 1823

FIGURE – 16
INSULATION DETAILS : VERTICAL VESSEL
Page 1545 of 1823

FIGURE – 17
INSULATION DETAILS VERTICAL VESSEL HEADS
Page 1546 of 1823

FIGURE – 18
INSULATION DETAILS : VERTICAL VESSELS
Page 1547 of 1823

FIGURE – 19
INSULATION DETAILS : VERTICAL STORAGE TANK
Page 1548 of 1823

FIGURE – 20
INSULATION DETAILS : SPHERE
Page 1549 of 1823

Note
1. Materials and finishing in accordance with installation instructions and specification.
2. Distance between insulation and flange to be bolt length+30mm
3. In case a end plate/cap end may damage the pipe, a heat resistant tape or gasket material
to be installed between pipe and plate.
FIGURE – 21
NON- INSULATED FLANGES, HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL
Page 1550 of 1823

Note
1. Materials and Finishing in accordance with installation instructions and specification
2. Distance between insulation and flange to be bolt length + 30mm
3. Insulation Thickness
FIGURE – 22
REMOVABLE VALVE BOX, "T" CONNECTION, HORIZONTAL
Applicable only valves which needs to be insulated as per applicable specification
Page 1551 of 1823

Note
3. Insulation Thickness
4. Per box minimal 4 support angles > 30mm wide > 0.8mm thick
FIGURE – 23
REMOVABLE VALVE BOX, "T" CONNECTION, VERTICAL
Applicable only valves which needs to be insulated as per applicable specification
Page 1552 of 1823

Note
1. Materials and finishing in accordance with installation instructions and specifications
2. Rain cover is a part of the bracket
FIGURE – 24
HANGER SUPPORT
Page 1553 of 1823

Note
1. Materials and finishing in accordance with installation instructions and

specifications
FIGURE – 25
PERSONAL PROTECTION
Page 1554 of 1823

FIGURE – 26
DETAILS OF LIFTING LUGS
Page 1555 of 1823

Note
FIGURE – 27
REMOVABLE BOX FOR PUMP
Page 1556 of 1823

■311 ENGINEERS FOR POSITIVE MATERIAL
Ogeg fai5ieg LJMITED 6-81-0001 Rev. 3
I MKT, Mn1512 011 A Govt of Indict Undertaking) IDENTIFICATION (PMI) AT
SUPPLIER'S WORKS Page 1 of 8
fir ~i~fYnc~i
110111010 111+1 4 11 116t111 .
fe4hr
FOR
POSITIVE MATERIAL
IDENTIFICATION
(PMI)
AT SUPPLIER'S WORKS
3 19.09.16. REVISED AND RE-ISSUED TKK RKS RN
2 20.10.11 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED RKS SCG AKC DM
1 15.07.08 REVISED AND RE-ISSUED

NKR SSL SKP VC
0 07.12.00 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION AKC AKB AKB MI
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 1557 of 1823

401 ei ENGINEERS FOR POSITIVE MATERIAL
sigez INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0001 Rev. 3
INFer eRmiletel39RIMI (A Govt d tie Undertaking) IDENTIFICATION (PMI) AT
Abbreviations:

AS Alloy Steel
LSTK Lump Sum Turn Key
RTJ Ring Type Joint
Sch Schedule
SS Stainless Steel
TPI or TPIA Third Party Inspection Agency
Inspection Standards Committee
Convenor: Mr.R K Singh
Members: Mr. Rajeev Kumar

Mr. Himangshu Pal
Mr. Neeraj Mathur
Mr. T Kamalakannan
Mr. Mahendra Mittal
Mr. Deepak Gupta (Project)
Page 1558 of 1823

,311ae, ENGINEERS FOR POSITIVE MATERIAL
O1 ii id1151-eg INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0001 Rev. 3
(KU( t.larolZeimanO.1) (A Govt of Info Undertaking) IDENTIFICATION (PMI) AT
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS 4
3.0 DEFINITIONS 4
4.0 PMI EXAMINATION 5
5.0 ACCEPTABLE METHODS FOR PMI 5
6.0 EXTENT OF PMI EXAMINATION 6
7.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA .6
8.0 REJECTION CRITERIA ... ...... .... ..... ............ ...... ... ...... ............... ..... . ......... ..8
9.0 RECORDING AND DOCUMENTATION 7
10.0 MARKING 7
Page 1559 of 1823

15inazieT ENGINEERS FOR POSITIVE MATERIAL
O1 ii INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0001 Rev. 3
MKT, oxemeenoqwwo IA Govt A Inds Undertaking) IDENTIFICATION (PMI) AT
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification applies to the requirements for Positive Material Identification (PMI) to be
performed at the Supplier's works on Metallic Materials procured either directly by the
Owner/EIL/ LSTK contractor or indirectly through the sub-Suppliers.
1.2 This specification covers the procedures and methodology to be adopted to assure that the
chemical composition of the material is consistent with the material specifications as specified
in purchase documents using 'Alloy Analyzer' at the time of fmal inspection before dispatch.
13 The scope of this specification shall include but shall not be limited to Positive Material
Identification (PMI) to be performed on Materials listed below:
1.3.1 For alloy Steel materials as below:

Alloy Steel Pipes including Clad Pipes
- Alloy Steel Flanges & Forgings
- Alloy Steel Fittings including Clad Fittings
Alloy Steel Fasteners
- Alloy Cast & Forged steel valves
Alloy Steel Instrumentation Items (Control Valves, Safety Valves etc.)
- Longitudinal Pipe & Fittings Welds.
- Gaskets (for Ring Type Joints)
1.3.2 For Carbon Steel materials as below:

- All Carbon Steel Piping items under NACE or MC or 112 or Wet Hydrogen Sulfide
(1-12S), Hydrofluoric acid (HF), Sulfuric acid (H2 SO4) services etc.
- Carbon Steel flanges and valves (Rating 900# and above)
Following items shall be excluded from scope of PMI examination.
Gaskets other than for Ring Type Joints

- Internal Components of Valves
1.4 All grades of material supplies including Stainless Steels shall be liable for PMI test at site. In
case of any defective materials being found at site, the Supplier shall be responsible to effect
replacement of such defective materials at project site without any delays to the satisfaction of
E1L site RCM (Resident Construction Manager).
2.1 API Recommended Practice 578 (First Edition, May 1999) - Material Verification Program for
New and Existing Alloy Piping Systems.
3.0 DEFINITIONS
3.1 Supplier: Any Supplier or Manufacturer on whom an order is placed for the supply of referred
items. This definition shall also include any sub-Supplier or manufacturer on whom a sub-order
is placed by the Supplier.
3.2 Inspection Lot: A group of items offered for inspection covered under same size, Heat and
Heat treatment lot.
33 Alloy Material: Any metallic material (including welding filler materials) that contains
alloying elements such as Chromium, Nickel, Molybdenum or Vanadium, which are
intentionally added to enhance mechanical or physical properties and/or corrosion resistance.
Page 1560 of 1823

lagtael ENGINEERS FOR POSITIVE MATERIAL
*Igelf ti5teg
1.12n 2 IETIWQRJ■10.11
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt Of India undenaong) IDENTIFICATION (PMI) AT
6-81-0001 Rev. 3
4.0 PMI EXAMINATION
4.1 The Supplier shall submit a procedure of PMI to comply with the requirements of this
Specification. Approval of PMI Procedure shall be obtained from Owner / EIL / TPIA prior to
commencing manufacture / inspection of product.
4.2 PMI examination of materials is independent of any certification, markings or colour coding
that may exist and is aimed at verifying that the alloy used are as per specified grades.
4.3 The Supplier shall identify all incoming alloy materials and maintain full traceability of all alloy
materials, including all off-cuts. Transfer of identification marks shall be undertaken prior to
cutting to ensure maintenance of identification on off-cuts.
4.4 The Supplier shall ensure that all alloy materials are segregated and stored in separately
identified locations to prevent the mix up of materials of different alloy specifications or alloy
material with carbon steel. Non ferro-magnetic materials shall be segregated at all times from
ferro-magnetic materials.
4.5 PMI examination is subject to surveillance inspection by Owner / EIL / TPIA.
5.0 ACCEPTABLE METHODS FOR PMI
5.1 The method used for PMI examination shall provide a quantitative determination of the alloying
elements like Chromium, Nickel, Molybdenum or Vanadium in Alloy Steel items.
5.2 Instruments or methods used for PMI examination shall be able to provide quantitative,
recordable, elemental composition results for positive identification of alloying elements
present.
5.3 The acceptable instruments for alloy analyzer shall be either "Portable X-Ray fluorescence" or
"Optical Emission" type each capable of verifying the percentage of alloy elements within
specified range.
5.4 Chemical spot testing, magnets, alloy sorters and other methods using eddy current or
triboelectric testing methods are not acceptable for PMI examination.
5.5 The PMI instrument used shall have the sensitivity to detect the alloying elements in the
specified range.
5.6 All PMI instruments shall have been serviced within a 6 month period of the time of use to
verify the suitability of batteries, sources etc., and the data of the last service shall be stated on
the PMI Report Form (Sample enclosed).
5.7 Each analyzer must be calibrated according to the manufacturer's specification at the beginning
and end of each shift. Instrument must be checked against known standard for each alloy type
to be inspected during the shift.
5.8 Certified samples, with full traceability, of a known alloy materials shall be available for use as
a random spot check on the instrument calibration.
5.9 The surfaces to be examined shall be prepared by light grinding or abrasive paper and solvent
cleaner. Evidence of Arc burn resulting from examination shall be removed by light grinding or
abrasive paper. No permanent marks, which are injurious to the usage of product in service, are
acceptable.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL—All rights reserved
Page 1561 of 1823

t11 ENGINEERS t—
ft-
FOR POSITIVE MATERIAL
**gel' fililegW INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0001 Rev. 3
IvilVA PROW =Jowl/ (A Govt d b16H Undertakmg) IDENTIFICATION (PMI) AT
5.10 Alloy Steel ring type joint Gaskets shall be inspected by using portable X-Ray fluorescence
instrument.
5.11 Testing shall be done as per the procedures outlined by the manufactures of alloy analyzer
being used. Modification of these procedures if any must be approved by Owner/EIL.
5.12 The persons performing PMI shall demonstrate their capabilities to the satisfaction of
Owner/EIL/TPIA visiting engineer. If the Supplier has qualified operator on their rolls, he may
perform the examination. Otherwise PMI examination shall be sub-contracted to an independent
testing agency approved by EIL.
5.13 Whenever material is identified as not meeting requirements by the visiting engineer a rejection
note shall be issued.
6.0 EXTENT OF PMI EXAMINATION
Following sampling plans shall be applicable for PMI examination of various items.
A. Flanges, Fittings 100%

Valves, RTJ Gaskets
B. Pipes 100% (for pipes procured from traders).
2 random samples drawn from each

Size/Heat/Lot (for pipes procured directly from mills)
C. Fasteners
Lot Size Sample Size
Upto 100 2% (Min 2)

101 to 500 1% (Min 3)
501 and above 0.5% (Min 5)
Note:
a. For Welded Pipes and Fittings, PMI shall be performed on Base Metal as well as
weldments.
7.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
7.1 Base Metal
PMI test results showing presence of characteristic elements upto 10% less than the minimum
specified value in the material specification and upto 10% more than the maximum specified
value in the material specification shall be acceptable.
7.2 Deposited Weld Metal
For deposited weld metal using welding consumables matching with base metals, the recorded
presence of characteristic elements upto 12.5% less than the minimum specified value in the
welding consumable specification and upto 12.5% more than the maximum specified value in
the welding consumable specification shall be acceptable.
Page 1562 of 1823

7-77 ENGINEERS FOR POSITIVE MATERIAL
5.1geal laZg
(wed ereenZeld3O0en)
INDIA LIMITED
In Govt or India UndertakIng) IDENTIFICATION (PMI) AT
6-81-0001 Rev. 3
8.0 REJECTION CRITERIA
8.1 If PMI test results fall outside the acceptable range as specified in 7.0 above, the supplier shall
obtain a quantitative check analysis performed by a laboratory acceptable to Owner / EIL /
TPIA for a complete chemical analysis. Alternatively, the item can be tested with a spark
analyser for verification. Results of this analysis shall be submitted to Owner / EIL / TPIA for
final decision.
Decision of Owner / EIL / TPIA shall be final in this regard.
8.2 If any sample drawn to PMI test on the basis of percentage selection as per 6.0 above, fails to
meet specification requirements, 100% of items of lot shall be tested for PMI by supplier. Any
failure thereafter during sample check shall mean rejection of whole lot.
9.0 RECORDING AND DOCUMENTATION
The results of PMI examination shall be recorded in a Report Format as enclosed with this
specification.
10.0 MARKING
10.1 All alloy materials tested by PMI shall be identified using either of the following methods by
indicating "PMI OK"
a) Bar Code/Hologram Sticker

b) A low stress stamp marking

Page 1563 of 1823

lafitzAr tft ENGINEERS FOR POSITIVE MATERIAL
ogeil■ ElfiThegW7 INDIA LIMITED 6-81-0001 Rev. 3
1.1 2i1 MOW 4,13,R1.0 (A Govt d India Undertaking) IDENTIFICATION (PMI) AT
POSITIVE MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION REPORT Page of

BULK MATERIALS
Project: Client Job No.

PMI Report No. Supplier/Sub-Supplier
Purchase Order No. Testing Agency
Purchase PMI Location

Requisition No:
Bulk Item Type (as per Requisition)
Material Specification/Grade
Number of items in Lot
Requisition Item No./ Description Major content, Weight Percent Remarks

Accept/Reject
Element Cb
/
Cr Ni Mo V Ti*
Nb
**
Specified Range
Actual observations
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Instrument Type / ID
Last Service Date

Inspection Agency Witnessed By
To be reported in case of SS321 Material
** To be reported in case of SS347 Material
Page 1564 of 1823

pa/vase. st4 41 11V—113 146PAdo0 0"Ae21tA - l000-00-8 "oN tetwod
Page 1565 of 1823
O
a
er
z
co
0
CD
a
0.
om
n0
co
C)
co
Issuedas Standard Specification

C)
Fs.)
Ni
O
O
-o
patepdn pue pasinaH

z
O
Ni
O
0
0
co
patepdn pue pasukai

C)
co
co
patepdn pue pasina

z
O
0
NOLLVDIJIDIdS allVaNVIS
0
Z
>
t,'AO
m Z000-Z8-9
73
c ——
— > m
z 0E
-n
-I
Z
> 0
0 < -o
7-4 cn
>o
0
m
cn
05 z >
cnzo,
—1> m 1
z
m-1
cn Z Er)
Ti >
O 0 Z °)
5o>
I——0
0
Cn ZO>
Z
7:1
r
)
z0>
co D.
O E
•m
V'A021 ZOOG-ZS-9
Zm
o
o
:suo9mitaiciqv
American Petroleum Institute

stelayi Joj i(p!oos ueopautv
American Societyof Mechanical Engineers

4 rn
American Society for Testingand Materials

cy)
Ct Ct
Ct
k<
co
co
pals uoq.reD
•
paittun g!pui spatiOug

mi d1sa j uogoadsui
Positive Material Identification

ltItOf a dAI `1.1!)1
Ci) PCJ
pOlS SSQIU!ElS
'71
Third Party Inspection/Third Party Inspection Agency

eZi
-
Construction Standards Committee
Sh.A K Kundu, ED(Construction)

n
0
o
C
4
'I
Page 1566 of 1823
0',keel ld- L000-00-9ON lemod Copyright EIL — All rightsreserved

pGAJOSOJsI46p
0'A8 LA-1.000-00-9'0N LeLuiod
— -ma 146pAdoo
Page 1567 of 1823
(iams 1)17 "AallId-Z000-Z8-9
t'
*;:
AMID ADNVIcIADDV
NadvoiarivnO
'4) 00 00 00 00
uazAqvislvdO INIOLINDIADIAA
6 © o o 0 0
Q 00
PMI OF PIPING AND HEATER COIL COMPONENTS

ON
dO
t..01
••••1 4 CA CA CA (.11
W
DIAI DAdS
smommdaia
P6666666= c>
A A 4=.•
SINHINIOD
CD
0
CO
Aati Z000-Z13-9
(4.) (.....) (.....) l..•.) l.A.) 1....) l.k..) t.....) C....) c....) l....) (.44 It4 li li
1--• ".• 1-• •-• !44 .1!...) is..)
0-. 1-• 1-• •-• 0-• •-. i-+ 4:::) 1.4 0 lk
1...-• •-• O
k) 00 -.) c:n iv, :t. i.,.) i..) ...
•-. co
cr so .0
8 H 0o 0: 0"-0 > '"I: HC.f) st (-..) 5- a...0 o y 5., ›. o 0 u). o. y
o = pa
pa - 0 = v, 0 0 ")
o = ....I. v) - 40 .0
o-
-. q0 r. m •-t- 0 = ty 0
7 1' t< co
cn g g g -.) 1.91 ) • 'CD'-)
- ." ' 6 .D
CD CD SI' 0 (pp= 22 =rn 6 r) ri• (9. cra a 0 *,-1 CD r.t)
cncn rf 0 - ''' • ,-- CD
"
a 8
‘• o ,-• ; Fri r) • a7 Cq '90 <E7 gn -• w o...0
C 0 CD CD n ,
(/)
,..,,V) CD o • 00 0 .0
to' o .i-D- PL O'' a0
a CD 0 o cn *1 cii " . 'F..'.- P S, 0) .̀.,
.-.•. °
'•• 4-1- ..4,
'-' .
0 = gi. 0 ,-.• CD ...,• *1
O 0 0 10 CD = 4 5-1' 0 ► o ,-
o 0 - • -•• =. = co -o aq 4 ri- 2. - CD. <0 a• 2,
= = .,
0 .6-
.• w co 0 CD •-i• 0 0 .-+
cn ,-% .--, •
0= .5"
a .0 .1 = 2 . ' Xn
t- A) rn •C rA () 5t L, 4 0., 72:.
0*A9M LA-1.000-00-9"oN )eu.uoA

O ' ••CS .4- CI)
I
0
'5 • E . "
s•. CD
w •-• -• •-r•
2 CD
i ...cpp.' ro
O 5 5 r41
cq F up FT r) 0,) -• ...L.
5 • zil 0 14
0-0
• CfQ .,. .
G?' cil = ••.:3
cn (7Q.• ... • CIQ=E.
›. c-C ›. E CD
(..-) n • cn
....... .0 .-, 0
o- n, o-1 52, 8 •-:
p cf?,
cn-t- =0 iii•
V] cn •0
-t 0 = c.-
,. 0 il","
a -0. - .a. CD V) •-•• 0 04 0 w .H cn 9 U ' 2 0
a. EL 5- v) o ti) . 0 o ;4: •-, -0
5 5 0.• - .-• ta. 0 0. •-t. CD .-.
ta. CD .4, CD
•Q (IQ
E2., '
•
'6 ILi• •••• . r-i, ci, o CD O o cr zoi
" 0- °
. .1 .... (:),- 2 0 F.,_ .L.
8D 5 0 a v, 0 CD 0 0- 5-
('7,- ‘•.< co
ca., = CD 1"-• • ,-•t C 0 ,=• !It 0 •-r• 0
+1 • 0 0 5 0 ! = t- • 1.. 1
2 k g-
•-• • 0 o V)
tr3 • 0) = •-l• (.)
= 0 5. • ° 14
= S = .1 0 •-4- ....
CA S
CfQ '10 cn al.. ... 0 1' 0)-' = 0 CfQ F4-
4'•C:1A)..: -,) 0
= =
•-t- o co CrQ c7 Pc, crto
= rD P.
1)' p., '1:1 g•Q
0Z cn 0.• ,.o. ,
EL 5' , -7 cor ° g 8
co o- 5 O -, 4 m-, 0 4
.6: .... o vo olo La 0 •-•4
c, i-c•
.:.,-1 co = =. co
0 ,-,- cr
rn P '71 cn ,..K• 0 ••-•, m
.-r• .04" •"- " .
co0.. 0
= a ° 0 cip ....... , (..g) - o.. r• 0-..
0 "•• 0 O., .. • CD CD 1-1 ci) CD
= o '5 • ° v, ...< cr P4 " •-, "
CD
•-t CifQ
OD O F (
9 = 0 . 4 •rA 0 0 p
0- 't 0 I=
Q .0- .1s"...'
'it 1 0
•CD
-t .1
) a, A) • CD 'Cr A) = (•.) ) Cr 2-
co •,. . Z cncn ..T.t• 4s at- -• 5 - .1 n 7 .
t.... g. cn
....
CfQCD0
cfC) t` •IA 0 0 •-•t '1=3
r. 0.• G/Q .-I, CD ty ill . cr O
W 5 • r2 s'w PI
cn CPQ •-4, p
IV......• !.A..)
0 0 *Cr 0
0 '.0 1 0 to ., •.,- •Q A) < (14 ,4.
'" 5- '
co po o co ,-. .•., ,P. o 7 0 ". o
. 0 Ft co cnv, 51., A) 5 ra.• o El 5' 'a P
at) 4-3-' 0., aq V)
0 4:k a., ti,
) o-
(I) c) CD ..i.i.) w la)
cn '10
CD " ,..,•
0 ,..,. 0 CD
c cr
go
P o 0.• 0 ,-• t< ...• •
0. •-t •-r• "
VI . CD •••• '• X • ""1 0 ,..-...
co 0 0 • 0•• 0
O '17J '63-' 0 ° 8' o -,_, = r p.?
Cr CifQ n cn (T. Z (9 .1, .....
CD 0 '
O 4 = IA Ts v) CD 0 .0 ra. 0 " 0
•C til 5' -r-
•1.1 ,.., .-+
eb CS 0 ,-0 < (.-)
co co o v, Z • ...ti ..1
y). .1
.......
., .41') 0 c. - CD •0-' 'ilD 0 Cciij "
'71 g 9 5., CD 0
o o
,-.• 0 - o
17 = g rt n . ••-D, - or
5, .1 5 P cn ch vl
co co cr 0 rl
co 0 .< o ,-,,) 1 › =, o, - • 7 rt. z CD
5- °CS (14 ..... CD
/1 CDC') ;•=r- = 0 = li .0 •4 CD
'70 o v co ,-,-. F o ...... (,) CIQ "0
5 .t....) 0 5 `.• 0 p ,...) • 5 .0 . iTi • ILA
9+
0 CI A) .4 • •-t•
0
-1 1.1 • 0 •••-• Ch P 0
cn U.) t< ..... 0 .-t "V CL• 0 Co
so 5' E --- .... to o
,-,..< . CD 0
cn0 z cr 3' co ...., :-t "CS 5 4 5 p.) =
cn -. i-ii zt 8 ..4 . .- W
g•
0 CfQ ,...., ,,cn E: 8 p0 0.r `1- (4
•••I • ...0 = '5 • Si 0 0-, • 0
steparillPals
0.. E!. Pi 0 ". :at . •-•-

-1.
..cr
co b'' co
'oN NOL1V31d103cISaavaNvis
.-, cn= = Ea •-* 5' cr g'
Copyright EIL—Allrightsreserved
-.....
SE
.-•- {-
'-ti 09 • '4' aq V co O. = co DI =
Page 1568 of 1823

cn VI VI . ‘...) 1....) c...) C...) (.....) (....) t...) (....) (....) L.) ta
lJ - CD CD i•.) iv iv rt.4
I) I') i\ -) iN) iN) N) !‘')
ioo ...: O. tli .0. i...) iv ---
O
00
0 0,..„, 00 0 . .c). .
5 5 a CD L
21 El, CD CD
-.
0 ° ,..„ C4 .0
0 0 Cil r..i. ril .-,01 0 co 8
.-t- w
CD
0 cn 0 .-s 04
c° -% co Da Da -i-.3. 0 '
.1..) . '4! . r
e-1-. ,I-.
0. c4 ed § 0 0-• VI
5' 5 - 5 gl:• '+ l...) 0 0 cf) 4 ca., •s• 8
Id- WOO-00-8'ON )el1110d

0 0 = co 0 E CI) P.-) 0-
-. 5' o ...
9+ 0 0
po=-.
rt (IC (IQ aq 0
00 5.'',• m .... c1.° ..-1- 5' co
.,, s-G
.
.-iCD
fli. 5 cr 0 0 . CD -ci rn CD 0 '-'
.-t-•
0 A9/:1
CD "
0') p) EA. IC '-7 1-' "0 co cn 0 cn cn a.
0 I) 0 q a
.,th
t o.•
.-t- 0. 0 a ..... 0 c.
..., = `` 4 aq0
0i
a- ri.. v5
0 (.
, 5.
e,
p 0.• CD C4 E • g .6- 0 ,--. p%.
.t 0 0 D-' 0 cil 0=0 CD Z 0 C4
o X t... `.< "0
o 5 pa
0
a CD C4 ..-t .
= II 1. 0' *0 E s..-- CD .5:
Da 0 a 5 -• Cl)
cn 5 '4 5 ' "T1 -4
tii co rm. 0 0>
•-•• v, a
cA
g cr tn" 0az
::".. 0 7. crcz 5' pa o a.
5' ,.--,. ati
CD 0.• cn co 5 v) a
CD o
.i-,,-,, 8CD
. fA
.0 cA
0 .-,..
= 5=
. . 7Di CD 0 1-0) di' '6* 0 'E
5- 0 VI ::•1 • .- (4
.-.. g 0 CD Z
Cr
cil *0 CL
.... P cn 0 511
CD > 0
C4
IS 1239, IS 3589 and otherrelevant BIScodes.

cn 0 g tA > Mm
DI. cn ac co dn 0 1.5.• ca. is
0 ° .4 0 ,••-•, T ,..-4-
n.... 0 d E
Z
_ 00 9)- g. ..... :::.1
.-1 0 g Pa-1
•cr 5". coq- 0 Cf) Z >
5
a) c43 5
American Society for Testingand Materials(ASTM):

e- „cnCD td o 0 ,z. '--' 0 0 9
;:rt. =
0• ..... ci) 0
cr 0 CD 0 < •1= "0 ") 0 rn
0 0. •FD's...,
,•-• • > •CA
-1- .. co =
co =1 = 4
cn
> 0-
trl 0. n 0co E. cil 4. z
0 p.
0 .
0
0
0 "0
p, 0CL 00' = 5.. F. F-D'
0 0 0 P=
u, es. ,..--. p,
a: o'5 co v) '5. .- 0 14 0 0
co n co
:- -+ CI- co 0 v;) 0
CD En co
0'. ,--.
rs: .
co 0 57' 5' o 1-1•1
0
Ca. 0" 0. °
cfl
5 '0
co -, e4
Z .551 ,.6
m '0 T .0
0
0 O. .... 0 7' ,-0
rp..
Anyothermaterial specificationreferencedbythe PurchaseOrder/Contract.

0 N F., .0 a ...I. 4 ......) 0,
i.6 gl)
.f.a.: cn cn Fi co
, ...
= ‘z) ac
dn CD VI :il co
co
Z000-Z8-9
00 ._:
a 5. c. o.
,-..1 4, CD 0CO
..... ci a. ct, td 5., .0 co cn ,F,L• ,..,•
0 0 CD a) 5 o '0 CD CD 0
C/Q 0. 0 0
Material Verification Program for Newand ExistingAlloy PipingSystems: API RP 578

4- g 0
t?
co 0. 0
0. 0. C 0 .1 :
CT (4
CD 0 5, -, 0
0. .-'. n .'0..i. 0.' co
'57 ZS' 0 GM/ fl)
'oN NOIJ.VOIdI33dS ativaNvis
u, ,.C/1 V)
pamasai siti6p Hy —113 146pAdo0

o r. 0 O. 0
Page 1569 of 1823

cn Uri
Pi PI
!A
ON Ut A toe
o oo •
lJ rr
C" vl 0 ,-r, 0 rA 0- 1-0 '0 -0 .... b 0 '71 ril 0 n 4:
-, ›. A, A, (-) o o .-i.) 1.-q
Pa 0- 0 IV 0 0- 0 ....,.. ,,, -> <
.-•
= 0 =
0 0 0 74- R• .1 0 0 R
CD cy 7
). CM r•c) '0 cn 0 cn M 0;1 • r ) • '1:1
CD c4 r CD 0-. C" 0 0 0 0 Co 14. 4
=5 '.
° (g- 2 R Frf' r, a' c4 C 0 ('' cr 0 0 CL
6n p., (1) E. . 5. 0 .-• 0 .$2'4'- ''' 0 as CD 0 :.-.,+- 0
R •Ho
0 .- t••3 = c"
0 CR r wi tir (7q? 0 cr *1., 0" 5 4. .... C 4)
C'• 0 a" Et- cr
0 CD
E Et
"' '.4 0 t-t- 0
,-Cr
- . c/9 0 0 0 CD ...t. 0 0 Zi-
0 "00 °...)R • go 0* rt) 0. ell fp 0 "-'
0
4. cn 0" - '4
----
0 Clq AD 5 H' Rt .c
.
g 0-
.. O.
0 .5.• 0 0 40 1 .0 ,-o H C °
0 nag!L3- 1. 000-00-8ON leupod

0 ID) ui CD
O. 5,- 0 . cr
-CDi cm
00 0. CD
0 rn
00 0°0
R- CD H .-' 0 cn 0 B F.-
, "4 ...:1.... .0 •
.
b o o 0 0 0 . •.,:i cr
B.
0 C) ,...-.
k< CD .0 li0
r, 0 F Ci' 0 CM
4p a. CL 5 0 ° 0 '.. 0R• 5;• e..
). to 0 co 0 O tri LI H
R n, E P' -I 0
cn 0 . 0
- .... (ri 1.- . Op R 1 1 .1 CD
rz_p- 0- C Cr
inpaluiv paqddns Jaunt°

5 0 •-"'' - co 0 4E3 H co .....
`.<
cr ,.+
P co =-L
v) < $1 ''< et ...,
" CD cr
0 0 v)
....." = = 0 CL 2. 5. o D.,
g ci a :.1. =O 0 _ 0 *0 .-f) __, 0 0
t:1, ,..... ,,.
'10 0 0- .' C 5' '5.• ,.8 (T 5 .1 0 CD
Contractor Supplied Material

A) 0
0 cr 0 rn C 5-
-I
0
" .0, ,n, cr 0 ,-1., 0-* ' p Do 0 c4 *o a. CD o -t o.
. 0 0cocc) 000., 0 5- 0 P
4 0
a (1) co a. ,-0) o 0..
fs: .... C Po''o H
;•," o C 0- = a. 0'V o ... 6 _.
...0 " 0 a•.
•. • ... 17 , 0 .-, 5,
..• o= ,-, =
0 5 co 0 k< CD = 4, " 0.' 0
as CD C 0 CL o co pa. t7)" vo rt-
.... •C 'a 0- ,-.- *-1 .-4. w E CD .:i
r,--. CD ,-, .--, cn
CiP a; 0 ,--
.--• C vo
5' 0 C c< 0 2 CD ,---, 0 0 cr ,-,-, '0 P
0 q ••0 0 Ca a 94 ,--• ch CD C 0 n CD ;cc ,••• co 0 CD 0
0 k.0 CI. < ...•
0 0 , 0 -,., 0.. .....• ,.. --,- `-"< 'CS v
0 0• c.n
0 C) 0 ,••+ 0 El 5' c''
-'' 0 " '4 -s p a- 0 CD 0 M"' 0 5
.,-. .cs 5° = CD C. CD
CD v2 ,, CD ••••• 0 CD
x 0 ,-1, --. o K E -
4 • f*.
r,-.1D '05 .0 " p (IQ a ° C .C•Dt -.
0 ... 0 5 o' 'A P 0 0 -,-
5 5, v) cl., cr ---- = o --, .1:i
C) = 0 ,; Clq 5.0;.? ,..._... CD 0
o 0 Cirg 0 CP cc) le •0 g cr 5,
- .., p
.-1 ---. .•-• s---' a 0 cn CD ,-.• --- EP El r-r, - ......
Cl. ,-t- '" 0 0 0 -• ..• •
c/o 0- < 0 a" cn '"0 0. cm o 5.
- CD 0 •
0 CD ''i (1) 0- cr '-'-' > "
,.0 ()
0-, - . o co 5 2
11.,
° ,..4.
2 .--3 .0 c< ff ' .. co i
t ::..-,. ..0 r- -,:z
n CP = '10 --••••
SINIHNOMAIODMODuaivax
o CD 0 E iln) ac,
C O c .' ,-1-. 0 0 0
4 ' - 1---,'•
et, ..,2_,.• CD BCD E. H "0 Toi rn 0 C ci3 O
cin CD o ...L. 0 ,C.' W
0 CD 0
'0 0 0 CL Po 5 g
""• c'i V.Q tit 9 E co :". CI. co ,-'-. 0. 0 0
0 C ,(1) .1.... 5 0 _-• Cr
•.0 ...I Clq 0 CL
0 . *C1 ,t• UQ CD 73 `' CD 0 •-•1
(NI 0
CD 3-.. imbi . .-. R v) li•
.7 (ig ,c+ 0 co,. 01 cl.FD- 5' 0 trl i P '4)- 5'
..) v,r4
'".•
Va -s p vi Cltr 08 _ o 1 v,
C. CD o CD t-1- .ri
a0 .4)
- v.
CD cn 0 . ,,,, ri E. 0
C CD ..„.., co 0 CL • 0 CL ..0 ot„, 0 0. 5' .
Ers 0
O. .• 2. .‹ 0 = tDD g
5- .., CT ,-,- 0-3 *0 co
0 0 " ‘.cn ... • :-"t • 8 cr
A. -
.... co cn
° CL CD k< 4 CL Ct. A)0.,
CD 0 C" C E. "0 i i C C98L14-
e'•
a 170 ° • < 0
cr 0L-: 0- 0 = 00.
A copyof PMIrecords dulyverified by TPIAshall besubmitted to Owner/ EIL.
CP 5 ,-< k<
0w CD CD R
0 .cs 0., 'F c, Ct. Cr) H
w 1:1 C R• ,_. CD 0
.4 2+ 1.-• Po PR) CD
O ,- v,,•„
" 0
. 5-.
... -t CD
" 0- b 0,;.4-
0 co= 01
b )(-) CI
H ICDv --.o. 5 '0 (4 co CD 4'.
cr t--1 0. CD - .-1 R-
8 < 0 Crg r• ,,, _ P>
v,.5.
Recordssignedbycontractorand certified byanapproved third party inspectionagency.
o 0 *C)
1010M1UO3
- F'' CL H co rt 0 0 co
co X .0 rA• 14 P 120 ' 7 P
• 0 0 cr -- 0-cc
9 E 0 Es t< = •-,, =
0 < ''''• 0 co a. po CD Dy
O 5- 0
0 p.,. - 5 :i C Rt. 0 5 CD R • . cr
"laNNOI1V31A103dSaavaNvis
0 * ,-1- c4- "
pemesai s14& 11V— 113 4461Ado0

. -4 Q , ,..... --. RI- •-,- CD P 0 0
+ 54
Page 1570 of 1823

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
O 01 Co)
Ipt 41, A, 0 5_,.. i2 _:., , -,

ts.,, vi 0 A, -i
0 co tc) !. 6.r), C"'
.0-A,•4-, CD CD n. .--, Cr FE; CD Z..6
'14' F.D.' 0 A) 0 0
0 < 0 g' as ' = CA .4
N 1 11 ' ' e CI PO '7:3 0 Fj • P G. g 1"
g
...
0 0co 0 0 0-1= " ,.,
„ 5, g co 5' CD • A) 0 A) a' E
a. CD r, t (i0 ..) 1.4) 0 p e2. .-, 2 cr co a (pa o
CD *CI
Er cn ro .4 CD ,--. • ::.-1. 0 5-
''
CD CD 0 .x:$
CD v) Z 6. 1.7., 1 ,T m .0 ,FD- p.,.
co 4 61' 0 CD 0 0 cn CD
ei. ..., a col a Fr 0
o E. cn '0 .- z' CD 5' 1:L.
ZIEV IALLSV
SEEVINISV
CD • 0 V) a,-, CD ,-t- a g CD 0 .1 v) gj =L Fr 0
(,) 0 .07
cn •-••
Z il2+ ... 8'. ... 5 r ri rD
ca.
0*A3?:1 IA-1.000-00-9 'oN letwod

<-• A) 0- 0 =-, a* cr 0 -cr• a bt F•i) Clt:7
5' ' 0 0 s
0050 A) en
,-+. -- eh (E) CFC7 V7 co z " = cn Z 0,
'5' • ,-• ,-s ,,. eh g 4. P-h
rp (1) .+ •
11)
Myd 0 (.,, • ° t- ' g 5t,
5 ...-
5' z .-ti •-t.
c PT.0 '-4,
0
DC r0 jo 2 R •-p) va 0 r Eg CD 0 ° V) .1
; am a =7' 0 Cla cn 0
CD
:117 0 0
OL 0 fD tL.1 0 0 0 co
"i• 0- ..•
:1) c„ 0 cl) Pa •••,-
cn . - " 0 64
cr .0 Po Cg
.1 =0 0 Z-•
° co < A) A) ,-t•. cz. CD Z °
5) 11) ,F) co co CD
t„ 5' ..i., a, s g
153 '10 a,
0 ;0
co o 5, cn 0 !2-'1, cn cr a
0
..u) „. Cr 0 a 0
.-t ,--1 5'
co CD SW n 0 0°
co CD gy ' Cr C p ,••-. =-' Fr t-C CD IT) 0 F3' 5
CD cn
co vl .0 0 .4 = CD C4
co 0 P' c9 c) c) 5- 0P c isr 14
CD V)
(D 0 ,..< '0 I.+) = 4 = 0 ,-•
.0 0
g-
,: o 5)
,-,-CS 5 I. ,r•,1 ox ,.o c c„
0 0 CD 0 -1 R
CL 0 0 CD CD Cr A
O. cn = CL x O. A) 0, Fr 5:Dy t.-.•'con 10 g .c:' i< P
cc) ..,...“ co Z o-o, vl
'Cr
L .-+
*C3 0 ;:+" CD 0 P C10:
9 $19- 9
V., . 5 .
OL
P.' z
cr (D OL .
a., .1 p co "0
0 "I " t< v) a. -
er
.(2 . CD C 65 .: = 4.._:,T,,.cr,
.7:1 CL
.•-p•..• 104_. =z -.,
C c y 0 c co co a
0 rn 5t,
.-t- a. t, A) ":73 CD
...
a CD 0 n cn A3 O CI, w 0 CCD
0 Cr .... = 1)) - CD 5".-. Z .4
CD ON ct CI. .40
6 '4 a ° 5. 0 2o, 5 st,) " .,- lw
+,• ..... <P
,•-t• Oo P Cro 01- cn CD CD
C CA Pc'
co *cs za V) CP ,--h 0 ,..t 01
,tr 0 a 0 Pr C) cr• a az
a. .1 0" 0 5' R
cn o a
1- II'
0‘k<cA co -+ .1.).. cm
„.. - '0 14_.. c° et g
0
= f-..-'. -,-- _ . 0 = •-t-
o
.4 11) CD -• D') .0 0 0 4 = cr
a.
0 -, (cr
.1) a .-i- CD
.‹... 0J-41p)cr
0 P 51•• o Fir
cr g . cr GA '-` • °
,--.CT •••+) 5. ..
..."
+
0 k< 0 CT 0
0 0. 0 5 0 0 0 11) 0
43 • co 0 6-11 0 0
•-h) =
co - -• 0 .1 5- sa.
gamma apspap
21 5' "• =CD Po Irt t< gr.)
CD 0 cp cn 0 c4 = v) 0
,-.1
-..., C" CD 0 ,•+- ,-•• <
.-.•
6.• co
=. .4 v) a. a (I) CL Fp, g
CD 0 ril 10 .cs cr a , a.
.4., - 11 • co (1
. . .6 .
Id133dSaavaNvis
.•••• ts 5
cp .", C
T 00. az) 0'
ZI-1 CD g•
ry °b.0 CD CD 5. 2 = co ...
F..,).
cr 54 04 ,,,, 0 -
ccr v, 0 A) 5
5
ti'Aa21 Z000-Z8-9
5' ••6'• = CD (1) = .,c• .-,, "

Fo'' A) O
Ringtypejointgasketsshall be inspected byusingportable X-ray fluorescence instrument.
Po a, ,-, Z 0. CDC)‘. ,-t-

o (5' rct cn
'oN NOLLV3
0 SD
Copyright EIL— All rightsreserved

CD k< CD 0 = 0 5. (8.). 9 CD CD
Page 1571 of 1823

1. F.. IL 1.4. 1, •i •L •6 ...t 1....I •i
0 0
-A. .i. .1). .a. C...) (...) Lt.)
1*l'...) 1.
:I' IN)
i'..) 0 i4 70 70 C ilia
Is'') IQ
N.) .--.
..-1 •-1:1 0 c4 0 t•-• • 1-1 5. 6 , (4, 1.7,4 "Irl tf) IT/ ›. 0 0 eL 1-.3 CIA P 000catil a) cr tri
O 0 -I 0 0 't, 0 0. < =-• ,-4., a) 0 ti. CM CD pp
5 8 CD
•
ID° 'EP CD "01 ,;z, 1.. CD .-' • r) ,.,., _ •-,. •.
0 k< co n,
0 P. A, = 00,
CL .1 '4
0 0 0 (9
0.4 0 p.'I:30
CD . 01•1 Fir M CD CD 'ZS 0 .... .-...
0 0 0-A etV cn • '......., :,z2,,
(,. 6. .,,- g 5 00 .. - , .-1 :-t
CPA h" Rk a 4 :1 5,
- „, , ▪ 0 0 0 o- oc-,o
(v (a)
111 0
• ' 0:1 (E)14 cpa0 2,' 0 0
CD CD e-t-
Ci) 0
.-..)
0) .4 . 0 A)
o CIA '121 fak
5• ,--, - _ z'''_r, ,-. cn :ED+' '5'
0
0 li Z
A) ,-.., ,-.. 0 - CD .-t.
CO A) P"' !it) . (1) I).) CC
9 C4 rt '10 Co .1 11..m• 0)
0 . . .....t, $) `14
0.. 0 W 0 P--
=' C> ci) pi II) T'0 CD p) '-'1•) cr cr =
4 . 0
0 ,-t- 5. a) - o-: 7 r4
-t - az •-•• () 0 0 CD ., 0 0"' CD V) ..... C/3 0 0 k< W
• C, 14 a) co ci) ..-...)
.174 0
co „, o 0 6D0 v; 0 Z .-t e") '';') r-li 5-
' CD ' til -o 'ts -1•> < 5' z g ,< : CD < o.-' cn ‘-<
0'AGM IA -1. 000-00-8 'ON leun od

V) cr 0 •-t- CIA
0 ••4) • ra,
c1" (t) 0 e) ,.„ cr
5 CD 0 0 " a '' ..• el, 5. o F-4- .-' • 0 y.;
5. r, .-i 0 cc) Ts
.-, 0 = •-• .-. 0--] n. "
CD " • ci) .-1 i' ll g CD 011 . 0„ ii-- ,
0 .-. . 0 v) CD
o ,-. •
'5') AM Z 74-
as 0 , . • v)
.0 0 = 0 .-t- til °CI.. P S 'L) o 5 • ▪ cr)
0-' CD 5' 5' '.1. 0 CD z 1 -,. (RD z
K zr "1.
, =-.
i 141' 5.1
P+) = ,-' CD > PL
..t.) S • CD t'l
l ..... 0 :-. .7-.1% 0 Po .....
';" •
CA 5 • '73
= 0p.,. Hi e)-• t- • e-.I oict ,
IM.,
• 54 (3.,
. P O p.s.
) 04 st 0 cr
: II CD .-t CD
twE. : .....,
5; ci)7' z
CD (CA ••0 0Z o C) 0 E CL CD W-
.-4- .4) CD ,..., o CD
7 0 0 Cl.. A) =' = 0 ..t. 0 1-.- -. st
to !ft C
, L n0' 1-::: hV CA CD V)
-4, g.
o ol-t..P.-.W0 ›' = .4 . Do
.-t 0 0 CDcnCD tri EF 0
,.,.0,...,-
a. 'ta
" P.'. k'7' 2 7,' ... 0- _
= CD 0' 11 ,,, ,, '14 I= tw
CD 0 ,_. • ....., t.
5 v) = o IC 4 4 K 1 cr
1-6- ,Pp .....
CD 'F:7 O
c . 5.' a: 5t1 ) '10 0
gt--.. ptrir ,*CSE a) ...4 0
1-0 '.4) p • 1::P 0 CD CD tri 0 ..- Cr
0) = 0 fa. CD
rn (.) 0
....., cr ,-/- CD P8 0 °C) 4• 1
4 5-' ,-. .-, ,-t) PC1 A) 5'
0 a, 0 - ,-, 1 CD
1-1 CD co • • (7). -.....
-,v.....2= 0.•-•4, *0 cA
2 2 4F 0 CD - . CD o '- 0 0 .-. • CL CD o ° 0
0 4t n. ... CD 0 .-.n 0 0
▪ 0 = ,.5, ;
t5 . 1
W
CL
CT
P CD *0 cn 0 AD *0 CD CD
0 rCt '' ° 2 '.1) CD t-1 4t 0
CD 2 ir Z = gls 0 CD h' • .1 Z 0 "0
...
0 CI. • 0 0 CD =, CD 0 t4.,1 •
.-I PI 0 7D CIA 0 10
" 0 0 ht 0 ),-,.Z E. P no P t-t• t-t
r o- cn a, -8
-- ,-,. crq -.-i ca. •-... CD .... 0.. CIA
O g (4 11) 0 a) CD 1-1.) ., . CD 0•''
to 0 Pa 0 ,-1- 0 A'
00 = CD = ,.-t 0 0 Cr ,ED, . 0..L
IDD cr ,
':.t . r'it, K az 8K
0 t....• n--
,-t 0 0-' SE: • '-tp.,, .53,a. ' -t ..... 0 0 0 a•-• ''' ,...,
,-.. 0.4 0 ...... - • t-t, ppC 0 C 9 "
O 'CS 0 0 .-I 0
• 0-, CD 1. . ,..,-• O CM
•-•pp • Cr' 0 b-• _ r
5, = CD 0 CD 0'' • '10 0 • ':-.1
. ▪
g . 111-•. 0 ,-a W '-'•• t...,
•
cr tnv) oa. CD -0 aqE•,__,
0 Cr t.< '•C (1) .-, = 4 - :t: " 0 ,_, 5
.-i a. ri) co r,, CD *0 .0 '-' ..... 0 1-4 Fr 0
O Co) 0 D CD 0 CD A) 1-0 z.., 5
n c..) = O. cr • CD
P• A° ., ,<
• .... cn 0 ....-. .z p.,_ CIA +- '0 „,
`n 0 .-. •
,.., rz..
.-,O 0 CL A) '73 ••-• •• 0 0.. 4a CD ci) CD - CD CA
cn cr CICi CD . 5 < '" C
PP.... ,-tAP
=
• 04 0 '.• ,,, 5-
..
CD .1 CD 0 :=
F 5 6D 0 • ,I• 0 TA • 0 0-' A) W'' a cl. =
0.• CD CL t-t. 0t) AD CI)
O 't) 0•' o r-4- r+ A) CD
cr 5 • •
A, o v) v) o▪ g . •0 11°
4.1
Or iEr
cn CD
z -•
.... w -I rn r, .-. o 4 0 (1) .-.
•
.
4) 0 Q" 5
5' 0 4s • Et, A) W)
O *0 (1/ 0 0 l.....) 0 op_ ..... ....5 CD CD V) 0 0-)
F.* CD '0 0- 0ht) CDcn 0)
CIA Cr 0 •,:::, Z F ~4, ''' ..cd mk 4 cA
O 0 -t ag
cn C:L 0 0 5
- ..0 0-. A) .-. • CD .-I CD t/3 OD
0 n m • Ir.;
0 g a Cr .-. •-• t‘..) c4 o PI . V) ... ,=14. - .-t -';
w cra '-'. -cs 0 0 CD
rfr S'' 5 a CD cr 0 0- 0 i.01 g • CO• 0
= fat C CD 1.--. ,i„::,, 0 (NI CD P 41 = O 0
0 cc) CD
0... , CD SD 1?-1 W g0 cr ,:•,t, . v) .-1, 0
z • cl.. CD t:L.
o 0 = ao tk-) , cr) 0 pp ,,-, 0'' 0 ao N
O 2
o .-,. P. t.-.)
CD 0
.-• CL
0 rrs 2 1^ -•CD = ,..... C 14 '0 P Cc) •
0 1:')
pp
5 5-%
":" 0 trl °- 0 „::' cn 0 .-.1 "fl t-t- CD .-.. CD
.-i- tIl 0 *ct c.,
) IQ E5 . P .-1-) 0 CD CA " ▪ (1)
O a 0 -I C4
5 pa 0)
0 0 0 r
• s ,„4, ;1. ---- 0,l. c 0 -• .. 0., o 0 t< '.=t.'-
0'• 5
. -0 -.. 0 CD 0
. 5-•
rtC
aCr' 2 5- = =,
=a 0z dn cn 0 --- & Fr c6 °3 91 -
0
.02., 0,
CPC) K 8- E. 5' 3., = 0
Do CD ,-.. 5,
!=',1 o .... CD I"' '10 cr
....
N
r,r•
0 ,-. .-4-
.43N NOI1V91A133dSaavaNvis
O 0 5''
'3 P 5 5 o
,...._„__ 04 0
patuasei sw 6p liv — 113 146pAdoo

Cl. CD .." !le 2) CD CFA O.
0O. 5. ,..,.
o 0- ,0, ,-). ,. q , z 0.., '6'
Page 1572 of 1823

pamesai sly BP IIV — 11310pAdo0 0'A013 H- 1. 000-00-8 "oN leituod
Page 1573 of 1823
•
CDD
0
cD
A)
co
co
(1)
co
0
cD
0
(JC1
0
.$11.
A
•-••
cr
5..
La
Basisand action forresolvingand documenting PMI nonconformances.

iUl
t4
Id-Z000-Z8-9'oN mULIOJ .10dsv podat INd

5
•
CD
(fa
,$)
q-?) g
0
CD
cD
tig
8
0
N
0
aa
Uri
0
4—
cr
Cr
Ce.
1 ,
r.Jri
,41=,
NOLLV,LNahlf130a
CD
CD
CD
0
(1,
Z000-Z8-9
vN NOL1Y3IA133dS021VCINVIS
pamesai sly 6P IIV — 113 3y 6pAdo9 Aelt11. d-Z000-Z8-9 ON leuuod
Page 1574 of 1823
uognogpon ordiuns*
uammo nu)
(taNapv Idi) (2Ioiavaimoa) (Aama9v ma)
•
Retest)
asper PMI Asper Drg./ Spec.
(Accepted/ Rejected/ Part Identification
P n
Material Material
ci)
Result
- oN ppos 2g 031gIN
o
lopow luatudInbg jjAid

cr
o
=0
0
o
o
..4-
1couo5y uogoodsui
i
:7J
o.
HAM JoMEG
pcJ
0
z
H
0
ti
.39faeitqe ENGINEERS FOR COLOUR CODING OF 6-82-0003 Rev.3
Ofaleg
.0.INDIA LIMITED PIPING MATERIAL
IA Gan of India Und8Italorg)
Page 1 of 12
tretrr.111-1'011 17
lillch
FOR
COLOUR CODING
OF
PIPING MATERIAL
3 10/07/2019 Revised and Updated

x
fig
SKG AP KK RKT
2 25/06/2014 Revised and updated

SM DJ RKD SC
1 10/07/2009 Revised and updated
SM SM RKD ND
0 30105/2003 Issued as Standard Specification RKN MPJ RSG SKG
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 1575 of 1823

lawkieift ENGINEERS FOR COLOUR CODING OF
4ge-1iMiegvw-
wren eve:m=3mM
INDIA LIMITED 6-82-0003 Rev.3
IA Govt of /mks
PIPING MATERIAL Page 2 of 12
Abbreviations:
BIS Bureau of Indian Standards
Em Engineers India Limited
IBR Indian Boiler Regulatory
IS Indian Standard
Construction Standards Committee
Convenor: Sh. A K Kundu, ED (Construction)
Members : Sh. Amitava Paul, GGM (Construction)

Sh. Janak Kishore, GGM (Projects)
Sh. Rajeev Jam, GM (SCM)
Sh. Udayan Chakravarty, GM (Piping)
Sh. Ravindra Kumar, GM (Construction)
Sh. S K Goel AGM (Construction)
Page 1576 of 1823

.391a4.1eigitENGINEERS
Igat faReg WOINDIA LIMITED FOR COLOUR CODING OF 6-82-0003 Rev.3
ORR 217,VW on J.:10m) IA Govt a )nom Undenok.9) PIPING MATERIAL Page 3 of 12
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 REFERENCES 4
3.0 GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR IDENTIFICATION BY COLOUR CODING 4
4.0 IDENTIFICATION COLOURS 4
5.0 METHOD OF COLOUR CODING 4
6.0 TABLE: THE FOLLOWING TABLES SHALL FORM AN INTEGRAL PART OF THIS
SPECIFICATION 5
TABLE -1 BASIC COLOURS FOR IDENTIFICATION 6

TABLE - 2 COLOUR CODES FOR PIPES, FITTINGS & FORGINGS 7
TABLE - 3 COLOUR CODE- STUDS/BOLTS AND NUTS 9
TABLE - 4 COLOUR CODE FOR GASKETS 10
ANNEXURE-1
SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF COLOUR IDENTIFICATION 11
Page 1577 of 1823

ENGINEERS
4geir idaleg
own ~awe amJ, )
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt or India Undertaking)
FOR COLOUR CODING OF
PIPING MATERIAL
6-82-0003 Rev.3
Page 4 of 12
1.0 SCOPE
This standard covers the method of identification of the piping materials by coloring using
paints in order to avoid mix-up between materials of different metallurgy but similar in
physical appearance.
2.0 REFERENCES
The following Code shall be referred to as and when required for resolution of colour shades.
IS: 5-2007: Colours for ready Mixed Paints and Enamels
RAL K5 Classic Edition
3.0 GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR IDENTIFICATION BY COLOUR CODING
i. Materials shall be painted with one colour or combination of colours as set out in this
specification.
ii. Paints used for colour coding shall be of quality so as to last for at least 5 years.
iii. Studs/Bolts and Nuts shall be painted.
iv. Colour Identification is not required on Austenitic Steel.
v. Colour identification is not required on galvanized-materials and non-ferrous metals

such as copper, lead, aluminum because they are easily distinguished by their specific
color and character.
vi. Special items like bellows, strainer, steam traps, valves do not require colour
identification as these items are tagged with their identification.
vii. Discrimination colour shall be marked on the inner and outer surface of pipes &
fittings
4.0 IDENTIFICATION COLOURS
i. Paint colours to be used for identification shall be in accordance with Table-1.

ii. Application of various colours for identification shall be as per clause 5.0 of this
standard.
5.0 METHOD OF COLOUR CODING
i. Colours and locations of colour identification on pipes, fittings, flanges, gaskets,

studs/bolts, nuts shall be in accordance with Table-2 to 4 and Annexure-1.
ii. The identification colour on gaskets shall be painted on the peripheral face of each
gasket (refer Annexure-1).
iii. Ends of the materials to be welded shall not be painted.
iv. Width of colour band shall be a minimum of 12 mm for less than 3 inch size
components and 25mm for 3 inch and larger sizes, unless otherwise specified
Page 1578 of 1823

laReielft ENGINEERS
Ogal -: INDIA LIMITED
WIPT FOR COLOUR CODING OF 6-82-0003 Rev.3
wan eR.E,m3,40,40 GoN ot Undeft.km9) PIPING MATERIAL Page 5 of 12
The length of inner surface painting
• Shall be not less than 4 inch (100 mm) at both ends of pipes and shall start 2
inch (50mm) from pipe ends.
• Shall be about 2 inch (50 mm) at any one end of fittings.
v. Wherever combination of two or more colours is specified, materials shall be painted

in parallel colour bands as close to each other as possible (Refer Annexure-1).
vi. Paints containing chlorine, chlorides, sulphur, lead, zinc or any contents detrimental to
materials are not acceptable. The contractor shall satisfy and produce documents/carry
out tests as required by the owner/EIL.
vii. A query shall be raised with EIL for materials not covered by this specification.
6.0 TABLE: THE FOLLOWING TABLES SHALL FORM AN INTEGRAL PART OF

THIS SPECIFICATION
Table No. Tittle
1. Basic colour of identification
2. Colour identification on pipes, fitting and flanges
3. Colour identification on Bolts/Nuts/studs
4. Colour identification on Gaskets
Annexure-1 Schematic representation of colour identification
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copynght EIL - All rights reserved
Page 1579 of 1823

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
INDIA LIMITED FOR COLOUR CODING OF 6-82-0003 Rev.3

mwr. asi3w171) Govt of Indra Undertalong)
PIPING MATERIAL Page 6 of 12
TABLE —1
BASIC COLOURS FOR IDENTIFICATION

(REF. IS: 5 (2007) APPROXIMATE MUNSELL VALUE REFERENCE)
Equivalent RAL Codes

Indian
`Munsell' Value (*)
Name of standard
SI .No.
Colour shade colour
(ISC) No. RAL
Hue Value/Chroma NAME
Code
Dove gray 100 694 2.3 G 5.53/0.48 Mouse Grey RAL7005
Salmon Pink 68 443 2.5 YR 6.31/4.7 Beige Red , RAL3412
65 2.7 YR Mahogany
India Brown 415 3.76/3.02 -RAL 8016
brown
Canary yellow 39 309 4.8 Y 7.89/11.02 : Zinc Yellow RAL1018
Deep orange 87 591 8.9 R 5.04/10.38 Red Orange RAL2001
Lincoln Green
27 276 0.3 G 3.53/2.81 Fir Green ' RAL6009
Sea Green Yellow
14 217 6.2 GY 6.12/6.15
Green RAL6018
Sky Blue 1 101 8.3G 6.09/2.86 Water Blue RAL5021
Navy Blue 6 106 6.2 PB 2.61/0.95 Cobalt Blue 1 RAL5013
Light Purple 73
449 3.2 R 3.07/2.14 Pale brown RAL8025
Brown
Dark Violet 104 796 6.1 P 3.5/4.27 Traffic purple RAL4006
Chocolate 74 451 3.5 YR 2.82/0.67 Chocolate
RAL8017
Brown
Maroon 83 541 1.3 R 2.9/1.36 Wine Red -RAL3005
Post Office
Red 81 538 4.2 R 3.55/8.39 Carmine Red RAL3002
NOTE: * The Colours are based on RAL K5 Classic Edition by RAL, Deutsches institut,
incorporated for international jobs.
Page 1580 of 1823

Copyright E IL — All rights reserved

6-82-0003Rev.3
II
1 443 Salmon Pink

Salmon Pink
Deep Orange &Sea Green
Deep Orange &Sea Green
Navy Blue & India Brown
Dove Grey & Navy Blue

as
0 Colour
Deep Orange
Dove Grey
( No Paint
Maroon
Maroon
a)
None
1) a)
0 0 0
0 0 0
Z Z
As per Table-1) (As per Table-1)
Colour
No.
1 /.4 0
C)
en
694
(A e : 1
\0
0
r....1 •-. ,—.I .Z.I. ,.... ,—,
1 I •-4 VI trt kil ,.0 In kr) "zi-
e I
z
1
0
No.
Si.
04
v::, 0
.-,r .1-
. 0
kr, O s•.•
00I
0 ai
1 t
I, \JD 00 00 00 •--I 00 00 q:) o >
e
0 0
o •0 -c,
cd
$:
> > n
•it CI) —
it ,..1 ,-,
cd 0 ct '''
I:1 41 0
W Ott
et wmi kr) N N
00
20,• 03 - •-•
0 .-t.,•
CI W.4 0 00
04 ...e, ...,tt t i 1 1 t
t
2 2 e9 . 2 73
[..T.1
t it i •.... ct
A-234Gr WPBW-NONIBR
A-234Gr WPB/WP BW-NONIBR
Elbows, Reducers, Tee's Caps
7•,-,3 •-•
:8 7-48:::o
m
•-•
-1:1
A-234Gr WPB/WPBW-IBR
Cd •••1
a) -0 0 --.
..0 9 4.. a) Et
R.. .L-2, ,..0 ,.c.
:-.
A-234Gr WPB(N)
A-234WPBW (N)
&NORMALISED
I A-420WPL 6W
1A-234WP 1W
IA-420WPL6
2 0
0
as v
0,
v) 11
4:) 5 0 ti ,
N
.y,
0 I....I ••••
II —
71" 0 .1::) r•O e'
en Z. (1) ,1 > 1
III I Ill
c‘ C.) 0 ..."8 ›'1 r:1•4
6, +.4
I I I I Cl) o cn al ,..,
I I I I
API 5LGr B - EFSW
.4 c+-4 cn czt ,...

13Stainless steel
0 43 (..)
3; t,, o ai ai
API 5L Gr B - Seamless
IS1239/IS3589 Gr 410
P. ° 0 c) o
. PLI I-1 > ;-•
API5L Gr B - ERW
I A333Gr 6 (LTCS)
l̀ :-;':
ui . a) cu
a) 0 t (/) C./)
IS 3589Gr 330
CL,
...... OA c0 4 W
(Normalized)
0 c.,) ›..4
IA335Gr P1
00 0 E ,—,
"-,
A106 Gr B
A106Gr B
-
FormatNo 8-00-000 1-F7 Rev. 0
. p4
0 p4 czt -oc
La.,J —J
Z< Z M . --‘ $-• ;-.
gn
z 4-4 4.4
,••••••,
•-•
>
I
....: O
Z c, 0
71- kr) .r) N co 0., .--.
(')
Page 1581 of 1823

6-82-0003 Rev.3
Q
CO
(NI
O
Page 1582 of 1823

N
COLOUR CODES FOR PIPES, FITTINGS&FORGINGS (.... Contd.)
CA
a)
1...;
Elbows, Reducers, Colour Colour
R.
Tee's [Flange/BlindFlange'
0
Caps No.
N
4.4
,C)
00
S
14
N
A335 Gr Pll A-234WP11 27 .
Lincoln Green
S
C4
t:›
A 691 Gr 1.2 5 Cr CL 42 A-234WP11W Lincoln Green
(EFW)
101
00
k il.,
15
N
A 335 Gr P 12
N
A-2341/VP 12 Sky Eltie
WP12W Sky Blue

I
r
A 335 Gr P22 A-234WP22 A 182 F22 Sea Green
N
r-
N
A 691 Gr 2.25 Cr CL.42 A241.VP2 W Sea Green
(EFW)
LT ',0
A 335 Gr P5 A-234 WP5 A 182F5 1\Tavy Blue II
901 1
A-234 NVP5W anig
ON
A335 Gr P9
1/4.0
71.
•-•.
S
a)
A-234 WP9 A182 F9

.1
a \
-
1/4,0
.1
A-234 WP9W
N
.1
DarkViolet
I
Le)
A335Gr P91
• 1
.71.
A-234WP91 A182F9 1 (hocolate

1
r.'".•
'Zr
• 1
A-234 WP91W
tn
Chocolate
Format No 8-00-0001-F7Rev 0 CopyrightEIL — All rights reserved

STANDA RDSPECIFICATIONNo.
642-0003Rev.3
Page 1583 of 1823

Paae 9 of 12
PI
INDIANSTD.
ci
ci)
z
COLOURSHADES
ASTM DE SIGNATION COLOUR (I SC) NO.
.,
en
0,
0
Canary Yellow
01
al
0
,4
A 193GR B 7
(..-,
cn
0
c,
Canary Yellow
01
,_,
z
A 194GR 2 H
,
:,-
•--4
Lr)
v;)
India Brown
,,•,
al
0
A307GR B
.1-
•—•0
vz,
,r)
India Brown
z
A307GRB
r•-•
cq
cq
t--,
Lincoln Green
oa
0
,,,, ...;•
A193 GRB16
cq
t•--
r.--
c.i
Lincoln Green
,_,
z
A 1 94GR 4
•--4
r---•
.1-
.,,•.
Chocolate
al
o
A 320GRL7
cza
0
4.-...
N
A 320GRB8 01 Light Purple Brown
_,...
z
N
Light Purple Brown
01
A 1 94GR 8
Format No 8-00-0001-F7Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

6-82-0003Rev.3
Paae 10 of 12
Page 1584 of 1823

TABLE - 4
1-4
C.)
0
C
ASTMDESIGNATION/DESCRIPTION INDIAN STD.
E—,
LT•J
›..,
Or
Q
Z•
Cl')
d
.
COLOUR (ISC) NO. COLOURSHADES
BS7531GR.X (FULLFACE)
I
0
0
0:0
CompressedF ibre
0::,
—,
VD
ON
Dove Gray
(Ring &FullFace)
BS7531 GR.X ( RING)
I
None
7.
cn
0
—
C)
SS304SPR WND + Grafoil F iller
a)
0:1
ct) r
7:,
•....- `:).
g
s.0
00
,-.,
SS 304H + Grafoil F iller
1'
1'
E
z
0
0..0
'1'
SS 304+GrafoilFiller
1'
al.,
N
6-6
01
c
0
E,
,—
SS304 + Teflon F iller
0
v) z .9
da
0
4 ,
oo
SS304 LSPR WND + Grafoil Filler
=0
r)
.c, ,
t---
00
kn
SS 3 16SPRWND + Grafoil F iller
...,—
=ct
6
. .
. •
t---
,_
.0
N
CI -a
SS316 L SPR. WND + Grafoil F iller

c._.)
,...,
N
N
;-
=
" ..
0•N
ec")
en
SS316 H SPR. WND + Grafoil F iller
0
›..,
01
g
°'
0
•,:r
C>
CA
,-.
Te flon JacketedSPR. WND
,0
N
a
__,
1.1
1.,—*- -•
SS321Spr WND + Grafoil filler

N
Cl')
0
-
,,, 0 ,..
SS347S or WND + Grafoil Filler

v)
,.$. 5.cd°) g,>)
OCT. Ring Gasket

N
5 Cr, 1/2 Mo (Max. 120 BHN)

eZ) e---
— .0
,--. N
L incoln Green
Gasket
CJ"
Soft Iron (Max. 90 BHN)

C>
—.
c,
'1'
`4)
Dove Gray
1•Te1rr17 . \ _ 1_ •
Format No 8-00-0001-F7Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

STANDARDS SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS FOR COLOUR CODING OF 6-82-0003 Rev.3
st tafg).V:3-07 !•1„y
, loi, LIMIT
ot PIPING MATERIAL Page 11 of 12
ANNEXURE-1
SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF COLOUR IDENTIFICATION
A. COLOUR IDENTIFICATION OF PIPES
114,41,04114/41PAPAPINIIII4NIIIraPIPIANII041ro
ONE COLOUR TWO COLOUR
B. COLOUR IDENTIFICATION OF FITTINGS
ELBOW TEE
ONE COLOUR TWO COLOURS ONE OR TWO COLOUR'S)
REDUCER STUB END

• .44t,
CZ=
ONE COLOUR TWO CO LOURS ONE OR TWO COLOUR(S)
CAP COUPLING
ONE OR TWO COLOUR(5)

ONE OR PnO COLOURS)
Page 1585 of 1823

.31
-1(a_ieff- ENGINEERS
ige_11 OWeg INDIA LIMITED FOR COLOUR CODING OF 6-82-0003 Rev.3
i.G..,o, hda Untlertaktng) PIPING MATERIAL Page 12 of 12
SCHEMATIC REPRESENTATION OF COLOUR IDENTIFICATION (Contd...)
C. COLOUR IDENTIFICATION OF FLANGES
ONE COLOUR TWO COLOURS
D. COLOUR IDENTIFICATION OF GASKET
10 BE COLOURED AS SP CiFIE0
E. COLOUR IDENTIFICATION OF STUDS/BOLTS & NUTS
MACHINE BOLT STUD BOLT NUT
Page 1586 of 1823

petuesei sp.16p — 113 I46pAdo0 0 •Aa2i 1d- 1000-00-8 'ON lew.iod
Aq penoiddxf
Aq Acq ON
ueuulet.lo Jouenuop asodind oleo
neaing P0)130110 peJedoid .nab
eawwW03
spiepuels spiepuels
SV OA 1NNV as N33dS a1S SV C1311SSI38 aNY Cl3SIA98 •176"2 Z
IW NINHO 1NNV 1)18 .NO3dS 'OIS SY CI3fISS138 CINV CI3SIA32:1 00'90 SI. £
Nvna N Mit/ EIA 03dS a1S SV 0311SSI32i 03SIA31 60' 11 OZ
iHvna N INCl/V\INV VN 03dS .CUS SV 03fISSI321 CINV 03S1A321 010Z 90'0£ 9
17121 /1.) HfN 03dS 'a1S SV 0311SSI32I CINV 03SIA32i 810Z'90 8Z 9
NtIrf
SlaSSAA a2if1SSUIld
1101
NOELVDIJIDadS
.1464P4, he-6111114 Ik
91. 40 867d- 16uoleuapun elpui Ino9 v PAPAr. MAW
S13SS3A 321fISS32Id
9 'Aeld 1.000-2I-9 2104
C13111N11 VIGNI psi 9 e_Jet Jags
SNANION3 Pr?oPEP
•ortj NOLLV3IA133dS aavaNvis NOLLVOIJI33dS 1V1:13N30
Page 1587 of 1823
pamasai sli/61.111V —113 41/6pAdo0 0 nab Id-MOO-00-8 ON leULLIOd
(uo9oadsui) ueuumfuteure-Na •JIN
(ssapoid) tesotip s ..q/v
(spoloid) tumir yki
urcuenN tpumps .41
qs!uy "IN
setunN
numN Japui -xyv
Jutunm utuy %ITN
ninicatrufuy•NuN
irpumzew icefuusuw
:siaqtuaw
u2u1AejeN %LIN uouantioj
aamunuop spaupumsluatudimba 39e1s
• 4
1w-twat' wail P1CM isod
uoggs!uggio /Claps son!soldxg 2g) umalanad °sad
wog feu!tuoN gN
uo9usqugpirels ioj uoges!treau touogetuolui OSI
suo!win2ax Jallog impui 11$21I
se2p3A, 31SIONI ANC'
snattOug reo!urtioaw 3o Xpfoos ueopauy 3IAISV
Jopodusi paspotpy IV
:stiopuptaiqqv
91. 0 Z 96ed Munevapurt opus w 000 rl
S13SS3A 32:111SS3Nd
9 'AM 1000-Z1-9 2103 aluwn 5agiAlF-oP
oN NO111/31A103dS CRIVONVIS NOI1V31A103c1S1V1131439 SN33 NO
Page 1588 of 1823
pamesai sly69 pV —113 N69Aclo3 0 'nab Id- WOO-00-9 'ON leLwo
4 0
171 21aG10.1 KING 0.6
171 mou,Daxa CNV /•10IIVDRIEWA ELLIS 0'8
171 aaimvuvrio o'L
Z1 AlcIdaS 0'9
6 °mum monDadsm o's
9 NOLLVDRIERTA 017
moisaa 0.£
saomaNaaax crz
j7 adODS 0'1
SINIMLNO3
£ abed
Sl3SS3A 32111SS32Id MumuaPun Mut JO 4.00 v)
9 'Aetl 1000-21-9 HOA IONI
S1G]
•oN NOLLV3IAI33dS aavaNvis NOLLVOIA103dS 1V1:13N30
4311
S 3N19N c3
WAic'P 21P
V '-`71 .Pr?n—
Page 1589 of 1823
patuasal sp46p nv —113 146pAclo3 0 .nab Ld- L000-00-8 ON wW.103
.romougej aye Xq tp!m pagdwoo aq lsntu pasn aq spssan Janaragm
awls JO iallITIO0 3111 10j
smni-Xq Fool Cue Imm ratga0o1. suoguin8a! puu smel puouum
suopeintau
•-gg atom tenordde uanum .tags Xpo pasn aq Imo apui2 lualun!nba jo suoueogloads Jotpo
•uoueogpacls prupuuls tre!pui (q)
'Ir3S 01103 IOSS3A 3ITISSald puu JOHOEI aWSV (g)
: uuojuoo geqs pasn aq o. ppamAl
saP03 Z'Z
.(alquogddu ranauatim) 1861 sainx (pargun) spssaA amssard allqopv puu °gels aqi (p)
.(alquogddu .mnauagm) 2IHI -suogulnOag rallog tre!pui (0)
'A 03S Pun XI u01100S apop pssaA OITISSOld pue rallog giNsy (q)
•alquogddu se z MG JO I 'Am giA uogoas apoD lassaA 0111SSOld puu ragog awsy (u)
: luawd!nba jo aouuldapou puu 2ugsa4 ùogoadsu! ùogeouquj `tta!sap roj s!suq
aye uuoj Hugs paqsump atp u! o4 pailNal Eptiappe pue uompa ay4 u! sapoo Ou!mogoj ata
sopop uN!saa I'Z
O'Z
•uogeogclun Tsoo puu °tug Cue morg!im
OulpuR aq Hugs 'j / imp Jo uo!spaa •ampujnumu Oullmoord apojaq uogonusu!
IIg/ imp umlqo ol Ougum ut -Ha / Imp O4 spgjuoo alp raja! Xgchuord Hugs ropuan 'age°
!ions ut `13A0MOH *unno0 Hugs °nogg age jo ono waulaqnbar luaOupls Isom atl1 luraua8 uI
sapop (3
sprupuns puu suoguogpads (q
Ou!murp Oupaau!Oug (u
: smogoj st aq !lugs aouapaoard jo rap() 041 lo!guoo jo asgo uI C'T
-slassan amssard pals g\i% zAE uoguogpads krunlawaiddns 8000-Z1-9 (0
•slassan pup pals ssalumls .roj uoguogpads kreluatuaiddns L000-Z1-9 (P
•slassan pals ssaiums ou!ualsnu roj uogeogpads Ximuatuaiddns 9000-Z1-9 (0
-slassan pals Amu mot ioj not uogpads Xruluatuaiddns £000-ZI-9 (q
•slassan pais uoq.mo roj uogrogpads XruluawalcIdns Z000-Z I-9 (u
:suoguogpads kruluatuaiddns ay1 ate 01.1!M01104 %lam
asuipind JO / pug uog!s!nbaN mpamiNay1 ut o1 pallajar aq Hugs uoguogpads sng o4 upuappu
°yew uaqm ùogeogpads kruluatuaiddns •tuano0 Hugs puu uogeogpads stye o4 upuappu
uuoj gulls sluatuannbar puomppu JO ppads Ouguo!put uogeogpads kmuatuaiddns Z'T
•sapoo aiquolldcte amp guatual!nbal umuqunu alp Tuatuarldns
papualut s! puu slassan amssard pargun jo Xicldns puu Ougsal 'uouoadsu! %op=
`clnisuuunpom ùogeouquj `ta!sap JOJ sluatuannbar praua8 ay1 &moo uoguogpads s!qJ
adODS
gLot7 abed (e..M.Pufl .0.1P 1A.0 V) (wow= axte. taut)
Sl3SS3A 3111199321d
9 'AGH 1000-Z1-9 210A CRIBA111 VICTNI 2afig irP21P
"oN NOIIVOIdIO3dS aavaNvis NOI1VOIA103dS 1V213N30 Pr??1ID
Page 1590 of 1823
pamasai sly6P IIV -113 1116pAdoo 0 °A91:I Id-MO0-00-8 'ON jetiLlOd
•apop algep!iddeJad se aq !legs amleJadwal Asap le ssaps anemoliv E•9•E
•awid jo ssouvuil
papaw° agl si alaim pol!wg aq Hugs uogoagap alqumoge `sowid Jod £
•tuuog atg jo pluoi
atl st amok curl of pal!wg aq Hugs uogoagop algumoge `sureog poddns 'o,3 I'9'£
S1E1.1.101111 9*£
•ola Sugsal
pue uogoodsu! ùouuopguj ùogongsuoo jo ppoww `s2inmuip `ta!sop 2uwwpad (osad)
uoguswaJo Xpjus san!soidxg wnajogad wog funoiddu w2 of Xl!pq!suodsaJ siJopuon
aq Hugs 1.i iossaA owssaid °Now puu Oguls jo mapund alp Japun 2wwoo siossan Jod Z.S.£
•ow 2uusal pug uopoodsu! ùogeopguj ùog.ongsuoo
Jo wpalutu `s2u!nnwp 'a!sap of 2uwwpad saupownu Hai wag onaiddu w2 w Xpq!suodsai
mopuon aq Hugs 1.! `suouviaox Jollog tre!pui jo mopund aw Japun 2wwoo siasson Jod £
stuAoaddv Xioinjuis S'£
'3U00p0140 SUMS piano Hu Joj wo poling aq Hugs Adefiloww
%00 i •uou!s!nbai ut pag!oods aspvuowo ssoiun `Jowatew 2u!upipu ow jo %pi wwwww
se pua gouo w swim' apiontni glinn adki powoopoi. su pou.2!sap aq Hugs sioonpai powoo
ssans olgumogu °pop :3A!SSaldU103 (q)
ploIJ( 1113!clum JO %06 : allSUOI
:2upinollo3 aw poaoxo Jou op (!sal alts Joj ssampug
papo.uoo uo pasuci) wauodwoo gags Xuu ui sossags powpwo ww. poppkwd oa, aq Hugs gags
Joj spoddns atp. ùopsod pnuozuoq u! suoppuoo !sal-awA 311s/dogs 10 IlogeOpCiEj 2upnct £.£
•sluowqoupu pump uo spam was puu pimp asyo u! Ouguas
Jo Vuaus Joj i(russooau ssampug woltl ow of poppy aq ins oouumogu uo!sonoo £. £
•slualuoo josson of posodxo °pupils
goy' uo aguumoge uo!so.poo pag!oods alp Rug of Tunba ssourup wpca pm papAoid aq Hugs
àmid u! poi:1mq° JO palm are go!qm (skug jo uoudooxa alp pm) spud jutualu! aigunowox Z.Z.£
•spud amssaid-uou
lutuaw! paxg Jaw° puu s2up poddns 1e'1 3o saps woq of poppy xi Hugs aourmogu uo!solloD £
oauumoliv no!so.uo3
losson otp uppm Jualpw2 amssoid Cue puu puog pinbq
2uguJado umunxutu ow 2u!ppu Xq powupolop aq gulls pod lamoi AUy w amssaid tb3!sap aqi r I•E
•13SSOA wwozpog
jo Julod lsotpq ow w lassan pogion jo dw ow. lu aq Rugs pag!oods amssold thi!saa
ainSSaid a!Saa I•£
NIDISHa OT
log 36ed
Sl3SS3A 321f1SS32Id (6..Neu2Pun erom O inoo V)
9 'Aet1 1000-21.-9 NOA C1311VV11 VIGNI 7w,-ifiarr
•oN NOLIVOIA103dS aavaNvis NOL1VOIA103dS 1;213N30 9133NI9N3 Pr?Ml—
ILV
Page 1591 of 1823
pefuesai sp.& IIV -113 146pAdoo 0 A921 1•J-1000-00-9 ON lewmA
•Jatautulp mu I muumuu icq qm ual reutiou uutp Jo2uoi aq pugs (JauoIsuat mloq ollnuipicq Cq
paualq2p aq om) spills/smog •tpual pnj (op pap-camp aq pugs spnms 2g speaup z Act Tsual mu smnu
puoicaq pualxa pugs spms - pappads as!mlamo ssaiun 2u!puaup osi anuq pugs spntsistioq IId j•vt
smalsu9 pue saauamsug 1717
*Wm „176 SIN utut 009 ump JamaJ2 sazts JOJ ,g, sopos LV9I g HIAISV su
puu (gN „tz) EIN tutu 009 oidn saz!s Joj S•9I g gyqs-v .tad su aq pugs sa2trup jo suo!suamm Z• £•t
*J3A00 0111 ut aq pugs aouj alutuaj
JO anoatil am ùtopoq am ui patuool s! aizzou am uaqm `JOA0M01-1 '021.mu aizzou ui aq pugs
aouj airmaj JO anooJO `pasn are sattup paouj °Tema.' puu mutt JO anooJ2 puu an2uot uaqm
sa2tteig £17
•atuus aqm Joj pagnbai st mpuiad uopolnap Numbs oN •Xoua2NT uogoadstq
wag funoiddu am pm puu suo!suaup o!sgq ut auuqo ou Si magi paranoid pasn aq uuo
pawads uutm ssaulopi iati2!q jo &maims JO sawid aippus 'spud 2u!oJoju!ai `samuld JadduJitA S.Z.17
•tassan aqm jo Isoi oipAt aqm nee pal-gownt aspmiaqmo ssaran asuaB piuq tram pond aq ins
spud 2a!oloju!ai atgm ut saloq awm-llai To mom om aotreqo u anuq saiqqnq duos ati asnuoaq
osiu puu sIsp 2u!nuudw000u jo asnuoaq papuatutuopai mou ate sainssaid Isom iatpll -sattuu
uo dqs Joj mno pawn aq om paimbai aq osiu Hugs msam spa .(2) ztuo/21 cz• i jo ainssaid u tram
Tsai uopnios duos J!-e Joj iredu 08i pawocq sajoq paddem JAN (tutu E) „8/I omm tram paranoid
aq Hugs spud 2u!oioju!aJ IIV •paraam s! 1.t qopim om muauodutoo iassan aqm su waren!nba
JO lEIJOIEW alms alp jo aq pugs apoD JO s2utautp .tad su papbat Janauaqm spud 2watojma21 17'Z•17
Tenoidde .toed grim pasn aq uuo mopq puu EN pc az!s Joj
avzou odic). uo las •uows!nbal ul pagloads as!mJamo ssawn u!-mas aq Hugs saizzou tid Z.t7
*LIME
Jo stpui umtupw u grim wows jjo paputhat aq pegs saioqpuuHisaToquuw jo sapa ap!sui Z. Z.17
- saipueq 2upjll aipps grim pap!AaKI aq pugs J3A00
aloqpuEH puu pmpums J3C1 su awq Jo qAup u gpim pap!nold aq pegs JOAO° 010qtrUIN I .Z.17
swamp-coy puu saiottpuull saioqueN ‘saizzom Z*17
- uogeop!oads miatutu
angoadsal ut pappads squill am puoicaq te!Jmetu atp jo sapladaid luomutpatu am quduu
mou pugs ampaooid paldope `paitionut st manual]. waq wanbasqns puu 2umuoj poq Janataqm £.1.17
•pud u!atojwair aloquetty aizzou aqm uugm Jan' aq praoqs
°meld UMOJO atp `pua paqs!p atp jo anuao atp mu pauorasod st aloquutu u .to ajzzou u Janauaqm
- awid UMOJO ssaluteas u anuq isntu pt `satuid oml uum WOW Jo Opum st pua palsy u Janauaqm Z. I17
•Jowo!Nej atp mo pap.= aq Hulls `kiessaoau patap!suoo A '1113ml-eau Joaq
ampauumur2uwado aizzou nap pugs turas tupioqo puu Jalaute!p TIEN atp Jo p.ngm auo trap
ssai aq iou pm algid rupioqo jo tpp!m am `sasuo Bons ui •alquidaoau are urns ppm lupiotio
auo gpim spua paqs!p `JanamoH -uopounsuoo ssapueas Jo aq i(Tquiajaid pugs spua patisla 1.1.17
spud paqsmipum
NoLivanisiva
51.10 g abed (64.guaoun mow w Nog v)
S13SS3A 321f1SS32Id
9 'AM 1000-Z1.-9 1:10d 431.1%All1 VIGNI "4?
'"6-14733P
'0181 NOI1V3IA133dS asvaNvis NOLLVOIA103dS 1V213N30 9:133NION3 Pr?Mil9P
Page 1592 of 1823
pamasaJ sp46P 11V — 113 Iii6pAdo0 0 •Ao?:1 Id-1.000-00-8 'ON leuno
.°13slluq110U1OSAIMO jo 2tupeolun/2u!pro! `tiogoadsu! annnj .ioj kigmssaoor awsua
•oia sken Oupcnupolnqpis!p `spp2 poddns 'swam qsatu Joj papInaid aq Hugs slaured Xumurew
`Xlieuopippy - pag!oads as!mimpo ssalun uo!s!niadns mopuan Japun °vs Jolornuo°
reoungoaw Xq panotual aq Hugs tionim stutuaw! alp Ougioddns Joj pappkaid aq hugs (poiinbai
j!) sa2pam X.reiodwai -pang sigtuaw! gRim 2uoir papodsurn aq Hugs swawdutba -uows!nbal
ui palmoads as!miatpo ssalun dogs p pang aq Hugs swatudInba jo •ola Joloalloo lapno
`sad!c1 JoIngpism `sicen 5upgunk1owqpistp poddns `SIJ30JOS gsatu `slaNsug imam agi 9'5'17
.10 1(q 13011sImInJ
sp-wap alp imm aotrep000r ui JoIropqrj lassan Xq !wpm puu pagddns aq Hugs lassan alp of
papiam spoddns umaq `sirtualut IIu puu &mg BugIoq Jatuoaumop `s2up poddns tied was/Swi S.5.17
-amid wag pairopgrj aq Imo 2u!d!d awssaid-uou
Joj tetualu! JanamoH -sa5treg pa Joj aq Hugs 2u!dird amssaid Joj saugg lutuang 17. S't
add papiam JO ssapiteas Jaw aq Imo Ouult4 awssaid-uou !minim! JanamoH .2tud!d
paloatwoo tetualxa ago su uoprog!oads aures jo puu ssapuras aq Hugs Swd!d anissaid mutant' £.S.17
-Hags Lassan alp par
Ind atp uaamiaq uo!suedxa tetwatp lugualajm mop suratu wpm pap!Aold aq Hugs lassan
alp jo Jalaturm JO pogo u Suwurds sirtualu! Jatpo JO sureaq poddns /can `sauseg Z.S.17
-alogurtu atp g2nomp ssud Hugs sirtualu! amenowai Hy 1.5.17
stuuialxa puu slut:Liam
H Puu OZ'9Ig MAISV 01 ULLIOJUO0 Hugs slalsro
-aaej apes Rogipua pins atp 4u 2upputu
Joloo lounsm Xq pagguap! aq °sir Hugs gnu 2g grog iginuelatu SS/J(01Iu Itu J°J 1041111.1
'gajC 1.1920S 4aNsg2 atp 2wcptusgi wowtm Nog alp "eau pmpetu Round aq Huts azts alp
Nog paddw jo asuotq -sans' aw jo auo uo pa3prui Round azIs ow a/mg Hugs sinu aw XpErs
•priis ago Jo spua ago jo aut uo p331.MUI Bound Xprap aq hugs az!s tuoprog!oads irpnew
MAISV ui pag!oads su !Naas mannorwu-etu 2g suogrog!oads aw jo Otudwels w uon!ppe uI 17'17'17
-anneJadutal Jag2!g Joj apuldinsm tunuapq/clow !ppm pur 3000Z (On
an-uwadulal 5uppom J0J OSEOB a4igdeJ2 gpm palropqn! aq Hugs 2uplog irwapca uo spraigi £ .17.17
-mu aignop tp!m pap!noid aq Hugs sqoq irtuaw! Hy Z.17.17
•siolundas plop
2g loll pm S1013.0311 ICEH-ODA/SGHCILLCIIICl/J331orioawicll Joj /quo algrogddv
(ft) sioirJudasisiolorai jo saugg aizzou gouanb puu lapno law'
300LE anocir annwadwai tiO!saci mm 8E oi tutu sz
(ft) sioluirdas/siopeat jo saugg aizzou gouanb par ppm 'mu'
DopLE anoge annwadwai a!saci
(2 worBN L < ua5oipXH JO aitISSOld
z mind) amnias ua&)JpX}i
°Amp puu 009 ssup tutu pc 04 puu unu 8E
snip!. °&.1u1J III' JOAOpue unu pc
suoprogloads loacomposuami ssaoold /Cq pag!oads uagm S3Z!S Ily
suompuoa az!s moll ieu!tuusi
:uows!nbaN alp w pag!oads as!mlawo ssawn Jopuan /cc! pagddns
aq Hugs pure suon!puo° puu saz!s nog 5wmollo3 Joj pasn aq Hugs Jaumsual mog ogruripicH
9 1. Jo L °Bed 16.... Pun .P.1P No9 P OnCIPED2E12.11:21.0.2.1
S13SS3A 31:111SS32Id
9 'AGM 1.000-Z1.-9 NOA C131RA/11 VIGNI 92t1BrPEIP
'0N NOLLVOIA103dS aavaNvis NOL1V3IAI33dS 1Ve13N30 S2133N1I9N3 Pr?MEP
Page 1593 of 1823
p9A18S9J sp.& IIV — 113 I46pAdoo 0 '^9:1 Id-1.000-00-8 'oN leunod
pud Owo.kgwal tplm saizzoN (q
•swpgr anuottoo tpoows tp!m papptaid aq hogs ppm ppg pssan aizzoN
•saizzou Jo uopupulsw Jauu apis qoua uo aizzou Jo .131.3mulp ammo Jo satup g•
.a.i aizzou Jo ialaurem aplswo Jo smug £ of pub° g ual u pawurexa ututpuad
aicp puu pagdeBo!pw Xpnj aq pugs Ouluado aizzou quiet Ougnoj areas piano Cud 0!
•a0pa aizzou (3.4 lwod Isamu
wag painsuatu apis qoua uo tutu 001 04 pub° tp2uai a tu paupuuxa lueuauad
aicp puu paqdw2o!pw Xpnj aq pegs (=as plane gum Ougnoj 1ou lnq) uluu
pc unplm saizzou 04 (a0pa ppm 04 °Op ppm) aotruls!p Oupveq mum ppm Cud 0
pud Owatojwannotwm saizzoN
:Xidde hugs swatuaqnbat Owmopoj ammo/ mu su atuus
atp ageo ul .(a0pa ppm of a0pa ppm) tuntwunn !nut pc Xq sOup Otquagps puu swap `soup
poddns Amu; 'wapiti! 'sped watuaawjwat taizzou Jo nap aq pugs suruas ppm wew IIV g. t
•tpp!m sl! ao!Au aq weal lu pugs 4110!aq 54t pug ssatop!tp upis
alp 04 priba aq pugs pua upts w ppm alp Jo tpp!m walls wup Ownau!Oua alp ui pawo!pu!
as!miatpo ssalun ppm paaej lul3 tpoows u tptm aputu aq putts puag pssan puu upis Imampq
suopoauuoD •spiam uing uopanauad pnj gum °pew aq pugs ppis 21quoddns to sums
•spiam uopanauad
pnj quiet pssan of pagoeue aq putts spud luatuaatojwat .qatp puu siCumuulAI pug saizzoN
•pasn aq lot pugs
sd!us Ouppeq tammadwal onz-qns 4od tuog funaidde 'oud Otqutelqo pug /quo pasn
aq two dims Ouplogg •uopeuauad pnJ amsua ou pasn aq uuo (pa) ssaoald sup uatg ualsOuni
uru low glum sw!of unq pappm al2ws `Xl!pq!ssaoovu! 01 anp alq!ssod lot! s! 2u!ppm Opts
puooas uaqm •sw!or pappm amnop ùogulauad IIn3 aq pugs sppm unq 2upgaq amssatd
4
•sa0pa Jo Xiputopun uou pug uopEmoioosq)
tuwauquap Òuts anotual of paqnba! su 4o4uouquj atp Aq punatO aq pegs sa0pa inn attre14
u!PlaA1 L't
•sp.mpuuls
II3 tad su algid alum lampujnuutu puu amid auruu -pa quiet pagcldns aq pugs pssan pug
aigia atugm 917
.awes
lioddns of paq 4sAieleo moiaq pap/wig aq iieqs aup lioddns !IN 'as!Nuatuo pagpads ssaiun 6*S*47
•aioquutu lsanau tiSnaup ssud maw aq pptoqs puu
as!mialpo pag!oads ssalun adX4 aiqunoutat aq pugs pssan atp ap!su! mid paiwojiad teu.tang 8- g.t.
—pa cq paqs!tunj
spupp atp quiet aourp000u u! Anuouquj pssan pappm puu pagddns aq pegs sretnauca IIV Ct
-uopupwsui puu uopuogilwap! ppg pangl aq molls
small magi lassan tplm tiowds!p loj pawn puu panowal !pm 'pug aq pegs swatudwba
Jo •op 104001loo pun° `sacl!d lowq!usIp `sicuu Oupowilowq!usm ioddns 'swans
qsaw `spIsuq [umlau! atp ùop!sInbal .tad su asooi pagcldns aq ou alE spluanq alp asuotg
51 jo 8 abed
S13SS3A 321f1SS32Id
9 "AM 1.000-21.-9 1:104 anitAin viam (0,27c-kEng irP2IP
•orti NOLLV31d103c1S ativaNvis NOI1V3ld103cIS 1V213N30 SIB3NION3 pr` 'P
Page 1594 of 1823
pemasai sp46P Ily -113 I460d00 .Aa:1 ld-1.000-00-9 'ON leuucu
•alquogonid
Janatagm Iloddnsitspis 2tutpuput 4iun ataldwoo u sg patnan wag ppm 4sod aq Hugs slassaA Z.8.17
•apoo age ui pagtoads imp untp ssal aq patulopad tuauggan wag plane 4sod aquings asgo
ou ut •s2tumnip 2wJaaut2ua aqt uo pagtoads uaqm pateau Iraq ppm 4sod aq gals slassaA 1'8'17
junumail, wall PPM 4sod 817
LIMOS f : Jatattrew allow 9 coldn OJTOULI b 1.110.1J slassan )
LIMOS Z : Jatatuntp allow t cudn allow z wog slassan (q )
areas i Jatatuum anatu z ouln slassan )
:smogoj
su aq !tugs swum reutpnu2uoi jo •ou wnwpcm •anatu i aq !lugs gyp& °smut° gags tuntwum L. t
•paptAaul aq !lugs
Jnowoo annottoo snonua2 pun wows punat2 aq Hugs pats /Coign moi Joj Jaq2u4 pun 30S 1,
pun pats uogino Joj Jatt2p4 pun 300LE augnJadtuat uStsap gum slassan `Jamo! pun 3o6Z(-)
angendwat u2Isap qpM SI3SS3A pun ao!Ans ogoico 'ao!Alas ua2cupiCH jo OSUO stuauodwoo
amssaid pssan alp sppm tau gum (•ota swap `saizzou) stuatugonun inwapcannuJaw!
.2tuppm Joj paXoldwa aq !lugs ampaoald paulaoon atg u! paggurtb ain oqm sJappm /quo 6' L'17
•panauldn are sampaomd patuaotwo atg ssalun aouatutuoo tou gulls 2wpiam 8' L' t
•atumnip uognopqnj ut pateo!pu! aq !Tugs pun
3 Ind IF 03S apop lassaA amssaJd pun Jallog Hylsy Jad se aq Hugs saignuunsuoo 2utplam L. L't
•algutdaoon aq osin ins snuJaA riming pun Aar ANQ `spicoli
`Tap Japun (116d) piooax uognoggen6 ampaoald 2wpiam paggunb XIsnotnaJd
0 'XI u°933S 0p03 •
slassaA amssaid pun JagoEl giAlsy .tad sr In/mid& Joj angutuasaulat pastiotpue JO Joloadsu!
magegoind !wow uutwogifunb pun uognolpoads ampaoaul 2utplam utuqns Hugs JopuaA 9•L•t7
luautgonun pus
Aun Jo 2tuppm a.iojaq pauguexa tungauad aXp pun pa id-m.2011)-w Xlinj `gsng punat2 aq !lugs
opts gaga uo t2ua! um ON snid twtugarge atg Japun 2u!tuoo uoipod tunas ppm mg 'tunas
ppm gum 2ugnoj s! -op strap `s2up poddns knit trutuatut wig stuatugonun Jaw asno tti
•aps gaga uo
tutu 00I + ped tuautaatojwat mopq tunas ppm jo uotpod of puha tp2ual JO opts
Ilona uo aizzou Jo Jatatuntp ap!swo jo smut g• i •a•t aizzou jo Jatatuntp ap!suto
jo south £3o Jaq2N innba tplual n paulaunxa tunuauad aXp pun pagdat2o!put
Xlinj `gsng punadi aq gulls 21quado aizzou gum 2ugnoj tunas ppm Amy,
'31)1s
Lima uo tutu NI pnd 11101I100.10jU!al Mopq tunas ppm jo uogiod fertba tp2ual
n paunuexa tungauad acp pun pagdwilatput Xgrg `tisng punadi aq gulls pnd
tuatuaaugutai Japun 2u!woo tug 2uwado aizzou gum 2tulnoj tou tunas ppm Cud 0!
.a2pa pnd 5utaugwal w!od 1.SajBOU
Wag pamsnaw opts Ilona uo tutu 00! tenba t2ual n pawutexa tungauad acp
pun pagdeBotpui Xlinj aq gags (tunas ppm qum 2ugnoj tou tnq) tutu oc tugum
pnd 2watojutat (a2pa ppm ot a2pa ppm) aountstp 2wAng tunas ppm Cud
91. 0 6 a6ed
Sl3SS3A 31311SS32ld
9 'Ae21 1000-U-9 210A VICINI 1111k 2?-1421 11720
'01•1 NO1/V0IA103dS aavaNvis NOLLV3IA103dS 11/113N30 521-ANON] PrW9P
Page 1595 of 1823
pemesai sp.& IIV — 113 iy6pAdo3 0 'Ae?:J ld-1,000-00-8 'ON lewioj
- slassan Joj watuannbal umw!ww s! ialdw2o!pw
Jods JanamoH •apoo pagpads ssai aq uoguinutexa o!gdw2olveJ
Hugs asuo ou •aulAnwp Otniaaw2ua uo pagpads aq Hugs icgduBo!pw jo luaixa I .17.
Xgdy.Mnpra t'S
.5untnud puu Jaw!Jd 'uoguJudaJd aoujins (o
- ow ssaupieg 'uo!solloo Joj gons wal wpads Jamo (u
•Osal onumnaudiogulsoipicH)Jsai amssald (w
- swawn.nsu! Owinsuatu jo sploom uonulggeD (I
.2u!Aagai ssans (31
- uogutnutuxa apg.red ogamiumuoguuntrexa Juanauad aicu
•uoguunuexa onideJ,Sollaux
'310340 1[6010!SUOWM (q
- 51nuas aizzoN (5
.2wpiam aiojaq 2u!Jeap ssud wow
suogoas jo Juatually
suogoas funp!Agmn uo 30uuniol. 2uHioN (P
•sureas tewptupuoi jo Juatually (3
4 4
*StIORCITIIEI Joj rag° juns!A ti!pniou! '21npiam Joj uogundaid a2pa (a
uoguogguap! wpm!!! Anux
:ft!molloj atp panuall Jug '21npnpu!
uogeopqvj Jo saSuls w Jampujnuum am icq patnelqo aq Hugs witaiddu uan9An silopadsui
`Joloadsui icq uonuogglao puu uogoadsw pug uoggwv tri •icuu j! `sw!Jawm paJapJo-qns
Joj osiu pug /Ciampi) apjaq pue uoguo!Jquj 2tninp moq papuuo aq Hugs uonoadsui i'S
•siopu.nuoo-qns SiOpeil.u00 Jo sdogs llom ol ssaoau aag °Aug Hugs siopadsui VS
•Jopadsu! paspotpnv Jasugoind uogoadsu! Joj pang° aq Hugs siassan VS
OISILLS31 moupaastsa ws
- aolpuid 5utJaauigua
poo2 lad su suo!suaunp wennutu Hugs Jowo!iguj `saouuJaiw gpm pappkold Jou suo!suawm Jod Z.6.17
•apoo/parepums/Bwmwp Jaci su aq Hugs saouwapi 1'6'17
saaumoiol, 617
luaunuan wag ppm wod 2wInp uogup!xo lanau papamid Xiqunns aq Hugs saouj aSuug Hy E-817
Sl Jo 01. e6ed (6.1e4aPun .1.110
SlaSS3A 3211199321d y) aughtùaAsuaidakei
9 *A821 1000-Z1.-9 NOA VIGNI 1121V
NOILVOIJ103dS CINVCINVIS NOI1VOld103dS 1V213Na0 S2113NION3 Pr?MoP
Page 1596 of 1823
pe/U9S8.1 SILI6P Hy — 113 ill6pAd00 0 'Ao2:1 IA-1000-00-8 'ON leueod
•I c ma wud apop lad su aq pugs upaluo aouuldaooy (A
Ln uuojiod paicoidap aq pugs suoslad Dam paggunO (J:
•uan!2 aq pugs walsics Inv .natp
puu sawed ag43o iunaiddu ago go!qm uo pasug •anpu4uasaida4 jo TISIA alts aw 2uunp
uaalos aims alp u! uopuniuna goajap ago puu aupputu Inv jo killutuduo aw. Agrussaoons
aimusuowap pugs 404ddng agZ •MO!Aal -Ha Joj asn o4 .toad plooai rug alp tp!m
2uoru pappuqns aq pugs Xqdw2o!pw jo nag ut paicoidap aq o4 pasodaid s! Imp tualsics agZ (a
•iquo aoupns auo wag 244utruos
apqm ap!sul su gam su ap!sino uo sloajap 2upoalap jo alguduo aq wogs drips •aoupns
ap!sut pug ap!sino UO S)IOEI3 0SJ3ASUEll. SE gam su Tutun42uoi aluintws satplou aigmws
anug pugs Noolq uourIggeD -pasn aq pugs ssauloppituummu .4upuus jo Nooiq uopulgllup (I)
jo nag u! panp!suoo 0g icutu UO3.10S apws r uo Xisnoauminuus susai wog Owicuids!p pue
papadsut aq o4 snip!' alp 2uoiu sasianup Xpuoputuolnu 4144 s!ssugo atuus alp uo palunoui
/Cully pasugd puu ado' sagoid oqoa asind puu ado' 2upwothoout in mummy (a
.(apoD icg paugap su nnofjo kw2aw3) •w!o[pua
pagsm tuopagds!waqw gags ldaoxa ni!of g iGio2a4u3 to d kw2a103 40q4a Si nip!. ata (q
•unu EI uutp JairaiS st piam jo ssau)Ioup ata (g
:244mopo3 loalqns sigualutu lams Xopy puu lams uog.tuD Ioj aiguldaoou st awes
alp '( 7) (u) 1g mn used apop uo pasug pj jo nag 4.4 uuopad wum iallddns asuo uI 8.17'S
•sluoulaw-tbal apop ago 5upaaw
samnn aiguidaom aonpaid Xill!qudeo mopu0A maid 01 Id iapun Ono pal.uuo aq pings
map ualp 'anburtioal Agdeao!pull pawdwoD Aq Agd1u2o!pui ono £UEO 04 spuawt lopuan jI
woo alp jo walualwbal ago laaw pugs pananiougmenb ppm alp pug paXoLdwa anburgoal 041
..L1-1Md pauuopad aq Hugs uopuu!tuuxa
owosuppi 'iganputualte JO XtiduBo!pui puop!ppe uu allmd °RIJN pauuopad 3I •(.mmd)
luauguau wag piamisod .Toga .to awjag pauuopad aq /tutu spiam jo Xgdw2o!pai palpoods aqi
•icur
jt luauguan wag pug 2u!uuoj law pagdw2o!pw %00I aq pugs spua patwoj jo suruas piam
•2144g o4 aduI puu ad!d
ad!d Vau aizzou o4 02trug aizzou 2u!pniout spiam ung Iiu jo Ono pal.uuo aq jugs Xgdw2o!pul
%00I Itiatualwbal ao!mas o4 anp pag!oads s! AtideBo!pw iind uaqm •pagduhlo!pw
%00I aq pugs 'aluid jo ssauppp Jo an!padsau! 'aiuid wag paluouguj saizzou
•paqdw2o!pw
aq o4 SEOJE ago 2upputu ut paqnsuoo aq pugs via •poup.trexa aq pugs Iomado 2u!piamipapiam
àmpaoald 4.41:40m goua wag sppm •paloaias aq osiu pugs mum ruguanjtunago gm°
ut mu+1auo lsual 4u Apuuop!ppy limas imnpnOuoi 2g lugualajuma4o qua 14 paloalas aq
Hugs pods auo lununt4w puu 4124.40! u! (ww05 1) sagow 20s jo umuqww u aq Hugs gdw2o!pw
wds pug quatuaunbal wnw!unu u su ZS-ma gdw2uxed IIIA-u9P3S MISV
tp!m aouup.woou ut paqdw2o!pw pods aq pugs ppm 244u!u4uoo amssaid g JO V ic10201E0 gong
I aotstnIu IIIA uo PaS MANY ut pag!oads sluatuagnbal
age wawaiddns pugs swawaigibal 2wmopoj 044 'pag!oads s! Xgdw2o!pul wds uagm Z.17.
9 40 l l abed (NPRIPPurl opus P 1.09 y) (1.1213Elaa.mak21,21.1
S13SS3A 3111ISS32Id
9 'AGN 1.000-Z1,-9 110A cauvvn VIGNI 11?3P
•oN NOILV31A193cIS aavaNvis NOLLVOIJI03dS 1)1213N30 S2133NION3 ICIP
Pr?a,
Page 1597 of 1823
pamesai sly6P — 113 Iti6pAdo0 0 •nad L3 - 6000-00-8 'ON leuno
1114m
midwoo aq ow Hugs sluawannbal 2wmoHo3 agl `suog!puon asugnind iwauaD of uon!ppu uI
2uppelk V9
.2ugu!ud rung puu uogoaia °Agog a2mols
pue 1!suan 2winp 32.m-up JO uoiso.uoo luanaid of palmed aq Hugs spoddns iw2alu!
puu sp«is 2u!pnioui suumioo puu siassan Jo saoujms io!Japca Iiu `saoupns pauniouvu J03 ldaoxg 17'1'9
- 2unuon anguanad
Isni glom paloalaid JO pasuai2 aq Hugs saoupns pawqouw Jaw puv saouj pa2uug Hy £'r'9
- num u2!alo3 pue .[alum
`puus 1.qp 'alum aA01110.1 of Alluwaixa puu All-maw! pauuaio aq Hugs luawd!nba palaidwoo Hy Z'1'9
.2u!muip 2upaaw2ua uo pag!oads sluauwannua
atp iad su papaias aq Hugs lualsXs lured -alquo!iddu su uogeolyoads gof 'ad su JO (170001717-9)
2uguled Nag pure dogs ioj uoguog!oads piupums iad sv aq Hugs 2uguired puu 2uweap aoujins 1.1.9
3upiqud pug 2tquirao aaqins 1'9
ArlddflS 0'9
•1000-18-9 lad su luawd!nba jo goludsm wojaq Jaziquuu u palsal loop icuvug puu
pagguap! Xpadoid aiv lupalutu pals ssannuls puu pals 'cop He Imp mato 111E14S Jopu3A 8'S
- spagsulup
ui as!mialgo pagIoads ssalun smog st act Hugs aura 2wpioll -sloaqsnup u! as!miaglo
pagloads ssalun (-tqw) .ig/Do00t xi Hugs 2ull000 jo alvg lunoidde Joj 1coua2v uogoadsui
of pau!wqns aq Hugs ampaoald alp pug suoggwon u2!sap fume atp jo anguluasaidal
aq Hugs uoippuoo Isal auZ ino ppm aq Hugs 'sal. 2u!puogsm ua2o1p/CH 'DoggE
uutn annwadwal u2!sap tp!m ao!nias szll JO ua2oip1cq ui pasn siCupano ppm iiu JOA
•spoddns ampus Amodwal agl lu repalutu °quo w2uans pia!X 0114
30 % 06 2wpaaoxa wog Hags sassags [coo' p!onu of ualul aq Hugs AM Isalovicq 2u!ina V9* C
- pasn aq Tau Hugs 'alum vas isawipicti Joj pasn aq Hugs Jalum alqulod Imo E.9.c
%nu Lip 2wmoiq Xq papp 1(10110.1°w.
aq Hugs iassan '2ugsal ogulsolpicq logy luauguau luaq ppm Tsod !we uogeo!iquj aialdwoo
nue s2u!mwp 2upaaw2ua ui pauoguatu samssaid lu papnpuo0 aq Hugs 4504 ogulsoipicll Z.9'S
*I3SS3A wag
panowai aq Hugs -op pip àluos twus ppm `Jaguds pram He ogulsoipeCti 01 io!id -apop
lad su aq Hugs wwpaw 2ugsal jo angwadwal aqZ -ails IE puu dogs alp u! Isal ogelsoipXq
2winp anuoug aplpq jo lswau p.run2 of umful aq Hugs suognunaid klussanau Hy '9.
pal 39e)soapiCH 9'S
•uoguwurexa luugauad
-aki plowed opau2uw /Cc' pawurexa aq Hugs (umi teu!A puu loox) spiam Hags of aizzou Hy S'S
56;o Zl a6ed
Sl3SS3A 32111SS32ld Mum...Pun .P.I W .00 v) aeflfe.la<2eo26. idale)
9 'AM 1000-21-9 NOA C13111A111 VICINI 117 21P
•coN NOIIVOIdIO3dS aavaNvis NOLLVOIA103dS 1V2I3N30 SNTiNDN3 preJL
IDP
Page 1598 of 1823
pamasai sly6P Ily - 113 41460:100 0 •na1:1 1A-1.000-00-9 "ON ieW.10j
%tam as-n[0nd
am jo stunt. Jug/kola' atp Tim aottepnoag ut auop aq pegs Juatudmba jo satpwdsap [iv
luatudms z•E•9
•panalatcl aq osp pugs pappm aq of uogoas Joj saleid Jo sop •pua papoddns-uou
gaga lg snuajps ktunduial panaloid aq pugs suopoas pawo!nuj-aid (0
1!sua1 pug 2m[pugq
Supnp alum lstugag panalaid XpupacIsa aq pugs guauoduno pamqoptu Jo aguid (p
•sStild pap-gaup angq pugs sami!Jo pacIdgi •tpludsap anjaq as-03A pug tp!m
pa Enid aq pegs salmi °WI, LIN IIV -aizzou of pain sagq opsncl kt-eaq Imm pannoo
XpEuomppg aq pugs sSumado paSugu luatud!qs ugaoo .rod -(alqulda00-e Jou s! S.13A00
uo ST.U.UA) 'snoq Inoj isgapg tt[sn (Itl tutu g umtumuu) slanoo [maw uo sqoq qqm
pap!noid aq pugs sa2un3 •panalold Aiqultns aq pegs suo!stunidisuopoauuoo [iv (0
alts qocw uop!sod ut paogicl s! matud!nba agl [gun paAOLLIal aq
Jou pegs spoddns asaqi .5m[pugq pug uoggpodsugil 2u[unp uoputuJojap iCue JuanaJd
of spoddns jo nqumu awnbapg pug acIki alcrelms tp!m pap!nald aq pegs Juatuclutba (q
luawd!nba atp jo tp2ual alp uo puadap [lugs
2upgds saippes -tutugt Jo aougnap puop!ppg uu mid '911011.14mm panauuo0 agl
jo tp2ual panaion tunuuxuut atp of puodsalloo pegs alppes atp Jo 1142-!aq wnw!mul
aua •spoi uo!sual pug sap paw pm saippes pawittapoom alq-nins tp!m pap!noicl
aq pugs ùogoanid auma ioj sawpgs paw umo .nags tp!m pap!nold ssalun `slassaA
2upped I•£'9
:tp!m
palldutoo aq osig pegs Juatuaunbai 2u!mopo3 atp `suompuop asulpind renuaD of uomppg ul
4
luauulms pue 2upped £'9
•Xiquiassg
u! Iona Xue luonaid cf pavetu tplutu pug partypuap! Alit-1pm aq pugs sot
pug smauodwoo iie uoggpodsug4 Joj spud Juanipp olut pun alp Nuncios of ktussaoau s! It 3I 9.Z.9
•tulud alcplaput
qqm pauddu „sulaumooa„ 1.10!s mong 5mAjpuap! ug tpim uopoauuoo gags g ap!sut pattaw-gj
adoianua 1.429 Jawm u ut pasopua innww aql Augdw000r pugs Jsll uplo-gd Jo Xdo0 v CZ*9
'0A0440 pug sauum
g Suuppm sull iagaq pe to3 pap!nold aq pugs S'u!u!is Joj JmucI al!qm tp!m 5upp-etu ogpads vz.9
1OSSOA
jo ap!smo atp uo uopiod apq!s!A alp uo paue!Jd 2mm-um alcfnuts u angq pegs "on Jaqqn1
`ss-e15 `peal -5.3 paqcIdg ug 3/Veg Jo pawau Teal ppm sod 1.100q ONOLf tp!qm slassaA C.Z.9
ituud altgM tplm pa/MUI itinap
aq pugs jo aqua° tplm 2uote JsaAvtpnosAsuTtploN se tions suo!wo!pu! iguop!ppv Z.Z.9
•op suo!suattup Itpam lag pug ssoJ2 'Jammu
Japlo `Jaciumu tual! `Jaqwnu go!. `Jaail!suo0 àau0!suoo `nacold all Joj aq pugs
pug sawn ut pap-ed aq pugs •on snIs-g2 `sJatisum 'gnu `sprus se inns swauodwoo asool [iv
S1.10 efied (f.i..Pun 009 0)
S13SS3A 32111SS321d
9 vtam 1000-Z1-9 210A 43111A111 VIGNI 27
,40 Ire3P
•°N NOLLV31J103dS alivaNvis NOI1VOl1lO3dS 1Vel3N30 S1133NrJN3 PrWEP
Page 1599 of 1823
pamasei sly6p IIV - 113 pApAcloo 0 ./19 :i Id- WOO-We ON leW.10d
.1g2!am
uolioala prig sy, puu suo!suaullp Jima sy, 2upsnogs iassan jo 2u!Anuip uopuougud (q
aluog!pap apop mainloejnuew
poradsui Xq pappiao Xplp uopeuuoju! 2u!mopoj age uwwoo pugs Jam,' sIgi
•Jap asugoind u! paigibaJ su Jam,' um) jo sa!doo alls!nbai alaiduloo pugs Januoujnuew
IIMV103 viva 0'6
•pagloads asthuaglo ssapin
umuuu!ul joTouj iouduli uu gi!nn pau5Isap aq pugs s2ni 2upwl puu suo!uniliani 2uppi tiv
•alIs ino pauno aq Xeul IHMd woo' io alaidtuoo 'IHMd 2uu!nballuauld!nba Joj
.dogs sanuai uo!loas jo pud age aJojaq
lowouquj alp Xq aputu xi pugs dogs agl u! palaiduloo spiam ioj sluaulai!nbai oulduAo!pui
luatudulba atop 2uppueg ag dni.g J3doJc1 amsua
Jowouquj alp Xq pap!nald aq pugs suid 2upuool puu an' 2u!lluv ant uopoala ay:plus Z.E.8
ualjualaip gowul saoa!d puu Jowouquj
alp Xq au° luaou[pu aip uopoas goua puu suopoas out do 1g dogs aq pugs saoa!d iid FE.8
:Xidde pegs sluaulagnbai puop!ppu 5u!mopo3 'sage° (mg anoqu aquo anima ui £'8
•suopuotpoadspapio asugaind aFreopdde °quo suo!s!naid uppit
aougu000u touts ut uop!sod wo!pan ut azis w Joreouquj iassan Xq palaiduloo aq pugs 2upsai.
puu Xiquiasse ùouoaq •uop!s!nbaJ ut paugap su suopoas pop ouquj dogs jo Jacpunu digs
pugs Jowouquj agl '0300 aplus ut loam atcpssodul! 1.! salmi iassan jo adegs JO az!s =gm V8
•uppeop!oadspapio alquo!idde Jo suo!s!noid alp tp!At aougpi000v
lopls ut (siagio Xq uopoaia ioj) uou!sod muozuog ut alts w .Iowouquj iassan Xq palaiduloo aq
Bugs 2upsal puu Xppuassy •uoms!nbai ut paugap su suopoas pareouquj dogs jo iacpunu digs
pugs Jowouquj àoalcl auo u! 2.! digs apussodult salmi iassan jo adugs az!s =gm V8
NOLL3a113 NOLLVDRISIVI 1iIS W8
•uogeop!oads sup jo suo!spkoid Hu Trio 2u!kupo .ioj Xilpq!suodsai Xuu jo Januoujnuuul alp
anapai JO Onapi Xum ou uI pugs luauld!gs .ioj siassan jo amp.' JO '-lid iCq 3IJOM JO lEA0Jddy £'L
Bons jo a011UULIOjiad AJolagsges amsua iCilllcilsuodsal su4 Jo ugg map.'
lou !pm u.2!sap su.1 jo tenoidde •ului Xq ono pauno 3pom u2!sap Xuu ajcpsuodsai
Xplaidwoo aq pugs Jaupoujnumu agi •asnuio aamenn2 NT wag papnioxa aq pugs u2!sap
piOM alp ‘iia lno Num uaaq smg uil!sap uagm •suop!puop asEgoind tuJauaD uI paugap
su uopump u ioj d!gsueuppom puu SIE!JOWILI MEJ ù2!sap ioj paamenn2 aq pugs (s)iassan L
•aouunaddu puu uuoj
`Xillunb 2upue2ai loajap Xuu wag aag a.lu puu ampaoaid aouuldaoou arein2ai papuuqns
wag mug pm Mau a.IE luawd!nba ut pasn stuumul pc imp °mama pugs JampojnuciAl FL
: Unita pugs
2u!Atopo3 ago àaluunn2 2uppaat suo!ppuoo asugaind plaua9 u! 'woods as!Auaglo ssaiun
aaINIVIIVf19 WL
;140 41 abed S13SSBA 321fISS32Id (150muarsun 01001 JO S00 01 (1.1.C1021t02.21.124!)
9 'Ae21 1000-ZI-9 d01 C1311W11 VICIN1,1421
11,"th27 JP3
'ON NOL1V313133cIS aavaNvis NOLLVOIJI03dS 1V2I3N30 S1133NI9N3 pr?K__,
10P
Page 1600 of 1823
paivasai ii36pAcloo 0 •Aei 13-1000-00-9 'ON ieuuoj
• $
•Japio osegamdiuoms!nboi asugoind ui pai!nbai su uoguluatunoop .lotpo icuy
ainld auuuu jo 2u!qqnx
(oputunoud Joipuu ogelscupicH) Aso amssaid Jo yrego !wool'
(olquolldclu j!) tiolou A /Wimp
(alquollckte j!) uodnoo uo!lonpaid
(olquoliddu j!) apico luotaTeau appluoo 2u!mogs sump !wool'
(alquolldde j!) spiooai Aso Ami pun uoiso.uoo `ssoupigH
(alquogdclu j!) sunsal Aso lue.uouad-ok! àlopiud ò!uosuilin
ouldu.ao!pux
spodal uopuogifenb ..!apiom
spodal uoguotptunb ampooad 2u!plom
slaqumu pun wag/ lsuo twAt saluog9133 Asa j luporew
9140 91. e6ed
Sl3SS3A 32lf1SS321c1 tE...*UaPurl Mul W $0 VI aesabria22=A2
9 •AG1:1 1.000-Z1.-9 IOd annAin viam 92MB 1,?3P
•oN NOI1VOIA133dS ativaNvis NOLLVOIA133cIS 1V1:13N30 993NON3 PI7BLIP
Page 1601 of 1823
SUPPLEMENTARY STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS
ei SPECIFICATION FOR
sigem faReg INDIA LIMITED 6-12-0002 Rev. 8
t41,215 Venn ...3-Rassil IA Govt of India Undertaking) CARBON STEEL VESSELS Page 1 of 7
(-dlo th7R4
Tff fq-1--#7-r
SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIFICATION
FOR
CARBON STEEL VESSELS
+.0t- •
REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STD.
8 26.06.2018 SK KJH f RKT
SPEC.
7 30.06.2010 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. KA RKT AKM/DM N.DUARI
6 25.09.09 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. VB RKG AKM N.DUARI
5 12.04.04 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. DNN AKM SSA SKG
4 18.09.00 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RKT AKM CRMN MI

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 1602 of 1823

150-4:le? ENGINEERS SUPPLEMENTARY STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ititeg INDIA LIMITED SPECIFICATION FOR 6-12-0002 Rev. 8
(WM melee arratakrart (A Govt o India Undertaking)
CARBON STEEL VESSELS Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
LWN Long Weld Neck
NB Nominal Bore
PWHT Post Weld Heat Treatment
Static Equipment Standards Committee
Convenor: Mr. K.J Hari Narayanan

Members: Mr.Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr.K.Anjaneyulu
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. hider Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Srikanth Karanam
Mr. M.Azim (Projects)
Mr. S. Ghosal (Process)
Mr. T.Kamalakannan (Inspection)
Page 1603 of 1823

n t
Og acs
da e N
ENGIEERS
INDIA LIMITED
SUPPLEMENTARY
SPECIFICATION FOR
6-12-0002 Rev. 8
I 411E7T 212,58 4AJR1.1) to Govt of India Undertaking)
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 DESIGN 4
3.0 ELECTRODES 4
4.0 FABRICATION 5
Page 1604 of 1823

1 ENGINEERS SUPPLEMENTARY STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Ogen laffleg INDIA LIMITED SPECIFICATION FOR 6-12-0002 Rev. 8
1.11171 eIRIAE MAMA) (A Goo. of India Undertaking)
1.0 SCOPE
This supplementary specification indicating additional requirements for fusion welded

carbon steel vessels shall form addenda to General Specification for Pressure Vessels
(6-12-0001) in its latest revision.
2.0 DESIGN
Reinforcement for nozzle openings of size 80 NB (3") and above shall be self
reinforced forged nozzle for equipments where nominal thickness of shell/head
exceeds 50 mm.
For nozzles of size up to 50 NB LWN can be used in place of self reinforced nozzles.
3.0 ELECTRODES
3.1 Electrodes conforming to following specification shall be used. In case of any

deviation, prior approval from EIL shall be obtained.
S.No. Material to be welded Electrode Specification
1. General Structure Welding ASME IIC SFA 5.1 E-6013
2. Pressure Parts
a. Steels with UTS ASME IIC SFA 5.1 E7016/

upto 70,000 psi E7018
b. Steels with UTS ASME IIC SFA 5.5 E8016-X/

upto 80,000 psi E8018-XX depending upon the alloy
element.
c. Low temperature service
Below 0°C and upto ASME IIC SFA 5.1 E 7016-1/

(-) 46°C Steels to E7018-1
SA-516 / 516M, SA-537 / 537M,
SA-333 / 333M Gr. 6 and
SA-350 / 350M LF2
3.2 All electrodes and fluxes shall be properly baked/dried as per manufacturer's
recommendation before use.
3.2.1 All bare electrodes and fluxes shall be selected as per ASME IIC weld metal shall
have equal or better mechanical properties than the parent metal.
3.2.2 Only dry flux shall be used.
Page 1605 of 1823

INIRae? ENGINEERS
tiikegw INDIA LIMITED SPECIFICATION FOR 6-12-0002 Rev. 8
Imferf 2.kmareosi3,10%1) (A Govt of India Unde!taking)
4.0 FABRICATION
4.1 Plate Forming
4.1.1 Forming of shell plates and heads shall be carried out by machine, either hot or cold,
in such a way so as to preserve the specified material properties and to produce a
regular finish.
4.1.2 Magnetic particle/Dye penetrant examination shall be carried out on the outside and
inside surfaces including edges of torispherical or elliptical heads in knuckle zone,
after forming, for detection of cracks.
4.2 Edge Preparation
4.2.1 The preparation of edges to be welded shall be done by machining, chipping,

grinding, cold shearing, Oxy- acetylene flame cutting or a combination of these.
4.2.2 Chipping shall be followed by grinding to a smooth and regular finish.
4.2.3 Oxy-acetylene flame cutting done in any circumstances, shall be followed by

machining or grinding to eliminate any discolouration of material affected.
4.2.4 All welding edges shall be checked by Magnetic particle/Dye penetrant examination
for detection of cracks, laminations or segregations.
4.2.5 No welding shall be carried out when ambient temperature is less than 10° Celsius
unless preheating is carried out.
43 Heat Treatment
4.3.1 Heat treatment of formed parts shall be carried out as per following:
a. Cold formed dished ends or knuckles shall be stress relieved, unless otherwise
specified in requisition.
b. Hot formed dished ends or similar parts, which have not been uniformly
heated in the normalising range in the final stages of manufacture shall be
normalised.
c. When the completed vessel involves post weld heat treatment, heat treatment
recommended in (a) above shall not be applicable.
4.3.2 Vessels in Hydrogen/Amine/ Sour (H2 S)/Cyclic service shall be PWHT.
Page 1606 of 1823

‘s-dt-aeirei. ENGINEERS
Ogeji leltifeg INDIA LIMITED SPECIFICATION FOR 6-12-0002 Rev. 8
(A Gout. of India Undertaiong)
4.4 Production Weld Tests
Production Weld Tests shall be applicable for vessels over 50 mm nominal thickness.
The following requirements shall apply:
a. Two production test plate coupons representative of one longitudinal and

another circumferential seam shall be provided for each procedure, position
and thickness in each vessel shell.
b. One production test plate representative of the weld seams shall be provided
for each procedure, position and thickness for welded dished ends/cones.
c. The production test plate shall be from material of the same heat and
thickness as of shell/head. During and after welding, the test plates shall be
subjected to same heat treatment as and together with the course they
represent. Extra coupons shall be preserved to take care of eventuality of
retests.
d. The tests mentioned below shall be carried out as per methods of testing in
governing codes:
i. One transverse tension test
ii. Two side bend tests with weld located in the centre of bend.
iii. Hardness test on production test coupon weld & HAZ (The hardness
value shall not exceed 200 BHN)
iv. Micro & macro examination of welds
v. Charpy V notch tests on weld and HAZ.
a. For low temperature service (0°C & colder) impact test

temperature shall be lowest of minimum ambient
temperature, design temperature and minimum design metal
temperature.
b. For vessel over 50 mm nominal thickness used for warmer

service, the test temperature shall be lower of 0°C or lowest
ambient temperature of the site.
c. The acceptance criteria for energy absorption shall be as per

Table A 2.15 of SA-20 / 20M. Incase the acceptance criteria
is not available in SA-20, then applicable design code shall be
referred unless otherwise specified in requisition.
Page 1607 of 1823

(31
-1fRe_iel ENGINEERS
*Igen feffiteg INDIA LIMITED SPECIFICATION FOR 6-12-0002 Rev. 8
IA 6004 of India Undenalong)
4.5 Hardness Survey
For vessels required to meet stress corrosive conditions (such as Hydrogen/Caustic/

Sour (H2S)/Amine), one Brinell hardness reading shall be taken on the inside of each
shell section, head, longitudinal weld, circumferential weld and nozzle longitudinal
weld after final post weld heat treatment. The value shall be limited to the specified
value as per requisition.
Page 1608 of 1823

‘31 el ENGINEERS BOILER QUALITY CARBON
$tazir 251e-6 INDIA LIMITED 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
AMIAPOP3,19.1 , IA Govt of locha Undsrtal.og)
STEEL PLATES Page 1 of 7
GIN(YR craiiciz1 74e1

I vi fq-W

BOILER QUALITY CARBON
STEEL PLATES
7
19.01.2017
30.06.2010
REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC.
REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC.

RK
KA
SK/KJH
RKT
1W1A,
AKM/DM
RN
N.DUARI
6 10.09.09 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. VB RKG AKM N.DUARI
5 16.04.04 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. DNN AKM SSA SKG
4 26.11.99 REVISED & REISSUED AS STD. SPEC. RKT AKM CRMN A SONI
Standards Standards
Prepared Checked
No by by
Approved by
Format No. 8 00 0001 F1 Rev. 0

- - - Copyright Ell — All rights reserved
Page 1609 of 1823

711 elei
- ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
51g- 1 faf5leu INDIA LIMITED BOILER QUALITY CARBON 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
I wen cArame an X21(.4) (A Govt of India Undertaking) STEEL PLATES
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:

EN European Norm
SSC Sulphide Stress Cracking
Convenor: Mr. K.J. Hari Narayanan

Members: Mr. P.Bhattacharjee
Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr. PP.Pandey
Mr. Nalin Kumar
Mr. K. Anjaneyulu
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. Inder Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anish Trehan
Mr. T. Kamalakannan (Inspection)
Page 1610 of 1823

ENGINEERS
511gar m Eiardu INDIA LIMITED BOILER QUALITY CARBON 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
Mln ciltaxed31J031.1/ G01.4 01 India Uncle'taking)
STEEL PLATES
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 GENERAL 4
3.0 SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 4
4.0 CERTIFIED DOCUMENTS 6
5.0 PAINTING AND COATING 7
6.0 INSPECTION AUTHORITY 7
Page 1611 of 1823

ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
51gzir agjeg INDIA LIMITED BOILER QUALITY CARBON 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
10117710,0me 0113900:0 (A Goof. 01 India UndeItaking)
STEEL PLATES
Page 4 of 7
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers requirements for carbon steel plates intended primarily for pressure
vessels/heat exchangers. The steel plates shall meet the requirements of ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code Section II (latest). This is intended to supplement the minimum
applicable requirements of the material specification indicated in the material requisition.
1.2 Following codes, standards etc shall be followed in their latest edition and addenda, errata,
amendments unless specified otherwise:
1.2.1 ASME Sec VIII Div 1
1.2.2 ASME Sec II part A
1.2.3 EN 10163: Delivery Requirements for Surface Conditions.
1.2.4 EN 10204: metallic products — Types of Inspection Documents.
2.0 GENERAL
2.1 Plates supplied to this specification shall conform to specification SA-20 of ASME sec II part
A with additional requirements mentioned herein.
2.2 The tolerance on thickness of steel plates shall be positive only.
2.3 Final Rolling shall be lengthwise.
2.4 The plates shall be free from injurious defects and shall have workmanlike finish.
Reconditioning/repair of plates by welding shall not be permitted. Surface conditions shall
meet requirements of EN 10163 Class A Subclass 3.
3.0 SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 All plates shall be supplied in normalised condition except when the applicable material
specifications require supply of plates in quenched and tempered condition.
3.2 a. One product analysis of each heat shall be carried out and reported. Chemical
analysis shall be as per applicable specification.
b. The carbon content for plates shall not exceed 0.23%.
Additionally, one of the following requirements for carbon equivalent based on heat
analysis, shall be also satisfied:
Ceq = C + Mn < 0.42 (Eqn. - 1)

6
Ceq = C + Mn + Cr+Mo+V + Cu+Ni < 0.43 (Eqn. - 2)

6 5 15
Equation-1 shall be used when applicable material specification specifies C and Mn

only.
Equation-2 shall be used when applicable material specifies the above elements or
restricted chemical requirements are specified or supplementary requirements S 19 and
S21 of SA-20 are specified in material requisition.
Page 1612 of 1823

k31 ENGINEERS
Igar Elf5ieg INDIA LIMITED BOILER QUALITY CARBON 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
lairen rIrAme an JqiNA) (A Govt al India Undeltaking)
STEEL PLATES
Page 5 of 7
For HIC services, these requirements shall be as listed separately.
3.3 Ultrasonic Examination of Plates
a. Plates having thickness 16 mm to 50 mm (both inclusive) shall be examined

ultrasonically as per SA-435.
b. For thicknesses above 50mm ultrasonic examination shall be carried out as per SA-
578 and shall have acceptance standard of level-B.
c. For quenched and tempered steel plates, ultrasonic examination shall be done after the
heat treatment of plates.
3.4 Simulated Heat Treatment of Test Coupons
The following heat treatment shall be conducted on the test coupons representative of heat
treated plates before the specified mechanical testing like tensile, bend, impact tests, etc. to
meet minimum ASME Sec. II Part - A requirements and these details shall also be recorded on
the test certificates.
a. All plates supplied in Normalised condition and intended for hot rolling / hot
forming:
Heat Treatment Cycle
One normalising* + One stress relieving as per UCS-56 of ASME Sec. VIII Div.1
complying with UCS-85 of ASME Section VIII Div. 1.
Note: Any other special requirement shall be specified in MR.
b. All plates supplied in Quenched & Tempered condition and intended for hot rolling/
hot forming:
One normalising* + quenched & tempering + One stress relieving as per UCS-56
ASME Section VIII Div.1 complying with UCS-85 of ASME Section VIII Div.1 .
Note : Tempering temperature shall be at least 20° C above highest stress relieving
temperature.
* Recommended normalising cycle :

i) Soaking temperature: 900°C to 1000°C
ii) Holding time one hour per 25 mm thickness but not less than half an hour
iii) Cooling in still air
c. All plates supplied in Quenched & Tempered condition and intended for cold
forming:
One stress relieving as per UCS-56 ASME Section VIII Div.1 complying with UCS-
85 of ASME Section VIII Div.1 .
Page 1613 of 1823

tri-draelei ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
$fgar faoleg INDIA LIMITED BOILER QUALITY CARBON 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
laarn riecnir ansgar,a) (A Govt Ind.. Undertaking)
STEEL PLATES
Page 6 of 7
3.5 Impact test requirements shall be ascertained as per ASME Sec VIII Div.1 or Div.2 as
applicable. When required, Impact testing shall be performed as per supplementary
requirement of S5 of specification SA-20 and acceptance criteria for energy absorption shall
be as per table A2.15 of SA-20.
3.6 If specified in the material requisition, plates shall meet the requirements of Indian Boiler
Regulations (IBR).
3.7 Additional Requirements for High Thickness Plates
Plates above 50mm thickness shall meet following additional requirements:
a. Vacuum Degassing treatment as per the supplementary requirement Si of

specification SA-20. If vacuum degassing is not reported in the test certificates, then
through thickness tests as per SA 770 shall be conducted and minimum reduction in
area of 35% shall be ensured.
b. Charpy V-notch impact test as per the supplementary requirement S5 of specification

SA-20.
Material meant to be used for design temperature warmer than 0°C, impact test shall
be carried out at 0°C or MDMT whichever is lower and acceptance criteria for energy
absorption shall be as per Table A2.15 of SA-20. Incase the acceptance criteria is not
available in SA-20, then applicable design code shall be referred unless otherwise
specified in material requisition.
c) Simulated heat treatment of test coupons for all plates as per Clause 3.4 mentioned
above.
4.0 CERTIFIED DOCUMENTS
The supplier shall furnish certificates/documents (number of copies as specified in requisition)

inclusive of all the following tests required as per specification duly certified by the Inspecting
Authority before shipment of plates. The actual values obtained shall be recorded in the test
certificates/documents. Material certificates shall conform to EN 10204 Type 3.1/3.2 as
required.
a. Chemical Analysis
b. Mechanical Tests
c. Data of heat treatment i.e. initial temperature, heating rate, soaking temperature,
cooling rate, etc.
d. Simulated Heat Treatment of Mechanical Test coupons (S3 of SA-20) at indicated

Heat Treatment Cycle (if specified in the requisition or whenever applicable)
e. Ultrasonic Examination (S8 or S12 of SA-20)
f. Charpy V-notch impact tests (S5 of SA-20 if specified in the requisition or whenever
applicable)
g. Certification as per IBR (if specified in the requisition)
h. SSC and/or HIC tests (if specified in material requisition)
Page 1614 of 1823

•
ENGINEERS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
5fgar &Reg INDIA LIMITED BOILER QUALITY CARBON 6-12-0011 Rev. 8
NEW efeont onoTiM A Govt of India Uncle, talong) STEEL PLATES Page 7 of 7
Additional tests (if specified in requisition).
5.0 PAINTING AND COATING
No painting/coating of any kind is permitted on the steel plates, except stencil marking.
However steel plates shall be carefully protected and packed against any damage during transit
and shall be of sea worthy condition.
6.0 INSPECTION AUTHORITY
Material test certificates, duly certified by Mill's Quality Assurance Department are acceptable
i.e. 3.1 certification as per EN 10204. However, if third party inspection is required
specifically for plates in material requisition, all test certificates and documents shall be duly
certified by the third party. i.e. 3.2 certification as per EN 10204.
Page 1615 of 1823

GENERAL SPECFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
ENGINEERS FOR
INDIA LIMITED 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
5zgafelf5r
i G, (A Gout of India Undertaking) HEAT EXCHANGERS Page 1 of 21
ReR
1-49fti
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
HEAT EXCHANGERS
Ow1/4/
5 19-09-2018 REVISED & REISSUED AS SPECIFICATION SK KJH RKT
4 11-08-2010 REVISED & REISSUED AS SPECIFICATION KA RKT AKM DM ND
3 12-01-2006 REVISED & REISSUED AS SPECIFICATION KA PK AKM VJN
2 10-12-1999 REVISED & REISSUED AS SPECIFICATION HN PK RKA AS
1 15-03-1996 REVISED & RE ISSUED AS SPECIFICATION RV SSA RKA AS

Standards Standards
Rev. Prepar Committee Bureau
Checke
No ed by d by
Approved by
Page 1616 of 1823

elei
ENGINEERS
ogen laPteg IND
IA UMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
(/‘ coot of India Undertaking)
HEAT EXCHANGERS Page 2 of 21
Abbreviations:
ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
BTD Bolt Tensioning Device
BV Bureau Veritas
CIB Chief Inspector of Boilers
CS Carbon Steel
DIA Designated Inspection Agency
DNV Det Norske Veritas
DP Dye Penetrant
EIL Engineers India Limited
FPW Full Penetration Weld
GPC General Purchase Condition
IBR Indian Boiler Regulation
ID Inside Diameter
IGC Inter Granular Cracking
IS Indian Standards
LAS Low Alloy Steel
LTCS Low Temperature Carbon Steel
MDMT Minimum Design Metal Temperature
NB Nominal Bore
NDT Non Destructive Testing
PO Purchase Order
ppm parts per million
PTC Production Test Coupons
PWHT Post Weld Heat Treatment
QAP Quality Assurance Plan
SS Stainless Steel
TEMA Tubular Exchangers Manufacturers' Association
UT Ultrasonically Tested
Convenor : Mr. K.J Hari Narayanan

Members :
Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar
Mr.K.Anjaneyulu
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. Inder Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr Anish Trehan
Mr. Srikanth Karanam
Mr. T.Kamalakannan (Inspection)
Page 1617 of 1823

ENGINEERS
Itgar Meg
Weer elareredeagadil
INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
1/1 60.4 Or India Undertaking)
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL 4
2.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION 5
3.0 SUPPLY 9
4.0 FABRICATION 10
5.0 NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTS 15
6.0 HEAT TREATMENT 16
7.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING .17
8.0 STAMPING, NAME PLATES AND WARNING PLATES 18
9.0 PROTECTION AND DESPATCH 18
10.0 SUPPLIER'S GUARANTEES 19
Page 1618 of 1823

Odae.lege ENGINEERS
$ta lafireg W INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
21WRIV ,151.300,
A) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This specification covers the requirements for residual design, engineering, materials,
fabrication, workmanship, inspection and testing of shell and tube heat exchangers and is
intended to supplement the requirements of the applicable Codes. EIL specifications and
standards wherever indicated in the requisition shall be followed unless stated otherwise.
This specification shall not be considered limiting and it shall be Supplier's responsibility to
comply with all requirements of requisition or bid documents to which it is annexed.
1.2 References
1.2.1 CODES AND REGULATIONS
The following Codes in their edition referenced in drawings or data sheets or design basis
along with the other specifications enclosed with the requisition shall form the basis for
design, materials, fabrication, inspection, testing and acceptance of the equipment:
(a) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII Division 1 (Code), ASME
Section II Part A, B, C and D, ASME Section V, ASME Section IX.
(b) TEMA (Class as specified on the drawings or data sheets or design basis).
(c) IBR, if applicable (latest edition with amendments up to date).
(d) National and local laws or regulations, as applicable.
1.2.2 FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS UNDER THE PURVIEW OF IBR:
(a) Supplier shall carry out design calculations as per IBR and only in case of any
doubt refer the same to Owner and EIL for clarifications. All materials, fabrication,
welding, testing etc. shall meet the requirements of IBR.
(b) In case the equipment is manufactured in India, the design calculations and
fabrication drawings after preliminary review of Owner and EIL shall be got
approved by SuppF--- from CIB of the State where Supplier's shop is located, prior
to start of fabricati 'upplier shall also provide the necessary assistance to Owner
for obtaining app, 1 from CIB of State of installation, such as providing
additional copies of culations and drawings etc. as required by CIB of that State.
(c) In case the equipment is manufactured outside India, the design calculations and
fabrication drawings after preliminary review by Owner and EIL shall be got
approved by Supplier from the agency authorised by IBR in the country of
fabrication and the CIB of the State where the equipment is to be installed, before
the start of fabrication.
(d) It shall be the responsibility of Supplier to incorporate modifications or additions
required by CIB or its authorised agency and obtain the final approval. Owner and
EIL shall be kept informed about these. All costs towards approval from CIB shall
be borne by Supplier. All IBR approved design calculations and drawings shall be
furnished to EIL for final review of fabrication drawings and in equipment dossier.
1.3 Deviations
In general, no deviations from datasheets, drawings, standards, specifications and requisition
shall be permitted.
Generally no deviations shall be entertained after the Supplier has accepted the order unless
it is to comply with statutory or Code requirements. All waivers and deviations after order
shall be routed through the Regional Procurement or Inspection Office In charge in the
prescribed format. Delay in supply of the equipment because of such deviations being not
entertained or approved by Owner or EIL or any delay in processing the same by Owner or
Page 1619 of 1823

ENGINEERS
**Igen 2151ez
I NWT 212,1!?E,01JW.17
U INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
EIL shall be to Supplier's account. Any additional design work in support of such a deviation
shall be performed by the Supplier and submitted along with the deviation.
1.4 Contradictory Requirements
In case of any contradiction between the requirements of the requisition, drawings and other
documents forming part of the requisition, Supplier shall resolve the matter in consultation
with Owner or EIL. Decision of Owner or EIL shall be binding and without any implication
of cost and time, if not resolved at bidding stage.
2.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
2.1 General
2.1.1 All materials used for fabrication shall be new and of first quality. All materials and
accessories required for the fabrication, inspection, testing etc. of the heat exchanger shall
be supplied by the Supplier unless otherwise stated. Whenever some material is to be
supplied by the Owner, this shall be so indicated as Free Issue Material and the
supplementary specifications in this regard shall be complied with.
2.1.2 In addition to the requirements of materials as per material specifications, materials shall
also meet the requirements mentioned in this specification and other specifications enclosed
with the requisition. All materials shall be certified for compliance with IBR requirements
for the item(s) so specified. While procuring materials, Supplier shall stipulate additional
requirements such as limits on hardness, UTS, yield strength, chemical composition, heat
treatment and any other specific requirements to ensure that final requirement as per
specification and Code are met with.
All materials for pressure parts and parts welded to pressure parts including materials in the
scope of sub-suppliers, shall be accompanied with mill test certificates duly certified by a
reputed third party inspection agency. In the absence of mill test certificate the material shall
be got tested from a reputed third party inspection agency like CELL, Lloyds, BV, DNV etc.
and test results shall be submitted in lieu of mill test certificate. All cost towards such testing
and inspection shall be borne by the Supplier. All materials shall be inspected at Supplier
and sub-supplier's shop for verification prior to use on the job. The decision of DIA to
accept or reject materials on the basis of such testing shall be final.
2.1.3 Wherever simulated heat treatment of test specimens is required as per Code or specification,
the simulation cycle shall include one extra cycle of stress relieving for any eventuality of
repair at site by Owner during the life of the equipment.
2.1.4 MDMT shall be taken as 0°C or the design temperature specified in drawing or datasheet
whichever is lower, unless specified otherwise in design basis or datasheets or drawings. For
low temperature service (0°C and colder), unless exempted by ASME Section VIII, Div. 1,
Paragraph UG-20 (f) and Paragraph UCS-66, all materials (for pressure parts and
attachments to pressure parts) shall be impact tested at the MDMT or colder and meet
requirements of ASME, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-84.
2.1.5 PLATES
2.1.5.1 Pressure parts having thickness 16 to 50 mm (both inclusive) shall be UT as per SA-435.
2.1.5.2 Pressure parts having thickness >50 mm shall be UT as per ASME SA-578 Level B.
2.1.5.3 Reconditioning, repair of plates by welding shall not be permitted. Surface conditions shall
meet requirements of EN 10163 (Part: 2) Class A Subclass 3.
2.1.6 TUBES
2.1.6.1 All the tubes shall be seamless and cold drawn.
2.1.6.2 Product analysis of tubes shall be carried out and reported in the material test certificates.
Page 1620 of 1823

ENGINEERS
*igen tlPeg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
1.11.27f ei2OR0 ,1513,10.1) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
2.1.6.3 Tubes shall be in fully heat-treated condition as received from the mill. CS tubes shall be in
annealed condition and copper alloy tubes shall be in annealed temper condition. LAS tubes
shall be supplied in normalised and tempered condition.
2.1.6.4 All unstabilised SS tubes shall be supplied in the solution annealed condition and all
stabilised grades of SS such as SS 321 and SS 347 shall be supplied in stabilization heat
treated condition, in addition to solution annealing.
2.1.6.5 It is preferable while ordering tubes the maximum yield strength and hardness of tubes are
specified such as to be lower than those of tube sheet, in order to achieve a sound expanded
tube to tube sheet joint, complying with Code requirements.
2.1.6.6 "Air under water" testing shall be carried out for all tubes except non-ferrous tubes. As an
alternative, tubes can be hydro tested. In case the tubes are hydro tested, hydro test pressure
of tubes shall be higher of tube side test pressure or as required by Code. Water quality shall
be as per Para 7.2.1 of this specification.
2.1.6.7 For requirements of U tubes refer EIL specification 6-15-0006.
2.1.7 FORGINGS
Forgings manufactured to SA-105 and SA-266 above 75 mm thickness (thickness as defined
in para 3.2.9 of ASME Sec. VIII Division 2), all tube sheet forgings and all forgings of other
materials, except for the standard nozzle flanges up to 8" NB and small forgings (of
couplings, plugs and eye bolts) shall be 100% UT as per SA-388. Acceptance criteria shall
be as per para 3.3.4 of ASME Section VIII Division 2.
2.1.8 PIPES
Dimensions and tolerances shall be in accordance with ASME 36.10 or ASME 36.19, as
applicable, as per material specification.
2.2 Specific material requirements (Pressure parts and parts welded to pressure parts)
2.2.1 CS AND LTCS MATERIALS
(a) Carbon content shall not exceed 0.23%.
(b) All plates shall be in normalised condition.
(c) Use of SA 515 of any grade is not permitted.
(d) Plates > 50mm thickness shall meet following additional requirements of SA-20:
Vacuum treatment as per the supplementary requirement S 1 . If vacuum
degassing is not reported in the test certificates, then through thickness
tests as per SA 770 shall be conducted and minimum reduction in area of
35% shall be ensured.
(ii) Charpy V-notch test as per supplementary requirement S5 of
specification SA-20. Material meant to be used for design temperatures
warmer than 0°C, impact test shall be carried out at 0°C or MDMT
whichever is lower and acceptance criteria for energy absorption shall be
as per Table A2.15 of SA-20. Incase acceptance criteria is not available
in SA-20, then applicable design code shall be referred unless otherwise
specified in requisition. Orientation of test bar shall be transverse to
rolling direction.
e) Unless specified otherwise in requisition or bid document, all CS materials
specified as HIC tested shall meet the requirements of specification: 6-79-0012 or
6-79-0013 (as applicable).
(0 All LTCS and CS charpy plate material shall be made to fine grain practice and the
primary austenitic grain size shall be measured and reported in mill test certificates.
Page 1621 of 1823

.31 el ENGINEERS
Ifgerr 015:teg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
i.„,„,2:12MIZMIJWA) Govt of India Undertaking)
(g) CS pipes shall be SA-106 Gr. B for MDMT greater than — 29 °C, unless otherwise
specified. For MDMT less than and equal to — 29 °C, CS pipes shall be SA 333 Gr.
1 or 6.
(h) Non-standard forgings (SA 266, SA 350 etc.) shall be normalised and tempered.
2.2.2 LAS MATERIALS
a) All LAS plates, pipes, forgings and fittings shall be in normalised and tempered
condition. Use of C-V2 Mo material is prohibited. All LAS materials shall be charpy
V-notch impact tested. Test temperatures shall be lowest of minimum ambient
temperature, design temperature, MDMT and —18°C (0 °C instead of —18 °C for 5Cr-
1/2Mo materials). Impact energy values as per UG-84 or applicable specification,
which ever is higher.
b) Accelerated cooling from an austenitizing temperature by liquid quenching followed
by tempering is also acceptable (N + ACC. + T) is also acceptable for plates.
Irrespective of thickness, LAS plates shall meet the requirements of API RP 934
(part as applicable).
c) In the case of 11/4 Cr-1/2 Mo and 21/4 Cr- 1 Mo materials and weldments, the
maximum room temperature tensile strength for all pressure containing components,
materials and welds shall be 100000 psi.
d) For LAS tubes (SA 209 and 213) hardness test shall be performed on outside of the
tubes as per SA-450.
e) For LAS plates > 50 mm thickness, vacuum treatment as per supplementary
requirement 51 of SA 20. If vacuum degassing is not reported in the test
certificates, then through thickness tests as per SA 770 shall be conducted and
minimum reduction in area of 35% shall be ensured.
2.2.3 SS AND OTHER HIGH ALLOY MATERIAL
a) All SS material (300 series) shall be in the solution heat-treated (fully annealed) and
pickled condition. All stabilised grades of SS (SS 321, SS 347 etc.) shall be given
stabilisation heat treatment, in addition to solution annealing. For all stabilized
grades of stainless steel materials soaking temperatures for stabilization heat
treatment shall be 915°C 10°C and soaking period shall be minimum of 4 hours (2
hours for thickness < 3.5mm).
b) SS (300 series) plates shall be hot rolled and shall have No.1 finish on both sides.
Cold rolled plates, if permitted by requisition, shall have No.2B finish.
c) SS (300 series) materials for all components including non-pressure parts like
baffles, tie rods, etc. shall be procured with the IGC test as per ASTM A-262 (test
shall be carried out, after the specified heat treatment and sensitisation per
specification) with acceptable corrosion rate and practices as under:
i) For all services except nitric acid service, Practice E shall be followed.
Specimen after exposure shall be bent as per requirements mentioned in
A262 Practice E and shall be inspected under magnification of 200X. The
bent specimen shall be free of any cracks or grain dropping. The
microstructure shall be submitted to DIA for approval.
ii) Nitric acid service: Practice C with corrosion rate not > 25 mils per year.
(d) For straight chrome (13% Cr.) material, maximum carbon content shall be <
0.06%. Hardness of UNS no. S41000, S41008 and S40500 shall be < 88 RB.
2.2.4 NON-FERROUS MATERIALS
(a) All copper based non-ferrous plates shall be procured in annealed condition.
Page 1622 of 1823

tflofelt
ENGINEERS GENERAL SPECFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
OgeirlaReg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
(keen ererleerelagaral) (A Govt or India Undertaking)
(c) In addition to hydro test, all tubes shall be eddy current tested in their final
annealed condition.
(d) All pipe bends shall be stress relief annealed after bending.
(e) The paragraphs NF7 and NF14 in part UNF of Code are mandatory. This applies to
non-ferrous cladding and weld overlay also.
2.2.5 CLAD MATERIALS
(a) Cladding shall be integrally and continuously bonded to the base metal. All clad
plates shall be rolled-on or explosion bonded type.
(b) Clad plates shall be UT from the cladding surface as per SA-578. Scanning shall be
100% of the plate surface. Acceptance standard shall be level B. Clad plates shall
meet the supplementary requirements of S 1 of SA-578 and Integrity of clad plate
shall be ensured Quality level: class-1 as per SA 263 or SA 264 or SA 265. All UT
shall be undertaken after specified heat treatment of clad plates.
(c) Both base material and clad material shall meet the specification of the respective
materials as stipulated in this specification.
(d) Alloy clad steel plates shall be as per SA 263 or SA 264 or SA 265. Bond between
cladding and the base metal shall be checked for a minimum strength of 14 kg/mm2
in shear for alloy clad steel plates, by conducting shear test as per applicable
material specification.
(e) For copper alloy clad plates, the bond between cladding and base metal shall be
checked for a minimum strength of 10 kg/mm2 in shear by conducting shear test.
(f) During tension test of clad plates the cladding shall be removed and the tensile
properties of the base material shall meet the Code material requirements.
(g) For austenitic SS clad plates the SS surface shall be acid pickled as per ASTM A-
380. For chromium steel clad surfaces the pickling shall be as per Supplier's
established procedure. The same shall be submitted to Owner or EIL for approval.
(h) For clad components, Supplier to ensure that plate thickness after bonding and
machining shall not be less than the thickness specified in drawings. Supplier to
consider sufficient margin on clad and base materials so that thickness after
machining and complete fabrication shall be as per the drawings. For nozzle necks
with weld deposit, sufficient margin on ID shall be taken to allow for shrinkage
2.3 Non pressure parts
2.3.1 CS plates shall be minimum IS-2062 or SA 283 Gr. C or equivalent. Pipes shall be to IS
1239 or SA 53 or equivalent.
2.3.2 Saddle material shall be same as that of shell for shell design temperature > 350 °C and for
shell design temperature less than 0 °C.
2.4 Equivalent materials
The materials for various components in a heat exchanger shall be as per Owner or EIL's
requirement. This does not preclude use of equivalent or better materials. However, these
deviations should be clearly indicated in the prescribed format. If an equivalent material
sought by the Supplier is to a specification, other than IS or ASTM or ASME, it is necessary
for the Supplier to submit the specifications of the equivalent material with complete details
in English for approval.
3.0 SUPPLY
Supply shall be in accordance with requisition or bid document to which this specification is
attached. It shall, however, include the following also:
Page 1623 of 1823

01 ei I ENGINEERS
eg
ligar54-
WWI 2WEISR tiCYMPI)
rk Goat of India Undertaking)
3.1 Test Ring Assembly, Dummy Shell and Test Flange

a. Test ring assemblies, dummy shells and test flanges wherever required shall be
designed and supplied by the Supplier. The stresses shall not exceed 90% of the
minimum yield stress of the material as stipulated in material specification. Material
used for fabricating these shall be of tested quality. For removable bundle with tube
side test pressure higher than shell side, the bundle shall be tested outside the shell,
with tube side pressurised for tube side test pressure to check tube to tube sheet joint
leakage from the back of tube sheet. Test flange shall be designed accordingly.
b. Test ring assembly construction shall be stuffing box type as per fig. E-4.13.2 of
TEMA. It is preferred that the test ring flange thickness not exceed the shell cover
flange thickness, Otherwise, Supplier to provide separate bolting for assembling test
ring flange to shell. Similarly, Supplier to check that the studs for stationary tube sheet
bolting can be used with test flange. Else separate bolting shall be provided for
assembling test flange.
c. For "T" type of floating head exchanger necessary washers, bolts and nuts for sealing
of bolt holes in tube sheet to be provided during hydro test.
3.2 Accessories for Testing
All necessary accessories such as supports, blind flanges, test gaskets, bolts, nuts etc. shall be
provided and supplied by the Supplier for testing of heat exchangers, in Supplier's shop and
for subsequent testing by Owner at site, whenever required.
3.3 Other Accessories
3.3.1 Supplier shall also supply tie bolts, leveling shims or intermediate supports for stacked units.
In case the stacked units are transported separately, the leveling shims required for matching
the nozzles shall be tack welded to the saddles and shall not be supplied loose to avoid
misplacement during transit and at site. Gaskets, nuts and bolts for interconnecting nozzles
(both tube and shell side) along with spares shall be supplied by Supplier. All these
components shall be despatched separately with due care having been taken regarding
identification of these for ease of installation.
3.3.2 Earthing lugs shall be provided on each heat exchanger and shall be located in such a way as
to avoid any fouling with the exchanger foundation bolts at site.
3.3.3 Supplier to supply one set of torque wrenches for bolt size M45 (13/4") to M56 (21/4") and one
BTD for bolt sizes greater than M56 (21/4"), in case these bolt sizes are being used in
exchangers covered in the requisition. BTD capacity shall be 40% more than the maximum
load required for hydro test condition. BTD pump shall be pneumatically and manually
driven. Supplier shall supply one pump unit, required load cells , 4 heads of each size, one
set of flexible high pressure main hose to connect the pump unit to loading cells, hoses
common for all bolt sizes and spares as recommended by the BTD supplier. Torque values
for tightening the bolts shall be mentioned in the fabrication drawings. For all studs requiring
tightening by bolt tensioner, length of studs shall be longer by "one diameter / as
recommended by BTD Supplier". All bolt tensioners must be satisfactorily
used/demonstrated during assembly/disassembly and hydrotest at shop before dispatch.
3.3.4 Davits, if required as per design basis or drawings, shall be provided.
3.3.5 Additions like cleats for piping, ladder, platform, insulation etc. that may be required at a
later stage shall be provided.
3.4 Cathodic Protection
Whenever cathodic protection is specified both sacrificial anodes and internal painting shall
be provided. Separate specifications shall be provided in the requisition.
Page 1624 of 1823

ENGINEERS
Oge.ji fat5ieg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
IA Govt of India Undedaking)
3.5 Spares to be supplied by Supplier

Following spares shall be supplied by Supplier unless otherwise specified in the Requisition:
3.5.1 BOLTING: 20% studs and nuts but not less than 4 studs with 8 nuts for each joint.
3.5.2 GASKET: 400% gaskets other than those used for hydro testing and despatch for each joint.
3.5.3 Spare bolting and gaskets shall be provided for all joints of girth flanges, floating head,
channel cover, tube sheet, interconnecting nozzles, nozzles with blind flange etc.
4.0 FABRICATION
4.1.1 For CS, the edges for welding shall be made by machining, chipping, cold shearing, oxy-
acetylene flame cutting or a combination of these. Chipping or cold shearing shall be
followed by grinding to a smooth and regular surface. Oxy-acetylene flame cutting shall be
followed by machining or grinding to eliminate any discoloration of material affected.
4.1.2 For LAS, the edges for welding shall be made by oxy-acetylene flame cutting or by
machining. Cold shearing may be used for cutting thickness up to 10 mm. Oxy-acetylene
flame cutting shall be used with preheat and shall be followed by machining or grinding to
eliminate any discoloration of material affected.
4.1.3 For austenitic SS, the edges for welding shall be made by plasma arc, however, cold shearing
may be adopted for thickness up to 15 mm. In all cases the cut edges shall be ground back or
machined back by 2 to 3 mm.
4.1.4 All welding edges after cutting shall be DP or MP examined for laminations, cracks or
segregation. Additionally UT shall be carried out within, two times the material thickness of
edge for LAS materials or five times the material thickness of edge for materials when the
service is low temperature or hydrogen or HIC.
4.1.5 The paragraphs NF7 and NF14 in part UNF of Code are mandatory. This applies to non-
ferrous cladding and weld overlay also.
4.2 Rolling and Dishing of Plates
4.2.1 ROLLING
Rolling for bending and forming of plates shall be in the longitudinal direction of the plates.
This direction shall be clearly marked on the plates.
Rerolling after welding is not normally recommended. However, if for large diameter shells,
rerolling of welded shell course is inevitable, procedure for rerolling along with extent of
NDT shall be submitted for approval of the DIA. All welds on the section to be rerolled must
be ground flush. After rerolling all the welds on the re-rolled section must be DP checked.
Such welds shall then be subjected to radiography as required by drawings and Code.
4.2.2 DISHING
All dished heads shall preferably be of single piece construction. However dished ends with
one chordal seam are acceptable for shells with diameter greater than 1 m. In such cases, the
chordal seam shall preferably be in the middle one-third of the blank. Dished ends shall be
torispherical (knuckle radius 15% of outside diameter and crown radius 80% of outside
diameter) or 2:1 ellipsoidal. Dished heads shall be subjected to DP test on knuckle portions
(both inside and outside) and weld edges after heat treatment. Supplier to ensure adequacy of
indicated thinning allowance for dished head. If nominal thickness indicated is not adequate
then the nominal thickness should be increased accordingly, keeping minimum thickness as
per item drawing. A straight face of 38 mm or 3 times the nominal thickness of dished head,
whichever is more, shall be provided, but maximum straight face shall be limited to 50 mm.
Page 1625 of 1823

tilfae..1 ENGINEERS
qtr laReg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
2:12,113re 3,10/1.0 (A Govt of India Undertaking)
4.3 Welding
4.3.1 All welding and weld overlays shall be done with electrodes, fillers and fluxes of reputed
make with proven reproducibility of results. DIA shall specifically approve brand names. For
CS pressure parts, the electrodes shall be of low hydrogen type. IGC test as per ASTM
A262 Practice E shall be done for austenitic SS consumables, which are to be used in
application involving solution annealing. Austenitic SS consumables of low carbon and
stabilised grade shall also be IGC tested as per ASTM A262 Practice E. Straight chrome
materials shall be welded with electrode that produces an austenitic chromium nickel weld
deposit or a non air hardening nickel-chromium-iron weld deposit. However surfaces
exposed to service fluid shall have the composition same as base material (i.e. straight
chrome material).
4.3.2 All welding procedures shall be submitted for approval by DIA giving all relevant details.
Welding qualification records shall indicate hardness values of weld metal, HAZ and parent
metal and also results of impact tests when design temperature are below 0 C or when
specifically indicated for materials being welded. No welding shall be undertaken until DIA
has approved the welding procedure and welder's qualification. All welding procedures and
welders shall be qualified for the particular type of welding and material in accordance with
the ASME Section IX. Supplier shall be responsible for the quality of the welds performed.
4.3.3 Pressure holding joints shall be FPW. Root pass of single side welded joints shall be done
with GTAW process. Backing strip for single side welded joints is not permitted. For LTCS
materials, both inside and outside of welds shall be ground flush or dressed smooth. All
internal welds in the shell shall be ground flush in order to insert and remove tube bundle.
Also all internal welds shall be ground flush to the extent of facilitating draining of complete
equipment. All other weld may be left in the descaled condition only.
4.3.4 Longitudinal seams shall be staggered with the circumferential distance between the centres
of welds being at least 5 times the thickness of the thicker-plate. Weld seams shall be located
so as to avoid interference with weld seam of nozzles and external attachments.
4.3.5 Attachment to pressure part shall be of same quality as the pressure part. All LAS weld
attachments to pressure retaining component shall be FPW and ground to a smooth concave
contour. External attachments like lugs, supports etc. of CS shall not be welded directly to
high alloy or austenitic SS heat exchanger components. These attachments should be of the
same material as the heat exchanger component. If this is not so, intermediate pad plate of
the same material type as the heat exchanger component may be used. These pads shall be at
least 100mm wider and longer than the attachment and shall be at least 5 mm thick. Welding
of CS or LAS to austenitic SS shall be done with austenitic SS electrodes or filler wire
(AWS-ASTM-E 309L or E-309 Mo L only).
Wrapper plates, reinforcing pads, saddle plates or stiffeners of higher thickness than
specified can be used provided there is no change in basic dimensions and with the approval
from DIA. No separate deviation permit is required for the same.
4.3.6 Partition plates of CS and 300 series SS except for low temperature service, shall be welded
to channels etc. by continuous fillet welds with minimum size of 6 mm on both sides. For all
other materials and for hydrogen and low temperature services, all welds involving partition
plates shall be FPW. However all pass partition plates shall be FPW up to a distance of
2"(50mm) from the gasket contact surface. Partition plates thicker than 10 mm shall be
tapered to 10 mm at partition groove end except when mentioned otherwise on drawings.
One weep hole of 6 mm diameter shall be provided at the center of each horizontal pass
partition plate and a 5 mm radius notch on top and bottom point of each vertical pass
partition plate for all multipass exchangers for effective venting and draining.
4.3.7 Welding of shell to unhubbed tube sheet shall meet the requirements of Code considering
that the tube sheet is unsupported.
Page 1626 of 1823

ENGINEERS
llf ef5l eg
i INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
IHRn ereask,VIJvas'a) IA Govt of India Undedalong)
4.3.8 When impact tests are required on material as per Code or specification the welds shall also
be qualified for impact test. In such case following special requirement shall apply to the
welding procedure qualification:
i) Qualification tests shall be made on plates of the ASME specification as specified
for the exchanger using welding electrodes of AWS or SFA specification and wire
& flux of the specification and brand as are to be used on the job.
ii) Welding current and travel speed shall be considered essential variables in order to
ensure that production welding is substantially equivalent to the procedure
qualification.
iii) Welded test plates shall be subjected to a total thermal cycle sequence similar to
the finished equipment. Specifically, test plates shall be held at intermediate and
final stress relief temperatures for approximately the same length of time as the
finished exchanger. Final cooling rate shall be approximate to that expected for the
finished exchanger.
iv) Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be made on the weld and HAZ of the test plate
for each welding procedure to be qualified. Test procedure shall be as per UG 84 of
Code. Test temperature shall not be higher than MDMT. Impact energy
requirements shall be as per Table 2.15 of SA 20 of ASME Section II Part A or UG
84 of Code whichever is higher.
4.3.9 WELD OVERLAY
4.3.9.1 Wherever cladding is specified in datasheets or drawings, weld overlays are not acceptable.
However, wherever cladding is specified in the Tube sheet/ channel cover, weld overlay can
also be acceptable in place of cladding.
4.3.9.2 Weld deposit overlay shall be done by a qualified welding procedure and surface shall be
properly machined or ground flush after overlay. Minimum thickness of finished weld
deposit shall be as indicated in the drawings or specifications. In case a higher deposition
thickness and multiple weld layers are required to achieve the minimum specified undiluted
deposit metal, the same shall be done only after taking prior approval from E1L. Minimum
thickness of undiluted finished weld overlay from top shall be 2 mm or as specified in the
drawings. For non-ferrous weld deposit, the iron dilution should be restricted to 2.5%
(maximum) in the finished undiluted layer (thickness defined above). Supplier must ensure
minimum thickness of undiluted finished weld overlay as per above and shall take special
precautions to ensure the same. Undercutting of base material shall not be done while
ensuring the minimum undiluted chemistry. Supplier to take suitable allowance on
machining in this regard so that minimum undiluted thickness is guaranteed after machining.
Supplier to qualify WPS/PQR and submit documents to DIA for approvals before
proceeding with fabrication.
4.3.9.3 The weld overlay procedure shall be qualified on base metal of the same composition as the
exchanger component and meeting the requirements of ASME Section IX.
4.3.9.4 The weld overlay shall be relatively smooth with no notches and undercuts that would act as
stress raisers. All cracks, fissures and circular defects greater than 1/16 inch diameter shall
be removed. Repaired areas shall be DP checked. Weld overlay shall be applied to base
metal, which has been grit blasted and is smooth and clean so as to ensure full bonding.
Welding overlay cladding shall be applied after any normalising but before PWHT. The
weld overlay shall consist of at least 2 layers.
4.3.9.5 The alloy cladding shall be cut back at all seams to permit back welding of the base metal.
Weld metal shall be ground flush and fully covered with the applicable weld deposit. The
weld joint in base plate shall be 100% DP tested for detection of cracks and flaws before
welding from clad side. The weld deposit shall be at least as thick as the cladding.
4.3.9.6 Shells, cones, dished heads and nozzles formed from clad plates shall be subject to UT after
forming, for a minimum of 10% of the clad surface, but no less than one square feet in each
Page 1627 of 1823

eiENGINEERS
Ogeji EPleg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
10 square feet or fraction thereof. Unbonded areas that cannot be encompassed by a 3 inch
diameter circle shall be repaired by weld overlay. When repairs in excess of 5 % of the total
examined area are required, the complete component shall be subject to 100% UT. Repaired
areas and weld deposit overlay at weld seams shall be DP examined. UT shall be repeated
for dished heads after heat treatment. UT procedures shall be in accordance with SA 578 S6
for spot examination and SA 578 S7 for 100% examination.
4.3.9.7 All weld overlays shall be 100% DP examined in accordance with the method described in
ASTM-E-165. The barrier layer shall be 100% examined. When the overlay involves
multiple passes (layers) and the procedure uses an intermediate heat treatment with cooling
to room temperature prior to applying the subsequent layer, each layer shall be examined by
DP. Where overlay is to be machined such as for flange facing, machined surface shall be
100 % examined after final PWHT. If 100% of overlay is examined prior to the final PWHT,
overlay shall be spot examined (not less than 10% of the surface) after heat treatment.
4.3.9.8 Samples of the weld overlay shall be taken to perform chemical analysis to the specified
depth. The number and location of samples and method of taking samples shall be approved
by DIA. However, they shall be representative of each exchanger component for each type
of welding process. Report of chemical analysis shall be submitted to DIA for approval.
4.3.9.9 For all weld overlays used in hydrogen or H2S service with design temperature greater than
350°C, Hydrogen disbonding test shall be carried out. The test condition shall be
representative of the actual design conditions and the procedure shall be submitted to DIA
for approval. Rate of cooling shall be 100°C/hr (min.) unless specified otherwise in
datasheets. Holding time shall be 48 hours unless specified otherwise in datasheets
4.3.9.10 PTCs are required for CS welds above 50 mm thickness and for LAS welds above 25 mm or
when required by the Code or when specified in the requisition. The following shall apply: -
a) Two PTCs representative of one longitudinal and another circumferential seam
shall be provided for each procedure, position and thickness.
b) PTC shall be from material of the same heat and thickness as that of parent metal.
During and after production welding PTC shall be subjected to same heat treatment
as and together with the course they represent. Extra PTC shall be preserved to take
care of eventuality of retests.
c) The tests mentioned below shall be carried out as per methods of testing in Code:
i) One transverse tension test.
ii) Two side bend tests with weld located in the center of bend.
iii) One hardness test on PTC weld and HAZ. The acceptable limits are 200
BHN for CS, 225 BHN for P3 and P4 materials and 235 BHN for P5 as
per EIL specification no. 6-15-0091.
iv) Micro and macro structural examination of welds.
v) For CS, charpy V notch tests on weld and HAZ shall be carried out. For
MDMT < 0°C, impact test temperature shall be MDMT. For MDMT > or
equal to 0°C, the test temperature shall be 0°C. The acceptance criteria for
impact energy shall be as per table a 2.15 of SA 20 of ASME Section II
part A or UG-84 of Code whichever is higher.
vi) For LAS, charpy V notch test on weld and HAZ shall be carried out. Test
temperature and acceptance criteria shall be as per clause 2.2.2 (d) (ii).
4.4 Tube to Tube Sheet Joints
Requirements of EIL specification no. 6-15-0003 shall be complied with for welded tube-to-
tube sheet joints and that of EIL specification no. 6-15-0004 shall be complied with for
expanded tube-to-tube sheet joints.
Page 1628 of 1823

ENGINEERS
5=fgar EffiVeg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
I OilET, eiWIREP13,7CIM) IA Goof of India undertaking)
Whereever expanded tube to tube sheet joint are specified and Supplier is not able to meet
the Fr value in mock up, EIL reserves a right to ask supplier to provide strength welded tube
to tube sheet joint without any cost & delivery implication.
4.5 Hardness Limitations
Hardness limitation for CS materials, welds and HAZ wherever specified on drawings or
datasheets shall be ensured as per Specification 6-15-0091. Hardness limitation for LAS
materials, welds and HAZ shall always be ensured as per Specification 6-15-0091. Hardness
limitation compliance for tube-to-tube sheet welded joints shall be established/verified on a
mock-up with simulation heat treatment
4.6 Nozzle flanges, Nozzles and Reinforcing Pads
4.6.1 FLANGES
Unless otherwise indicated, dimensions, drilling, facing and tolerances for nozzle flanges
(and blind covers if required) shall be as per ASME B 16.5 (for size up to 24" NB) and
ASME B 16.47 series B (for sizes above 24" NB) for the respective class. Weld overlays,
wherever specified or required, shall be in addition to the thickness as per these standards.
Boltholes on these nozzle flanges shall straddle principal vertical and horizontal centerlines
of equipment. If the component to which nozzles are attached is subsequently stress relieved,
it shall be Supplier's responsibility to maintain true gasket faces by machining or otherwise.
If distortion is expected, final machining operation should be done after stress relieving;
sufficient machining allowance for this purpose should be available. . All flange faces shall
be suitably protected against oxidation during post weld heat treatment. Gaskets, for flanges
to ASME B 16.5 and B16.47, shall be as per ASME B16.20.
4.6.2 NOZZLES
4.6.2.1 Nozzle pipes shall be attached to the heat exchanger components by FPW. Attachment welds
using only inner and outer fillet welds are not permitted. Unless otherwise indicated on the
datasheets or drawings, necks of all nozzles shall be flush with the inside of the heat
exchanger component. Inside corners of nozzle pipes at shell and channel inside diameter
shall be radiused. All nozzles 2" NB and below, except long weld neck, shall have two
stiffeners (30 mm x 6 mm) at right angles.
4.6.2.2 Whenever nozzle inside is required to be overlaid, these shall be done by weld overlay or
cladding. Minimum nozzle ID before weld depositing to be 50 mm in such cases. Liners are
not acceptable.
4.6.3 REINFORCING PADS AND TESTING
Reinforcing pads whenever required as per drawings or Code shall be of the same material or
equivalent as the heat exchanger component to which it is welded. All reinforcing pads shall
be provided with two 1/8" (3 mm) NPT tapped holes located 180 apart for air soap solution
test with a pressure of 1.25 kg/cm2 (g). This test shall also be required to be carried out for
slip on flanges. Higher test pressures are not recommended because of accompanying risks
and also because the soap bubbles have a chance to blow off. Tell-tale holes in the
reinforcing pads shall be plugged with hard grease after the hydro test of the exchanger. No
grub screws to be provided.
4.7 Bolts, Studs etc. and Tapped Holes
4.7.1 Metric threads shall be used for all non-standard flanges. However ASME flanges may have
threads as per American standards. All inch bolting and threading shall conform to ASME B
1.1 except for size 1" and above where it shall be 8 threads per inch. Metric bolting and
threading shall conform ISO-R261 shall be followed except for size M24 and above, where it
shall have 3 mm pitch.
4.7.2 Studs shall extend beyond the nut by about 10 mm and shall be threaded full length except
when square ends are required for use with BTD, in which case the extension shall be as per
Page 1629 of 1823

lot eieY ENGINEERS
Ogeatidt4tag INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
BTD manufacturer's recommendation. The studs for extended tube sheets and the studs for
use with connecting piece shall also have square ends.
4.7.3 All nuts shall be of heavy series only and nut seating faces shall be machined or spot faced.
4.7.4 Threads on external bolting, plugs etc. shall be lubricated with graphite grease for working
temperature up to 200°C and with Molybdenum Disulphide for higher temperatures.
4.7.5 Tapped holes on the channel side face of clad tube sheet for removable bundles shall be
fitted with plugs of a material similar to channel side material in contact with tube side fluid.
4.7.6 For extended tube sheets, tapped holes shall be provided for girth bolting.
4.7.7 All floating head bolting to have 2 mm wide and 0.5 mm deep groove at both ends to
prevent mix up with other bolts.
4.7.8 In addition to stamping, the specifications and manufacturers symbol as specified in ASME
material specifications, on one of the ends the size of the studs shall be clearly punch
marked. Similarly the nuts shall have the size punch marked on one of the faces. In case of
tapped hole the size shall be punch marked near the hole without disturbing the gasket
seating area. Further for all alloy/SS metallurgy bolts & nuts shall also be identified by
distinct colour marking at the stud end/bolt side face
4.8 Assembly and Handling
4.8.1 Supplier shall be responsible for taking adequate preventive measures to ensure the quality
and finish of materials and to avoid any rusting.
4.8.2 Suitable method of alignment like dowels etc. shall be provided for proper assembly of
channel, channel covers, stationary tube sheet etc.
4.8.3 Stacked exchangers shall be assembled in the shop for a trial fit. Special care shall be
exercised in truing up connecting nozzle flanges.
4.8.4 'T' wherever indicated on drawings, denotes match mark for assembly and shall be punched
on all mating parts.
4.8.5 Lifting lugs shall be provided as per standard for lifting of channels, channel covers, floating
heads, shell covers, test rings, test flanges etc.
4.8.6 In case of removable bundles the following are required: -
(a) Stationary tube sheets shall be drilled and tapped at vertical (0°) position for
attaching eyebolts; or a lifting lug of adequate thickness shall be welded with 25
mm (minimum) diameter hole.
(b) Drilling and tapping as above shall be carried out on floating tube sheet.
(c) Last support plate shall be drilled (25 mm diameter hole) for lifting the assembled
bundle. Local stiffening may be necessary to withstand the bundle load., which
shall be designed by the Supplier.
4.8.7 Pulling eyebolts made from forged CS shall be provided for all removable bundles. These
shall be sent loose along with the spares. Insert piece shall be provided for all clad tube
sheets. Material of insert piece shall be same as that of cladding material.
4.8.8 Stationary tube sheet shall be drilled and tapped for tie rods. Care should be taken to ensure
that holes are not drilled through.
4.8.9 Interchangeable and 180° rotatable bundles shall have common pass-partition groove
arrangement in the respective tube sheet. For exchangers where bundles are specified to be
interchangeable, the same shall be ensured at the Supplier's shop by actually inserting the
bundles or using a template consisting of 4 full diameter baffles, each spaced at a distance
equal to the baffle pitch.
4.8.10 Jackscrews shall be provided on all girth flanges.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EL — All rights reserved
Page 1630 of 1823

dot eiti ENGINEERS
$1g-a r Oigeg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
1.11PO, cleane 4513,K1.1)
4.9 Descaling, pickling and passivation shall be done for all SS parts in accordance with ASTM
A-380. The Supplier shall furnish details of the procedure for approval to DIA.
4.10 No distortion whatsoever shall be permitted on the gasket seating surfaces due to tube to
tube sheet welding, shell to tube sheet welding, PWHT etc. If distorted, the same shall be
machined subsequently.
4.11 Fabrication Tolerances and Finish
4.11.1 The dimensional tolerances shall be within the limits indicated on EIL drawings and
standards. Where tolerances are not specified, these shall be in accordance with the
requirements of TEMA and Code.
4.11.2 All edges and corners including baffle holes shall be deburred (or rounded, if shown).
4.11.3 Finish of all machined components shall be minimum 12 microns (500 RMS) unless
otherwise indicated. Parts subjected to UT shall have minimum finish of 6 microns.
4.11.4 Tube sheet face shall be flat within +/- 1.5 mm (camber).
5.0 NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTS
5.1 All the NDT procedures shall be submitted to DIA for approval. For all NDT activities, only
qualified NDT technicians shall be deployed with the approval of DIA.
5.2 The extent of radiography shall be as specified in datasheets or drawings or job specification.
Radiography shall be performed after PWHT. In case radiography is carried out before
PWHT, then UT shall be carried out on the welds after PWHT.
5.3 Minimum extent of radiography shall be spot, unless full radiography is specified in the
drawings or required as per specification or Code.
Each category A or B pressure containing weld shall be spot radiographed in accordance
with ASME Section-VIII Division-I, paragraph UW-52 as a minimum requirement. Each
Spot radiograph shall be a minimum of six inches (150mm) in length and minimum one spot
shall be selected in each circumferential & longitudinal seam. Additionally at least one T-
joint in each circumferential seam shall also be selected. Welds from each welding
procedure, welded/welding operator shall be examined. DIA shall be consulted in marking
the areas to be radiographed.
5.4 Full radiography when specified shall imply 100% radiography of all butt welds including
nozzle flange to nozzle neck, pipe to pipe and pipe to fitting.
5.5 All welds of nozzle necks fabricated from plate, irrespective of diameter, thickness of plate
and radiography specified, shall be 100% radiographed.
5.6 Weld seams of formed heads shall be 100% radiographed after forming and heat treatment.
5.7 All nozzle to shell welds and unhubbed tube sheet to shell welds shall be DP or MP checked
at the root run and final weld.
5.8 All welds, which cannot be fully radiographed such as nozzle to shell, shell to unhubbed
tube sheet, unhubbed floating head to cover etc., shall be 100% UT after final PWHT. Fillet
welds and welds which cannot be radiographed or UT (i.e. pass partition plate to channel and
floating head etc.), the root run shall be DP checked and the welds shall be finally MP
checked after PWHT.
5.9 All attachment welds shall be either DP or MP tested.
5.10 If vendor intends to carry out radiography by Computed Radiography technique, then demo
should be carried out under AI to prove vendor's capability to produce acceptable images
meeting the Code requirements.
5.11 If radiography is being substituted by UT for the final closing seam as permitted by Code,
MP shall be carried out in addition to UT.
Page 1631 of 1823

lafaeiti ENGINEERS
Ogez Rift INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
Govt of India Undertaking)
5.12 In case Supplier want to perform UT in lieu of RT based on Code para UW 51 (a) (4), the
same is acceptable subject to the following:
a) Material of construction is either CS or LAS.
b) The thickness of weld is greater than 13 mm.
c) The joint is either Category A or Category B joint except shell to hemispherical dished
end joint. (Category of joint as defined by Code).
d) Automated UT incorporating TOFD and pulse echo probes or TOFD and Phased Array
mounted on the same chassis that automatically traverses along the joints to be inspected
and displaying both results simultaneously on a single screen may be considered in lieu of
RT.
e) Calibration block of similar material/thickness shall be used. Calibration block shall have
suitable notches to simulate longitudinal as well as transverse cracks on outside and inside
surface. Setup should be capable of detecting defects on outside as well as inside while
scanning from one surface only.
f) The system that is proposed to be deployed in lieu of radiography shall be submitted along
with the track record prior to use for EIL review. The Supplier shall demonstrate
successfully the capability of AUT machine and the defects evaluation in the same screen
during the site visit of Ell, representative. Based on which, the approval of the parties and
their AUT system shall be given.
g) Qualified NDT persons shall be deployed to perform UT.
h) Acceptance criteria shall be as per Code para UW 51.
6.0 HEAT TREATMENT

6.1 PWHT shall be done if required by datasheets, drawings, specifications, Code etc. WHT
when mentioned on the drawings shall be over and above the requirements of specif dons
or Code. No welding or heating is permitted after PWHT. All machining operation shall
preferably be carried out after PWHT (also refer clause 4.6.1). It shall be the responsibility
of the Supplier to leave sufficient allowance for this purpose. Supplier shall submit all the
procedures for PWHT to DIA for review.
6.2 During PWHT of assemblies of fixed tube sheet exchangers, care shall be taken to ensure
that differential stresses are not caused between tubes, shell and tube sheet. The temperature
differential between shell and tubes during PWHT to be minimised (not to exceed 25°C) and
the rate of heating and cooling shall not exceed 25-30°C per hour. For this purpose,
thermocouples shall be installed on various components and compliance assured.
6.3 Heat treatment of SS clad assemblies shall be at reduced temperature to avoid sensitisation
of SS materials. The soaking time shall be increased accordingly as per Code.
6.4 Heat treatment of non-ferrous clad assemblies, if required, shall be performed with extra
care, at reduced temperatures to avoid differential thermal expansion. The soaking time in
such a case shall be increased accordingly as per Code.
6.5 Heat treatment of CS and LAS dished heads shall be as follows:
a) Stress Relieving for:
(i) Cold formed dish heads up to 16 mm thick.
(ii) Cold formed floating head cover up to 16 mm thick if fibre stretch exceeds 5%.
Page 1632 of 1823

101 ENGINEERS
Ogelf Eff5i- eg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
IA Gout of India Undertaking)
b) Normalising for CS and normalising and tempering for LAS:

(i) Hot formed dish head and floating head dish if not formed in normalising range.
(ii) Cold formed dish heads for thickness greater than 16 mm.
(iii) Cold formed floating head dish above 16 mm thick.
This heat treatment need not be given if same heat treatment is given subsequently on sub-
assembly. Thicknesses specified above are nominal.
In case of LAS plates, it shall be fabricator's responsibility to ensure that mechanical
properties of material are not impaired during any cold / hot forming process and subsequent
stress relieving heat treatment. Tests to demonstrate suitability of process shall be carried
out by fabricator.
6.6 SS components shall be solution annealed in the following cases.
i) Cold formed dished heads with nominal thickness of 16 mm or above.
ii) Hardness value of dished heads after cold forming exceeds 235 BHN.
iii) Hot formed shells, cones, dished heads.
After any heat treatment on austenitic SS, IGC test shall be carried out as per clause 2.2.3 (c)
6.7 All LAS welds shall be PWHT.
6.8 If stress relieving is indicated on shell side or tube side and the service on either side is lethal
or low temperature or if specifically indicated in the datasheet or drawings, the welded tube-
to-tube sheet joints of CS or LTCS material shall be stress relieved.
6.9 For LAS materials, preheating procedure shall be established in the welding procedure and
got approved by DIA. Preheating by resistance or induction-heating method is preferred.
Preheating shall extend uniformly to at least three times the thickness of joint but not less
than 50 mm on both sides of the weld. Temperature indicating crayons shall be used for
assessment of correct pre heat temperature.
7.1 Inspection
7.1.1 The inspection shall be carried out by DIA. The materials, fabrication and testing of
exchangers shall be open to inspection by DIA in addition to any inspection required by the
specified Code or local authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
7.1.2 Inspection shall be carried out both during fabrication and before delivery and also for sub
ordered materials. In addition to final inspection and certification by DIA during the course
of manufacture, DIA's written approval shall be obtained by the Supplier at various stages of
fabrication. For this purpose, Supplier shall prepare his QAP, defining the stages of
fabrication, hold points for his own inspection and that by the DIA or Code or Statutory
Authorities etc. The QAP shall be discussed with DIA before start of job and mutually
agreed. The various stages of fabrication to be inspected (either by Supplier or DIA or both)
shall include but not limited to the following:
(a) raw material identification and verification of mill test certificate.
(b) edge preparation for welding, including visual check for laminations.
(c) alignment of longitudinal and circumferential seams.
(d) rolling tolerances on individual section.
(e) alignment and fit up of sections and components.
(f) root pass clearance before further welding and cleaning.
(g) profile and thinning of dished ends and toriconical pieces after forming.
Page 1633 of 1823

ENGINEERS GENERAL SPECFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
Oge.ff MegKi INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
ImieReizzorenwavow)IA Govt of India Undertaking)
(h) checking of tube sheet after drilling including checking of tube layout patterns,
tube holes, pass partition locations, visual check for laminations.
(i) tube sheet to shell set up for fixed tube sheet exchangers, prior to welding .
(j) tube to tube sheet joint expansion or welding.
(k) visual check of shell inside and tube bundle insertion.
(1) welding of expansion bellows or joints, if required.
(m) review of NDT reports and heat treatment charts.
(o) final visual and dimensional inspection.
(p) witnessing of hydro test.
7.1.3 The presence of DIA shall not modify or reduce the obligation of the Supplier to carry out
his own tests and control. If any material and/or equipment are not found in compliance with
the specified requirements, DIA or his delegate shall be entitled to irrevocably reject them,
even if such non-compliance has not been evidenced in the course of inspection and/or tests.
7.1.4 DIA will, at the time of his initial visit, set up with the Supplier actual details of inspection
stages to be witnessed or carried out; the schedule of future visits and subsequent inspection
notices can be arranged between DIA and the Supplier.
7.1.5 The Supplier shall notify DIA sufficiently in advance of any fabrication operations to permit
arrival at the Supplier's shop in time to witness these.
7.1.6 The Supplier shall provide to DIA, free access to his shops at all times. He shall also supply
all tools and tackles to DIA for carrying out the inspection. The Supplier shall also arrange
for similar facilities at his sub-contractor's shops.
7.1.7 The Supplier must satisfy DIA that the welding procedures, welders, electrodes, fluxes,
welding wires etc. are in accordance with the requirements of the Code and specifications.
Further the welder's qualification test must be carried out in the presence of DIA.
7.1.8 Prior to final inspection, all slag, weld spatter loose scale, dirt, grit, paint, grease, oil and
other foreign matter shall be removed in order to facilitate inspection. All reinforcing pads
and slip on type flange welds shall be pressure tested with air and soap solution before and
after heat treatment (if any) and before final hydrostatic test.
7.1.9 A dimensional check of equipment shall be carried out taking into account the tolerances
shown on drawings, standards, specifications or Code, the more stringent values shall
govern. Dimensional checks are to be taken of the internal measurements of equipment
together with external ones and these are to be recorded on the drawings as being the "As
Built" dimensions.
7.2 Hydrostatic Tests
7.2.1 Hydrostatic tests shall be witnessed by DIA. When hydrostatic tests are performed the
indicating gauge shall be connected to the upper most part of the equipment. Testing water
shall be clean potable water. Seawater shall not be used. For SS equipment, water used for
these tests shall not contain more than 25 ppm chlorides. Minimum metal temperature during
hydrostatic tests shall be as per Code. Test pressures shall be maintained for at least one
hour. Shell and tube sides shall be tested separately, unless otherwise mentioned on the
drawing. For tube sheets designed for differential pressure, special care shall be taken during
testing. Equipment drawings shall clearly indicate if tube sheets have been designed for
differential pressure. Drying out as per clause 9.1 shall be carried out immediately after
hydro test.
7.2.2 All vertical exchangers shall be tested in vertical position. Alternatively, exchanger may be
tested in horizontal position with test pressure modified with prior approval of Designer.
Page 1634 of 1823

4,Wexi frCi ENGINEERS
1Rar Mieg INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
1.1Uf ereein,
151.7,0M IA Govt of India Undettakong)
7.2.3 Stacked exchangers with nozzles interconnected shall be hydro tested in stacked condition
except when the hydro test pressure of the individual exchanger is different.
7.2.4 Actual torque values applied for tightening of bolts during hydro test to be
recorded/indicated in hydro test reports
8.0 STAMPING, NAME PLATES AND WARNING PLATES
8.1 Each exchanger shell shall be fitted with an SS nameplate.
8.2 Warning plates, if required, shall be provided.
8.3 The following exchanger parts shall have the item number stamped except for heat
exchangers in low temperature service in which case the item number shall be marked with
non-removable ink:
Shell girth flanges, shell cover flange, channel girth flanges, flat channel cover, stationary
and floating tube sheets, floating head cover flange, floating head backing ring, connecting
pieces, test rings, test flanges and other main removable parts.
9.0 PROTECTION AND DESPATCH
9.1 After completion of all testing and inspection, the inside of complete equipment shall be
thoroughly drained and dried out. Equipment shall be completely dried by passing hot air for
sufficient time until no further increase in relative humidity of outgoing air is observed. Dry
out shall be done simultaneously on both shell and tube sides. After drying, the equipment
shall be purged and filled with dry N2 at 0.25 kg/cm2. The equipment shall be provided with
pressure gauge to monitor N2 pressure, and 1/2" non-return valve. All threaded holes, other
than tell tale holes for testing, shall be suitably protected with steel bar plugs. All nozzles not
provided with blind flange shall be provided with steel covers, temporary gaskets and bolts.
9.2 Shop Painting
Surface preparation, Primer application and finish paint shall be required as per applicable
specification enclosed elsewhere in the requisition. In absence of any requirements in the
requisition following shall be complied:
All CS and LAS external surfaces, except gasket faces and machined surfaces, shall be
primer painted. Surfaces to be painted shall be prepared for painting by removing loose mill
scale, rust, oil, grease and other films or substances harmful to the adhesion of paint by an
approved method such as shot blast cleaning. The surface shall be prepared to near white
finish as per SSPC-SP-10 [SA 2 '/2 Swedish standard (SIS-05-5900)]. Painting shall be The
primer shall be inorganic zinc silicate (65-75 microns dry film thickness) for design
temperatures up to 400°C and Heat Resistant Silicone Aluminium Paint (20 microns dry film
thickness) for design temperatures between 400°C and 540 C, unless stated otherwise.
9.3 The equipment item number, PO number and Owner name and address shall be painted in
bold white paint letters written with stencil, on the heat exchanger.
Sliding end of exchangers shall be painted as "CAUTION-SLIDING END" in black on the
primer coating in the shop.
9.4 Despatch of Equipment
No heat exchanger shall be released for shipment until it has been approved by DIA. Heat
exchangers shall be despatched after the operations as required by clauses 9.1, 9.2 and 9.3
have been carried out and shall be despatched in as-tested condition. In case stacked
exchanger shells are despatched separately the Supplier shall provide additional set of
gaskets for interconnected nozzles other than the gaskets included in spares. Heat exchangers
shall be securely anchored for despatch in order to prevent any shifting and damage during
transportation. Expansion joints and bellows shall be suitably protected against any possible
damage by providing tie bars before boxing up. Packaging shall be suitable for rail or road
transport and also sea worthy if transported by sea. Spares shall be despatched separately in a
box and marked with PO number, item number and Owner's name and address.
Page 1635 of 1823

la Pei&ENGINEERS
mac'© INDIA LIMITED FOR 6-15-0001 Rev. 5
1.11.2,,maRz=3,10.) IA Govt of India Undertaking)
Supplier shall provide sling mark identification on all heat exchangers with respect to center
of gravity of the equipment.
No equipment shall be despatched until a written clearance is obtained from Owner or EIL
regarding Piping Clips and Structural Cleats on individual equipment.
10.0 SUPPLIER'S GUARANTEES
The Supplier shall be completely responsible for the compliance to Code requirements,
residual design, detailing, fabrication, materials and workmanship of the exchangers as per
the stipulations of the requisition and its attachments. In this regard, it may be noted that
review by Owner or EIL shall not relieve the Supplier of his responsibility of meeting all
requirements and ensuring satisfactory performance of the equipment. Guarantee period shall
be as per GPC of Owner
Page 1636 of 1823

STANDARD SPECFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
hum ....1 ENGINEERS FOR WELDED
I iiflN ei,cnil 05IJVNHI
INDIA LIMITED
(A.......,ng, TUBE TO TUBESHEET JOINTS
6-15-0003 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 9
A-7-
(4 - eaci .4 77:4-ftz Qs)
* Reki iivich "NW

WELDED
TUBE TO TUBESHEET JOINTS
REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS

5 20 05 19
4 07 06 13 TK KA RKT/SC DM
3 28 01 08 KA PK AKM VC
REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD
2 01 09 99 HN PK RKA AS
SPECIFICATION
1 04 05 89 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION RKA BSG VKM RNS

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No. by by
Approved by
Page 1637 of 1823

ei ENGINEERS
fgeir iat
MR?, cnrcnie dnarldnI0
INDIA LIMITED
FOR WELDED
TUBE TO TUBESHEET JOINTS
6-15-0003 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:

AWS American Welding Society
OD Outside diameter
TEMA Tubular Exchangers Manufacturers' Association
TIG Tungsten inert gas shielded arc
Convenor: Mr. KJ Harinarayanan
Members: Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar

Mr. K Anjaneyulu
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. Inder Kumar
Mr. Tarun Kumar
Mr. Anish Trehan
Ms. Srikanth Karanam
Mr. Neeraj Agarwal (Projects)
Mr. S Ghosal (Process)
Mr. T Kamalakannan (SCM)
Page 1638 of 1823

t31 el& ENGINEERS
FOR WELDED
fgirfa(les, INDIA LIMITED 6-15-0003 Rev. 5
IA Govl of India Undettaking)
TUBE TO TUBESHEET JOINTS Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS 4
3.0 WELDING PROCESS AND JOINT DETAIL 4
4.0 WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION 4
5.0 WELDERS QUALIFICATION 6
6.0 PREPARATION OF TUBES AND TUBESHEET 6
7.0 WELDING 6
8.0 EXAMINATION OF JOINTS 7
9.0 TUBE EXPANDING 7
10.0 REPAIRS 7
11.0 TEST AND REPAIR REPORTS 7
APPENDIX-1 - JOINT DETAILS
APPENDIX-2 - DETAILS OF TEST SPECIMENS
Page 1639 of 1823

ENGINEERS
-es-
51g-ar Of511'
14112Frerrax10,104.1)
INDIA LIMITED
(A GoN of Intha Undert*..9)
FOR WELDED 6-15-0003 Rev. 5
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers minimum requirements for the welding and testing of tube to
tubesheet joints of shell and tube heat exchangers and air coolers. It is the Fabricator's
responsibility to furnish sound, leak free joints. For the purpose of this specification, the terms
"joints" shall be construed to mean "tube-to-tube sheet joints".
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
The latest edition of the following codes and standards shall be complied with:
a) ASME Section VIII Division I

b) ASME Section V
c) ASME Section IX
d) TEMA for tubular exchangers
e) API 661 for air coolers
0 AWS
3.0 WELDING PROCESS AND JOINT DETAIL
3.1 Manual or automatic Tungsten Inert Gas shielded Arc (TIG) welding shall be used. All joints
shall be made by using minimum two weld passes. The first pass should be preferably made
without filler wire to ensure root fusion. The second or final pass shall be with filler wire. Any
other welding process can be used only after obtaining written approval from the Authorised
Inspector.
3.2 Joint detail shall be as indicated on the Purchaser drawings by giving reference to figure
numbers in Appendix-1 of this specification. In absence of any Purchaser drawings or
indication regarding type of joint, Figure 2 or Figure 3 shall be used depending upon whether
tube thickness is > 2 mm or < 2 mm respectively.
4.0 WELDING PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION
4.1 Welding Procedure Specification shall be compiled by the Fabricator and submitted to the
Authorised Inspector for approval before the qualification tests are performed. Mock up test
shall commence only after approval is obtained from the Authorised Inspector.
4.2 Welding procedure qualification test is required to be carried out if:-
a) Authorised Inspector requires the test to be carried out.
b) There exists no previous qualification tests within last three years for the proposed
combination of tube and tubesheet P number and group number (as per ASME Section
IX), tube outside diameter (OD), tube thickness, tubesheet thickness, tube pitch, tube
pitch pattern, welding procedure and joint detail. All other factors remaining same, the
procedure test need not be repeated if the job tubesheet thickness exceeds 40 mm and
qualification exists for 40 mm or higher tubesheet thickness.
For plug type air coolers additional procedure qualification test is required to be
performed for any of the following conditions:
i) The job has lower clearances between tube and any of the header plates like
top/bottom/end/stiffener/pass partition plate compared to earlier tests.
ii) The job has lower plug size for the same tube size compared to earlier tests.
Page 1640 of 1823

ENGINEERS
Ogoff faraa5 W INDIA LIMITED FOR WELDED 6-15-0003 Rev. 5
iii) The job has higher plugsheet thickness compared to earlier tests.
c) Code or requisition or bid document requires the test to be carried out.
4.3 If required as per 4.2 above, the Fabricator shall perform a procedure qualification test, at least
two weeks before the scheduled beginning of production. Procedure shall be qualified for the
same hand position as is being proposed for production. Procedure test shall consist of the
welding of nine tubes for square pitch and eight tubes, (three, two and three tubes per row
arrangement) if on a triangular pitch. This shall be done for each set of combination of tube and
tubesheet P number and group number, welding procedure, joint detail, tube OD, tube
thickness, tube pitch, tube pitch pattern, tubesheet thickness. Additionally for air cooler, tests
shall be done for each tube size with lowest plug size, lowest clearance between tube and any of
the header plates, and the lowest plugsheet thickness to be used on the job. Thickness of the
tubesheet used for procedure testing shall be same as used for job, except that for carbon steel
and austenitic stainless steel materials, it need not exceed 40 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
Refer Appendix-2 of this specification for test specimen details.
4.4 The following data report (six copies) shall be furnished for review to Authorised Inspector
with the weld samples as outlined below.
a) Complete details of welding procedure employed indicating various machine settings,

welding rods, inert gas composition & purities, flow rate, weld sequence etc.
b) Mechanical properties and chemical composition of tubesheet, tubes and filler metal.
c) The hardness of the weld, the tube, the tubesheet heat affected zone and the tubesheet
base metal after each pass.
d) The complete test sample shall be cut (by sawing) as per Appendix 2 of this
specification. These shall then be subjected to various tests etc. as outlined below:
i) Section 1 shall be polished, etched and microphotographed for examination of

depth of weld, penetration and definition of boundaries. The minimum leak path of
each weld shall be not less than the nominal thickness of the tube. The weld leg
shall also be measured and shall be minimum 1.4 times the nominal thickness of
the tube.
ii) Section 2 (two specimens) shall be subjected to tear test. These specimens shall be
tongue bent to show the extent of weld penetration. The underside of the weld shall
show evidence of adequate & uniform weld penetration.
iii) A section 10 mm thick containing the tube end welds shall be sawed from section 3
and radiographed for weld quality. The radiograph shall be submitted to Authorised
Inspector. No cracks or crack like or visual defects are acceptable. Acceptance shall
be as per Appendix 4 of ASME Section VIII Division 1. In case the radiograph is
not acceptable, welding procedures shall be suitably modified so that proper weld
and acceptable radiographs are obtained. These shall be proved by retests.
iv) Section 4 shall be etched and polished and given to Authorised Inspector.
e) A tension strength test shall be carried out as per ASME Section VIII Division I
Appendix A. This strength test shall be performed at room temperature for each
combination set of tube and tubesheet P number and group number, tube OD, tube
thickness and joint detail. The breaking loads shall be at least equal to the load required
for breaking the tube using the minimum specified ultimate tensile strength of tube as
indicated in certificates issued by the tube supplier. When tube material is to a
Page 1641 of 1823

01 el ENGINEERS
FOR WELDED
ar laWs a INDIA LIMITED 6-15-0003 Rev. 5
WW1- riesne ONJW.1) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
specification which does not call for mechanical tests to be performed, ultimate tensile
strength of the tube material shall be considered as four times the allowable stress at
room temperature as indicated by the ASME Section II Part D, or other relevant code.
Failure of the test piece at the weld shall not be a cause for rejection in case the
minimum strength is attained, but the fracture should be examined for any evidence of
faulty workmanship.
4.5 Fabricator is advised to satisfy himself that the procedures employed are the best for the job and
would enable him to give workmanship guarantee for the equipment. Authorised Inspector's
approval shall in no way relieve the Fabricator of his responsibility and guarantee to supply the
equipment as per the conditions of the purchase order.
5.0 WELDERS QUALIFICATION
The purpose of this operator qualification test is to demonstrate that both the welding operator
and the welding machines are capable of producing satisfactory joints. Once welding
procedures have been qualified as above, welding operators employed on welding shall be
required to prove their ability by making test samples similar to that prescribed above for
welding procedure qualification. Welding operators may be qualified based on para 4.4 d (i),
4.4 d (ii), and 4.4 d (iii) above only, provided same welding machines & welding procedures
are used. This welding operator qualification test should also be carried out if the welding
operator has not executed similar welding six months prior to production. Repeat tests may be
called for in the course of manufacture to determine the consistency of operator or machine to
produce sound welds.
6.0 PREPARATION OF TUBES AND TUBESHEET
6.1 Tubeholes shall be to special close fit tolerance as per TEMA for shell and tube exchangers and
as per API 661 for air coolers. Tube holes shall be free from any burns and the bundle side edge
of tube holes shall be chamfered or radiused. Tube holes shall have smooth finish to 63 AARH.
6.2 Prior to assembly, the tubesheet and tube ends (inside and outside for a distance equal to the
tubesheet thickness + 30 mm) shall be cleaned and degreased to free from dirt, grease etc. It is
essential that the solvent used for degreasing be chloride free and sulfide free and non residue
forming. The solvent should not lead to any possible fire hazard.
6.3 The tubes shall be positioned in the tubesheets by 30° tapered drift pin.
6.4 Before welding tube to tubesheet, the tubesheets shall be heated to a temperature as required to
remove any last traces of moisture or solvent which may remain after the cleaning operation.
Any specific requirement for application of preheat shall be established as a part of the welding
procedure qualification test and should account for increased restraint offered by the larger
assembly during production.
7.0 WELDING
Tubes shall be individually welded, using the procedure approved by the Authorised Inspector.
Systematic welding procedure shall be adopted so as to result in minimum tubesheet distortion.
All tubes are to have initial pass completely cleaned as necessary, visually examined and tested
as per para 8.1 below, if required, before subsequent layers are applied. Welds shall be suitably
finished and any spillage or spatter on tubesheet removed. Spillage of weld metal into the bores
of tube is not permitted.
Page 1642 of 1823

0 c eJ ENGINEERS
FOR WELDED
$41g-err fWleg INDIA LIMITED 6-15-0003 Rev. 5
WRIT e9?aff,4151J,
Iir,
i, (A GOvt of India Undertak.9) TUBE TO TUBESHEET JOINTS Page 7 of 9
8.0 EXAMINATION OF JOINTS
8.1 Joints shall be subjected to air-soap solution test after first weld pass with air at 1.25 kg/cm' (g).
Procedures outlined in ASME Section V, Article 10 shall be followed.
8.2 After completion of welding, the tubesheet face, the welds and internal tube surfaces to a
distance of 25 mm beyond the fusion line must be cleaned thoroughly by wire brushing and
examined carefully for surface defects. Defects such as cracks, surface breaking porosity, slag
inclusions and lack of fusion are not acceptable.
8.3 After the visual inspection, a liquid penetrant examination in accordance with ASME Section
VIII Division I, Appendix-8 & Section V, Article 6 shall be done. Before conducting this test,
the faces of the carbon steel tubesheets shall be cleaned thoroughly by wire brush and solvents
to remove all weld slag, rust and scale.
8.4 When specified on the drawings or requisition, a halide test shall be performed after the tests as
per para 8.1, 8.2, and 8.3 above have been successfully completed. Procedures for halide test
shall be as per ASME Section V, Article 10, Appendix - III Halogen diode detector probe test.
8.5 After the final tube expanding (refer para 9.0) has been completed, the liquid penetrant
examination as outlined in para 8.3 above shall be repeated.
8.6 Whenever a halide test has been specified, an envelope test shall also be done as a further test
for leaks after final tube expanding. For this test, tubesheets shall be securely wrapped in plastic
sheets and the shell allowed to remain under test pressure with halogen tracer, for a period of 10
to 12 hours. Then with the detection set at a maximum sensitivity, the probe shall be inserted
through the plastic cover at the bottom of the tubesheets and readings taken to observe if any
leakage has occurred.
8.7 Final acceptance hydraulic pressure test shall be conducted after tube expansion at hydrotest
pressure for at least one hour.
9.0 TUBE EXPANDING
After the tests outlined in 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, and 8.4 have been successfully completed and all
leaking welds repaired, the tubes shall be "contact expanded" with a PARALLEL type
expander. Contact expanding is intended to bring the tube OD into contact with the tube hole.
Contact expanding shall begin 12 mm from the tubesheet face and extend to 3 mm from the
back face. The contact expansion shall have thinning of 3-5% which shall be ensured by
measuring the inside diameter of tubes.
10.0 REPAIRS
If leaks are found during any of the above testing procedures these shall be reported to the
Authorised Inspector and after obtaining his approval, repairs shall be made by removing the
defects down to sound parent metal and repeating the qualified weld procedures. All weld
repairs shall be retested in accordance with procedures outlined in para 8.0 above.
11.0 TEST AND REPAIR REPORTS
Test and repair reports shall be included in the Data Folder. These reports shall also indicate the
number of leaks discovered on each test and the extent of the repair done.
Page 1643 of 1823

k-
71 ENGINEERS
FOR WELDED 6-15-0003 Rev. 5
IIIW 9.W, INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Undo Undertaking)
APPENDIX 1 - JOINT DETAILS
W=t
FIG-2 R=t
FIG-1
D = t FOR t3
AND
= 0.6t FOR t >3
W t
3
Dj
R=t
W=1.5t
D= t
FIG-3 FIG-4
FIG-5
D = 1.5t TO 2t
FIG-6
t or 3
WHICHEVER IS MORE
FIG-7
Page 1644 of 1823

s
Ifgar tlf5te
Ill ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD SPECFICATION
FOR WELDED
6-15-0003 Rev. 5
1.1??, riront Ostatrom) IA Govt of India Undedakng) TUBE TO TUBESHEET JOINTS Page 9 of 9
APPENDIX 2 - DETAILS OF TEST SPECIMENS
30 30 30 * 30
0 0
0 0
FIG-11 FIG-12
NOTE:-
THE MOCKUP ASSEMBLY SHOULD HAVE THE
DIMENSIONS/THICKNESS MARKED'*' AS PER JOB
BUNDLE SIDE
FIG-13 FOR PLUG TYPE AIRCOOLERS
FIG-14 FIG-15
LEGEND
1. FOR MICROPHOTOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION
2. FOR TEAR TEST
3. FOR RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION
Page 1645 of 1823

araeiel.
ENGINEERS GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR
6-18-0012 Rev. 5
Igar1a5tegWi•IDIA LIMITED WASTE HEAT BOILER SYSTEM
, i1f7P1 tA Gort at Wm Underlalenin
Page 1 of 22
'Wu
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
WASTE HEAT BOILER SYSTEM
1-qzK?
5 12 02 20
SPECIFICATION
A4/
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD vPri'
4 28 10 14 PK DD/KJHN AP SC
SPECIFICATION
3 14 09 10 DD AK/DK AKG ND
SPECIFICATION
2 25 04 07 DD AK/DK AKG VC
SPECIFICATION
1 26 11 99
SPECIFICATION DD AKG RKA AS
0 15 06 89 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION SKK AB VM RNS
Standards Standards
Rev. Prepared Checked Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Page 1646 of 1823

GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR
WASTE HEAT BOILER SYSTEM 6-18-0012 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 22
Abbreviations:
ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASTM : American Society for Testing & Materials
AWS : American Welding Society
CIB : Chief Inspector of Boiler
CS : Carbon Steel
DP : Dye Penetrant
FPW : Full Penetration Weld
GTAW : Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
HAZ : Heat Affected Zone
HIC : Hydrogen Induced Cracking
DIA : Designated Inspection Agency
IBR : Indian Boiler Regulations
IGC : Inter Granular Corrosion
IS : Indian Standards
LAS : Low Alloy Steel
MP : Magnetic Partical
NDT : Non Destructive Test
NPT : National Pipe Thread
PWHT : Post Weld Heat Treatment
SS : Stainless Steel
TEMA : Tubular Exchangers Manufactures Association
UT : Ultrasonic Testing
GPC : General Purchase Conditions
WHB : Waste Heat Boiler
Fired Equipment Standards Committee
Convener : Mandip Kapoor
Members : Amit Prakash

Rajesh Patel
Dhiman Deb
Navneet Aggarwal
Prasenjit Saha
Deepak Gupta (Projects)
Pankaj Kumar Rai (Construction)
Page 1647 of 1823

Page 3 of 22
CONTENTS
S.No. TITLE PAGE NO.
1.0 SCOPE...................................................................................................................................... 4
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARDS ............................................................................... 4
3.0 DESIGN ................................................................................................................................... 4
4.0 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 4
5.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION ............................................................................................... 9
6.0 FABRICATION ..................................................................................................................... 12
7.0 MODULARISATION………………………………………………………………….…....17
8.0 RADIOGRAPHY AND OTHER NDT REQUIRMENTS..................................................... 17
9.0 HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 19
10.0 REFRACTORY...................................................................................................................... 20
11.0 MANDATORY SPARES ....................................................................................................... 20
12.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING.............................................................................................. 20
13.0 PROTECTION (PRESERVATION) AND DESPATCH ...................................................... 21
14.0 GUARANTEE ........................................................................................................................ 22
Page 1648 of 1823

Page 4 of 22
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the general requirements of mechanical design, detail engineering,
fabrication, supply, (equipment, piping including supports, ducting etc.) testing, statutory
certification, inspection, refractory and insulation application, painting, erection and
commissioning of Waste Heat Steam Generation equipment/system.
1.2 The intent of this specification is to supplement the applicable codes and standards.
2.0 APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARDS
a) Indian Boiler Regulations (IBR) & its all latest amendments

b) ASME Section VIII Division 1 & 2 (only for components not covered by Div.1),
ASME Section II, ASME section-V, ASME Section-IX.
c) ASME B 31.3.
d) ASME Section I
e) TEMA
f) Indian Standards: IS:875, IS:1893
g) IS 800
h) ASME B 16.5
i) ASME B 16.47
j) OISD
k) ASME B 16.9
l) National and local laws or regulations as applicable
3.0 DESIGN
3.1 The Steam generation side of the equipment shall be designed and conform to India Boiler
Regulations in case same is to be installed within India and shall conform to ASME Section I
in case of installation outside India.
3.2 Gas side of fire tube type equipment shall be designed and conform to ASME Sec. VIII Div.I.
3.3 Interconnecting integral piping of steam, feed water and other piping shall conform to IBR
and ASME B 31.3.
3.4 Steam side of the equipment shall be designed for full vacuum unless noted otherwise.
3.5 Vendor shall be totally responsible for the complete design & engineering work. Owner/EIL’s
review/approval of his design shall not relieve him of his responsibility in any manner.
3.6 Saddle supports for the shell and tube type boiler / steam drum shall be designed & analyzed
as per Zick’s equation. Sliding supports shall be provided with Stainless steel rollers. Vendor
to carry out structure design calculations for the same as per the applicable codes like IS875 /
IS800 / IS1893 or the applicable local country codes.
4.0 GENERAL
4.1 Equipment Under The Purview Of IBR:
(a) Supplier shall carry out design calculations as per IBR and only in case of any
doubt refer the same to Owner / EIL for clarifications. All materials, fabrication,
welding, testing etc. shall meet the requirements of IBR.
(b) In case the equipment is manufactured in India, the design calculations and
fabrication drawings after preliminary review of Owner / EIL shall be got approved
Page 1649 of 1823

Page 5 of 22
by supplier from CIB of the State where Supplier’s shop is located prior to start of
fabrication and in parallel from CIB of state of installation. When installation is not
in suppliers scope, Supplier shall also provide the necessary assistance to Owner for
obtaining approval from CIB of state of installation, such as providing additional
copies of calculations and drawings etc. as required by CIB of that State.
(c) In case the equipment is manufactured outside India, the design calculations and
fabrication drawings after preliminary review by Owner / EIL shall be got approved
by Supplier from the agency authorized by IBR in the country of fabrication and the
CIB of the State where the equipment is to be installed, before the start of
fabrication.
(d) It shall be the responsibility of Supplier to incorporate modifications or additions

required by CIB or its authorized agency and obtain the final approval. Owner and
EIL shall be kept informed and obtain EIL concurrence before any revision about
these. All costs towards approval from CIB shall be borne by Supplier. All IBR
approved design calculations and drawings shall be furnished to Owner / EIL for
final review of fabrication drawings and in equipment dossier.
4.2 Vendor shall supply all materials required for the job as per drawings/documents including
fasteners, gaskets, refractory with anchors/supports, demisters, ferrules, necessary erection &
commissioning spares etc. unless otherwise noted in job specification.
4.3 Steam Drum of WHB shall preferably be located and supported through risers and down
comers in shell and tube boiler. However, if this is not feasible in water tube boiler, it can be
rested on separate support structure. The flexibility of riser and down comers and other piping
shall be checked and ensured to limit thermal stresses and end loadings within limits as per
ASME B 31.3 and IBR. Design shall also take care of all expected external loadings
including platforms.
4.4 In case of system, the vendor shall give due consideration and take care of all the instruments
as listed in specification sheets / P&IDs and/or as required for proper functioning of the
system and shall comply to code stipulations.
4.5 All necessary arrangements such as supports, blinds flanges, gaskets, fasteners and other
accessories required for fabrication, testing and despatch shall be provided by supplier.
4.6 Suitable expansion joints i.e. metallic or fabric with flanges shall be provided in case required
to take care of thermal expansion.
4.7 Vendor shall supply stainless steel Name Plates as per standard.
4.8 Descaling, pickling and passivation shall be done for stainless steel parts.
4.9 For fire tube type boilers, the tube sheet design shall be suitable for the service conditions to
take care of differential expansion between shell and tube and high inlet temperatures. Thin
and flexible tube sheets shall be used. Thin flexible tube sheet shall be forged type with
knuckle arrangement and vendor needs to submit FEA (Finite Element analysis) during detail
engineering.
4.10 All the highest and lowest points in the piping/equipment shall be provided with suitable
vents and drains with isolation valves. Minimum nozzle size on equipment shall be 2”.
4.11 Two numbers 24”NB size man ways (internal opening type) shall be provided on both end of
Steam drum dished ends. In case of elliptical opening, clear I.D. of manhole shall be 610 mm
x 508 mm. Man hole on steam drum shall be self-reinforced type nozzle.
Page 1650 of 1823

Page 6 of 22
4.12 Suitable manholes / hand holes shall be provided as per IBR / codal requirements on Waste
Heat Boiler to facilitate fabrication and maintenance requirements. Meeting the requirements
is totally vendor responsibility.
4.13 Self reinforced nozzles are required if it falls under any of the criteria mentioned below:
a) Design pressure exceeds 50 kg/cm2 or

b) Design temperature is ≤ -10°C or ≥ 400°C
c) Plate thickness incase of CS exceeds 50 mm and in case of LAS exceeds 25 mm.
However all PSV connections, riser / Down comer nozzle connections in any design
conditions shall be self reinforced forged type.
4.14 All nozzle flanges shall be forged weld neck raised face as per ASME B.16.5 up to 24” and
ASME B16.47 series B above 24” unless otherwise mentioned specifically in drawings /
documents. Bolt holes on all flanges shall be as per straddle principal centerlines.
4.15 Minimum Corrosion allowance shall be 3 mm for shell & channels on the tube side unless
otherwise specified. For tube sheets of boiler, corrosion allowance both sides shall be
considered. Corrosion allowance on low alloy tubes shall be 2.0 mm, high alloy (9Cr) through
SS tubes shall be 1.0 mm and for CS tubes it shall be 1.5 mm, pipes and steam drum shall be
3.0mm. For Steam drum CS internals, 1.5 mm corrosion allowance shall be considered for
each wetted surface.
4.16 Nozzle flange finish shall be as per applicable adjoining piping material specification.
4.17 The thickness of dished ends/end plates, if indicated on drawing shall mean minimum
thickness after forming.
4.18 Chemical dosing and continuous blow down connections shall be located on opposite ends of
the steam drum to prevent short circuiting.
4.19 The drum design and arrangement shall ensure the required steam and water separation and
uniform distribution / circulation in conjunction with the rest of the boiler.
4.20 Drums internals shall be accessible and cleanable, and they shall be replaceable and
removable through manhole.
4.21 Down comer tubes shall be clearly separated from evaporating tubes so that proper water
circulation can be maintained.
4.22 Nozzles, stub ends for valves, fittings, mountings, pipes and anything to which drum
internals, etc., are to be secured, shall be shop-welded into place.
4.23 All hot work on the steam drum except riser / down comer joints shall be completed at
supplier workshop. Suitable edge preparation shall be done at works for those welding which
will be done at site due to ODC limit.
4.24 The normal water level shall be indicated by engraved marks on the drum and on the level
gauges.
4.25 Water Tube Boiler Specific Requirements
4.25.1 Waste heat boiler and steam drum/mud drum shall be designed to take care of external
loadings such as piping loads and operating platform loads etc.
Page 1651 of 1823

Page 7 of 22
4.25.2 Waste heat boiler shall be fabricated in modular form in qualified and / or approved supplier’s
shop. Maximum modularization at shop shall be done based on limits of transportation. In
case number of modules are more than one, these modules shall be trial assembled and hydro-
tested at shop, match marking shall be done and supplied which shall be finally site
assembled. Extent of modularization shall be maximized to reduce site activities.
4.25.3 ‘Tube type’ and arrangement shall be selected for ease of construction, repair and access.
Extended surfaces may be used. When not specified, tube pitch arrangement for convective
heat transfer equipment shall be rectangular or triangular.
4.25.4 All provisions for filling, hydrotest, start-up, shut down operation shall be included. Vents
and drains shall be provided to completely vent and drain pressure parts without high or low
point pockets. All vents/drains shall be flanged nozzles with blind flange. Eccentric reducers
on headers and piping shall be provided where necessary to meet these requirements.
Evaporators shall have drains with valves separate from intermittent blow down valves.
4.25.5 Access shall be provided for drains and piping under floors for maintenance.
4.25.6 The design of tube banks and wall shall be such that possibility of flue gas bypassing coil is
minimized. Therefore the free space between the wall and nearest tube should not be larger
than the free space between adjacent tubes in the rest of the bank and less if necessary. In the
case of using triangular tube pitch, suitable deflector devices shall be provided.
4.25.7 Vendor shall include in his design all measures necessary to ensure that no part of the boiler
installation and ducting shall be subject to excessive vibrations which are induced by gas flow
and which may reduce the design life of any part of the boiler and ducting, or create
equipment noise exceeding the limitations as per specification. Where baffles are applied,
they should be installed in line with the direction of flow.
4.25.8 Care shall be taken to ensure that the frequencies of gas vortex shedding from the tubes do not
excite or resonate with the natural frequencies of the tubes in the boiler, super heater and
economizer. In addition, such vortex shedding frequencies shall not excite or resonate with
the acoustic frequencies of the boiler casing or ducting. Standing waves shall not be
generated. After award of contract, Vendor shall submit all necessary calculations and these
should verify that resonance is not likely within the specified operating range.
4.25.9 In the event that, after initial start up, it is found that corrective action to reduce vibration is
necessary, it shall be the responsibility of the vendor to do corrective measures prior to hand
over of the boiler to the Owner. However, the corrective measures applied shall be subject to
the approval of the Owner.
4.25.10 The unsupported length of horizontal tubes shall not exceed 35 times outside diameter. Un-
insulated intermediate tube supports may be provided to meet this requirement.
4.25.11 All drums shall be outside the flue gas passage. Separate steam drum shall be considered for
the waste heat boiler system.
4.25.12 Tube stubs, suitably prepared for welding, shall be provided at the drums if tubes are to be
welded at site.
4.25.13 The length of the stubs shall be such that welding the tubes to the stubs will have no adverse
effects on drum or stub-to-drum connections.
4.25.14 Inlet of feed water and the separation of steam and water shall occur evenly over the length of
the drum.
Page 1652 of 1823

Page 8 of 22
4.25.15 Preferably the superheater shall be drainable without any pockets until unless any specific
reason in design.
4.25.16 The water, steam and water/steam flows shall be evenly distributed over the parallel coils of
the tube banks under all operating conditions. The number, size and arrangement of tubes, as
well as the size and arrangement of headers and interconnecting piping pertaining to each
parallel coil, shall be such so as to ensure even flow distribution.
4.25.17 The steam flow shall be evenly distributed over parallel coils of the superheater at all loads.
4.25.18 Tube bank coils shall be of all-welded construction.
4.25.19 Welding return bends shall comply with IBR and ASME B16.9. Return bends shall match the
inside diameter of the connected tubes or pipes.
4.25.20 Inlet headers shall have blow down facilities for sludge removal and drainage. Headers shall
not contain any non-drainable dead pockets. Headers shall have welded end caps but
allowance for metal loss that will occur after removing and re-welding end caps (for header
inspection) shall be provided by means of a suitable (minimum 100 mm on either side) and
accessible extension of the end of the header.
4.25.21 Tube bank coils / membrane walls shall be supported by a steel structure & buckstays
considering boiler configuration / thermal expansion to keep the shape intact.
4.25.22 Coil supports shall be designed for the maximum load, including the load resulting from
hydrostatic testing at site. The material shall be suitable for the most adverse conditions of
service. For high-temperature service, cooled supports shall be used.
4.25.23 Tubes shall be able to expand freely and independently of each other. The lateral movement
of tubes shall be restricted in order to prevent dislocation of the tubes.
4.25.24 Spacer strips which are welded to tubes or fins shall normally be of the same material as the
tube or fin. However, a check shall be made whether the higher temperature of the strip
requires a more heat-resistant material. Precautions shall be taken to avoid local overheating
of tube walls.
4.25.25 Crossover piping shall be outside the boiler casing (made out of water cooled membrane wall)
and shall be of the same material as the tube bank header upstream. Suitable external
insulation shall be provided on crossovers piping.
4.25.26 The casing (made out of water cooled membrane wall) shall have a design pressure based on
the most severe combination of the wind pressure/suction, and the worst operating pressure.
4.25.27 There shall be no restriction to the free expansion of tubes or insulation and sheeting.
4.25.28 The casing (made out of water cooled membrane wall) shall be gas-tight. The same shall be
demonstrated by smoke bomb test.
4.25.29 The casing (made out of water cooled membrane wall) material shall be adequate for the
temperature of service.
4.25.30 All casing made out of membrane wall shall be sufficiently stiffened against damage during
transport, lifting / handling, erection, operation and vibration. Stiffening shall not interfere
with the free expansion of the casing wall or associate components.
Page 1653 of 1823

Page 9 of 22
4.25.31 The casing design and construction shall facilitate the removal and/or installation, for tube
bank coil/super heaters etc.
4.25.32 The floor shall be sloped as necessary to provide for drainage during cleaning.
4.25.33 There shall be access and inspection doors to access the each tube harp section or tube bank
of the boiler from both sides. The access door in boiler casing in between harps / coil bunch
and duct (inlet / outlet transition) walls shall be rectangular with clear opening of at least 600
x 600 mm.
4.25.34 Centre line of Access door shall be minimum 950 mm and maximum 1300 mm above the
platforms/grade.
4.25.35 Vendor shall provide all necessary access platforms/stair case/ladders for approach to
instruments / safety valves / access doors/ nozzles / valves.
4.25.36 Any component requiring maintenance shall not be located below their access flooring.
5.0 MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
5.1 All materials used for fabrication shall be new and of first quality. The vendor shall supply all
materials and accessories required for the fabrication of the equipment covered under this
specification unless otherwise stated.
5.2 In addition to the requirements of materials as per material codes, materials shall also meet
the requirements mentioned in this specification and other specifications enclosed with the
requisition. All materials shall be certified for compliance with IBR requirements for the
equipment so specified in the specification. While procuring materials, vendor shall stipulate
additional requirements such as limits on hardness, UTS, yield strength, chemical
composition, heat treatment etc. to ensure that final requirement as per specification/codes are
met with.
5.3 All materials shall be accompanied with mill test certificates duly certified by a reputed third
party inspection agency. "All materials shall be accompanied with mill test certificates and
shall be correlated with mill marking on the raw materials like plates/pipes etc. Materials
without mill test certificates will not be acceptable. In the absence of mill test certificate,
check testing in lieu of mill test certificate is not acceptable. Check testing shall be done only
if some requirements as per EIL specification/PR/tender/job specification are missed out in
the TC or if required by TPI."
All cost towards such testing & inspection shall be borne by the vendor.
5.4 Wherever simulation heat treatment of test coupon is required as per code/specification, the
simulation cycle shall include one extra cycle of stress relieving for any eventuality of repair
at site by Client during the life of the equipment.
5.5 Pressure part plates having thickness 16 mm to 50 mm (both inclusive) shall be examined
ultrasonically as per SA-435. Pressure part plates having thickness above 50 mm shall be
examined ultrasonically as per SA 578 Level B.
5.6 All the tubes shall be seamless and cold drawn.
5.7 Pressure parts tubes in boiler shall be of seamless construction type. No circumferential weld
joints in pressure parts tube is allowed up to tube length of 11.5 m. If any joint is coming
beyond a length of 11.5 m, same also has to be highlighted in the drawing for EIL / owner
review.
Page 1654 of 1823

Page 10 of 22
5.8 Product analysis of tubes shall be carried out and reported in the material test certificate.
5.9 All unstabilised SS tubes shall be supplied in the solution annealed condition and all
stabilized grades of SS such as SS321 and SS347 shall be supplied in stabilization heat treated
conditions, in addition to solution annealing.
5.10 It is preferable while ordering tubes the maximum yield strength and hardness of tubes are
specified such as to be lower than those of tube sheet, in order to achieve sound expanded
tube to tube sheet joint, complying with Code requirements
5.11 Tubes shall be in fully heat-treated condition as received from the mill. CS tubes shall be in
annealed condition. LAS tubes shall be supplied in ( stabilization heat-treated condition in
addition to solution annealing, normalized and tempered condition)
5.12 Tubes shall be hydro tested. Hydraulic test pressure of tubes shall be higher of actual
equipment test pressure or as required by ASME material specification or as per IBR.
5.13 Forgings manufactured from SA-105 and SA-266 50 mm (2 inch) and over in nominal
thickness (thickness as defined in para 3.2.9 of ASME Section VIII Div 2) all tube sheet
forgings and all forging of other materials, except for the standard nozzle flanges up to 8” NB
and small forgings (of couplings, plugs and eye bolts) shall be 100% ultrasonically tested as
per ASME Section V, SA–388. Acceptance criteria standard shall be as per para 3.3.4 of
ASME section VIII Div. 2.
5.14 All pipes dimensions and tolerances shall be in accordance with ASME 36.10 / ASME 36.19
as applicable, as per material specification.
5.15 All non-pressure parts welded to pressure parts shall also be of the same material as the
pressure parts.
5.16 Hubbed forgings (WN flanges both for girth and nozzle) shall have hubbed portion formed by
forging process. Weld neck flanges only shall be used. However angle or plate flanges can be
used for non-pressure parts such as ducting and stack etc.
5.17 Material shall be strictly as per datasheets. However wherever only CS is specified as material
following shall be followed:
- SA 516 Gr 60 / 70 - Shell, Reinforcement Pads, Wrapper Plates, Lifting

lugs, Nozzle Necks made out of plates, any other
component directly welded to shell, channel cover.
- SA 192 - Tubes (for shell & tube type waste heat boiler).
- SA 105 - Nozzle flanges & Blind flanges.

- SA 266 Cl. 2 / 4 - Girth flange, tubesheet & channel cover.
- SA 106 Gr B - Nozzle pipes/tubes
- SA 193 B7 & SA 194 2H - Studs & nuts
- IS 2062/SA 283 Gr. C - Saddle supports, supporting structure, ducting,

stack, etc.
Page 1655 of 1823

Page 11 of 22
5.18 Specific Material Requirements (Pressure parts and parts welded to pressure parts)
5.18.1 CS and LTCS Materials
a) Carbon content shall not exceed 0.23%.
b) All plates shall be in normalized condition.
c) Use of SA 515 of any grade is not permitted.
d) Plates > 50 mm thickness shall meet following additional requirements of SA-20:
i) Vacuum treatment as per the supplementary requirement S1. If vacuum

degassing is not reported in the test certificates, then through thickness tests as
per SA 770 shall be conducted and minimum reduction in area of 35% shall be
ensured.
ii) Charpy V-notch test as per supplementary requirement S5 of specification SA-

20. Material meant to be used for design temperatures warmer than 0°C, impact
test shall be carried out at 0°C or MDMT whichever is lower and acceptance
criteria for energy absorption shall be as per Table A2.15 of SA-20. In case
acceptance criteria is not available in SA-20, then applicable design code shall
be referred unless otherwise specified in requisition. Orientation of test bar
shall be transverse to rolling direction.
e) Unless specified otherwise in requisition or bid document, all CS materials specified

as HIC tested shall meet the requirements of specification: 6-79-0012 or 6-79-0013
(as applicable).
f) All LTCS and CS charpy plate material shall be made to fine grain practice and the
primary austenic grain size shall be measured and reported in mill test certificates.
g) CS pipes shall be SA-106 Gr. B for MDMT greater than - 29 °C, unless otherwise
specified. For MDMT less than and equal to - 29 °C, CS pipes shall be SA 333 Gr.
1 or 6.
h) Non-standard forgings (SA 266 & SA 350 etc.) shall be normalized and tempered.
5.18.2 LAS Materials
a) All LAS plates, pipes, forgings, and fittings shall be in normalized and tempered
condition. Use of C-1/2 Mo material is prohibited. All LAS materials shall be charpy
V- notch impact tested. Test temperatures shall be lowest of minimum ambient
temperature, design temperature, MDMT and -18°C (O°C instead of – 18°C for 5 Cr-
1/2 Mo materials). Impact Energy values as per UG-84 or applicable specification,
whichever is higher.
b) Accelerated cooling from an austenitizing temperature by liquid quenching followed

by tempering is also acceptable (N + ACC. + T) is also acceptable for plates.
Irrespective of thickness, LAS plates shall meet the requirements of API RP 934
(Part as applicable).
c) In case of 11/4 Cr-1/2 Mo and 21/4 Cr- 1 Mo materials and weldments, the maximum
room temperature tensile strength for all pressure containing components, materials
and welds shall be 100000 psi.
Page 1656 of 1823

Page 12 of 22
d) For LAS tubes (SA- 209 and 213) hardness test shall be performed on outside of the
tubes as per SA- 450
i) For LAS plates > 50 mm thickness,vacuum treatment as per supplementary

requirement S1 of SA 20. If vacuum degassing is not reported in the test
certificates, then thorough thickness tests as per SA 770 shall be conducted and
minimum reduction in area of 35% shall be ensured.
5.18.3 SS and other High Alloy Material
a) All stainless steel material (300 series) shall be in the solution heat treated (fully
annealed) & pickled condition. All stabilized grades of stainless steel (i.e. SS 321, SS
347 etc.) shall be given stabilization heat treatment in addition to solution annealing.
For all stabilized grades of stainless steel materials soaking temperatures for
stabilization heat treatment shall be 915 °C ± 10 ° C and soaking period shall be
minimum of 4 hours (2 hours for thickness ≤ 3.5 mm).
b) SS (300 series) plates shall be hot rolled and shall have no.1 finish on both sides.
Cold rolled plates, if permitted by requisition, shall have No.2B finish.
c) SS (300 series) materials for all components including non-pressure parts like baffles,
tie rods etc. shall be procured with the IGC test as per ASTM A-262 (test shall be
carried out, after the specified heat treatment and sensitization per specification) with
acceptable corrosion rate and practices as under:
- For all services except nitric acid service, Practice E shall be followed.
Specimen after exposure shall be bent as per requirements mentioned in A262
Practice E and shall be inspected under magnification of 200 X. The bent
specimen shall be free of any cracks or grain dropping. The microstructure
shall be submitted to DIA for approval.
- Nitric acid service: Practice C with corrosion rate not > 25 mils per year.
d) For straight chrome (13% Cr.) material, maximum carbon content shall be <
0.06%. Hardness of UNS no. S41000, S41008 and S40500 shall be < 88 RB.
5.19 Non Pressure Parts
a) Saddle material shall be same as that of shell for shell design temperature > 350°C.
5.20 Gaskets
5.20.1 Hardness of metal jacketed gasket i.e. Gasket filled with filler (Filler shall be aramide fibre
unless specified otherwise in the drawings / specification and asbestos not be used) and solid
metal gaskets shall be as low as possible and shall be lower than that of the flange material
gasket facing.
5.20.2 All gaskets shall be made in one continuous piece all around including the pass ribs if any
and, therefore, must be cut from one sheet.
6.0 FABRICATION
6.1.1 For CS, the edges for welding shall be made by machining, chipping, cold shearing, oxy-
acetylene flame cutting or a combination of these. Chipping or cold shearing shall be
Page 1657 of 1823

Page 13 of 22
followed by grinding to a smooth and regular surface Oxy-acetylene flame cutting shall be
followed by machining or grinding to eliminate any discoloration of material affected.
6.1.2 For LAS, the edges for welding shall be made by oxy-acetylene flame cutting or by
machining. Cold shearing may be used for cutting thickness up to 10mm. Oxy-acetylene
flame cutting shall be used with preheat and shall be followed by machining or grinding to
eliminate any discoloration of material affected.
6.1.3 For austenitic SS, the edges for welding shall be made by plasma arc, however, cold shearing
may be adopted for thickness up to 15 mm. In all cases the cut edges shall be ground back or
machined back by 2 to 3 mm.
6.1.4 All welding edges after cutting shall be DP or MP examined for laminations, cracks or
segregation. Additionally UT shall be carried out within, two times the material thickness of
edge for LAS materials or five times the material thickness of edge for materials when the
service is low temperature or Hydrogen or HIC.
6.1.5 The paragraphs NF7 and NF14 in part UNF of Code are mandatory. This applies to
nonferrous cladding and weld overlay also.
6.2 Rolling
Rolling for bending and forming of plates shall be in the longitudinal direction of the plates.
This direction shall be clearly marked on the plates.
Re-rolling after welding is normally not recommended. However, if for large diameter shells,
re-rolling of welded shell course is inevitable, procedure for re-rolling along with extent of
NDT shall be submitted for approval of the DIA. All welds on the section to be re-rolled must
be ground flush. After re-rolling all the welds on the re-rolled section must be checked with
NDT methods like RT/UT/MR/PT as applicable.
6.3 Dishing
All dished heads shall preferably be of single piece construction. However dished ends with
one chordal seam are acceptable for shells with diameter greater than 2 m. In such cases, the
chordal seam shall preferably be in the middle one-third of the blank. Dished ends shall be
torispherical (Knuckle radius 15% of outside diameter and crown radius 80% of outside
diameter) or 2:1 ellipsoidal. Dished heads shall be subjected to DP test on knuckle portions
(both inside and outside) and weld edges after heat treatment. Supplier to ensure adequacy of
indicated thinning allowance for dished head. If nominal thickness indicated is not adequate
then the nominal thickness should be increased accordingly, keeping minimum thickness as
per item drawing. A straight face of 38 mm or 3 times the nominal thickness of dished head,
whichever is more, shall be provided, but maximum straight face shall be limited to 50 mm.
6.4 Welding
6.4.1 All welding and weld overlays shall be done with electrodes, fillers and fluxes of reputed
make with proven reproducibility of results. DIA shall specifically approve brand names. For
CS pressure parts, the electrodes shall be of low hydrogen type. IGC test as per ASTM A262
Practice E shall be done for austenitic SS consumables, which are to be used in application
involving solution annealing. Austenitic SS consumables of low carbon and stabilized grade
shall also be IGC tested as per ASTM A 262 Practice E. Straight chrome materials shall be
welded with electrode that produces an austenitic chromium nickel weld deposit or a non air
hardening nickel-chromium-iron weld deposit. However surfaces exposed to service fluid
shall have the composition same as base material (i.e. straight chrome material).
Page 1658 of 1823

Page 14 of 22
6.4.2 All welding procedures shall be submitted for approval by DIA giving all relevant details.
Welding qualification records shall indicate hardness values of weld metal, HAZ and parent
metal and also results of impact tests when design temperature are below 0°C or when
specifically indicated for materials being welded. No welding shall be undertaken until DIA
has approved the welding procedure and welder’s qualification. All welding procedures and
welders shall be qualified for the particular type of welding and material in accordance with
the IBR/ASME Section IX. Supplier shall be responsible for the quality of the welds
performed.
6.4.3 Pressure holding joints shall be FPW. Root pass of single side welded joints shall be done
with GTAW process. Backing strip for single side welded joints is not permitted. For LTCS
materials, both inside and outside of welds shall be ground flush or dressed smooth. All
internal welds in the shell shall be ground flush in order to insert and remove tube bundle.
Also all internal welds shall be ground flush to the extent of facilitating draining of complete
equipment. All other weld may be left in the descaled condition only.
6.4.4 Longitudinal seams shall be staggered with the circumferential distance between the centers
of welds beings at least 5 times the thickness of the thicker-plate. Weld seams shall be located
so as to avoid interference with weld seam of nozzles and external attachments.
6.4.5 Attachment to pressure part shall be of same quality as the pressure part. All LAS weld
attachments to pressure retaining component shall be FPW and ground to a smooth concave
contour. External attachments like lugs, supports etc. of carbon steel shall not be welded
directly to high alloy or austenitic stainless steel equipment components. These attachments
should be of the same material as the equipment component. If this is not so, intermediate pad
plates of the same material type as the equipment component may be used. These pads shall
be at least 100 mm wider and longer than the attachment and shall be at least 5 mm thick.
Welding of carbon steel to austenitic SS shall be done with austenitic SS electrodes or filler
wire (AWS-ASTM-E 309L OR E-309 Mo L only).
Wrapper plates, reinforcing pads, saddle plates or stiffeners of higher thickness than specified
can be used provided there is no change in basic dimensions and with the approval from DIA.
No separate deviation permit is required for the same.
6.4.6 Partition plates of CS and 300 series SS except for low temperature service, shall be welded
to channels etc. by continuous fillet welds with minimum size of 6 mm on both sides. For all
other materials and for hydrogen and low temperature services, all welds involving partition
plates shall be FPW. However all pass partition plates shall be FPW up to a distance of
2"(50mm) from the gasket contact surface. Partition plates thicker than 10 mm shall be
tapered to 10 mm at partition groove end except when mentioned otherwise on drawings. One
weep hole of 6 mm diameter shall be provided at the center of each horizontal pass partition
plate and a 5 mm radius notch on top and bottom point of each vertical pass partition plate for
effective venting and draining.
6.4.7 Welding of shell to unhubbed tube sheet shall meet the requirements of Code considering
that the tube sheet is unsupported.
6.4.8 When impact tests are required on material as per Code or specification the welds shall also
be qualified for impact test. In such case following special requirement shall apply to the
welding procedure qualification:
i) Qualification tests shall be made on plates of the ASME specification as specified for the
equipment using welding electrodes of AWS or SFA specification and wire & flux of the
specification and brand as are to be used on the job.
Page 1659 of 1823

Page 15 of 22
ii) Welding current and travel speed shall be considered essential variables in order to ensure
that production welding is substantially equivalent to the procedure qualification.
iii) Welded test plates shall be subjected to a total thermal cycle sequence similar to the
finished equipment. Specifically, test plates shall be held at intermediate and final stress
relief temperatures for approximately the same length of time as the finished equipment.
Final cooling rate shall be approximate to that expected for the finished equipment.
iv) Charpy V-notch impact tests shall be made on the weld and HAZ of the test plate for each
welding procedure to be qualified. Test procedure shall be as per UG 84 of Code. Test
temperature shall not be higher than MDMT. Impact energy requirements shall be as per
Table 2.15 of SA 20 of ASME Section II Part A or UG 84 of Code whichever is higher.
6.5 Nozzle Flanges, Nozzles & Reinforcing Pads
6.5.1 Flanges
Unless otherwise indicated, dimensions, drilling, facing and tolerances for nozzle flanges (and
blind covers if required) shall be as per ASME B 16.5 (for size upto 24” NB) and SME
B16.47 series B (for sizes above 24” NB) for the respective class. Weld overlays, wherever
specified or required, shall be in addition to the thickness as per these standards. Boltholes on
these nozzle flanges shall straddle principal vertical and horizontal centerlines of equipment.
If the component to which nozzles are attached is subsequently stress relieved, it shall be
suppliers’s responsibility to maintain true gasket faces by machining or otherwise. If
distortion is expected, final machining operation should be done after stress relieving;
sufficient machining allowance for this purpose should be available. All flange faces shall be
suitably protected against oxidation during post weld heat treatment. Gaskets, for flanges to
ASME B 16.5 and B16.47, shall be as per ASME B16.20.
6.5.2 Nozzle Pipes
Nozzle pipes shall be attached to the boiler components by full penetration welds. Attachment
welds using only inner and outer fillet welds are not permitted. Unless otherwise indicated on
the datasheets or drawings, necks of all nozzles shall be flush with the inside of the equipment
component.
Inside corners of nozzle pipes of shell and /channel I.D. shall be rounded off to 3 mm radius.
All nozzles 2” NB and below, except long weld neck, shall have two stiffeners 30 wide x 6
thickness at right angles.
6.5.3 Whenever nozzle inside is required to be overlaid, these shall be done by weld overlay or
cladding. Minimum nozzle ID before weld depositing to be 50 mm in such cases. Liners are
not acceptable.
6.5.4 Reinforcing Pads And Testing
Reinforcing pads whenever required as per drawings or / codes shall be of the same material
or equivalent as the boiler component to which it is welded. All reinforcing pads shall be
provided with two 1/8” (3mm) NPT tapped holes located 180° apart for air soap solution test
at a pressure of 1.25 Kg/cm2g. This test shall also be required to be carried out for slip on
flanges. Higher test pressures are not recommended because of accompanying risks and also
because the soap bubbles have a chance to blow off.
Telltale holes in the reinforcing pads shall be plugged with hard grease after the hydro test of
the equipment. No grub screws to be provided.
Page 1660 of 1823

Page 16 of 22
6.5.5 Nozzles For Sloped Equipment
Whenever the equipment is in slope because of process requirements, nozzles connected to

piping shall be true vertical or horizontal as the case may be. However Girth flange
nozzles, which shall connect the equipment to other equipment, shall be provided with same
slope. Instrument nozzles and other stand-alone nozzles e.g. manhole etc. may be provided
with or without slope.
6.5.6 Nozzles For Refractory Lined Equipment
Whenever nozzles are provided on refractory lined equipment, it shall be ensured that the
nozzles are refractory lined same as that of the equipment so that metal temperature of these
nozzles does not exceed the design metal temperature for shell as given in process datasheet.
For this purpose either the nozzles may be refractory lined. The gap between nozzles and
instrument shall be packed with suitable grade of ceramic fibre blanket in case of refractory
lined nozzles. Superior metallurgy for nozzle components such as SS 310 to meet temperature
requirements shall be provided. All these aspects shall be taken care while designing the
equipment and nozzle sizes etc. shall be accordingly selected.
6.6 Bolts, Studs & Tapped Holes etc.
Metric threads shall be used for all non-standard flanges. However ASME flanges may have
threads as per American standards. All inch bolting and threading shall confirm to ASME
B1.1 except for size 1” and above where it shall be 8 threads per inch. Metric bolting and /
threading shall confirm to ISO-R261 shall be followed except for size M24 and above, where
it shall have 3 mm pitch. Studs shall extend beyond the nut by about 10 mm and shall be
threaded full length except when square ends are required for use with BTD, in which case
the extension shall be as per BTD manufacturer's recommendation. The studs for extended
tube sheets and the studs for use with connecting piece shall also have square ends. All nuts
shall be of heavy series only and nut seating faces shall be machined or spot faced. Threads
on external bolting, plugs etc. shall be lubricated with graphite grease for working
temperature upto 200°C and with molybdenum disulphide for higher temperatures. Tapped
holes on the channel side face of clad tube sheet for removable bundles shall be fitted with
plugs of a material similar to channel side material in contact with tube side fluid. In addition
to stamping, the specifications and manufacturers symbol as specified in ASME material
specifications, on one of the ends the size of the studs shall be clearly punch marked.
Similarly the nuts shall have the size punch marked on one of the faces. In case of tapped hole
the size shall be punch marked near the hole without disturbing the gasket seating area.
Further for all alloy/SS metallurgy bolts & nuts shall also be identified by distinct colour
marking at the stud end/bolt side face. For extended tubesheets, tapped holes shall be
provided for girth bolting. Studs for these shall have square ends.
6.7 Assembly and Handling
6.7.1 Vendor shall be responsible for taking adequate preventive measures to ensure the quality and
finish of material.
6.7.2 For ease of handling, lifting, erection etc. of the complete equipment, vendor shall provide
adequate lifting and handling lugs etc. Lifting lugs should be suitable for handling equipment
complete with refractory lining. Minimum jerk factor of 2.0 shall be considered for the design
of lifting lug.
6.7.3 Jackscrews shall be provided on all girth flanges.
Page 1661 of 1823

Page 17 of 22
6.7.4 Wherever refractory lining is provided on the equipment in the shop, necessary care shall be
taken to avoid any damage to it during transportation and handling/erection at site. Refractory
dry-out shall be carried at shop before dispatch.
6.8 Fabrication Tolerances & Finish
6.8.1 The dimensional tolerances shall be within the limits indicated on EIL drawings/standards.
Where tolerances are not specified, these shall be in accordance with the requirements of
codes.
6.8.2 All edges and corners shall be deburred (or rounded, if shown).
6.8.3 All machined components shall have minimum 12 microns (500 RMS) finish unless
otherwise indicated. Parts subjected to ultrasonic examination shall have minimum finish of 6
microns.
7.0 MODULARISATION
7.1 WHB package shall be prefabricated, manufactured, assembled in an extensive modular form
and skid form. Module shall consists of all structures, piping, inlet / outlet duct, complete
instrumentation & electrical work, attachments, painting & final painting, insulation,
refractory, platforms, staircases, ladders etc. Package vendor to take care the same during
design, manufacturing, assembly, modularization, shipment and transportation. Modules shall
be transported from shop completely ready to fix up in foundation bolt basis for erection at
site. Therefore vendor shall carefully consider the site conditions, transport & shipment
limitations from his proposed workshop to job site or to port of installation country and
installation country port to job site premises, accordingly special tools & tackles and hard
stand requirement for usage of crane for lifting at high elevations and all issues shall be taken
care for enabling the erection of the items properly. Vendor shall make efforts for extensive
modularization and minimizing the number of skids & modules considering ODC limit.
7.2 Maximum modularization at shop shall be done based on limits of transportation. In case
number of modules are more than one, these modules shall be trial assembled and hydro-
tested at shop, match marking shall be done and supplied which shall be finally site
assembled.
7.3 Supplier / Vendor have to carry out hydro-test for modules and skids at workshop if possible.
Final hydro-test for the complete modules, skids and assemblies, has to be done at site.
8.0 RADIOGRAPHY AND OTHER NDT REQUIRMENTS
8.1 All the NDT procedures shall be submitted to the DIA / Owner’s authorized inspector for
approval. For all NDT activities, only qualified NDT personnel/technicians shall be deployed
with the approval of DIA / Owner’s authorized inspector.
8.2 The extent of radiographic shall be as specified in datasheets or drawings or job specification.
Radiography shall be performed after PWHT. In case radiography is carried out before
PWHT, then UT shall be carried out on the welds after PWHT.
8.3 Full radiography when specified shall imply 100% radiography of all butt welds.
8.4 Minimum radiography shall be spot, unless full radiography is specified in the drawings or it
is required as per specification / codes. Spot radiography shall mean at least 10% of the total
welded length per welder must be radiographed. Length of each radiograph shall be at least
250 mm. Further, all ‘T’ joints must be radiographed and at least one shot must be taken on
each longitudinal and circumferential seam. The Owner’s authorized inspector shall mark the
Page 1662 of 1823

Page 18 of 22
areas to be radiographed. This requirement shall supplement the ones specified in ASME Sec.
VIII Div. I.
8.5 Full radiography when specified shall imply 100% radiography of all butt welds including
nozzle flange to nozzle neck, pipe to pipe and pipe to fitting.
8.6 Weld seams of formed heads shall be 100% radiographed after forming and heat treatment.
8.7 All nozzle to shell welds and unhubbed tube sheet to shell welds shall be DP or MP checked
at the root run and final weld.
8.8 All welds, which cannot be fully radiographed such as nozzle to shell, shell to unhubbed tube
sheet, unhubbed floating head to cover etc. shall be 100% UT and MP tested after final
PWHT. Fillet welds and welds which cannot be radiographed or UT (i.e. pass partition plate
to channel and floating head etc.), the root run shall be DP checked and the welds shall be
finally MP checked after PWHT.
8.9 All nozzles fabricated from plate, irrespective of diameter, thickness of plate and radiography
specified, shall be 100% radiographed.
8.10 All attachment welds shall be either DP or MP tested.
8.11 If vendor intends to carry out radiography by Computed Radiography technique, then demo
should be carried out under AI to prove vendor's capability to produce acceptable images
meeting the Code requirements.
8.12 If radiography is being substituted by UT for the final closing seam as permitted by Code,
MP shall be carried out in addition to UT.
8.13 In case Supplier want to perform UT in lieu of RT based on Code para UW 51 (a) (4), the
same is acceptable subject to the following:
a) Material of construction is either CS or LAS.
b) The thickness of weld is greater than 13 mm.
c) Automated UT incorporating TOFD and pulse echo probes or TOFD and Phased Array
mounted on the same chassis that automatically traverses along the joints to be inspected
and displaying both results simultaneously on a single screen may be considered in lieu of
RT.
d) Calibration block of similar material/thickness shall be used. Calibration block shall have
suitable notches to simulate longitudinal as well as transverse cracks on outside and
inside surface. Setup should be capable of detecting defects on outside as well as inside
while scanning from one surface only.
e) The system that is proposed to be deployed in lieu of radiography shall be submitted

along with the track record prior to use for EIL review. The Supplier shall demonstrate
successfully the capability of AUT machine and the defects evaluation in the same screen
during the site visit of EIL representative. Based on which, the approval of the parties and
their AUT system shall be given.
f) Qualified NDT persons shall be deployed to perform UT.
g) Acceptance criteria shall be as per Code para UW 51.
Page 1663 of 1823

Page 19 of 22
8.14 Acceptance standards for radiography shall be as per ASME Sec. VIII Div. I or IBR as
applicable unless stated otherwise.
9.0 HEAT TREATMENT REQUIREMENTS
9.1 Post weld heat treatment (PWHT) shall be done as per requirement of datasheets, drawings,
specifications/codes etc. However, all LAS welds shall be PWHT. PWHT when required by
purchaser shall be over and above the requirements of specifications/codes. No welding or
heating is permitted after PWHT operation. All machining operations shall be carried out
after heat treatment. It shall be the responsibility of the supplier / vendor to leave sufficient
allowance for this purpose. Supplier /Vendor shall submit all the procedures for PWHT to
DIA for approval.
For LAS materials, preheating procedure shall be established in the welding procedure and
got approved by authorized Inspector. Preheating by resistance or induction-heating method is
preferred. Preheating shall extend uniformly to at least three times the thickness of joint but
not less than 50 mm on both sides of the weld. Temperature indicating crayons shall be used
for assessment of correct pre heat temperature.
9.2 During Post Weld Heat treatment of assemblies of fixed tubesheet type equipment, care shall
be taken to ensure that differential stresses are not caused between tubes, shell and tubesheet.
The temperature differential between shell and tubes during PWHT to be minimized (not to
exceed 25°C) and the rate of heating/cooling shall not exceed 25-30°C/hr. For this purpose,
thermocouple shall be installed on various components and compliance assured.
9.3 Heat treatment of CS and LAS dished heads shall be as follows:
a) Stress Relieving for Cold formed dish heads up to 16 mm thick.
b) Normalizing for CS and normalizing and tempering for LAS:
i) Hot formed dish head if not formed in normalizing range.
ii) Cold formed dish heads for thickness greater than 16 mm.
This heat treatment need not be given if same heat treatment is given subsequently on sub-
assembly. Thickness specified above is nominal.
In case of LAS plates, it shall be fabricator's responsibility to ensure that mechanical

properties of material are not impaired during any cold / hot forming process and subsequent
stress relieving heat treatment. Tests to demonstrate suitability of process shall be carried out
by fabricator.
9.4 SS components shall be solution annealed in the following cases.
i. Cold formed dished heads with nominal thickness of 16 mm or above.

ii. Hardness value of dished heads after cold forming exceeds 235 BHN.
iii. Hot formed shells, cones, dished heads.
After any heat treatment on austenitic SS, IGC test shall be carried out as per clause 2.2.3
(c)
9.5 All LAS welds shall be PWHT.
Page 1664 of 1823

Page 20 of 22
9.6 If stress relieving is indicated on shell side or tube side and the service on either side is lethal
or low temperature or if specifically indicated in the datasheet or drawings, the welded tube-
to-tube sheet joints of CS or LTCS material shall be stress relieved.
9.7 For LAS materials, preheating procedure shall be established in the welding procedure and
got approved by DIA. Preheating by resistance or induction-heating method is preferred.
Preheating shall extend uniformly to at least three times the thickness of joint but not less than
50 mm on both sides of the weld. Temperature indicating crayons shall be used for
assessment of correct pre heat temperature.
10.0 REFRACTORY
10.1 Refractory, wherever specified in the datasheet is minimum acceptable. Vendor shall check
the suitability of the same for the service conditions. Refractory including tie-
backs/anchors/lugs shall be selected, designed and guaranteed by Vendor. Vendor has to
ensure that the refractory engineering, supply and application / workmanship is entrusted to
highly experienced and reliable party supported by proven track record.
10.2 Vendor shall perform the curing/dryout operation of refractory. The vendor at his cost and
without delay shall immediately rectify any defects arising due to curing / dry-out.
10.3 Wherever equipment with refractory lining are jointed with flanges, the gap between retainers
shall be packed with suitable grade of ceramic fibre to ensure that metal temperature does not
exceed the permitted limits of the datasheets.
11.0 MANDATORY SPARES
11.1 Vendor shall supply following spares unless otherwise noted:
i) Tubes 5% of each type (for water tube boilers)

ii) Fasteners 20% (min. 4 studs and 8 nuts for each joint)
iii) Gaskets 400%
iv) Demisters 200%
v) Ferrules 10%
11.2 Vendor to provide mandatory spares as per the requirements mentioned in

specifications attached by other discipline like electrical, instrumentation, Piping etc.
12.1 The inspection shall be carried out be Authorized inspector. The materials, fabrication and
testing of equipment shall be subject to inspection by the authorized inspector in addition to
any inspection required by the specified code or by statutory authorities.
Inspection shall be carried out both during fabrication and before delivery and also for sub
ordered materials, if any. In addition to final inspection and certification by authorized
inspector during the course of manufacture, the vendor shall obtain authorized inspector’s
written approval at various stages of fabrication. For this purpose, vendor shall prepare his
Quality Assurance Plan, defining the stages of fabrication, hold points for his own inspection
and that by the authorized inspection/code or statutory authority’s inspection etc. The Quality
assurance Plan shall be re-approached from authorized inspector before start of job.
12.2 The presence of the authorized inspector shall not modify or reduce the obligation of the
vendor to carry out his own tests and control. Should any material and/or equipment be found
not in compliance with the requirements specified, the authorized inspection agency shall
Page 1665 of 1823

Page 21 of 22
reject them, even if such non compliance has not been evidenced in the course of inspections
and/or tests.
12.3 The vendor shall notify the authorized inspector sufficiently in advance of any fabrication
operations to enable him visit the vendor’s shop in time to witness the operations.
12.4 The vendor shall provide to the authorized inspector, free access to his shops at all times. He
shall also supply all tools and tackles to the authorized inspector for carrying out the
inspection. The vendor shall also arrange for similar facilities at his sub-contractor’s shops.
12.5 The vendor must satisfy the authorized inspector that the welding procedures, welders,
electrodes, fluxes, welding wires etc. are in accordance with the requirements of the relevant
codes/specifications. Further the welder’s qualification test must be carried out in the
presence of the authorized inspector.
12.6 Prior to final inspection, all slag, weld spatter, loose scale, dirt, grit, paint, grease, oil and
other foreign matter shall be removed in order to facilitate inspection. All reinforcing pads
and slip on type flange welds shall be pressure tested with air and soap solution before and
after heat treatment (if any) and before final hydrostatic test.
12.7 A dimensional checking of equipment shall be carried out taking into account the tolerances
shown on drawings/standards, design specifications or applicable codes. The more stringent
shall govern. Internal and external dimension check are to be carried out and the values to be
recorded on a copy of the drawings as being the “as-built” dimensions.
12.8 Hydrostatic Test
The Authorized Inspector shall witness hydrostatic test. When hydrostatic test is performed,
the indicating gauge shall be connected to the upper most part of the equipment. Potable
water shall be used for testing. For stainless steel equipment, water used shall not contain
more than 25 ppm chlorides. Equipment after final hydrostatic tests shall be despatched in as-
tested condition. Minimum metal temperature during hydrostatic tests shall be 20°C. Test
pressures shall be maintained for at least one hour. Shell and tube sides shall be tested
separately, unless otherwise mentioned on the drawing.
13.0 PROTECTION (PRESERVATION) AND DESPATCH
13.1 Vendor shall be responsible for taking adequate measures to protect the equipment till
dispatch
13.2 SHOP PAINTING: All steel external surfaces other than flanged faces and other machined
surfaces shall be given one coat of primer paint. Surfaces to be painted shall be prepared for
painting by removing loose rust, oil, grease and other films or substances harmful to the
adhesion of painting by an approved method such as shot blast cleaning to near white finish
as per SSPC-SP-10 [SA 2½ Swedish standard (SIS-05-5900)]. The shop primer shall be
inorganic zinc silicate @ 65-75 microns DFT. On equipment where shell metal temperature is
expected to be high and thermo sensitive paints are to be applied, requirements given in
relevant painting specifications shall be followed.
13.3 After completion of all testing and inspection, the inside of complete equipment shall be
thoroughly drained and dried out. Equipment shall be completely dried by passing hot air for
sufficient time until no further increase in relative humidity of outgoing air is observed. Dry
out shall be done simultaneously on both shell and tube sides for shell and tube type boiler.
After drying, these equipment shall be purged & filled with dry N2 at 0.25 kg/cm2. The
equipment shall be provided with pressure gauge to monitor N2 pressure, and ½” non-return
Page 1666 of 1823

Page 22 of 22
valve. All threaded holes shall be suitably protected with steel bar plugs other than tell tale
holes for testing. All nozzles not provided with blind flange shall be provided with steel
covers with temporary gaskets and bolts.
For equipment, which is shop refractory lined, vendor shall take adequate precautions to
avoid any damage to the lining during transportation and handling at site. In this regard the
vendor shall strictly follow the recommendations of refractory supplier.
13.4 The item number, P.O. number and Owner name and address shall be painted in bold white
paint letters written with stencil, on the equipment.
13.5 Despatch of Equipment
No equipment shall be released for shipment until the Authorized Inspector has approved it.
Equipment shall be despatched after the operations as required by Clause 11.1,11.2 and 11.3
have been carried out and shall be despatched in as-tested condition unless they are to be
refractory lined at shop. Packaging shall be suitable for rail or road transport and also sea
worthy if it is to be transported by sea. Spares and other loose components shall be
despatched separately in boxes and marked with P.O. number, equipment item number and
Owner’s job number name and address etc.
13.6 Site Preservation
All boiler pressure parts have to be kept under roof or shed. In case erection period is more
than 90 days all pressure part coils, panels, drum needs to be wrapped with suitable polythene
pack to avoid any kind of environmental effect as well as corrosion.
14.0 GUARANTEE
14.1 The vendor shall guarantee the materials, mechanical design, fabrication, refractory design,
detailing & application, workmanship and compliance of various technical requirements to
the extent of his scope of work and supply. This guarantee shall also include sub
ordered/bought out items forming part of the total supplies.
14.2 The vendor shall agree to repair/replace any part of equipment/components free of cost and
with no loss of time if:
i) Equipment designed by vendor (when in his scope) does not meet performance.
ii) Selected metallurgy/refractories wherever in vendor scope is not suitable for

intended service.
iii) There is defect in material or workmanship and/or it does not comply with
fabrication requirements, and/or against defects in design.
iv) It does not comply with various requirements agreed to be vendor at the time of
order.
14.3 Owner or his authorized representative’s inspection or approval of vendor’s

drawings/documents or deviations shall in no way absolve the vendor or reduce his
responsibility towards this guarantee.
14.4 The guarantee period and financial liabilities of the vendor shall be as per Owner’s
commercial terms and conditions or general purchase conditions (GPC).
Page 1667 of 1823

‘31 rft ENGINEERS FOR FABRICATION OF PIPING 6-44-0018 Rev. 1
IgIIIfaRegw INDIA LIMITED SPOOLS
lartETV etionfOoswoora) IA Govt of India Undertaking) Page 1 of 11
- 71-47 Tp.
11114)

FABRICATION OF
PIPING SPOOLS
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SM

1 31.03.21 PK SH
SPECIFICATION
0 01.07.15 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION SH AK RN SC

Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright Ell—All rights reserved
Page 1668 of 1823

ENGINEERs STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No. c
ea ogieglipINDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION OF PIPING 6-44-0018 Rev. 1
keen elemeneandia41 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
SPOOLS Page 2 of 11
Abbreviations:

BW Butt Welded
IS Indian Standards
LTCS Low Temperature Carbon Steel
NDE Non-Destructive Examination
PMS Piping Material Specification
SS Stainless Steel
SW Socket Welded
Convenor : Mr. G. Balaji
Members : Mr. Mahesh Kumar

Mr. R. Giridhar
Mr. K. Anjaneyulu (S&ME)
Mr. Pankaj Kumar Rai (Construction)
Page 1669 of 1823

ENGINEERS
Ifgat kffaegWily INDIA IJMITED FOR FABRICATION OF PIPING 6-44-0018 Rev. 1
tagtio, Vtarreaoa000tt)
SPOOLS
IA Gout of India Undertaking)
Page 3 of 11
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 4
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK OF CONTRACTOR .4
3.0 BASIS OF WORK .4
4.0 SUPPLY OF PIPING MATERIALS .6
5.0 FABRICATION .8
6.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING 10
7.0 MARKING 10
8.0 DOCUMENTATION .10
9.0 HANDLING, STORAGE AND DESPATCH 11
Page 1670 of 1823

t_Wkiel— ENGINEERS -
aft FOR FABRICATION OF PIPING
Ogar tilaegW; INDIA LIMITED 6-44-0018 Rev. 1
1.4117f etivetitavJoarat (A Govt India Undertaktngt
SPOOLS Page 4 of 11
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers general requirements of fabrication of piping spools. The

specification covers the basis of work to be carried out by Contractor and applicable codes,
standards, specifications and normal practice to be followed during fabrication by the
Contractor.
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK OF CONTRACTOR
Generally the scope of work of Contractor shall include the following:
2.1 Supply (unless mentioned otherwise) and fabrication of Piping materials including the
following
a. Pipes (All sizes and schedule)
b. Flanges (All sizes, types & Pressure ratings).
c. Fittings (All sizes, types and schedule)
d. SW/BW Valves (<2", for vents, drains and instrument connections)
e. Attachments for supporting/branch reinforcement made of parent pipe/equivalent

material e.g., protection shields, dummy pipes, low supports, reinforcement pad, etc.
f. Supports made of Structural Steel and welded to Pipe, e.g., shoe supports, lug
supports, stiffeners etc.
g. Cleats for application of insulation (by others), supporting etc., if applicable.
2.2 Shop fabrication of piping in accordance with documents listed under C1.3.0 i.e. 'BASIS OF
WORK'.
2.3 Obtaining approval for drawings prepared by Contractor from statutory authority, if
required.
2.4 Radiography, stress relieving, dye penetration, magnetic particle test etc. as required in
specifications attached.
2.5 Any spool joint which fails during Hydrostatic testing at site shall be replaced/repaired to
the satisfaction of Owner within Owner stipulated time frame with no cost implication.
2.6 All piping materials used for spool fabrication shall be identified and documented as
traceable.
2.7 The heat no. and Material Test Certificate of all piping bulk material supplied by Contractor
shall be recorded and filed for the material trace ability
3.0 BASIS FOR WORK
3.1 The complete piping work shall be carried out in accordance with the following:
3.1.1 "Approved for Construction" drawings and sketches issued by EH, to the Contractor - Plans
and/or Isometrics.
3.1.2 Approved standards and specifications.
Page 1671 of 1823

.
dadaeleiENGINEIRS
Oges faMegw- LIMITED FOR FABRICATION OF PIPING 6-44-0018 Rev. 1
,A God d Inda undegtiong) SPOOLS Page 5 of 11
3.1.3 Specifications/documents as below:
a. Job Piping Materials Specification (XXXX-6-44-0005)
b. Job Valve Material Specification (XXXX-6-44-0006)
c. Relevant Piping support standards.
d. Job specification of Non-destructive Requirement of Piping (XXXX-6-44-0016)
e. Standard specification for surface preparation and protective coating (new

construction), (6-79-0020)
f. Process Line schedule.
g. Job Welding Specification Charts for Piping Classes (XXXX-6-77-0005)
h. Job Welding specification for fabrication of piping. (XXXX-6-77-0001)
i. Technical Notes for Purchase of piping items
j. Job Standards for Non-Standard Items
k. Any other specifications attached with Piping Material Specification or special

condition of contract (such as standard for Dimensional Tolerances etc.)
1. Standard Specification for Positive Material Identification at Supplier's Works (6-81-

0001)
m. Standard Specification for Positive Material Identification at Construction Sites (6-82- I

0002)
3.1.4 Following codes, standards and regulations
a. ASME B 31.3 Process Piping
b. ASME Sec. VIII Code for unfired pressure vessel.
c. ASME Sec. IX Qualification standard for welding and brazing

procedures, welders, brazers and welding and
brazing operators.
d. IBR Indian Boiler Regulations
Note : All codes referred shall be latest edition, at the time of award of contract.
3.2 Deviations
Where a deviation from the "Basis of Work" and approved job procedure described above is
required or where the basis of work does not cover a particular situation, the matter shall be
brought to EIL and the work carried out only after obtaining written approval in each case.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 1672 of 1823

4a1;k1e1, 1ftENONBERS
Ogeji INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION OF PIPING 6-44-0018 Rev. 1
rawer eexatlerreJearso (A Gov. of India Undertaking)
SPOOLS Page 6 of 11
4.0 SUPPLY OF PIPING MATERIALS
4.1 Supply of all piping materials except tagged items, strainers, traps, orifice flanges, all
flanged valves, SW/BW valves greater than 1.5", blinds, Spectacle blinds, bolts, nuts and
gaskets is in scope of Contractor unless otherwise specified.
4.2 All material used for fabrication shall be in line with PMS and shall be procured as per
applicable Technical specification for purchase of the same where supply of materials is in
Contractor's scope. The materials shall be procured from the approved Vendor list attached
with the MR.
4.3 Pipe, pipe fittings, flanges and valves used in a given piping system shall be strictly as per
the "Piping Material Specification" for the "Pipe Class" specified for that system. To ensure
the above requirement, all piping material supplied by the Owner / Contractor shall have
proper identification marks as per relevant standards / Ell, specifications / Licensors
specification. Material traceability is to be maintained for S.S., LTCS and other exotic
materials. This shall be in addition to colour coding for all piping materials to avoid mix-up.
4.4 The Contractor shall ensure that for materials procured, Positive material identification as
per Standard Specification for Positive Material Identification at Supplier's Works, 6-81-
0001 has been performed. The Contractor shall perform Positive Material Identification as
per Standard Specification for Positive Material Identification at Construction Site (6-82-
0002) at his workshop.
4.5 Supply of valves is limited to SW/BW valves required for vents, drains and instrument
connections.
4.6 The Contractor must note that BOM given in Isometric is the exact material requirement.
Any cutting/wastage allowance as required by Contractor needs to be taken separately. No
payment shall be made for this allowance which needs to be considered at the time of
quotation. No allowance shall be considered for fittings/flanges/valves.
4.7 In case Supply of Piping Materials is in the scope of Owner, Owner shall supply pipes
considering a cutting/wastage allowance on 2.5%. No allowance shall be considered on
fittings/flanges/valves.
4.8 In cases where supply of Piping Materials for fabrication of Spools is included in the scope
of Contractor, the following minimum material shall be loose supplied as spare for every
individual item covered in the Material Requisition. Any loose supply material over and
above this minimum requirement shall also be supplied by Contractor as required. The rate
for all loose supplied material shall be same as that for supply as quoted in SOR:
ITEM SIZE % OF MR MIN. QUANTITY

NB (NPS) QUANTITY TO BE (PIPES -METRES
LOOSE SUPPLIED OTHERS - NOS.)
AS SPARE
PIPES Upto 1.5 15 12
C.S. 2-4 10 12
6-10 5 6
12 - 20 4 6
22 & Above 4 6
PIPES Upto 1.5 10 12
A.S., S.S.&Higher Alloys 2-4 8 6
6-10 5 6
12 - 20 4 6
22 & Above 4 6
Page 1673 of 1823

ENGINEERS
~'iszlr laiReg -
W: INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION OF PIPING 6-44-0018 Rev. 1
evivolVovJOOttit IA Gout N IndsO tAtOOttako.9)
SPOOLS Page 7 of 11
ITEM SIZE % OF MR MIN. QUANTITY

NB (NPS) QUANTITY TO BE (PIPES -METRES
LOOSE SUPPLIED OTHERS - NOS.)
AS SPARE
FITTINGS (Other than Upto 1.5 10 5
0-lets. for reducing fittings, 2—4 5 / 10 (for Elbows) 2
higher size shall govern) 6 —10 4 / 10 (for Elbows) 2
C.S. 12 — 20 3 / 5 (for Elbows) 1
22 & Above 2 / 5 (for Elbows) -
0-LETS (Given size is Upto 1.5 10 3

Branch size) 2—4 5 -
C.S. , A.S., S.S.& Higher 6 —10 4 -
Alloys 12 — 20 3 -
22 & Above 2 -
FITTINGS (Other than Upto 1.5 10 3 / 5 (for Elbows)
0-lets. for reducing fittings, 2—4 4 / 10 (for Elbows) - / 2 (for Elbows)
higher size shall govern) 6 — 10 3 / 10 (for Elbows) - / 2 (for Elbows)
A.S., S.S. & Higher Alloys 12 — 20 2 / 5 (for Elbows) - / 1 (for Elbows)
22 & Above 2 / 5 (for Elbows) -
FLANGES Upto 1.5 10 10

C.S 2—4 8 5
6-10 8 3
UPTO 300# 12 — 20 5 2
22 & Above 2 -
C.S. 2—4 4 3
6-10 4 2
600# & ABOVE 12- 20 3 1
22 & Above 2 -
A.S., S.S. & Higher Alloys 2—4 7 3
UPTO 300# 6 —10 6 2
12 — 20 4 1
22 & Above 2 -
A.S., S.S. & Higher Alloys 2—4 4 1
600# & ABOVE 6 —10 3 1
12 & Above 2 -
VALVES Upto 1.5 10 5
C.S.
150# & 300#; (FLGD/BW)
VALVES Upto 1.5 5 5
C.S.
600# & ABOVE;
(FLGD/BW)
(SW/SCRD) 800#/ 1500# 0.5, 0.75 15 / 10 10 / 5

(SW/SCRD) 800# / 1500# 1, 1.5 10 / 5 10 / 5
VALVES Upto 1.5 5 5
A.S., S.S. & Higher Alloys
150# & 300#; (FLGD/BW)
VALVES Upto 1.5 5 5
A.S., S.S. & Higher Alloys
600#&ABOVE; (FLGD/BW)
(SW/SCRD) 800# / 1500# 0.5, 0.75 15 / 10 10 / 5

(SW/SCRD) 800# / 1500# 1, 1.5 5/3 5/2
4.9 In case of any revision in Spool after fabrication and dispatch, Contractor shall supply all
material required for carrying out the revision as loose supply in addition to the material
listed in C1.4.8
Page 1674 of 1823

t31 ENGINEERS
$•geir 015ftWiF INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION OF PIPING 6-44-0018 Rev. 1
(.172'n elivore,o1Joimil
(A Govt d India Undertaking)
SPOOLS Page 8 of 11
5.0 FABRICATION
5.1 Pipe Spool Generation
It is the Contractor's responsibility to make detailed spool drawings based on the inputs
provided. Field welds shall be clearly marked. Spool generation software shall be used for
this activity. The IPMF files for all spools shall be provided by Contractor for spool
management at Site.
IDF files shall be provided where possible. The AFC drawings/sketches shall be governing.
Any mismatch between IDF and PDF shall be brought to notice of Owner/EIL.
All Spools shall have a unique Spool identification number.
Pipe Spools shall be identified so as to minimize field welds. In no case shall the field welds
exceed 30% of total welds in any isometric.
Pipe Spools are to be sectionalized to fit into a box 12.0m x 3.0m x 3.0m in accordance with
Shipping length.
5.2 Dimensional Tolerances
Dimensional tolerances for piping fabrication shall be as per EIL Standard No. 7-44-0486.
The Contractor shall be responsible for working to the dimensions shown on the drawings.
53 Pipe Joints
The piping class of each line specifies the type of pipe joints to be adopted. In general,
joining of lines 2" and above in process and utility piping shall be accomplished by butt-
welds. Joining of lines 1.5" and below shall be by socket welding/butt welding/threaded
joints as specified in "Piping Material Specifications".
5.4 Butt Welded and Socket Welded Piping
End preparation, alignment and fit-up of pipe pieces to be welded, welding, pre-heating,
post-heating and heat treatment shall be as described in the Job welding specification
and NDE specification (XXXX-6-44-0016).
5.5 Flange Connections
All flange facings shall be true and perpendicular to the axis of pipe to which they are
attached. Flanged bolt holes shall straddle the normal centerlines unless different orientation
is shown in the drawing.
5.6 Branch Connections
Branch connections shall be as indicated in the piping material specifications. For end
preparation, alignment, spacing, fit-up and welding of branch connections refer welding
specifications. Templates shall be used wherever required to ensure accurate cutting and
proper fit-up.
In case of branches, for sizes 1.5" and below, only branch fitting shall be provided on main
pipe and for sizes 2" and above, pipe stub of length 500mm shall be provided on main pipe
as a minimum.
Page 1675 of 1823

ift
L; ENGINEERS
ogela
imegw: INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION OF PIPING 6-44-0018 Rev. 1
MKT! eiERVE 213130i.) IA Govt of haw unciettakmg)
SPOOLS Page 9 of 11
For all branch connections accomplished either by pipe to pipe connections or by using
forged tees the rates quoted for piping shall be inclusive of this work.
Reinforcement pads shall be provided wherever indicated in drawings/ specifications etc.

Reinforcement pads shall be pneumatically tested at 1.05 kg/cm2g with soap solution.
5.7 Bending
Bending shall be as per ASME B31.3 except that corrugated or creased bends shall not be
used.
The completed bend shall have a smooth surface, free from cracks, buckles, wrinkles,
bulges, flat spots and other serious defects. They shall be true to dimensions. The flattening
of a bend, as measured by the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters at
any cross-section, shall not exceed 8% and 3% of the nominal outside diameter, for internal
and external pressure respectively.
5.8 Forging and Forming
Forging and forming of small bore fittings, like reducing nipples for piping 1.5" and below,
shall be as per ASME B 31.3.
5.9 Mitre Bends and Fabricated Reducers
The specific application of welded mitre bends and fabricated reducers shall be governed by
the Piping Material Specifications. The radiographic requirements shall be as per Material
Specifications for process and utility systems and NDE Specification.
5.10 Cutting and Trimming of Standard Fittings & Pipes
Components like pipes, elbows, couplings, half-couplings etc. shall be cut / trimmed / edge
prepared wherever required to meet fabrication and erection requirements, as per drawings
and instructions of Engineer-in-Charge. Nipples as required shall be prepared from straight
length piping.
5.11 Cleaning of Piping
All pre-fabricated spool pieces, pipes, fittings etc. shall be cleaned inside and outside by
suitable means. The cleaning process shall include removal of all foreign matter such as
scale, sand, weld spatter chips etc. by wire brushes, cleaning tools etc. and blowing with
compressed air/or flushing out with water. Special cleaning requirements for some services,
if any, shall be as specified in the piping material specification or isometric or line list. S.S
piping requiring pickling shall be pickled to remove oxidation and discolouring due to
welding.
5.12 Vents and Drains
High point vents and low point drains shall be provided even if not shown on isometric
drawing. The details of vents and drains shall be as per piping material specifications / job
standards / Valve material Specifications.
5.13 If the pipe contains a longitudinal weld, this weld shall not be located at the bottom of the
pipe; it should be located at least 45° from the bottom of the pipe.
5.14 Non-destructive testing/Post-weld Heat treatment is part of fabrication.
Page 1676 of 1823

isk ENGINEERS
51geji EVeglir INDIA LIMITED FOR FABRICATION OF PIPING 6-44-0018 Rev. 1
(Wel 212traVonJortra1 IA Govt of India Undertaking)
SPOOLS Page 10 of 11
5.15 Pipe pieces of less than 2M in length are not acceptable in Piping Spools unless required in
Isometric.
5.16 For reinforced branch connections, Inch-dia considered shall be two times the branch
diameter with branch pipe fabrication rate.
For Pipe-to-pipe connections without reinforcement, only single branch diameter shall be
considered for pipe fabrication rate.
5.17 Fillet welds for attachment of protection shield/supports to pipes shall be considered part of
fabrication of supports. The rate shall be included in the tonnage-wise rate for supports
which includes supply and fabrication. Cost of any Non destructive testing or Post-weld
treatment of attachment welds for supports shall be included in this tonnage-wise cost. The
weight of supports shall be calculated on the basis of weight of plates/pipes used for
fabrication of support. No wastage allowance shall be considered.
5.18 Welds between dissimilar materials shall be examined by the method and to the extent
required for the material requiring the more stringent examination. Welding Procedure
specification for dissimilar welding and electrode qualification test record shall be submitted
for approval.
6.1 Contractor shall submit the Quality Assurance procedure for approval. The Contractor shall
establish and maintain such quality assurance system as are necessary to ensure that goods
or services supplied comply in all respects with the requirements of this specification.
6.2 Refer to specification number 6-81-0153 for Inspection and Test Plan for Piping Spools.
7.0 MARKING
Surface preparation and shop primer application shall be as per painting specification. Line
number in black or white shall be stenciled on the pipe spool for identification purposes.
Spools are to be identified by their line number and spool suffix, which shall be painted or
stenciled as characters at least 50 mm high. The size of character shall be suitable with size
of the pipes. Painted numbers shall be located, and repeated as necessary, in such a manner
that any spool may be easily identified without turning or lifting it.
In addition, Line number with spool suffix shall be placed by cold rolling or low stress dot
marking on the outside surface of the spool at an approximate distance of 350mm from both
ends on each spool.
All loose supplied material shall be marked in accordance with Technical Notes for
Purchase of piping items attached with the MR. It may be noted that EIL 17-digit item code
shall be used for marking and identification purposes of loose supplied items.
8.0 DOCUMENTATION
8.1 Documentation with Dispatch
a) List of Spools in Consignment

b) Spool Drawings
c) Inspection Release Note
d) Inspection and Testing Reports (Welding, NDE, Materials, PMI etc)
Page 1677 of 1823

STANDARb SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
4afaziela ENGINEERS FOR FABRICATION OF PIPING
fafae_g INDIA LIMITED 6-44-0018 Rev. 1
Mery ereesiramJedee) (A Gout al India Undertaking) SPOOLS Page 11 of 11
e) Line History Sheet

f) Any other document required for completion of dispatch formalities
a) All documents sent with Dispatch

b) Documents as per Final Documentation Procedure.
9.0 HANDLING, STORAGE AND DESPATCH
The Contractor shall load, unload, transport and stockpile the piping material using suitable
means and in a manner to avoid damage. Branches shall be braced if required to prevent
damage during transit.
Pre-fabricated pipe spools shall be properly protected against corrosion and damage during
storage and transport to site. Flanges shall be fitted with flange protectors, including a
proven protection against corrosion for the flange face. Plain and beveled pipe ends shall be
provided with plastic covers.Care shall be exercised and adequate precautions taken to avoid
damage and entry foreign matter during transportation, installation, testing etc.
Small pieces shall be boxed or wired together to avoid loss in transit.
Page 1678 of 1823

NOM SCH C DEHG P
STIFFENER OG 0 150CL 300CL 300CL 600CL 600CL
+0 RF RF RTJ RF RTJ
L., _2
40, STD 154 160 168 170 171 51
2" 80, XS 152 158 166 168 169 48 58 8 6 6X6
owit 160 149 155 163 165 166 40
L
XXS 147 153 163 164 35
1115111IS 40, STD 177 183
161
190 192 198 61
IMI• ■■ ••••IIIM
MM••••MM SEE DETAIL-1 1 -
194
MMXIINI•••••////w
MWV.11./WW/N/ 2/2 80, XS 175 181 190 196 57 64 8 6 6X6..
WIMIRIM”../Mr
\*Ilw
160 172 179 192 188 194 51
40, STD 194 204 211 213 214 76
80, XS 192 202 209 211 212 72 64 8 6 6X6
160 189 198 206 208 209 64
XXS 185 194 202 204 205 54
40, STD 232 242 250 264 266 100

80, XS 229 239 247 261 263 95 64 8 6 6X6
4- 120 227 237 245 259 261 89
AS PER MESH SPECIFICATION 160 224 234 242 256 258 83
231 239
(NOTE 1) XXS 221 253 255 75
DETAIL-1
MESH SPECIFICATIONS (NOTE-1)

STIFFENER OG MESH OPEN MESH -
SERVICE OPENING (IN)
SPECIFICATION AREA% DESIGNATION
LOW
VISCOCITY 0.097 8 MESH 22 SING 62.2 TYPE 4
EQUAL TEE (MATERIAL & o<y< 2
THICKNESS AS PER SPEC.) MIDIUM
VISCOSITY 0.111 7 MESH 21 SING 60.3 TYPE 3
2 Sy 8
E HIGH
VISCOSITY 0.202 4 MESH 18 SING 65.3 TYPE 2
1> 8
GASOLINE, 0.053 TYPE 5
EQUAL SECTION FRAME ATTACHED BY PROPANE
14 MESH 26 SWG 55.1
INTERMITTENT WELD SIZE P
WATER 0.053 14 MESH 26 SWG 55.1 TYPE 5
BLIND FLANGE (MATERIAL PRESSURE
RATING & FACING AS PER SPEC.)
NOTES:-
1. THE MESH SPECIFICATIONS AS GIVEN IN THE TABLE ARE TO BE USED WHEN STRAINER
IS INTENDED TO BE USED AS PERMANENT STRAINER. IN CASE OF TEMPORARY STRAINER
THE MESH SPECIFICATION SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
FOR LINES UPTO 2 1/2"—
S.S STD. STOCK MESH 0.047" DIA WIRE X0.203 SQ.CLEAR OPENING-65.9 % OPEN AREA
FOR LINES 3"& ABOVE —
3/4"0
SCREWED S.S STD. STOCK MESH 0.08" DIA WIRE X0.253 SQ.CLEAR OPENING— 57.6 % OPEN AREA.
PLUG 2. MATERIAL AS PER LINE SPECIFICATION.
WELD NECK FLA GE (MATERIAL, PRESSURE 3. 3/4"0 SCREWED PLUG FOR DRAIN CONNECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED.
PCD (NO. OF BOLTS & BOLT DIMENSIONS RATING & FACING AS PER SPEC.)
& MATERIAL TO SU!T SPEC.)
6 22.03.18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD .51T`V

SH MI
t•44Y
RN STANDARD No.
lagiaddakENGNERs 5 28.03.13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD UK SH RN ATD DM T-STRAINER TYPE-1 2"-4"
oft tiolegmy ism LIMITED
emeiVirlagalio (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Rev.
Date Purpose
Prepared Checked Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman (150CL RF,300CL RF AND RTJ, 600CL RF AND RTJ)
7-44-0303 Rev. 6
No. by by Page 1 of 1
Approved by
Page 1679 of 1823

STANDARD No.
101 ENGINEERS VENTS AND DRAINS
filarfafAeg
laiRMFIRR151FMLTAWA)
INDIA LIMITED (ON LINES 1 1/2" AND BELOW) 7-44-0350 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
TYPE TYPE
TEE EQU
S
VC1 R E DUCINGALL/t DC1
3/4
3/4"
VF1 TEE EQUAL REDUCING DF1
VP1 ON LINE 3/4"-1 1/2" DP1
ON LINE 3/4"-1 1/2"

EQUAL TEE
VC2 DC2
VF2 DF2
3/4" in
VP2 DP2
J_L
ON UNE 1"-1 1/2"
ON LINE 3/4"— 1/2"
TEE EQUAL
VC3 REDUCING DC3
3/4"(NOTE 2) ON UNE 1"— 1 1/2"
V (NOTE 2)
3/4 "A
VF3 TEE EQUAL DF3
DC7
REDUCI
VP3 DP3
DF7 JL
ON UNE 3/4"-1 1/2"
DP7 ON LINE 3/4""-1 1/2"
DC4
DF4
VC4
DP4
VF4
200
VP4
ON UNE 1"-1 1/2" TEE EQU

REDUCING
(NOTE 2) 3/4" i S
VF5 TEE EQU S
TEE EQUAL
REDUCING A
-- DC5
(NOTE 2) X 3/4"
VP5 DF5
ON UNE 3/4 —1 1/2"
ON UNE 3/4"-1 1/2"
ON UNE 3/4"— 1 1/2"
VF6 DC8
DF8
VP6
DP8
DC6
VENT ON UNE 1"— 1 1/2" DF6

ON UNE 1"— 1 1/2"
NOTES :
1. DIMENSIONS INDICATED ARE VAUD FOR 50mm(1.4AX) INSULATION. FOR HIGHER INSULATION THICKNESS, INCREASE DIMENSIONS
AS REQUIRED. DIMENSIONS MARKED 'C' ARE MAXIMUM AND MAY BE REDUCED TO SUIT.
2. VALVES TO BE PROVIDED SHALL BE SIMILAR TO UNE ISOLATION VALVE (GATE, BALL OR PLUG VALVE ETC., WITH FLGD, S.W.
OR SCR'D ENDS) UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN PMS, BRANCH—OFFS UKE TEES(EQUAL OR REDUCING)/HALF COUPUNGS
S.W. OR SCR'D)/SOCKOLETS/WELDOLETS AND END CONNECTIONS UKE CAP/PLUG/FLANGE & BLIND FLANGE SHALL BE AS
PER PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION.
3. LEGEND : V = VENT; D = DRAIN; C = CAP; F = FLANGE; RED. = REDUCER, COUPUNG OR SWAGE; P = PLUG.
4. PLUGGED END OF VALVE OR FITTING SHALL BE THREADED.
5 06.12.19 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SG s SH MI
4 01.09.14 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SH AK RN / ATD SC
Rev. Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - All nghts reserved
Page 1680 of 1823

STANDARD No.
loi aft
-- ENGINEERS VENTS AND DRAINS
*laJT2154--eg
,,o13oosail
w INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertalon9)
(ON LINES 2" AND ABOVE) 7-44-0351 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
TYPE VENT DRAIN TYPE
V1 D1
VP1 3/4" DP1
D2
3/4"
V2
D3
DP3
V3
VP3
D4
V4
D5
(NOTE 2)
g3/4"
V5
NOTES :
MIN.
1. DIMENSIONS INDICATED ARE VALID FOR 75mm (MAX) INSULN.
THICKNESS. FOR HIGHER INSULATION THICKNESS INCREASE (NOTE 2)
DIMENSION AS REQUIRED
DC9
DF9
2. VALVES TO BE PROVIDED SHALL BE SIMILAR TO UNE ISOLATION DP9
VALVE (GATE, BALL OR PLUG VALVE ETC., WITH FLGD, SW OR SCR'D
ENDS) UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN PMS.
BRANCH—OFFS UKE HALF CPLG(SW OR SCRI))/SOCKOLET/WELDOLET
& END CONNECTIONS UKE CAP/PLUG/FLANGE & BUND FLANGE
SHALL BE AS PER PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS.
3. VENTS/DRAINS CAN BE PROVIDED ON FLAT SIDE OF

ECCENTRIC REDUCER ON SIZES 4" & ABOVE
4. LEGEND V=VENT, D=DRAIN, C=CAP, F=FLANGE, P=PLUG

■ DC10
5. PLUGGED END OF VALVE OR FITTING SHALL BE THREADED 3/4' (NOTE 2) DF10
DP10
2 le
5 06.12.19 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD 6G SH .50-41 411

(
4 01.09.14 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SH AK RN / ATD SC

No. by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - All nghts reserved
Page 1681 of 1823

STANDARD No.
doiReleita ENGINEERS ORIENTATION OF ORIFICE
Oaeliwas
maw (013gam
WM.
wINDIA
Govt of
LIMITED
(A India Uncrallarig)
TAPS 7-44-0352 Rev. 5
(CLASS 600 & BELOW) Page 1 at 2
FOR LIQUID FOR GAS LINES & STEAM LINES FOR VERTICAL LINES
(NOTE-1o)
DETAIL— 0 DETAIL— 0 DETAIL— 3 n

,/„. 1 /2-
,, n
... A
_A. 1 1 ,
PIA
Al
0
A„ ' ..41111kg.,
7. 1r
1,2 .
.„0011
•
?
141
.
. * FOR STEAM dc CONDENSIBLES, LOWER
BLOCK VALVE SHALL BE RAISED TO
Sdi
THE LEVEL OF THE UPPER BLOCK VALVE
FOR LIQUID LINES ON PIPE RACK FOR STEAM & GAS LINES ON PIPE RACK
WITH OPERATING TEMP > = O'C & LIQUID LINES WITH TEMP BELOW VC FOR TAPS ON PIPE RACK
NOTE-5
DETAIL— ® 00; DETAIL— 0 1/2- NOTES-5
.--
DETAIL— © FI
1D 1D/2
• 1/2' INST.
. 1 /2' 1/2'1 PIPING 1/2'
•
1/2" FLOW III 10111111
1/2- 1 /
DETAIL— C) r
0; DETAIL— . . 2' I I
PI
• /00";
UNE FLANGES
PER.SPEC.
ik• ORIENTATON OF TAPS SHALL BE
A. 1/2'
•
I.
..1
'
1 /2"
•
0 Oa
UQUID LINES WITH OPERATING TEMP. >,---- O'C •
45' FROM VERTICAL DOWNWARDS
STEAM, GAS & LIQUID UNES WITH OP.TEMP < VC •
45' FROM VERTICAL UPWARDS
INSTRUMENT SCOPE PIPING SCOPE

A. ORIFICE FLANGES ASSEMBLY WITH BOLTS/NUTS AND GASKETS A. TAPPING NIPPLE, COUPLINGS AND VALVES
B. IMPULSE LINE STARTING AFTER THE TAPPING VALVE
NOTES •
1 ORIFICE FLANGES IN HORIZONTAL LINES SHALL BE PREFERED.
2. TAPS SHALL BE ORIENTED TO SUIT
LOCATION OF INSTRUMENT.
3. TAPS ON PIPE LINES INSTEAD OF ORIFICE FLANGES SHALL BE GENERALLY USED FOR 16" & ABOVE (DETAIL-6)
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. IN WHICH CASE FLANGES SHALL BE SAME AS LINE FLANGES AND SHALL BE
IN PIPING SCOPE.
4. IN CASE OF VERTICAL UNES FLOW SHALL BE UPWARDS FOR LIQUIDS CONTAINING VAPOUR & DOWNWARDS FOR WET
GASES & STEAM.
5. THE ORIENTATION OF TAPPING IN CASE OF DETAILS 4 & 5 SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
FOR LIQUID LINES WITH OPERATING TEMPERATURE >= 0'C :
4,8 &16 BOLT FLANGE - AT 45' TO VERTICAL POINTING DOWNWARDS
12 BOLT FLANGE - AT 60' TO VERTICAL POINTING DOWNWARDS
20 BOLT FLANGE - AT 54' TO VERTICAL POINTING DOWNWARDS.
FOR LIQUID LINES WITH OPER. TEMP. < O'C AND STEAM AND GAS LINES :
4,8 & 1 6 BOLT FLANGE - AT 45' TO VERTICAL POINTING UPWARDS,
12 BOLT FLANGE - AT 60' TO VERTICAL POINTING UPWARDS
20 BOLT FLANGE - AT 54' TO VERTICAL POINTING UPWARDS.
6. DETAILS 4 & 5 SHALL NOT BE USED FOR PRE-FABRICATED HOOK-UPS.
7. FOR CLEARANCE REQUIREMENT AROUND ORIFICE FLANGE REFER EIL STD. 7-44-0504
8. FOR DETAILS OF ORIFICE TAPPINGS AND ORIENTATION, REFER EIL STD. 7-52-0005.
9 IN CASE OF PRE-FABRICATED HOOKUP, NIPPLE & ISOLATION VALVE SHALL BE SUPPLIED BY PREFABRICATION VENDOR.
10. FOR STEAM LINES, DETAIL-1 CAN BE CONSIDERED IN CASE OF SPACE CONSTRAINTS OR AS PER LICENSOR REQUIREMENT.
5 24.01.20 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD AO'S G ***/‘H

4 21.10.14 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SH AK RN /ATD SC
Rev. Prepared Chedced Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau
Na.
Date Purpose
by
Cceivenor Chaiiman
by Approved by
Ramat No. 11-00-0001-Fi Rev.° EL- Al dips resented
Page 1682 of 1823

STANDARD No.
da(leitcoft ENGINEERS ORIENTATION OF ORIFICE
Zigti Etife--5 W INDIA LIMITED TAPS 7-44-0352 Rev. 5
(41101mrerge =lawn> IA Govt. at Ind Undertaking)
(CLASS 900 & ABOVE) Pags2 d 2
FOR GAS LINES & STEAM LINES
FOR LIQUID (NOTE-10) FOR VERTICAL LINES
DETAIL- 0 DETAIL- 0 DETAIL- 0

0
0 4
.
4
A
11 3'4' it
A .... h...„,....
b, 1 MI
3/4" I. 1
3/4- 4, v
„ 0 11' , , ,„,01
ti 3/4"
3/4" .'" •-•
,.. IP
IIP~1
-
"11 * FOR STEAM & CONDENSIBLES, LOWER
ICA
rff'_„pe .
, BLOCK VALVE SHALL BE RAISED TO
5V' THE LEVEL OF THE UPPER BLOCK VALVE
FOR LIQUID LINES ON PIPE RACK FOR STEAM & GAS LINES ON PIPE RACK
FOR TAPS ON PIPE RACK
WITH OPERATING TEMP > = 0"C & LIQUID LINES WITH TEMP BELOW OT
NOTE-5 3/4' A NOTES-5
00 DETAIL- 0 „,
DETAIL- ® ©
-.
-do-'
DETAIL- .- • .,
3/4" .
.
. - OfFf 10 10 2
A • ..... 3 4"
. ,
A
V'
3/4 Ah,
V
INST.
PIPING A 3/4"
V
A A
3/4- -, -
FLOW 41 Illke
3/4"1. :3 / 4'
DETAIL- 0 or
gi DETAIL- 0 .4 N.
-4,
I I
UNE FLANGES
PER. SPEC.
ORIENTATON OF TAPS SHALL BE
.
. P. 3/4"
3/4 "...
„oil LIQUID LINES WITH OPERATING TEMP. > = 0"C :
45' FROM VERTICAL DOWNWARDS
STEAM, GAS & LIQUID UNES WITH OP.TEMP < CFC :
45' FROM VERTICAL UPWARDS
INSTRUMENT SCOPE PIPING SCOPE
A. ORIFICE FLANGES ASSEMBLY WITH BOLTS/NUTS AND GASKETS A. TAPPING NIPPLE, COUPLINGS AND VALVES
B. IMPULSE LINE STARTING AFTER THE TAPPING VALVE
NOTES ;
1. ORIFICE FLANGES IN HORIZONTAL LINES SHALL BE PREFERED.
2. TAPS SHALL BE ORIENTED TO SUIT LOCATION OF INSTRUMENT.
3. TAPS ON PIPE LINES INSTEAD OF ORIFICE FLANGES SHALL BE GENERALLY USED FOR 14" & ABOVE (DETAIL-6)
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN WHICH CASE FLANGES SHALL BE SAME AS LINE FLANGES AND SHALL BE
IN PIPING SCOPE.
4. IN CASE OF VERTICAL LINES FLOW SHALL BE UPWARDS FOR LIQUIDS CONTAINING VAPOUR & DOWNWARDS FOR WET
GASES & STEAM.
5 THE ORIENTATION OF TAPPING IN CASE OF DETAILS 4 & 5 SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
FOR LIQUID LINES WITH OPERATING TEMPERATURE >= CIC :
4,8 &16 BOLT FLANGE - AT 45* TO VERTICAL POINTING DOWNWARDS
12 BOLT FLANGE - AT 60" TO VERTICAL POINTING DOWNWARDS
20 BOLT FLANGE - AT 54' TO VERTICAL POINTING DOWNWARDS.
FOR LIQUID LINES WITH OPER. TEMP. < OT AND STEAM AND GAS LINES :
4,8 & 16 BOLT FLANGE - AT 45" TO VERTICAL POINTING UPWARDS,
12 BOLT FLANGE - AT 60' TO VERTICAL POINTING UPWARDS
20 BOLT FLANGE - AT 54' TO VERTICAL POINTING UPWARDS.
6. DETAILS 4 & 5 SHALL NOT BE USED FOR PRE-FABRICATED HOOK-UPS.
7. FOR CLEARANCE REQUIREMENT AROUND ORIFICE FLANGE REFER EIL STD. 7-44-0504
8. FOR DETAILS OF ORIFICE TAPPINGS AND ORIENTATION, REFER EIL STD. 7-52-0005.
9. IN CASE OF PRE-FABRICATED HOOKUP, NIPPLE & ISOLATION VALVE SHALL BE SUPPLIED BY PREFABRICATION VENDOR.
.43.b.,
10 FOR STEAM LINES, DETAIL-1 CAN BE CONSIDERED IN CASE OF SPACE CONSTRAINTS OR AS PER LICENSOR REQUIREMENT
,s G KT
5 24.01.20 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SH
Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau
Rev.
Date Purpose Convenor Chakrnan
No.
Format o.
Page 1683 of 1823

WELLS INSTALLATION STANDARD No.
daaeleigft ENGINEERS
Odes Em e.w
tillUFFIRDIFIEURFFil
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt. d Indio linden:1km)
1W' DIA. TAPS
( UP TO CLASS 600 )
7-44-0353 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 2
0<4"
04"
PIPES & FLANGES
0I I'll AS PER SPEC.(1YP)
NOTE-2
NOTE-3
NOTE-2 /
NOTE-3
TYPE o0
NOTE-2 TYPE
TW —6 8e NOTE-3 TW —9
00
TYPE F0.
TW-7 o
111
MEM 00.
00 O
111111MMIIIII
Mr=
O
O O
O
NOTE-2
MIlli
*, I IIMI
V
200
TYPE
TW —8 TYPE
MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR
LINE DIA.
REMOVAL TW-10
4" 630
6" 630
8" 670
NOTES:-
10" 670
1 BOLTS, NUTS AND GASKETS BY PIPING. 12" 670
TYPE — 6 : ELBOW MIN. 4" DIA. OR LARGER
2 BRANCH FITTING SHALL BE AS PER P MS
14" 670
3 IF BRANCH FITTING IS A COUPLING, TYPE TW— 7 : VERTICAL LINE 4' DIA. OR LARGER
16" 670
IT SHALL BE OF SPECIAL LENGTH. TYPE TW — 8 . HORIZONTAL LINE 4" DIA. OR LARGER
4 THE ARRANGEMENT CAN BE USED FOR 18" 670
DOWNWARD FLOW ALSO, IF CONFIRMED TYPE TW-9 : VERTICAL UNE DIA. LESS THAN 4"
20" AND LARGER 750
BY INSTRUMENTATION. TYPE TW — 10: HORIZONTAL UNE DIA. LESS THAN 4"
VESSELS 750
5 24.01.20 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SH

Date Purpose Convertor
No. by bY
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O - All ridlfs reserved
Page 1684 of 1823

WELLS INSTALLATION STANDARD No.
r DIA. TAPS 7-44-0353 Rev. 5
(CLASS 900 & ABOVE) Page 2 ri 2
200 UPTO 1 500
BY PIPING
PIPES & FLANGES
AS PER SP EC.(TYP)
TYPE
TW -3
UNE DIA. MINIMUM CLEARANCE

FOR RE
LEARANCE
L
4' 630
6" 630
NOTES:-
8' 670
1 BOLTS, NUTS AND GASKETS BY PIPING. 10" 670
2 BRANCH FITTING SHALL BE AS PER PMS.
12" 670
3 THE ARRANGEMENT CAN BE USED FOR
DOWNWARD FLOW ALSO. IF CONFIRMED 14" 670
BY INSTRUMENTATION.
16' 670 TYPE TW-1 : ELBOW MIN. 4' 0 OR LARGER
TYPE TN-2 : VERTICAL UNE 4' 0 OR LARGER
18" 670
TYPE TIN-3 : HORIZONTAL UNE 4' 0 OR LARGER
20' & MN 750 TYPE TW-4 . VERTICAL UNE DLA. LESS THAN 4'
VESSELS 750 TYPE TM-5 : HORIZONTAL UNE 0Ik LESS THAN 4'
5 24.01.20 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SH MI O'CA'

4 21.10.14 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SH AK RN /AID SC
Date Purpose
by
COOVIMIC, Chairman
by !.* oved
o.
Page 1685 of 1823

STANDARD No.
daMexiaft ErsIONEERS PRESSURE TAPPINGS
zgat mow Lemma w INDIA LIMITED (PA. PG, PC, PT, PIC ETC) 7-44-0354 Rev. 5
IA Govt d Indio Undertalung)
Pap 1 of 1
INST.
z
UPTO50 THK IN
33/4"
/4" PIPING.
INST. (NOTES 2&3)
INST.
P RED COUPLING
PIPING. 0. 3/4- L_PIPING.
(NOTES 2&3) (NOTES 2&3)
a.
PC-2 ON LINE 1 "-1/2" PC-3 ON LINE 1"— 1/2"

PC-1 ON LINE 1/2" & 3/4"
""*N.,
D 1
an to INST.
INST. g
0
3/4" (NOTES 2&.3) 4. PIPING.
PIPING (NOTES 2&3)
SWAGE NIPPLE SWAGE
PC-4 ON LINE 1"— 1/2" PC-6 ON LINE 1"—
INST.
INST.
PIPING.
PIPING.
3/4" 3/4" (NOTES 2&3)
(NOTES 2&3)
'0 II
PC-10 ON LINE 2" & ABOVE PC-11 ON LINE 2" & ABOVE
--0-1(FOR 0
FLANGED VALVE)
(NOTES 2&3)
NOTE-3
PIPING INST.
FOR 2" & ABOVE

PC-15 ON VESSELS / COLUMNS
NOTES :
1. THE INDICATED DIMENSIONS ARE MINIMUM WHICH ALSO COVER INSULATION TO THE EXTENT SHOWN ABOVE.
IN CASE OF HIGHER THICKNESS OF INSULATION THAN INDICATED THE DIFFERENCE SHALL BE ADDED IN THE
DIMENSIONS SHOWN ABOVE.
2. PRESSURE TAPPING SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH VALVE SIMILAR TO UNE ISOLATION VALVE (GATE, BALL OR PLUG VALVE ETC..
WITH FLGD, S.W. OR SCR'D ENDS) UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN PUS, TEE(EQUAL OR REDUCING)/HALF COUPLING(S.W.
OR SCR'D)/STUB IN/SOCKOLET/WELDOLET SHALL BE AS PER PIPING MATERIAL SPECS. DOUBLE ISOLATION VALVE SHALL BE
USED FOR CLASS 900 & ABOVE.
3 IN CASE OF FLGD VALVES BOLTING & GASKET ON BOTH SIDES OF VALVE SHALL BE IN PIPING SCOPE
4 IN CASE OF TAPPING PROVIDED OTHER THAN INDICATED IN THIS STD FOR LAYOUT REASONS
DETAILED DIMENSIONS WILL BE CALLED OUT.
5. IN CASE OF PRE—FABRICATED HOOKUP, ISOLATION VALVE WITH NIPPLE SHALL BE SUPPUED BY PREFABRICATION VENDOR.
HOWEVER, 3/4' WEU3OLET/SOCKOLET/HALF COUPLING/EQUAL TEE/RED TEE ETC. AS PER PMS SHALL BE IN PIPING SCOPE.
5 24.01.20 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SG SH MI Al-

Rev. Prepared Checked Stds. Coalmine* Stds. Bureau
No. bY
or..7-r— I 11 a
Page 1686 of 1823

STANDARD No.
OfazitaENGINEERS TOLERANCES FOR
fa5leglwINDIA LIMITED
WW1 FIRDT °UEFA) (A GM Of 11104a Undertaking) FABRICATION
7-44-0486 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
TANGENT
SECTION
A ±3mm. MAX FROM INDICATED DIMENSIONS FOR FACE TO FACE

CENTER TO FACE LOCATION OF ATTACHMENTS ETC TOLERANCE
CAN NOT BE ADDED
B ±1 5mm MAX. LATERAL TRANSLATION IN ANY DIRECTION FROM

THE INDICATED POSMON
C +1 5mm MAX. ROTATION FROM THE INDICATED POSMON MEASURED

AS SHOWN.
D +1mm MAX OUT OF ALIGNMENT FROM THE INDICATED POSMON

MEASURED ACROSS ANY DIAMETER AS SHOWN
E FLATTENING. MEASURED AS DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE MAX

MD MIN OD AT ANY CROSS SECTION
—3% MAX FOR PIPE WITH EXTERNAL PRESSURE
8% MAX FOR PIPE WITH INTERNAL PRESSURE
5 31.12.18 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD PK At)ZSH MI

4 31 12.13 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD UK Ski AK RN SC
Rev Prepared Checked Stds Committee Stds Bureau
No. by by
Approved by
Page 1687 of 1823

STANDARD No.
kSilfRele? (frit ENGINEERS
0153-eg
WPM MEM ASL3'ISI.1)
INDIA LIMITED
INSTRUMENT CONNECTION ON VESSEL, STANDPIPES AND TANKS 7-52-0001 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 4
INSTRUMENT CONNECTION ON VESSEL, STANDPIPES AND TANKS
6 13 02 20 REVISED AND REISSUED

RKT

MN AJS RG RKT

MN RKG RG SC

MN RG RP/JMS DM
Standards Committee Standards Bureau
Rev. Prepared Checked Convenor Chairman
Date Purpose
No. by by
Approved by
Page 1688 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
ligzir E INDIA UMI TED INSTRUMENT CONNECTION ON VESSEL, STANDPIPES AND TANKS 7-52-0001 Rev. 6
1.11,27, ORME' OAJOSOAO (A GOA or how undertaking)
Page 2 of 4
UNCLADDED EQUIPMENTS CLADDED EQUIPMENTS

SR. INSTRUMENT
TYPE OF INSTRUMENTS
NO EQUIPMENT/STANDPIPE FIRST BLOCK EQUIPMENT/STANDPI CONNECTION
FIRST BLOCK VALVE
CONNECTION VALVE PE CONNECTION
1 EXTERNAL DISPLACER LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON EQUIPMENT 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 2" FLGD
2 EXTERNAL DISPLACER LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON STANDPIPE 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 2" FLGD
3 EXTERNAL GUIDED WAVE LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON EQUIPMENT 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 2" FLGD
4 EXTERNAL GUIDED WAVE LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON STANDPIPE 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 2" FLGD
5 EXTERNAL MAGNETIC LEVEL INSTRUMENT/ GAUGE ON 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 3" FLOD 3" FLGD 2" FLGD
EQUIPMENT
6 EXTERNAL MAGNETIC LEVEL INSTRUMENT/ GAUGE ON 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 2" FLGD
STANDPIPE
7. EXTERNAL BALL FLOAT LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON VESSEL 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 1" SW
8 EXTERNAL BALL FLOAT LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON STANDPIPE 1" SW/BW # 1" SW/BW # 1" SW/BW # 1" SW/BW # 1" SW
9 INTERNAL DISPLACER / FLOAT LEVEL INSTRUMENTS 4" FLGD - 4" FLGD - 4" FLGD
10 INTERNAL GUIDED WAVE LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON EQUIPMENT 4" FLGD - 4" FLGD - 4" FLGD
11 MAGNETIC LEVEL INSTRUMENT/ GAUGE (INTERNAL - TOP 4" FLGD - 4" FLGD - 4" FLGD
MOUNTED)
12. LEVEL GAUGE ON VESSEL 2" FLGD 2" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD V," SCRD
13 LEVEL GAUGE ON STANDPIPE /4" SW/BW #

3 /4" SW/BW #
3 Y." SW/BW # V." SW/BW 4 3 /4" SCRD
14 SPECIAL LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON EQUIPMENT (CAPACITANCE 2" FLGD - 3" FLGD - 2" FLGD
PROBE/ULTRASONIC PROBE/R F PROBE)
15 D P INSTRUMENT/ GAUGES ON VESSEL 2 " FLGD 2 " BW/FLGD # 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 1 /4 " SCRD
16 D P INSTRUMENT/ GAUGES ON STANDPIPE 3 /4" SW/BW # 3 /4" SW/BW 4 %" SW/BW 4 3 /4" SW/BW # /2" SCRD.
I
17 DIAPHRAGM SEAL D P INSTRUMENT/ GAUGES ON VESSEL 3" FLGD 3" FLGD. 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD
18 EXTENDED DIAPHRAGM SEAL D P INSTR/ GAUGE ON VESSEL 4" FLGD (NOTE-1) - 4" FLGD (NOTE-1) - 4" FLGD
Page 1689 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ISIRtzr& ,i--
ENGINEERS
Og-ar ElgiZs INDIA LIMITED INSTRUMENT CONNECTION ON VESSEL, STANDPIPES AND TANKS 7-52-0001 Rev. 6
laiTer, eleaRe on..meall (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 3 of 4

SR. INSTRUMENT
TYPE OF INSTRUMENTS
FIRST BLOCK VALVE
19 DIP TUBE LEVEL INSTRUMENT 6 " FLGD Y. " SW (BY INST) 6" FLGD. Y2" SW (BY INST) Y2" SCRD
20 TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT (MECHANICAL) 1Y. " FLGD 1'/2 " FLGD (BY - - Y2" SCRD
INST)
21 TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT (SERVO) ON ATMOSPHERIC TANKS 6" FLGD - - - 6" FLGD
(NOTE-7)
22 TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT (SERVO) FOR PRESSURISED 6" FLGD 6" FLGD (BY INST) 6" FLGD 6" FLGD (BY INST) 6" FLGD
EQUIPMENT (NOTE-7)
23 TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT (RADAR) ON ATMOSPHERIC TANK 8" FLGD - - - 8" FLGD
(CLEAN SERVICE) (NOTE-8)
24 TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT (RADAR) ON ATMOSPHERIC TANK 24" FLGD - - - 24" FLGD
(VISCOUS SERVICE)
25 TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT (RADAR) FOR PRESSURISED 8" FLGD - 8" FLGD - 8" FLGD
EQUIPMENTS (NOTE-9)
26 TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT — CAPACITANCE / ULTRASONIC/ RF 2" FLGD - 3" FLGD - 2" FLGD
TYPE ON ATMOSPHERIC TANKS/PRESSURISED EQUIPMENTS
27 TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT — TUNING FORK 3" FLGD - - - 3" FLGD
28 PRESSURE INSTRUMENT/ GAUGE ON VESSEL 2 " FLGD 2 " BW/ FLGD 4 3" FLGD 3" BW/FLGD # Y2" SCRD
29 PRESSURE INSTRUMENT/ GAUGE ON STANDPIPE %" SW/BW # %" SW/BW 4 3/4" SW/BW # %" SW/BW # V2 " SCRD
30 DIAPHRAGM SEAL PRESSURE INSTRUMENT /GAUGE ON VESSEL 2 " FLGD 2 " FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 2" FLGD
31 THERMOWELL ON EQUIPMENT 2 " FLGD - 3" FLGD - 2 " FLGD/ 3"

FLGD
32 MULTI-POINT TEMPERATURE ELEMENTS FOR ATMOSPHERIC 3"FLGD - 3" FLGD - 3" FLGD
TANKS (NOTE-10)
33 MULTI-POINT TEMPERATURE ELEMENTS FOR PRESSURISED 3"FLGD - 3" FLGD - 3" FLGD
EQUIPMENTS (NOTE-11)
Format No 8-00-0001-F7 Rev. 0 Copyright DL—All rights reserved
Page 1690 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
Og-ar iM51 4e
-1 --6
el,INlAAJ,70.1)
taken
INDIA LIMITED
INSTRUMENT CONNECTION ON VESSEL, STANDPIPES AND TANKS 7-52-0001 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 4

SR. INSTRUMENT
TYPE OF INSTRUMENTS
FIRST BLOCK VALVE
34 STANDPIPE (RATING UP TO 600#) 2"FLGD - 3" FLGD - -
35 STANDPIPE (RATING > 600#) 3"FLGD - 3" FLGD - -
36 LEVEL INSTRUMENT (NON CONTACT RADAR) ON PROCESS 4" FLGD

VESSELS (NOTE-6)
NOTES 1 O D OF EXTENDED DIAPHRAGM OF INSTRUMENT SHALL BE SELECTED TO SUIT NOZZLE I D OF EQUIPMENT.

2 ALL FLANGES/SW RATING SHALL BE AS PER PIPING SPECIFICATION UNLESS PROJECT SPECIFICATION REQUIRES MIN 300#
3 IN CASE OF DIRECT MOUNTED FLANGED INSTRUMENTS AND WHERE FLANGED TYPE FIRST ISOLATION VALVE ARE PROVIDED, STUD/BOLTS & NUTS AND GASKETS SHALL BE IN PIPING
SCOPE
4 INSTALLATION OF STLL WELL OF TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENTS (SERVO, MECHANICAL AND MULTIPOINT TEMPERATURE ELEMENT) ON TANKS ARE IN TANK VENDOR SCOPE
5 FOR ANY OTHER INSTRUMENTS NOT REFERED ABOVE THE CONNECTION DETAILS SHALL BE AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT
6 4"LWN NOZZLE HAVING I/D OF 101 6 MM WILL BE CONSIDERED IN VESSEL STILLWELL SIZE (IN CASE REQUIRED) SHALL BE 4" SCH 80 WITH SS METALLURGY AND WILL BE IN VESSEL
VENDOR SCOPE
7 STILLWELL SIZE SHALL BE 12" SCH 40 WITH SS316 METALLURGY AND WILL BE IN TANK / EQUIPMENT VENDOR SCOPE. STILLWELL SHALL BE HAVING 20MM DIA HOLE AND EVERY HOLE
TURNED 180 DEG 500mm EQUAL SPACE BETWEEN 2 HOLES FOR ENTIRE PIPE LENGHT
8 8" TANK NOZZLE SHALL BE OF SS METALLURGY WITH SCH 40 AND STILLWELL SIZE SHALL BE 8" SCH 40 WITH SS316 METALLURGY AND WILL BE IN TANK / EQUIPMENT VENDOR SCOPE
STILLWELL SHALL BE HAVING 20MM DIA HOLE AND EVERY HOLE TURNED 180 DEG 500mm EQUAL SPACE BETWEEN 2 HOLES FOR ENTIRE PIPE LENGHT
9 STILLWELL SIZE SHALL BE 6" OR 4" SCH 40 WITH SS316 METALLURGY STILLWELL ALONG WITH FILLER FLANGE TO MATCH WITH 8" NOZZLE WILL BE IN EQUIPMENT VENDOR SCOPE
STILLWELL SHALL BE HAVING 20MM OR 5 MM DIA HOLE ON ONE SIDE OF STILLWELL AND 500mm EQUAL SPACE BETWEEN 2 HOLES FOR ENTIRE PIPE LENGHT EXACT SIZE OF STILLWELL
AND HOLE SIZE WILL BE FIRMED ONCE INSTRUMENT VENDOR IS FIANLISED
10 STILLWELL SIZE SHALL BE 3" SCH 40 WITH SS METALLURGY / SCH 80 WITH CS METALLURGY AND WILL BE IN TANK / EQUIPMENT VENDOR SCOPE STILLWELL SHALL BE HAVING 20MM
DIA HOLE AND EVERY HOLE TURNED 180 DEG 500mm EQUAL SPACE BETWEEN 2 HOLES FOR ENTIRE PIPE LENGHT
11 STILLWELL SIZE SHALL BE 3" SCH 40 WITH SS METALLURGY / SCH 80 WITH CS METALLURGY AND WILL BE IN EQUIPMENT VENDOR SCOPE STILLWELL-CLOSED (WITHOUT ANY HOLES)
UPTO BOTTOM (LIKE A THERMOWELL) SHALL BE PROVIDED
# AS PER PIPING SPECIFICATION/PROJECT PHILOSOPHY
Format No 8-00-0001-F7 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved
Page 1691 of 1823

STANDARD No.
la ei ENGINEERS
lig-e, a EfFleg
,,... ,....., INDIA LIMITED INSTRUMENT CONNECTION ON PIPES 7-52-0002 Rev. 5
EA Geri al ktdi UNdetlatin(11
Page 1 of 3
INSTRUMENT CONNECTION ON PIPES
5 10.10 19 REVISED AND REISSUED

JS
MN RKG RG SC
MN RG RP/JMS DM

MN TGM HCJ VC
Standards Standards
Committee Bureau
No. by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F7 Rev 0

Page 1692 of 1823

STANDARD No.
Mt ENGINEERS
$1g-zir fd2egNir INDIA LIMITED
tovn rwcwanarstsw) (A Govt of India Undertakoog)
INSTRUMENT CONNECTION ON PIPES 7-52-0002 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 3
(A) BARE PIPES

WHERE PIPING CLASS RECOMMENDS WHERE PIPING CLASS RECOMMENDS WHERE PIPING CLASS RECOMMENDS
S. TYPE OF SCRD CONNECTION SW/BW # CONNECTION FLGD CONNECTION
FIRST
NO INSTRUMENTS PROCESS FIRST BLOCK INSTRUMENTS PROCESS FIRST BLOCK INSTRUMENTS PROCESS INSTRUMENTS
BLOCK
CONNECTION VALVE CONNECTION CONNECTION VALVE CONNECTION CONNECTION CONNECTION
VALVE
FLOW METER -.. 6004 'A" SCRD* 'A" SCRD* 'A" SCRD 'A" SCRD* 'A" SW 'A" SCRD A" SCRD* 'A" FLGD 'A" SCRD
I
ORIFICE > 6004 - - - 3/4" SCRD** 3/4" BW 'A" SCRD 3/4" SCRD** 3/4" FLGD 'A" SCRD
FLOWMETER ... 600# 'A" FLGD 'A" FLGD 'A" SCRD 'A" FLGD 'A" FLGD 'A" SCRD 'A" FLGD 'A" FLGD 'A" SCRD
2
VENTURI/NOZZLE > 600# - -- 3/4" FLGD 'A" FLGD 'A" SCRD 3/4" FLGD 3/4" FLGD 'A" SCRD
FLOW METER ... 6004 'A" SCRD* 'A" SCRD* 3"FLGD 'A" SCRD* 'A" SW 3" FLGD 'A" SCRD* 'A" FLGD 3"FLGD
3
ORIFICE 3/4" SCRD** 3/4" BW 3/4" SCRD** 3/4" FLGD
> 6004 - - - 3" FLGD 3"FLGD
(DIAPH SEAL)
FLOW METER .-.. 600# 'A" FLGD 'A" FLGD 3" FLGD 'A" FLGD 'A" FLGD 3" FLGD 'A" FLGD 'A" FLGD 3"FLGD
4
VENTURI/NOZZLE> 6004 - - - 3/4" FLGD 3/4" FLGD 3/4" FLGD 34" FLGD 3"FLGD
3" FLGD
(DIAPH SEAL)
FLOW METER 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD
5 3" FLGD 3" FLGD+ 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD+
AVERAGING PITOT TUBE (BY INST) (BY INST) (BY INST)
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
6 3/4" SCRD* 3/4" SCRD* 'A" SCRD 3/4" SW/BW# 3/4" SW/BW# 'A" SCRD 3/4" FLGD 3/4" FLGD 'A" SCRD
(DP) INSTRUMENTS <5>
DIAPHGRAM SEAL D P
3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD
INSTRUMENTS <5>
PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS
8 <5> 3/4" SCRD* 3/4" SCRD* 'A" SCRD 3/4" SW/BW# 3/4" SW/BW4 'A" SCRD 3/4" FLGD 3/4" FLGD 'A" SCRD
DIAPHGRAM SEAL
9 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS 1 'A" FLGD 1 'A" FLGD 1 'A" FLGD 1 'A" FLGD 1 'A" FLGD 1 'A" FLGD 1'A" FLGD 1 'A" FLGD 1 'A" FLGD
(FLGD )
.-.600# 1 'A" FLGD. - 1 'A " FLGD 1 'A" FLGD. - I 'A " FLGD 1 Y2" FLGD - 1 'A " FLGD
10 THERMOWELL
>6004 2" FLGD - 2" FLGD 2" FLGD - 2" FLGD 2" FLGD - 2" FLGD
Page 1693 of 1823

STANDARD No.
401 ENGINEERS
ei
Ogzir 05teg INDIA LIMITED INSTRUMENT CONNECTION ON PIPES 7-52-0002 Rev. 5
I1ren efecnre Jviim / (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 3 of 3
(B) CLADDED\CEMENTED\LINED PIPES
WHERE PIPING CLASS SPECIFIES WHERE PIPING CLASS SPECIFIES WHERE PIPING CLASS SPECIFIES
S. TYPE OF CLADDED PIPES CEMENT LINED PIPES RUBBERJTEFLON LINED PIPES
NO INSTRUMENTS PROCESS FIRST BLOCK INSTRUMENTS PROCESS FIRST BLOCK INSTRUMENTS PROCESS FIRST BLOCK INSTRUMENTS
CONNECTION VALVE CONNECTION CONNECTION VALVE CONNECTION CONNECTION VALVE CONNECTION
FLOW METER
.. 600# 1/2" SCRD* 1/2" SCRD* 1/2" SCRD 1/2" SCRD* 1/2" SW/BW 1/2" SCRD 1" FLGD 1" FLGD 1/2" SCRD
I
ORIFICE
> 600# V SCRD** V SW/BW 1/2" SCRD - - - - - -
FLOW METER •... 600# 1/2" SCRD* 1/2" SCRD* 3" FLGD 1/2" SCRD* 1/2" SW/BW 3" FLGD 1" FLGD 1" FLGD 3" FLGD
2 ORIFICE (DIA-
PHGRAMSEAL) > 6004 V SCRD** V SCRD* 3" FLGD - - - - - -
FLOW METER ++ 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD
3 3" FLGD 3" FLGD+ 3" FLGD 3" FLGD+ 3" FLGD 3" FLGD+
AVERAGING PITOT TUBE (BY INST) (BY INST) (BY INST)
4 DP INSTRUMENTS <5> VSW/BW# VSW/BW# 1/2" SCRD 3" FLGD V FLGD 1/2" SCRD 11/2" FLGD 1 1/2" FLGD 1/2" SCRD
DIAPHGRAM SEAL D P
5 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3"FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD 3" FLGD
INSTRUMENTS <5>
PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS
6 <5> V SW/BW# VSW/BW# 1/2" SCRD. 3" FLGD VSW/BW 1/2" SCRD 1" FLGD 1" FLGD 1/2" SCRD
DIAPHGRAM SEAL
7 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS 1 1/2" FLGD 1 'A" FLGD I 1/2" FLGD 3" FLGD 1 1/2"FLOD I 1/2" FLGD 1 1/2" FLGD 1 1/2" FLGD 1 1/2" FLGD
(FLGD ) <5>
8 THERMOWELL 3" FLGD - 3 " FLGD 3" FLGD - 3" FLGD 3" FLGD - 3" FLGD
NOTES: 1 FOR ANY OTHER INSTRUMENTS NOT REFERRED ABOVE THE CONNECTION DETAILS SHALL BE AS PER INDIVIDUAL REQUIREMENT
2 ALL FLANGES/SW RATING SHALL BE AS PER PIPING SPECIFICATION
3 IN CASE OF DIRECT MOUNTED FLANGED INSTRUMENTS AND WHERE FLANGED FIRST ISOLATION VALVE ARE PROVIDED, STUD/BOLTS & NUTS AND GASKETS SHALL BE IN PIPING
SCOPE
4 INSTALLATION OF ALL IN LINE INSTRUMENTS SHALL BE IN PIPING SCOPE
5 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS INCLUDE PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES
SEAL WELDING REQUIRED
AS PER PIPING SPECIFICATION
** STRENGTH WELD
CONNECTIONS FOR D P INSTRUMENT 1/2" SCRD •
++ WELDOLET, FLANGE, BOTTOM SUPPORT SHALL BE SUPPLIED BY INSTRUMENT VENDOR HOWEVER ERECTION BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
Format No 8-00-0001-F7 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — AD rights reserved
Page 1694 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ISMae ENGINEERS
4igeg 251eg INDIA LIMITED THERMOWELL 7-52-0035 Rev. 4
efaaslaaa3RaR:0 IA Govt. of India Undettaiang)
Page 1 of 3
gb 34 mm CHAIN
1/2"NPT r-
FOR CHAIN TERMINATION PLUG WITH CHAIN

(ONLY FOR TEST THERMOWELL) 45 mm
FULL PENETRATION WELD

1 1/2" FLANGE

NO WELD MATERIAL
PROJECTION BEYOND RF
OD 22 mm
ID 11 mm
BORE TO BE CONCENTRIC
WITH O.D. WITHIN 10% OF
WALL THICKNESS
18 mm
NOTES - 1. THIS STANDARD IS APPLICABLE FOR ;

a) TEMPERATURE GAUGES, BEADED TEMPERATURE ELEMENTS AND DUPLEX TEMPERATURE ELEMENTS.
b) THERMOWELL UPTO 1500 CLASS AS PER ASME OR EQUIVALENT.
2. TYPE OF FLANGE SHALL BE RTJ FOR RATING (AS PER ASME CLASS) > 600.
3. DP TEST SHALL BE CARRIED OUT FOR ALL WELD JOINTS.
4. CHAIN AND PLUG SHALL BE APPLICABLE ONLY FOR TEST THERMO1NELLS.
4 25-04-18 REAFFIRMED & REISSUED Manoj

ek MN 144) RN
3 21-03-12 REVISED & REISSUED Manoj RG RP/JMS DM
No. by by
Approved by
Fnrrnat Nn R-00-0001-F4 RPV C.nnvrinht Fil - All rinhts rAsprvArf
Page 1695 of 1823

STANDARD No.
latazieq ENGINEERS
Ogukitaleg
WPM FROR7 EMORMI)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt. of India Undertaluo9)
THERMOWELL 7-52-0035 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 3
cp 34 mm CHAIN
1/2"NPT
FOR CHAIN TERMINATION PLUG WITH CHAIN

(ONLY FOR TEST THERMOWELL) 45 mm

1 1/2" FLANGE
\\'
NO WELD MATERIAL
OD 21 mm
ID 7 mm
WALL THICKNESS
CP 16 mm
NOTES - 1. THIS STANDARD IS APPLICABLE FOR ;

a) SINGLE TEMPERATURE ELEMENT.
b) THERMOWELL UPTO 1500 CLASS AS PER ASME OR EQUIVALENT.
4. CHAIN AND PLUG SHALL BE APPLICABLE ONLY FOR TEST THERMOWELLS.
4 25-04-18 REAFFIRMED & REISSUED Manoj *e l> MN RN

3 21-03-12 REVISED & REISSUED Manoj RG RP/JMS DM
No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat Nn R - 00 -0001 - F4 RAV 0 Convrinht Fli - All rinhts narJarvarl
Page 1696 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED BUILT-UP THERMOWELL 7-52-0035 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 3
CP 34 mm
45 mm
WELD

2" FLANGE
A
NO WELD MATERIAL
K
A
MACHINE TAPER TO BE CONCENTRIC

WITH INSIDE DIAMETER WITHIN 10%
OF WALL THICKNESS
ID 11 mm A
WALL THICKNESS
BAR STOCK
I 0 18 mm
NOTES:-
4 25-04-18 REAFFIRMED & REISSUED Manoj 4seY MN 1‘`)

7 RN
3 21-03-12 REVISED & REISSUED Manoj RG RP/JMS VJN
No. by by
Approved by
Format No R-00-0001-F4 RPV Convrinht Fll - All rinhtA maarvarl
Page 1697 of 1823

THERMOCOUPLE / RTD STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
1rfaReg ORR 2120517 atvosso
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of Incte Undertakonw
ASSEMBLY 7-52-0036 Rev. 5
WITH THERMOWELL Page 1 of 1
1/2" NPT / 3/4"NPT

(NOTE-1)
CHAIN
UNION 1/2" NPT
NIPPLE 1/2" NPT

S.
(NOTE-2)
THERMOWELL
NOTE - 1. IN THE CASE OF DUPLEX THERMOCOUPLE/RTD, TWO INDEPENDENT

3/4"(NPT) CABLE ENTRIES SHALL BE PROVIDED.
2. FLANGE TYPE, SIZE AND RATING SHALL BE AS PER DATA SHEET.
te'>4
5 10.10.19 Revised & Reissued Manoj AJS RTCT
4 24.10.16 Reaffirmed & Reissued Manoj MN RG RN
Rev. Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds Bureau
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Copynght EIL - All rights reserved
Page 1698 of 1823

~'
zlf Etteg
=.1)
i71fl6 Jt
2/2711512 an.TRIM)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
I A Govt of India Undertaking)
INSTRUMENT SUPPORT
SINGLE INSTRUMENT
STANDARD No.
7-52-0101 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 3
TYPE 11 SINGLE INSTRUMENT SUPPORT - GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

CAP PLATE 6 T
AT END OF PIPE
(TYP.)
300
VVEL HOLES FOR U-BOLTS
ANGLE
50X50X6
REFER
DE AIL"P"
WELD WEEP HOLE(TYP.)
6mm THK. A (TYP.) REFER NOTE-3
SHT. 3 OF 3
6 mm THICK
MS-PLATE
STIFFNER PLATE SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW
DETAIL"P"
TYPE 11-1 TYPE 11-2
Ar-iA A TA
2" PIPE
2" PIPE
M12 M12
CLINCH ANCHOR BOLTS BOLTS & NUTS
(QTY. 04 NOS.) (QTY. 04 NOS.)
ISMC 100
F.FLOOR PLTF. GRATING Ank WELD TO PLTF. MEMBER
• r.4i l ' • . .
- • • -• ■ •=811•11.1 Mit MOM111•01101•.
, •
MIFINIMINir
MS PLATE MS PLATE
1 .'7 6mm THK. 4 1 .4). / 6mm THK.
a a 0 0 _ 0 —
LC) CO
LO
IN
CO
‘-'
— 8— (-4
I I
14 DIA HOLES N 14 DIA HOLES
180 (4 NOS.) t 180 (4 NOS.)
250 250
VIEW A-A VIEW A-A

PAVED AREA MOUNTING PLATFORM MOUNTING
TYPE 11-3 TYPE 11-4
2" PIPE
2" PIPE
a a
STANCHION NI- vr
M12
T a
0 ANCHOR BOLTS
STRIPS
SUPPOR(WELD) .--
(50Lx25VVx6T) (QTY. 04 NOS.)
G. LEVEL - : • . win. G. LEVEL MU

•: :
• -•••• Lo
.:.'LLff".' .4
. -
c .,- •
300 WELL COMPACTED 300

EARTH
(TYP.) (TYP.)
UNPAVED AREA MOUNTING UNPAVED AREA MOUNTING

(WITH INTEGRAL CONC. BLOCK)
4.10■V c (WITH SEPARATE CONC. BLOCK) J.,,,...
3 28.03.17 Reaffirmed & Reissued Manoj MN V9 RN
2 14-11-11 Revised & Reissued Manoj RG "'RP/JMS DM
No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn R-00-0001-F4 RPV 0 Cnnvrinht FII - All rinhts rAservan
Page 1699 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS INSTRUMENT SUPPORT
$1gen fatateg W) INDIA LIMITED 7-52-0101 Rev. 3
i.kyr,..i?asl.TRIsli) Govt . ef India Undertaking) SINGLE INSTRUMENT
Page 2 of 3
TYPE 12 CONCRETE COLUMN MOUNTING
250
300
6
WEEP HOLE
14 DIA HOLES
(4 N• .)
MS PLATE QUAINTITY 04 NOS.

6mm THK. CONCRETE COLUMN
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
TYPE 13 CONCRETE COLUMN (WITH ANGLE INSERT) MOUNTING
ISMC 100 MEMBER

TO BE WELDED
WITH EXISTING 300
STEEL MEMBER
6
T PIPE
0
0
co
EXISTING COLUMN DETAIL

WEEP HOLE
STEEL MEMBER WITH ANGLE INSERT
(BY STRUCTURAL)
WELD TYP.)
MS PLATE CONCRETE COLUMN

6mm THK. (WITH ANGLE INSERT)
TYPE 14 - CONCRETE COLUMN (WITH INSERT PLATE) MOUNTING
COLUMN DETAIL
WITH INSERT PLATE
(BY STRUCTURAL)
CONCRETE COLUMN
(WITH INSERT PLATE)
\N.'
3 28.03.17 Reaffirmed & Reissued Manoj MN
2 14-11-11 Revised & Reissued Manoj RG RP/JMS DM
No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn A-00-0001-F4 RPv n Convrioht Fll - All rinhts rAservArt
Page 1700 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS INSTRUMENT SUPPORT
Ogg 'Meg
" IMIETT PPM? 051.710.1)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking) SINGLE INSTRUMENT
7-52-0101 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 3
TYPE 15 STEEL COLUMN MOUNTING (FLANGE FACE)
SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW
TYPE 16 STEEL COLUMN MOUNTING (WEB FACE)
TYPE 17 PIPE BRACKET MOUNTING

TYPE 17.1 (VERTICAL PIPE) TYPE 17.2 (HORIZONTAL PIPE)
2" PIPE STANCHION A
MOUNTING MS PLATE BASE PLATE
6mm THICK 300 Lx 150 Wx 6 T
0 to
0
U-BOLT ASSY. 0 U-BOLT ASSY.

0 REFER NOTE-4
O O REFER NOTE-4 CO
U, CO
WELD TYP
STIFFNER PLATE
U)
(6 THK.)
14 DIA HOLE 300
(4 NOS.) 4" MIN. PIPE SIZE
250 WEEP HOLE
NOTE:- WELD TYP.

DIMENSIONS* & PIPE CLAMPS SIZES SHALL BE O
AS PER PIPE DIMENSIONS. 4" MIN PIPE SIZE
VIEW-AA
(HORIZONTAL PIPE)
NOTES:- 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN M.M. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2 PIPE MATERIAL SHALL BE IS:1239 HEAVY GRADE AS A MINIMUM.
3. 6 mm DIA WEEP HOLE SHALL BE PROVIDED AT LOW POINT.
4. U-BOLT ASSEMBLY SHALL BE OF MINIMUM M12 SIZE WITH NUTS AND SPRING WASHERS.
5. ALL WELD SHALL BE 3mm FILLET WELD FULL STRENGTH.
6. ADD 50mm WHERE-EVER FIRE INSULATION IS PROVIDED.
7. BOLT SHALL BE TURNED FROM M.S. ROUNDS CONFIRMING TO IS : 432 GRADE 1.
8. NUTS AND WASHERS SHALL CONFIRM TO IS : 1363 AND IS : 3138.
3 28.03.17 Reaffirmed & Reissued Manoj MN

2 14-11-11 Revised & Reissued Manoj RG P/JMS DM
No. by by
Approved by
Format No R-no-OR01-F4 RPV Convrinht Fll - All rinhts rpp.prvi.r1
Page 1701 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ai -aE4 ENGINEERS INSTRUMENT SUPPORT
2151-eg
(7iliref 21221120/13,1111,R/
INDIA LIMITED
1A Govt of India Unciertakmg) TWO INSTRUMENTS
7-52-0102 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 3
TYPE 21 TWO INSTRUMENTS SUPPORT - GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
CAP PLATE 6T 500

AT END OF PIPE
(TYP.)
I.
0
0
300
0 2" PIPE
0
3"x2" REDUCER
0
0
/—--
.7 HOLES FOR
U-BOLTS
II
ANGLE
50x50x6
REFER
DETAIL"P 675
6mm THK.
/A
II
3" PIPE WEEP HOLE
REFER NOTE-3(TYP.)
SHT. 3 OF 3
6 mm THICK
STIFFNER PLATE SIDE VIEW
DETAIL"P" FRONT VIEW
TYPE 21-1 TYPE 21-2
2" PIPE
M12
CLINCH ANCHOR BOLTS
M12
(QTY. 04 NOS.) BOLTS & NUTS
3" PIPE (QTY. 04 NOS.)
ISMC 100
PLTF. GRATING WELD TO PLTF. MEMBER
F. FLOOR
MS PLATE
MS PLATE / 6mm THK.
0 6mm THK. 0
f:0 1.0
14 DIA HOLES 14 DIA HOLES

180 (4 NOS.) 180 (4 NOS.)
250 250
VIEW A-A VIEW A-A

PAVED AREA MOUNTING PLATFORM MOUNTING
TYPE 21-3 TYPE 21-4
3" PIPE
STANCHION M12
SUPPORT ANCHOR BOLTS
STRIPS (VVELD) (QTY. 04 NOS.)
(50Lx25VVx6T)
G. LEVEL
WELL COMPACTED
EARTH 300
(TYP.)
UNPAVED AREA MOUNTING UNPAVED AREA MOUNTING
(WITH INTEGRAL CONC. BLOCK) WITH SEPA T.EC. j . BLOCK .
z7;11 112/Or
3 28.03.17 Reaffirmed & Reissued Manoj MN 1V7- RN
2 14-11-11 Revised & Reissued Manoj RG
gb■ P/JMS DM
No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat Nn R-00-0001-F4 RAV n Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhtR rAspn/Ari
Page 1702 of 1823

STANDARD No.
laiRTAENGINEERS
=l) INSTRUMENT SUPPORT
fge_A 2151eg INDIA LIMITED 7-52-0102 Rev. 3
(Xli7T eiezorzo513TOsai1 (A Govt of India Undertaking) TWO INSTRUMENTS
Page 2 of 3
TYPE 22 CONCRETE COLUMN MOUNTING

250 250 250
6
CAP PLATE 6T
AT END OF PIPE
(TYP.)
111601
WEEP HOLE M12

WELD (BOTH SIDE) CLINCH ANCHOR BOLTS
14 DIA HOLES
QUANTITY 04 NOS.
(4 N • OW (TYP.)

6mm THK.
TYPE 23 CONCRETE COLUMN ( WITH ANGLE INSERT) MOUNTING
250 250 ISMC 100 MEMBER 250

TO BE WELDED
WITH EXISTING 6
STEEL MEMBER
2" PIPE
0
0 0
0
0
C•I
EXISTING
STEEL MEMBER COLUMN DETAIL
WITH EXISTING
WEEP HOLE STEEL MEMBERS
(BOTH SIDE) WELD(TYP.) (BY STRUCTURAL)
6mm THK. (WITH EXISTING STEEL MEMBER)
TYPE 24 CONCRETE COLUMN ( WITH INSERT PLATE) MOUNTING
250 250 250
0
0
0
CNI
COLUMN DETAIL
WEEP HOLE
WITH INSERT PLATE
(BOTH SIDE) WELD(TYP.)
(BY STRUCTURAL)
CONCRETE COLUMN
(WITH INSERT PLATE)
3 28.03.17 Reaffirmed & Reissued Manoj MN V RN

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat Nn A-00-0M11-F4 Rev () c:nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts reserved
Page 1703 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ei ENGINEERS INSTRUMENT SUPPORT
Ogell fajleg INDIA LIMITED 7-52-0102 Rev. 3
(NPR 21221112m3,11:1M) IA Govt of India Undertaking) TWO INSTRUMENTS
Page 3 of 3
TYPE 25 STEEL COLUMN MOUNTING (FLANGE FACE)
250 250
0
0
CO
WEEP HOLE
(BOTH SIDE)
TYPE 26 STEEL COLUMN MOUNTING (WEB FACE)
250 250
0
0
WEEP HOLE
(BOTH SIDE)
NOTES: - 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN M.M. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

2 PIPE MATERIAL SHALL BE IS:1239 HEAVY GRADE AS A MINIMUM.
3. 6 mm DIA WEEP HOLE SHALL BE PROVIDED AT LOW POINT.
4. U-BOLT ASSEMBLY SHALL BE OF MINIMUM M12 SIZE WITH NUTS AND SPRING WASHERS.
5. ALL WELD SHALL BE 3mm FILLET WELD FULL STRENGTH.
6. ADD 50mm WHERE-EVER FIRE INSULATION IS PROVIDED.
7. BOLT SHALL BE TURNED FROM M.S. ROUNDS CONFIRMING TO IS : 432 GRADE 1.
8. NUTS AND WASHERS SHALL CONFIRM TO IS : 1363 AND IS : 3138.
3 28.03.17 Reaffirmed & Reissued Manoj MN 11":/RN

Rev.
No. by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 RPV 0 ennvrioht F II - All rinhts rpr,Arvari
Page 1704 of 1823

STANDARD No.
'Jt f, ENGINEERS SUPPORT DETAILS FOR
Imeg INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking) JUNCTION BOXES
7-52-0104 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 1
TRAY ARRANGEMENT FOR JUNCTION BOXES CABLE ROUTING FOR JUNCTION BOXES.
PERFORATED TRAY
CLAMP FOR
FIXING CABLES
ANGLE 50x50x6 FOR

ROUTING MULTI-CABLE
UPTO INST. DUCT.
JN. BOX MOUNTING FRAME (R.C.C. COLUMN) JN. BOX MOUNTING FRAME (STEEL COLUMN)
INSERT PLATE / ANGLE 50x50x6

ANGLE INSERTS (TYP.)
(BY STRUCT.) ANGLE 50x50x6
(TYP.)
ISMC 100 CHANNEL

WELDED TO COLUMN INSERTS
SLOTTED HOLES
(SIZE & DIMENSION TO
SUIT JUNCTION BOX)
ANGLE 50x50x6 ANGLE 50x50x6
WELDED TO ISMC 100 (TYP.)
(LENGTH TO MATCH
JUNCTION BOX).
R.C.C. COLUMN
TRAY WIDTH
DIMENSION 'A and B' TO SUIT JUNCTION BOX.
JN.
BOX W W1
NOTE: 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm. 12 PAIR 300 150
2. CLAMP MULTICABLE ON ANGLE WITH 25mm LAME PVC COVERED ALLUMINIUM STRIP.
8 TRIAD 300 150
3. ADD 50 mm WHERE-EVER FIRE INSULATION IS PROVIDED.
6 PAIR 150 100
E\TRIAD 150 100
3 28.03.17 Revised & Reissued Manoj MN •ee RN

2 14-11-11 Revised & Reissued Manoj RG P/JMS DM
No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat No 8-00-01101-F4 RPV n Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rasprvtari
Page 1705 of 1823

STANDARD No.
t31fRq_lei
Ogen faiWeg 1 =4) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
PERFORATED TRAY SUPPORTS
AND
CABLES CLAMPING DETAILS
7-52-0107 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 1
CABLE CLAMPING ON PERFORATED TRAYS
SINGLE CLAMPING FOR SINGLE CLAMPING FOR DUAL CLAMPING FOR CABLE CLAMPS DETAIL
TWO CABLES MULTIPLE CABLES MULTIPLE CABLES
DETAIL "A" DETAIL "B" DETAIL "B" DETAIL "A"
3.2mm THK.
L4 ,13 I I .241
31
45
W ""--' 10 DIA HOLE FOR
FF ---II W
[ J M8x35 LONG BOLT
— WITH NUT
ie
___----\r-----
__.....---63
DETAIL "B"
0 0 I .1 0 0
7 Co Co 0 I
0 0 0 0 Co 0
X
i
,=° .= =. ei=
t
0 0 [ I
7t 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 OA ...
l=i=1 I §.. 0 .
1311=ID ‘=. .=' 3 0•0
O o 2 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0. 10DIA HOLE FOR
1. o o M8x45 LONG BOLT
• o • • o o
o
I
EEI1
+
oc
1
___------N----- -■"4---------------
ELIPTICAL HOLES SUITABLE FOR
M8 BOLTS P. *WHERE 'W" DENOTES THE INSIDE
WIDTH OF TRAY
WHERE X = W -10 FOR
SINGLE CLAMPING
W -10 FOR
= -2-
DUAL CLAMPING
PERFORATED TRAY - SUPPORTING DETAILS

TRAY ROUTING TRAY ROUTING TRAY ROUTING TRAY ROUTING
EDGEWISE EDGEWISE WIDTHWISE CONCRETE BEAM/COLUMN
HOR. / VER. RUNS IN HOR. / VER. RUNS IN HORIZONTAL RUNS IN HOR. / VER. PLANE
ANCHOR FASTENER OR
INSERT PLATE
(TYP.)
NOTES :- CAPACITY OF PERFORATED TRAYS

1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm. TRAY FLANGE NO. OF CABLES
2. PERFORATED TRAYS SHALL BE SUPPORTED AT EVERY 1000 mm (TYP.) INTERVAL FOR WIDTH HEIGHT
HORIZONTAL AS WELL AS VERTICAL RUNS USING MINIMUM ANGLE SIZE AS 1 PAIR/ 6 PAIR! 12 PAIR/
ON) (H)
40x40x5 OR CONTINOUS CHANNEL SUPPORT MC50 1 TRIAD 6 TRIAD 8TRIAD
3. CLAMPING OF CABLES ON PERFORATED TRAYS SHALL BE AT EVERY 500 mm ON 60 20 2 1 1

VERTICAL RUNS AND EVERY 1000 mm ON HORIZONTAL RUNS. 100 30 4 2 1
4. PERFORATED TRAYS SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH CLAMPS, BOLTS / NUTS AND WASHERS OF
150 30 6 4 3
GALVANISED MILD STEEL.
200 30 10 6 4
5. GALVANISING SHALL BE AS PER IS 4759 (66 pm/ 460 g / m2)
6. THE PERFORATED TRAY THICKNESS SHALL BE 2 mm. 300 30 15 8 6
3 28.03.17 Reaffirmed & Reissued Manoj MN RN

2 14-11-11 Revised & Reissued Manoj RG DM
No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn R-00-0001-F4 Rev (") Convrinht Fll - All rinhts rstsArvan
Page 1706 of 1823

STANDARD No.
laffte04 ( ENGINEERS
ligat EllAeg NW INDIA LIMITED STEEL STAIRS 7-68-0506 REV. 7
MEffewommURKW (A GM a
eea Undutalung)
SHT 1 of 6
30 r 75x75x8
N. ___ _ —
I
ME
-
2
EEL.
177 7 E _ _,_._,_,_ _
-II
$ EL'A' - —. $ EL:8'
Ma
I*14
• -4
BRACING (REFER SHT
30 JV NO OF TREAD x 230
NOSING k STRINGER SPAN
4000 MAX. FOR MC150
6000 MAX. FOR MC200
PLAN AT EL. t A'

O
0
CV
C)
O
Lr)
C.1
LJ
C)
z
F-
V)
3 ———
CONCRETE
BASE
—
4
NO OF TREAD x 230
PLAN AT EL. 'C' SECTION 4-4
NOTES :-
1. FOR STAIRWAY/TREAD USE ELECTROFORGED GRATING TYPE-II AS PER EIL STD NO 7-68-0697.
2. FOR CONNECTION DETAILS REFER SHEETS 3, 4, 5 AND 6.
3. STRINGER SHALL BE SUITABLY DESIGNED FOR OFFICE BUILDING, WARE HOUSES AND WORKSHOP.
4. FOR DETAIL OF INSERT PLATE 'R1 a' REFER EIL STD. NO. 7-68-0056.
7 01 08 19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AVM RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R K TRIVEDI
6 18 09 13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD vas PJ SINGH PK MMAL D MALHOTRA

No by by
Approved by
Page 1707 of 1823

STANDARD No.
lafftefitENGINEERS
Eattumer INDIA LIMITED
inert WIEMIZMURMIl (A Govt at Oda Underizdang)
STEEL STAIRS 7-68-0506 Rev. 7
SHT 2 of 6
II iI
II II
— —II— —II— EL. 'A'
\ I I II
4-F 44-
RISERS x 200
EL. `B'
TOG/CH PL
RISE RS x 200
EL. 'C'
T 0 G/CH PL/T.O.0
RISERS x 200
STRINGER MC 150
FOR STRINGER MC 150 REFER DET. B

FOR STRINGER MC 200 REFER DET.
ON SHEET 6 OF 6
MAXIMUM RISER IS 200 HOWEVER IT
SECTION 1 -1 MAY BE REDUCED AND ADJUSTED AS
EQUIRED.
7 01 08 19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD JG VA

RAJANJI SRIVASTA ir TRIVer.-
6 18 09.13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD VPS PJ SINGH PK MITTAL D MALHOTRA
Prepared Checked Stds Committee Stds Bureau

Rev
No by by
Approved by
Page 1708 of 1823

STANDARD No.
laffl-ziefft ENGINEERS
faReuMOT INDIA LIMITED STEEL STAIRS 7-68-0506 Rev. 7
men tkenieerarantrog ret Govt of India Undertaking)
SHT 3 of 6
235 230 230 230

MIN. MIN. MIN
R.C.C. KERB CLEAT 30 NOSING
L-75x75x8-150 LG.
0 CLEAT
L-75x75x8-150 LG.
0
Li
0 x >< 6 THK. STIFFN. PL.
0 < 0 <
LLJ N N
0
M
INSERT PL.
1St R1a' END FLAT
M16
00
MC150 OR MC200
SECTION 2-2 SECTION 2-2

(CONNECTION WITH CONCRETE BEAM) (CONNECTION WITH STEEL BEAM MC)
235 230 230 230

MIN. MIN.
5 I
=MIME
1•11111=
11•111111101
am. Elm NNE

1 .•1
IMAM =MI =II
Elm
IMAM Min MN
.C.C. KERB
MIEN IMO
=IN IMIMM MOM •••

ENE 11 -•
STRINGER BEAM
MEM
STRINGER BEAM
11
CLEAT CLEAT MC
VIEW 5-5 VIEW 6-6

STRINGER BEAM
MC150 OR MC200
STRINGER BEAM
0
0
17 230
MIN.
75
0
0
CLEAT —75x75x8-60 LG.

I-75x75x8
200 LG. INSERT L-75x75x8
INSER7PE
L. 1000 LG. FOR 750MM
R1a' WIDTH
C V
LUG C1 © 300 c/c
-,JP INSERT PL. `R 1 o'
SECTION 3-3 SECTION 3-3 (ALT.) VIEW 7-7
(CONNECTION WITH CONCRETE BEAM) (CONNECTION WITH CONCRETE BEAM)
(R.C.C. KERB NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY) (R.C.C. KERB NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
7 01 08 19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD JG

-/V;41-
AVM RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA V R K TRI EDI
6 18 09 13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD VPS PJ SINGH PK MITTAL D MALHOTRA

No by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Copyright EIL - All nghts reserved
Page 1709 of 1823

STANDARD No.
lafrzleaENGINEERS
Oaen laiReumw INDIA LIMITED STEEL STAIRS 7-68-0506 Rev. 7
iiiiientgemenwawm undenaiong)
(A Govt a India
SHT 4 of 6
230
(MIN.)
BEAM
230 230 30 NOSING

0 ><
O <
N
F
MC150 OR MC200
0
CV
J 75x75x8
150 LG.
6 THK.
STIFFN. PL. CLEAT -I —75x75x8-60 LG.
MEMBER
REF DESIGN DWG
6 THK. STIFFN. PL.
MC150 OR MC200
SECTION 2-2 SECTION 3-3

(CONNECTION WITH STEEL BEAM ISMB) (CONNECTION WITH STEEL BEAM ISMB)
STIFFN. PL. STRINGER

ANGLE CLEAT WELDED TO
STRINGER, BOLTED TO MB
VIEW 8-8 VIEW 9-9
MC150 OR
MORE
STRINGER
CLEAT L-75x75x8-250 LG.
6 THK.
STIFFN. PL. CLEAT WELDED TO STRINGER
AND BOLTED TO MC
TOE PLATE
SECTION 3-3
(CONNECTION WITH STEEL BEAM ISMC) VIEW 1 0-1 0
.fitAC
P
7 01 08.19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AV AI RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R K TRI

No
by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - All nghts reserved
Page 1710 of 1823

STANDARD No.
OlfitzieM ENGINEERS
IfgarlaieuW MIA LIMITED
(olfr I (A Govt of Inds Unc*Oolong)
STEEL STAIRS 7-68-0506 Rev. 7
SHT 5 of 6
MC1 50 OR
MC200
2
r —50x50x6 o
0 <
o
2
SEC. 11-11
-r 6 THK.
CHEQ. PL.
(AP PR 0 X .)
HAN DRAILING —5/
230
ffff
BRACING STRINGER
s=ue
L-50x50x6
-7: (APPROX.)
r —50x50x6
ELEVATION SHOWING STRINGER BRACINGS TYP. DET. OF CHEQ. PL. STEP
L-50x50x6 STIFFENING
BRACING TO BE PROVIDED
FULL STRENGTH FOR STAIR WITH MORE
20 BUTT WELD FOR THAN 20 RISER
FLANGES
0
z
I-
ce cr)
ce
Li)
8 THK. PL.
DETAIL - A SEC. 13-13 VIEW 12-12
STAIR DETS WITH CHEQURED PLATE STEPS
7 01 08 19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AVM RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R K TRIVEDI

No by by
Approved by
Page 1711 of 1823

STANDARD No.
lalfitnefilk
r. ,-,1 ENGINEERS
Otar faMegillir INDIA LIMITED STEEL STAIRS 7-68-0506 Rev. 7
101IeIT mauve awaorm) A Govt. of India Undertaking)
SHT 6 of 6
230 229
4f0
L-75x75x8-120 LG.
60x60x6 THK. WASHER

WITH 22 0 HOLE AT CENTRE
W.P.
M20 BOLT
REFERENCE EL.
SLOTTED HOLE 22x50 LG. FOR FDN. DETS. REFER
IN ANGLE CLEAT EIL STD. 7-67-0008
150 160
DETAIL - B
L 75x75x8-120 LG.
60x60x6 THK. WASHER

WITH 22 0 HOLE AT CENTER
0
0
REFERENCE EL.
SLOTTED HOLE 22x50 LG.
FOR FDN. DETS. REFER
IN ANGLE CLEAT EIL STD. 7-67-0008
100 255
DETAIL - C
Ah9,444/0- 41
01:53.- /t4j
7 01 08.19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AVM RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA LAtr
R.K
6 18 09 13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD vPs PJ SINGH PK MITTAL D MALHOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1712 of 1823

STANDARD No.
#50adErsIGINEERS DETAILS OF STEEL LADDER 7.68-0507 Rev. 8

Ogar emeg
N972RmRY13aRiD
INDIA UNITED
(A Govt of Indio Undertaking)
Page 1 of 3
0 è' INSULATION THICKNESS (50 mm UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE)

TOP
RUNG D REFER SEC. 11-11 OF 7-68-0509 (SHT. 1 OF 3)
O
10 O
L•r) In
EL. — TOP
SUPPORT RUNG
X1
O
Oz
BETWEE N SUPPORTS
(NL
O
O
O
7
0
O
0
O
C) 0 O
w N O
0
EL 0
SUPPORT L-
0
X2 X
vi
O
O
1.0
N
EL.
SUPPORT O
SAFETY CAGE O
X1
LADDER HEAD
AT SIDE
EL.
SUPPORT O
X2 O
O
BOTTOM
t RUNG
(REFER SHT. 3 OF 3)
O
O LOWER OR
INTERNED
HOOPS
LADDER FOR SIDE ENTRY LADDER FOR SIDE ENTRY
DISTANCE `D' (mm) * MC100 SHALL BE ADOPED FOR DISTANCE

VESSEL DIA (mm)
MORE THAN 1350 UPTO 2000
UPTO 800 200 + e
> 800 < 3200 260 + e
> 3200 < 8000 275 + e
*11(4,1 it144
8 01 08 19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AVM RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA TRIdit)
VEDI
7 28 11 13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD vPs AJS P K MITTAL S.CHANDA

No by by
Approved by
Page 1713 of 1823

STANDARD No.
DETAILS OF STEEL LADDER
4 MOINEwek LIMITED
lig7 (A Govt of India Undertaking)
7-68-0507 Rev. 8
Page 2 of 3
800 800
O
_
z 400 400 0 FLAT 0
75x10 0
a
O TOP OF
GRATING/
CHEQ. PL. CONTINUOUS
TOE PLATES
EL. ON
SUPPORT
SECTION
LADDER POST._
M AX. HEIGHTWITHOUTSAFETYCAGE =4500
0 1/1
0 z z
0
rn
0
O 0 0
0 CA
0 °
Z 0 2
EL. ON X II x II
SUPPORT
SECTION
Z z zz
400 0
0 TOE ANGLE/EDGE OF
PLATFORM MEMBER
0
x
0 LADDER FOR FRONT ENTRY

0
WI 0
0
u)
N
o 1A1re)
0 REF. EL. H REF. EL.
Ln
TOP OF PEDESTAL/
CHEQ. PL. /GRATING
N
larlo0K)
—\
+ C
BOTTOM
L RUNG
—I. 'L-
TYPE OF ATTACHMENT DEPENDING

ON FLOORING TYPE. LADDER FOR FRONT ENTRY
(REF. SHT. 3 OF 3)
LADDER FOR SIDE ENTRY
NOTES :-
1. LADDER POSTS SHALL BE OF FLAT (75x10) UPTO 3.60m (MAX.) BETWEEN SUPPORTS AND ISMC 100 UPTO
7.0m (MAX.) BETWEEN SUPPORTS.
2. RUNGS SHALL BE 20 0.
3. SUPPORT TYPE `X1' CORRESPONDS TO FIXED SUPPORT AND 'X2' CORRESPONDS TO SLIDING SUPPORT.
4. SUPPORT ELEVATION X1, X2 CORRESPOND TO OF BOLT HOLES.
5. SUPPORTS `X1' IS CAPABLE TO SUSTAIN A LOAD FOR 9000 mm LONG LADDER ONLY.
6. LADDER SHALL BE GIVEN A SUITABLE SLOPE (MAX.6*),IF NECESSARY, TO AVIOD FOULING WITH AN OR CHAIRS.
8 01 08 19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD

P.4,114,
JG
ck:
.1\o
AVM
A1 /4 1--
RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA
4.0du
R IVEDI
7 28 11 13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD VPS MS P K.MITTAL S CHANDA

No by by
Approved by
Page 1714 of 1823

STANDARD No.
#6dRad ENGINEERS DETAILS OF STEEL LADDER
$11gar laReg INDIA LIMITED 7-68-0507 Rev. 8
VIRIWN13001S0 (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 3 of 3
TYPE OF ATTACHMENT NATURE OF SUPPORT SECTION REMARKS

Al , A2 SITE WITHOUT PAVING
B1, 82 CONCRETE FLOOR Al, B1, Cl, D1 : FIXED TYPE
C1, C2, D1, D2 CHEQUERED PLATE / GRATING FLOORING A2, 132, C2, D2 : SLIDING TYPE
BOTTOM BOTTOM
BT REFERENCE
ELEVATION
(TYP)
M.S. GRATING
ATEIL
A
II
PLATE (1 20x1 20x6)
TYPE - Al TYPE - B1 TYPE - Cl
WITHOUT
NUT
L.100x100x8
(TYP)
BOTTOM
BT BOTTOM
BT REFERENCE
ELEVATION
WITHOUT (TYP)
/NUT 8 WITHOUT
M.S. GRATING
PLATE (120x120x6)
TYPE - A2 TYPE - B2 TYPE - C2

WITHOUT
TOP NUT
CHEQ. EL. X1
PLATE OR X2
CHEQ.
PLATE
PLATE (1 20x1 20x6)
TYPE - D1 TYPE - D2
0
I _
O
O TYPE - E
NOTE :- (FREE)
1,100 IN CASE OF TOWERS BOTTOM RUNG SHALL
280 280 BE 300 mm FROM FGL /HPP.
560 24 0 HOLES FOR
M20 BOLTS
TYPE OF ATTACHMENT AT BASE
LADDER BOTTOM DETAILS
AttZr
.tr/
8 01 08 19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AVIA RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA
7 28 11 13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD VPS AJS P K.MITTAL S CHANDA
Rev Prepared Checked Stds Committee Stds. Bureau

No by by
Approved by
Page 1715 of 1823

REFERENCE ELEVATION
EL.`X1' WELDED
18 0 HOLES FOR
M16 BOLTS
EL.`X2'
GUIDE 12x12x50 200(M N )
WELDED
550(MAX.)
LADDER ATTACHMENT SECTION 12-12 SECTION 13-13

TO VESSELS
75 13
e = INSULATION THICKNESS BIM L-75x75x6
CUT BACK
470
1mm CLEARANC 4
GUIDE 12x12x50 1 mm CLEARANCE
WELDED
REFER
A %//////%%//%/ EL. X2
-4t
N .2 ME
N
I—I MC 100 12 6 6
18 0 HOLES STRUCTURE
38 5 43.5 FOR M16 BOLTS SUPPLY
325(MIN.)
DETAIL 'X2'
WWI CIVIL WORK SUPPLY
675(MAX )
DETAIL e X2' LADDER ATTACHMENT TO
SECTION 11-11 (FOR LADDER POST FLAT 75x10)
CONCRETE
420 1
,
TOE PLATE
LADDER HEAD
AT FRONT
LADDER HEAD AT
SIDE PL. 50x6 AH4
SAFETY
rat CLOSURE
O 0
N
. . • •.
SAFETY CHAIN
O
SAFETY CAGE HOOP DETAILS
LOCATION OF RUNG FOR LADDER
FLAT 50x6
20 0 BAR WELDED
1St
0
FLAT 35x6 ON
101e, }6
(FOR FLAT 75x10r (FOR MC100)
LOWER AND INTERMEDIATE CAGE ATTACHMENT OF BAR

Pe.c441,4- JO* L
7 01 08 19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AVM RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA O
R Kt"tb>)
TRIVEDI
6 28 11 13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD VPS AJS P K MITTAL S CHANDA

No by by
Approved by
Page 1716 of 1823

STANDARD No.
OR:adENGNEERS STEEL LADDER JOINT DETAILS
4igof Wen INDIA LIMITED
I.O217 IFIRINEM3,111.0 (A Goof of India Undertaking)
7-68-0509 Rev. 7
Page 2 of 4
5 30 740 30
/
16 0 32 0 (NB) MEDIUM DUTY
/ TUBULAR HANDRAIL
12 0
4/ a 8
0 v
I
I
I
_L
T
0 160
0 120 II
0
/9
14 0 HOLES FOR
M12 BOLTS SECTION 5-5
800
2(
111111111111111111 90' 111111111111111111

SECTION 6-6 11111111111111111 111111111111111111
.24
AUTOMATIC BARRIER
30 5
A)
CV
STOPPER
L-75x50x6
CUT FROM 90' o
co
L-75x75x6
SECTION 8-8
SECTION 1 0-1 0
14 0 HOLES FOR
M12 BOLTS
v II
Av . IN111110
SECTION 9-9
10 al
,i, 30 1,
NEOPRENE OR 6
I—I
SIMILAR PAD MC 100 50 50
iliM 1mm CLEARANCE
IIMINIMMI
102
SECTION 7-7
DETAIL `X2'
(FOR LADDER POST MC 100)
if
7 01 08 19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD .. A\A RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R K TRIVEDI

No by by
Approved by
Page 1717 of 1823

STANDARD No.
#51tilad ENGINEERS STEEL LADDER JOINT DETAILS 7-68-0509 Rev. 7
leaf fl'11151eg INDIA LIMITED
1.11211 rkeleUe013141/RD (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 3 of 4
LADDER POST
STOPPER PL. 85* OPENING
WELDED
35x16x5 THK.
\ Lr)
C:f Ns
M
,Oc, \
0
1.0 \
77
1 1
\ \
415 TUBE DIA 33 7mm THICKNESS 3.25
SAFETY BAR INSTALLATION ON LADDER POSTS
POSTS PLATE 75x10

POST MC 100
\ \
%'..". TUBE SQUARE CROSS SECTION

Ill 45x45x5 il
420 LADDER g
16 0 HOLES FOR M14 BOLTS

735
1 / /
30 95
SECTION 5-5
0
800 M14 BOLT 1mm CLEARANCE
SECTION 1 -1
SECTION 4-4
85*
PLATING OUTSIDE 755 HANDRAIL

LIMITS 120 POST RING
V
213 /17 0
0
I
6 THK PLATE
HANDRAIL POST BUTT WELD
SAFETY CAGE HOOP
ATTACHMENT TO
16 0 HOLES FOR M14 BOLTS
HANDRAIL POST
SAFETY CAGE HOOP
SECTION 3-3
SECTION 2-2
A
7 01 08 19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AVM RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R TRIVEDI
6 28.11 13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD VPS AJS P K MITTAL S CHANDA

No by by
Approved by
Page 1718 of 1823

STANDARD No.
#30taelENIGNEERS STEEL LADDER JOINT DETAILS 7-68-0509 Rev. 7
dIgaiIgleg INDIA LIMITED
1.1161Eli6ieeN3116.0
Page 4 of 4
REF EL. (T 0 S)
(SLIDING SUPPORT S2 )
OF 18 0 HOLE IN LADDER POST &

SLOTTED HOLE IN 10 THK. FLAT SEE DETAIL
Cl OR Al (LADDER ATTACHMENT) AS PER

EIL STD 7-68-0507 SHT 3 OF 3
REF. EL (T.O.S)
SLIDING CONN. DET. OF LADDER

(WITH TOE ANGLE OF PLATFORM ON THE
HEAD OF VESSEL) OFtLADDER POST
R=9
35
OF M16 BOLT
10 THK FLAT
DETAIL OF SLOTTED HOLE

(FOR SLIDING SUPPORT S2)
Nr REF EL
EL. (LADDER EXPN JOINT)
X1 c9
ADDITIONAL
EL.
X2
VESSEL
DET. OF LADDER EXPANSION JOINT

(WHEN DISTANCE BETWEEN TOP AND BOT.
MOST SUPPORT > 9000)
7 01 08 19 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AVM RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA

0"11/
R K TRIVEDI
6 28 11 13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD VPS AJS P K MITTAL S.CHANDA
Rev. Prepared Checked Stds Committee Stds Bureau

No by by
Approved by
Page 1719 of 1823

STANDARD No.
LADDER SUPPORT CLIPS
FOR 7-68-0512 Rev. 6
daWege UMMED
WWI mormaimpo (A Govt. of Indio Und•rtaking) HOT VESSELS Page 1 of 2
TO CYLINDRICAL PART TO CONICAL PART
190
-cr REFERENCE REFERENCE

EL EL.
50 1
/
90 70
- 30
TYPE-1 TYPE-2
of
o.o.
.6550-
REFERENCE
AXIS
90
190
PLAN
(CLIP TYPE 1 & 2)
6 17.06.19 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD GULSHAN RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R.K. NEDI
5 28.11.13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD VPS AJS P.K.MITTAL S.CHANDA

No. by by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O Copyright Ell. - All rights reserved
Page 1720 of 1823

STANDARD No.
LADDER SUPPORT CLIPS
FOR 7484512 Rev. 6
NUIR MONIMI (A Govt of Indio Undirtaking) HOT VESSELS Page 2 of 2
2-200 HOLES 2-200 HOLES

8 THK. STIFFENER
(TYP)
REFERENCE REFERENCE
EL. EL.
0
TYPE-3 TYPE-4
X
8 THK. STIFFENER
PLATE (TYP)
30
VESSEL 0 c< X (mm)
400 54'-8' 53
450 48' —16' 60
500 43'-43' 65
550 40' —5' 69

REFERENCE
AXIS 600 37' —3' 72
650 34*-30' 74
700 3T —17' 76
750 30'-22' 78
800 28*-40' 79
PLAN
(CLIP TYPE 3 & 4)
NOTES:-
1. FOR LADDER DETAILS REFER STD. NO. 7-68-0507 AND 7-68-0509
2. ALL CLIPS SHALL BE USED FOR LADDER SUPPORTS 'Xl & 'X2' UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
3. ALL STRUCTURAL CONNECTION BOLTS SHALL BE GALVANIZED AND 8.8 GRADE
4. MATERIAL FOR CLIPS SHALL BE AS PER MECH. DATA SHEET OF THE VESSEL.
A14).
6 17.06.19 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD GULSHAN APIA RAJANJI RIVASTAVA R.K.MEDI
5 28.11.13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD VPS AJS P.K.MrTTAL S.CHANDA

Rev.
No. by by
Frvmat Nn R-nn_nnni -F4 RPV n rnnvrinht Fll - All rinhtc rpcprvpr

Page 1721 of 1823
STANDARD No.
Ofaeiel ENGINEERS PLATFORM DETAILS FOR
faf5leg
riramed513,gr(R)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goy( of India Undertaking)
HORIZONTAL HOT VESSELS 7-68-0540 Rev.O
SHT. 1 of 6
1(pING SUPPORT (S.S.) OF WITH

G TYPE BOLTS, REF. EXT. A (SH. 4 OF 6)
L 100x100x8
ALROUND
200
Fk SLUING-SIF_PORT _QF _YESsFI f TYP
O.D. OF! V
ELECTROFORGED GRATING _t_QE 141111FR

TYPE-I (TYP)
LADDER AS EIL STD.
HANDRAIL
(REF. EIL STD. 7-68-0552, SH. 8 OF 8)
■n
°
EDIEDSUPPQRI_CIF_YESSEL_
FIXED SUPPORT (F.S.) OF

PLTF. WITH 180 HOLES FOR M16
BOLTS (IN TOE ANGLE)
G. A. OF PLATFORM
HANDRAIL POST
TYP
I 5° 15 011
i
6 50-50
6 50-50
1-100X100X8
*SECTION 1 1
- VIEW 2-2
*WHEREVER HANDRAIL ON ANGLE 'A' IS DISCONTINUED FOR ENTRY TO THE PLATFORM

FROM LADDER/STAIR/ADJACENT PLATFORM THE UPSTAND LEG OF ANGLE 'A' SHALL BE CUT
AND L100X1 00X8 WELDED AS PER SEC. 1-1 FOR THE LENGTH HANDRAIL IS DISCONTINUED.
NOTES:-
1. FOR LOCATION & EXTENT OF BRACKETS REFER GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING.
2. SPLICING OF TOE ANGLE SHALL BE DONE ONLY IF IT IS ESSENTIAL.
3. ELECTROFORGED GRATING TYPE-I SHALL BE AS PER EIL STD. NO. 7-68-0697.

4. FOR FURTHER DETAILS REFER GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS.
3. IN CASE OF DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THIS STD. & GENERAL ARRGT. DRG.,
THE LATER SHALL GOVERN.
6. FOR OTHER NOTES REFER SHT. 2 OF 6.
0 25.07.16 ISSUED AS STANDARD NKK

4 1
R.SRIVASTAVA R.NANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat Nn R-nn-onni-F4 RAy Corwrinht Fll - All rinhts rAsprvAr
Page 1722 of 1823

STANDARD No.
Lit? ENGINEERS PLATFORM DETAILS FOR
ui EVeg INDIA LIMITED HORIZONTAL HOT VESSELS 7-68-0540 Rev.0
(4Iren ew e aucgmi) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
SHT. 2 of 6
W=1000 (MAX.)
10
EL.(T.O.G.) (MAX.)
1 6TH. STIFF. PL TYP
MC150
'N s\
CUP-CL1
/t OF CUP
EL C.L OF VESSEL 250 I y
(MIN.)
OF VESSEL
VESSEL ( e)
BRACKET BKT.1
(DIMENSIONS X, Y & W SHALL BE AS PER G.A. DRAWING)
W=1400 (MAX.) XI
EL. (T.O.G.) 1 (MIN)
STIFF. PL TYP
MC150
CUP-CL2
/ OF CUP
EL (C.L OF VESSEL 250 ; Y SEA
(MIN.)
(e)
t OF VESSEL
BRACKET BKT.2
NOTES:-
CONTD. FROM SHT. 1 of 6
7. ALL CLIPS ARE IN THE SCOPE OF VESSEL FABRICATOR.
8. ALL BOLTS CONFORMING TO ASTM A193 Gr.B7 AND NUTS CONFORMING TO

ASTM A194 Gr. 2H SHALL BE USED FOR CONNECTIONS TO THE VESSEL.
9. THESE PLATFORMS ARE DESIGNED FOR AN IMPOSED LOAD OF 3.0KN/SO.M
AND THE BRACKETS FOR THE SPECIFIC CONDITION INDICATED. NO PIPE
SHALL BE ANCHORED OR GUIDED ON THE PLATFORM.
10. MATERIAL FOR CLIPS SHALL BE AS PER VESSEL DRAWING.
t-ts&
0 25.07.16 ISSUED AS STANDARD NKK ' 2P1
31A R.SRIVASTAVA R.NANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - All rights reservec
Page 1723 of 1823

Q
r3 1 ENGINEERS
PLATFORM DETAILS FOR STANDARD No.
r WegilliWr INDIA LIMITED
Reen eliasren5f3g0570 (A Govt of India Undertaking) HORIZONTAL HOT VESSELS 7-68-0540 Rev.0
SHT. 3 of 6
W=2800 (MAX.)
800 200
(MIN.) 10
EL. (TOG) 1° (MAX.)
CUP-CUS
6TH. STIFF. PL TYP MC150
CUP-CL1
1 N. MC125 SHALL BE PROVIDED
\ WHEN 'W' > 1400
//
t OF CUP t OF CUP
1 , Y1
f
Y
I
f
EL C.L OF VESSEL
1 ESSEX.
I
I
i
/1
REFERENCE EL 'X'
X
1 —1
1 /// 2-140 MC125
4
\\„‘, FOR M12 BOLTS.

IN PLATES (TYP)
8 TH. PLATE
-.__ .......-- 2-SLOTTED HOLES
-- 1 --- *.(6.\ INSULATION FOR M12 BOLTS.
t OF VESSEL (6) IN MC125 (TYP)
SECTION 3-3
BRACKET BKT.3
(DIMENSIONS X, Y, Y1 & W SHALL BE AS PER G.A. DRAWING)
BRACKET
W=2800 (MAX.)
MC125 SHALL BE PROVIDED

800 WHEN > 1400 200
10
(MAX) (MIN)
SECTION 4-4
6TH. STIFF. PL TYP
CUP-CL1
Y1
CUP CUP
EL (C.L OF VESSEL1
INSULATION
t OF VESSEL (8)
BRACKET BKT.4
FOR NOTES REFER SH. 1 OF 6 & SH. 2 OF 6
25.07.16
&L 11)*
0 ISSUED AS STANDARD NKK 1S1)-{A IA R.SRIVASTAVA R.NANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn 8-00-0001-F4 RAN/ 0 Convnaht Fll - All nnhts rasarver
Page 1724 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ei ENGINEERS PLATFORM DETAILS FOR
Otar Mirdg
aliVr elecrne aqi7S9)
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of India undertaking)
HORIZONTAL HOT VESSELS 7-68-0540 Rev.0
SHT. 4 of 6
10 W=2800 (MAX.)
800 (MAX) 10
MC125 SHALL BE PROVIDED
WHEN W > 1400 200 (MIN) zEL. (TOG)
16TH. STIFF. PL (TYP)
MC150
3
-----
CUP-CL1S
10TH. PL
10TH. PL.
MC125 FOR LENGTH <2000
MC150 FOR 2000< LENGTH <3500 TYP
EL.
111;i OF VESSEL)
W.P.
2-220 HOLES FOR M20 BOLTS 250 1, oo

(TYP) M IN.)
\( if SPLICE DETAIL OF TOE ANGLE
10 THK. PL
(AT TOP OF CUPS)
,•/
INSULATION
t OF VESSEL
(4)
I
BRACKET BKT.5
SECTION 5-5 BOLT TYPE 'G'

W=2800 (MAX.)
10
10!

CUP-CL1S MC150
10TH. PL
MC125 SHALL4 PROVIDED
WHEN W ,.•> 1400
60
CI 10_7_0 i
1
SLOTTED HOLE 24x44 LG.
Y Y1 250(MIN.) IN TOE ANGLE & 20 0
EL (C.L OF VESSEL
HOLE IN BKT. FOR 18/ 'G
TYPE BOLT (REF. DET.)
7 TYPE BOLT
BKT. MC150 200
\s, TOE ANGLE

100x100x8 TYP
10
'G' TYPE BOLT

r . "(s. INSULATION
OF VESSEL (0)
BRACKET BKT.6 DETAIL—'A'

0 25.97.16 ISSUED AS STANDARD

14‘k
NKK 19401A
AL
W.7.
21V STAVA
-
„)‘/
R.NANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No a-n0-0001-F4 RFIV Convrinht Fll - All rinhts rAnArvpil
Page 1725 of 1823

STANDARD No.
0 ENGINEERS
el PLATFORM DETAILS FOR
Itar 201-eg INDIA LIMITED
1717e71 rtecnie 0513,70570 IA Govt. of India Undertaking)
HORIZONTAL HOT VESSELS 7-68-0540 Rev.0
SHT. 5 of 6
10 W=4200 (MAX.) 10
MC125 SHALL BE PROVIDED WHEN 1000 (MAX.)
EL. TOG
GRATING SPAN > 1400
1' 200 (MIN.)
3
ii
MC200
CI IP-C1.2 CLIE=CL25
EL C.1. Cf
4t\INSULATION
t OF VESSEL (a)
BRACKET BKT.7
(DIMENSIONS Y, Y1 & W SHALL BE AS PER G.A. DRAWING)
O
rs-
FOR 1420 LONG BOLTS
W=1000 (MAX.) X El. cLaF
0
EL.(T.O.G.) I 6TH. STIFF. P TYP) 0
8TH. PL
MC150
EL C.L OF
Op _I DETAIL—B
4-220 HOLES
OR M20 BOLTS
INSULATION
t OF VESSEL (a)
BRACKET BKT.8
(DIMENSIONS X, Z & W SHALL BE AS PER G.A. DRAWING) VIEW 6 6-
0 25.07.16 ISSUED AS STANDARD NKK R.S VASTAVA R.NANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Format Nn £1-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Convrinht FII - All rinhts reserver
Page 1726 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS PLATFORM DETAILS FOR
INDIA LIMITED HORIZONTAL HOT VESSELS 7-68-0540 Rev.0
$ifta "5441
INTeR elecore m1 3UOM) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
SHT. 6 of 6
If OF CUP OF CUP
80 80 7 90 90
X MEMBER
MCI 50 MC150
2-22 0 HOLES 2-22 0 HOLES
FOR 1120 BOLTS FOR 1120 BOLTS 10 THK. PL
(SLOTTED HOLES IN MC)
(REFER DET. 51)
80 90
CLIP TYPE-CL1 CLIP TYPE-CL1 S VIEW 7-7
OF CUP
80
QE MEMBER
4-22 0 HOLES 4-22 0 HOLES

FOR 1120 BOLTS FOR 1120 BOLTS 10 THK. PL.
(SLOTTED HOLES IN MC)
(REFER DET. S2)
80
CLIP TYPE-CL2 CLIP TYPE-CL2S VIEW 8-8
OF CUP OF 1170 901 TS OF M70 ROWS

I I
PAD PL AS SED
TYP
SLOTTED HOLE
REFER DETAIL
DETAIL 'S1' DETAIL 'S2'

4-220 HOLES
FOR 14200 BOLT
CLIP TYPE-CL3 VIEW 9-9 SLOTTED HOLE

(FOR DET. S1 / S2)
0 25.07.16 ISSUED AS STANDARD

-t*NKK
4kt-
R.SRIVASTAVA 4 R.NANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrrnat No R-00-0001-F4 RAN/ ennvrinht FII - All rinhts rtAscirverr
Page 1727 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS PLATFORM SUPPORT CLIPS
e kii5ieU
5 lf INDIA LIMITED FOR 7-68-0557 Rev.6
10/11,7T ?IiIVIVCE,13.1CIFA) IA Govt of Ind,a Unctertakangt
HOT VESSELS SHT 1 of 3
- 10 THK PL
0 THK PL
F 00
REFERENCE
EL 'X'
REFERENCE
EL 'X'
+ + ----%
85
++— 85
,c,1
++ ,, _
TYPE -1 TYPE -3
(FOR BRACKETS LB1 & RB1)
10 THK PL
co
REFERENCE
EL 'X'
/1
+ + Rs
Lo
cs
—I— +
345
u-)
cn
+ +
0 co
0,
REFERENCE
EL 'X'
+ +
n^ +
Lr)
CT,
TYPE -2 +
FOR LEFT-
BRACKET 'LB'
A 88 35
L=A+123
TYPE-4
FOR RIGHT
BRACKET 'RB'
(CLIPS -TYPE 1,2,3 &4)
NOTES:-
1. DETAILS ON PAGE 1 ARE VALID, FOR e< 100(e=INSULATION THICKNESS)
2. A=45 FOR 0 < e< 50 AND A= e-5 FOR 50 < e < 100.
3. FOR e> 100, REFER DETAILS ON SHEET 2 OF 3
4. FOR BRACKET DETAILS REFER STANDARD NO 7-68-0553.
5. ALL STRUCTURAL CONNECTION BOLTS SHALL BE GALVANIZED AND 8.8 GRADE
6. MATERIAL FOR CLIPS SHALL BE AS PER VESSEL DRAWING.
6 11 07 19 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD KAUTUK KML/P A RAJANJI RIVASTAVA RKT
Rev. Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds Bureau

No by by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Copvnqht EIL - All nqhts reserved
Page 1728 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS PLATFORM SUPPORT CLIPS
IA Govt of India UrK*oolong)

—6 THK. PLATE 6 THK. PLATE
o " O (NI
REFERENCE REFERENCE
EL X' EL. 'X'
U)
aD CD
10 THK. PLATE 200 HOLES (TYP)
0 oo 0 10 THK. PLATE
01 aD
N rn
200 HOLES (TYP) N
TYPE-5 TYPE-7
(FOR BRACKETS LB3 & RB3 ) (FOR BRACKETS LB3 & RB3)
ir)
O
N
10 THK PLATE
U)
0)
0 200 HOLES (TYP) 6 THK PLATE
0 )r) 0 N
O rn REFERENCE
N
EL 'X'
o
A 10 THK. PLATE
U)
0
TYPE-6 200 HOLES (TYP)

042 TYPE-8
10 TI-IK PLATE (TYP)
0 (FOR BRACKETS LB4 & RB4 )
00- °'
THK. PLATE (TYP)
PLAN NOTES:-
(CLIPS TYPE 5, 6, 7 & 8) 1. THIS DETAIL IS VALID FOR e .100, BUT NOT MORE THAN 300MM A=e+1 0
2. FOR BRACKET DETAILS, REFER STD. NO. 7-68-0553
3. ALSO REFER NOTES 4,5, & 6 (SHT. 1 OF 3) OF THIS STD
6 11 07 19 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD

oak
KAUTUK KUL/PA RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA TR111‹..-

No by by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Copyright EIL - All nqhts reserved
Page 1729 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ti = ENGERS
IN PLATFORM SUPPORT CLIPS
Ifgel fengje
05T
g INDIA
(WTI FIRISIE'
LIMITED
3W1) (A Govt of Indta Undertalonw
FOR 7-68-0557 Rev. 6

SHELL - 8 THK. PLATE 8 THK. PLATE
OUTSIDE DIA. o " 0 (NJ
REFERENCE REFERENCE
o EL 'X' o EL 'X'
in Lo
--0--`, --1,-
II II)
cI4,"1 CV
I N. 10 THK PLATE
\ 10 THK. PLATE
in
cs, to V)
0) C•1
300 HOLES (TYP) '4'
300 HOLES (TYP)
N
II 12 THK. PLATE
12 THK PLATE
_.__ --s,,-
0
til
\
A
TYPE-13 TYPE-15
SHELL -8 THK. PLATE

8 THK. PLATE
OUTSIDE DIA. o CV 0 CV
REFERENCE REFERENCE
0 EL. 'X' EL. `X'
N
II
et......‹f
CV
I \ 10 THK. PLATE
10 THK. PLATE
o)
330 HOLES (TYP) -4
330 HOLES (TYP)
In
II 16 THK PLATE
_.— ____,,.. 16 THK. PLATE
0
to
,i,
Os'
0
A
A
TYPE-14 TYPE-16
NOTE:
1. THESE DETAILS ARE VALID FOR ALL THICKNESSES OF
INSULATIONS A=e+10 HOWEVER A SHALL NOT BE LESS
THAN 110
2. ALSO REFER NOTES 4,5 & 6 (SHEET. 1 OF 3) OF THIS STD.
6 11 07.19
(CLIPS TYPE 13, 14, 15 & 16)
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD (.7

KAUTUK KML/PA9
4
RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R K TRIVEDI

No by by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Coovnaht EIL - All nqhts reserved
Page 1730 of 1823

SMALL OPERATING PLATFORMS STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
ega RAN3 INDIA LIMITED ON GRADE/RCC ELEVATED 7-68-0562 Rev. 5
Iii elecnre 047.1) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
STRUCTURE SHT. 1 of 3
NOTES:-
1. THIS STANDARD COVERS DETAILS OF OPERATING PLATFORMS ON GRADE, OR
ON ELEVATED RCC STRUCTURE FOR A MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 2300mm ABOVE FGL AND/OR
2150mm ABOVE FFL.
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.

3. STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE OF GRADE E250, QUALITY BR/BO CONFORMING TO IS:2062
4. GRADE OF CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT BARS SHALL BE AS MENTIONED IN GENERAL

NOTES OF THE PROJECT.
5. GENERAL NOTES OF THE PROJECT SHALL ALSO BE FOLLOWED FOR CONCRETE AND STEEL WORKS.
6. THE LOCATION AND ORIENTATION OF PLATFORMS SHALL BE AS PER PIPING GAD.
7. DETAILS OF LADDERS SHALL BE AS PER EIL STD. NO. 7-68-0507.
8. DETAILS OF LADDER PEDESTAL SHALL BE AS PER EIL STD. NO. 7-67-0008.
9. GRATING SHALL BE ELECTROFORGED TYPE-I AS PER EIL STD. NO. 7-68-0697.
10. FOR H> 2000 HANDRAIL SHALL BE TYPE-II AND FOR H UPTO 2000 HANDRAIL
TYPE-IV AS PER EIL STD. NO. 7-68-0501 SHALL BE USED.
11. ALL GUSSET PLATES SHALL BE 8mm THICK, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
12. ALL CONNECTIONS SHALL BE WELDED USING 6mm THICK FILLET WELDS. CONNECTIONS
AT CORNER LOCATIONS SHALL BE WITH SUITABLE CLEAT ANGLE.
13. ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE AS PER EIL STD. NO. 7-68-0417.
14. FOUNDATIONS SHOWN IN THIS STANDARD ARE VALID FOR SBC OF 5.00 T/SQ.M AND
ABOVE AT FOUNDATION LEVEL.
15. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS IN PAVEMENT SHALL BE SUITABLY LOCATED AT
SITE IN CASE THICKENED PAVEMENT IS ADOPTED FOR PLATFORM FOUNDATIONS.
16. GROUT SHALL BE 1:2 CEMENT SAND MORTAR TYPE.
kouPdv f4 c'
_I
5 09.07.18 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD GAURAV KUMAR ALP/ NA RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R.K. TRIV DI
4 28.11.13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD A.K. SHARMA AMARJEET P.K.MITTAL S.CHANDA

No. by by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 1731 of 1823

Silfaziel ENGINEERS
ligail8f54-egw INDIA LIMITED ON GRADEIRCC ELEVATED 7-68-0562 Rev. 5
ii4f2R eleore.orM-F) IA Govt Of India Undertalmg)
HAN DRAILING
MC1 00
174 4N
FFL
FGL HPP
2
25 THK. ELECTROFORGED
GRATING (TYP—I) LADDER/PLATFORM JJ VIEW 1-1
c.D
(LADDER & HANDRAIL NOT SHOWN)
PLAN o 0
30 THK. 2-11—M16—N1-80
GROUT V-3 371 2-81 LINKS
HPP
2N
PCC1 :5:10
1
1
PAVEMENT W DTH=750 10 —@200c/c
R/F LENGTH= `114'+500
107* @200c/c
VIEW 3-3
DETAIL OF FOUNDATION
(W.R.T. VIEW 1-1)
170
(TYP) =
2-190 HOLES
4-121 FOR M16 BOLTS
0
LINKS
on
300 ], GUSSET PL.
8 THK.
BASE PL.
SEC. 2-2 12 THK.
VIEW. 4-4
750 A 1 000
TYP. DETAILS OF PLATFORMS FOR 750 B 1 000
750 H „<1000
5 09.07.18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD GAURAV KUMAR ALPAN' RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R.K. T EDI

No. by by
Page 1732 of 1823

ENGINEERS
igtirfaf5i-eg INDIA LIMITED ON GRADEIRCC ELEVATED 7-68-0562 Rev. 5
1.1re eiroxem.fusn.1) (A Goof of India Undenatong)
OF LADDER
MC100
1 HANDRAILING
MC 100 (TYP)
MC100 BOX
(TYP)
(TYP)
PROVIDE THIS MEMBER

FOR A>1300 ONLY.
FFL
FGL/HPP
VIEW 2-2
(LADDER & HANDRAIL NOT SHOWN)
25THK. ELECTROFORGED 1 =
GRATING (TYPE-I)
PLAN
II N1
O
C.,
II
LEAN CONC.
1:5:10
PLAN OF FOUNDATION SECTION 1 —1

(2 NOS. REOD. THUS) < (TYP)
4-1I-M16-N1-80 GUSSET PL.
4-161 8 THK.
4-121 4-190 HOLES

0 FOR M16 BOLTS
AD
LINKS
BASE PL.
450 12 THK.
SEC. 3-3 VIEW 4-4 VIEW 5-5
1000 1500
TYP. DETAILS OF PLATFORMS FOR 1000 <B <2500
1000 <H 2000
5 09.07.18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD GAURAV KUMAR ALPA A RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R.K. TRI I

No. by by
Page 1733 of 1823

STANDARD No
as6=41164:1
B4914ERS
MONORAIL FIXING DETAILS
WITH STEEL MEMBERS 7-68-0683 Rev. 4
l iameasama•
1.1-nril (40.4 a ha, Unthrtad.9)
Page 1 of 9
ALIGNMENT PLATE(TYP)
FOR DETS. REFER STD.
7-68-0684.
4:4
L MONORAIL BEAM
ELEVATION
STOPPER(TYP)
FOR DETS. REFER
STD. 7-68-0684
Os_ B
I— MONL/KAIL CILAM
Ili 11
Iii4111111MININNIMIl 1111•11111111111illii2IIIMIMMIL 1111=11,11111110101111bIll
et.,
IMAIUM11111111•111 1111111111111MIUMI 11•1111WIEN11111M.11111Mil
1111 STEEL BEAM —2MCO II STEEL BEAM — 2MCONIIIF
PLAN
MONORAIL CONNECTION WITH 2 MC[]
MONORAIL BEAM
ROVIDE PLAN BRACING
ELEVATION L 75X75X6 FOR CANTILEVER
PROJECTION EXCEEDING
1.5 m (TYP) FOR DET.
REFER SHEET 8 OF 9
MONORAIL BEAM
=RN= mramorm
STEEL BEAM—MB STEEL BEAM—MB
PLAN
MONORAIL CONNECTION WITH MB
APPLICABLE FOR LIFT

CAPACITY UPTO 4.0 T
06-06-18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD Cs
3 14-08-12 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD V.P.SIMGM RAMCMES/PK MOTU, S CHATURVEDI D MAU4OTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8 - 00- 0001 - F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 1734 of 1823

STANDARD No.
trig/Mk.,
PEERS
, 11VD WITH STEEL MEMBERS 7-88-0683 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 9
MONORAIL BEAM
ELEVATION
C
hivrivrtAIL ',LAM '
I II
irrimrmi ---,7.1
It IL
rc---- 11 it.
4111111111111PM1111111111
liamielo= 21 ---Wmi - rai----- irismoillutinnomm
II 0 STEEL BEAM-2MCH II I STEEL BEAM-2MC][ guir
PLAN
MONORAIL CONNECTION WITH 2 MC)[
MONORAIL BEAM
ELEVATION
D
MONORAIL BEAM
11
moo 1 lamming
la 1 ymit:MIL
ammuvi
imml 1-9 Ig! =.-11.10.0% =aim Imimmui
N4 i
15 TRUSS BOTTOM 5 Ii TRUSS BOTTOM ill IT-
CHORD- JL CHORD- JL
PLAN
MONORAIL CONNECTION WITH 2 ISA JL
APPLICABLE FOR LIFT
CAPACITY UPTO 4.0 T
4 06-06-18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD 44:if
AVIA R.SRIVASTAVA itAlA
RK TIMOR il
3 14-08-12 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD RAAICHEE/PK WRAC S CHATURVEDI 0 MALHOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8 - 00 - 0001 - F4 Rev.0 Copyright El L - All rights reserved
Page 1735 of 1823

STANDARD No .

OBSWOOSED WITH STEEL MEMBERS 7-88-0683 Rev. 4
0111111WWWIlle (A Govt. of India Undortoldno)
Page 3 of 9
OF BEAM
25 OF BEAM MC[]
STIFF. PLATE STIFF. PLATE

TYP. TYP>
0
TYP.
PLATE
a / Y / a
MONORAIL BEAM MONORAIL BEAM
VIEW 1 -1 VIEW 2-2
OF BEAM OF BEAM MC[]
CL
STIFFENER PLATE STIFFNER PLATE

0
OF MONORAIL-
CONNECTION BOLTS(TYP)
DETAIL-A DETAIL-B
APPLICABLE FOR LIFT

CAPACITY UPTO 4.0 T
4 06-06-18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD AVM R.SRIVASTAVA RK
3 14-08-12 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD V.P.SMIGH FMAICHEE/P1( MITTAL S CHATURVEDI D WAMOTRA

No by by
Approved by
Page 1736 of 1823

STANDARD No .

diargeM4133 WITH STEEL MEMBERS 7-68-0683 Rev. 4
OINNIVIN.61.••• (A GM. a Im1k1 Und.rtakin)
Page 4 of 9
OF BEAM MC][
OF TRUSS
STIFF. PLATE
TYP.
TYP.
PLATE
0
TYP.
STIFF. PLATE
PLATE
VIEW 3-3 VIEW 4-4
1o(TYP)
/1' € OF BEAM MC][
OF TRUSS
I- STIFFNER PLATE STIFFNER PLATE

0 0
== 9
r- I t -
—rk—OF MONORAIL
_J
-= L==L
PLATE
DETAIL-C DETAIL-D
APPLICABLE FOR LIFT

CAPACITY UPTO 4.0 T
4 06-06-18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD AYH R.SRIVASTAVA MC TRIVEDI )-
3 14-08-12 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD V.P.SINGH RAAMME/PK INTTAL S CHATURVEDI D HAUMTRA
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O Copyright El L - All rights reserved
Page 1737 of 1823

STANDARD No
MONORAIL FIXFIG DETAILS
ddiVealliaTEoIIVinD
P11•11111
ERS (A GwL f lode Unadaldng)
WITH STEEL MEMBERS
7-68-0683 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 9
ALIGNMENT PLATE(TYP)
FOR DETS. REFER STD.
7-68-0684.
MONORAIL BEAM STOPPER(TYP)

ELEVATION FOR DETS. REFER
STD. 7-68-0684
a- F
MOM/MAIL tILAPA
ME -
ill Iii∎
6- imrsri-ammen.
RES11.1E-TgINIMMI
1111 1 =111-
=6pemslugee.q 01 11:1V"Illiffhli-
1 --
insilMemslummi
magml
a STEEL BEAM-2MC[] 111 STEEL BEAM-214CD 111

iir, r_ W
PLAN
MONORAIL CONNECTION WITH 2 MC[]
MONORAIL BEAM
PROVIDE PLAN BRACING
ELEVATION L 75X75X6 FOR CANTILEVER
PROJECTION EXCEEDING
1.5 m (TYP)
FOR DEL REFER SHEET 8 OF 9
MONORAIL BEAM DETAIL—H (TYP)
-ZEDILigni=1 MIL ■M111."

112s M1111/111
STEEL BEAM—MB/WPB STEEL BEAM—MB/WPB
PLAN
MONORAIL CONNECTION WITH MB/WPB
APPLICABLE FOR LIFT
CAPACITY ABOVE 4.0 T
TO 20/ 1T
4 06-06-18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD 4.
AVM 04 R.SRIVASTAVA
3 14-08-12 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD V.P.SINGH RAAKMEEMC MITTAL S CHATURVEDI MALMOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1738 of 1823

STANDARD No.
7-68-0683 Rev. 4
418M t
ai
(A Govt.
folIPNOMA of Indlo Unthrtokitg)
WITH STEEL MEMBERS
Page 6 of 9
MONORAIL BEAM
ELEVATION
G
INONUICAIL 15LAM
li 11 k 11 1 li•
no ti011MMIL 4A VA =nu riamm
min
II P
'm ama
STEEL BEAM-2MCH
MI M
N III STEEL BEAM-2MC][
rilr"—mi
kr F,I.,r
NI( _.„,
PLAN
MONORAIL CONNECTION WITH 2 MC][
APPLICABLE FOR LIFT

TO 20.0 T
06-06-18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD Cfr
CS
MAO
AVM R.SRIVASTAVA
3 14-08-12 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD V.P.SSION RAMOCEPIC minx a CHATURVE01 0 MAUSOTRA •
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O Copyright El L - All rights reserved
Page 1739 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENCNERS MONORAIL FIXING DETAILS
eitrilresenWo■
t LFATE ) WITH STEEL MEMBERS 7-68-0683 Rev. 4
Page 7 of 9
TYP
i OF BEAM
PLATE
TYP
25(11P) OF BEAM MC[]
STIFF. PLATE
A
STIFF.
PLATE TYP.
10(TYP)
6._ PLATE
mum
VIEW 5-5 VIEW 6-6
OF BEAM C OF BEAM MC[]

I 0(TYP
CONNECTION BOLTS(TYP)
STIFFENER PLATE —STIFFNER PLATE
OF MONORAIL ca - t- -t Of MONORAIL.
4-
PLATE
114 PLATE
. .
a a a b1
DETAIL-E DETAIL-F
APPLICABLE FOR LIFT

TO 20itT
4
3
Rev.
06-06-18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD
14-08-12 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD
CS
pf,44:10,
AVAI
V.PSDIGH RAAKHEE/VK IATTAL
Prepared Checked
ILSRIVASTAVA
S CHATURVEDI
Stds. Committee
RIC 71 41>
1)
D WALH011tA
Stds. Bureau
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Copyright El L - All rights reserved
Page 1740 of 1823

STANDARD No.
oklemeoW1EERS
Go. , LiViTED WITH STEEL MEMBERS 7-68-0683 Rev. 4
Page 8 of 9
OF BEAM 1.4C)(
MONORAIL BEAM
VIEW 7-7 VIEW 8-8
1O(TYP)
I OF BEAM Ma
STIFFNER PLATE
Ism nr IM _t_oF MONORAIL

GUSSET PLATE 10 THK.
M nL
PLATE
DETAIL—G DETAIL—H
(BRACING DETAIL)
APPLICABLE FOR LIFT

TO 2o.yiT:
jib
4 06-06-18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD Cdfr R.SRIVASTAVA RK TRNEq
3 14-08-12 REAFFIRMED. AND ISSUED AS STANDARD V.P.SIHOH RAAKHEE/PK IIITTAL S CHATURVED1 D IIALHOTRA
No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Copyright El L - All rights reserved
Page 1741 of 1823

STANDARD No .

I
Oligar A ..., MTED
MO(NATS WITH STEEL MEMBERS 7-68-0683 Rev. 4
Page 9 of 9
NOTES:—
1. ALL CONNECTIONS ARE 6 mm FILLET ALL
ROUND WELDS, EXCEPT BETWEEN MONORAIL
AND MONORAIL SUPPORTING BEAM WHICH IS
BOLTED CONNECTION.
2. ALL STIFFENER PLATES SHALL BE 8 mm THK.
FOR MONORAIL CAPACITY UPTO 4.0 T AND
10 mm THK. FOR MONORAIL CAPACITY ABOVE
4.0 T TO 20.0 T.
3. DIMENSIONS G AND g CORRESPOND TO GAUGE
DISTANCE OF MONORAIL BEAM AND MONORAIL
SUPPORTING BEAM RESPECTIVELY.
4. ALSO REFER GEN. NOTES OF THE PROJECT.
SCHEDULE OF MONORAIL BEAM CONNECTION
MONORAIL NO. OF DIA OF DIMENSION IN mm

BEAM CONNECTION CONNECTION
BOLTS BOLT(mm) a b c G t
---.. PROVIDE B NOS. CONNECTIO N BOLTSABOVE 4. 0 T TO20.0T UFT CAP.. -
MB 200 M-16 25 - 150 55 10
MB 250 M-20 30 - 170 65 10

r- --I
MB 350 M-20 35 60 200 16
80
MB 400 M-20 35 60 200 80 16
MB 450 M-20 40 65 220 90 16

ION BOL
MB 500 M-22 40 65 240 100 16
MB 600 M-22 40 65 240 100 16
WPB 600x300x128.8 M-24 50 65 320 150 16
WPB 600x300x177.8 M-24 50 65 320 150 16
WPB 700x300x149.9 M-24 50 80 320 150 16
WPB 800x300x224 M-24 50 320 150 16

I_
80_I
1
— DIMENSIONS ENCLOSED BY DOTTED LINES ARE APPLICABLE TO 8 BOLT CONNECTIONS ONLY

(REFER SHEETS 7 AND 8.)
1414
4 06-06-18 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD AVM RAMS-CAVA RIC
3 14-08-12 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD ROJCHEE/PK MRIAL SCHAIURVEDI 0 IIALMOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1742 of 1823

DETAIL OF STANDARD No.
15asztegftENGINEERS 7-68-0691 Rev.3
ligat
Merl
faRegmer
VIRM..13.11..9
LIMITBD
IA Govt. of Indio Undertaking)
SLIDING T-SUPPORT
Page 1 of 2
FLAT 50x10
SEAM WELD WITH

2mm PROJECTION
10 THK. STIFF.
SEC 3-3 VIEW 2-2
PL .
10 THK PL.
8 THK PL.
(TYP) 10 THK PL.
N/S & F/S 4-19 DIA HOLE
(TYP)
DETAIL - A
20 THK BASE PL.

8 THK
END PL. VIEW 1 -I
EL.(TOS)
(BASE PLATE TYPE I)
AS/PIPING GAD
4-23 DIA HOLE

MEMB 'A'
If
11/4 ,,u/s OF BASE PL. 25 THK BASE PL.
0
0
r) 7FGL/HPP VIEW 1-1
(BASE PLATE TYPE II)
16 THK PL.
10 THK PL.
ELEVATION 4-27 DIA HOLE
c PIPE
si-sara T—SUPPORT
I 28 THK BASE PL.

T—SUPPORT
VIEW 1-1
PLAN (BASE PLATE TYPE II)
S. T—SUPPT. WIDTH HEIGHT MEMB 'A' BASE PLATE h CONN. PLATE APPX. QTY
NO. MKD. 'W' 'H' TYPE A B IN KG
1 TSA UPTO 750 UPTO 2000 ISMC1500 I 200 200 225 150
2 TSB UPTO 750 2000<1-13000 ISMC200D II 275 250 300 260
3 TSC UPTO 750 3000<H4000 ISMC250E] III 325 300 350 410
4 TSD 750<W1500 UPTO 1500 ISMC150E] I 200 200 225 160
5 TSE 750<W1500 1500<11<2300 ISMC200E] II 275 250 300 260
6 TSF 750<W1500 2300<H,.0000 ISMC250E] III 325 300 350 400
3 15.04.17 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD Anju ADITYA RAJAN JI SRIVASTAVA R.NANDA
2 27.06.11 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD SUSHMA P.K.MITTAL S.CHATURVEDI D.MALHOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1743 of 1823

DETAIL OF STANDARD No.
15ffitadMENGINEERS
iMegverltstAA LIMITED 7-68-0691 Rev.3
(.VIROPUNIJ70.0 IA Govt. of India Undertaking) SLIDING T-SUPPORT
Page 2 of 2
I
0
CNI
(T.O.G)
FGL/HPP
-a-12-12T
10T © 200 C/C

3 3
SECTION 3-3
4-IV-M16-N2-105
12T © 200 C/C

LEAN CONC.1:5:10
10T © 200 C/C(T)
12A © 200 C/C(B)
=
ELEVATION VIEW 4-4
(FOR SUPPORT TSA & TSD)
4-1V-M20-N2-120
T-SUPPORT
III
T-SUPPORT VIEW 4-4
(FOR SUPPORT TSB & TSE)
II
4-IV-M24-N2-135
==
VIEW 4-4
(FOR SUPPORT TSC & TSF)
FDN. PLAN
5.0 S.B.C<10.0 T/sqM 10.0< S.B.C<15.0 T/sqM S.B.C>,1 5 .0 T/sq M
S. T-SUPPORT PED SIZE FDN. SIZE QTY IN FDN. SIZE QTY IN FDN. SIZE QTY IN
NO. MARKED d b L B m3 L B m3 L B m3
1 TSA 600 600 1800 1800 1.51 1600 1600 1.31 1500 1500 1.22
2 TSB 650 650 2000 2000 1.83 1750 1750 1.55 1600 1600 1.40
3 TSC 675 675 2250 2250 2.20 1800 1800 1.66 1800 1800 1.66
4 TSD 600 600 2000 2000 1.74 1750 1750 1.46 1600 1600 1.31
5 TSE 650 650 2250 2250 2.15 1800 1800 1.60 1700 1700 1.50
6 TSF 675 675 2250 2250 2.20 1900 1900 1.77 1900 1900 1.77
NOTES:-
1. FOLLOWING LOADS HAVE BEEN CONSIDERED IN DESIGN:
a) VERTICAL LOAD = 1.0 MT FOR 750 WIDTH
= 2.0 MT FOR 1500 WIDTH
b) WIND INTENSITY = 150 Kg/sqm
c) WIND ON 24" PIPE HAS BEEN CONSIDERED
d) PIPE FRICTION COEFFICENT IN EITHER DIRECTION = 0.30 * DEPTH OF FDN. CAN BE INCREASED
2. CONC GRADE SHALL BE AS PER GENERAL NOTES TO CLEAR U/G PIPING IF ANY.
OF THE PROJECT BUT NOT LOWER THEN M20.
44AA
3 1 5.04.1 7 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD Anju ADITYA RAJAN JI SRIVASTAVA R.NANDA
2 27.06.11 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD SUSHMA P.K.MITTAL S.CHATURVEDI D.MALHOTRA

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1744 of 1823

STANDARD No.
Peiel• ENONEERS ELECTROFORGED GRATING
St-a r Rift
,..enel2zinrzOT3air.i)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Unftertaungf
TYPE-I & TYRE-II 7-68-0697 Rev 4
SHT 1 of 8
NOTES :-
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm.

2. THE TYPE OF GRATING TO BE USED SHALL BE CALLED OUT ON THE DESIGN DRAWING.
3. MATERIAL FOR THE GRATING (TWISTED BARS/M.S. FLATS) SHALL BE OF GRADE E250 SUB QUALITY-A/BR/BO
CONFORMING TO IS:2062. BEARING FLATS AND END FLAT SHALL BE AS PER IS:1730. FLAT FOR CLAMPS
SHALL BE AS PER IS:513.
4. ALL GRATINGS SHALL BE MADE BY ELECTROFORGING PROCESS.
5. GRATINGS SHALL BE HOT DIP GALVANISED IN ACCORDANCE WITH IS:2629 AND TESTED AS PER
IS:2633 AND IS:6745. QUANTITY OF ZINC COATING SHALL BE MINIMUM 900 gm/m2 OF SURFACE
AREA (0.12mm UNIFORM THICKNESS)
6. THE PANEL WIDTH SHOWN ON THE SUBSEQUENT SHEETS IS INDICATIVE. IT MAY BE INCREASED OR
DECREASED AS REQUIRED TO SUIT THE GEOMETRY OF THE PLATFORM & CONVENIENCE OF HANDLING.
7. GRATINGS SHALL NOT BE USED FOR SUPPORTING THE PIPES DIRECTLY. ADDITIONAL MEMBERS
(MINIMUM MC125) SHALL BE PROVIDED UNDER THE GRATING FOR SUPPORTING THE PIPE HAVING
A MAXIMUM LOAD OF 500 Kg. THIS MEMBER SHALL SPAN IN SAME DIRECTION AS GRATING.
8. GALVANISED GRATING PANEL SHALL BE ALIGNED AND TACK WELDED TO THE SUPPORTING MEMBERS.
THEREAFTER FIXING OF GRATING PANEL WITH SUPPORTING MEMBERS SHALL BE DONE BY CLAMPS
(WITHOUT REMOVING TACK WELD) OR ALTERNATIVELY BY WELDING.
REMOVABLE GALVANISED GRATING PANEL AS SHOWN IN DWGS SHALL BE FIXED BY CLAMPS ONLY.
9. FOR GRATING PANELS WITH CUTOUTS / OPENINGS; STRENGTHENING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT
AS PER THE DETAILS GIVEN ON SHEET 6. ADDITIONAL MEMBERS WHEREVER SHOWN SHALL BE PROVIDED
IN THE STRUCTURE.
10. THE FABRICATED GRATING SHALL FULFILL THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS:
(a) THE UNFUSED JOINTS ARE NOT IN EXCESS OF 5% OF THE TOTAL JOINTS AND ARE WELDED
BY SMAW/GMAW PROCESS
(b) THE JOINTS ARE ABLE TO SUSTAIN A MINIMUM PULL OUT LOAD OF 1.2 TIMES THE ALLOWABLE
SHEAR CAPACITY OF THE CROSS MEMBER.
11. EVERY FIFTH MAIN MEMBER SHALL NECESSARILY BE WELDED TO THE END FLAT FROM (ONE SIDE)
HOWEVER, THE END MAIN MEMBER SHALL ALWAYS BE WELDED TO THE END FLATS.
12. OPENINGS UP TO 200mm DIA ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DRAWING THE SAME SHALL BE MADE AT SITE
DURING ERECTION OF PIPING.
13. REPAIR TO THE DAMAGED AREA OF GALVANIZED COATING DUE TO WELDING AFTER ERECTION SHALL BE
CARRIED OUT AS PER RECOMMENDED PRACTICE OF IS:11759 USING COLD GALVANIZING SPRAY PROCESS.
ORGANIC PAINT SYSTEM IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
14. MAXIMUM LENGTH OF SINGLE CONTINUOUSLY SUPPORTED GRATING SHALL BE FIXED ON THE BASIS OF
HANDLING. HOWEVER PREFERABLY LENGTH OF GRATING SHALL BE RESTRICTED TO 4.2M.
4 02 01 19 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD ARUN AL

Ant,
AMARJEET
II
MAN SRIVASTAVA 'R.K TRIVEDI
3 04 11 15 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JRENDER GUPTA AMARJEET RAJA?. SRIVASTAVA S. CHANDA

No by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Copyright Ell - All rights reserved
Page 1745 of 1823
STANDARD No
at
ENGINEERS ELECTROFORGED GRATING
5fgar tMegd INDIA LIMITED TYPE-I & TYPE-II 7-68-0697 Rev 4
Govt 01 India UndenAingl
SHT 2 of 8
TABLE-1
USE OF GRATING TYPE AT VARIOUS LOCATIONS &

NET SAFE WORKING LOADS FOR GRATING TYPE-I & II
/ 500 TO 800 900 1000 1100 1250 1400

TYPE APPLICATION
EITHER OF w(UDL IN KN/m2 ) OR P(LINEAR LOAD IN KN/M)
1. EQUIPMENT PLATFORM W
2. WALKWAY FOR CABLE 19.60 14.80 10.80 8.10 5.30 3.40
TRAY IN PIPE RACK
3. OPERATING PLATFORM FROM -
GRADE/SUPER STRUCTURE 9.00
4. APPROACHES P 8.00 6.60 5.40 4.00 2.70
1. STAIRS
2. FLOOR GRATING FOR w 19.60 17.60 13.20 8.70 5.50
a) COMPRESSOR HOUSE
II b) TECHNOLOGICAL STRUCTURE
e) PIPE RACK WITH
VALVE / PIPE SUPPORTS P 14.60 13.00 10.70 8.80 6.30 4.40
d) MAINTENANCE PLATFORM
NOTE:— THE NET SAFE WORKING LOADS GIVEN ON TABLE-1 ARE BASED ON LIMITING VERTICAL
DEFLECTION OF SPAN/200 OR 6mm, WHICHEVER IS LESS.
SYMBOLS :-
= EFFECTIVE SPAN IN mm
b = BEARING WIDTH IN mm
= UDL IN KN/m2
p = LINEAR LOAD IN KN/m AT MID SPAN ALONG PANEL WIDTH.
= GRATING SPAN DIRECTION
4 02 01 19 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD d at

ARUN LAL AMARJEET RAJAN SRIVASTAVA R.K.TRIVEPr
3 04 11 15 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JITENDER GUPTA AMARJEET RAJAN SRIVASTAVA S. CHANDA
No by by
Approved by
Page 1746 of 1823
STANDARD No
ot(el ENGINEERS ELECTROFORGED GRATING
tlf ___U INDIA LIMITED TYPE-I & TYPE-II 7-68-0697 Rev 4
(A Govt 01 India Undertaking)
SHT 3 of 8
'A' 36 NOS. FLAT 25x3

r
_ (MAIN MEMBER)
-ilk-L- -I-
1053 OVERALLWIDTH
100 100 100 4,

LL
I
MAIN
g II I EMB El
i I H
-
HT—IIi-i--I
I
1 I U I
.60
Zr z
C , II
I
(REFER NOTE-11)
II.
CROSS
1/CLAIDCD
CING0030 c/c
Z
0 DI
DETAIL - 'A'
0
I
—-
I
35 SPACING
O
Zr
CD
35
0 __FAc
100 100 100
E x z
1 I 'B' rI
i 1
I 1
-- -
— I---I
I. Li FLAT 25x3
-
SECTION 1 -1
n i
si
-
b1-1
CROSS MEMBER
/
MAIN MEMBER
CLEAR SPAN = 1—b

ff
ti
E
PLAN DETAIL - 'B'

* (REFER VIEW 4-4 IN SHEET 5 OF 8)
TABLE-2
WT. OF GRATING IN kg/m 2 PROPERTIES REMARKS

(INDICATIVE ONLY, NOT FOR AYMENT) WIDTH = 1053mm
6mm SQUARE" lxx Zxx MR
25x6 25x3 TWISTED TOTAL
BAR cm4 cm3 kg m
2.36 20.13 2.54 25.03 14.84 11.87 195.94
GRATING TYPE - I
ANT
4 02 01 19 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD ARV N LAL AMAR JE RAJAH SRIVASTAVA
3 04 11 15 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD -MENDER GUPTA AMARJEET RAJAH SRIVASTAVA S. NANDA

No by by
Approved by
Page 1747 of 1823
STANDARD No.
A31 ENGINEERS ELECTROFORGED GRATING
$1g-a tapreg Idled eiezreanotoug
INDIA LIMITED TYPE-I & TYPE-II 7-68-0697 Rev. 4
IA Govt 01 India Undettakpng)
SHT 4 of 8
•
E 31 NOS. FLAT 25x6
E e/ C
r L _ (MAIN MEMBER)
e-k—1 1 -
1 I a 75 75 1
, 75 1'
i I
i—
[ _ __ _ _ _ _ ji3j MAIN
EL I 11)
ific
En
mo
1Hi
/ I oi 1
gi MEMBEI
ls
on
PI
111 I 1 N HI
1 a
C
in
lo
I I NI
1 z
I 0 C (REFER NOTE-11)
Il
Il
CROSS
LICLADPD
0
-.... ''''...
0 0 u
to
to I
DETAIL - 'C'
g
i
i
30 SPACING 0
../ ....--
814
D
BAR
----•
I
75 75 75
X Xt X X
II
1
D' I
1
I
ROSS MEI
WARETWI'
4
-1-7-
Ili i1
Li FLAT 25x6
;-
// "" SECTION 2-2
III . I I tO
I
E
E I CROSS MEMBER
Il
t3,
I I MAIN MEMBER
CLEAR SPAN = /-b ir

/
T1 .11
PLAN
DETAIL - 'D'
* (REFER VIEW 4-4 IN SHEET 5 OF 8)
TABLE-3
WT. OF GRATING IN kg/m2 PROPERTIES
REMARKS
(INDICATIV ONLY, NOT FOR PAYMENT) WIDTH = 1056mm
8mm SQUARE lxx Zxx MR

25x6 TOTAL
TWISTED BAR cm4 cm3 kgm
36.92 6.14 43.06 24.2 19.4 319.69
GRATING TYPE - II
4 02 01.19 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD ARM AMARJEET RAJAN SRIVASTAVA R.K.TRNEDI
3 04 11 15 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JITENDER GUPTA AMARJEET RAJAN SRIVASTAVA S. GMANDA

No by by
Approved by
Page 1748 of 1823
STANDARD No
aaa-ei ENGINEERS ELECTROFORGED GRATING
Ogen fePleg
own pve/Hemacpp)
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goo of ocba Una/riming)
TYPE-I & TYPE-II 7-68-0697 Rev 4
SHT 5 of 8
CLAMP 25x3 THK. M.S. FLAT,

WITH 8 0 HOLES (AS/IS:513) CLAMP TWISTED BAR
ncup
5mm7 8mm/6mm
IMMEI
. um' J.
GRATING
25x6 THK. M.S.
FIAT WITH 8 0
HOLES, TACK
WELDED TO STRL.
MEMBER
VIEW 3-3 VIEW 4-4
GRATING FIXED WITH CLAMP GRATING FIXED WITH CLAMP
(REFER NOTE-8&13) (REFER NOTE-8&13)
25 min. FULL FLANGE WIDTH

FOR ONE SIDE SUPPORT
TWISTED BAR
GRATING
(min.)
VIEW 4-4
GRATING FIXED WITH WELDING
(REFER NOTE-13)
3 7
WELD/CLAMP (TYP) a E a
K4 -44
MIDDLE FLAT/
4-
E El 3
L (SPAN)
I
FIXING DETAIL FOR GALVANISED GRATING PANELS
4 02 01 19 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD 444

ARUN LAI
A-A.L
MAAR/EFT RAJAH SRIVASTAVA R.K.TRIVEDI
3 04 11 15 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JITENDER GUPTA Al/ARJECT RAJAH SRIVASTAVA S CHANDA

No by by
Approved by
Page 1749 of 1823
STANDARD No.
ELECTROFORGED GRATING
ENGINEERS
51gzirftWeg
own
INDIA LIMITED
;IC,21517//110:1M1,0 (A Govt of Inde Unoenaking)
TYPE-I & TYPE-II 7-68-0697 Rev 4
SHT 6 of 8
GALVANISED
FLAT 25x6 ALROUND GALVANISED
& WELDED TO MIMI=11111,
FLAT 25x6
GRATING FLAT RR
IMM ;
BENT TO SHAPE
111111111M1111 • & WELDED TO
GRATING FLAT
3
3r WELDING SHALL BE
DONE ON ALL THE
3V WELDING SHALL BE
FLATS AND BARS
DONE ON ALL THE
FLATS AND BARS
RECTANGULAR CIRCULAR
(SIZE OF OPENING >200 & UP TO 400 mm)

(FOR OPENING UP TO 200 MM REFER NOTE-12)
r GALVANISED GALVANISED
/ FLAT 25x6 ALROUND FLAT 25x6 BENT TO SHAPE
/ 8c WELDED TO GRATING FLAT & WELDED TO GRATING FLAT
SIMISPIPIRENRM
M NRRRR~r
MINN Mr
MONSEN'
NM I RI
=MIN
SUPPORTING MEMBER AS NI SUPPORTING MEMBER AS
AS PER DESIGN DWG OR RR~I•I • AS PER DESIGN DWG OR
RR~Ir I.c.
L-75x75x6 MINIMUM L-75x75x 6 MINIMUM
BELOW GRATING SINIEL BELOW GRATING
alRINEL:
RR~InRR
aGiGaGiGiGiGIMMMTHISIMM
3 3 WELDING SHALL BE
W WELDING SHALL BE
DONE ON ALL THE DONE ON ALL THE
FLATS AND BARS
FLATS AND BARS
RECTANGULAR CIRCULAR
SIZE OF OPENING GREATER THAN 400 mm

TYPICAL DETAIL OF GRATING STRENGTHENING AT OPENINGS
(REFER NOTE-9)
4 02 01 19 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD A.1.9 AMARJEET RAJAH SRIVASTAVA

m
R.K.1RY
j4)"
3 04 11 15 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JITENDER GUPTA AMARIEET RAJAH SRIVASTAVA S. CHANDA

No by by
Approved by
Page 1750 of 1823
STANDARD No
oira_i ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
ligeittaileg TYPE-I & TYPE-II
7-68-0697 Rev 4
Govr of India Unded*Ing}
SHT 7 of 8
DET. OF 25 THK. GRATING STAIRCASE

TREAD FOR 750 & 1000 WIDE STAIR
E
STRINGER E
co
8mm SQ. TWISTED CROSS BAR ❑
25x6 THK. FLATS MAIN BAR)

CROSS MEMBER
LEADING EDGE OF TREAD MAIN MEMBER
THK. PLATE
14 0 HOLE
40x14 FOR M12 BOLTS
SLOTTED HOLE
FOR M12 BOLTS
(AS/IS:1367) DETAIL- ' E'
VIEW 6-6
GALVANISED
END PL. 65x6
SECTION 5-5
*ALL THE FLATS TO BE WELDED TO THE END FLATS
_ CHEQUERED PL. (AS/IS:3502)

NOSING 5mm THK.
FULL WELDING AT
ALL FOUR CORNERS
OMNWhOUMMUMSOMPW:OWS
r.7 3
o
\ FULL WELDING TO BE DONE

f f I i AT EVERY BEARING
GALVANIZED 65X6 THK.
6 MEMBER FROM ONE SIDE

8mm SQ. TWISTED
CROSS BAR
3
6-NOS. 25X6 THK. FLAT
ENDPL. (TYP)
MAIN MEMBER
70 8 SPACINGS 0 75 c/c = 600 70 FOR 750 WIDE STAIRS
/
45 12 SPACINGS 0 75 c/c = 900 45 FOR 1000 WIDE STAIRS
746 FOR 750 WIDE STAIRS

996 FOR 1000 WIDE STAIRS
PLAN
TYP. DETAIL OF GRATING TO BE USED AS TREAD FOR 750/1000 WIDE STAIRS
Ans.:
4 02 01.19 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD 'Oa
ARUN LAL AMARJEET RAJAH SRIVASTAVA
3 04 11 15 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JITENDER GUPTA AMARJEET RAJAH SRIVASTAVA S. CHANDA

No by by
Approved by
Page 1751 of 1823
STANDARD No
O
riaeJ ENGINEERS
taMeg INDIA LIMITED TYPE-I & TYPE-II
7-68-0697 Rev. 4
INW eVeNtrilil."12571) (A Goof of India Uncleffak'o91
SHT 8 of 8
10
r trs
I I
I I
9 94
k 4
••••-- -,--c°.
OR OR
SECTION 9-9 SECTION 1 0-1 0

(TB=TRANSVERSE BOW) (LB=LONGITUDINAL BOW)
TABLE-4 (PERMISSIBLE AND MANUFACTURER TOLERANCES)
PERMISSIBLE TOLERANCES
LOCATION TOLERANCE ( M M)
LENGTH OF GRATING PANEL OR INDIVIDUAL BEARING BAR +0 / —5
WIDTH OF GRATING +0 / —5
DEPTH OF BEARING BAR:

FOR 25MM +1 / —0.5
THICKNESS OF BEARING BAR: ±0.4
BINDING:
TOP OF BINDING BAR ABOVE BEARING BAR +0.5 / —0.5
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES
LOCATION TOLERANCE (MM)
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE LENGTH OF DIAGONALS ±5 (OUT OF SQUARENESS OF

GRATING PANEL)
TRANSVERSE BARS IN EITHER DIRECTION FROM 1:100

PERPENDICULAR ALIGNMENT WITH BEARING BARS
TRANSVERSE BAR SPACING ±5 PER 1500 LENGTH OF

BEARING BARS
BEARING BAR LEAN 1:10
TRANSVERSE BOW OF PANEL BEFORE FASTENING TO SUPPORTS 1:100
LONGITUDINAL BOW OF PANEL BEFORE FASTENING TO SUPPORTS 1:200
4 02 01 19 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD 44.-k

ARUN LAL
fiely,
AMARJEET WAN SRIVASTAVA kLM
.K.TRIVE 0 )1
3 04 11 15 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JITENDER GUPTA AMARJEET WAN SRIVASTAVA S. CHANDA

No by by
Approved by
Page 1752 of 1823
STANDARD No.
40 ENGINEERS SADDLE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENTS
INDIA LIMITED 7-68-0699 Rev. 1
og709„eg, ON TECH. STRUCTURES
(A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Page 1 of 8
LOAD TABLE
SADDLE HORZ. FORCE

MAX. EQPT. WT. HT. (ELY — EL' X')
TYPE (SL, WL, BP)
TYPE—I 100 T 20 T 850-1500 mm (MAX.)
TYPE—II 50 T 10 T 850-1500 mm (MAX.)
TYPE—III 25 T 5T 850-1500 mm (MAX.)
NOTES :
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm & LEVELS IN METRES.
2. THIS STANDARD SHALL FORM PART. OF THE DRAWING WHICH BEARS REFERENCE TO IT.
3. FOR VARIABLES A TO E , 0 , L, X & Y THE TABLE (REFER PAGE 8 OF 8) RELEASED
FOR INDIVIDUAL STRUCTURES SHALL BE REFERRED.
4. LOCATION OF FLOOR BEAMS & SUPPORTS SHALL BE INDICATED IN THE FLOOR PLANS
SHOWN IN GEN. ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS.
5. GENERAL NOTES FOR THE JOB SHALL BE REFERRED FOR OTHER NOTES.
e6" Q-4‘ki
1 11.07 2019 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD GLHAN AK/Pil RAJANJI SRNASTAVA R.K. DI
0 18.11.2011 ISSUED AS STANDARD VPSINGH PKMI1TAL S CHA1URVEDI D HAMRA

No by by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Copyright Ell - All nghts reserved
Page 1753 of 1823
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS SADDLE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENTS
zit iMeg
10412M 2.1011Was13745,.1)
INDIA LIMITED ON TECH. STRUCTURES
7-68-0699 Rev. 1
(A Govt of Inds Undertaung)
Page 2 of 8
SUPP.
•
1 0 TYP.)
SUPP.
14.114-1
+111.
1 IL 1 MC300
0 I ,1 I
In TlI FT
.- o 1
in
,... ,1 I
II d
i II EQPT.
O —++I+4 CD
U II II
LI
11
N
0 II I
0 — ,I I
In
jill
I ir T
4.111.4
\ I. l!fl
SADDLE BOLTS (TYP)

(BOLT DET. AS PER TABLE)
TOP PLAN AT EQUIPMENT SUPPORTING LEVEL

TYPE- I
B/3, ANY OTHER VALUE IF REQUIRED TO AVOID CLASH SHALL BE MENTIONED IN REMARKS)
(** FOR TION REFER VIEW 1-1)
d SUPP. t SUPP.
4 n o (TYP.)
4—M20 BOLTS(TYP)
10
(PR)
1111
1:141 IRE
SUPP..
(TYP.)
H 50
A
4' 2j
PLAN OF EQUIPMENT SADDLE SUPPORTS AT BASE PLATE LEVEL
TYPE- I
1 11 07 2019 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD GULsHAN AK/P RAJANJI SRWASTAVA R.K. TRNEDI
0 18.11.2011 ISSUED AS STANDARD VPSINGH PKIAITTAL S CHATURVEDI D.MALHOTRA
No by by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 1754 of 1823
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
Tr
,....),
SADDLE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENTS
Ogar fafaeg INDIA LIMITED ON TECH. STRUCTURES 7-68-0699 Rev. 1
(0A,A.c93qt., (A Govt of India Undertaking)
Page 3 of 8
DET-Z (REFER SHT 8 OF 8)

A
BEARING PL. ELY'
TYP. (T 0 BEARING PL )
][
MC300 TYP.
—190X90X8
SPACER PL 0500c/c (;
12THK. GST. PL _J
10THK STIFF PL
0 600x400x16THK.PI EL 'X'
u) U S OF BASE PL)
cv (TYP)
620x420x25THK.PL
TYP. (TYP)
10THK. STIFF. PL.
FLOOR BEAM (TYP )
VIEW 1-1
( ET= PREFERABLY 46, SHALL BE FINALIZED AFTER CLEARING CLASHES)
q
0
Lil I
ELY
21300
(T.O.BEARING PL.)
(B/B 50)
10 THK. STIFN. PL.

ON BOTH SIDE
2—MC300 B B=50
(TYP.)
EL'X'
OF BASE PL)
FLOC, BEAM STIFF. PL.

(TIP.)
VIEW 2-2
TYPE- I
e5//iV It______
1.--
1 11.07.2019 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD GULtIAN AK/P RAJANESRWASTAVA R.K TRNEDIi,-
0 18.11.2011 ISSUED AS STANDARD VPSINGH PKIAITTk S CHATURVEDI D.1,1411101RA
No. by by
Page 1755 of 1823
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS SADDLE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENTS
INDIA LIMITED ON TECH. STRUCTURES 7-68-0699 Rev. 1
I eiRrl FIVOIE ON 3005R) (A Govt of India Undettahung)
Page 4 of 8
01
V)
C.44
** **
MC200
MC 200
0
(rYP) 0 II II II
4 -FOP NI
II II II
10TH K. PLATE
(T&B)(TYP)
4
‘1,
MC200 Nc-
10THK. STIFF. PL
3 0
16 THK. BEARING PL (TYP.) = =
(TYP.)
SADDLE BOLTS (TYP.)
(BOLT DET. AS PER TABLE)

NOTE: BEAM MC200 TO BE VERIFIED BY USER FOR A>6.0m
( .4* FOR LOCATION REFER VIEW 3-3)
150
(TYP.)
4-M20 BOLTS(TYP) 10(TYP)
0
0
—0 EQUIPMENT
3 0
, 4J P.)
SUPP. SUPP.
PLAN OF EQPUITMENT SADDLE SUPPORTS AT BASE PLATE LEVEL
TYPE- II
tk:14.`
1 11.07.2019 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD GUkAN AK/P" RAJA)! SRIVASTAVA R.K TRIVEDI
0 18.11.2011 ISSUED AS STANDARD VPSINCH PKIAITTAL S CHATURVEDI D LIALHOTRA
Rev Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds Bureau
No by by
Page 1756 of 1823
STANDARD No.
‘11
1 faZiel ENGINEERS SADDLE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENTS
Itta tapes v INDIA LIMITED
iiIW FliTOW 0113R0g9) VI Govt of Incla Uncleflakong)
ON TECH. STRUCTURES 7-68-0699 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 8
T.O.BEARING PL)
\-k—TYP.
MB300
1 OTHK. STIFF.
/ PL (TYP.)
EL.'X'
SPACER PL 0500c/c cN
OF BASE PL)
P.
25THK. PL (TYP.)
FLOOR BEAM
VIEW 3-3
( ET= PREFERABLY 45% SHALL BE FINALIZED AFTER CLEARING CLASHES)
WT./SUPPORT
BEARING PL. SET'-z (REFER SHT 8 OF 8)
MC TIE (TYP.) EL.'Y'
T.O.BEARING PL)
MB 300 STIFF. PL
(TYP.)
TYP 200 HALF CIRCLE AS WEEP HOLE TYP
I
I; L.'X'
(U/S OF BASE PL)
FLOOR BEAM STIFF. PL.

(TYP.)
VIEW 4-4
[TYPE- II
1 11.07.2019 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD GU HAN AK/P RAJANJI SRWASTAVA R.K. TRNEDI
0 18.11.2011 ISSUED AS STANDARD VPSINGH PKMITTAL S CHATURVED1 D.MALHOTRA
Rev Prepared Checked Stds Committee Stds. Bureau
No by by
Page 1757 of 1823

STANDARD No.
„Ilwq...1,4 ENGINEERS SADDLE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENTS
051-
eg INDIA LIMITED ON TECH. STRUCTURES 7-68-0699 Rev. 1
MR?, ful3grA*1) IA Govt of Inda Undertaking)
Page 6 of 8
** **
MC150
11±
I I
I I
r I I 0
o
I I 7 ii n l EQUIPMENT
II---H- — 1 0 0 11
I oil 11
1 OTHK . PLATE I II
(T&B)(TYP) I 1 CO
1
r- -
MC150
,
3 0 TYP.
16THK. BEARING PL (TYP.) 8 THK. STIFF. PL
SUPP. SUPP. (TYP.)
SADDLE BOLTS (TYP.)
BOLT DET. AS PER TABLET
NOTE: BEAM MC150 TO BE VERIFIED BY USER FOR DIMENSION A>6.Om

( *96 FOR LOCATION REFER VIEW 5-5)
300 (m)
GAUGE (
DISTANCE = =
4-M20 BOLTS(TYP)
10 61
(TYP)
0
0 0
II 11 0 11 EQUIPMENT
0 II
II
0
\ 12 THK. PL. Lv-1

6J
5 —4v-
SUPP. SUPP.
PLAN OF EQPUITMENT SADDLE SUPPORTS AT BASE PLATE LEVEL
TYPE- III
1 11 07 2019 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD GULSHAN

o.4
AK/PAPIA RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA R.K. TRIVEDI v
0 18 11.2011 ISSUED AS STANDARD VPSINGH PKIARTAL S CHATURVEDI D MALHOTRA
Rev Prepared Checked Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau
No by by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Copyright EIL - All nghts reserved
Page 1758 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS SADDLE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENTS.
INDIA LIMITED ON TECH. STRUCTURES 7-68-0699 Rev. 1
(A Govt of !Ada UnOeftalong)
Page 7 of 8
A
EL. 'Y'
T.O.BEARING PL)
N
4—M20 BOLTS
10THK.
STIFF. PL.
FLOOR BEAM
VIEW 5-5
( Er= PREFERABLY 45', SHALL BE FINALIZED AFTER CLEARING CLASHES)
DET-Z (REFER SHT 8 OF 8)

16THK. BEARING PL
MC TIE (TYP.) EL.'Y'

T.O.BEARING PL)
STIFF. PL (TYR)
200 HALF CIRCLE AS WEEP HOLE TM
EL. 'X'
US OF BASE PL.)
FLOOR BEAM
STIFF. PL(TYP.)
VIEW 6-6
TYPE- III
(4"
1 11 07 2019 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD GULSHAN AK/P IA RAJANJI SRWASTAVA R K. TRIVEDI'c
l k.V/
..>-----
0 18 11 2011 ISSUED AS STANDARD VPSINGH PKAIITTAL S CHATURVEDI D MALHOTRA
No. by by
Page 1759 of 1823

STANDARD No.
k..1 ® ENGINEERS SADDLE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENTS.
ligejr fa5iegINDIA LIMITED ON TECH. STRUCTURES 7-68-0699 Rev. 1
laoFrf ?WOW oN3fRoof IA Govt of India UnOeftaking)
Page 8 of 8
TABLE FOR SADDLE SUPPORT DETAILS FOR EQUIPMENTS:-
DIMENSIONS BOLTS DETS ELEVATION

S.NO. EQUIPMENT REMARKS
NO. A B C D E 0' DIA HOLE DIA NOS L EL-X EL-Y
THIS TABLE WILL BE ISSUED AS A DWG FOR PROJECT
BASE PL BASE PL
OF THE EQPT. OF THE EQPT.
SADDLE BOLT SADDLE BOLT

(TO BE SUPPLIED BY (TO BE SUPPLIED BY
CML CONTRACTOR) C., CML CONTRACTOR)
(TYP) (TYP)
P,) BEARING
PLATE
DETAIL- 'Z'(FOR TYPE-II & III)
0=DIA OF BOLT
T1=THICKNESS OF BEARING PLATE
DETAIL- 'Z'(FOR TYPE-I) T2=THICKNESS OF EQPT BASE PLATE
0=DIA OF BOLT
T1=THICKNESS OF BEARING PLATE
T2=THICKNESS OF EQPT BASE PLATE
T3=FLANGE THICKNESS OF MC300
)141—
1 11.07.2019 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD GkliAN AK/P RAJANJI SRWASTAVA R K TlllVEDI
0 18.11.2011 ISSUED AS STANDARD VPSINGH PKIAITTAL S CHATURVEDI D MALHOTRA
Rev. Prepared Checked Stds Committee Stds. Bureau
No by by
Page 1760 of 1823

STANDARD FOR SPACERS STANDARD No
INGIMIRS AND BLINDS > 26"
ligar6wor iNDA LIMITED
1
loom ~me examown (A Govt. d India Undettakm)
(150# ,300# AND 600# FF TO 7-44-0162 Rev. 5
B 16.47 SERIES B) Page 1 of 3
E d0 Dia. Hole E
13mm0 Hole for Spacer Welded lifting
plate
Welded
lifting plate
6mm(Typ) Dia., rating &

material to be
Dia., rating & marked here.
a. Note-5
material to be
marked here
E
E
CD
Alignment guidc SPACER Alignment guidc BLIND

(Width= "F") (Width= "F")
NOTES:
1. Both surfaces shall have a resultant surface finish of 125pin to 250pin average
roughness with either a concentric or spiral serrated finish.
2. Dimensions are for flanges to ASME B 16.47B (erstwhile API 605) for sizes 26" to 60".
3. Diameter, rating & material specification shall be marked on welded fixed plate.
Material as per line class.
4. Thickness 'A' is based on ASTM A285 Gr.0 with corrosion allowance of 1.5mm on each face.
5. Welding and heat treatment requirements shall be in accordance with ASME 831.3
6. Alignment Guide shall be welded in the middle of thickness of Spacer & Blind.
7. All dimensions are in mm unless otherwise specified.
DIA. 150# WEIGHT KG(APPROX)

NB A B C D E F d t BLIND SPACER
26 40 711 473 648 35 15 20 9 137 34
28 42 762 499 698 33 15 20 9 165 40
30 45 813 524 749 30 15 20 9 201 46
32 48 864 551 800 30 15 20 12 243 55
34 50 921 583 851 42 15 20 9 287 65
36 53 972 609 902 40 15 20 10 340 76
38 54 1022 642 925 48 15 20 17 382 100
40 59 1079 668 1003 44 15 20 10 465 102
42 61 1130 693 1054 41 18 20 11 528 113
44 64 1181 718 1105 38 18 20 11 605 126
46 67 1235 751 1156 62 18 20 16 693 145
48 70 1289 776 1205 56 18 20 12 789 167
52 75 1391 827 1306 45 18 26 12 984 201
56 80 1492 880 1406 42 27 26 17 1208 240
60 86 1600 943 1505 59 27 26 25 1493 300
TOL ±0.3 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 . .
44-
5 04.05.20 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SH S
4 31.03.15 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SH AK RN/ ATD SC
Rev
No by by
Approved by
Page 1761 of 1823

STANDARD FOR SPACERS STANDARD No.
(311-cielei -ft MINERS AND BLINDS > 26"
lfgar tiReGNIF INDIA UMFTED
lallUR rime an ) (A Gat. al India ivg)
(150#, 300# AND 600# FF TO) 7-44-0162 Rev. 5

E dos Dia. Hole
only plate
Welded F
lifting plate
6m m(Typ) Dia., rating &

material to be
Dia., rating & Note-5 marked here.
material to be Note-5
marked here
E
cE
Alignment guide Alignment guidc

SPACER BLIND
(Width= "F") (Width= "F")
NOTES:
REFER PAGE 1 OF 3 FOR NOTES.

26 60 737 514 641 37 15 20 29 221 70
28 65 787 541 689 33 15 20 33 273 84
30 69 845 576 738 35 15 20 36 334 104
32 73 902 607 787 48 15 20 33 403 126
34 77 952 634 835 42 15 20 36 473 144
36 82 1010 666 886 54 18 20 33 567 173
38 86 1060 691 941 47 18 20 33 655 189
40 91 1114 717 992 41 18 20 30 766 218
42 95 1168 747 1038 54 18 26 27 879 252
44 100 1219 772 1092 47 27 26 27 1008 278
46 104 1270 810 1140 61 27 26 42 1138 310
48 107 1327 836 1183 53 27 26 36 1278 361
52 116 1429 887 1286 42 35 26 36 1606 431
56 125 1537 963 1381 76 40 32 52 2003 543
60 133 1651 1019 1478 71 40 36 50 2459 679
TOL ±0.3 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
5 04.05.20 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD SH SKS

No by by
Approved by
Page 1762 of 1823

STANDARD FOR SPACERS STANDARD No.
40iReit4A ENGINEERS AND BLINDS > 26"
Oge.,11 tWitsmir INDIA UMFTED (150#, 300# AND 600# FF TO 7-44-0162 Rev. 5
OW memo maaoolO (A Govt of India Undationg)
E dO Dia. Hole E
only plate
Welded F
lifting plate
6mm(Typ) Dia., rating &

material to be
Dia., rating & Note-5 marked here.
0. Note-5
material to be
marked here IT
E
E 0
ra
0 CO
••
Alignment guidc Alignment guidc

(Width= "F") SPACER (Width= "F") BLIND
NOTES:
REFER PAGE 1 OF 3 FOR NOTES.

26 82 727 524 632 38 15 20 33 294 94
28 88 784 556 681 42 15 20 30 367 117
30 95 841 591 732 46 15 20 33 456 144
32 100 895 623 779 49 18 20 33 543 171
34 107 952 661 829 70 18 20 39 658 208
36 113 1010 687 879 56 18 20 33 776 241
38 119 1054 715 930 63 18 26 46 897 267
40 125 1111 741 975 51 27 26 39 1046 318
42 130 1168 782 1022 70 27 26 46 1203 371
44 137 1225 807 1073 57 27 26 39 1394 428
46 143 1276 836 1122 63 35 32 46 1579 476
48 149 1333 877 1172 63 35 32 51 1796 542
52 161 1435 941 1267 68 40 32 58 2248 665
56 172 1543 1007 1364 72 40 36 65 2777 817
60 185 1657 1077 1462 110 40 36 71 3445 1023
TOL. ±0.3 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
5 04.05.20 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD )46461.4"G SKS

No by by
Approved by
Page 1763 of 1823

H G FLAT BAR SQ
'FLAT BAR—A NOM SCH C J
L K BAR
0 150# 300# 300# 600# 600# 150# 300# 300# 600# 600# M
E A
RF RF RTJ RF RTJ RF RF RTJ RF RTJ
AS PER MESH SPEC.
40 308 318 331 343 349 151 131 121 131 144 156 162
(NOTE-1)
80 304 314 327 339 345 143 123 129 139 152 164 170
C/2 15X5 10X5 10X5
156 168 174 7 8 10X10
120 301 311 324 336 342 137 117 133 143
FLAT BAR-A FLAT BAR-A 297 139 149 162 174 180
160 307 321 332 338 129 109
32'
XXS 293 303 316 328 334 122 102 144 154 167 179 185
FLAT BAR -D 20-30 382 391 404 420 425 203 183 129 138 151 167 172
40-60 378 387 400 416 421 197 177 132 141 154 170 175
376 386 399 415 420 192 172 137 147 160 176 181 15X5 10X5 10X5 7 8 10X10
a" 80
_„,,\ 120
XXS-160
370
366 -
380
376
393
389
409
405
414
410
180 160
171 151
146
154
156
164
169
177
185
193
190
198
FLAT BAR-D \ FLAT BAR-E 446 462 475 503 125 141 154 182 188
20-30 509 256 216
444 460 473 127 143 156 184 191
HI 40 501 508 253 213
60 441 457 470 498 504 246 206 133 149 162 190 196
SECTION—A FILTER DETAIL SECTION —B 439 455 496 241 201 153 194 200 15X5 20X10 20X5 7 14 10X10
10" 80 468 502 137 166
432 448 489 147 163 176 204 210

B 120 461 495 228 188
215 221
160 482 488 214 174
LAT BAR-A I FLAT BAR-A
20 523 539 552 571 577 310 270 132 148 161 180 186
30 521 537 550 569 575 305 265 137 153 166 185 191
STD-40 519 535 548 567 573 302 262 139 155 168 187 193
12" XS-60 515 531 544 563 569 294 254 145 161 199 12X12
FLAT BAR-E FLAT BAR-A 174 193 15X5 20X10 20X5 8 14
PERSPECTIVE VIEW 512 528 541 560 566 287 247
80 151 167 180 199 205
L
120 504 520 533 552 558 271 231 163 179 192 211 217
0
160 544 550 255 215 224 230
I FLAT BAR -D FLAT BAR- D
10 577 593 606 621 627 341 291 148 164 177 192 198
BLIND FLANGE (MATERIAL PRESSURE 20 575 591 604 619 625 338 288 150 166 179 194 200
RATING & FACING AS PER SPEC.) 30-40 572 588 601 616 623 332 282 155 171 184 199 206 15X5 25X10 25X6 10 16 12X12
FLAT BAR-A 14"
C/2 XS 570 586 614 620 328 278 187
P.C.D.(NO.OF BOLTS, BOLT DIMN. 599 158 174 202 208
& MATERIAL TO SUIT SPEC.) 60 584 597 612 618 324 274 177 190 205 211
80 580 593 608 614 316 266 183 196 211 217
PLAN VIEW
4/7 16"
10
20
30
628
627
625
647
646
644
660
659
657
686
685
683
691
690
688
392 332
389 329
386 326
135
138
140
154
157
159
167
170
172
193
196
198
198
201
203 20X5 30X12 30X7 10 16 14X14
XS-40 641 654 680 685 379 319 165 178 204 209
...
./...' 1 i 60 676 681 371 311 210 215
./.., •
..,./ II I
.e....,
./.." II I 80 671 676 361 301 218 223
....".,
T. II
__, _ __ ___4___ __ _ __!..1 _ -_ - -- _
I
10 704 724 737 755 761 443 373 146 166 179 197 203
"...i -......... i I II I 735 149 181 199
I 20 703 722 753 759 440 370 168 205
A‘ I I II
/\\ I 1 II I 701 720 751 757 437 367 151 170 183 201
STD 733 207
/ \•
-..., II I
/ _mot
--:::- 44 18" 30 700 719 732 750 756 433 363 155 174 187 205 211 20X5 35X12 35X7 10 16 14X14
I
/ 698 717 730 748 754 430 360 157 176 189 207 213
/ XS
v.. 0 747 753 427 357 215
OUTSIDE INTERMITTENT ao 209
3/4"10
OUTSIDE INTERMITENT SCREWED WELD 60
743 749 419 349 216 222
C/2
PLUG 493 413 170 185 205 212
WELD SECTION -C 10 773 790 805 825 832 153
C 802 822 829 487 407 156 174 189 209 216
MESH SPECIFICATION(NOTE- 1) STD-20 769 787
WELD NECK FLANGE (MATERIAL PRESSURE
766 784 799 819 826 480 400 162 180 195 215 222
SERVICE STRAINER OPENING MESH OPEN MESH RATING & FACING AS PER SPEC.) 20" XS-30 20X5 40X15 40X8 11 20 14X14
SIZE NOM.(IN) (IN) SPECIFICATION AREA % DESIGNATION 816 823 476 396 217 224
40
EQUAL TEE (MATERIAL &
LOW 6" 0.097 8MESH 22SWG 60.2 TYPE 4 SECTION —D 60 811 818 464 384 227 234
THICKNESS AS PER SPEC.) 199
n VISCOC1TY 132 148 164 190
10 882 898 914 940 949 594 504
1.-) 0 <1)< 2 8-AND ABOVE 0.111 7MESH 21SWG 60.3 TYPE 3
937 588 498 136 152 168 194 203
STD-20 879 895 911 946
-I - MEDIUM 6' 0.111 7MESH 21SWG 60.3 TYPE 3 208 20X5 45X15 45X8 20 14X14
934 582 492 141 157 173 199 11
6Z VISCOSITY
65.3 TYPE 2
24" XS 876 892 908 943
(-7) 2 <1)4 a trAND ABOVE 0.202 4MESH 18SWG 201 210
30 932 941 579 489
0
c.)
co HIGH 6* 0.202 4MESH 18SWG 65.3 TYPE 2 928 937 572 482 206 215
VISCOSITY ao
I) > 8 8-AND ABOVE 0.269 3MESH 16SWG 65.2 TYPE 1 NOTES:-
1. THE MESH SPECIFICATION AS GIVEN IN THE TABLE IS TO BE USED WHEN STRAINER IS INTENDED TO BE USED AS PERMANENT STRAINER IN CASE OF TEMPORARY STRAINER
GASOLINE
6" AND 8" 0.053 14MESH 26SWG 55.1 TYPE 5 THE MESH SPECIFICATIONS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: FOR LINE UPT02 1/ -S.S STD. STOCK MESH 0.07" DIA WIRE X0.203 SQ.CLEAR OPENING-65.9% OPEN AREA
PROPANE 10"AND ABOVE 0.087 MESH 22SWG 60.2 TYPE 4 FOR LINES 3"& ABOVE S.S.STD. STOCK MESH 0.08" DIA WIRE X0.253 SQ.CLEAR OPENING- 57.6% OPEN AREA.
2 MATERIAL AS PER LINE SPECIFICATION
WATER 6* ABOVE 0.115 7MESH 21SWG 60.3 TYPE 3
3. 3/4'4 SCREWED PLUG FOR DRAIN CONNECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED
7 24.08.2021 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD %„c1S`14"-SH GB STANDARD No.

T STRAINER TYPE-1
laFtERVAI -- ENGINEERS 6 30/03/2017 Revised and Issued as Standard PK SH MI RN
6"-24" (150# RF, 300# RF AND RTJ, 7-44-0304 Rev. 7
lazziMeg WNDIA
inerivimmage.,0
UNTIED (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Rev.
Date Purpose
Prepared Checked Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman 600# RF AND RTJ)
Page 1 of 1
No. by by Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Formai No. 8-00-0001-F5 Rev. 0
Page 1764 of 1823
STANDARD No.
lafaelef ENGINEERS
elge.11 falifeg®INDIA LIMITED FABRICATED CANOPY FOR 7-52-0105 Rev. 4
etzatizati3otloo IA Govt of India Uoderlakong) INSTRUMENTS
Page 1 of 7
TYPE : MS PAINTED (TOP & SIDE COVER)
CI
TOP COVER
WELD MS SHEET WITH HANDLE
2 mm THICK
ON ANGLES
(TYP.) 120
3
ANGLE
O 35X35X4t
O
30 0 HOLE FOR
ZERO ADJUSTMENT
TO SUIT INSTRUMENT
CUT-OUT
O
if)
WELD (TYP.)
170
400 WELD
ANGLE 40X40X4t
SIDE VIEW
TOP VIEW
IMPULSE UNES
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm
2. * TO SUIT INSTRUMENT DIMENSIONS
3. HINGES SHALL BE OF STAINLESS STEEL.
4. A MINIMUM OF TWO COATS PAINTING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT
AFTER A MINIMUM OF ONE COAT OF RED OXIDE ZINC CHROMATE
PRIMER. THE COLOUR OF THE PAINT SHALL BE AS PER IS-5.
5. ALL EDGES/CORNERS SHALL BE PROPERLY SMOOTHENED AND FRONT VIEW
ENSURE THAT NO SHARP EDGES EXIST.
4
3
17.08.21
28.03.17
Revised & Reissued
Reaffirmed & Reissued
Saurav
ManoJ
air
MN
MN*P6S4-
RG RN
No. by by
Approved by
Page 1765 of 1823

STANDARD No.
15d1Reit§cft ENGINEERS FABRICATED CANOPY FOR
Oge..0 05ft-will:NA LIMITED 7-52-0105 Rev. 4
.4....3,T3qtr..) (A Govt of India Undettaiong) INSTRUMENTS
Page 2 of 7
TYPE : FRP CANOPY ( ALL SIDE CLOSED ) - FIELD INSTRUMENTS
FRONT VIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
FRP Enclosure Resin: iso-phthalic fire retardant UV resistant polyester as per IS-10192
Glass Content Min. 60% 350
Flammability
r 1
Rating Class I, as per IS 6746
Pigments Resin pigmented grey
Thickness 3mm, +1.0mm / -025mm
Finish Smooth Outside Finish in Glaze & Gloss
Colour RAL 7040 PU ( GREY)
Window 3mm thick acrylic window for viewing
Others Canopy shall have chemical resistance, high mechanical strength, antistatic
and low moisture absorption.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
0 FRP Canopy of internal size 394mm (D) x 444mm (H) x 344mm (W)
0 Acrylic window of clear size 200mm x 200mm Abrasion Resistant, Impact Anodized
0 SS knob with plastic butterfly grip
0 SS knob
TOP VIEW
SS Clamp
(Canopy bottom Cut-out for entry)
• ID X L: 56mm x 225mm; Thickness: 2.0mm
• ID X L: 64mm x 65mm; Thickness: 2.0mm
0 • Plate Size: 200mm x 200mm x 2.0mm
• Holes: For M6 SS Bolts
0 Lid holding clamp, SS
0 SS hinges with SS screws
NOTE:
1. THIS IS TYPICAL DRAWING. THE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE FIRMED UP WITH THE ACTUAL INSTALLATION OF FIELD INSTRUMENTS.
4 17.08.21 Revised & Reissued Saurav MN‘

414*alli'
No. by by
Approved by
Page 1766 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS FABRICATED CANOPY FOR
ogen taReg
ROM elielfle teladireen
INDIA LIMITED
INSTRUMENTS 7-52-0105 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 7
TYPE: FRP CANOPY (ALL SIDE CLOSED) - NECK MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS

(WITHOUT SLIDING DOOR) (WITHOUT SLIDING DOOR)
305
BOTTOM VIEW
FRONT VIEW
(CANOPY BOTTOM SLOT FOR
(WITH SLIDING DOOR)
ENTRY WITH SS CLAMP AND
SCREW SET)
SPECIFICATIONS
FRP Enclosure Resin: Iso-phthalic fire retardant UV resistant polyester as per IS-10192
Glass Content Min. 60%
Flammability Rating Class I, as per IS 6746
Thickness 3mm, +1.0mm / -0.25mm
Colour RAL 7040 PU ( GREY)
Sliding Door 3mm, with smooth aluminium (light grey) sliding channel
Window 3mm thick acrylic window for viewing, 200mm(W) x 100mm(H) Abrasion resistant, Impact Anodized
Dimension Overall dimesional tolerance shall be +/-6 mm
Canopy shall have chemical resistance, high Mechanical strength, Antistatic and low
Others
moisture absorption.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
FRP Canopy of internal size 177mm(D) x 177mm(H) x 244mm(W)
0
0 FRP Sliding door of external size 25mm(D) x 210mm(H) x 305mm(W)
SS handle, riveted to door
0
Neoprene rubber channel gasket, 2 nos , shall confirm to ASTM D395- 18 requirements
0
SS Clamp
• ID X L: 62mm x 30mm; Thickness:2.0mm
0 • Plate Size: 160mm x 100mm x 1.5mm
NOTE:
1, THIS IS A TYPICAL DRAWING. THE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE FIRMED UP WITH THE ACTUAL INSTALLATION OF FIELD INSTRUMENTS..;i1
g/L-
4 17.08.21 Revised & Reissued Saurav MN *VM*
Rev.
No. by by
Approved by
Page 1767 of 1823

STANDARD No.
riLat ENGINEERS FABRICATED CANOPY FOR
fge_ntiMeg
....,,e....E•asIJRN.0
INDIA LIMITED
INSTRUMENTS 7-52-0105 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 7
TYPE: FRP CANOPY (ALL SIDE CLOSED) - TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER AND LOOP POWERED INDICATOR

(WITHOUT SLIDING DOOR) (WITHOUT SLIDING DOOR)
SS NUTS
SS U- CLAMP
WITH ANGLE
SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW - WITH SLIDING DOOR
(WITH SLIDING DOOR) (CANOPY BOTTOM OPEN FOR
CABLE ENTRY)
SPECIFICATIONS
Colour RAL 7040 PU (GREY)
Sliding Door 3mm, with smooth aluminium sliding channel
Window 3mm thick acrylic window for viewing, 150mm x 150mm Abrasion resistant, Impact Anodized
Others Canopy shall have chemical resistance, high mechanical strength,
antistatic and low moisture absorption.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
FRP Canopy of internal size 177mm(D) x 277mm(H) x 174mm(W)
0
SS handle, riveted to door
0
® Neoprene rubber channel gasket, 2 nos shall confirm to ASTM D395-18 requirements
SS U- Clamp
• ID X L: 60mm x 85mm; Thickness:6.0mm
0 • Angle Size: 30mm x 30mm x 3.0mm
2 SS Hardware for tightening with canopy, M6
NOTE:
1. THIS IS A TYPICAL DRAWING. THE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE FIRMED UP WITH THE ACTUALVATION OF FIELD INSTRUMENTS.
4 17.08.21 Revised & Reissued aurav MN ‘110•641
No. by by
Approved by
Page 1768 of 1823

STANDARD No.
lafaelei.ENGINEERS FABRICATED CANOPY FOR
ogeff vvieu w INDIA LIMITED INSTRUMENTS 7-52-0105 Rev. 4
I WTI c51.1105.D ( A Govt of India Undedalong)
Page 5 of 7
TYPE: FRP CANOPY FOR JUNCTION BOX - FRONT SIDE OPEN
n
D-25
D-75
SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
TOP VIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
Colour RAL 7040 PU (GREY)
Others Canopy shall have chemical resistance, high strength, antistatic and low
moisture absorption.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
FRP Junction box canopy of size 250mm(D) x 450mm(H) x 500mm(W)
0
Cable entry from bottom side
D 250mm
H 450mm
W 500mm
NOTE:
1. THIS IS A TYPICAL DRAWING. THE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE FIRMED UP WITH THE ACTUAL INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION BOX AND ITS E. .....
woubi
(64—
4 17.08.21 Revised & Reissued Saurav aRWS MN SM
No. by by
Approved by
Page 1769 of 1823

STANDARD No.
laiReit4ENGINEERS FABRICATED CANOPY FOR
soutel4Ieg INDIA UMITED 7-52-0105 Rev. 4
12 El 312.1513,10.1)
(Oen e (A Govt of India Undertaking) INSTRUMENTS
Page 6 of 7
TYPE : FRP CANOPY (ALL SIDE CLOSED) - GUIDED WAVE , MASS FLOW METER
csi
SIDE VIEW 320

(WITHOUT SLIDING DOOR) FRONT VIEW
(WITHOUT SLIDING DOOR)
BOTTOM VIEW 320

(CANOPY BOTTOM SLOT FOR ENTRY FRONT VIEW
WITH SS CLAMP AND SCREW SET) (WITH SLIDING DOOR )
(CANOPY BOTTOM SLOT FOR ENTRY)
SPECIFICATIONS
Colour RAL 7041) PU ( GREY)
Sliding Door 3mm, with smooth aluminium sliding channel
Window 3mm thick acrylic window for viewing, 150mm(W) x 100mm(H) Abrasion Resistant, Impact Anodized
Others Canopy shall have chemical resistance, high mechanical strength,
antistatic and low moisture absorption.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
,. . 0 FRP Canopy of internal size 269mm(D) x 214mm(H) x 314mm(W)

0 SS handle, riveted to door
Neoprene rubber channel gasket, 2 No.s shall confirm to ASTM D395-18 requirements
®
SS Clamp
•ID X L: 55mm x 25mm; Thickness:2.0mm
0 •Plate Size: 150mm x 100mm x 1.5mm
•Holes: For M6 SS Bolts
2 SS bolt set for tightening , M6
NOTE:
1. THIS IS A TYPICAL DRAWING. THE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE FIRMED UP WITH THE ACTUA INSTAL TION OF INSTRUMETS. L•
4 17.08.21 Revised & Reissued Saurav p A 1S MN

Or
No. by by
Approved by
Page 1770 of 1823

STANDARD No.
Via ENGINEERS FABRICATED CANOPY FOR
ogem lailert meow asi3ndsti)
®INDIA
(A Gout on India Undertaking) INSTRUMENTS
7-52-0105 Rev. 4
Page 7 of 7
TYPE : FRP CANOPY FOR RTD / THERMOCOUPLE
.................
SS HOLDING CLAMP
FRONT VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
SPECIFICATIONS
Thickness 3mm
Finish Smooth Outside Finish
Colour Grey, PU, RAL 7040 (GREY)
Dimension Overall dimensional tolerance shall be +/- 6mm
Quantity As required
Canopy shall have chemical resistance, high mechanical strength,
Others antistatic and low moisture absorption.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
FRP Canopy of size 161.5mm(OD) x 400mm(H)
0
0 Neoprene channel type gasket shall confirm to ASTM D395-18 requirements
SS clamp
0
• Thickness tolerance of +/- 0.2 mm
• Taper maximum 2 Deg.
• Size of slot 32mm wide x 300mm
NOTE:
1. THIS IS A TYPICAL DRAWING. THE DIMENSION SHALL BE FIRMED UP WITH THE ACTUAL INSTALLATION OF THERMOCOUPLE / RTD ASSEMBLY.
4 17.08.21 Revised & Reissued Saurav MN Vvo'V' SM

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - M rights reserved
Page 1771 of 1823

STANDARD No.
OfRadek - ENGINEERS
Iglar EffileSW INDIA LIMED
HANDRAILS 7-68-0501 Rev. 8
(nen reaseagimonO CA Gat c/ iw Undelicig)
Page 1 of 8
NOTES:-
1. ALL HANDRAILS AND UPRIGHT SHALL BE AS PER RESPECTIVE TYPE.
2. ALL FILLET WELDS OF 3mm (MINIMUM) THICKNESS SHALL BE CONTINUOUS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
3. JOINTS IN HANDRAILS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT SUITABLE LOCATIONS, WELDED AND GROUND FLUSH.
4. FOR ADDITIONAL TYPE OF UPRIGHT FIXING DETAILS REFER EIL STD. 7-68-0061.
5. ALL M.S. TUBES SHALL CONFORM TO IS:1239.
6. FABRICATION OF TOP RAIL, INTERMEDIATE FLAT AND TOE PLATE SHALL ONLY BE STARTED AFTER TAKING
ACTUAL DIMENSIONS AT SITE.
7. ADJUSTMENT IN SPACING OF VERTICAL POST SHALL BE DONE AT EITHER END OF PLATFORM.
Ata,t4 ob
8 28.09.2020 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AVM AS SM
7 16.12.2014 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD V.P.SINGH V GOEL PK MITTAL S CHANDA

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1772 of 1823

STANDARD No.
18101addit ENGINEERS
Igar WesleyND1A LIMITED
(41Wieloweinammi) f A Got al India Undetakno
HANDRAILS 7-68-0501 Rev. 8
Page 2 of 8
TYPE - I
14 0 HOLES FOR
1500(MAX.) 200 U12 MEDIUM BUTT RUST PROOF
(TYP) ANCHOR FASTNER
0
0
C
8 THK.
VIEW 3-3 BASE PL.
32NB
(H) TUBE 70
0 TUBULAR HANDRAIL
POST 0
VIEW 2-2
II II 0
a)
P7-160464 .71
riTUBULAR HANDRAIL
M.I. PLATE =100 ihr POST
FINISHED
FLOOR
LEVEL 0
0
a)
EQ. EQ.
12 LUG(2NOS)
FIXING DET OF TUB. POST M.I. PLATE
WITH M.I.PLATE (ALT-I)

SLOPING HANDRAIL ON R.C.C. STAIR FIXING NT OF TUBULAR POST
CONCRETE DISCONTINUOUS WITH ANCHOR FASTNER
END OF HANDRAIL ALT-II
250 1500(MAX.) 1500(MAX.) POST SPACING
/2
eR=100
0
0
U)
100x5 TOE PLATE 0

0
WHERE REQUIRED
TO BE WELDED
STRUCTURAL
CONC. LEVEL
HORIZONTAL HANDRAIL ON R.C.C. PLATFORM SEC. 1-

„AA 5
8 28.09.2020 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AVM AS

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1773 of 1823

STANDARD No.
1514aeditk ENGINEERS
ligar Wes I\DIA LIMITED HANDRAILS 7-68-0501 Rev. 8
(MN mar mamma) (A Goy( al India Undeniksig)
Page 3 of 8
TYPE - II
CONC. / STEEL FACE-DISCONTINUOUS END OF HANDRAIL
125 250 1500(MAX.) 1500(MAX.)

(MAX.) (TYP) (TYP)
FT
TOE PL. 100x5
MB MC
HORIZONTAL HANDRAIL ON STEEL PLATFORM

HORIZONTAL
32 NB(M) TUBE
POST 32 NB( M) TUBE
32 NB(M) TUBE
0
0
0
TOE PL. 100x5

50x 50x6 THK. PL.
(TYP)
TOP OF GRATING
OR CHEQ. PL.
T.O.S.
V
5,t1
SECTION 4-4 VIEW 5-5 VIEW 6-6

(FOR DETAILOREFER PAGE 8 OF 8) (AT CORNER)
8 28.09.2020 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AV AS

44,SM

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1774 of 1823

STANDARD No.
M-011%GlIA LIMITED
40761 (A Govt d India Uridetakiv
HANDRAILS
7-68-0501 Rev. 8
Page 4 of 8
TYPE - II
1500(MAX.)
200
1500(MAX.)
1500(MAX.) 200 Q.
PIPE SHALL BE
GROUND TO SHAPE
PLATE
50x50x6 THK.
Q.
VIEW 7-7
SLOPING HANDRAIL ON STEEL STAIR

WHEREVER HIGHER SIZE OF STRINGER BEAMS
ARE REQUIRED AS PER DESIGN SIMILAR G.A.
BE FOLLOWED FOR THE SAME.
8 28.09.2020 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1775 of 1823

STANDARD No.
lagtzleTtlk-ENGINEERS
PIAftliii!
rime mew°
INDIA LIMITED HANDRAILS 7-68-0501 Rev. 8
(A Gov[ d kIdla Unclesticiv
Page 5 of 8
TYPE - III
32 NB(M) TUBULAR
HAND RAILING
SEE DETAIL
OF WALL PLATE
1500(MAX.)
4, 150
LANDING
100
1500(MAX.)
WALL
12 0
EXPANSION
FASTNERS
FILLET WELD
120 0-8 THK.
WALL PLATE
VIEW 8-8
DETAIL OF WALL PLATE
ELEVATION
HANDRAIL FIXED TO WALL DIRECT
8 28.09.2020 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AV AS

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1776 of 1823

STANDARD No.
laigORTfik- ENGINEERS HANDRAILS
1g-fir filleg`tli* NDIA LIMITED
tA GovL a Indi Undid/MI)
7-68-0501 Rev. 8
Page 6 of 8
TYPE - IV
1500 1500 1500 MAX. 250
101
HANDRAIL ON HORIZONTAL PLATFORM (STEEL)
SEC. 10-10
NOTE : HANDRAIL TYPE—IV SHALL BE USED OVER PIPE CROSS OVER AND LOW LEVEL PLATFORMS
SUCH AS FOR VALVE OPERATION ETC. AS MENTIONED IN STD 7-68-0562 & 0563.
(FOR DETAILS OA REFER PAGE 8 OF 8)
8 28.09.2020 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD JG AV4f AS
7 16.12.2014 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD V.P.SINGH V.P.SINGH PK MITTAL S CHANDA

No. Date Purpose
by by
Convenor Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Copyright E IL - All rights reserved
Page 1777 of 1823

STANDARD No.
HANDRAILS
la
Etrge IVA UMETED Govt a Yam Undelmkom
7-68-0501 Rev. 8
Page 7 of 8
TYPE - IV
La
a w
>- to
I— IX
SLOPING HALF HANDRAIL ON STEEL STAIR
SEC. 1 1 -1 1 DETAIL -

q.0
8 28.09.2020 JG AS

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1778 of 1823

STANDARD No.
OtitgegskiNaNBERs HANDRAILS
4gFir Nur isDIA LIMITED
fA Govt of India Undediang)
7-68-0501 Rev. 8
Page 8 of 8
32 NB(M)
rCTUBE
4V
fn
TOE PLATE
100x5 THK.
OUTSIDE EDGE
OF MEMBER
VIEW 12-12
C9
V2 12141
z 50 SQ.
I—
42C 6 THK. PL.
ce
0
Jgv
t2, t
I
DETAIL — OA
CONNECTION DETAILS
(FOR TYPE II & Iv)
NOTE : CHEQUERED PLATES / GRATINGS SHALL BE SUITABLY NOTCHED TO ACCOMMODATE THE TUBE
IN CASE OF BEAM MC100 OR MC125.
8 28.09.2020 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD

TjA
JG AVM
94-AS ;IS:
SM
Pa

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1779 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS TOLERANCES
INDIA LIMITED 7-15-0019 Rev 5
(SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGERS) Page 1 of 3
±16 ±6 ±3
P-30 PIO
REFER PARA 3 121 dc 3 122 OF TEMA . IN/ ±3 3

ADDITION NO LONGITUDIANAL ELEMENT OF
THE INSIDE SURFACE SHALL HAVE A BOW OF ±6
MORE THAN 1mm PER METRE OF LENGTH
UP TO MAX. OF 3mm.
1144414141414 HOLES WILL BE SAME

/ AS LIGAMENT
O
±10111111LLIBESHOU +L8
_.
ci ( AS PER TEMA )
rr .+A* t+. FOR WELDED
4141.." 11\
BAFFLE
TAKE () TOLERANCE WHEN TAKE (+) TOLERANCE WHEN

CUT IS ON THE 0 OF TUBES CUT IS IN BETWEEN THE TUBES
DETAIL—B
(TYPICAL)
U—TUBE BUNDLE OVERALL LENGTH ±12
+0 8
+0 8 —0.0
—0 0
rA
co
—3— 0
-H
In O
+0.8
-77 -00
±0.8 ...IMPINGEMENT PLATE
SECTION—AA ±6(MAX.) ±3
(NOTE-4)
qui
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DP-- KJHC RKT
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GCP KA RKT SC
No by by
Approved by
Page 1780 of 1823

STANDARD No
INGMERS TOLERANCES
7-15-0019 Rev 5
(A Goat of India Undertakfrig)
(SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGERS)
Page 2 of 3
±16 ±16
±6 I I
±3
±3 ±3
+I
.41-H
+3
—0
±3
±3 ±3
+3.0
+0.0 +0.0 +2.0 —0.0
—0.8 — 0.8
+0 8
—0.0
+0 0
co
0
—0 8
L
-H
0 0
-11 co -H
7±1
1. L
C
001
0 o- 0
TRUE CL +I
+2 0 +2.0
—0 0 —0.
TRUE VERTICAI C.I
+0.8
±08
+0.0
—0.8 3 MAX.
ri _4
1
3 MAX
3 MAX.
0 co Ti
T
0
-H
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CAA. SK KJH

C
P'41.°1
RKT
4 06.0514 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CCP KA RKT SC
No by by
Approved by
Page 1781 of 1823

STANDARD No.
la ENGINEERS
TOLERANCES
7-15-0019 Rev 5
Enaift
ORR row araciew
®INDIA LJMITI
(A ndia U roie
D
ing) (SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGER) Page 3 of 3
TRUE VERT ft
3 MAX
m 1.0 FOR NOZZLE 4" & UNDER
m
3 MAX m 2.0 FOR NOZZLE r TO 10" INCL
2.5 FOR NOZZLE 12" TO 16" INCL
3.0 FOR NOZZI F 18" & ABOVF
TRUE HORIZ
+1 0
—0 0
11: ACTUAL NOZZLE
00
+
GENERAL NOTES:-
1. CUMULATIVE TOLERANCES ON CONSECUTIVE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE LIMITED
BY OVERALL DIMENSION TOLERANCE.
2. SPECIFIC TOLERANCES DESIRED FOR ANY PART SHALL BE SHOWN ON THE DRAWING AND
SHALL BE GIVEN PREFRENCE TO THOSE GIVEN IN THIS STANDARD.
3. TUBE HOLE TOLERANCES SHALL BE AS PER TEMA.
4. ONLY WHEN NUMBER OF BAFFLE PITCHES EXCEED EIGHT.
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD KJH RKT

No by by
Approved by
Page 1782 of 1823

STANDARD No.
diar 134GIsEERS
eb-NNA LIMITED
... (A Govt of Indk, U.d.riakin9)
VESSEL TOLERANCES 7-12-0001 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 2
®
4- I-- 11----1-
L ,_ so
so
r II-
-
&
— – – -L =-)) REF. PLANE
1— — --
-c)
1
(§, 1
6 It
wv.l
j% 11"ij
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH .,/ SK/KJH RKT RN
5 30.06.2011 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL RKT AKM/SC DM
No. by by
Approved by
Page 1783 of 1823
STANDARD No.
ENG/NEF36 VESSEL TOLERANCES 7-12-0001 Rev. 6
OkilirbeNDIA Utv'dTEll (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Page 2 of 2
NOTES
1. REFERENCE LINES SHALL BE LIGHTLY PUNCH—MARKED INSIDE AND OUTSIDE AROUND THE CIRCUMFERENCE OF
THE SHELL PLATE ON THE TANGENT LINES OF THE VESSEL
2. a) OUT OF ROUNDNESS (OVAUTY) SHALL BE AS PER APPLICABLE CODE.
b) OUTSIDE CIRCUMFERENCE OF SHELL SHALL BE WITHIN THE FOLLOWING LIMITS.
± 10 mm FOR NOMINAL DIAMETER 1200 mm AND UNDER.
± 12 mm FOR NOMINAL DIAMETER 1201 mm THROUGH 2400 mm.
± 20 mm FOR NOMINAL DIAMETER ABOVE 2400 mm.
c) FOLLOWING TOLERANCES ON DIAMETER SHALL APPLY THROUGHOUT ITS LENGTH FOR VESSELS WITH TRAYS
AND / OR PACKING. (FOR CARTRIDGE TYPE TRAY REFER SPECIAL NOTE—E).
VESSEL NOM. DIA. TOLERANCE ON NOM. DIA.
2000 mm AND UNDER ± 0.5%
2001 mm TO 4000 mm GREATER OF ± 10 mm OR ± 0.35%
4001 mm TO 8000 mm GREATER OF ± 14 mm OR ± 0.25%
ABOVE 8000 mm TO BE SPECIFIED ON VESSEL DRAWING.
3. TOLERANCE FOR LENGTH ± 5 mm PER 3000 mm, MAXIMUM 15 mm.
4. OUTSIDE SURFACE OF CYLINDER MAY BE OUT OF ALIGNMENT / STRAIGHTNESS NOT MORE THAN 6 mm PER 6000 mm
STRAIGHT LENGHT, BUT NOT MORE THAN 20 mm FOR ANY LENGTH.
5. TOLERANCE FOR CENTRE TO CENTRE DISTANCE BETWEEN ANY PAIR OF INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS TO BE AS FOLLOWS:—
DISTANCE BETWEEN NOZZLES : * 1 mm
ORIENTATION : f 1 mm
NOZZLE FACE INCLINATION : * 1/4 °
6. ELEVATIONS FROM REFERENCE PLANE MAY VARY AS FOLLOWS:—
MANHOLE: ± 12 mm, NOZZLE ± 6 mm, INTERNAL SUPPORTS: ± 3 mm, EXCEPT THAT LOCATIONS OF MANHOLES
AND NOZZLES NEAR THE TRAY SHALL NOT VARY MORE THAN ± 3 mm FROM THE TRAY.
7. PROJECTION OF FLANGE FACE FROM SHELL CENTRAL LINE / TANGENT UNE MAY VARY ± 5 mm FOR NOZZLES
AND ± 12 mm FOR MANHOLES.
8. CIRCUMFERENTIAL AND RADIAL DEVIATION OF NOZZLES, MANHOLES AND SUPPORTS FROM THE TRUE POSITION SHALL
NOT VARY MORE THAN I 3 mm.
9. BOLT HOLE ORIENTATION OF NOZZLES MAY VARY ± 2 mm AT BOLT CIRCLE.
10. VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION OF NOZZLE FLANGE FACES FROM PLANES NORMAL TO NOZZLE CENTRE LINES
OR PARALLEL TO VESSEL CENTRE UNE SHALL NOT BE MORE THAN ± 1/2?
11. ALL TOLERANCES OF TRAY SUPPORTS TO BE AS PER TRAY SPECIFICATIONS / DRAWING.
12. THE BASE RING BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER MAY VARY ± 5 mm. FOR ANY DIAMETER MEASURED AT POINTS 90* APART,
DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO CONSECUTIVE HOLES MAY VARY BY ± 5 mm.
13. a) DEVIATION OF SUPPORT BASE FROM HORIZONTAL MAY BE AS FOLLOWS:—
FOR VESSEL DIA. 1500 mm AND UNDER 3 mm
FOR VESSEL DIA. OVER 1500 mm TO 2000 mm 5 mm
FOR VESSEL DIA. OVER 5000 mm 10 mm
b) DEVIATION OF SUPPORT BASE FOR BRACKET TYPE SUPPORT / SADDLE SUPPORT FROM HORIZONTAL MAY BE ±
14. DISTANCE BETWEEN CL TO CL OF SUPPORTS AND BOLT HOLES IN SUPPORTS FOR HORIZONTAL VESSELS MAY VARY ± 3 mm.
15. DISTANCE BETWEEN CENTRE UNE OF HORIZONTAL VESSEL AND BOTTOM OF SUPPORT MAY VARY ± 3 mm.
16. a) TOLERANCE FOR CENTRE TO CENTRE DISTANCE BETWEEN ANY PART OF EXTERNAL STRUCTURAL
ATTACHMENT SHALL NOT VARY MORE THAN ± 3 mm.
b) TOLERANCE FOR DISTANCE FROM REFERENCE PLANE TO BASE OF VERTICAL SUPPORTS AND CENTRE UNE OF
SADDLE SUPPORT MAY VARY ± 6 mm.
SPECIAL NOTES
A. CUMULATIVE TOLERANCES ON CONSECUTIVE DIMENSIONS SHALL BE LIMITED BY OVERALL DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES.
ALL TOLERANCES ARE FROM REFERENCE PLANE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
B. INTERFERENCE BETWEEN INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL PARTS OR ANY RESTRICTION TO THE INTENDED FUNCTION OF ANY
PART SHALL BE KEPT IN VIEW WHERE TOLERANCES ARE CUMULATIVE.
C. SPECIFIC TOLERANCES FOR ANY PART SHOWN ON EIL DRAWING SHALL BE GIVEN PREFERENCE TO THOSE GIVEN
IN THIS STANDARD.
D. UNUSUALLY LARGE OR COMPLEX VESSELS MAY BE EXECUTED AS PER FABRICATOR'S STANDARD WHEN THE TOLERANCES
AS SHOWN ARE UNREASONABLE. IN SUCH INSTANCES FABRICATOR'S TOLERANCES & LIMITS MUST BE SUBMITTED
FOR APPROVAL.
E. VESSEL UPTO AND INCLUDING 750 mm NOMINAL DIAMETER SHALL HAVE CARTRIDGE TYPE TRAY. FOLLOWING
TOLERANCES ON DIAMETER SHALL APPLY THROUGHOUT ITS LENGTH.
VESSEL NOMINAL DIAMETER TOLERANCE
500 mm AND UNDER VESSEL I.D. *- oI own
m1"
501 mm TO 750 mm VESSEL I.DY1 + 3 run
AvA
i/
\
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/J 01 RN

No. by by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00 - 0001 - F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 1784 of 1823
STANDARD No.
LADDER RUNGS FOR
ENGINEERS 7-12-0011 Rev. 6
ORM.) (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
INDIA LIMITED MANHOLE / DEMISTER
Page 1 of 1
TOP OF DEMISTER
.!.!..t.!-:•!•,..:•!•!•!•!•:•:•!•!•!>!•!•!•!•:•!•!•!•!•:-!•!•!•:•'."_?..
HORIZONTAL VESSEL
TOP LADDER RUNGS EQUISPACED AT BOTH LEVELS

2—NOS. FOR DIA. < 1000.
4—NOS. FOR 1000 < DIA. < 2000
6—NOS. FOR 2000 < DIA. 3000
8—NOS. FOR DIA. > 3000
175 175
MANHOLE Q
ti
200
DETAIL—X
DETAIL—X
175 175
20(16)RODFI
VERTICAL VESSEL C.S. AND LOW ALLOY
STEEL (NOTE-7)
20R
HANDGRIP
NOTES
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
• 2. VARIATION IN SPACING BETWEEN LADDER RUNGS IS PERMITTED
IN CASE OF INTERFERENCE WITH SOME NOZZLE OR INTERNALS.
HOWEVER THE SPACING OF RUNGS SHALL BE EQUAL.
3. SQUARE RODS MAY BE USED FOR HANDGRIP / LADDER RUNGS.
IF FABRICATED FROM PLATE THE EDGES ARE TO BE ROUNDED OFF.
4. MATERIAL SHALL BE AS PER ENGINEERING DRAWING.
5. ALL FILLET WELDS SHALL BE 6 mm MINIMUM.
6. ORIENTATION OF LADDER RUNGS SHALL BE SAME AS OF MANHOLE.
7. DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN BRACKETS ARE FOR STAINLESS STEEL MATERIAL.
gi-
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SING SK/KJH Rif RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1785 of 1823
STANDARD No.
41d ENGINEERS NOZZLE REINFORCEMENT
Ogee felffleg INDIA LIMITED
INEW E9E401170X391111.1) (A Govt of India Undertalong)
7-12-0013 Rev 7
AND PROJECTION
PROJECTIO N Page 1 of 2
1-30 NPT TELLTALE HOLE
L (WIDTH OF PAD) ® PROJECTION 'A' SEE NOTE-4,5,9&10

NOMINAL OUTSIDE
PIPE SIZE DIAMETER SHELL WELD SHELL WELD CLASS 150 CLASS 300 CLASS 600 CLASS 900
EFF.=0.85 EFF. =1.0
BELOW 3" STANDARD - - 150 150 150 150
3" 88.9 40 45 200 200 200 200
4" 114.3 50 60 200 200 200 200
6" 168.3 70 85 200 200 200 250
8" 219.0 95 110 200 200 250 250
10" 273.0 115 135 200 200 250 300
12" 323.8 135 160 200 200 250 300
14" 355.6 150 175 250 250 250 300
16" 406.4 170 200 250 250 250 300
18" 457.2 195 225 250 300 300 350
20" 508.0 215 250 250 300 300 350
24" 609.6 255 300 250 300 300 400
26" 660.4 285 330 250 300 350 450
28" 711.2 305 355 250 300 350 450
30" 762 325 380 250 300 400 450
32" 812.8 350 405 300 350 400 500
34" 863.6 370 430 300 350 400 500
36" 914.4 390 455 300 350 - -
38" 965.2 410 480 300 350 - -
40" 1016 435 505 300 350 - -
42" 1066.8 455 530 300 400 - -
44" 1 1 1 7.6 475 555 300 400 - -
46" 1168.4 500 585 300 400 - -
48" 1219.2 520 610 300 400 - -
tot/.
74(
7 23 01 2020 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DP -- KJH RKT
6 07 06 2013 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD NIKHIL KA RKT/SC DM
5 23 05 2011 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL RKT

Date Purpose by by
Convenor Chairman
No Approved by
Page 1786 of 1823

STANDARD No
$1k NOZZLE REINFORCEMENT
ENGINEERS
Oge.ii faffleg INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertatong)
7-12-0013 Rev. 7
OVER E9E41,
1¢0,
13.111CH)
AND PROJECTION
Page 2 of 2
NOTES
2. IN CASE OF CONFLICT ENGINEERING DRAWING SHALL GOVERN.
® 3. WIDTH IS MINIMUM AND SHALL BE CHECKED AGAINST CODE REQUIREMENT. CHECK REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENT FOR
ALL EXTERNAL PIPING LOADING ALSO.
4. NOZZLE PROJECTIONS ARE BASED ON INSULATION THICKNESS EQUAL TO 75mm. FOR INSULATION THICKNESS
GREATER THAN 75mm, THE NOZZLE PROJECTION IS 'A' + [INSULATION THICKNESS(mm)-75].
5. PROJECTION 'A' FOR SELF—REINFORCED NOZZLE SHALL BE BASED ON DESIGN OF REINFORCEMENT SUBJECT TO
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS AS PER THIS STD
6. EXTEND PAD LOCALLY FOR MANHOLE DAVIT SUPPORT, IF REQUIRED
7 EXTERNAL REINFORCING PADS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF 1 NO. TELL—TALE HOLE EXCEPT THAT PADS FOR
NOZZLES GREATER THAN 10"NB(250NB) SHALL HAVE MINIMUM TWO NOS. TELL—TALE HOLES AND NOZZLES IN
EXCESS OF 36"NB (9 OONB) SHALL HAVE 4 NOS. TELL—TALE HOLES. PAD INSTALLED IN SECTIONS SHALL HAVE
ATLEAST ONE TELL—TALE HOLE PER SECTION TELL—TALE HOLES ON REINFORCEMENT PADS SHALL BE
EQUALLY SPACED IN CIRCUMFERENTIAL DIRECTION OF PAD.
8. TELL—TALE HOLE SHALL NOT BE PLUGGED AND SHALL BE FILLED WITH HARD GREASE ONLY, AFTER
HYDROTEST/PNEUMATIC TEST OF EQUIPMENT
9. a) FOR COLUMNS & VERTICAL VESSELS, PROJECTION OF NOZZLE ON TOP HEAD SHALL BE 400mm MINIMUM FROM
OUTSIDE.
b) FOR HORIZONTAL VESSELS, PROJECTION OF NOZZLES ON TOP SIDE OF SHELL SHALL BE 300mm MINIMUM FROM
OUTSIDE.
10. PROJECTIONS ARE BASED ON ASME B16.5 FLANGES FOR UPTO AND INCLUDING 24"NB NOZZLES AND ASME B16.47
SERIES 'B' FLANGES FOR NOZZLE SIZES ABOVE 24"NB.
7 23 01 2020 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DIDCZ4S„... / K KJH RKT

6 07 06 2013 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD NIKHIL KA RKT/SC DM
5 23 05 2011 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL RKT
No by by
Approved by
Page 1787 of 1823

STANDARD No.
STANDARD BOLT HOLE
ENGINEERS 0 MIA WITH) 7-12-0015 Rev. 6
41114= (A Govt. of WIG Undortoldng) ORIENTATION
Page 1 of 1
HORIZONTAL VESSEL
(ELEVATION)
et_
VERTICAL VESSEL
(PLAN)
6
5
31.10.2016
23.05.2011
REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH ,..••••• SK/KJH h:T) RN
REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL RKT

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1788 of 1823
STANDARD No.
arr ENGINEERS
esONDIALINTED
munawirorows (A Govt. of Wig Undortaking)
VORTEX BREAKERS 7-12-0019 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 1
50 FOR NOZZLES MO 250 NB

AND 80 FOR NOZZLES MOVE
250 NB
60 DRAIN HOLE FLUSH

WITH VESSEL WALL CLAD/WELD OVERLAYED NOZZLE
(TYP.)
UNUNED NOZZLE (TYP.)
TYPE — 1A TYPE — 2A
FOR NOZZLE NB > 100
3D0
60 DRAIN HOLE FLUSH

PLAN VIEW FOR
WITH VESSEL WALL 1B AND 2B
TYPE — 1B TYPE — 2B
FOR NOZZLE NB < 100
ALLOY / ALLOY CLAD/

VESSEL CONCRETE LINED
CARBON STEEL/LOW ALLOY STEEL ALLOY LINED
MATERIAL (NOTE-3b)
CORROSION
ALLOWANCE 1.5 3 4.5 6 — —
THICKNESS 't' 6 8 12 14 5 5
WELD SIZE 'W' 6 6 8 8 5 5
NOTES
3.a) FOR ALLOY LINED VESSELS, THE BAFFLE MATERIAL SHALL BE SAME AS ALLOY LINING.
b) FOR CONCRETE LINED VESSELS, THE BAFFLE MATERIAL SHALL BE ALLOY AS SPECIFIED
IN ENGINEERING DRAWING.
4. REFER ENGINEERING DRAWING FOR DIMENSION 'B'.
5. 'D. DENOTES NOMINAL BORE SIZE OF SUBJECT NOZZLE.
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJHM RIOWfr fr RN


No. by by
Approved by
Page 1789 of 1823
STANDARD No.
ORMO ENGINEERS NDIALIMITED

porrinnormsero (A G.A. of Ind. U.O.A.PAA9)
EARTHING LUG 7-12-0026 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 1
10 THK. PLATE
VESSEL PART
re)
to
N
to
\ 14 DIA. HOLE
(FOR M12 BOLT)
75 25
NOTES
2. ALL EQUIPMENTS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH TWO(2) EARTHING
LUGS, UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
340 EARTHING LUGS SHALL BE LOCATED DIAMETRICALLY OPPOSITE ON
NORTH—SOUTH CENTER LINE ON SKIRT SUPPORTED EQUIPMENTS,
ON ANY TWO(2) LEGS OF THREE(3) LEG SUPPORTED VERTICAL VESSEL,
ON DIAMETRICALLY OPPOSITE LEGS OF FOUR(4) LEG SUPPORTED
VERTICAL VESSEL AND ON EACH SADDLE OF HORIZOTAL VESSEL.
(b) TWO(2) EATHING LUGS ARE TO BE LOCATED ON EACH SADDLE OF
HORIZONTAL VESSEL OF LENGTH GREATER THAN 20 METERS.
(c) FOR SPHERE, TOTAL 4—NOS. OF EARTHING LUGS SHALL BE PROVIDED
PREFERABLY ON DIAMETRICALLY OPPOSITE AND EQUALLY SPACED LEGS.
(SPHERES ARE USUALLY PROVIDED WITH LEGS IN NUMBERS WHICH ARE
MULTIPLE OF 4 FOR THE SYMMETRY)
4. DO NOT WELD EARTHING LUG ON PRESSURE PART.
6. MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE CARBON STEEL.
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJH 114- RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1790 of 1823
O
z
P
0
6
8
1:1
C
REAFFIRMED AN D REI SS UED AS STANDARD
REAFF IRME D AN DREISS UED AS STANDARD

- 13 L_
17
0)
0)
m O
6)
3lVld 31AWN
C)
cr o
a
NOTES
C) 2. ALL LETTERS, BLOCKS AND BORDER SHALL BE OF RAISED POLISHED FACE.

3. BACK GROUND SHALL BE BLACK.
4. NAME PLATE SHALL BE TACK—WELDED TO THE BRACKET. WHERE NOT POSSIBLE IT MAY BE RIVETTED.
NC12:1VONVIS
5. REFER STANDARD 7-12-029 FOR BRACKET DETAIL OF NAME PLATE.

'0
9.nati LZO0-Z1-1.
0
6. NAME PLATE SHALL BE OF STAINLESS STEEL OF 2mm THICK.
Page 1791 of 1823

ii
0
0
fD
000-00-9"oN
0
DESIGNED BY
MANUFACTURED FOR
ITEM NUMBER
MANUFACTURER SERIAL NO.
YEAR OF FABRICATION
CODES
DESIGN PRESSURE TEST PRESSURE
ONVCINVIS SY 03119S 131:1CINV 0 3140:1 1ddVal

REAFF IRMED AND REISS UED AS STANDARD
DESIGN TEMPERATURE DATE OF TEST
CAPACITY CORROSION ALLOW.
OPERATING FLUID RADIOGRAPHY
-0 TOTAL WEIGHT EMPTY HEAT TREATMENT
s<
cn
311/ldMANN21 3211110VAIINVIN
0.
0
0 NOTES
3 U)
C)
9 3. 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
2. ALL LETTERS, BLOCKS AND BORDER SHALL BE OF RAISED POLISHED FACE.
3. BACK GROUND SHALL BE BLACK.
4. NAME PLATE SHALL BE TACK—WELDED TO THE BRACKET. WHERE NOT POSSIBLE IT MAY BE RIVETTED.
oN C1 1:1VCI NVIS
.
9'net! 8200- Z1.-L
5. REFER STANDARD 7-12-029 FOR BRACKET DETAIL OF NAME PLATE.

c3
z 6. NAME PLATE SHALL BE OF STAINLESS STEEL OF 2mm THICK.
Page 1792 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENG11•1336 BRACKET FOR NAME PLATE 7-12-0029 Rev. 6
(AINDIAof LIMITED
Co. Indio Undartak110
Page 1 of 1
0 O
O
tn
La
10 R
BRACKET
O
N NAME PLATE
4-
EIL NAME PLATE
4-
E
O
M
MANUFACTURER NAME PLATE

0
<TYP.
2V
—L_
200
230
NOTES
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN run UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.

2. BRACKET MATERIAL SHALL BE SAME AS SHELL MATERIAL.
6 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH ,„..•-•" SK/KJH RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1793 of 1823
HOT INSULATION SUPPORTS STANDARD No.
ENGNERS FOR 7-12-0033 Rev. 5
digagr itesONDIA LIMITED
(A Govt. of Indio Untied°!Ong)
HORIZONTAL VESSEL Page 1 of 1
600
INSULATION 8 THK. LOOSE FLAT
THK. (S) * 8 THK. LOOSE
FLAT RING *
REQUIRED
FOR VESSEL
HAVING
FOR VESSEL HAVING DIAMETER DIAMETER
ABOVE 600 PROVIDE 30x6 THK. ABOVE >2000
CLEAT WITH HEIGHT EQUAL TO
INSULATION THICKNESS AT 600
CIRCULAR PITCH 100 LOOSE GALVANIZED
RING (TYP.)
64 HOLE
AT 600 PITCH 'B' 'B' 2NO. 6 DIA. HOLES
S " VESSEL PER SEGMENT
/ INSIDE
10 T.L FOR DETAIL—X
À'
G.L BOLTS & NUTS

(1r.)
8 THK. RING IN
3 SEGMENTS
8 THK. T—CLEAT AT VIEW—À'
1000 SPACING
(MIN. 3 PER RING—
FOR DETAIL—X ONLY) DETAIL—'Z' (PLAN)
DETAIL—'X'/ DETAIL—'Y'
(SEE NOTE-6)
2NO. 10 WIDE 10 DIA. HOLE IN

SLOTS IN T—CLEAT FLAT RING
NOTES VIEW `B—B'

1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm.
2. FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION REFER ENGINEERING DRAWING.
3. DETAILS. DIMENSIONS AND NOTES ON ENGINEERING DRAWING
SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THOSE SHOWN HEREIN.
4. CLEATS SHALL CLEAR WELD SEAMS AND IN CASE OF INTERFERENCE WITH
NOZZLES/ATTACHMENTS, INSULATION RINGS SHALL BE NOTCHED/MODIFIED SUITABLY.
5. ONLY T—CLEATS WITH ASBESTOS SHEET, G.I. BOLTING, INSULATION SUPPORT CLEATS
AND LOOSE RING/FLAT SHALL BE SUPPUED BY THE EQUIPMENT FABRICATOR.
* 6. FOR INSULATION THICKNESS (5) 40mm AND LESS. ONLY RINGS AND FLATS IN PIECES
SHALL BE DIRECTLY WELDED TO SHELL/HEAD, AS SHOWN IN DETAIL—'2'.
5 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGH SK/KJH RN

No. by by
Approved by
Page 1794 of 1823
STANDARD No.
dal ENGINEERS PART DETAILS
41g-aIsKm
r fal5teg INDIA LIMITED 7-15-0001 Rev. 5
Few eeraupER) (A Govt of India Undertaking)
+2 +1 5 6X45'
-o -00 M
N +
+ ; a
a a m
m —*** m -—-
/66 *\-1. a in
_ Q o+
E-'"
ma
BCD
+00 *
*
..._
+0 8
-0 0 DETAIL-2
M ON ne A. TO sun- ,nq
-0
+ s'i ..
r .. +i<
+0.0
a 771 6X45'
m a M ? + LJ T
1 m _ _ -\ **
m I n
m +
a
m
rn I-
xD
-""---.1 1—..._ <I 0
X
< 8
yam/' SEE DETAIL 13 co a
T2 I _
DETAIL-1 DETAIL-3
•• T 6X45' T G1 T 6X45'
_______\ Ti
Po -\ ** to ** re)
+ + re) +
a a + a
m m a m
m
I ___
o
. ***
a WA. a -INA a
< 0 ,111 a
< 0 < ,_, - ---- < 0
m „, MIMI m a IIIIIIII1= m 0 m a
+ * .-
0 H
m co m in
m
i
DETAIL-4 DETAIL- 5 DETAIL- 6 DETA'L- 7
re) ** vl F ** **
+ r- ÷
a
m m -1 r 1 r.-\
,__)
t
fil)
LI%
.._i 41 FI TUBE
re HE F
*** *** SIDE SIDE
a
a
(.> a a *** ***
m a as
o
MINIM 2
rel p R2 m
m r.-)
m 1_13_1 m
T3 MEI=
DETAIL- 8 DETAIL-9 DETAIL-10 DETAIL-11
REDD Al/A2 REF. T/SHT OR CH. COVER

**AL ***
,_ _I___ SUPPORT PL 1
:8[.i 20
it
it
l. i _
LW
Di
1 I Li--
a e,..- 5 DEFLECTOR T-1----

In iil ill STRIPS 1.7- 1
rn I 0111111
m
ol:i T2=T1 +3 PARTITION PLATE
N GROOVE DETAIL
T3 SLIDING/ DEFLECTOR
1 Iel
lIl'117
STRIPS END DETAIL
DETAIL-12 DETAIL-14 DETAIL- 15
DETAIL-13
42
6
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD `KJH
4 06.05.14 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GC P KA RKT
3 27.01.09 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD VPR RKG AKM VC
No by by
Approved by
Page 1795 of 1823

STANDARD No
laigiadENGINEERS PART DETAILS
ell Was INDIA LIMITED 7-15-0001 Rev 5
(Heil e92017 tOr301115R) (A Govt of India Undertaking) (SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGERS)
Page 2 of 2
T 6X45* 45*
f)
DETAIL-18 DETAIL-19®
*.
GASKETWIDTH
0
T3 I m
DETAIL-20 DETAIL-21 DETAIL-22
DETAIL-24 DETAIL-25
CHANNEL CHANNEL
SIDE SIDE
_A
e
DEPOSIT
DETAIL-28 DETAIL-29 DETAIL-30 DETAIL-31
** *
NOTES:-
TABLE NO.— 1 1. FOR CHANNEL COVER & TUBE SHEET A, BCD & D ETC. SHALL
DIMENSIONS * ** *** BE SAME AS FOR MATING FLANGES
2. IF SPIRAL WOUND GASKET IS USED FOR A JOINT:—
FOR IJA &
NON ASBESTOS 5 6 5 a) DIAMETER OF TUBE SHEET & CHANNEL COVER
/ ELkSTIMER GASKET. 'D' SHALL BE GASKET OD + 8 mm.
FOR 4.5 mm b) DIAMETER OF FLANGE RECESS FOR GASKET SHALL BE
SPWD GASKET 6 7 6
GASKET OD + 11 mm.
FOR 6.35 mm
SPWD GASKET 8 9 7 3 ED WELD DEPOSIT OR CLADDING SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED ON
EQUIPMENT DRAWING.
4. FOR ASTERISK MARKS REFER TABLE-1.
5. WHERE EVER 'R' IS SPECIFIED, IT INDICATES TO BE RADIUSED.
6. ALL DIMEN I•NS ARE IN mm UNLES STATED OTHERWISE.
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD KJH Z RKT

4 06.05.14 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GCP KA RKT SC
3 27.01.09 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD VPR RKG AKM VC
No by by
Approved by
Page 1796 of 1823

TYPES OF NON STANDARD STANDARD No.
dol ENGINEERS
ige.ji EVIeg INDIA LIMITED GASKETS 7-15-0002 Rev. 5
IMPIT ovegraxacesa)
TYPE-1 TYPE-2 TYPE-3
TYPE-4 TYPE— 5 TYPE-6
TYPE-7 TYPE-8 TYPE— 9
TYPE-10 TYPE-11 TY P --
__ - i t„,o.,
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD Dick__ KJH 'V IRK"r"
c
No by by
Approved by
Page 1797 of 1823

aPeie7 ENGINEERS
tge..11 OPleg
141IME9WIA¢C01341Fil)
INDIA LIMITED
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD Df5;i11/51-

4 I‘; KJH
4 06.05.14 REVISED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD CCP KA RKT SC
No by by
Approved by
Page 1798 of 1823

ENGINEERS
dgefi Ei&g INDIA LIMITED
(*PM EgettelUtlaackean (A Govt of India Undertaking)
PERMISSIBLE TOLERANCES
PASS PARTITION PLATE
THIS SIDE
ri
\FILLER
TYPICAL SECTION OF METAL
JACKETTED GASKETS
CENTRING RING
D+8
GASKET O.D. (D) I
4 WIDE NOSE DASKFT WIDTH I I
CENTRING RING
r
I THK
IIIIIIIIIIIIIII 1 I
Y
I
I— METAL WINDINGS \ METAL WINDINGS WITH FILLER
NOSETHK.
Y
C1)
<
0
TYPICAL DETAIL OF
SPIRAL WOUND GASKET
GENERAL NOTES:-
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
2. THE HARDNESS OF THE METAL FOR SOLID OR CLAD GASKETS SHALL BE MINIMUM 15 BHN LOWER THAN
THAT OF THE MATERIAL OF THE FLANGE GASKET SEATING SURFACE AND IN ANY CASE NOT TO EXCEED
THE FOLLOWING.
(a) LOW CARBON STEEL / LAS — 110 BHN
(b) 5 Cr. 1/2 Mo. — 130 BHN
(c) STAINLESS STEEL — 160 BHN
(d) 11 — 13 Cr. — 170 BHN
(e) MONEL — 130 BHN
(f) SOFT IRON — 90 BHN
(g) COPPER, BRASS — 50 BHN
(h) ALUMINIUM — 30 BHN
3. FILLER IN METAL JACKETTED GASKETS SHALL NOT BE OF COMPRESSED TYPE.

4. ALL GASKETS SHALL BE MADE IN ONE CONTINUOUS PIECE ALL AROUND INCLUDING THE PASS PARTITION
RIBS AND THEREFORE MUST BE CUT FROM ONE SHEET.
5. THE CORNER RADII OF ALL GASKETS TO BE 10 mm.
6. SOLID FLAT METAL GASKET SHALL BE 2 mm. THK.
7. FOR SPIRAL WOUND GASKETS:—
a) THE PASS PARTITION RIB SHALL BE OF METAL JACKETTED WELDED TO CENTRING RING.
b) CENTRING RING THK. SHALL BE SAME AS NOSE THK.
c) GASKET THK. SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED IN EQUIPMENT DRAWINGS. IT SHALL BE MIN. 4.5 FOR
SHALL DIA UP TO 1000 & MIN. 6.35 FOR SHALL DIA MORE THEN 1000, IF NOT SPECIFIED.
8. 'm' AND 'y' VALUES SHALL BE AS PER ASME SEC. VIII DIV. I.
9. GASKET PLAN IS VIEWED FROM DIRECTION 'X' .
10. FILLER SHALL BE ARAMIDE FIBRE UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE IN DRAWINGS & ASBESTOS NOT TO BE USED.
5 21.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD Dfc\

13/ NSK KJH 4:
2-- Alii
No by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Copynght EIL - All rights reserved
Page 1799 of 1823

SUPPORT FOR STANDARD No
lwira~i -ice ENGINEERS
Ige_ji 02-eg INDIA LIMITED HORIZONTAL EXCHANGERS 7-15-0004 Rev 5
IiiKW EER1RE01340.1) (A Govt of India Undonelong)
A ---.-H
CL. OF SHELL
25 (TYP )
1-10 0
VENT HOLE
L 10
10 i> / A -.-H
2-22 0 HOLES FOR 2-30 0 HOLES FOR A

M-16 BOLTS (FOR ------1.,4-2 BOLTS (FOR
—.
6" & 8" SHELL SIZES) ALL OTHER SHELL SIZES) VIEW AT 'A-A'
2-22 X 57 SLOTTED -4-4:-. 2-30 X 65 SLOTTED

HOLES FOR M-16 p HOLES FOR M-24
BOLTS (FOR 6" & 8" BOLTS (FOR ALL OTHER
SHELL SIZES) SHELL SIZES)
SADDLE UNIT SIZE NO. OF TOTAL WT. OF

A B C D REMARKS
NO. O.D. mm RIBS 2 SADDLES (kg.)
1 168.3 160 200 50 — 1 17
2 219.1 160 230 50 — 1 18
3 273 220 260 70 — 1 21
4 323.8 230 270 75 — 1 22
5 355.6 260 280 90 — 1 26
6 406.4 300 310 110 — 1 30
7 457.2 350 330 135 80 2 36
8 500 400 350 160 105 3 44
9 550 400 380 160 105 3 44
10 600 430 400 175 120 3 46
11 650 460 430 190 135 3 50
12 700 510 450 215 160 3 56
13 750 530 480 225 165 3 60
14 800 590 500 240 180 3 82
15 850 610 530 255 195 3 84
16 900 660 550 280 220 3 92
17 950 690 580 295 235 3 98
NOTES:-
2. INTERMEDIATE SADDLES TO BE TAKEN TO THE NEAREST SIZE.
* 3 FOR S.S. 10 mm THK FOR SADDLE NOS. 1 TO 17 & 14 mm THK. FOR SADDLE NOS 37.
18 TO L
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DRASI„.--- K KJH

2 OAAP(
,
RKT
No by by
Approved by
Page 1800 of 1823

SUPPORT FOR STANDARD No
4011k ENGINEERS
ige..ukititeg INDIA IJMffED HORIZONTAL EXCHANGERS 7-15-0004 Rev. 5
la1IVITE1RI1V43130:1.1) (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
1
_ _ _ _ _i_ _
25 (TYP )
2-10 0
VENT HOLES
20 o
10 10
10
1ri ASH ninin

[
C —1 — c
A
4-33 0 HOLES FOR
M-27 BOLTS VIEW AT IA-A'
4-33 X 68 SLOTTED
HOLES FOR M-27 BOLTS
TOTAL WT.
SADDLE UNIT SIZE NO. OF
A B C D OF TWO REMARKS
NO. O.D. mm RIBS SADDLES (kg'
18 1000 900 650 370 180 8 258
19 1050 950 675 390 200 278
20 1100 1000 700 420 220 290
21 1150 1050 725 440 230 302
22 1200 1100 750 470 250 320
23 1250 1150 775 490 270 336
24 1300 1200 800 520 280 348
25 1350 1200 825 520 280 356
26 1400 1250 850 540 300 368
27 1450 1300 875 570 320 380
28 1500 1350 900 590 340 398
29 1600 1400 950 620 350 406
30 1700 1500 1000 670 380 440
31 1800 1600 1050 720 420 472
32 1900 1700 1100 770 450 516
33 2000 1800 1150 820 480 546
34 2100 1850 1200 840 500 568
35 2200 1950 1250 890 530 602
36 2300 2000 1300 920 550 606
37 2400 2100 1350 970 580 640
L.
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DA1 ......--- NSK KJH,- g1- ,,-,i,A-
ti
No by by
Approved by
Page 1801 of 1823

TUBE HOLE PREPARATION STANDARD No
Isifigtae ENGINEERS AND ROLLER EXPANDING
7-15-0006 Rev 5
l' , INM LIMITED (SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGERS
own maw awaqipao (A Govt of India Undertang)
& AIR COOLED HEAT EXCHANGERS) Page 1 of 1
TUBESHEET
TUBESHEET
TUBESHEET
0.4DEPTH OF GROOVE
0.4DEPTH OF GROOVE
0 0 O
O
UJ
O
OD CD
3+CORROSION
(NOTE-2) ALLOWANCE 3 3 3 3
(NOTE-4)
EXPANDED LE
CLADDING
FIG.-1 FIG.-2
NOTES : —
2. FOR TUBESHEET THICKNESS WHERE THE GAP BETWEEN 2ND GROOVE & BACK OF TUBE SHEET
IS LOWER THAN 6 mm DELETE 2ND GROOVE.
3. FOLLOW SPECIAL CLOSE FIT AS PER TEMA / API 661 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE
4. FOR CORROSION ALLOWANCE LESS THAN 4 mm., INCREASE THIS DIMENSION TO TUBE SHEET THICKNESS
MINUS 18 mm. BUT NOT TO EXCEED 7 mm.
*5. CHAMFER (1X45') OR RADIUS (R=1).
pv4,13t
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD 17..tt‘l< KJH' RKT

No by by Approved by
Page 1802 of 1823

STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS METHOD OF FASTENING
larReg.
WWI eletifie a/W.3MM)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Unclertalung)
NUTS TO THE TIE RODS 7-15-0009 Rev 5
STEEL TIE—ROD
TIE—ROD SPACER
LAST SUPPORT PLATE

NOTES: OR BAFFLE
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm. UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
2. WELD 1st NUT TO SUPPORT PLATE
3. WELD 2nd NUT TO TIE—ROD
4. WELD BOTH NUTS TOGETHER
5. ALL WELDS TO EXTEND THE LENGTH OF ONE FLAT OF NUT.
NON FERROUS TIE—ROD
CHISEL
TIE—ROD SPACER
LAST SUPPORT PLATE

OR BAFFLE
NOTE: —
*
BREAK THREAD OF TIE—ROD IN TWO PLACES NEAR LAST NUT
WITH BLUNT CHISEL TO LOCK TIE—ROD NUTS IN PLACE.
\\I‘k•iz
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DP54—iNaSK KJH( RKT

No by by
Approved by
Page 1803 of 1823

STANDARD No.
JACK SCREW TAPPING
ENGINEERS
f AL'S INDIA LIMITED AND ARRANGEMENT 7-15-0010 Rev. 5
(A GovL of India Undertakmg)
(SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGERS) Pagel of 1
FI ANOF OR CHANNFI COVFR
GASKET SIDE EXPOSED SIDE
\COUNTER BORE
d + 2
BOLTCIRCL E DIAMETER
THREAD=2d
d = DIAMETER OF JACK SCREW
'T'
r \
14- —
2—HOLES 3—HOLES 4—HOLES
NO. REQD. 'd' SHELL I.D.

2 14 UPTO & INCL 300
3 16 301 TO & INCL. 580
4 20 581 & LARGER
LOCATION OF JACK SCREW TAPPING HOLES

1. HOLES ARE TO BE LOCATED ON THE BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER
OF FLANGE AND HALF WAY BETWEEN ADJACENT HOLES.
2. FIRST HOLE SHALL BE LOCATED BETWEEN FIRST AND
SECOND BOLT HOLE COUNTING CLOCKWISE FROM MARK 'T'.
3. HOLES SHALL BE SPACED AS FOLLOWS
2—HOLES LAYOUT 180' APART
3—HOLES LAYOUT APPROX 120' APART
4—HOLES LAYOUT 90' APART.
NOTES: —
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE
2 JACK SCREW SHALL BE OF STAINLESS STEEL MATERIAL.
\* z
. ,
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DP 41(SK KJI-X RKT
No by by
Approved by
Page 1804 of 1823

STANDARD No
doi1ReieleftMINERS FIXING DETAIL OF DOWEL PINS
7-15-0011 Rev. 5
UMITED
(A Govt of Ind UndortakIng)
(MIN) 5 SEE 5 (MIN)

NOTE -8
FIXING DETAIL OF DOWEL PINS FIXING DETAIL OF DOWEL PINS

(AT STATIONARY TUBE SHEET) ( AT CHANNEL COVER )
SEENOTE-9
20
SEE NOTE-3
co 0
NOTES: —
1 ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
2. DOWEL PINS TO BE PROVIDED ONLY WHEN CHANNEL CONSISTS OF PASS—PARTITION PLATE/S.
3. DOWEL PIN SHALL BE OF CARBON STEEL UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE.
4. MIN. 2 DOWEL PINS SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH FLANGE & SHALL NOT BE LOCATED AT 180' APART.
5. ALL SHARP EDGES OF DOWEL PINS SHALL BE ROUNDED OFF.
6. SMALL END OF DOWEL PIN SHALL BE HELD IN POSITION BY TIGHT FIT.
7. LUG TO BE WELDED TO TUBESHEET. HOWEVER LUG FOR DOWEL PIN MAY BE THREADED AND SCREWED
IN TUBE SHEET TO AVOID PWHT IN SPECIFIC CASES. MATERIAL OF LUG SHALL BE COMPATIBLE
WITH TUBE SHEET MATERIAL.
8. WHEN GAP BETWEEN SHELL & CHANNEL FLANGES IS 25 MM OR LESS, DOWEL PINS SHALL BE
PROVIDED IN CHANNEL FLANGE ONLY.
9. AT THE LARGER END OF DOWEL PIN THE LENGTH CAN BE REDUCED IN CASE OF A SMALLER GAP
BETWEEN SHELL AND CHANNEL FLANGES.
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DP 1aSK KJH RKT

No by by
Approved by
Page 1805 of 1823

STANDARD No
lfc ENGINEERS LIFTING LUG DETAIL
Elffleg INDIA LIMITED 7-15-0013 Rev 5
MOIMM=341M (A GovL of India UndertakIng)
Page 1 of 1
10 FULL FILLET
WELD ALL AROUND
THE
LIFTING LUG FOR SHELL COVER, LIFTING LUG FOR

CHANNEL AND CHANNEL COVER FLOATING HEAD COVER
SHELL I. D. A D R THK.
UPTO 450 65 25 28 12
451 — 1000 75 30 35 16
1001 — 1200 100 30 35 20
1201 & ABOVE CUSTOM DESIGN
NOTES: —
2. MATERIAL SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH PART IT IS WELDED TO. (USE BOILER QUALITY FOR CARBON STEEL)
3. USE TWO LIFTING LUGS EACH FOR CHANNEL AND SHELL COVER AND ONE FOR CHANNEL COVER AND
FLOATING HEAD COVER.
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DPit..— NSK KJ H ct- hijj

K
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GC P KA RKT SC
No by by
Approved by
Page 1806 of 1823

STANDARD No.
DAVIT FOR
ENGINEms SHELL & CHANNEL COVER
faiwieg
MIMI VOIR R.1381FR)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertalung)
7-15-0014 Rev. 5
SHELL FLANGE
25 SLIDING LINK
SHELL COVER FLANGE SEE DETAIL
SHELL COVER CHANNEL
LIFTING LUG SHELL
TOP AND BOTTOM 25

PLATE LIFTING LUG
CHANNEL FLANGE
SHELL CHANNEL
CHANNEL COVER FLANGE
PLAN OF DAVIT SUPPORT ASSEMBLY OF DAVIT ON EXCHANGER
r\NN
DETAIL—'A'
SHELL/CHANNEL TOP PLATE

STOPPER PLATE
FLANGE 16 THK. RIB PLATE
'A'
BOTTOM PLATE 10 0 WEEP HOLE
DETAIL OF SLIDING LINK 6 0 FLAT
DETAIL OF DAVIT DETAIL OF DAVIT SUPPORT
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DP KJH

4 06 05 14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GCP KA RKT
No by by
Approved by
Page 1807 of 1823

STANDARD No.
DAVIT FOR
401 ENGINEERS
Igar faigtu
(Alen FITIBI7 11XMISM
INDIA LIMITED
SHELL & CHANNEL COVER 7-15-0014 Rev 5
1
'- ° if) CD 0 0 ° 0 If) 0 0
0 0 (0
0 N xi co in .
c? 0 0 0 0 0., N in in 0 0
NI- pr, N .- CD VI scl" N NI- ..4- (0 dt- in
N N .- N N
0 L0 0 0 0 0 L° 0 0
0 0 N •- c0 0 0 0 0 0 0) N in 0 0
r0 vt. r..) N .4- L0c) scl- rn V) I- NI- N V) ..d. (0
N N .- N N
0 0 n 8 °
(0 ,°
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ln CD 0 e-, 0
LN N N c0 --
N I- V) in CO - in Nt- VI N F- V) N V) .- to *4- in
N N .- N N .-
•- 0 u-, 0 0 0
0 0 0 (0 ir, V. 0 0 0 0 0) r-.. N 0 0
.4. to
0
V) LID 't ID rn .- I- N N N .4- In
N N
0 0-) 0 0 .--. 0
0 0 0 N Li° in in 0 0 000 c54 N . 1.-) 0 0
0 I-- ,- ro in - L0 *4- r0 0 I— *4- in
N N .-- N N N " dt- IA
0 L0 0 0 0 •- ° 0 0 0 0
OO
B N o 0 0 ° .--- 0 0 0
0)
0 n (f-i ,y_ Lo in in 0) 0 0
0 N
N N d Lc,
cd — N v-- N 1-
0 in 0 o 0 0
0 0 CI N C° in co 0 0 0 0 0, L0 co 0 0
CO 0) N s- .7- n Fo
m
•— 0 to 0 0 Li)
o (r) in 0
0 0 0 N s- V) CO
CO
0 0 0 (0 N r..... 0 0 L°
r-- 1— ao ro d- .4- -4- in N i•-• E-- co N 0 M ,4. in N
,- 1- .--- /-- .- .-
•- ° if) 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 N Lr) 0 0 (0 N r.„. 0 If)
CO I- r•-• NI V) .4. .. in N CD I-- N N 0 r.0 .4. in N
DIMENSION- A
0
DIMENSION-A
LIJ
0 0 8 8 0 0
n 8 0 CD 0 0
o ci. o 0
Q0 Ill.
1... 0
Lc)
0
0
0 it)
0 0 ,--- (.0 r.,) N vi. ,4_ V) N in V) N
,-- ..- - I- (ID
— N a) in d-
0 Ld
_J 0 0 0 NI- 0 a)
0
n
in
N o 0 ° 0 o
CD
in
N
o
Lo
o
cio 0 in
.cl- I- If) ro N .4- I— L° N 0) V) in in N
0 o o O) 0, u.) 0 ID ° o o o o in
U) V) I- "ct 0
re,
— M in in N z 0 0 0
't
Lo
N
in
N in
in
in in N
o in o o O — ° o o o o
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 NI-V) CO
N
°
M
Tho
CO
re) M N 0 CD V)
° I- (D N
N 00 o
ge,
ro
in ro N
LL .- .- .--
— 0 0 0 0 `-- o o o
0 0 0 r., LI) Ln 0 o °0 ° V) LI) o
o O 0 0
1— N N o in N
s- 1-
ro to K) N 5 .-- /- N N N V) in
IS 0 0 in
h 8 °
st °
co 0 0 0 ,-,
CD I--° CD
° o0
in
N
o
N
o
co 0 0
01- N 0 V) N VD N ..... s- N CD N N in N
.- .-
E) ° ° o o o o 0
o o to o 0 0 0
0 in
cn i-0 N co re) N n N 0) I--
0 ,_
° N CDq N N n N
O
,5 08 ,0 L,0 8 rs 0
c5 0 8° 0 8 r9, 0 0 0
0) 'A ou?) in N NI N c01- 0, isi- in N N n c'i
•- 0 0 0 0 0 0 in 0 (so p, 0 in s 8 Lo 0
0 6-. 0 CC) 0 0 0 N N
N ' C° N IX) in N N I- CO l
i;NDJ 2 N N N N
CS 0 8 n° 8 B ‘E, 0 8 8 ,s c9 0 0
0 ,0
N N rn — N (0 1- f, N U) N ,- N N
0 8
Cr) F- CO N
,), Ls s ,2 0 0 pc,
1- co
0
c°
0 0 Lci:), 0 CD
Lo N ,- N .- :-) N N
0 00 0 0 ID 0 CO 0
I- 0 0 0 0 LO CD
c7_ 0 in co co N N 0 CO LO .- N 0
N ,-
0 U.) N If) N a_ — in
If) N *---
L-- Z I=
Q
m co 0 0 _1 Z -o Q m m 0 in _1 Z -o
0 0 0 0
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DP SK KJF1(42'

4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GC P KA RKT SC
No by by
Approved by
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0 Copynght EIL - AU nghts reserved
Page 1808 of 1823

STANDARD No.
DAVIT FOR
ENGINRS SHELL & CHANNEL COVER
fge..11 eiatag
(Oen elEMORMJcIPSA)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertalong)
7-15-0014 Rev 5
TABLE — 3
WT. X C. DIMENSIONS/SIZE OF DAVITS
(TON) (MTR) F S
NBE SCH NB SCH T R NB SCH
UPTO 0.1 2"-160 1-1/2.-160 3 32 3"-160
0.11-0.3 3"-160 2"-160 3 47 4"-80
0.31-0.6 4"-160 2"-160 13 59 6"-80
0.61-1.25 6"-80 3"-160 10 86 8"-80
1.26-2.5 8"-80 3"-160 11 112 10"-60
2.6-4.0 10"-60 4"-120 8 139 12"-60
4.1-6.3 10"-120 4"-120 8 139 12"-60
6.4-7.8 10"-160 4"-120 8 139 12"-60
NOTES: —
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
2. WHEN DAVITS ARE REQUIRED, USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE TO FIND OUT THE DIMENSIONS
2.1 IDENTIFY THE DIMENSION A, i.e. THE MAXIMUM DIAMETER OF THE COMPONENT TO BE HANDLED.
2.2 REFER TABLE-1 OR TABLE-2 (AS THE CASE MAY BE ) FOR THE DIMENSIONS AND SIZES B,C,D,L,N & d
INDICATED IN THE COLUMN CORRESPONDING TO DIMENSION A.
2.3 DETERMINE WEIGHT OF THE PART TO BE HANDLED (i e. WT. OF SHELL COVER ASSEMBLY OR CHANNEL COVER)
2.4 CALCULATE THE PRODUCT OF WEIGHT (IN TONNES) X DIMENSION C (IN METRES)
2.5 REFER TABLE-3 & OBTAIN DIMENSION AND SIZES E,F,T,S & R INDICATED IN THE ROW AGAINST
THE PRODUCT CALCULATED AT 2.4 ABOVE.
3. MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION-a TOP/BOTTOM/RIB PLATE- COMPATIBLE WITH PART IT IS WELDED TO
(USE BOILER QUALITY FOR CARBON STEEL)
b. OTHERS IS 1239 OR EQUIV
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DPW.- NSK KJH,

PVgd(frl
•
RKT
No by by
Approved by
Page 1809 of 1823

STANDARD No.
arg ENGMERS
N31#1/4 MM.
EARTHING LUG
7-15-0016 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
10 THK. CARBON STEEL PLATE
EXCHANGER
PART
\ 14 0 HOLE
25 (FOR M12 BOLT)
100 (MIN)
NOTES: —
2. DO NOT WELD EARTHING LUGS TO PRESSURE PARTS. IF REQUIRED,TAKE PRIOR APPROVAL OF COMPANY.
3. EARTHING LUG TO PROTRUDE OUT OF INSULATION, WHEREVER REQUIRED.
4. ALL EXCHANGERS TO BE FITTED WITH 2 EARTHING LUGS.
5. LOCATION OF EARTHING LUGS :—
(i) FOR VERTICAL EXCHANGER WITH 2 LUG SUPPORTS :— ON BOTH LUG SUPPORTS AT VERTICAL WEB.
(ii) FOR VERTICAL EXCHANGER WITH 3 LUG SUPPORTS :— ON ANY TWO AT VERTICAL WEB.
FOR VERTICAL EXCHANGER WITH 4 LUG SUPPORTS :— ON ANY TWO DIAMETRICALLY OPPOSITE AT
VERTICAL WEB.
(iii) FOR HORIZONTAL EXCHANGER :— ONE ON CENTRAL WEB OF EACH SADDLE SUPPORT.
4
5 20.03.2018
30.09.2011

JIT SRIGH
JS
SKI J H
RKT
P SA4 Ai
rot
AKM SC
RN
DM

No. by by
Approved by
Fnrmat Nn 8-00-0001-F4 RPV n Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts resprvpci
Page 1810 of 1823

STANDARD No
ENGINEERS NAME PLATE
digai fiReg. INDIA LIMITED (A Govt. of India Undertaking)
7-15-0017 Rev 5
lallerl 192,1W ,013,119.1)
Page 1 of 1
6R 4 — 5.5 0 HOLES
NAME OF MANUFACTURER
DESIGNED BY ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED
MANUFACTURED FOR
ITEM NO.
MANUFACTURER'S SERIAL NO. YEAR BUILT
CODES
INSPECTED BY
CV
SHELL TUBES
DESIGN PRESSURE kg/cm2 g
DESIGN TEMPERATURE *c
TEST PRESSURE (HYD) kg/cm2 g
DATE OF TEST
OPERATING FLUID
CORROSSION ALLOWANCE mm
RADIOGRAPHY
HEAT TREATMENT
DUTY / SURFACE kcal /hr m2
WEIGHT FULL OF WATER kg
TOTAL WEIGHT EMPTY kg
BUNDLE WEIGHT kg
15 4
52 7R 20
150
CFW
OUT SIDE SHELL

*
3 THK. FOR SS (MIN.)
6 THK FOR CS & LAS (MIN.)
N
MATERIAL : — 170 x 130
NAME PLATE :— STAINLESS STEEL 18 : 8 NAME PLATE BRACKET
NAME PLATE BRACKET :— SAME AS EXCHANGER SHELL
NOTES: —
2. ALL LETTERS AND LETTER BLOCKS SHALL BE ENGRAVED IN BLACK.
* 3. H = 75 OR 'INSULATION THK. + 10 WHICHEVER IS GREATER
4. NAME PLATE SHALL BE RIVETED WITH 5 0 ALUMINIUM RIVETS AND SHALL BE TACK WELDED TO BRACKET
ON ALL FOUR SIDES.
5. BRACKET WITH NAME PLATE TO BE LOCATED AS MARKED ON DRAWING.
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DPVi.-- ki3 Kill AullAY

RKT
No by by
Approved by
Page 1811 of 1823

STANDARD No
laggiziegibENGINEERS WARNING PLATE
7-15-0018 Rev 5
lgar figlegyirINDIA umrrm
1112112.0111205131PRO (A Govt o/ India Undertalong)
6R 4 — 5.5 0 HOLES 3 THK. STAINLESS STEEL PLATE

TY
I TY PI /
AR\ \G
DO OT RUA THIS
EXCHA\G -12 WITHOUT
FLUID ON SH -IL SIDE
160
DETAIL — 1
OUT SIDE SHELL

CFW
6R 3 THK. FOR SS (MIN.)
ce 6 THK. FOR CS & LAS (MIN.)
185 x 130
WARNING PLATE BRACKET DETAIL

MATL. SPEC.:— SAME AS EXCHANGER SHELL
* H = 75 OR 'INSULATION THK. + 10
NOTES: — WHICHEVER IS GREATER.
2. MATERIAL TO BE 18:8 STAINLESS STEEL FOR WARNING PLATE.
3. ALL LETTERING WITH THE EXCEPTION OF WORD 'WARNING' TO BE ENGRAVED 2 mm. WIDE x 2 mm. DEEP
AND FILLED WITH BLACK PAINT AFTER ENGRAVING.
4. THE WORD "WARNING" IS TO BE ENGRAVED 2.5 mm. WIDE x 2 mm. DEEP AND FILLED WITH RED PAINT
AFTER ENGRAVING.
5. WARNING PLATE TO BE HELD WITH 5 0 ALUMINIUM RIVETS ON WARNING PLATE BRACKET

AND SHALL BE TACK WELDED TO BRACKET ON ALL FOUR SIDES.
6. BRACKET WITH WARNING PLATE TO BE LOCATED AS MARKED ON DRAWING.
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD Df KJH RKT

No by by
Approved by
Page 1812 of 1823

digar ...as..
data
IMP, VILeleraleaeglig
ENGINEER.S
LIMITED
(A Govt of In Undertalang)
WARNING PLATE

STANDARD No.
7-15-0018 Rev 5
Page 2 of 2
6R 4 — 5.5 0 HOLES 3 THK. STAINLESS STEEL PLATE

Tsi ‘
ANN \G
DO NOT RUN THIS
EXCHANG -1:R WITHOUT
FLUID 0\ MBE SIM
1&)
DETAIL — 2
FOR NOTES REFER SHEET 1 OF 2.
5 31.10.19 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD D NSK KJ H cel: P l°31f)

RK
4 06.05.14 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD GC P KA R KT SC
No by by
Approved by
Page 1813 of 1823

STANDARD No.
S. R. NOZZLE NECK 7-12-0037 Rev. 4

1611111.11111•1111111.1PNI (A Get. of Indio Undortoklog)
Page 1 of 1
SELF REINFORCED NOZZLE
NOTES :— SELF REINFORCED WELD ENDS

1. DESIGN CALCULATION FOR ALL THE DIMENSIONS OF S.R. NOZZLES / WELD
ENDS SHALL BE APPROVED BY EIL
2. ANY DEVIATION IN THE OVERALL PROJECTION FROM THE SPECIFIED DESIGN
DATA SHALL BE MADE ONLY AFTER OBTAINING PRIOR APPROVAL FROM EIL.
3. FLANGES MAY BE FORGED INTEGRALLY WITH S.R. NOZZLE NECK.
4. I.D. OF FORGING SHALL BE AS SPECIFIED ON ENGG. DATA SHEET.
* 5. APPLICABLE FOR ASME SEC. VIII DIV.1 EQUIPMENT ONLY.
6. ALL SHARP CORNERS SHALL BE ROUNDED—OFF SMOOTH.
4 31.10.2016 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD JIT SINGHlk' SK/KJH R it2 RN

3 23.05.2011 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD POREL RKT
No. by by
Approved by
Page 1814 of 1823
STANDARD No.
kliRe_Jelta ENGINEERS ALLOWABLE NOZZLE LOADS
4gestMegiiiir INDIA LIMITED
NWT MOW =JAM)
7-12-0038 Rev. 1
(A Go& of India UndeAtekno
Page 1 of 4
MC
y FL
NOTES: -
1. THIS STANDARD COVERS ALLOWABLE NOZZLE LOADS FOR PRESSURE VESSELS & COLUMNS ONLY.
2. EACH PROCESS NOZZLE OF VESSELS SHALL BE ANALYZED FOR THE LOADS PROVIDED IN THIS
STANDARD.
3. THESE LOADS SHALL BE CONSIDERED TO BE ACTING SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH INTERNAL/EXTERNAL
DESIGN PRESSURE. ALLOWABLE STRESS SHALL BE AS PER APPLICABLE DESIGN CODE.
4. STRESS CALCULATIONS SHALL BE CARRIED OUT AS PER WRC BULLETIN NO. 107/297. WRC 107
SHALL BE USED FOR NOZZLES ON DISHED ENDS AND WRC 297 SHALL BE USED FOR NOZZLES
ON CYLINDRICAL SHELL.
5. IN CASE OF FAILURE DUE TO WRC, FEM ANALYSIS / PD 5500 ANALYSIS CAN BE CARRIED
OUT TO ESTABLISH THE ADEQUACY OF PROVIDED CONFIGURATION.
QAVO
I
1 20 06 2019 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DP SK KJH 7 1/
0 31 07 14 ISSUED AS STANDARD GCP KA RKT SC

Rev
No by by
Approved by
Page 1815 of 1823

STANDARD No.
4a1ReitLithENGINEERS ALLOWABLE NOZZLE LOADS
L11 WesWINDIA LIMITED 7-12-0038 Rev. 1
Olen OMR MAWR) (A Govt of (Adis Unarming)
Page 2 of 4
CARBON STEEL AND LOW ALLOY STEEL EQUIPMENTS

(CLASS 150 AND CLASS 300)
NOZZLE
FA FL FC MT ML MC
SIZES
(Kgf) (Kgf) (Kgf) (Kgf-m) (Kgf-m) (Kgf-m)
(DN)
50 135 200 200 50 40 30
80 202 300 300 112 90 67
100 270 400 400 200 160 120
150 405 600 600 450 360 270
200 540 800 800 800 640 480
250 675 1000 1000 1250 1000 750
300 810 1200 1200 1800 1440 1080
350 945 1400 1400 2450 1960 1470
400 1080 1600 1600 3200 2560 1920
450 1215 1800 1800 4050 3240 2430
500 1350 2000 2000 5000 4000 3000
600 1620 2400 2400 7200 5760 4320
650 1755 2600 2600 8450 6760 5070
700 1890 2800 2800 9800 7840 5880
750 2025 3000 3000 11250 9000 6750
800 2160 3200 3200 12800 10240 7680
850 2295 3400 3400 14450 11560 8670
900 2430 3600 3600 16200 12960 9720
950 2565 3800 3800 18050 14440 10830
1000 2700 4000 4000 20000 16000 12000
1050 2835 4200 4200 22050 17640 13230
1100 2970 4400 4400 24200 19360 14520
1150 3105 4600 4600 26450 21160 15870
1200 3240 4800 4800 28800 23040 17280
1250 3375 5000 5000 31250 25000 18750
1300 3510 5200 5200 33800 27040 20280
1350 3645 5400 5400 36450 29160 21870
1400 3780 5600 5600 39200 31360 23520
1450 3915 5800 5800 42050 33640 25230
1500 4050 6000 6000 45000 36000 27000
1 20 06 2019 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DPW- Kriff KJH .c;k11 RKT
C

No by by
Approved by
Page 1816 of 1823

STANDARD No
ENGINERS
ligar0154-eg INDIA UNIFIED ALLOWABLE NOZZLE LOADS 7-12-0038 Rev 1
1102“ MOW .3411.4) (A Govt of Ind& UndestiVono
Page 3 of 4
CARBON STEEL AND LOW ALLOY STEEL EQUIPMENTS

(CLASS 600 AND ABOVE)
NOZZLE
FA FL FC MT ML MC
SIZES
(Kgf) (Kgf) (Kgf) (Kgf—m) (Kgf—m) (Kgf—m)
(DN)
50 168 250 250 62 50 37
80 253 375 375 140 112 84
100 337 500 500 250 200 150
150 506 750 750 562 450 337
200 675 1000 1000 1000 800 600
250 843 1250 1250 1562 1250 937
300 1012 1500 1500 2250 1800 1350
350 1181 1750 1750 3062 2450 1837
400 1350 2000 2000 4000 3200 2400
450 1518 2250 2250 5062 4050 3037
500 1687 2500 2500 6250 5000 3750
600 2025 3000 3000 9000 7200 5400
650 2193 3250 3250 10562 8450 6337
700 2362 3500 3500 12250 9800 7350
750 2531 3750 3750 14062 11250 8437
800 2700 4000 4000 16000 12800 9600
850 2868 4250 4250 18062 14450 10837
900 3037 4500 4500 20250 16200 12150
950 3206 4750 4750 22562 18050 13537
1000 3375 5000 5000 25000 20000 15000
1050 3543 5250 5250 27562 22050 16537
1100 3712 5500 5500 30250 24200 18150
1150 3881 5750 5750 33062 26450 19837
1200 4050 6000 6000 36000 28800 21600
1250 4218 6250 6250 39062 31250 23437
1300 4387 6500 6500 42250 33800 25350
1350 4556 6750 6750 45562 36450 27337
1400 4725 7000 7000 49000 39200 29400
1450 4893 7250 7250 52562 42050 31537
1500 5062 7500 7500 56250 45000 33750
1 20 06 2019 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DP "A KJH ti 404--

No by by
Approved by
Page 1817 of 1823

STANDARD No
4o11 fill4 ENGINEERS ALLOWABLE NOZZLE LOADS
ige.,fl Was VW INDIA LIMTED 7-12-0038 Rev. 1
OWN gimme =mow) (A Govt d kMia Undettaking)
Page 4 of 4
STAINLESS STEEL EQUIPMENTS

(ALL CLASSES)
NOZZLE FA FL FC MT ML MC
SIZES
(Kgf) (Kgf) (Kgf) (Kgf-m) (Kgf-m) (Kgf-m)
(DN)
50 135 200 200 50 40 20
80 202 300 300 112 90 45
100 270 400 400 200 160 80
150 405 600 600 450 360 180

200 540 800 800 800 640 320
250 675 1000 1000 1250 1000 500
300 810 1200 1200 1800 1440 720

350 945 1400 1400 2450 1960 980
400 1080 1600 1600 3200 2560 1280
450 1215 1800 1800 4050 3240 1620
500 1350 2000 2000 5000 4000 2000
600 1620 2400 2400 7200 . 5760 2880
650 1755 2600 2600 8450 6760 3380
700 1890 2800 2800 9800 7840 3920

750 2025 3000 3000 11250 9000 4500
800 2160 3200 3200 12800 10240 5120
850 2295 3400 3400 14450 11560 5780

900 2430 3600 3600 16200 12960 6480
950 2565 3800 3800 18050 14440 7220
1000 2700 4000 4000 20000 16000 8000
1050 2835 4200 4200 22050 17640 8820
1100 2970 4400 4400 24200 19360 9680
1150 3105 4600 4600 26450 21160 10580
1200 3240 4800 4800 28800 23040 11520

1250 3375 5000 5000 31250 25000 12500
1300 3510 5200 5200 33800 27040 13520
1350 3645 5400 5400 36450 29160 14580
1400 3780 5600 5600 39200 31360 15680
1450 3915 5800 5800 42050 33640 16820
1500 4050 6000 6000 45000 36000 18000
1 20 06 2019 REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS STANDARD DP KJH RKT

No by by
Approved by
Page 1818 of 1823

DOCUMENT No.
DEVIATION SCHEDULE FORMAT B378-101-80-44-DV-3011
(TECHNICAL) Rev A
Page 1 of 2
DEVIATION SCHEDULE FORMAT
(TECHNICAL)
PROJECT : 500KTA PDH-PP PROJECT
UNIT : PDH (Propane Dehydrogenation Unit)
OWNER : GAIL, USAR, MAHARASHTRA
CONSULTANT : ENGINEERS INDIA LTD.
JOB NO. : B378
A 29/10/2021 ISSUED WITH MR HS SS KS

Rev. Prepared Checked Approved
Date Purpose
No by by by
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1 Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 1819 of 1823

DOCUMENT No.
DEVIATION SCHEDULE
(TECHNICAL) B378-101-80-44-DV-3011 Rev A
Page 2 of 2
DEVIATION SCHEDULE – TECHNICAL

(Reactor Effluent Steam Generator Package (101-EE-1003))
(MR No.:B378-101-LZ-MR-7440)
Bidders are requested to mark “√” as applicable
 NO DEVIATION REQUIRED
 DEVIATION REQUIRED
List of deviations (exceptions and/ or additions requested by bidder) from

specification, standards and/ or drawings etc.
DOCUMENT(S)/ DRAWING(S)
Sl. No. DEVIATION PROPOSED
NO. AND TITLE PARAGRAPH/ CLAUSE/
DETAIL
NOTE: BIDDER TO FURNISH THIS DULY FILLED FORMAT ALONG WITH SEAL &
SIGN AT PRE-BID STAGE ONLY AND ANY DEVIATIONS APPEARING
ELSEWHERE SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED.
BIDDER’S NAME:
BIDDER’S SIGNATURE
AND SEAL/STAMP
DATE:
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1 Copyright EIL – All rights reserved
Page 1820 of 1823

CERTIFICATE FOR LOGISTIC SUPPORT
(TO BE SIGNED BY BIDDER'S PRINCIPAL CORPORATE LEVEL SIGNATORY ON COMPANY

LETTERHEAD)
1. We, M/s ________________________________________ confirm that the ………… Model No.

…………quoted by us (M/s ……………..) for GAIL PDH PP Project, Usar shall continue to be supported by
us. The quoted system shall not be withdrawn from Indian market as a matter of our Corporate Policy.
2. Further, we confirm that in case of Placement of Order by GAIL or its PMC to us, we shall provide Backup,
Engineering, Maintenance support and Spare parts support of complete system to GAIL for a period of
minimum 10 years from the Date of Placement of Order. After this period, if the production of Spare parts is
discontinued, we shall give at least twenty-four (24) months’ notice prior to such discontinuation.
3. Spares and services during aforesaid period will be directly supplied by us & not through our Authorized
representative/Channel partner/Dealer/ Stockist/Associates or representative.
4. After expiry of the Warranty Period, M/s………………will provide Expert Services Contract to GAIL on
Man-days Basis. The Man-days shall be consumed by GAIL on requirement basis.
(SIGNATURE WITH SEAL)
Page 1821 of 1823

ANNEXURE-1
FORMAT OF LETTER OF WAIVER
(TO BE SUBMITTED ON THE LETTER HEAD OF BIDDER)
TITLE OF WORKSISUPPLY:
BIDDINGDOCUMENTNO.
We.................................................................(*) hereby agree to fully comply with, abide by

and accept without variation, deviation or reservation all technical, commercial and other
conditions of the Bidding Document and its Technical & Commercial Amendments,
issued by ElL.
We confirm that during detailed engineering, we will review and recommend the required
Special tools & tackles and Commissioning spares, wherever specified in the enquiry
document and supply the same without any additional cost and time implication to
Purchaser.
We further hereby waive, with draw and abandon any and all assumptions, deviations,
variations, objections or reservations what so ever here to set out, given or indicated in our
offer, clarifications, correspondence, communications, or otherwise with a view that the
price bid and price implication (if any) submitted may be treated to conform to, in all
respects, with the terms and conditions of the said Bidding Document including all Technical
and Commercial Amendments.
**
For and on behalf of
Authorizedsignatory
Date:
*Here fill in the name of bidder.
**The Letter of Waiver must be signed by the person(s) authorized to sign.
Page 1822 of 1823

MANDATORY INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR FIELDBUS DEVICES
B378-000-16-51-OD-1001
Page 1 of 1
FF REGISTRATION DEVICE MANUFACTURING FIRMWARE DEVICE DD FILE CF FILE REV HIST TEST
SN TAG NO. MAKE MODEL ITK REV
PRODUCT CODE TYPE ID NO. REV H/W REV REV NO. COMPILATION
1
2
3
4
5
6
Notes:
(i) Vendor to ensure that for Fieldbus devices DD files and Device support files shall be in native format.
(ii) Vendor shall configure node address before shipment.
Page 1823 of 1823

Ed 03 20211230 180706

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ed 03 20211230 180706

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

Oge.il INDIA LIMITED HYDROGEN SERVICE VALVES 6-44-0052-A4 Rev.7

Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL — An rights reserved

Page 1201 of 1823

V171, 44-acno co(%- la

TECHNICAL NOTES FOR FLANGES,

REVISED & ISSUED AS STD V1:1

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 1202 of 1823

AARH Arithmetic Average Roughness Height

Piping Standards Committee

Convenor : Mr. M. Ismaeel

Members : Mr. Mr. Amrendra Kumar

Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 1203 of 1823

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0 Copyright EIL —All rights reserved

Page 1204 of 1823

Material Wall Thickness Weld Contour

Carbon Steel (Except Upto 22 mm Figure 2 Type A

Alloy Steel, Upto 10 mm Figure 4

> 25 mm Figure 6 Type A

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 1205 of 1823

Flange Material Min. Hardness of Groove (BHN)

Type 304L, 316L 150

1.12 NACE/HIC Requirements

1.14 I.G.C. Test for Stainless Steels:

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 1206 of 1823

1.17 AWWA C207 flanges shall be ring type.

2.0 IBR REQUIREMENTS

2.1 IBR Documentation

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 1207 of 1823

3.0 ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS

3.2 Flanges/Spectacle Blinds/Drip rings of Grades SS317 of corresponding material are

3.3 Flanges/Spectacle Blinds/Drip rings of Grades SS317L of corresponding material are

4.0 MARKING AND DESPATCH

Flange face Wood, metal or plastic cover

6-81-0001 Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at Supplier's

6-79-0013 Material requirements for carbon steel components used in sour

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL—All rights reserved

Page 1208 of 1823

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 1209 of 1823

fc5ftril * ro d al iii chi re.u4 ru NT

TECHNICAL NOTES FOR BUTT

7 20 01 20 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPECN Pt'AjV \M.)

5 31 12 13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPECN UK SH AK RN SC

4 04 07 08 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPECN

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 1210 of 1823

AARH Arithmetic AVerage Roughness Height

Piping Standards Committee

Convenor : Mr. M. Ismaeel

Members : Mr. Mr. Amrendra Kumar

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 1211 of 1823

Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0 Copyright EIL — All rights reserved

Page 1212 of 1823

Material Wall Thickness Weld Contour

Alloy Steel, Upto 10 mm Figure 4

1.7 Welded Fittings